Survey
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Download - McGraw
Document related concepts
no text concepts found
Transcript
M c G R AW - H I L L 2 0 0 9 C A T A L O G Welcome to McGraw-Hill’s 2009 Science, Allied Health & Emergency Services Catalog. Inside this catalog, you will find a wide selection of McGrawHill latest academic publications. Apart from those published from the US, we have also included publications from Asia as well as from our subsidiaries in Australia, India and United Kingdom. For the benefit of students, widely adopted textbooks are made available as low-priced McGraw-Hill International Editions (see titles in this catalog tagged with “International Edition”). EXAMINATION COPY REQUEST Teaching professionals who wish to consider McGraw-Hill titles for textbook adoption may request for an examination copy for review. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia (Note: All requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hill reserves the right to refuse any requests that do not relate to teaching). HOW TO ORDER McGraw-Hill books and International Editions are easily available through your local bookstores. In case of difficulty in purchasing our publications, please contact the local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover) or send your orders to: McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 60 Tuas Basin Link Singapore 638775 Tel: (65) 6863 1580 Tel: (65) 6868 8188 (Customer Service Hotline) Fax: (65) 6862 3354 Email: [email protected] A NOTE TO LIBRARIANS Please place your orders through your regular local Library Supplier/Contractor. For further assistance, kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) representative. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is continuously sourcing for quality manuscript for the academic and professional markets in Asia for inclusion in our global publishing program. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email us directly in Singapore at [email protected] if you are planning to write a book. MAILING LIST If you wish to receive up-to-date information on McGraw-Hill’s new publications regularly, please submit your particulars on the mailing list form (see back pages) and return to us by fax or mail. Your Partner in Test Generation Imagine being able to create and access your test anywhere, at any time without installing the testing software. Now, with the newest release of EZ Test Online, instructors can select questions from multiple McGraw-Hill test banks, author their own and then either print the test for paper distribution or give it online. Features and Functions N Test Creation N Online Test Management N Online Scoring and Reporting N EZ Test is designed to make it simple for you to select questions from McGraw-Hill test banks. You can use a single McGraw-Hill test bank, or easily choose questions from multiple McGraw-Hill test banks. N EZ Test supports the use of following question types: NTrue or False NFill In the Blank NYes or No NNumeric Response NMultiple Choice NMatching NCheck All That Apply NRanking NShort Answer NSurvey NEssay N Uses variables to create algorithmic questions for any question type. N You can create multiple versions of the same test. N You can scramble questions to create different versions of your test. N Automated scoring for most of EZ test’s numerous questions types. How do you get it? To learn if it is available with your book, contact your local McGraw-Hill Education Representatives or email [email protected]. a ris .mh h e .c o m Why ARIS? McGraw-Hill’s ARIS (Assessment, Review, and Instruction System) is an electronic homework and course management system designed for greater flexibility, power, and ease of use than any other system. Whether you are looking for a “ready-to-use, straight-out-of-the-box” system or one you can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is your smart solution. Flexibility Power Ease of Use ■ Choose pre-built assignments or create your own custom content and assignments. ■ Administer and share course sections with peers, adjuncts, parttimers and TAs. ■ Integrate ARIS with third-party course management systems, including Blackboard/WebCT™. ■ Set Mathematical tolerance standards for accepting alternative versions of a student’s correct answer. (This feature is only applicable to ARIS disciplines that utilize algorithmically generated questions, i.e., Chemistry, Physics and Engineering.) ■ Assign problems, videos, and other learning aids as homework. ■ Provide students with immediate feedback. ■ Know exactly where your students stand with robust gradebook reporting. ■ Save yourself and your students time and stress by enjoying the industry’s most intuitive user interface for electronic homework. ■ Help from our online technical support 24-hours a day, seven days a week. ARIS is available for the subjects in Anatomy & Physiology Astronomy Biology Chemistry Engineering Environmental Science Geography Geology Microbiology Nutrition Physics For More Information ■ Contact your local McGraw-Hill Higher Education sales representatives. ■ Visit aris.mhhe.com & click on the technical support tab. w w w. m a t h z o n e . c o m Why MathZone? McGraw-Hill’s MathZone is an electronic homework and course management system designed for greater flexibility, power, and ease of use than any other system. Whether you are looking for a “ready-to-use, straight-out-of-the-box” system or one you can customize to fit your specific course needs, MathZone is your smart solution. Flexibility Power Ease of Use ■ Set Mathematical tolerance standards for flexibility in accepting alternative versions of a student’s correct answer. ■ Choose pre-built assignments or create your own custom content and assignments. ■ Use the “Print” feature to create hard-copy versions of algorithmically generated quizzes and tests to hand out in class. ■ Allow students to print algorithmic assignments; work the math at their own pace using pencil and paper; and enter their answers at a later date. ■ Administer and share course sections with peers, adjuncts, parttimers and TAs. ■ Integrate MathZone with third-party course management systems, including Blackboard/WebCT™. ■ Know exactly where your students stand with robust gradebook reporting and individualized, assignable assessment powered by ALEKS®. ■ Assign problems, videos, and other learning aids as homework. Choose algorithmic problems from an entire library of McGraw-Hill titles. ■ Save yourself and your students time and stress by enjoying the industry’s most intuitive user interface for electronic homework. ■ Help from our online technical support 24-hours a day, seven days a week. MathZone is available for the subjects in Mathematics & Statistics For More Information ■ Contact your local McGraw-Hill Higher Education sales representatives. ■ Visit www.mathzone.com & click on the technical support tab. New Version Anatomy & Physiology REVEALED® Version 2.0 ISBN: 978-007-337807-7 CD-ROM ISBN: 978-007-337807-0 Online Anatomy &Physiology | REVEALED® Version 2.0 has the following new features: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ System selection menu enables easy switching between systems. Type-in “Google-like” search integrated across all body systems quickly locates information. Separate histology section contains labeled micrographs organized by system. All-new integumentary system module includes skin and fingernail dissections. Expanded skeletal system coverage offers images of individual bones, origin/insertion maps, and joint dissections. Larger viewing area maximizes structure visibility. Color-coded layer tags distinguish system-specific and reference structures. Directional labels clarify dissection views. Over 100,000 students are using Anatomy & Physiology | REVEALED® and recommending it to their friends! To see why, please visit www.aprevealed.com Anatomy &Physiology | REVEALED® Version 2.0 is a virtual cadaver dissection tool with animations and quizzes to help students succeed in any of the following courses: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Anatomy & Physiology Human Anatomy Human Physiology Human Biology Nursing ■ ■ Allied Health (Medical Assisting, Radiology Technician, Surgical Technician, Massage Therapy, Medical Billing, Medical Insurance, Medical Coding) Public Safety (Paramedic & Emergency Medical Technician) www.blackboard.com / www.webct.com course management systems Course Management Systems like Blackboard and WebCT offer you another way to integrate digital McGraw-Hill content into your class. McGrawHill Online Learning Center content is formatted to save you hours of computer inputting. How instructors use it Load McGraw-Hill content into your platform and you will have a fully populated course online. You can then customize the content to match your syllabus. You will also be able to assign specific exercises, quizzes, or readings to your students. Grades are posetd automatically to let you know how students are doing as a whole, or individually. Built-in communication allows you to conduct live chats, oversee bulletin board topics, and e-mail students who might need more help than others. How students use it Students can visit your online course via the Internet to check the coursework you have assigned. The platform will record the students’ progress through your course, which will enable you to see where they are studying most. Self-grading quizzes also indicate exactly where students need further review. The platform’s communicaiton system encourages student collaboration with features such as live chat rooms, asynchronous bulletin boards, or traditional e-mail. CONTENTS Agriculture & Forestry General Biology Non Majors & Majors Combined - Laboratory ....................................................................65 FORESTRY - Textbook ..................................................................... 63 Forest Resources .............................................................. 15 Human Biology AGRICULTURE - Laboratory ....................................................................69 Agricultural Business ......................................................... 15 - Textbook ...................................................................... 69 Agricultural Economics ...................................................... 16 Agricultural Education.........................................................16 Animal Science ...................................................................17 Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics Anatomy & Physiology Biotechnology .....................................................................90 Anatomy & Physiology - Supplements ............................... 39 Developmental Biology / Embryology ................................ 86 Histology ............................................................................ 50 General Genetics................................................................87 Human Anatomy Human Genetics .................................................................90 - Lab .............................................................................. 42 Immunology ........................................................................87 - Multimedia ................................................................... 45 Introductory Microbiology Laboratory ................................ 78 - Textbooks .................................................................... 40 Introductory Microbiology - Majors Text ............................ 73 Human Physiology Introductory Microbiology - Non Majors Text - Lab .............................................................................. 47 - Allied Health Emphasis................................................ 75 - Multimedia ................................................................... 49 Microbiology Printed - Supplements ...................................85 - Textbooks ................................................................... 46 Molecular Biology .............................................................. 86 One & Two - Semester Anatomy & Physiology Multimedia 37 STDs / AIDS ...................................................................... 85 One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab .............................................................................. 23 Nutrition - Textbooks ................................................................... 21 Pathophysiology ............................................................... 51 Introduction to Nutrition Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Multimedia ....................................................................97 - Lab .............................................................................. 28 - Supplements ............................................................... 97 - Textbooks .................................................................... 26 - Textbook ...................................................................... 93 Nutrition and Sport........................................................... 100 Nutrition Assessment ........................................................101 Biology Nutrition Through The Life Cycle Biology - Nutrition & Human Development ................................100 - Supplements ............................................................... 70 General Biology Majors - Laboratory ....................................................................67 - Textbook ...................................................................... 66 General Biology Non Majors - Laboratory ....................................................................61 - Textbook ...................................................................... 55 1 CONTENTS Plants & Animals Chemistry Animal Behavior .............................................................. 107 Allied Health/Nursing Chemistry (General, Organic and Bio- Botany (Economic) .......................................................... 106 chemistry) Botany - Non Majors - Lab Manuals .............................................................. 144 - Lab Manuals .............................................................. 106 - Supplements ..............................................................144 - Textbook .................................................................... 105 - Textbooks ................................................................. 142 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy.................................... 111 Analytical Chemistry ........................................................ 157 Invertebrate Biology......................................................... 109 Biochemistry -1 Semester - Textbooks .............................151 Marine Biology ..................................................................107 General Chemistry Parasitology ......................................................................108 - Lab .............................................................................150 Vertebrate Biology - Multimedia ..................................................................151 - Laboratory .................................................................. 110 - Supplements ..............................................................149 - Textbook .................................................................... 109 - Textbooks ...................................................................145 Zoology Liberal Arts Chemistry (Non Science Majors) - Textbooks 139 - Laboratory - Majors ................................................... 114 Organic Chemistry - 1 Semester - Textbooks ................... 152 - Textbook .................................................................... 112 Organic Chemistry - 2 Semester - Multimedia ..................................................................155 - Supplements ..............................................................154 Physics & Astronomy - Textbooks .................................................................. 153 Physical Chemistry College Physics ................................................................124 - Lab .............................................................................156 Conceptual Physics ......................................................... 123 - Supplements ..............................................................157 Electricity & Magnetism ................................................... 131 - Textbooks ................................................................. 156 Integrated Sciences ......................................................... 122 Prep/Basic Chemistry Introduction to Astronomy ................................................ 134 - Textbooks ................................................................. 140 Intro to Physical Science .................................................. 119 Mathematical Physics ...................................................... 131 Medical Physics ............................................................... 130 Modern Physics .............................................................. 130 Environmental Science & Ecology Optics ............................................................................. 133 Quantum Mechanics.........................................................132 Technical Physics ............................................................ 128 Ecology ............................................................................ 164 University Physics ........................................................... 129 - Laboratory ................................................................. 165 Environmental Science - Introductory Texts .......................................................161 Evolution .......................................................................... 165 2 CONTENTS Geography Medical Billing and Coding ............................................. 210 Medical Insurance ............................................................214 GIS ................................................................................. 169 Medical Law & Ethics ...................................................... 215 Human/Cultural Geography ..............................................170 Medical Office Procedures .............................................. 215 Intro to Geography........................................................... 170 Medical-Surgical Nursing..................................................216 Map Use/Cartography ..................................................... 172 Medical Terminology ........................................................ 218 Physical Geography Lab ..................................................171 Medical Terminology 1-Term.............................................221 World Regional Geography ..............................................173 Medical Terminology 2-Term.............................................223 Medical Terminology - Programmed Approach................. 225 Geology NCLEX..............................................................................227 Earth Science .................................................................. 177 Nursing Informatics...........................................................231 Environmental Geology ....................................................178 Nursing Issues and Trends .............................................. 230 Hazards/Natural Disasters............................................... 178 Nursing Leadership ..........................................................229 Historical Geology ........................................................... 179 Pediatric First Aid, CPR, AED ...........................................233 Oceanography ................................................................. 180 Pharmacology for Health Professions ..............................235 Paleontology .....................................................................181 Pharmacy Technician .......................................................236 Physical Geology Phlebotomy...................................................................... 237 Nursing .............................................................................232 - Laboratory ..................................................................183 Respiratory Care ..............................................................238 - Textbook .....................................................................181 Surgical Technology .........................................................239 Fire & Emergency Services Allied Health EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES Blood and Airborne Pathogens ........................................ 189 ACLS/Advanced Cardiac Life Support ............................ 250 BLS/CPR for the Professional Rescuer ............................ 189 EMT Basic ........................................................................244 Certification Exam Review for Medical Assisting ............. 190 EMT Paramedic ............................................................... 246 Computers in the Medical Office .................................... 190 First Responder ............................................................... 243 CPR and AED ...................................................................191 Homeland Security ...........................................................243 Critical Care Nursing ........................................................192 EKG/ECG/Electrocardiology............................................ 193 FIREFIGHTING ................................................................250 Electronic Medical Records ..............................................194 Certification Review for Firefighting ..................................251 Externship for Medical Assisting .......................................232 First Aid............................................................................ 195 Fundamentals of Nursing .................................................229 Dushkin/McGraw-Hill Titles ............................................................ 253 HIPAA ...............................................................................228 Massage/Business ...........................................................199 Massage/Clinical ..............................................................200 Massage/Reflexology .......................................................234 Indexes Massage Therapy .............................................................196 Math for Health Professions .............................................201 Author Indexes ................................................................ 265 Medical Assisting - Administrative and Clinical ................. 201 Title Indexes .....................................................................255 3 CONTENTS 4 NEW TITLES ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 2010 Author ISBN-13 Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Essentials Version, 5e Gunstream 9780077283766 23 Anatomy & Physiology with Integrated Study Guide, 4e Gunstream 9780077281533 21 Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Cat Version with PhILS 3.0 CD Martin 9780077274351 28 Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Pig Version with PhILS 3.0 CD Martin 9780077274368 30 Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Main Version with PhILS 3.0 CD Martin 9780077274344 31 Laboratory Manual Hole’s Human A&P (Cat), 12e Martin 9780077283773 32 Laboratory Manual Hole’s Human A&P Fetal Pig, 12e Martin 9780077283780 33 Laboratory Manual Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 7e Patton 9780077283759 24 Anatomy and Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 5e Saladin 9780077276201 26 Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 12e Shier 9780077276188 27 Seeley’s Principles of Anatomy & Physiology Tate 9780077226480 27 Seeley’s Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 7e VanPutte 9780077276195 21 Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Wise 9780077283797 34 2009 Author ISBN-13 Workbook to accompany Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Version 2 CD Broyles 9780073378145 25,35,42,48 Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e Eder 9780073525679 42 Fundamentals of Human Physiology Fox 9780077226350 46 Human Physiology, 11e Fox 9780077265878 46 Laboratory Guide to accompany Human Physiology, 13e Fox 9780073250632 47 Laboratory Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical and Experimental Approach Lutterschmidt 9780077229733 48 Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 10e Martin 9780072965674 25 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD-ROM (Allied Health Version) Medical Col. of Ohio 9780073378312 37 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Version 2.0 Online Medical Col. of Ohio 9780073378039 37,45,49 Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 10e Shier 9780077221355 22 Student Access Card PH.I.L.S (Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations) Online Stephens 9780073349329 38 Atlas of Skeletal Muscles, 6e Stone 9780073049687 43 Lab Manual to accompany Seeley’s Principles of Anatomy & Physiology Wise 9780077216900 35 Page Function, 5e ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Page with Ph.I.L.S. 3.0, 2e 5 NEW TITLES BIOLOGY 2010 Author ISBN-13 The Living World, 6e Johnson 9780077280086 55 Biology, 10e Mader 9780077274337 63 Essentials of Biology, 2e Mader 9780077280093 56 Human Biology, 11e Mader 9780077280116 69 Lab Manual Human Biology, 11e Mader 9780077235130 69 Lab Manual to accompany Biology, 10e Mader 9780077226176 65 Lab Manual to accompany Essentials of Biology, 2e Mader 9780077234256 61 2009 Author ISBN-13 Concepts in Biology, 13e Enger 9780077229962 57 Laboratory Manual to accompany Concepts in Biology, 13e Enger 9780073377926 62 Biology: Concepts and Investigations Hoefnagels 9780073342528 58 Concepts of Biology Mader 9780077229979 59 Lab Manual to accompany Concepts of Biology Mader 9780073292007 62 Page BIOLOGY Page CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS 2009 Author ISBN-13 Genetics: Analysis and Principles, 3e Brooker 9780077229726 87 Benson’s Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Brown 9780073522555 78 Brown 9780073522548 80 Laboratory Applications in Microbiology: A Case Study Approach Chess 9780073375250 81 Microbiology: A Systems Approach, 2e Cowan 9780077266868 75 Introduction to Genetics Hyde 9780073224817 88 Microbiology Experiments to accompany Microbiology, 6e Kleyn 9780072995497 82 Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 6e Nester 9780077250416 76 Aids Update 2009, 18e Stine 9780073527598 85 Aids Update 2008, 17e Stine 9780073375281 85 Foundations in Microbiology, 7e Talaro 9780077260576 76 Page Complete Version, 11e Benson’s Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 11e 6 NEW TITLES Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 7e Talaro 9780077263164 77 Prescott’s Principles of Microbiology Willey 9780077213411 73 2010 Author ISBN-13 Nutrition for Health, Fitness and Sport, 9e Williams 9780073375557 2009 Author ISBN-13 Wardlaw’s Perspectives in Nutrition, 8e Byrd-Bredbenner 9780077263201 93 NutritionCalc Plus 3.2 CD-ROM ESHA Research 9780077312435 97 NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 CD-ROM ESHA Research 9780073328652 98 NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 Online ESHA Research 9780073328645 99 Food Nutrition Guide/Food Composition Table MH Higher Education 9780073402567 99 Nutrition for Healthy Living Schiff 9780077224851 94 Contemporary Nutrition, 7e Wardlaw 9780077211660 95 Contemporary Nutrition: A Functional Approach Wardlaw 9780077227784 96 2010 Author ISBN-13 Biology of the Invertebrates, 6e Pechenik 9780073028262 2009 Author ISBN-13 Animal Diversity, 5e Hickman 9780072969450 112 Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 5e Hickman 9780073349251 114 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy: A Laboratory Dissection Guide, 5e Kardong 9780072970081 110 Vertebrates Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, 5e Kardong 9780073040585 109,111 General Zoology Laboratory Manual, 15e Lytle 9780073051628 115 Foundations of Parasitology, 8e Roberts 9780073028279 108 NUTRITION Page 100 NUTRITION Page PLANTS & ANIMALS Page 109 PLANTS & ANIMALS 7 Page NEW TITLES PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY 2010 Author ISBN-13 College Physics, 3e Giambattista 9780077263218 124 Physics, 2e Giambattista 9780077270674 125 The Physical Universe, 13e Krauskopf 9780077270704 119 2009 Author ISBN-13 Optics, 4e [India] Ghatak 9780070262157 133 Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 6e Griffith 9780073512112 123 Engineering Physics [India] Rajendran 9780070261037 128 Pathways to Astronomy, with Starry Nights Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 2e Schneider 9780077263119 134 Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 8e Tillery 9780073349190 121 Physical Science, 8e Tillery 9780077263133 120 2010 Author ISBN-13 A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry, 2e Bauer 9780077274306 140 Chemistry, 10e Chang 9780077274313 145 Principles of General Chemistry, 2e Silberberg 9780077274320 146 General, Organic & Biological Chemistry Smith 9780077274290 142 2009 Author ISBN-13 Chemistry in Context, 6e American Chemical 9780077221348 139 9780073048772 139 Page PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Page CHEMISTRY Page CHEMISTRY Page Society Laboratory Manual to accompany Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemistry to Society, 6e American Chemical Society Chemistry Burdge 9780077221324 146 Cooperative Chemistry Lab Manual, 4e Cooper 9780073050232 150 Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 8e Garland 9780072828429 156 University Chemistry Laird 9780077221331 147 8 NEW TITLES Physical Chemistry, 6e Levine 9780072538625 156 Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 5e Silberberg 9780077216504 148 2010 Author ISBN-13 Environmental Science, 12e Enger 9780073383200 161 Ecology: Concepts and Applications, 5e Molles 9780073383224 164 Ecology Lab Manual Vodopich 9780073383187 165 2009 Author ISBN-13 Principles of Environmental Science, 5e Cunningham 9780077270643 2010 Author ISBN-13 Introduction to Geographic Information Systems with Data Files CD-ROM, 5e Chang 9780077294366 169 Mastering ArcGIS with CD Videoclips, 4e Price 9780077293321 169 2009 Author ISBN-13 Contemporary World Regional Geography, 3e Bradshaw 9780073051505 173 Cartography: Thematic Map Design, 6e Dent 9780072943825 172 Introduction to Geography, 12e Getis 9780073522821 170 Physical Geography Laboratory Manual Lemke 9780077276034 171 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY Page ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY Page 162 GEOGRAPHY Page GEOGRAPHY 9 Page NEW TITLES GEOLOGY 2010 Author ISBN-13 Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 7e Jones 9780073369396 2009 Author ISBN-13 Natural Disasters, 7e Abbott 9780073376691 178 Physical Geology: Earth Revealed, 8e Carlson 9780073376677 181 Introduction to the Worlds Ocean, 10e Sverdrup 9780073376707 180 Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 14e Zumberge 9780073051499 183 2010 Author ISBN-13 Math & Dosage Calculations for Health Careers, 3e Booth 9780077290498 201 Math for the Pharmacy Technician Egler 9780077290504 236 Coding Review for National Certification: Passing the CPC and CCS-P Exams Harmon 9780073373980 210 Medical Office Handbook Harrison 9780073374130 201,215 Law & Ethics for Medical Careers, 5e Judson 9780073402062 215 McGraw-Hill Learnsmart: Medical Terminology MH Allied Health 9780073374765 218,221,223 Page 183 GEOLOGY Page ALLIED HEALTH Page 225 Pharmacy Technician: Practice and Procedures with Student CD Orum-Alexander 9780077302368 237 Case Studies for the Medical Office: Capstone Billing Simulation, 5e Sanderson 9780073402000 190,211 Building Healthy Business: For Massage and Alternative Healthcare Practices Saeger 9780073401911 199 Medical Terminology Audio CD-ROM, 3e Thierer 9780077330675 218 Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care with Student CD-Roms and Audio Thierer 9780077302344 218,223 CDs, 3e 10 NEW TITLES ALLIED HEALTH 2009 Author ISBN-13 Administrative Procedures for Medical Assisting for Student CD, 3e Booth 9780073261270 202 Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology for Allied Health, 2e Booth 9780073373959 196,203,211 Page 219 Clinical Procedures for Medical Assisting with Student CD, 3e Booth 9780073259871 204 Medical Assisting: Administrative and Clinical Competencies with Student CD-ROMs, 3e Booth 9780073259888 205 Medical Assisting: Administrative and Clinical Procedures (without A&P Chapters), 3e Booth 9780077243265 206 Phlebotomy for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e Booth 9780073309774 207,237 BLS Review+ DVD Delve Productions Inc 9780073522043 189 Electronic Health Records Hamilton 9780077280208 194 Clinical Massage Therapy: Assessment and Treatment of Orthopedic Conditions Jurch 9780073510934 196,200 Hospital Billing, 2e Magovern 9780073520896 212 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed (Allied Health Version) Medical Col. of Ohio 9780073378312 197,229,232 ACTIVSim: Medical Assisting Clinical Simulator MH Allied Health 9780073374192 208,232 Medical Assisting Review: Passing the CMA, RMA & CCMA Exams with Student CD, 3e Moini 9780073309798 190,208,233 HIPAA For Allied Health Careers Newby 9780073374123 209,214,228 Bloodborne and Airborne Pathogens, 2e NSC 9780073382883 189 Child and Infant CPR Skills Card NSC 9780073382937 233 CPR & AED, 3e NSC 9780077290511 191 CPR & AED Skills Card NSC Certification Edition, 2e NSC 9780073519876 192 First Aid Skills Card NSC 9780073382920 195 First Aid with Pocket Guide, Updated Edition, 3e NSC 9780077294410 195 Standard First Aid, CPR & AED with Quick Guide, Updated 2e NSC 9780077292744 192 The Complete Diagnosis Coding Book Safian 9780073373942 212 You Code It! A Case Studies Workbook Safian 9780073374024 213 Computers in the Medical Office, 6e Sanderson 9780073401997 191 Practical Reflexology: Interpretation and Techniques Watson 9780073510958 198,234 11 NEW TITLES FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES 2009 Author ISBN-13 Emergency Medical Technician with Pocket Guide Aehlert 9780073206448 244 The Paramedic Chapleau 9780073520711 246 BLS Review+ DVD Delve Productions Inc 9780073522043 245 The Paramedic Companion: A Case-Based Worktext Hsieh 247 12 9780073202655 Page AGRICULTURE Agricultural Business ......................................................................................... 15 Agricultural Economics ...................................................................................... 16 Agricultural Education.........................................................................................16 Animal Science ...................................................................................................17 13 AGRICULTURE & FORESTRY FORESTRY Forest Resources .............................................................................................. 15 NEW TITLES 14 AGRICULTURE & FORESTRY Forestry Agriculture Forest Resources Agricultural Business International Edition International Edition FARM MANAGEMENT 6th Edition GIS APPLICATIONS IN FORESTRY AND NATURAL RESOURCES By Pete Bettinger, Oregon State University 2004 / 256 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256242-2 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121590-9 [IE] By Ronald Kay, Texas A&M University 2008 (April 2007) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125953-8 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci www.mhhe.com/kay6 This text was developed for the first course in Farm Management, typically taken by a junior/senior level student. It was designed to introduce students to the key concepts on how to effectively manage a farm business. The sixth edition provides students with the basic information needed to measure management performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of the farm business. CONTENTS 1 GIS Data Structures 2 GIS Databases 3 MapsTablesSpatial Analyses 4 Forest Thinning Opportunities 5 Delineating Variable Width Riparian Areas 6 Buffer Owl Nest Sites 7 Forest Fertilization Plan 8 Forest Pruning Plan 9 Recreation Opportunity Spectrum 10 Land Classification 11 Integration of GIS and Forest Inventories 12 Soil Loss Potential 13 Tactical Issues with Forest Harvest Schedule CONTENTS 1 Management 1 Farm Management in the Twenty-First Century 2 Management 2 Measuring Management Performance 3 Acquiring and Organizing Management Information 4 Depreciation and Asset Valuation 5 The Balance Sheet and Its Analysis 6 The Income Statement and Its Analysis 3 Developing Basic Management Skills 7 Economic Principles--Choosing Production Levels 8 Economic Principles--Choosing Input and Output Combinations 9 Cost Concepts in Economics 10 Enterprise Budgeting 11 Partial Budgeting 12 Whole-Farm Planning 13 Cash Flow Budgeting 4 Improving Management Skills 14 Forms of Farm Business Organization 15 Managing Risk and Uncertainty 16 Managing Income Taxes 17 Investment Analysis 18 Farm Business Analysis 5 Acquiring Resources for Management 19 Capital and the Use of Credit 20 Land--Control and Use 21 Human Resource Management 22 Machinery Management Appendix INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 15 AGRICULTURE & FORESTRY Agricultural Economics Agricultural Education International Edition International Edition FARM MANAGEMENT 6th Edition FARM MANAGEMENT 6th Edition By Ronald Kay, Texas A&M University 2008 (April 2007) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125953-8 [IE] By Ronald Kay, Texas A&M University 2008 (April 2007) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125953-8 [IE] www.mhhe.com/kay6 www.mhhe.com/kay6 This text was developed for the first course in Farm Management, typically taken by a junior/senior level student. It was designed to introduce students to the key concepts on how to effectively manage a farm business. The sixth edition provides students with the basic information needed to measure management performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of the farm business. This text was developed for the first course in Farm Management, typically taken by a junior/senior level student. It was designed to introduce students to the key concepts on how to effectively manage a farm business. The sixth edition provides students with the basic information needed to measure management performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of the farm business. CONTENTS CONTENTS 1 Management 1 Farm Management in the Twenty-First Century 2 Management 2 Measuring Management Performance 3 Acquiring and Organizing Management Information 4 Depreciation and Asset Valuation 5 The Balance Sheet and Its Analysis 6 The Income Statement and Its Analysis 3 Developing Basic Management Skills 7 Economic Principles--Choosing Production Levels 8 Economic Principles--Choosing Input and Output Combinations 9 Cost Concepts in Economics 10 Enterprise Budgeting 11 Partial Budgeting 12 Whole-Farm Planning 13 Cash Flow Budgeting 4 Improving Management Skills 14 Forms of Farm Business Organization 15 Managing Risk and Uncertainty 16 Managing Income Taxes 17 Investment Analysis 18 Farm Business Analysis 5 Acquiring Resources for Management 19 Capital and the Use of Credit 20 Land--Control and Use 21 Human Resource Management 22 Machinery Management Appendix 1 Management 1 Farm Management in the Twenty-First Century 2 Management 2 Measuring Management Performance 3 Acquiring and Organizing Management Information 4 Depreciation and Asset Valuation 5 The Balance Sheet and Its Analysis 6 The Income Statement and Its Analysis 3 Developing Basic Management Skills 7 Economic Principles--Choosing Production Levels 8 Economic Principles--Choosing Input and Output Combinations 9 Cost Concepts in Economics 10 Enterprise Budgeting 11 Partial Budgeting 12 Whole-Farm Planning 13 Cash Flow Budgeting 4 Improving Management Skills 14 Forms of Farm Business Organization 15 Managing Risk and Uncertainty 16 Managing Income Taxes 17 Investment Analysis 18 Farm Business Analysis 5 Acquiring Resources for Management 19 Capital and the Use of Credit 20 Land--Control and Use 21 Human Resource Management 22 Machinery Management Appendix 16 AGRICULTURE & FORESTRY Animal Science International Edition ANIMAL SCIENCES The Biology, Care, and Production of Domestic Animals, 4th Edition By John R. Campbell, Oklahoma State U—Oklahoma City, M. Douglas Kenealy, Iowa State University and Karen L. Campbell, University of Illinois-Urbana-Champaign 2003 / 528 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366175-9 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121732-3 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/campbell CONTENTS 1 Animal Agriculture 2 Breeds and Life Cycles of Livestock and Poultry 3 Animal Products 4 Companion Animals 5 Horses 6 Aquaculture 7 State of Being of Domestic Animals 8 Fundamental Principles of Genetics 9 Principles of Selecting and Mating Farm Animals 10 Anatomy and Physiology of Farm Animals 11 The Application of Endocrinology to Selected Animals and Humans 12 The Physiology of Growth and Senescence 13 Anatomy and Physiology of Reproduction and Related Technologies in Farm Mammals 14 Artificial Insemination 15 Physiology of Lactation 16 Physiology of Egg Laying 17 Ecology and Environmental Physiology 18 Principles of Nutrition: Plant and Animal Composition 19 The Physiology of Digestion in Nutrition 20 The Nutritional Application of Vitamins to Human and Animal Health 21 The Nutritional Contributions of Minerals to Humans and Animals 22 Animal Disease and the Health of Humans 23 Selected Insects and Parasites of Significance to Humans and Animals 24 Ethology and Animal Behavior Appendix A: Common Terms or Names Applied to Selected Farm Animals Appendix B: Convenient Conversion Data Appendix C: Tables of Weights and Measures Appendix D: Agricultural Colleges and Experiment Stations in the United States and Its Territories Appendix E: Alphabetical List of Elements and Symbols COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 17 AGRICULTURE & FORESTRY 18 19 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Anatomy & Physiology - Supplements ...............................................................39 Histology ............................................................................................................ 50 Human Anatomy - Lab .............................................................................................................. 42 - Multimedia ................................................................................................... 45 - Textbooks .................................................................................................... 40 Human Physiology - Lab .............................................................................................................. 47 - Multimedia ................................................................................................... 49 - Textbooks ................................................................................................... 46 One & Two - Semester Anatomy & Physiology Multimedia ................................37 One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab .............................................................................................................. 23 - Textbooks ................................................................................................... 21 Pathophysiology ............................................................................................... 51 Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab .............................................................................................................. 28 - Textbooks .................................................................................................... 26 NEW TITLES ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 2010 Author ISBN-13 Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Essentials Version, 5e Gunstream 9780077283766 23 Anatomy & Physiology with Integrated Study Guide, 4e Gunstream 9780077281533 21 Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Cat Version with PhILS 3.0 CD Martin 9780077274351 28 Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Pig Version with PhILS 3.0 CD Martin 9780077274368 30 Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Main Version with PhILS 3.0 CD Martin 9780077274344 31 Laboratory Manual Hole’s Human A&P (Cat), 12e Martin 9780077283773 32 Laboratory Manual Hole’s Human A&P Fetal Pig, 12e Martin 9780077283780 33 Laboratory Manual Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 7e Patton 9780077283759 24 Anatomy and Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 5e Saladin 9780077276201 26 Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 12e Shier 9780077276188 27 Seeley’s Principles of Anatomy & Physiology Tate 9780077226480 27 Seeley’s Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 7e VanPutte 9780077276195 21 Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Wise 9780077283797 34 2009 Author ISBN-13 Workbook to accompany Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Version 2 CD Broyles 9780073378145 25,35,42,48 Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e Eder 9780073525679 42 Fundamentals of Human Physiology Fox 9780077226350 46 Human Physiology, 11e Fox 9780077265878 46 Laboratory Guide to accompany Human Physiology, 13e Fox 9780073250632 47 Laboratory Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical and Experimental Approach Lutterschmidt 9780077229733 48 Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 10e Martin 9780072965674 25 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD-ROM (Allied Health Version) Medical Col. of Ohio 9780073378312 37 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Version 2.0 Online Medical Col. of Ohio 9780073378039 37,45,49 Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 10e Shier 9780077221355 22 Student Access Card PH.I.L.S (Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations) Online Stephens 9780073349329 38 Atlas of Skeletal Muscles, 6e Stone 9780073049687 43 Lab Manual to accompany Seeley’s Principles of Anatomy & Physiology Wise 9780077216900 35 Page Function, 5e ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Page with Ph.I.L.S. 3.0, 2e 20 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks Part 4 Maintenance of the Body 11 Blood 12 Heart and Blood Vessels 13 Lymphatic System and Defenses Against Disease 14 Respiratory System 15 Digestive System 16 Urinary System Part 5 Reproduction 17 Reproductive Systems 18 Pregnancy, Prenatal Development, and Genetics Part 6 Study Guides Appendix A Keys to Medical Terminology Appendix B Answers to Check Your Understanding Questions NEW ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY WITH INTEGRATED STUDY GUIDE 4th Edition NEW International Edition By Stanley E Gunstream, Pasadena City College SEELEY’S ESSENTIALS OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 7th Edition 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-728153-3 Designed for an introductory, one-semester course, the scope, organization, writing style, depth of presentation, and pedagogical aspects of this text have been tailored to meet the needs of students preparing for a career in allied health. This text does not assume any prior science knowledge on the part of the student and effectively presents students with the fundamentals of anatomy and physiology. It’s the only onesemester text available with a built-in study guide/workbook. NEW TO THIS EDITION Portions of all chapters have been rewritten to update or clarify the subject matter, and new art has been added, or existing art modified, to correspond with the improved text. End-of-chapter questions and the Study Guide have been modified to correspond to these changes. These improvements will enhance student understanding of basic human anatomy and physiology. Significant areas of updating and clarification include the following. Chapter 1: the role of negative feedback in regulating homeostasis. Chapter 12: the regulation of cardiac output and the exchange of materials between blood in capillaries and tissue cells. By Cinnamon VanPutte, Southwestern Illinois College, Jennifer Regan, Jones County Jr College and Andrew F Russo, University of Iowa-Iowa City 2010 (February 2009) / 704 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-727619-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-018182-3 [IE] Designed for the one-semester course, Seeley’s Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology is written to allow instructors the ability to accomplish one overall goal: to teach the basics of A&P while fostering the skill of problem solving. Through learning how to solve problems and think critically, students learn A&P based on two themes: the relationship between structure and function, and homeostasis. NEW TO THIS EDITION Improved Art- The effectiveness of the art has been improved in several ways in this edition with the overall goal of clarifying the teaching point of each revised illustration. Homeostasis Figures have been markedly improved by adding visual representations of key anatomical references and simplifying the arrows and text. A “Start Here” icon and color-coded arrows make it easier to follow the events occurring when a variable increases or decreases. These simplified flow charts succinctly map out key homeostatic events, giving students a quick and effective summary of the mechanisms described in the text. Chapter 13: the mechanisms of immunity. Chapter 15: the microscopic structure of the liver and liver function. Chapter 16: the regulation of glomerular filtration rate and the movement of materials between the renal tubule and the peritubular capillary. The Process Figures have been fine-tuned by adding numbered circles to the explanations within the art, allowing students to make easier correlations to each important step within the illustration. Process Figures provide well-organized, self-contained visual explanations of how physiological mechanisms work. They help students learn physiological processes by combining illustrations with parallel descriptions of the major features of each process. Chapter 17: the hormonal regulation of reproduction. CONTENTS Part 1 Organization of the Body 1 Introduction to the Human Body 2 Chemical Aspects of Life 3 Cell 4 Tissues and Membranes Part 2 Covering, Support, and Movement of the Body 5 Integumentary System 6 Skeletal System 7 Muscular System Part 3 Integration and Control 8 Nervous System 9 Senses 10 Endocrine System Numerous changes to improve consistency and clarification were also made to art pieces. “Diseases and Disorders” Tables – Short, beneficial descriptions of various system disorders can now be found in an easy-to-use table placed conveniently in appropriate chapters. Clinical material like these tables is a hallmark of this text, and combined with the “Case in Point” boxes, the “Clinical Impact” readings, the “Systems Pathology” material, and the unique “Predict” questions, helps students bridge the two worlds of academia and their future allied health careers. 21 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Refined and Updated Textual Copy- The authors have used their own, and read other’s, research and papers to stay on top of new discoveries relevant to the field of anatomy and physiology. They’ve also used reviews from instructors who teach the course to keep in touch with the various challenges facing professors today. Finally, a developmental copyeditor was brought into the early stages of the revision to ensure the quality, accuracy, and consistency of the text. Some examples of this attention to detail follow: NEW International Edition HOLE’S ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 10th Edition Many explanations have been rewritten or expanded to make topics easier for students to understand. By using examples students can relate to, many explanations have been made clearer. By David N. Shier, Washtenaw Community College, Jackie l. Butler, Grayson County College and Ricki Lewis, Contributing Editor, “The Scientist” Terminology has been made more consistent throughout both the text and the illustrations. New information applicable to the discipline has been researched and included where appropriate. Factual data has been checked and updated, or corrected, if necessary. 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722135-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-128352-6 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/shieress10 Designed for the one-semester anatomy and physiology course, Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy and Physiology assumes no prior science knowledge and supports core topics with clinical applications, making difficult concepts relevant to students pursuing careers in the allied health field. The unparalleled teaching system is highly effective in providing students with a solid understanding of the important concepts in anatomy and physiology. CONTENTS 1 Human Organism 2 Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cell Structures and Their Functions 4 Tissues, Glands, and Membranes 5 Integumentary System 6 Skeletal System: Bones and Joints 7 Muscular System 8 Nervous System 9 Senses 10 Endocrine System 11 Blood 12 Heart 13 Blood Vessels and Circulation 14 Lymphatic System and Immunity 15 Respiratory System 16 Digestive System 17 Nutrition, Metabolism, and Body Temperature Regulation 18 Urinary System and Fluid Balance 19 Reproductive System 20 Development, Heredity, and Aging Appendixes A Table of Measurements B Some Reference Laboratory Values C Solution Concentrations D Answers to Critical Thinking Questions NEW TO THIS EDITION An Outcomes and Assessments format has been incorporated throughout the text. The chapter starts with a list of outcomes for instructors and students. Outcomes and then directly tied to assessments found at the end of the chapter. A new section called “Foundations for Success” has been added to the beginning of the text. This section was specifically designed to help students LEARN how to study at the collegiate level and efficiently use the tools available to them. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS for “Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology” is a complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Free on adoption of “Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology”, instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms [if applicable], import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated [if applicable] homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. Anatomy and Physiology Revealed (APR)! This multimedia tool is designed to help students learn and review using a virtual human cadaver! Detailed cadaver photos layered upon one another provide an interactive dissection experience! Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes 4 major areas: dissections, animations, imaging, anatomy terms and an incredible self testing program. All sections combine to make study time efficient and lectures unforgettable. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia APR Correlation Guide to assist instructors by giving them information specific to this text. CONTENTS Unit 1 Levels of Organization 1 Introduction to Human Anatomy and Physiology 2 Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cells 4 Cellular Metabolism 5 Tissues Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 22 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Unit 2 Support and Movement 6 Integumentary System 7 Skeletal System 8 Muscular System Unit 3 Integration and Coordination 9 Nervous System 10 The Senses 11 Endocrine System Unit 4 Transport 12 Blood 13 Cardiovascular System 14 Lymphatic System and Immunity Unit 5 Absorption and Excretion 15 Digestion and Nutrition 16 Respiratory System 17 Urinary System 18 Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance Unit 6 The Human Life Cycle 19 Reproductive Systems 20 Pregnancy, Growth, and Development 19 Human Genetics Appendix A Reference Figures: The Human Organism Appendix B Understanding Medical Terminology One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab NEW ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY TEXTBOOK Essentials Version, 5th Edition International Edition MADER’S UNDERSTANDING HUMAN ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 6th Edition By Susannah Longenbaker, Columbus State 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-328886-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-110208-7 [IE] By Stanley E Gunstream, Pasadena City College Community College 2010 (February 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-728376-6 http://aris.mhhe.com Renowned for her effective learning systems, respected author Sylvia Mader has helped thousands of entry-level students understand and enjoy the principles of human anatomy and physiology. Now, Susannah Longenbaker is building on Dr. Mader’s format and engaging writing style while adding her own personal touch to this successful title. The writing is still clear, direct and user-friendly, but is now enriched with new clinical information, terminology and classroom-tested features such as “Focus on Forensics” readings and in-text “Content Check-Up” questions. Drawing on over twenty years of teaching experience, Sue Longenbaker writes for the next generation of students that will learn anatomy and physiology from this classic textbook. CONTENTS Gunstream’s manual presents the fundamentals of human anatomy and physiology in an easy-to-read manner appropriate for allied health students. Designed especially for a one-semester course, the Essentials Version features a concise writing style, 37 self-directing exercises, full-color photomicrographs in the Histology Atlas, and numerous illustrations in each exercise. NEW TO THIS EDITION The art program has been substantially improved with new illustrations and, in addition, many existing figures have been upgraded. The text and laboratory reports have been rewritten to correlate with the figure changes. These improvements will enhance clarity and student understanding. Instructors have a choice of two popular computer-based laboratory systems to investigate muscle physiology. Exercise 20 The Physiology of Muscle Contraction Using the BIOPAC Student Lab System has been designed for those using the BIOPAC system. Exercise 21 The Physiology of Muscle Contraction Using the Intelitool Physiogrip has been updated for those using the Intelitool system. Both of these exercises guide the student through the computer protocols so they may focus on the physiology of muscle contraction. Part I Human Organization 1 Organization of the Body 2 Chemistry of Life 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Body Tissues and Membranes Part II Support and Movement 5 The Integumentary System 6 The Skeletal System 7 The Muscular System Part III Integration and Coordination 8 The Nervous System 9 The Sensory System 10 The Endocrine System Part IV Maintenance of the Body 11 Blood 12 The Circulatory System 13 The Lymphatic System and Body Defense 14 The Respiratory System 15 The Digestive System 16 The Urinary System and Excretion Part V Reproduction and Development 17 The Reproductive System 18 Human Development and Birth Exercise 37 The Endocrine Glands has been reorganized with a reduction in the histology figures. Expanded coverage now includes thymosin and T-cell maturation, calcitonin and parathyroid hormone maintaining calcium balance, and adrenal sex steroids. In Exercise 28 The Heart, coverage now includes coronary arteries and veins so students will have a better understanding of heart circulation as it relates to clinical situations. CONTENTS Part 1 Fundamentals 1 Introduction to Human Anatomy 2 Body Organization 3 The Microscope 4 Cell Anatomy 23 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 5 Mitotic Cell Division 6 Diffusion and Osmosis 7 Epithelial and Connective Tissues 8 The Integument Part 2 The Skeletal System 9 The Skeletal Plan 10 The Skull 11 The Vertebral Column and Thorax 12 The Appendicular Skeleton 13 Articulations Part 3 The Muscle System 14 Muscle Organization and Body Movements 15 Head and Trunk Muscles 16 Muscles of the Upper Limb 17 Muscles of the Lower Limb 18 Muscle and Nerve Tissues 19 The Nature of Muscle Contraction 20 The Physiology of Muscle Contraction: Using the BIOPAC Student Lab System 21 The Physiology of Muscle Contraction: Using the Intelitool Physiogrip (TM) Part 4 The Nervous System 22 The Spinal Cord and Reflex Arcs 23 Brain Anatomy: External 24 Brain Anatomy: Internal 25 The Eye 26 The Ear Part 5 The Circulatory System 27 Blood Tests 28 The Heart 29 Blood Vessels, Fetal Circulation, and Lymphatic System 30 Cardiovascular Phenomena Part 6 The Respiratory System 31 The Respiratory Organs 32 Respiratory Physiology Part 7 The Digestive System 33 The Digestive Organs 34 Digestion Part 8 The Urinary System 35 The Urinary Organs 36 Urine and Urinalysis Part 9 The Endocrine and Reproductive Systems 37 The Endocrine Glands 38 The Reproductive Organs Histology Atlas Laboratory Reports Appendices NEW LABORATORY MANUAL ESSENTIALS OF ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 7th Edition By Kevin T Patton, Saint Charles Community College 2010 (February 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-728375-9 Kevin Patton divides the lab activities typically covered in A&P lab into 42 subunits, allowing instructors the flexibility to choose the units and sequence that integrates with lecture material. Basic content is introduced first, and gradually more complex activities are developed. Features include procedure check lists, coloring exercises, boxed hints, safety alerts, separate lab reports, and a full-color histology mini-reference. FEATURES Written in an easy-to-understand step-by-step format that allows students to focus on lab activities, not on reading. Includes clinical examples and other practical applications that help improve critical thinking skills. Emphasizes a multi-sensory approach to learning. Flexible activities can be adapted for different types and availability of equipment and specimens. The Instructor’s Manual (available online) includes alternate activities and demonstrations, individual and global supply lists, supply sources, specific teaching hints, answers to questions, and more. CONTENTS Welcome to Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory Histology Mini-reference The Basics 1 The Microscope 2 Cell Anatomy 3 Transport through Cell Membranes 4 The Cell’s Life Cycle 5 Epithelial Tissue 6 Connective Tissue 7 Muscle and Nerve Tissue 8 Organization of the Body Support and Movement 9 The Skin 10 Overview of the Skeleton 11 The Skull 12 The Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 13 The Appendicular Skeleton 14 Joints 15 Organization of the Muscular System 16 Muscle Identification 17 Muscular Contractions Integration and Control 18 Nerves and Reflexes 19 The Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 20 The Brain and Cranial Nerves 21 The Eye and Vision 22 The Ear, Hearing, and Equilibrium 23 Endocrine Glands 24 Hormones Regulation and Maintenance 25 Blood 26 Structure of the Heart 27 Electrical Activity of the Heart INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 24 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 28 The Pulse and Blood Pressure 29 The Circulatory Pathway 30 The Lymphatic System and Immunity NEW LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HOLE’S ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 10th Edition NEW WORKBOOK TO ACCOMPANY ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2 CD By Terry R. Martin, Kishwaukee College 2009 (February 2008) / 384 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-296567-4 By Robert Broyles, Butler County Community College 2009 (January 2008) / 704 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337814-5 The Workbook to Accompany Anatomy and Physiology Revealed, Version 2 by Robert Broyles is a workbook/study guide designed to help students get the most they can out of the Anatomy and Physiology Revealed (APR), and out of their anatomy and physiology course. The Table of Contents closely follows both the new DVD set and the online adaptation, and is organized along the lines of a typical Anatomy and Physiology course. The individual exercises include art from APR and also have review questions, tables, coloring exercises, terminology quiz questions, and reminders on key content. This full-color manual is designed for students with minimal backgrounds in science who are pursuing careers in allied health fields. Designed to support the tenth edition of Hole’s Essentials of Human A&P by Shier, Butler, and Lewis, this manual contains 49 laboratory exercises and reports, which are integrated closely to the textbook. Exercises are planned to illustrate and review the anatomical and physiological facts and principles presented in the text and to help students investigate some of these ideas in greater detail. NEW TO THIS EDITION To meet the request of many professors, a NEW Genetics lab has been added. CONTENTS Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method and Measurements 2 Body Organization and Terminology 3 Chemistry of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and Function 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 Bone Structure 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Joint Structure and Movements Muscular System 19 Skeletal Muscle Structure 20 Muscles of the Face, Head, and Neck 21 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 22 Muscles of the Abdominal Wall and Pelvic Outlet 23 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb 24 Surface Anatomy Nervous System 25 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 26 Spinal Cord and Meninges 27 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 28 Brain and Cranial Nerves 29 Dissection of the Sheep Brain Special Senses 30 Ear and Hearing 31 Eye Structure NEW TO THIS EDITION A new chapter, Histology, has been added to this workbook, corresponding to the new content on histology in APR, Version 2. A new chapter, The Integumentary System, has been included in the workbook, correlating to the new section on the same in APR, Version 2. New content on articulations has been added to the chapter on the Skeletal System, reflecting similar updates to APR, Version 2. New content on insertions and origins has been included in The Muscular System chapter, based on new additions to APR, Version 2. More coloring exercises on structure are included in the workbook. All changes to the interface of version two of APR have consequently been noted and updated via directions to the student in the workbook. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction: Becoming Familiar with Anatomy and Physiology Revealed Chapter 2: Histology (Detailed information to come) Chapter 3: The Integumentary System (Detailed information to come) Chapter 4: The Skeletal System with Articulations (Detailed information on articulations to come) Chapter 5: The Muscular System Chapter 6: The Nervous System Chapter 7: The Cardiovascular System Chapter 8: The Lymphatic System Chapter 9: The Respiratory System Chapter 10: The Digestive System Chapter 11: The Urinary System Chapter 12: The Reproductive System Chapter 13: The Endocrine System 25 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 32 Visual Tests and Demonstrations Endocrine System 33 Endocrine Histology and Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System* 34 Blood Cells and Blood Typing 35 Heart Structure 36 Cardiac Cycle 37 Blood Vessel Structure, Arteries, and Veins 38 Pulse Rate and Blood Pressure Lymphatic System 39 Lymphatic System Digestive System 40 Digestive Organs 41 Action of a Digestive Enzyme Respiratory System 42 Respiratory Organs 43 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes and Capacities Urinary System 44 Kidney Structure 45 Urinalysis Reproductive System 46 Male Reproductive System 47 Female Reproductive System 48 Genetics *Supplemental Laboratory Exercise 49 Blood Testing--A Demonstration (this lab is available on the Shier text website at aris.mhhe.com) Appendix 1 Preparation of Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports knowledge of college chemistry or cell biology, and is designed for a two-semester A&P course. NEW TO THIS EDITION Chapter 20, The Circulatory System: Blood Vessels and Circulation has been reorganized with a regional approach--a more logical approach for students. Busy instructors can take advantage of a prepared set of assignable activities and practice quizzes that support the chapter learning objectives. Dr. Saladin methodically updated each chapter of the fifth edition based on reviewer feedback, the most current reference publications, and published research. Saladin’s stunning visuals are paired with Anatomy & Physiology Revealed’s acclaimed cadaver dissection photos and integrated into dynamic PowerPoint lecture presentations with embedded animations. Instructors can use the presentations as is or insert select slides into their existing lecture presentations. CONTENTS Part 1 Organization of the Body 1 Major Themes of Anatomy and Physiology Atlas A General Orientation to Human Anatomy 2 The Chemistry of Life 3 Cellular Form and Function 4 Genetics and Cellular Function 5 Histology Part 2 Support and Movement 6 The Integumentary System 7 Bone Tissue 8 The Skeletal System 9 Joints 10 The Muscular System Atlas B Surface Anatomy 11 Muscular Tissue Part 3 Integration and Control 12 Nervous Tissue 13 The Spinal Cord, Spinal Nerves, and Somatic Reflexes 14 The Brain and Cranial Nerves 15 The Autonomic Nervous System and Visceral Reflexes 16 Sense Organs 17 The Endocrine System Part 4 Regulation and Maintenance 18 The Circulatory System: Blood 19 The Circulatory System: The Heart 20 The Circulatory System: Blood Vessels and Circulation 21 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems 22 The Respiratory System 23 The Urinary System 24 Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance 25 The Digestive System 26 Nutrition and Metabolism Part 5 Reproduction and Development 27 The Male Reproductive System 28 The Female Reproductive System 29 Human Development Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks NEW International Edition ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY The Unity of Form and Function, 5th Edition By Kenneth S Saladin, Georgia College and State University 2010 (January 2009) / 1248 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-727620-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-128341-0 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/saladin5 Memorable stories must be effective in multiple ways. The story must paint a strong visual picture. The story must weave in tools to make the reader remember important events and understand their impact. Ken Saladin weaves graceful descriptions of human anatomy and physiology processes together with carefully selected clinical applications and fascinating stories from the history of medicine and evolutionary medicine to create a multi-layered story about the human body. A consistent set of chapter learning tools helps students identify and retain key concepts while the stunning visual program provides a realistic view of body structures and processes. The fifth edition is further improved by a complete integration of the text with extensive digital teaching and learning tools. Saladin’s text requires no prior 26 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 15 Cardiovascular System 16 Lymphatic System and Immunity Unit Five Absorption and Excretion 17 Digestive System 18 Nutrition and Metabolism 19 Respiratory System 20 Urinary System 21 Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance Unit Six The Human Life Cycle 22 Reproductive Systems 23 Pregnancy, Growth, and Development 24 Genetics and Genomics NEW International Edition HOLE’S HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 12th Edition By David N Shier, Washtenaw Community College, Jackie L Butler, Grayson County College and Ricki Lewis 2010 (January 2009) / 1056 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-727618-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-018186-1 [IE] NEW International Edition http://www.mhhe.com/shier12 Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology was created for the introductory level student and assumes no prior science knowledge by placing emphasis on the fundamentals. This new edition updates a great A&P classic while offering greater efficiencies to the user. The format for the 12th edition focuses on Learning Outcomes and Assessments. This will benefit the student along with the instructor. The 12th edition of Hole also continues to offer technology that combined with the text offer users an incredible Course Solution! Technology like Anatomy and Physiology Revealed and the new online Homework Manager bring unprecedented opportunities to the classroom whether on campus or at home! SEELEY’S PRINCIPLES OF ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY By Philip Tate, Phoenix College, Rod Seeley and Trent D Stephens of Idaho State University 2009 (January 2008) / 928 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-722648-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-128243-7 [IE] NEW TO THIS EDITION Learning Outcomes and Assessments – An Outcomes and Assessments format has been incorporated throughout the text. The chapter starts with a list of outcomes for instructors and students. Outcomes are then directly tied to assessments found at the end of the chapter. http://www.mhhe.com/tate Ancillary Correlation Guide – The authors have created a valuable ancillary correlation guide that will be available online. The guide will be organized by Learning Outcome. It will let instructors know what media or ancillary is available to support each specific Learning Outcome. Test Bank questions are being revised by the authors and will be correlated by Learning Outcome. This new textbook will compete in both the “slim” segment and the full two-semester market. It will be a briefer, less-expensive alternative for instructors who have always liked Seeley et al’s Anatomy and Physiology, but struggled with the depth of the textbook, covering all of the necessary basics of anatomy and physiology. NEW TO THIS EDITION Reviewers have described Tate’s writing style as concise and precise. Tate uses case studies plus critical thinking questions to help students apply concepts more efficiently as they read. The Instructor’s Manual has been revised and will be correlated to specific Learning Outcomes. Tate covers all key topics. Tate is complete, yet concise and precise. Updated Micrographs – many new micrographs and corresponding line art. I can see how you might think a brief text would exclude certain topics. CONTENTS Unit One Levels of Organization 1 Introduction to Human Anatomy and Physiology 2 Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cells 4 Cellular Metabolism 5 Tissues Unit Two Support and Movement 6 Integumentary System 7 Skeletal System 8 Joints of the Skeletal System 9 Muscular System Unit Three Integration and Coordination 10 Nervous System I: Basic Structure and Function 11 Nervous System II: Divisions of the Nervous System 12 Nervous System III: Senses 13 Endocrine System Unit Four Transport 14 Blood I can understand your concern. Phil Tate is one of the Seeley authors and this text does share many of the same excellent clinical examples and critical thinking applications that Seeley is known for. However, Phil re-wrote the Tate text from the ground-up to better meet the needs of today’s A&P course. CONTENTS 1. The Human Organism 2. The Chemical Basis of Life 3. Cell Structures and Their Functions 4. Tissues, Glands, and Membranes 5. Integumentary System 6. Histology and Physiology of Bones 7. Anatomy of Bones and Joints 8. Histology and Physiology of Muscles 9. Gross Anatomy and Functions of Muscles 10. Functional Organization of Nervous Tissue 11. Peripheral and Central Nervous Systems 27 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 12. Integration of Sensory and Motor Functions 13. Autonomic Nervous System 14. Special Senses 15. Endocrine System 16. Blood 17. Heart 18. Blood Vessels and Circulation 19. Lymphatic System and Immunity 20. Respiratory System 21. Digestive System 22. Nutrition, Metabolism, and Body Temperature 23. Urinary System and Fluid Balance 24. Reproductive System 25. Development, Growth, Aging, and Genetics 25 Nutrition, Metabolism, and Temperature Regulation 26 Urinary System 27 Water, Electrolytes, and Acid-Base Balance Part 5 Reproduction and Development 28 Reproductive System 29 Development, Growth, and Aging Appendix A Table of Measurements Appendix B Scientific Notation Appendix C Solution Concentrations Appendix D pH Appendix E Answers to Review and Comprehensive Questions Appendix F Answers to Critical Thinking Questions Appendix G Answers to Predict Questions Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab International Edition ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 8th Edition By Rod Seeley and Trent Stephens of Idaho State University and Philip Tate, Phoenix College 2008 (February 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-329368-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-110210-0 [IE] NEW http://aris.mhhe.com Seeley’s Anatomy and Physiology is problem solving when you need it! This text is designed to help students develop a solid, basic understanding of anatomy and physiology without an encyclopedic presentation of detail. Great care has been taken to select important concepts and to perfectly describe the anatomy of cells, organs, and organ systems. The plan that has been followed for eight editions of this text is to combine clear and accurate descriptions of anatomy with precise explanations of how structures function and examples of how they work together to maintain life. To emphasize the concepts of anatomy and physiology, the authors provide explanations of how the systems respond to aging, changes in physical activity, and disease, with a special focus on homeostasis and the regulatory mechanisms that maintain it. Timely and interesting examples demonstrate the application of knowledge in a clinical context. LABORATORY MANUAL FOR HUMAN ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Cat Version with PhILS 3.0 CD By Terry R Martin, Kishwaukee College 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727435-1 http://www.mhhe.com/martinseries1 CONTENTS Author Terry Martin’s thiry years of teaching anatomy and physiology courses, authorship of three laboratory manuals, and active involvement in the Human Anatomy and Physiology Society (HAPS) drove his determination to create a lab manual with an innovative approach that would benefit students. Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy and Physiology includes a cat version and a fetal pig version. Each of these versions includes sixty-one laboratorty exercises, supplemental labs found online, and six cat or fetal pig dissection labs. The Main Version contains no dissection exercises. All three versions are written to work well with any anatomy and physiology text. Part 1 Organization of the Human Body 1 The Human Organism 2 The Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cell Biology and Genetics 4 Histology: The Study of Tissues Part 2 Support and Movement 5 Integumentary System 6 Skeletal System: Bones and Bone Tissue 7 Skeletal System: Gross Anatomy 8 Articulations and Movement 9 Muscular System: Histology and Physiology 10 Muscular System: Gross Anatomy Part 3 Integration and Control Systems 11 Functional Organization of Nervous Tissue 12 Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 13 Brain and Cranial Nerves 14 Integration of Nervous System Functions 15 The Special Senses 16 Autonomic Nervous System 17 Functional Organization of the Endocrine System 18 Endocrine Glands Part 4 Regulations and Maintenance 19 Cardiovascular System: Blood 20 Cardiovascular System: The Heart 21 Cardiovascular System: Peripheral Circulation and Regulation 22 Lymphatic System and Immunity 23 Respiratory System 24 Digestive System FEATURES In Touch with Students Pre-lab preparation is included at the very beginning of the laboratory exercise so students are prepared to start lab procedures immediately. After students complete the pre-lab and answer the questions, the laboratory procedures will be easier to follow and understand. The procedures are clear, concise, and easy to follow. Relevant lists and summary tables present the contents efficiently. Histology micrographs and cadaver photos are incorporated in the appropriate locations within the associated labs. In Touch with Instructor Needs Each laboratory exercise can be completed during a single laboratory session. An annotated instructor’s guide is provided online. Also online, the instructor will find digital assets for use in creating customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, and other 28 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY printed support material. In Touch with Educational Needs Learning outcomes are listed to enable students to accomplish the assessments provided within each laboratory exercise and laboratory report. Students and instructors will be able to assess if the purpose of the laboratory exercise is accomplished and understood. In Touch with Technology Technology is intergrated throughout the laboratory manual. Four BIOPAC labs on different body systems are included for enrichment. Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations (Ph.I.L.S.) is packaged with the laboratory manual and incorporated in eleven of the laboratory exercises and reports. Histology incorporated throughout where appropriate. BIOPAC® exercises included. Labeling exercises throughout lab – not just in lab report. Stand alone – can go with any text book. Pre-Lab questions provided on lab manual’s website. Exercises appropriate size for one lab session. Cadaver images from APR. Annotated instructor’s manual provided online. Universal terminology utilizing Terminologia Anatomica. Correlation guides available for Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 and Anatomy and Physiology Revealed. Clear, concise writing style. Outstanding artwork. Unique labs include “Scientific Method and Measurements”, “Chemistry of Life”, “Fetal Skeleton”, “Surface Anatomy”, “Diabetic Physiology”, and “Genetics”. Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 exercises are incorporated throughout the lab manual where they are appropriate. The cat reference plates are incorporated within the appropriate system of dissection. All cat dissection figures are in full color. Incorporates outcomes and assessments with matching icons for each laboratory exercise. CONTENTS Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method and Measurements 2 Body Organization, Membranes, and Terminology 3 Chemistry of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and Function (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #2 Size and Basal Metabolic Rate) 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #1 Varying Extracellular Concentration) 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 Bone Structure and Classification 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Fetal Skeleton 19 Joint Structure and Movements Muscular System 20 Skeletal Muscle Structure and Function (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #4 StimulusDependent Force Generation) 21 Electromyography: BIOPAC Exercise 22 Muscles of the Head and Neck 23 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 24 Muscles of the Deep Back, Abdominal Wall, and Pelvic Outlet 29 25 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb Surface Anatomy 26 Surface Anatomy Nervous System 27 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 28 Spinal Cord and Meninges 29 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 30 Brain and Cranial Nerves 31 Electroencephalography: BIOPAC Exercise 32 Dissection of the Sheep Brain General and Special Senses 33 General Senses 34 Smell and Taste 35 Eye Structure 36 Visual Tests and Demonstrations 37 Ear and Hearing 38 Equilibrium Endocrine System 39 Endocrine Structure and Function (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #17 Thyroid Gland and Metabolic Rate) 40 Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System 41 Blood Cells 42 Blood Testing (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #31 pH & Hb-Oxygen Binding) 43 Blood Typing 44 Heart Structure 45 Cardiac Cycle (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #23 The Meaning of Heart Sounds) 46 Electrocardiography: BIOPAC Exercise 47 Blood Vessel Structure, Arteries, and Veins 48 Pulse Rate and Blood Pressure (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #36 Deep Breathing and Cardiac Function) Lymphatic System 49 Lymphatic System Respiratory System 50 Respiratory Organs 51 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #34 Altering Airway Volume) 52 Spirometry: BIOPAC Exercise 53 Control of Breathing Digestive System 54 Digestive Organs 55 Action of a Digestive Enzyme Urinary System 56 Kidney Structure 57 Urinalysis Reproductive Systems and Development 58 Male Reproductive System 59 Female Reproductive System 60 Fertilization and Early Development 61 Genetics Cat Dissection Exercises 62 Cat Dissection: Musculature 63 Cat Dissection: Cardiovascular System 64 Cat Dissection: Respiratory System 65 Cat Dissection: Digestive System 66 Cat Dissection: Urinary System 67 Cat Dissection: Reproductive Systems Supplemental Laboratory Exercises (found online only) S-1 Skeletal Muscle Contraction (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #6 Principles of Summation and Tetanus) S-2 Nerve Impulse Stimulation (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #10 The Compound Action Potential) S-3 Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #18 Thermal and Chemical Effects) Appendix 1 Preparation of Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports Appendix 3 Ph.I.L.S. Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations (correlation to laboratory exercises) Appendix 4 Assessments of Laboratory Reports ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY The following exercises are available online, giving instructors the option of continuing to use live specimens in these experiments if desired: Skeletal Muscle Contractions, Nerve Impulse Simulation, Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle. NEW Correlation guides available for Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 and Anatomy and Physiology Revealed. LABORATORY MANUAL FOR HUMAN ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Pig Version with PhILS 3.0 CD CONTENTS By Terry R Martin, Kishwaukee College 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727436-8 http://www.mhhe.com/martinseries1 Terry Martin, author of the best-selling laboratory manuals to accompany the Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology texts, has written a new stand alone laboratory manual. This series of laboratory manuals (main – no dissection, cat dissection, and fetal pig dissection) will incorporate Terry’s clear, concise writing style. They are not associated with any one text so can be used with any anatomy and physiology text. The artwork and photos will be second to none. It will also come with a Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 CD-Rom. FEATURES Versions Available: Main, Cat, Fetal Pig The cat reference plates are incorporated within the appropriate system of dissection. All cat dissection figures are in full color. Incorporates outcomes and assessments with matching icons for each laboratory exercise. Clear, concise writing style. Outstanding artwork – utilized a lot of artwork from Saladin. CD-Rom Included: Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 exercises are incorporated throughout the lab manual where they are appropriate. Histology incorporated throughout where appropriate. BIOPAC® exercises included. Introductory text concise and appropriate for lab. Labeling exercises throughout lab – not just in lab report. Stand alone – can go with any text book. Pre-Lab questions provided on lab manual’s website. Exercises appropriate size for one lab session. Cadaver images from APR. Lab manuals digital assets will be available online. Annotated instructor’s manual provided online. Scientific Methods & Measurements lab included. Chemistry of Life lab included. Complete Fetal Skeleton lab included. Diabetic Physiology lab included. Universal terminology utilizing Terminologia Anatomica. Sample assessment rubrics for laboratory reports are in an appendix. Lab Cam videos available on website. 30 Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method and Measurements 2 Body Organization, Membranes, and Terminology 3 Chemistry of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and Function (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #2 Size and Basal Metabolic Rate) 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #1 Varying Extracellular Concentration) 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 Bone Structure and Classification 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Fetal Skeleton 19 Joint Structure and Movements Muscular System 20 Skeletal Muscle Structure and Function (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #4 StimulusDependent Force Generation) 21 Electromyography: BIOPAC Exercise 22 Muscles of the Head and Neck 23 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 24 Muscles of the Deep Back, Abdominal Wall, and Pelvic Outlet 25 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb Surface Anatomy 26 Surface Anatomy Nervous System 27 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 28 Spinal Cord and Meninges 29 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 30 Brain and Cranial Nerves 31 Electroencephalography: BIOPAC Exercise 32 Dissection of the Sheep Brain General and Special Senses 33 General Senses 34 Smell and Taste 35 Eye Structure 36 Visual Tests and Demonstrations 37 Ear and Hearing 38 Equilibrium Endocrine System 39 Endocrine Structure and Function (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #17 Thyroid Gland and Metabolic Rate) 40 Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System 41 Blood Cells 42 Blood Testing (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #31 pH & Hb-Oxygen Binding) 43 Blood Typing 44 Heart Structure 45 Cardiac Cycle (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #23 The Meaning of Heart Sounds) 46 Electrocardiography: BIOPAC Exercise 47 Blood Vessel Structure, Arteries, and Veins 48 Pulse Rate and Blood Pressure (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #36 Deep Breathing ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY and Cardiac Function) Lymphatic System 49 Lymphatic System Respiratory System 50 Respiratory Organs 51 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #34 Altering Airway Volume) 52 Spirometry: BIOPAC Exercise 53 Control of Breathing Digestive System 54 Digestive Organs 55 Action of a Digestive Enzyme Urinary System 56 Kidney Structure 57 Urinalysis Reproductive Systems and Development 58 Male Reproductive System 59 Female Reproductive System 60 Fertilization and Early Development 61 Genetics Fetal Pig Dissection Exercises 62 Fetal Pig Dissection: Musculature 63 Fetal Pig Dissection: Cardiovascular System 64 Fetal Pig Dissection: Respiratory System 65 Fetal Pig Dissection: Digestive System 66 Fetal Pig Dissection: Urinary System 67 Fetal Pig Dissection: Reproductive Systems Supplemental Laboratory Exercises (found online only) S-1 Skeletal Muscle Contraction (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #6 Principles of Summation and Tetanus) S-2 Nerve Impulse Stimulation (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #10 The Compound Action Potential) S-3 Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle (Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 #18 Thermal and Chemical Effects) Appendix 1 Preparation of Solutions Appendix 2 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed (correlation to laboratory exercises) Appendix 3 Ph.I.L.S. Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations (correlation to laboratory exercises) Appendix 4 Assessments of Laboratory Reports NEW LABORATORY MANUAL FOR HUMAN ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Main Version with PhILS 3.0 CD to work well with any anatomy and physiology text. FEATURES In Touch with Students Pre-lab preparation is included at the very beginning of the laboratory exercise so students are prepared to start lab procedures immediately. After students complete the pre-lab and answer the questions, the laboratory procedures will be easier to follow and understand. The procedures are clear, concise, and easy to follow. Relevant lists and summary tables present the contents efficiently. Histology micrographs and cadaver photos are incorporated in the appropriate locations within the associated labs. In Touch with Instructor Needs Each laboratory exercise can be completed during a single laboratory session. An annotated instructor’s guide is provided online. Also online, the instructor will find digital assets for use in creating customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, and other printed support material. In Touch with Educational Needs Learning outcomes are listed to enable students to accomplish the assessments provided within each laboratory exercise and laboratory report. Students and instructors will be able to assess if the purpose of the laboratory exercise is accomplished and understood. In Touch with Technology Technology is intergrated throughout the laboratory manual. Four BIOPAC labs on different body systems are included for enrichment. Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations (Ph.I.L.S.) is packaged with the laboratory manual and incorporated in eleven of the laboratory exercises and reports. Histology incorporated throughout where appropriate. BIOPAC® exercises included. Labeling exercises throughout lab – not just in lab report. Stand alone – can go with any text book. Pre-Lab questions provided on lab manual’s website. Exercises appropriate size for one lab session. Cadaver images from APR. Annotated instructor’s manual provided online. Universal terminology utilizing Terminologia Anatomica. Correlation guides available for Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 and Anatomy and Physiology Revealed. Clear, concise writing style. Outstanding artwork. Unique labs include “Scientific Method and Measurements”, “Chemistry of Life”, “Fetal Skeleton”, “Surface Anatomy”, “Diabetic Physiology”, and “Genetics”. CONTENTS By Terry R Martin, Kishwaukee College 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727434-4 http://www.mhhe.com/martinseries1 Author Terry Martin’s thiry years of teaching anatomy and physiology courses, authorship of three laboratory manuals, and active involvement in the Human Anatomy and Physiology Society (HAPS) drove his determination to create a lab manual with an innovative approach that would benefit students. Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy and Physiology includes a cat version and a fetal pig version. Each of these versions includes sixty-one laboratorty exercises, supplemental labs found online, and six cat or fetal pig dissection labs. The Main Version contains no dissection exercises. All three versions are written 31 Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method and Measurements 2 Body Organization, Membranes, and Terminology 3 Chemistry of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and Function 6 Movements Through Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 Bone Structure and Classification 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 Skull ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Fetal Skeleton 19 Joints Muscular System 20 Skeletal Muscle Structure and Function 21 Electromyography: BIOPAC Exercises 22 Muscles of the Head and Neck 23 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 24 Muscles of the Deep Back, Abdominal Wall, and Pelvic Outlet 25 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb Surface Anatomy 26 Surface Anatomy Nervous System 27 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 28 Spinal Cord and Meninges 29 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 30 Brain and Cranial Nerves 31 Electroencephalogram 1: BIOPAC Exercise 32 Dissection of the Sheep Brain General and Special Senses 33 General Senses 34 Smell and Taste 35 Eye Structure 36 Visual Tests and Demonstrations 37 Ear and Hearing 38 Equilibrium Endocrine System 39 Endocrine Structure and Function 40 Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System 41 Blood Cells 42 Blood Testing 43 Blood Typing 44 Heart Structure 45 Cardiac Cycle 46 Electrocardiography: BIOPAC Exercise 47 Blood Vessel Structure, Arteries, and Veins 48 Pulse Rate and Blood Pressure Lymphatic System 49 Lymphatic System Respiratory System 50 Respiratory Organs 51 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes 52 Spirometry: BIOPAC Exercise 53 Control of Breathing Digestive System 54 Digestive Organs 55 Action of a Digestive Enzyme Urinary System 56 Kidney Structure 57 Urinalysis Reproductive System and Development 58 Male Reproductive System 59 Female Reproductive System 60 Fertilization and Early Development 61 Genetics Supplemental Laboratory Exercises (found online only) S-1 Skeletal Muscle Contraction S-2 Nerve Impulse Stimulation S-3 Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle Appendix 1 Preparation of Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports Appendix 3 Correlation of Laboratory Exercises and Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 Lab Simluations NEW LABORATORY MANUAL HOLE’S HUMAN A&P (CAT) 12th Edition By Terry R Martin, Kishwaukee College 2010 (February 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-728377-3 This best-selling Laboratory Manual, written by Terry R. Martin, has been updated throughout. The new 12th edition is now available in a Cat version or a Fetal Pig version. Both versions of the 12th edition are organized into units that correlate directly with the text and include new and updated art to match Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 12e. NEW TO THIS EDITION An Outcomes and Assessments format has been incorporated throughout the lab manual. The exercise starts with a list of outcomes for instructors and students. Outcomes are then directly tied to assessments. A new Exercise 24: Surface Anatomy has been added based upon feedback from current users and reviews. The following exercise has been moved to the text web site, giving instructors the option of using the exercise or not: Blood Testing. CONTENTS Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method and Measurements 2 Body Organization and Terminology 3 Chemistry of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and Function 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 Bone Structure and Classification 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Joint Structure and Movements Muscular System 19 Skeletal Muscle Structure 20 Muscles of the Face, Head and Neck 21 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 22 Muscles of the Deep Back, Abdominal Wall, and Pelvic Outlet 23 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb Surface Anatomy 24 Surface Anatomy Nervous System 25 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 26 Spinal Cord and Meninges 27 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 28 Brain and Cranial Nerves 29 Dissection of the Sheep Brain General and Special Senses 30 Receptors General Senses 32 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 31 Smell and Taste 32 Ear and Hearing 33 Equilibrium 34 Eye Structure 35 Visual Tests and Demonstrations Endocrine System 36 Endocrine Structure and Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System 37 Blood Cells and Blood Typing 38 Heart Structure 39 Cardiac Cycle 40 Blood Vessel Structure, Arteries, and Veins 41 Pulse Rate and Blood Pressure Lymphatic System 42 Lymphatic System Digestive System 43 Digestive Organs 44 Action of a Digestive Enzyme Respiratory System 45 Respiratory Organs 46 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes 47 Control of Breathing Urinary System 48 Kidney Structure 49 Urinalysis Reproductive Systems and Development 50 Male Reproductive System 51 Female Reproductive System 52 Fertilization and Early Development 53 Genetics Cat Dissection Exercises 54 Cat Dissection: Musculature 55 Cat Dissection: Cardiovascular System 56 Cat Dissection: Digestive System 57 Cat Dissection: Respiratory System 58 Cat Dissection: Urinary System 59 Cat Dissection: Reproductive Systems Supplemental Laboratory Exercises (found online only) 60 Skeletal Muscle Contraction 61 Nerve Impulse Stimulation 62 Blood Testing 63 Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle Appendix 1 Preparation of Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports NEW TO THIS EDITION An Outcomes and Assessments format has been incorporated throughout the lab manual. The exercise starts with a list of outcomes for instructors and students. Outcomes are then directly tied to assessments. A new Exercise 24: Surface Anatomy has been added based upon feedback from current users and reviews. The following exercise has been moved to the text website, giving instructors the option of using the exercise or not: Blood Testing. Instructors can download Instructor’s Manual and other materials at: www.mhhe.com/labcentral CONTENTS NEW LABORATORY MANUAL HOLE’S HUMAN A&P Fetal Pig, 12th Edition By Terry R Martin, Kishwaukee Colleg 2010 (February 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-728378-0 This best-selling Laboratory Manual, written by Terry R. Martin, has been updated throughout. The new 12th edition is now available in a Cat version or a Fetal Pig version. Both versions of the 12th edition are organized into units that correlate directly with the text and include new and updated art to match Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 12e. 33 Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method and Measurements 2 Body Organization and Terminology 3 Chemistry of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and Function 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 Bone Structure and Classification 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Joint Structure and Movements Muscular System 19 Skeletal Muscle Structure 20 Muscles of the Face, Head and Neck 21 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 22 Muscles of the Deep Back, Abdominal Wall, and Pelvic Outlet 23 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb Surface Anatomy 24 Surface Anatomy Nervous System 25 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 26 Spinal Cord and Meninges 27 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 28 Brain and Cranial Nerves 29 Dissection of the Sheep Brain General and Special Senses 30 Receptors General Senses 31 Smell and Taste 32 Ear and Hearing 33 Equilibrium 34 Eye Structure 35 Visual Tests and Demonstrations Endocrine System 36 Endocrine Structure and Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System 37 Blood Cells and Blood Typing 38 Heart Structure 39 Cardiac Cycle 40 Blood Vessel Structure, Arteries, and Veins 41 Pulse Rate and Blood Pressure Lymphatic System 42 Lymphatic System Digestive System 43 Digestive Organs ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 44 Action of a Digestive Enzyme Respiratory System 45 Respiratory Organs 46 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes 47 Control of Breathing Urinary System 48 Kidney Structure 49 Urinalysis Reproductive Systems and Development 50 Male Reproductive System 51 Female Reproductive System 52 Fertilization and Early Development 53 Genetics Fetal Pig Dissection Exercises 54 Fetal Pig Dissection: Musculature 55 Fetal Pig Dissection: Cardiovascular System 56 Fetal Pig Dissection: Digestive System 57 Fetal Pig Dissection: Respiratory System 58 Fetal Pig Dissection: Urinary System 59 Fetal Pig Dissection: Reproductive Systems Supplemental Laboratory Exercises (found online only) 60 Skeletal Muscle Contraction 61 Nerve Impulse Stimulation 62 Blood Testing 63 Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle Appendix 1 Preparation of Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Lab Science, Measurement, and Chemistry 2 Organs, Systems, and Organization of the Body 3 Microscopy 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Some Functions of Cell Membranes 6 Tissues 7 Integumentary System 8 Introduction to the Skeletal System 9 Appendicular Skeleton 10 Axial Skeleton, Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, Hyoid 11 Axial Skeleton--Skull 12 Articulations 13 Introduction to the Study of Muscles and Muscles of the Shoulder and Arm 14 Muscles of the Forearm and Hand 15 Muscles of the Hip and Thigh 16 Muscles of the Leg and Foot 17 Muscles of the Head and Neck 18 Muscles of the Trunk 19 Muscle Physiology 20 Introduction to the Nervous System 21 Structure and Function of the Brain and Cranial Nerves 22 The Spinal Cord and Nerves 23 Nervous System Physiology--Stimuli and Reflexes 24 Introduction to Sensory Receptors 25 Taste and Smell 26 Eye and Vision 27 Ear, Hearing, and Balance 28 Endocrine System 29 Blood 30 Blood Tests and Typing 31 Structure of the Heart 32 Electrical Conductivity of the Heart 33 Functions of the Heart 34 Introduction to Blood Vessels and Arteries of the Upper Body 35 Arteries of the Lower Body 36 Veins and Special Circulation 37 Functions of Vessels, Lymphatic System 38 Blood Vessels and Blood Pressure 39 Structure of the Respiratory System 40 Respiratory Function, Breathing, Respiration 41 Physiology of Exercise 42 Anatomy of the Digestive System 43 Digestive Physiology 44 Urinary System 45 Urinalysis 46 Male Reproductive System 47 Female Reproductive System Appendix A Measurement Conversions Appendix B Preparation of Materials and Solutions Appendix C Lab Reports Appendix D Common Prefixes, Suffixes, and Root Words in Anatomy and Physiology NEW LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY The Unity of Form and Function, 5th Edition By Eric Wise, Santa Barbara City College 2010 (February 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-728379-7 This manual (utilizing the cat as the primary dissection specimen) uses the same four-color art program as the fifth edition of Saladin’s Anatomy & Physiology and follows the same order of presentation. The 47 exercises provide a comprehensive overview of the human body and present the core elements of the subject matter. NEW TO THIS EDITION The fifth edition includes many new and revised illustrations and photographs. Several photographs in the manual have been enlarged and enhanced to show better detail and consistency. This is particularly true regarding the photographs of cat dissections. The artwork and the photographs in the fifth edition were carefully matched not only for visual comparisons but also for terminology as well. Appendix D has been added to include common prefixes, suffixes, and root words commonly used in the anatomy and physiology course. Instructors can download Instructors Manual’s and other materials at: www.mhhe.com/labcentral Exercise 1 now includes an introduction to lab science and chemistry and has retained its section on measurement. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 34 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY NEW NEW WORKBOOK TO ACCOMPANY ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2 CD LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY SEELEY’S PRINCIPLES OF ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY By Robert Broyles, Butler County Community College By Eric Wise, Santa Barbara City College 2009 (January 2008) / 704 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337814-5 The Workbook to Accompany Anatomy and Physiology Revealed, Version 2 by Robert Broyles is a workbook/study guide designed to help students get the most they can out of the Anatomy and Physiology Revealed (APR), and out of their anatomy and physiology course. The Table of Contents closely follows both the new DVD set and the online adaptation, and is organized along the lines of a typical Anatomy and Physiology course. The individual exercises include art from APR and also have review questions, tables, coloring exercises, terminology quiz questions, and reminders on key content. 2009 (March 2008) / 576 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-721690-0 Written by Eric Wise of Santa Barbara City College, this comprehensive manual contains 43 laboratory exercises that are integrated closely with the textbook. Each exercise demonstrates key anatomical and physiological facts and principles presented in Seeley’s Principles of Anatomy and Physiology by directing students to investigate specific concepts in greater detail. An instructor’s manual for the laboratory manual is available online at www.mhhe.com/labcentral. FEATURES NEW TO THIS EDITION Step-by-step explanations and a complete materials list for each experiment. A new chapter, Histology, has been added to this workbook, corresponding to the new content on histology in APR, Version 2. Precisely labeled, full-color drawings. A new chapter, The Integumentary System, has been included in the workbook, correlating to the new section on the same in APR, Version 2. Numerous full-color photomicrographs and dissection photographs. New content on articulations has been added to the chapter on the Skeletal System, reflecting similar updates to APR, Version 2. Self-contained presentations with the essential background information needed to complete each exercise—material is not just repeated from the text. New content on insertions and origins has been included in The Muscular System chapter, based on new additions to APR, Version 2. Integrated use of cat dissection specimen with material on human anatomy. More coloring exercises on structure are included in the workbook. Extensive lab reports at the end of every exercise challenge students to review and apply what they have learned. All changes to the interface of version two of APR have consequently been noted and updated via directions to the student in the workbook. Data collection embedded in each exercise as opposed to in a table at the back of the manual. Laboratory Safety Guidelines prominently displayed on inside front cover and caution symbols appear throughout manual where appropriate. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction: Becoming Familiar with Anatomy and Physiology Revealed Chapter 2: Histology (Detailed information to come) Chapter 3: The Integumentary System (Detailed information to come) Chapter 4: The Skeletal System with Articulations (Detailed information on articulations to come) Chapter 5: The Muscular System Chapter 6: The Nervous System Chapter 7: The Cardiovascular System Chapter 8: The Lymphatic System Chapter 9: The Respiratory System Chapter 10: The Digestive System Chapter 11: The Urinary System Chapter 12: The Reproductive System Chapter 13: The Endocrine System CONTENTS 1. Organs, Systems, and Organization of the Body 2. Microscopy 3. Cell Structure and Function 4. Tissues 5. Integumentary System 6. Introduction to the Skeletal System 7. Appendicular Skeleton 8. Axial Skeleton: Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, Hyoid 9. Axial Skeleton: Skull 10. Articulations 11. Muscle Physiology 12. Introduction to the Study of Muscles and Muscles of the Shoulder and Upper Extremity 13. Muscles of the Hip, Thigh, Leg, and Foot 14. Muscles of the Head and Neck 15. Muscles of the Torso 16. Introduction to the Nervous System 17. Brain and Cranial Nerves 18. Spinal Cord and Somatic Nerves 19. Nervous System Physiology: Stimuli and Reflexes 20. Introduction to Sensory Receptors 35 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY SEELEY’S ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 8th Edition 21. Taste and Smell 22. Eye and Vision 23. Ear, Hearing, and Balance 24. Endocrine System 25. Blood 26. Blood Tests and Typing 27. Structure of the Heart 28. Electrical Conductivity of the Heart 29. Functions of the Heart 30. Introduction to Blood Vessels and Arteries of the Upper Body 31. Arteries of the Lower Body 32. Veins and Special Circulations 33. Function of Vessels and the Lymphatic System 34. Blood Vessels and Blood Pressure 35. Structure of the Respiratory System 36. Respiratory Function, Breathing, and Respiration 37. Physiology of Exercise and Pulmonary Health 38. Anatomy of the Digestive System 39. Digestive Physiology 40. Anatomy of the Urinary System 41. Urinalysis 42. Male Reproductive System 43. Female Reproductive System Appendix A Measurement Conversions Appendix B Preparation of Materials Appendix C Lab Reports Index By Eric Wise, Santa Barbara City College 2008 (March 2007) / 560 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-334725-7 CONTENTS 1. Organs, Systems, and Organization of the Body 2. Microscopy 3. Cell Structure and Function 4. Tissues 5. Integumentary System 6. Introduction to the Skeletal System 7. Appendicular Skeleton 8. Axial Skeleton: Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, Hyoid 9. Axial Skeleton: Skull 10. Articulations 11. Muscle Physiology 12. Introduction to the Study of Muscles and Muscles of the Shoulder and Upper Extremity 13. Muscles of the Hip, Thigh, Leg, and Foot 14. Muscles of the Head and Neck 15. Muscles of the Torso 16. Introduction to the Nervous System 17. Brain and Cranial Nerves 18. Spinal Cord and Somatic Nerves 19. Nervous System Physiology: Stimuli and Reflexes 20. Introduction to Sensory Receptors 21. Taste and Smell 22. Eye and Vision 23. Ear, Hearing, and Balance 24. Endocrine System 25. Blood 26. Blood Tests and Typing 27. Structure of the Heart 28. Electrical Conductivity of the Heart 29. Functions of the Heart 30. Introduction to Blood Vessels and Arteries of the Upper Body 31. Arteries of the Lower Body 32. Veins and Special Circulations 33. Function of Vessels and the Lymphatic System 34. Blood Vessels and Blood Pressure 35. Structure of the Respiratory System 36. Respiratory Function, Breathing, and Respiration 37. Physiology of Exercise and Pulmonary Health 38. Anatomy of the Digestive System 39. Digestive Physiology 40. Anatomy of the Urinary System 41. Urinalysis 42. Male Reproductive System 43. Female Reproductive System Appendix A Measurement Conversions Appendix B Preparation of Materials Appendix C Lab Reports Index COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 36 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY One & Two - Semester Anatomy & Physiology Multimedia 63% of students in a recent study stated that APR encouraged an active-learning process compared to 31% who said the same about traditional lab. 75% of students in a recent study indicated they routinely used APR to study on their own, vs. 29% who used traditional lab materials to study on their own. I can see how you might think you have to use cadavers to use this product. It is a common misconception. I can understand your concern. Our research has shown that students do use APR when it is incorporated into the lecture and/or lab. NEW I am pretty happy with the textbook and media I am using now. Everything is working fine. ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED CD-ROM (ALLIED HEALTH VERSION) CONTENTS Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System Nervous System Cardiovascular System By Medical College of Ohio 2009 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-337831-2 NEW Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art program uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed also offers animations, histologic and radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. It can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate anatomy & physiology or human anatomy course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2.0 ONLINE By Medical College of Ohio FEATURES New Organ System Added -- The Integumentary System has been added to the list of organ systems included in this program. All layers of the skin will be included and this new section will also feature histology images and full coverage of the dermis, epidermis, hair shaft, specific glands, etc. 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-337803-9 www.aprevealed.com Expanded Skeletal and Joint Coverage -- The Skeletal System and Muscular System have been separated into each their own system allowing for substantially expanded information to be provided in each. The Skeletal System will now include full coverage of joint dissections. 75 NEW photos of disarticulated bones have been added. NEW Histology Section! -- Version 2.0 of Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes a new button for histology views to support every body system. Students can access this information by clicking on the microscope icon located on the navigation bar. NEW! Expanded Quizzing Types and Options -- Physiology animation quizzes have been added to Skeletal, Muscular and Nervous Systems. In addition, the user can now select the number of questions he/she wants included in each quiz (10, 25 or ALL). NEW! Navigation and Interface changes! System selection menu makes it easy to hop between systems. A new “Smart” (Google-like) search button has been added and integrated across all systems. Tags are now color coded. All tags pertaining to the given system are one color and reference structures that are not part of that system are another color. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art program uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed also offers animations, histologic and radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. It can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate anatomy & physiology or human anatomy course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. FEATURES New Organ System Added -- The Integumentary System has been added to the list of organ systems included in this program. All layers of the skin will be included and this new section will also feature histology images and full coverage of the dermis, epidermis, hair shaft, specific glands, etc. Expanded Skeletal and Joint Coverage -- The Skeletal System and Muscular System have been separated into each their own system allowing for substantially expanded information to be provided in each. The Skeletal System will now include full coverage of joint dissections. 75 NEW photos of disarticulated bones have been added. A recent research study proved that students using APR in the lab performed nearly 2x better than students using traditional methods (lab manual + animal specimen). NEW Histology Section! -- Version 2.0 of Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes a new button for histology views to support every body system. Students can access this information by clicking on the microscope icon located on the navigation bar. 37 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY NEW! Expanded Quizzing Types and Options -- Physiology animation quizzes have been added to Skeletal, Muscular and Nervous Systems. In addition, the user can now select the number of questions he/she wants included in each quiz (10, 25 or ALL). NEW! Navigation and Interface changes! System selection menu makes it easy to hop between systems. A new “Smart” (Google-like) search button has been added and integrated across all systems. Tags are now color coded. All tags pertaining to the given system are one color and reference structures that are not part of that system are another color. CONTENTS Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System Nervous System Endocrine System Cardiovascular System Respiratory System Lymphatic System Digestive System Urinary System Reproductive System NEW STUDENT ACCESS CARD PH.I.L.S (PHYSIOLOGY INTERACTIVE LAB SIMULATIONS) ONLINE By Phillip Stephens, Villanova University 2009 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-334932-9 www.mhhe.com/phils Ordering this ISBN will give you online access to the product-specific site where you’ll find study and self-testing tools. Created by Dr. Phil Stephens at Villanova University, the Ph.I.L.S (physiology interactive lab simulations) offers 37 laboratory simulations. This revolutionary learning tool may be used to supplement or substitute for wet labs. Students can use Ph.I.L.S. to adjust variables, view outcomes, make predictions, and draw conclusions. This easy-to-use software offers each student the flexibility to change the parameters of the lab experiment. There is no limit to the amount of times a student can repeat the experiment or change variables within the experiments. Ph.I.L.S. allows students to perform experiments without having to use expensive lab equipment (like Biopac, IWORX or Intellitool). Students can work individually to perform the experiments on their own time without harming themselves or live animals. Ph.I.L.S. is the perfect way reinforce key Physiology concepts with powerful lab experiments. FEATURES Purchase this product at www.shopmcgraw-hill.com by using ISBN 0073378062. CONTENTS Osmosis and Diffusion 38 1. Varying Extracellular Concentration Metabolism 2. Size and Basal Metabolic Rate 3. Cyanide and Electron Transport Skeletal Muscle Function 4. Stimulus Dependent Force Generation 5. The Length-Tension Relationship 6. Principles of Summation and Tetanus 7. EMG and Twitch Amplitude Resting Potentials 8. Resting Potential and External Potassium Concentration 9. Resting Potential and External Sodium Concentration Action Potentials 10. The Compound Action Potential 11. Conduction Velocity and Temperature 12. Action Potentials and Refractory Periods 13. Measuring Ion Currents Synaptic Potentials 14. Facilitation & Depression 15. Temporal Summation of EPSPs 16. Spatial Summation of EPSPs Endocrine Function 17. Thyroid Gland and Metabolic Rate Frog Heart Function 18. Thyroid and Chemical Effects 19. Refractory Period of the Heart 20. Starling’s Law of the Heart 21. Heart Block ECG and Heart Function 22. ECG and Exercise 23. The Meaning of Heart Sounds 24. ECG and Finger Pulse 25. Electrical Axis of the Heart 26. ECG and Heart Block 27. Abnormal ECGs Circulation 28. Cooling and Peripheral Blood Flow 29. Blood Pressure and Gravity 30. Blood Pressure and Body Position Blood 31. pH & Hb-oxygen Binding 32. DPG & Hb-oxygen Binding Respiration 33. Altering Body Position 34. Altering Airway Volume 35. Exercise-Induced Changes 36. Deep Breathing and Cardiac Function Digestion 37. Glucose Transport ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2.0 CD By Medical College of Ohio 2008 (July 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-337807-7 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art tutorial uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed offers animations, radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. This tutorial can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate Anatomy & Physiology course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 27. Abnormal ECGs Circulation 28. Cooling and Peripheral Blood Flow 29. Blood Pressure and Gravity 30. Blood Pressure and Body Position Blood 31. pH & Hb-oxygen Binding 32. DPG & Hb-oxygen Binding Respiration 33. Altering Body Position 34. Altering Airway Volume 35. Exercise-Induced Changes 36. Deep Breathing and Cardiac Function Digestion 37. Glucose Transport CONTENTS Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System Nervous System Cardiovascular System Lymphatic System Respiratory System Urinary System Digestive System Endocrine System Reproductive System PH.I.L.S VERSION 3.0 CD-ROM By Phillip J Stephens, Villanova University 2008 (July 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-334933-6 Ph.I.L.S (Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations) 3.0 offers a new interface which makes it easier to maneuver throughout the system. There are also new post lab quizzes offering more assessment opportunities! Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 is the perfect way to reinforce key physiology concepts with powerful lab experiments. Created by Dr. Phil Stephens at Villanova University, this program offers 37 laboratory simulations that may be used to supplement or substitute for wet labs. All 37 labs are self-contained experiments - no lengthy instruction manual required. Users can adjust variables, view outcomes, make predictions, draw conclusions, and print lab reports. This easy-to-use software offers the flexibility to change the parameters of the lab experiment - there is no limit! Anatomy & Physiology - Supplements International Edition AN ATLAS TO HUMAN ANATOMY By Dennis Strete, McLennan Community College 2000 / 208 pages ISBN: 978-0-697-38793-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-115591-5 [IE] CONTENTS Osmosis and Diffusion 1. Varying Extracellular Concentration Metabolism 2. Size and Basal Metabolic Rate 3. Cyanide and Electron Transport Skeletal Muscle Function 4. Stimulus Dependent Force Generation 5. The Length-Tension Relationship 6. Principles of Summation and Tetanus 7. EMG and Twitch Amplitude Resting Potentials 8. Resting Potential and External Potassium Concentration 9. Resting Potential and External Sodium Concentration Action Potentials 10. The Compound Action Potential 11. Conduction Velocity and Temperature 12. Action Potentials and Refractory Periods 13. Measuring Ion Currents Synaptic Potentials 14. Facilitation & Depression 15. Temporal Summation of EPSPs 16. Spatial Summation of EPSPs Endocrine Function 17. Thyroid Gland and Metabolic Rate Frog Heart Function 18. Thyroid and Chemical Effects 19. Refractory Period of the Heart 20. Starling’s Law of the Heart 21. Heart Block ECG and Heart Function 22. ECG and Exercise 23. The Meaning of Heart Sounds 24. ECG and Finger Pulse 25. Electrical Axis of the Heart 26. ECG and Heart Block www.mhhe.com/biosci/abio CONTENTS Part 1 Cells and Tissues Chapter 1 Anatomy at the Cellular Level Chapter 2 Tissue Organization: Epithelial, Connective, Muscle, and Nervous Tissue Part 2 Organ Systems Chapter 3 Integumentary System Chapter 4 Skeletal System Chapter 5 Muscular System Chapter 6 Nervous System Chapter 7 Special Senses: Olfactory, Gustation, Auditory, Visual Chapter 8 Endocrine System Chapter 9 Cardiovascular System Chapter 10 Lymphatic System Chapter 11 Respiratory System Chapter 12 Digestive System Chapter 13 Urinary System Chapter 14 Male Reproductive System Chapter 15 Female Reproductive System 39 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY Human Anatomy - Textbooks By Kent M. Van De Graaff, Weber State University and R. Ward Rhees, Brigham Young University—Provo 2001 / 160 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-136976-3 A Schaum’s Publication International Edition http://doi.contentdirections.com What could be better than the bestselling Schaum’s Outline series? For students looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, it would have to be Schaum’s Easy Outline series. Every book in this series is a pared-down, simplified, and tightly focused version of its predecessor. With an emphasis on clarity and brevity, each new title features a streamlined and updated format and the absolute essence of the subject, presented in a concise and readily understandable form. Graphic elements such as sidebars, reader-alert icons, and boxed highlights stress selected points from the text, illuminate keys to learning, and give students quick pointers to the essentials. Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers turned off by dense text Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the material across fast Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject Delivers expert help from teachers who are authorities in their fields Perfect for last-minute test preparation So small and light that they fit in a backpack! HUMAN ANATOMY 2nd Edition By Michael McKinley, Glendale Community College and Valerie O’Loughlin, Indiana University-Bloomington 2008 (October 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-721340-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-128320-5 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/mckinley2 With its unrivaled art program and accessible writing style, McKinley/ O’Loughlin’s Human Anatomy stands apart from other anatomy texts. High-quality photographs paired with brilliantly rendered illustrations help students visualize, understand, and appreciate the wonders of human anatomy. Student-friendly Study Tips, Clinical View boxes, and progressive question sets motivate students to internalize and apply what they’ve learned. The second edition has been refined based on reviewer feedback to offer an even stronger version of this highly acclaimed textbook. CONTENTS 1 A First Look at Anatomy 2 The Cell: Basic Unit of Structure and Function 3 Embryology 4 Tissue Level of Organization 5 Integumentary System Skeletal System 6 Cartilage and Bone Connective Tissue 7 Axial Skeleton 8 Appendicular Skeleton 9 Articulations Muscular System 10 Muscle Tissue and Organization 11 Axial Muscles 12 Appendicular Muscles 13 Surface Anatomy Nervous System 14 Nervous Tissue 15 Brain and Cranial Nerves 16 Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 17 Pathways and Integrative Functions 18 Autonomic Nervous System 19 Senses: General and Special 20 Endocrine System Cardiovascular System 21 Blood 22 Heart 23 Vessels and Circulation 24 Lymphatic System 25 Respiratory System 26 Digestive System 27 Urinary System 28 Reproductive System SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 2nd Edition By Kent Van De Graaff, Brigham Yong University 1997 / 453 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-066887-4 A Schaum’s Publication http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?=0070668876&adkey =W02003 CONTENTS Introduction to the Human Body. Cellular Chemistry. Cell Structure and Function. Tissues. Integumentary System. Skeletal System. Muscle Tissue and Mode of Contraction. Muscular System. Nervous Tissue. Central Nervous System. Peripheral and Autonomic Nervous Systems. Sensory Organs. Endocrine System. Cardiovascular System: Blood. Cardiovascular System: The Heart. Cardiovascular System: Vessels and Blood Circulation. Lymphatic System and Body Immunity. Respiratory System. Digestive System. Metabolism, Nutrition, and Temperature Regulation. Urinary System. Water and Electrolyte Balance. Reproductive System. 40 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY International Edition International Edition HUMAN ANATOMY 2nd Edition HUMAN ANATOMY 6th Edition By Kenneth S Saladin, Georgia College and State University 2008 (January 2007) / 864 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-329369-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-110209-4 [IE] By Kent Van De Graaff, Weber State University 2002 ISBN: 978-0-07-248665-0 (Mandatory Package) - Out of Print ISBN: 978-0-07-112284-9 [IE] http://aris.mhhe.com www.mhhe.com/vdg From the most pedagogically sound organization to the exceptional art, to the complete integration of the text with technology, Saladin has formed a teaching system that will both motivate and enable students to understand and appreciate the wonders of human anatomy. This distinctive text was developed to stand apart from all other anatomy texts with an approach borne out of 25 years of teaching, unparalleled art, and a writing style that has been acclaimed by reviewers. Designed for a one-semester college anatomy course, Saladin requires no prior knowledge of college chemistry or cell biology. CONTENTS CONTENTS Part One: Organization of the Human Body 1 The Study of Human Anatomy Atlas A Survey of the Human Body 2 Cytology—The Study of Cells 3 Histology—The Study of Tissues 4 Human Development Part Two: Support and Movement 5 The Integumentary System 6 Bone Tissue 7 The Axial Skeleton 8 The Appendicular Skeleton 9 Joints 10 The Muscular System—Introduction 11 The Axial Musculature 12 The Appendicular Musculature Atlas B Surface Anatomy Part Three: Integration and Control 13 Nervous Tissue 14 The Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 15 The Brain and Cranial Nerves 16 The Autonomic Nervous System and Visceral Reflexes 17 Sense Organs 18 The Endocrine System Part Four: Maintenance 19 The Circulatory System I—Blood 20 The Circulatory System II—The Heart 21 The Circulatory System III—Blood Vessels 22 The Lymphatic System and Immunity 23 The Respiratory System 24 The Digestive System 25 The Urinary System Part Five: Reproduction 26 The Reproductive System Historical Perspective: 1 History of Anatomy Terminology, Organization, and the Human Organism 2 Body Organization and Anatomical Nomenclature Microscopic Structure of the Body 3 Cytology 4 Histology Support and Movement 5 Integumentary System 6 Skeletal System: Introduction and the Axial Skeleton 7 Skeletal System: The Appendicular Skeleton 8 Articulations 9 Muscular System 10 Surface and Regional Anatomy Integration and Coordination 11 Nervous Tissue and the Central Nervous System 12 Peripheral Nervous System 13 Autonomic Nervous System 14 Endocrine System 15 Sensory Organs Maintenance of the Body 16 Circulatory System 17 Respiratory System 18 Digestive System 19 Urinary System Reproduction and Development 20 Male Reproductive System 21 Female Reproductive System 22 Developmental Anatomy, Postnatal Growth, and Inheritance Appendix A Answers to Objective Questions with Explanations INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 41 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Human Anatomy Lab NEW LABORATORY ATLAS OF ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 6th Edition NEW By Douglas J Eder, University of North Florida WORKBOOK TO ACCOMPANY ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2 CD 2009 (June 2008) / 192 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-352567-9 By Robert Broyles, Butler County Community College This full-color atlas is intended to effectively supplement the A&P laboratory course and aid students in their studies. Eder’s high-quality visuals, in combination with its unique tables, make it a valuable supplement in any lab course. Tables include terms and definitions as well as descriptions of the origin, insertion, action, and innervation of muscles. This atlas illustrates the dissection structures as they actually exist, so students will be able to easily recognize the parts when they are dissecting or taking an exam. 2009 (January 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337814-5 The Workbook to Accompany Anatomy and Physiology Revealed, Version 2 by Robert Broyles is a workbook/study guide designed to help students get the most they can out of the Anatomy and Physiology Revealed (APR), and out of their anatomy and physiology course. The Table of Contents closely follows both the new DVD set and the online adaptation, and is organized along the lines of a typical Anatomy and Physiology course. The individual exercises include art from APR and also have review questions, tables, coloring exercises, terminology quiz questions, and reminders on key content. NEW TO THIS EDITION In the 6th edition, Chapter 5, now titled Specialized Organs, has incorporated a much-requested cow eye dissection. This new dissection accompanies the existing brain, heart and kidney photos. The order of the last two chapters has been switched so that the reference tables (formerly chapter 5) now appear as Chapter 6, at the end of the atlas. NEW TO THIS EDITION A new chapter, Histology, has been added to this workbook, corresponding to the new content on histology in APR, Version 2. Amid the many updates, the illustrations in Chapter 3, Human Muscular Anatomy, have been updated to correspond to Saladin, Anatomy & Physiology, 4th edition. Numbered labels on dissection photos have also been enhanced to improve the labels’ visibility. A new chapter, The Integumentary System, has been included in the workbook, correlating to the new section on the same in APR, Version 2. New content on articulations has been added to the chapter on the Skeletal System, reflecting similar updates to APR, Version 2. Throughout (but especially in chapter 4), numbered labels on dissection photos have been made more visible, per reviewer and publisher requests. New content on insertions and origins has been included in The Muscular System chapter, based on new additions to APR, Version 2. CONTENTS More coloring exercises on structure are included in the workbook. All changes to the interface of version two of APR have consequently been noted and updated via directions to the student in the workbook. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction: Becoming Familiar with Anatomy and Physiology Revealed Chapter 2: Histology (Detailed information to come) Chapter 3: The Integumentary System (Detailed information to come) Chapter 4: The Skeletal System with Articulations (Detailed information on articulations to come) Chapter 5: The Muscular System Chapter 6: The Nervous System Chapter 7: The Cardiovascular System Chapter 8: The Lymphatic System Chapter 9: The Respiratory System Chapter 10: The Digestive System Chapter 11: The Urinary System Chapter 12: The Reproductive System Chapter 13: The Endocrine System 42 Chapter 1: Histology Chapter 2: Human Skeletal Anatomy Chapter 3: Human Muscular Anatomy Chapter 4: Dissections Chapter 5: Specialized Organs Chapter 6: Reference Tables ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY HUMAN ANATOMY LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HUMAN ANATOMY BY MCKINLEY NEW International Edition By Christine M Eckel, Salt Lake Community College 2008 (December 2007) / 544 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-286313-0 ATLAS OF SKELETAL MUSCLES 6th Edition Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual by Christine Eckel is a handson learning tool designed to guide students through human anatomy concepts through observation, touch, dissection, and practical activities such as sketching, labeling, and coloring. Exquisite dissection photographs capture anatomical details, and a student-friendly writing style uses relevant examples to engage students in concept application. It focuses on human specimens, and also includes common animal specimens such as cow eye, sheep brain, and sheep heart. This manual was expressly written to supplement and expand upon content covered in the lecture course, not to repeat it. It accompanies McKinley/O’Loughlin Human Anatomy 2nd edition, but is also a stand alone product that works well with any 1-semester human anatomy text. By Robert Stone and Judeith Stone of Suffolk County Community College 2009 (January 2008) / 240 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-304968-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-128359-5 [IE] The 6th edition includes changes reflecting modern understanding, terminology and teaching of the musculoskeletal system. There are changes on 42 different pages including many new or enhanced notes on function and 20 new descriptions or explanations of anatomical relationships. CONTENTS NEW TO THIS EDITION Major improvements in the 6th edition! The 6th edition includes changes reflecting modern understanding, terminology and teaching of the musculoskeletal system. There are changes on 42 different pages including many new or enhanced notes on function and 20 new descriptions or explanations of anatomical relationships. A Summary of these changes are: Enhanced explanation of motions (e.g. captions of figs 2.19, 2.20) Many additional notes describing the relationships of muscles tendons and nerves (e.g. VMO, page 180) Helpful descriptions used in real classroom teaching (e.g. anatomical snuffbox, page 150, Tom, Dick and Harry, page 207) Updated terminology (e.g. fibularis for peroneus) Several upgraded illustrations.(e.g. page 3) CONTENTS Chapter 1: The Skeleton Chapter 2: Movements of the Body Chapter 3: Muscles of the Face and Head Chapter 4: Muscles of the Neck Chapter 5: Muscles of the Trunk Chapter 6: Muscles of the Shoulder and Arm Chapter 7: Muscles of the Forearm and Hand Chapter 8: Muscles of the Hip and Thigh Chapter 9: Muscles of the Leg and Foot 43 Chapter 1 The Human Anatomy Laboratory Chapter 2 The Microscope Chapter 3 Cellular Anatomy Chapter 4 Introduction to Histology Chapter 5 Integument Chapter 6 The Skeletal System – Bone Anatomy Chapter 7 The Skeletal System –Axial Skeleton Chapter 8 The Skeletal System –Appendicular Skeleton Chapter 9 Arthrology Chapter 10 The Muscular System – Muscle Tissue Chapter 11 The Muscular System – Axial Musculature Chapter 12 The Muscular System – Appendicular Musculature Chapter 13 The Nervous System – Nervous Tissue Chapter 14 The Nervous System – The Brain Chapter 15 The Nervous System –Cranial Nerves Chapter 16 The Nervous System – Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves Chapter 17 The Nervous System – General and Special Senses Chapter 18 The Endocrine System Chapter 19 The Cardiovascular System – Blood Chapter 20 The Cardiovascular System – Heart Chapter 21 The Cardiovascular System – Blood Vessels Chapter 22 The Lymphatic System Chapter 23 The Respiratory System Chapter 24 The Digestive System Chapter 25 The Urinary System Chapter 26 The Reproductive Systems Appendix Credits Index ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REGIONAL HUMAN ANATOMY A Laboratory Workbook for use with Models and Prosections, 3rd Edition HUMAN ANATOMY LABORATORY MANUAL 2nd Edition By Eric Wise 2008 (June 2007) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-334720-2 By Frederick Edward Grine, Stony Brook University 2008 (December 2006) / 416 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-305128-4 This laboratory manual is expressly written to coincide with the Chapters of Human Anatomy, 2/e by Kenneth Saladin. This lab manual has clear explanations of anatomy experiments. Other features include a set of review questions at the end of each lab, plus numerous outstanding color photographs and artwork. The Grine Lab Workbook is designed for the Human Anatomy Lab course and takes a REGIONAL approach as opposed to a systems approach. This approach is becoming more and more popular as a way to teach Human Anatomy. Instructors who use a lab book with a “regional approach” and combine it with a text that takes a “systems” approach offer their students a combination that serves to reinforce anatomical knowledge since it forces the student to see each anatomical structure from two perspectives. Grine can be used effectively in conjunction with a lab course that uses human cadavers since the content is presented in the regional sequence typically practiced in dissection. CONTENTS CONTENTS Laboratory 1: Anatomical Terminology, General Osteology, and General Arthrology 1.1 Anatomical Terminology 1.2 General Osteology 1.3 General Arthrology Laboratory 2: The Back 2.1 The Integument 2.2 The Vertebral Column 2.3 Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 2.4 Muscles of the Back Laboratory 3: The Upper Limb 3.1 Bones of the Upper Limb 3.2 Joints of the Upper Limb 3.3 Innervation of the Upper Limb 3.4 Muscles of the Upper Limb 3.5 Blood Vessels of the Upper Limb Laboratory 4: The Lower Limb 4.1 Bones of the Lower Limb 4.2 Joints of the Lower Limb 4.3 Innervation of the Lower Limb 4.4 Muscles of the Lower Limb 4.5 Blood Vessels of the Lower Limb Laboratory 5: The Neck 5.1 Bones and Cartilages of the Neck 5.2 Nerves of the Neck 5.3 Muscles of the Neck 5.4 Blood Vessels of the Neck 5.5 Thyroid and Parathyroid Glands Laboratory 6: The Head 6.1 The Skull 6.2 The Dentition 6.3 Muscles of the Head 6.4 Nasal and Oral Cavities 6.5 Blood Vessels of the Head Laboratory 7: The Brain and Cranial Nerves 7.1 The Brain 7.2 Cranial Nerves Laboratory 8: The Eye and The Ear 8.1 The Eye 8.2 The Ear Laboratory 9: The Thorax 9.1 The Breast 9.2 The Thoracic Skeleton 9.3 Skeletal Muscles of the Thorax 9.4 The Thoracic Cavity 9.5 The Mediastinum 9.6 The Respiratory Apparatus 9.7 The Heart 9.8 Lymphatics in the Thorax 9.9 Blood Vessels of the Thorax 9.10 Nerves of the Thorax Laboratory 10: The Abdomen 10.1 The Abdominal Skeleton 10.2 Skeletal Muscles of the Abdomen 10.3 Abdominal Cavity and peritoneum 10.4 Digestive Canal and Organs 10.5 Blood Vessels of the Gut 10.6 Lymphatic Organs and Lymph Drainage 10.7 The Kidneys and Adrenal Glands 10.8 Gonadal Blood Vessels 10.9 Nerves in the Abdomen Laboratory 11: The Pelvis 11.1 The Pelvic Skeleton 11.2 Muscles of the Pelvis 11.3 Peritoneum in the Pelvic Cavity 11.4 Common Pelvic Viscera 11.5 Male Genitalia 11.6 Female Genitalia 11.7 Blood Vessels of the Pelvis 11.8 Nerves of the Pelvis 44 1 Organs, Systems, and Organization of the Body 2 Microscopy 3 Cell Structure 4 Tissues 5 Integumentary System 6 Introduction to the Skeletal System 7 Appendicular Skeleton 8 Axial Skeleton: Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, Hyoid 9 Axial Skeleton--Skull 10 Articulations 11 Introduction to the Study of Muscles and Muscles of the Shoulder and Upper Extremity 12 Muscles of the Hip, Thigh, Leg and Foot 13 Muscles of the Head and Neck 14 Muscles of the Torso 15 Introduction to the Nervous System 16 Brain and Cranial Nerves 17 Spinal Cord and Somatic Nerves 18 Introduction to Sensory Receptors 19 Endocrine System 20 Blood Cells 21 The Heart 22 Introduction to Blood Vessels and Arteries of the Upper Body 23 Arteries of the Lower Body 24 Veins, Fetal Circulation, and the Lymphatic System 25 Respiratory System 26 Digestive System 27 Urinary System 28 Male Reproductive System 29 Female Reproductive System Appendix Preparation of Materials ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Human Anatomy - Multimedia Nervous System Endocrine System Cardiovascular System Respiratory System Lymphatic System Digestive System Urinary System Reproductive System NEW ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2.0 CD ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2.0 ONLINE By Medical College of Ohio 2008 (July 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-337807-7 By Medical College of Ohio Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art tutorial uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed offers animations, radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. This tutorial can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate Anatomy & Physiology course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-337803-9 www.aprevealed.com Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art program uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed also offers animations, histologic and radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. It can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate anatomy & physiology or human anatomy course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. CONTENTS Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System Nervous System Cardiovascular System Lymphatic System Respiratory System Urinary System Digestive System Endocrine System Reproductive System FEATURES New Organ System Added -- The Integumentary System has been added to the list of organ systems included in this program. All layers of the skin will be included and this new section will also feature histology images and full coverage of the dermis, epidermis, hair shaft, specific glands, etc. Expanded Skeletal and Joint Coverage -- The Skeletal System and Muscular System have been separated into each their own system allowing for substantially expanded information to be provided in each. The Skeletal System will now include full coverage of joint dissections. 75 NEW photos of disarticulated bones have been added. NEW Histology Section! -- Version 2.0 of Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes a new button for histology views to support every body system. Students can access this information by clicking on the microscope icon located on the navigation bar. NEW! Expanded Quizzing Types and Options -- Physiology animation quizzes have been added to Skeletal, Muscular and Nervous Systems. In addition, the user can now select the number of questions he/she wants included in each quiz (10, 25 or ALL). NEW! Navigation and Interface changes! System selection menu makes it easy to hop between systems. A new “Smart” (Google-like) search button has been added and integrated across all systems. Tags are now color coded. All tags pertaining to the given system are one color and reference structures that are not part of that system are another color. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] CONTENTS Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System 45 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Human Physiology - Textbooks 7 The Nervous System: Neurons and Synapses 8 The Central Nervous System 9 The Autonomic Nervous System 10 Sensory Physiology 11 Endocrine Glands: Secretion and Action of Hormones 12 Muscle: Mechanisms of Contraction and Neural Control 13 Blood, Heart and Circulation 14 Cardio Output, Blood Flow, and Blood Pressure 15 The Immune System 16 Respiratory Physiology 17 Physiology of the Kidneys 18 The Digestive System 19 Regulation of Metabolism 20 Reproduction NEW International Edition HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 11th Edition By Stuart Ira Fox, Los Angeles Pierce CLG NEW International Edition 2009 (October 2008) / 832 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-726587-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-128106-5 [IE] FUNDAMENTALS OF HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY http://www.mhhe.com/fox11 Clear explanations and a solid learning framework have been market tested and refined. Fox helps students master the fundamentals by providing appropriate anatomical detail. Human Physiology, Eleventh Edition, is intended for the one-semester Human Physiology course often taken by allied health and biology students. The beginning chapters introduce basic chemical and biological concepts to provide students with the framework they need to comprehend physiological principles. The chapters that follow promote conceptual understanding rather than rote memorization of facts. Health applications are included throughout the book to heighten interest, deepen understanding of physiological concepts, and help students relate the material to their individual career goals. Every effort has been made to help students integrate related concepts and understand the relationships between anatomical structures and their functions. NEW TO THIS EDITION Updated Art Program – 15 new figures have been added to support text discussions. In addition, numerous figures have been upgraded to the “Stepped-Out” format in response to positive feedback from users and reviewers alike. These figures are broken down into steps to better explain difficult physiological processes. By Stuart Ira Fox, Los Angeles Pierce CLG 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722635-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-128791-3 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/foxfundamentals Fundamentals of Human Physiology was conceived to meet the needs of students and professors struggling with the complexity and depth of the larger, more detailed human physiology textbooks currently available. In addition to being more concise and focusing on the basics of human physiology, this text is smaller in physical size, allowing for a cheaper, easier choice for instructors. FEATURES Proven author Stuart Fox is known for his accessible writing style and years of classroom experience. Updated Clinical Investigations – Clinical Investigations have been updated to emphasize the new terms and concepts presented in these clinical scenarios. In addition, solutions to the investigations have been incorporated at the end of each chapter, allowing students to connect the case to concepts covered in the chapter. Clinical Investigation Case Studies are based on homeostasis and appear at the beginning of every chapter. These are coupled with a brief scenario that describes what happens if homeostasis fails. Learning System Updates – To maximize functionality and efficiency, many pedagogical devices have been streamlined or enhanced. Learning objectives now introduce each major chapter section, and “Check Point” questions assess whether objectives have been met. A new problem set—“Test Your Quantitative Ability”—has been added to each chapter review, giving students the opportunity to quantitatively apply what they have learned. Select “Pyramid Paragraphs” alert students that the information about to be presented is a key building block or fundamental concept that future physiological topics will be built upon. Revisions and Content Updates Throughout – Content in every chapter has been updated where appropriate to keep the text current with the latest research, and new findings have been incorporated. Clinical Investigation Clues throughout the rest of the chapter point out material relevant to the initial case study, increasing comprehension through application. A special “Chemistry Refresher” in Chapter 1 allows students with prior knowledge to review chemistry basics; students with no chemistry prerequisite can read the entire chapter. “Before You Read On” questions test comprehension after major sections of the chapter text. CONTENTS “Clinical Applications” boxes emphasize relevance of chapter topics via clinical examples. 1 The Study of Body Function 2 Chemical Composition of the Body 3 Cell Structure and Genetic Control 4 Enzymes and Energy 5 Cell Respiration and Metabolism 6 Interactions Between Cells and the Extracellular Environment Readings entitled “Physiology in Health and Disease” build on chapter content and offer more in-depth clinical detail. “FYI” footnotes engage student interest and present interesting facts connected to chapter content. 46 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY End-of-chapter review questions build in complexity based on Bloom’s taxonomy. “Physiology in Balance” pages close every chapter and illustrate how the chapter relates to other chapters, emphasizing once again the importance of homeostasis. CONTENTS 1. Introduction to Human Physiology 2. From Cells to Systems 3. Interactions Between Cells and Their Environment 4. Nervous System: Neurons and Synapses 5. Central Nervous System 6. Peripheral Nervous System 7. Sensory System 8. Endocrine System 9. Muscle Physiology 10. Blood and Circulation 11. The Immune System 12. The Lungs, Gas Transport, and Acid/Base Balance 13. The Kidneys and Urinary System 14. The Digestive System 15. The Reproductive System Appendix 1: Calculations of chemical concentrations. Appendix 2: Pathways of cell respiration. Appendix 3: Mathematical concepts of selected topics in physiology. Appendix 4: Answers to multiple choice questions. Control of Body Movement The Endocrine System Cardiovascular Physiology Respiratory Physiology The Kidneys and Regulation of Water and Inorganic Ions The Digestion and Absorption of Food Regulation of Organic Metabolism and Energy Balance Reproduction Defense Mechanisms of the Body Medical Physiology: Integration Using Clinical Cases Human Physiology Lab NEW LABORATORY GUIDE TO ACCOMPANY HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 13th Edition International Edition VANDER’S HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY The Mechanisms of Body Function with ARIS, 11th Edition By Stuart Ira Fox 2009 (October 2008) / 448 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-325063-2 By Eric P Widmaier, Boston University, Hershel Raff, Medical College of Wisconsin and Kevin T Strang, University of Wisconsin Madison 2008 (November 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-721609-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-128366-3 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/widmaier11e Eric Widmaier (Boston University), Hershel Raff (Medical College of Wisconsin), and Kevin Strang (University of Wisconsin) have taken on the challenge of maintaining the strengths and reputation of Vander’s Human Physiology: The Mechanisms of Body Function. Moving beyond the listing of mere facts, it stressed the causal chains of events that constitute the mechanisms of body function. The fundamental purpose of this textbook is to present the principles and facts of human physiology in a format that is suitable for undergraduates regardless of academic background or field of study. Vander’s Human Physiology, eleventh edition, carries on the tradition of clarity and accuracy, while refining and updating the content to meet the needs of today’s instructors and students. The eleventh edition features a streamlined, clinically oriented focus to the study of human body systems. It has also responded to reviewer requests for more clinical applications. Chapter 19 is new and contains three complete case studies. Physiology Inquiries have also been added to many figures throughout the chapters. These critical-thinking questions are just one more opportunity to add to the student’s learning experience. CONTENTS Homeostasis: A Framework for Human Physiology Chemical Composition of the Body Cellular structure, proteins, and Metabolism Movement of Molecules Across Cell Membranes Control of Cells by Chemical Messengers Neuronal Signaling and the Structure of the Nervous System Sensory Physiology Consciousness, the Brain, and Behavior Muscle 47 A Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology, 13th Edition, is a standalone human physiology manual that can be used in conjunction with any human physiology textbook. It includes a wide variety of exercises that support most areas covered in a human physiology course, allowing instructors the flexibility to choose those exercises best suited to meet their particular instructional goals. Background information that is needed to understand the principles and significance of each exercise is presented in a concise manner, so that little or no support is needed from the lecture text. CONTENTS 1 Introduction: Structure and Physiological Control Systems 2 Cell Function and Biochemical Measurements 3 The Nervous System and Sensory Physiology 4 The Endocrine System 5 Skeletal Muscles 6 Blood: Gas Transport, Immunity, and Clotting Functions 7 The Cardiovascular System 8 Respiration and Metabolism 9 Renal Function and Homeostasis 10 Digestion and Nutrition 11 Reproductive System Appendix 1 Basic Chemistry Appendix 2 Sources of Equipment and Solutions Appendix 3 Multimedia Correlation to the Laboratory Exercises Credits Index ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY NEW NEW WORKBOOK TO ACCOMPANY ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2 CD LABORATORY EXERCISES IN HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY A Clinical and Experimental Approach with Ph.I.L.S. 3.0, 2nd Edition By Robert Broyles, Butler County Community College By William Lutterschmidt and Deborah Lutterschmidt, Oregon State University 2009 (January 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337814-5 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722973-3 The Workbook to Accompany Anatomy and Physiology Revealed, Version 2 by Robert Broyles is a workbook/study guide designed to help students get the most they can out of the Anatomy and Physiology Revealed (APR), and out of their anatomy and physiology course. The Table of Contents closely follows both the new DVD set and the online adaptation, and is organized along the lines of a typical Anatomy and Physiology course. The individual exercises include art from APR and also have review questions, tables, coloring exercises, terminology quiz questions, and reminders on key content. This stand-alone laboratory text has been developed as an introduction to fundamental concepts in physiology. The text has been designed to emphasize an experimental approach to teaching physiology and is therefore designed for a particular type of student and curriculum. Many of the exercises will help students develop their clinical knowledge of physiology, plus help them gain an appreciation for the clinical techniques as would be needed by students studying nursing, physical therapy, and other health-oriented fields. Although this laboratory text may be used independently, its presentation and formal of material will closely follow that of Vander’s Human Physiology, 11th Edition. FEATURES A new chapter, Histology, has been added to this workbook, corresponding to the new content on histology in APR, Version 2. NEW TO THIS EDITION Exercise on Scientific Investigation -- A Laboratory exercise on Scientific Investigation is included to introduce basic data analyses used in physiology. Each laboratory exercise is also organized in a format of a scientific publication having An Introduction, Materials and Methods, Results, and Discussion sections. A new chapter, The Integumentary System, has been included in the workbook, correlating to the new section on the same in APR, Version 2. New content on articulations has been added to the chapter on the Skeletal System, reflecting similar updates to APR, Version 2. New content on insertions and origins has been included in The Muscular System chapter, based on new additions to APR, Version 2. More coloring exercises on structure are included in the workbook. All changes to the interface of version two of APR have consequently been noted and updated via directions to the student in the workbook. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction: Becoming Familiar with Anatomy and Physiology Revealed Chapter 2: Histology Chapter 3: The Integumentary System Chapter 4: The Skeletal System with Articulations Chapter 5: The Muscular System Chapter 6: The Nervous System Chapter 7: The Cardiovascular System Chapter 8: The Lymphatic System Chapter 9: The Respiratory System Chapter 10: The Digestive System Chapter 11: The Urinary System Chapter 12: The Reproductive System Chapter 13: The Endocrine System Pre-Lab Exercises -- Each laboratory presents an introduction and a series of pre-lab exercises that students should complete before each laboratory session. These pre-lab exercises may be collected by the instructor at the beginning of the laboratory session in addition to or in lieu of a pre-lab quiz. A brief introduction to the exercise presents the essential information for understanding the physiological significance of each laboratory. Offering “Comparative Notes” -- The study of physiology is most intriguing to both students and instructors when particular physiological processes are placed in the broader context of physiological adaptation. Each lab exercises offers a “Comparative Note” to introduce the student to a variety of physiological solutions to the unique challenges of a species’ environment. Expectations Clearly Defined -- Each laboratory has a clear and consistent organization: A concise statement of Purpose, Learning Objectives, Materials List, and a brief Introduction. Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations (Ph.I.L.S.) 3.0 -- This laboratory text utilizes Ph.I.L.S. where no appropriate alternative to classical animal-based experiments are available. Lab Reports -- A laboratory report follows each exercise to examine a student’s understanding of the physiological concepts investigated in the laboratory. Instructor’s Manual -- An instructor’s manual is provided online at www.mhhe.com/lutterschmidt1. Simply contact your local McGraw-Hill sales representative to obtain the appropriate user name and password. Artwork corresponds to Vander’s Human Physiology 11th edition. CONTENTS 1 Scientific Investigation 2 Homeostasis 48 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY NEW! Expanded Quizzing Types and Options -- Physiology animation quizzes have been added to Skeletal, Muscular and Nervous Systems. In addition, the user can now select the number of questions he/she wants included in each quiz (10, 25 or ALL). 3 Diffusion, Osmosis, and Tonicity 4 Enzyme Activity 5 Action Potentials 6 Reflexes 7 Sensory Physiology 8 Functional Anatomy of Muscle and Mechanics of Contraction 9 Physiology of Muscle Contraction 10 Endocrine Physiology 11 Cardiovascular Physiology 12 Physiology of Blood 13 Respiratory Physiology 14 Renal Physiology 15 Metabolic Rate NEW! Navigation and Interface changes! System selection menu makes it easy to hop between systems. A new “Smart” (Google-like) search button has been added and integrated across all systems. Tags are now color coded. All tags pertaining to the given system are one color and reference structures that are not part of that system are another color. CONTENTS Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System Nervous System Endocrine System Cardiovascular System Respiratory System Lymphatic System Digestive System Urinary System Reproductive System Human Physiology - Multimedia NEW ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2.0 ONLINE ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED VERSION 2.0 CD By Medical College of Ohio 2008 (July 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-337807-7 By Medical College of Ohio Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art tutorial uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed offers animations, radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. This tutorial can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate Anatomy & Physiology course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-337803-9 www.aprevealed.com Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art program uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed also offers animations, histologic and radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. It can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate anatomy & physiology or human anatomy course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology textbooks. CONTENTS Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System Nervous System Cardiovascular System Lymphatic System Respiratory System Urinary System Digestive System Endocrine System Reproductive System FEATURES New Organ System Added -- The Integumentary System has been added to the list of organ systems included in this program. All layers of the skin will be included and this new section will also feature histology images and full coverage of the dermis, epidermis, hair shaft, specific glands, etc. Expanded Skeletal and Joint Coverage -- The Skeletal System and Muscular System have been separated into each their own system allowing for substantially expanded information to be provided in each. The Skeletal System will now include full coverage of joint dissections. 75 NEW photos of disarticulated bones have been added. NEW Histology Section! -- Version 2.0 of Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes a new button for histology views to support every body system. Students can access this information by clicking on the microscope icon located on the navigation bar. 49 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY PH.I.L.S VERSION 3.0 CD-ROM Histology By Phillip J Stephens, Villanova University 2008 (July 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-334933-6 www.mhhe.com/phils Ph.I.L.S (Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations) 3.0 offers a new interface which makes it easier to maneuver throughout the system. There are also new post lab quizzes offering more assessment opportunities! Ph.I.L.S. 3.0 is the perfect way to reinforce key physiology concepts with powerful lab experiments. Created by Dr. Phil Stephens at Villanova University, this program offers 37 laboratory simulations that may be used to supplement or substitute for wet labs. All 37 labs are self-contained experiments - no lengthy instruction manual required. Users can adjust variables, view outcomes, make predictions, draw conclusions, and print lab reports. This easy-to-use software offers the flexibility to change the parameters of the lab experiment - there is no limit! International Edition BASIC HISTOLOGY Text & Atlas, 11th Edition By Luiz Carlos Junqueira and Jose Carneiro of University of San Paulo, Brazil 2005 / 544 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-144091-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-111888-0 [IE with CD] (A Professional Reference Title) CONTENTS CONTENTS Osmosis and Diffusion 1. Varying Extracellular Concentration Metabolism 2. Size and Basal Metabolic Rate 3. Cyanide and Electron Transport Skeletal Muscle Function 4. Stimulus Dependent Force Generation 5. The Length-Tension Relationship 6. Principles of Summation and Tetanus 7. EMG and Twitch Amplitude Resting Potentials 8. Resting Potential and External Potassium Concentration 9. Resting Potential and External Sodium Concentration Action Potentials 10. The Compound Action Potential 11. Conduction Velocity and Temperature 12. Action Potentials and Refractory Periods 13. Measuring Ion Currents Synaptic Potentials 14. Facilitation & Depression 15. Temporal Summation of EPSPs 16. Spatial Summation of EPSPs Endocrine Function 17. Thyroid Gland and Metabolic Rate Frog Heart Function 18. Thyroid and Chemical Effects 19. Refractory Period of the Heart 20. Starling’s Law of the Heart 21. Heart Block ECG and Heart Function 22. ECG and Exercise 23. The Meaning of Heart Sounds 24. ECG and Finger Pulse 25. Electrical Axis of the Heart 26. ECG and Heart Block 27. Abnormal ECGs Circulation 28. Cooling and Peripheral Blood Flow 29. Blood Pressure and Gravity 30. Blood Pressure and Body Position Blood 31. pH & Hb-oxygen Binding 32. DPG & Hb-oxygen Binding Respiration 33. Altering Body Position 34. Altering Airway Volume 35. Exercise-Induced Changes 36. Deep Breathing and Cardiac Function Digestion 37. Glucose Transport 1. Histology & Its Methods of Study 2. The Cytoplasm 3. The Cell Nucleus 4. Epithelial Tissue 5. Connective Tissue 6. Adipose Tissue 7. Cartilage 8. Bone 9. Nerve Tissue & the Nervous System 10. Muscle Tissue 11. The Circulatory System 12. Blood Cells 13. Hematopoiesis 14. The Immune System & Lymphoid Organs 15. Digestive Tract 16. Organs Associated with the Digestive Tract 17. The Respiratory System 18. Skin 19. The Urinary System 20. Hypophysis 21. Adrenals, Islets of Langerhans, Thyroid, Parathyroids, & Pineal Gland 22. The Male Reproductive System 23. The Female Reproductive System 24. Photoreceptor & Audioreceptor Systems 50 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY Pathophysiology International Edition PATHOPHYSIOLOGY Concepts and Applications for Health Care Professionals, 3rd Edition By Thomas J Nowak and A Gordon Handford of British Columbia Institute of Tech. 2004 / 752 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-027255-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-121497-1 [IE] CONTENTS Part 1 Foundation Concepts of Pathophysiology Chapter 1 Cell Injury Chapter 2 Inflammation Chapter 3 Fever Chapter 4 Healing Chapter 5 Disease of Immunity Chapter 6 Neoplasis Part 2 Systemic Pathophysiology Chapter 7 Blood Disorders Chapter 8 Hemodynamic Disorders Chapter 9 Vascular Disorders Chapter 10 Cardiac Pathophysiology Chapter 11 Circulatory Shock Chapter 12 Respiratory Pathophysiology Chapter 13 Gastrointestinal Pathophysiology Chapter 14 Hepatobiliary and Pancreatic Pathophysiology Chapter 15 Renal Pathophysiology Chapter 16 Fluid and Electrolyte Imbalances Chapter 17 Endocrine Pathophysiology Chapter 18 Skeletal and Muscular Pathophysiology Chapter 19 Reproductive Pathophysiology Chapter 20 Disorders of Central ervous System Development, Vascular Support, and Protection Chapter 21 Disorders of Movement, Sensation, and Mental Function Chapter 22 Seizures and Epilepsy Chapter 23 Pain and Pain Management Chapter 24 Trauma COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 51 ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 52 53 BIOLOGY Biology - Supplements ............................................................................................... 70 General Biology Majors - Laboratory ....................................................................................................67 - Textbook ...................................................................................................... 66 General Biology Non Majors - Laboratory ....................................................................................................61 - Textbook ...................................................................................................... 55 General Biology Non Majors & Majors Combined - Laboratory ....................................................................................................65 - Textbook ..................................................................................................... 63 Human Biology - Laboratory ....................................................................................................69 - Textbook ...................................................................................................... 69 NEW TITLES BIOLOGY 2010 Author ISBN-13 The Living World, 6e Johnson 9780077280086 55 Biology, 10e Mader 9780077274337 63 Essentials of Biology, 2e Mader 9780077280093 56 Human Biology, 11e Mader 9780077280116 69 Lab Manual Human Biology, 11e Mader 9780077235130 69 Lab Manual to accompany Biology, 10e Mader 9780077226176 65 Lab Manual to accompany Essentials of Biology, 2e Mader 9780077234256 61 2009 Author ISBN-13 Concepts in Biology, 13e Enger 9780077229962 57 Laboratory Manual to accompany Concepts in Biology, 13e Enger 9780073377926 62 Biology: Concepts and Investigations Hoefnagels 9780073342528 58 Concepts of Biology Mader 9780077229979 59 Lab Manual to accompany Concepts of Biology Mader 9780073292007 62 Page BIOLOGY 54 Page BIOLOGY General Biology - Non Majors homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on getting started with ARIS. Textbook CONTENTS NEW International Edition THE LIVING WORLD 6th Edition By George B Johnson and Jonathan Losos, Washington University-St Louis 2010 (January 2009) / 832 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-728008-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-016777-3 [IE] http://aris.mhhe.com The Living World is often considered a student favorite. George Johnson has written this non-majors textbook from the ground up to be an engaging and accessible learning tool with an emphasis on “how things work and why things happen the way they do”. The Living World focuses on concepts rather than terminology and technical information, and features a straightforward, clear writing style and a wide variety of media assets to enhance the content of the textbook. NEW TO THIS EDITION Art Tie-Ins -- Throughout the text, descriptions of the art have been incorporated into the textual discussion, encouraging the students to look at the art as they are reading the textual descriptions. In many cases, the artwork has been revised to make these rat tie-ins in the text clearer and more meaningful. A numbering system has been placed within the figures allowing the text to guide the student through particular areas of a figure. Inquiry and Analysis --This new feature appears at the end of all chapters and is intended to help students with developing their skills in analyzing and interpreting data. The author provides a 2-page discussion on the presentation of data in Chapter 1, introducing the students to the concepts of variables, relationships between variables, and presentation of data in various types of graphs. To reinforce this concept, the Inquiry and Analysis sections present the student with experimental data and help them analyze the data with a set of questions that walks them through the data. New Boxed Readings! -- The addition of boxes readings in the previous edition (i.e. Author’s Corner, Science in Action and A Closer Look) were very well received, so additional topics have been added. UPDATED TEXT WEBSITE! -- McGraw-Hill’s ARIS - Assessment, Review, and Instruction System for The Living World, 5/e is a complete electronic homework and course management system. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated 55 Part 1 The Study of Life Chapter 1 The Science of Biology Chapter 2 Evolution and Ecology Part 2 The Living Cell Chapter 3 The Chemistry of Life Chapter 4 Molecules of Life Chapter 5 Cells Chapter 6 Energy and Life Chapter 7 Photosynthesis: Acquiring Energy from the Sun Chapter 8 How Cells Harvest Energy from Food Part 3 The Continuity of Life Chapter 9 Mitosis Chapter 10 Meiosis Chapter 11 Foundations of Genetics Chapter 12 DNA: The Genetic Material Chapter 13 How Genes Work Part 4 The New Biology Chapter 14 Gene Technology Chapter 15 Genomics Chapter 16 The Revolution in Cell Technology Part 5 The Evolution and Diversity of Life Chapter 17 Evolution and Natural Selection Chapter 18 How We Name Living Things Chapter 19 The First Single-Celled Creatures Chapter20 Advent of the Eukaryotes Chapter 21 Fungi Invade the Land Part 6 Plant Life Chapter 22 Evolution of Plants Chapter 23 Plant Form and Function Chapter 24 Plant Reproduction and Growth Part 7 Evolution of Animal Life Chapter 25 Evolution of the Animal Phyla Chapter 26 History of the Vertebrates 27 How Humans Evolved Part 8 Animal Life Chapter 28 The Animal Body and How It Moves Chapter 29 Circulation Chapter 30 Respiration Chapter 31 The Path of Food Through the Animal Body Chapter 32 Maintaining the Internal Environment Chapter 33 How the Body Defends Itself Chapter 34 The Nervous System Chapter 35 Chemical Signaling Within the Animal Body Chapter 36 Reproduction and Development Part 9 The Living Environment Chapter 37 Ecosystems Chapter 38 Populations and Communities Chapter 39 Behavior and the Environment Chapter 40 Planet Under Stress BIOLOGY NEW TO THIS EDITION THE AUTHOR STORY• Sylvia Mader is the subject matter expert and learning system architect in one. Dr. Mader represents the student by paging the book and striking the proper balance of art, photo, text, and application. • Sylvia has taught millions of non-majors students the language of biology. • Her teaching experience at Mass Bay CC is what led Sylvia to making the time to design her text layout specifically to the non-majors market. NEW International Edition ESSENTIALS OF BIOLOGY 2nd Edition MADER HALLMARK WRITING STYLE-Each chapter features numerous learning aids that are carefully developed to help students grasp challenging concepts. Examples include: By Sylvia S Mader • A numbered outline at the beginning of each chapter with accompanying concept statements for the main topics in each chapter. 2010 (January 2009) / 672 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-728009-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-017227-2 [IE] • Check Your Progress questions and answers at the end of each major heading within the chapter to help students assess their understanding of the previous section. http://aris.mhhe.com • Testing Yourself questions at the end of the chapter to help students prepare for the test. Essentials of Biology is an introductory biology text for non-major students that combines Dr. Sylvia Mader’s superb and accessible writing style with clear visuals, a comprehensive learning system, and abundant supplements. Essentials of Biology explains the principles of biology clearly and illustrates them in a captivating, easy-to-understand manner. It emphasizes the relevance of biology to students’ lives within a framework of biodiversity and is organized around the major concepts of biology—cells theory, gene theory, evolution, the theory of homeostasis, and ecosystems. The three key features of Essentials of Biology include: • The boldface terms in each chapter are page referenced in an Understanding the Terms list at the end of the chapter, and a matching exercise allows students to test their knowledge of the terms. • A Thinking Scientifically section at the end of each chapter gives students the opportunity to use critical thinking skills to respond to scientific questions. • The Bioethical Issue at the end of each chapter briefly discusses a controversial issue confronting society and poses questions to help students fully consider the issue and arrive at an informed opinion. 1. Dr. Sylvia Mader’s succinct, precise writing style. Sylvia’s writing is what has earned her a reputation as one of the most successful introductory biology textbook author ever, and it is what will be most compelling in this text. Feature: Dynamic Art Program. The art in Essentials of Biology is presented in several different formats: Multilevel perspective art that provides macroscopic and microscopic views to help orient students; combination art that pairs the clarity of line drawings with the realism of micrographs; and process art that breaks down complex processes into smaller steps. In addition, consistent use of color throughout the entire art program helps students focus on the content rather than being distracted by the color. 2. A comprehensive learning system to help students get the most out of each chapter’s text content and an incredible instructional visual program. 3. Our package would not be complete without our robust media technology package with quality animations, digitized videos, OLC, and student interactive CD-ROM. Each chapter features numerous pedagogical tools that are carefully developed to help students grasp challenging concepts. These include: -A numbered outline at the beginning of each chapter with accompanying concept statements for the main topics in each chapter. A comprehensive learning system Every chapter begins with a list of key concepts that will be covered in the chapter, and Check Your Progress questions are presented throughout the chapter so students can periodically assess their understanding of those concepts. The chapter is summarized using text and figures, and questions of varying levels of difficulty are provided at the end of each chapter to help students gauge their cumulative understanding of the material. - Check Your Progress questions and answers at the end of each major heading within the chapter to help students assess their understanding of the previous section. Applications to Real LifeEach chapter opens with several captivating photos and an accompanying brief vignette that relates to students’ lives. - The boldface terms in each chapter are page referenced in an Understanding the Terms list at the end of the chapter, and a matching exercise allows students to test their knowledge of the terms. Bioethical Issues The Bioethical Issue at the end of each chapter briefly discusses a controversial issue confronting society and poses questions to help students fully consider the issue and arrive at an opinion. - A Thinking Scientifically section at the end of each chapter gives students the opportunity to use critical thinking skills to respond to scientific questions. - The Bioethical Issue at the end of each chapter briefly discusses a controversial issue confronting society and poses questions to help students fully consider the issue and arrive at an opinion. Short, cost efficient paperbound text Outstanding media study tools for students. • The Online Learning Center (OLC) provides study aids such as chapter quizzes, art exercises, flashcards, case studies, and access to an online tutor. -Numbered summary at the end of the chapter to help students review. • The quizzes and other tutorial exercises from the OLC, as well as animations of key biological processes, are on the Student Interactive CD. -Testing Yourself objective questions at the end of the chapter to help students prepare for the test. 56 BIOLOGY areas. The new, 13th edition is the latest and most exciting revision of a respected introductory biology text written by authors who know how to reach students through engaging writing, interesting issues and applications, and accessible level. Instructors will appreciate the book’s scientific accuracy, complete coverage and extensive supplement package. CONTENTS 1 A View of Life Part 1 The Cell 2 The Chemical Basis of Life 3 The Organic Molecules of Life 4 Inside the Cell 5 The Dynamic Cell 6 Energy for Life 7 Energy for Cells Part 2 Genetics 8 Cellular Reproduction 9 Sexual Reproduction 10 Patterns of Inheritance 11 DNA Biology and Technology 12 Gene Regulation and Cancer 13 Genetic Counseling Part 3 Evolution 14 Darwin and Evolution 15 Evolution on a Small Scale 16 Evolution on a Large Scale Part 4 Diversity of Life 17 The First Forms of Life 18 Land Environment: Plants and Fungi 19 Both Water and Land: Animals Part 5 Plant Structure and Function 20 Plant Anatomy and Growth 21 Plant Responses and Reproduction Part 6 Animal Structure and Function 22 Being Organized and Steady 23 The Transport Systems 24 The Maintenance Systems 25 Human Nutrition 26 Defenses Against Disease 27 The Control Systems 28 Sensory Input and Motor Output 29 Reproduction and Development Part 7 Ecology 30 Ecology of Populations 31 Communities and Ecosystems 32 Human Impact on the Biosphere NEW TO THIS EDITION McGraw-Hill’s ARIS – Assessment, Review, and Instruction System is a complete, online tutorial, electronic homework, and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. For students, ARIS contains self-study tools such as animations, interactive quizzes, and more. This program enables students to complete their homework online, as assigned by their instructors. ARIS provides all instructor resources online, as well provides the ability to create or edit questions from the question bank, import your own content, and automatically grade and report easy-to-assign homework, quizzing, and testing. Go to www.aris. mhhe.com to learn more. Presentation Center - Build instructional materials wherever, whenever, and however you want! Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, animations, PowerPoints, and other types of media that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. Access to your book, access to all books! This ever-growing resource gives instructors the power to utilize assets specific to their adopted textbook as well as content from other McGraw-Hill books in the library. Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows you to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. All assets are copyrighted by McGraw-Hill Higher Education but can be used by instructors for classroom purposes. CONTENTS Part I Introduction 1 What is Biology? Part II Cornerstones: Chemistry, Cells, and Metabolism 2 The Basics of Life: Chemistry 3 Organic Molecules-The Molecules of Life 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Enzymes, Coenzymes, and Energy 6 Biochemical Pathways-Cellular Respiration 7 Biochemical Pathways-Photosynthesis Part III Molecular Biology, Cell Division and Genetics 8 DNA and RNA: The Molecular Basis of Heredity 9 Cell Division 10 Patterns of Inheritance 11 Applications of Biotechnology Part IV Evolution and Ecology 12 Diversity within Species and Population Genetics 13 Evolution and Natural Selection 14 The Formation of Species and Evolutionary Change 15 Ecosystem Dynamics: The Flow of Energy and Matter 16 Community Interactions 17 Population Ecology 18 Evolutionary and Ecological Aspects of Behavior Part V The Origin and Classification of Life 19 The Origin of Life and Evolution of Cells 20 The Classification and Evolution of Organisms 21 The Nature of Microorganisms 22 The Plant Kingdom 23 The Animal Kingdom Part VI Physiological Processes 24 Materials Exchange in the Body 25 Nutrition: Food and Diet 26 The Body’s Control Mechanisms and Immunity 27 Human Reproduction, Sex, and Sexuality NEW International Edition CONCEPTS IN BIOLOGY 13th Edition By Eldon Enger, Frederick C Ross and David Bailey of Delta College 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722996-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-128789-0 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/enger13e Enger/Ross/Bailey: Concepts in Biology is a relatively brief introductory general biology text written for students with no previous science background. The authors strive to use the most accessible vocabulary and writing style possible while still maintaining scientific accuracy. The text covers all the main areas of study in biology from cells through ecosystems. Evolution and ecology coverage are combined in Part Four to emphasize the relationship between these two main subject 57 BIOLOGY Content. This new text offers a modern approach to genetics and comprehensive units on evolution and biological diversity. Unit 4 includes a unique feature, “Focus on Model Organisms,” that are frequently used in biological research. NEW International Edition Ancillary Program. The instructor and student supplements package will be in this non-majros market. You will find all illustrations ( over 500) in the transparency set, all art and photographs from the text on a Instructors Presentation CD ROM, over 300 life science animations for classroom presentation, Active Art, Animations developed from text specific illustrations, Student and Instructor Online Learning Center and a Course Solutions staff who can help you pull it all together. BIOLOGY Concepts and Investigations By Marielle Hoefnagels, University of OklahomaNorman Chapter by Chapter color customization -Professors now have the option to select only the chapters they cover in lecture and lab allowing students savings in book costs. 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-334252-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-128801-9 [IE] CONTENTS http://www.mhhe.com/hoefnagels This new non-majors biology textbook offers an engaging writing style, strong focus on scientific inquiry and evolution, an emphasis on applications and a superior pedagogical system within a concepts format. Content: This text takes a concepts approach, with up-to-date content delivered at a nonmajors level. Each chapter is built around a set of core concepts. Authorship: This is the only single-authored, non-majors text written by a Ph.D. biologist, who is an active, tenured, award-winning teacher from a well-respected research university. Scientific Inquiry: This text emphasizes science as a process and how scientists do their work. Evolution: Evolution is the central theme of the text and addressed in multiple way throughout. Media: This text includes a multitude of media assets include learning outcomes, animations, videos, and quizzing. Applications: The text several features that highlight the relevance of topics to readers, including an opening essays, Burning Questions boxed readings, Can You Relate boxed readings, and applications woven throughout all chapters in the narrative. Art/Visuals: This text includes a brand new art program with a 3dimensional look and feel, using consistent color and style throughout. Pedagogy: Leaning tools in this text include two-page chapter openers, numbered concepts, boxed readings, Mastering Concepts questions at the end of major sections, and substantive end-of-chapter assessment material. FEATURES Marielle Hoefnagels is an assistant professor on the faculty of the departments of Botany/Microbiology and Zoology at The University of Oklahoma. She received her Ph.D in plant pathology from Oregon State University in 1997. She is an award-winning teacher. Investigating Life: each chapter’s capstone concept focuses on a scientific study that shed light on an evolutionary topic. In each case, the emphasis is on how scientists developed and tested a specific hypothesis. Often illustrating the work of global teams of researchers, these reinforce the connections between multiple fields of biology. Beautiful color-coordinated art and photo program, developed with the purpose of addressing student learning styles. Each art figure has been thoroughly analyzed by the development team, our faculty consultant group, and by the author. 58 Unit 1: The Cellular Basis of Life 1. What is Life? 2. The Chemistry of Life 3. The Dynamic Cell 4. The Energy of Life 5. Photosynthesis 6. How Cells Release Energy Unit 2: The Molecular Basis of Life 7. DNA Structure and Replication 8. The Cell Cycle 9. Sexual Reproduction and Meiosis 10. Patterns of Inheritance 11. Chromosomes and Human Inheritance Patterns 12. Gene Function, Gene Regulation, and Biotechnology Unit 3: The Evolution of Life 13. The Forces of Evolutionary Change 14. Speciation and Extinction 15. Evidence for Evolution 16. The Origin and History of Life Unit 4: The Diversity of Life 17. Viruses and Simple Infectious Agents 18. Bacteria and Archaea 19. Protista 20. Plants 21. Fungi 22. Animals I – Invertebrates 23. Animals II – Vertebrates Unit 5: Plant Life 24. Plant Form and Function 25. Plant Nutrition and Transport 26. Reproduction and Development of Flowering Plants Unit 6: Animal Life 27. Animal Tissues, Organ Systems and Homeostasis 28. The Nervous System 29. The Sensory System 30. The Endocrine System 31. The Musculoskeletal System 32. The Circulatory System 33. The Respiratory System 34. Digestion and Animal Nutrition 35. Regulation of Temperature and Body Fluids 36. The Immune System 37. Animal Reproduction and Development Unit 7: The Ecology of Life 38. Animal Behavior 39. Populations 40. Communities and Ecosystems 41. The Biosphere 42. Conserving Biodiversity BIOLOGY Writing Style. Continuing with the Mader tradition, reviewers tout the writing style of Concepts of Biology as logical, easy to read, and at a level appropriate to the non-major student. NEW Art Program. The artwork in Mader’s Concepts of Biology is dynamic and dimensional to engage students. Some of the key features include: clarity and effectiveness of presentation, consistent use of color, inclusion of figures with multi-level perspective (macroscopic to microscopic), use of process figures to break down complex processes, and placement of all art and photos on the same page as the associated text. International Edition CONCEPTS OF BIOLOGY By Sylvia S Mader 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722997-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-128315-1 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/maderconcepts Instructors consistently ask for a textbook that helps students understand the relationships between the main concepts of biology, so they are not learning facts about biology in isolation. Mader’s Concepts of Biology was developed to fill this void. Organized around the main themes of biology, Concepts of Biology guides students to think conceptually about biology and the world around them. Just as the levels of biological organization flow from one level to the next, themes and topics in Concepts of Biology are tied to one another throughout the chapter, and between the chapters and parts. Combined with Dr. Mader’s hallmark writing style, exceptional art program, and pedagogical framework, difficult concepts become easier to understand and visualize, allowing students to focus on understanding how the concepts are related. FEATURES Relationships Between Concepts Are Emphasized. The content in Mader’s Concepts of Biology is organized around the main themes of biology (Cells, Genes, Evolution, Homeostasis, and Ecology), and relationships among the concepts are highlighted in several key ways: careful transitions between the sections, chapters, and parts; the Connecting the Concepts feature at the end of each chapter that ties together the concepts of the chapter and explains how they relate to the concepts of the next chapter; and the Biological Viewpoints feature at the end of each Part that gives students a take-home message about the major concepts of the Part. Learning System. The pedagogical tools in Concepts of Biology were developed to help students organize the content and to further the goal of showing relationships among concepts. A short reading opens the chapter and engages students with interesting information that they may not readily know. The information is tied to the concepts that will be covered in the chapter. Learning Outcomes give students a snapshot of the key concepts they will need to understand, and the outcomes are referred to throughout the chapter. Within the chapter, full-phrase headings are used to clearly capture the main concepts. An introduction at the beginning of each main section orients students to the material that follows. Check Your Progress questions appear at the end of each section so students can self-assess how well they understood the material, and when effective, the questions relate back to the chapter-opening reading to help students relate the concepts to an example. Each chapter ends with an illustrated, bulleted summary, and review questions. The review questions include multiple-choice questions and open-ended, critical thinking questions organized by the main headings of the chapter to help students more efficiently organize their study. Relevancy. Two types of readings appear periodically in each chapter--How Biology Impacts Our Lives and How Science Progresses—to present concepts in the context of real-life events. In addition, analogies, a strength of Dr. Mader’s writing style, aid students in understanding difficult concepts. 59 Media: Teaching and Learning with Technology. Mader’s Concepts of Biology is accompanied by a vast array of electronic teaching and learning tools, including animations and videos with quizzing, pre-tests, practice quizzes, post-tests, and on-line labs. The ARIS website for Concepts of Biology is organized by the main headings in the textbook to further help students build upon the learning outcomes in the textbook and assess performance. A vast array of presentation and course management tools are also provided for use by instructors to enhance their lectures and manage their classrooms more effectively. Finally, we at McGraw-Hill are committed to offering electronic book and customized print options to best fit your needs. Full-Color Customization. Professors have the option of creating a customized version of the text by selecting only the chapters they cover in lecture, providing students with significant savings in book costs. Customization can occur in two ways: -- Chapter-by-chapter color customized printed book or a full-color Primis eBook. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Biology is the Study of Life Part I: Organisms are Composed of Cells Chapter 2: Basic Chemistry and Cells Chapter 3: Organic Molecules and Cells Chapter 4: Structure and Function of Cells Chapter 5: Dynamic Activities of Cells Chapter 6: Pathways of Photosynthesis Chapter 7: Pathways of Cellular Respiration Part II: Genes Control the Traits of Organisms Chapter 8: Cell Division and Reproduction Chapter 9: Patterns of Genetic Inheritance Chapter 10: Molecular Biology of Inheritance Chapter 11: Regulation of Gene Activity Chapter 12: Biotechnology and Genomics Part III: Organisms are Related and Adapted to their Environment Chapter 13: Darwin and Evolution Chapter 14: Speciation and Evolution Chapter 15: The History and Classification of Life on Earth Chapter 16: Evolution of Microbial Life Chapter 17: Evolution of Protists Chapter 18: Evolution of Plants and Fungi Chapter 19: Evolution of Animals Chapter 20: Evolution of Humans Part IV: Plants are Homeostatic Chapter 21: Plant Organization and Homeostasis Chapter 22: Nutrition and Transport in Plants Chapter 23: Regulation of Growth and Responses in Plants Chapter 24: Reproduction and Development of Plants Part V: Animals are Homeostatic Chapter 25: Animal Organization and Homeostasis Chapter 26: Coordination by Neural Signaling Chapter 27: Sense Organs Chapter 28: Locomotion and Support Systems Chapter 29: Circulation and Cardiovascular Systems Chapter 30: Lymph Transport and Immunity Chapter 31: Digestive Systems and Nutrition Chapter 32: Gas Exchange and Transport in Animals Chapter 33: Osmoregulation and Excretion Chapter 34: Coordination by Hormone Signaling Chapter 35: Reproduction and Development BIOLOGY Part 7 Plant Life 33 Plant Form and Function 34 Plant Reproduction and Growth Part VI: Organisms Live in Ecosystems Chapter 36: Population Ecology Chapter 37: Behavioral Ecology Chapter 38: Community and Ecosystem Ecology Chapter 39: Major Ecosystems of the Biosphere Chapter 40: Conservation of Biodiversity International Edition INQUIRY INTO LIFE 12th Edition International Edition By Sylvia S Mader 2008 (February 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-330933-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-110213-1 [IE] ESSENTIALS OF THE LIVING WORLD 2nd Edition By George Johnson and Jonathan Losos of Washington University -St Louis 2008 (October 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-330935-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-110211-7 [IE] http://aris.mhhe.com http://aris.mhhe.com Cutting edge biological concepts delivered with a greater emphasis on evolution and a logical use of analogies. This textbook was written from the ground up to be an engaging and accessible learning tool with an emphasis on “how things work and why things happen the way they do”. This Essentials textbook features a straightforward, clear writing style and a wide variety of media assets to enhance the content of the textbook. The strength of the second edition is the integration of many tools that are designed to inspire both students and instructors. The multi-media package for the new edition stretches students beyond the confines of the traditional textbook to include high interest video clips and animations of key biological concepts. CONTENTS Part 1 The Study of Life 1 The Science of Biology 2 Evolution and Ecology Part 2 The Living Cell 3 The Chemistry of Life 4 Molecules of Life 5 Cells 6 Energy and Life 7 Photosynthesis: Acquiring Energy from the Sun 8 How Cells Harvest Energy from Food Part 3 The Continuity of Life 9 Mitosis 10 Meiosis 11 Foundations of Genetics 12 DNA: The Genetic Material 13 How Genes Work 14 The New Biology Part 4 The Evolution and Diversity of Life 15 Evolution and Natural Selection 16 Exploring Biological Diversity 17 Evolution of Microbial Life 18 Evolution of Plants 19 Evolution of Animals Part 5 The Living Environment 20 Ecosystems 21 Populations and Communities 22 Behavior and the Environment 23 Plant Under Stress Part 6 Animal Life 24 The Animal Body and How It Moves 25 Circulation 26 Respiration 27 The Path of Food Through the Animal Body 28 Maintaining the Internal Environment 29 How the Body Defends Itself 30 The Nervous System 31 Chemical Signaling Within the Animal Body 32 Reproduction and Development 60 From the unique delivery of biology content, to the time tested art program, to the complete integration of the text with technology, Dr. Sylvia Mader has formed a teaching system that will both motivate and enable your students to understand and appreciate the wonders of all areas of biology. Inquiry into Life, 12/e emphasizes the application of all areas of biology to knowledge of human concerns, what the students are able to relate to. This distinctive text was developed to stand apart from all other non-majors texts with a unique approach, unparalleled art, and a straightforward, succinct writing style that has been acclaimed by both users and reviewers. CONTENTS 1 Exploring Life and Science Part I Human Organization 2 Chemistry of Life 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Organization and Regulation of Body Systems Part II Maintenance of the Human Body 5 Cardiovascular System: Heart and Blood Vessels 6 Cardiovascular System: Blood 7 Lymphatic System and Immunity ** 8 Digestive System and Nutrition 9 Respiratory System 10 Urinary System and Excretion Part III Movement and Support in Humans 11 Skeletal System 12 Muscular System Part IV Integration and Coordination in Humans 13 Nervous System 14 Senses 15 Endocrine System Part V Reproduction in Humans 16 Reproductive System 17 Development and Aging Part VI Human Genetics 18 Patterns of Chromosome Inheritance ** 19 Cancer 20 Patterns of Genetic Inheritance ** 21 DNA Biology and Technology ** Part VII Human Evolution and Ecology 22 Human Evolution 23 Global Ecology 24 Human Population, Planetary Resources, and Conservation BIOLOGY Laboratory International Edition BIOLOGY Dimensions of Life By Joelle C Presson, University of Maryland-College Park and Janann Jenner 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-322736-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-110214-8 [IE] NEW http://aris.mhhe.com Presson/Jenner: Biology: Dimensions of Life, 1e is a one-semester biology text with an engaging, conversational style which encourages basic understanding of biology, issues, and applications leading students to a greater awareness of how they interact with the world around them. The goal of this text is to help students understand how biology relates to their lives and why they should develop a desire to obtain knowledge about science and biological issues. LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY ESSENTIALS OF BIOLOGY 2nd Edition By Sylvia Mader 2010 (February 2009) / 352 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-723425-6 CONTENTS CONTENTS Chapter 1: The Framework of Biology Part I: Biological Chemistry, Cells, and Cellular Processes Chapter 2: Life Emerges from Chemistry: Atoms and Molecules Chapter 3: Biological Molecules Chapter 4: Life is Cellular: Cell Structure and Function Chapter 5: Life Uses Chemical Energy: Energy and Life Chapter 6: Engine of Life: Photosynthesis and Glucose Metabolism Part II: Reproduction of Cells and Inheritance Chapter 7: The Master Molecule of Life: DNA: Structure and Function Chapter 8: Life Renews Itself: Reproduction of Cells Chapter 9: Constructing Life: The Control of Eukaryotic Gene Expression Chapter 10: Rules of Inheritance: Classical Genetics Part III: Applying Your Knowledge of Cells and Cellular Processes Chapter 11: Biotechnology (Applications chapter) Chapter 12: The Biology and Treatment of Cancer (Applications chapter) Part IV: Evolution and Diversity of Life Chapter 13: Life Evolves: Darwin and the Science of Evolution Chapter 14: All Life is Related: Understanding Biological Diversity Chapter 15: Varieties of Life: Prokaryotes, Single-Celled Eukaryotes, and Algae Chapter 16: Varieties of Life: Fungi and Animals Chapter 17: Varieties of Life: Plants Part V: Applying Your Knowledge of Biological Diversity Chapter 18: The Value of Biological Diversity (Applications chapter) Part VI: Plant Biology Chapter 19: The Living Plant: Plant Structure and Function Chapter 20: The Thread of Life: Reproduction of Seed Plants Part VII: Human Biology Chapter 21: Nerves, Senses, Bones, Muscles Chapter 22: Nutrition and Digestion Chapter 23: Circulation, Respiration, and Excretion Chapter 24: Hormones, Reproduction, and Early Development Part VIII: Applying Your Knowledge of Human Biology Chapter 25: Human Control of Reproduction (Applications chapter) Chapter 26: The Immune System and Emergent Diseases (Applications chapter) Part IX: Ecology Chapter 27: Ecology: Populations and Communities Chapter 28: Ecosystems and Biomes Part X: Applying Your Knowledge of Ecology Chapter 29: Human Impact Upon the Earth (Applications chapter) 1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Enzymes 5 Cellular Respiration 6 Photosynthesis 7 Mitosis and Meiosis 8 Patterns of Inheritance 9 DNA Biology and Technology 10 Genetic Counseling 11 Evidences of Evolution 12 Microbiology 13 Seedless Plants and Seed Plants 14 Plant Anatomy and Growth 15 Animal Diversity 16 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 17 Cardiovascular System 18 Chemical Aspects of Digestion 19 Basic Mammalian Anatomy II 20 Nervous System and Senses 21 Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems Appendix A: Metric System Practical Examination Answer Sheet INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 61 BIOLOGY NEW NEW LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY CONCEPTS IN BIOLOGY 13th Edition LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY CONCEPTS OF BIOLOGY By Sylvia S Mader By Eldon Enger and Frederick Ross of Delta College 2009 (April 2008) / 392 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-329200-7 2009 (February 2008) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337792-6 CONTENTS CONTENTS 1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy Part 1 Concepts of Cell Biology 3 Chemical Composition of Cells 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 How Enzymes Function 6 Photosynthesis 7 Cellular Respiration Part 2 Concepts of Genetics 8 Mitosis and Meiosis 9 Mendelian Genetics 10 Human Genetics 11 DNA Biology and Technology Part 3 Concepts of Evolution 12 Evidences of Evolution 13 Diversity: Bacteria, Protists, and Fungi 14 Diversity: Plants 15 Diversity: Animals Part 4 Concepts of Plant Biology 16 Organization of Flowering Plants 17 Reproduction of Flowering Plants Part 5 Concepts of Animal Biology 18 Animal Organization and Structure 19 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 20 Basic Mammalian Anatomy II 21 Physiology of the Digestive System 22 Physiology of Excretory Organs 23 Physiology of the Nervous System 24 Animal Development Part 6 Concepts of Ecology 25 Symbiotic Relationships 26 Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems Lab Exercise 1: Metric Measurement and the Scientific Method Lab Exercise 2: Atoms and Molecules Lab Exercise 3: Diffusion and Osmosis Lab Exercise 4: Structure of Some Organic Molecules Lab Exercise 5: The Microscope Lab Exercise 6: Survey of Cell Types: Structure and Function Lab Exercise 7: Enzymes Lab Exercise 8: Photosynthesis and Respiration Lab Exercise 9: The Chemistry and Ecology of Yogurt Production Lab Exercise 10: DNA and RNA: Structure and Function Lab Exercise 11: Mitosis-Cell Division Lab Exercise 12: Meiosis Lab Exercise 13: DNA Extraction Lab Exercise 14: Genetics Problems Lab Exercise 15: Genetic Ratios and Chi-Square Analysis Lab Exercise 16: Human Variation Lab Exercise 17: Sensory Abilities Lab Exercise 18: Population Demographics Lab Exercise 19: Population Genetics Simulation Lab Exercise 20: Bacterial Selection Lab Exercise 21: The Effect of Abiotic Factors on Habitat Preference Lab Exercise 22: Successional Changes in Vegetation Lab Exercise 23: Behavioral Differences in Small Mammals Lab Exercise 24: Plant Life Cycles Lab Exercise 25: Plant Structure and Function Lab Exercise 26: Natural Selection Lab Exercise 27: Species Diversity Lab Exercise 28: Frog Dissection Lab Exercise 29: Roll Call of the Animals Lab Exercise 30: Intraspecific and Interspecific Competition Appendix A: Chi-Square (Goodness of Fit) Test Appendix B: Math Review 62 BIOLOGY General Biology Non Majors & Majors Combined LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY INQUIRY INTO LIFE 12th Edition By Sylvia Mader 2008 (April 2007) / 512 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-298682-2 The laboratory exercises in this manual are coordinated with Inquiry into Life. The text emphasizes how we can apply biological knowledge to our own lives and to our relationships with other organisms. Although each laboratory is referenced to the appropriate chapter in Inquiry into Life, this manual may be used in coordination with other general biology texts. This manual can be adapted to a variety of course orientations and designs. There are a sufficient number of laboratories to permit a choice of activities over the length of the course. Many activities may be performed as demonstrations rather than as student activities, thereby shortening the time required to cover a particular concept. Textbook NEW International Edition BIOLOGY 10th Edition CONTENTS To the Instructor To the Student Laboratory Safety Part 1 Cell Biology 1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Chemical Composition of Cells 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Mitosis and Meiosis 6 Enzymes 7 Cellular Respiration Part 2 Plant Biology 8 Photosynthesis 9 Organization of Flowering Plants 10 Reproduction in Flowering Plants Part 3 Maintenance of the Human Body 11 Animal Organization 12 Chemical Aspects of Digestion 13 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 14 Cardiovascular System 15 Features of the Cardiovascular System 16 Basic Mammalian Anatomy II 17 Homeostasis Part 4 Integration and Control of the Human Body 18 Nervous System and Senses 19 Musculoskeletal System Part 5 Continuance of the Species 20 Development 21 Patterns of Inheritance 22 DNA Biology and Technology 23 Genetic Counseling Part 6 Evolution and Diversity 24 Evidences of Evolution 25 Microbiology 26 Seedless Plants 27 Seed Plants 28 Introduction to Invertebrates 29 Molluscs, Annelids, and Arthropods 30 Echinoderms and Chordates Part 7 Behavior and Ecology 31 Sampling Ecosystems 32 Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems Appendix A Preparing a Laboratory Report Laboratory Report Form Appendix B Metric System Appendix C Classification of Organisms By Sylvia S Mader 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727433-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-128844-6 [IE] http://aris.mhhe.com Biology is a comprehensive introductory biology textbook for nonmajors or mixed-majors courses that covers biology in a traditional order from the structure and function of the cell to the organization of the biosphere. The book, which centers on the evolution and diversity of organisms, is appropriate for a one- or two-semester course. It’s no wonder that Sylvia Mader’s Biology continues to be a text that’s appreciated as much by instructors as it is by the students who use it. The ninth edition is the epitome of Mader’s expertise: Its concise, precise writing uses an economy of words to present the material as succinctly and clearly as possible, thereby enabling students -- even non-majors -- to understand the concepts without necessarily asking the instructor to explain further. NEW TO THIS EDITION THE MADER AUTHOR STORY• Sylvia Mader is the subject matter expert and learning system architect in one. Dr. Mader represents the student by paging the book and striking the proper balance of art, photo, text, and application. • Sylvia has taught millions of non-majors students the language of biology. • Her teaching experience at Mass Bay CC is what led Sylvia to making the time to design her text layout specifically to the non-majors market. Phonetic pronunciations have been added to the Glossary. KEY CONTENT UPDATES -These are based on reviewer suggestions and biological discoveries: Overview of Change to Biology, Tenth Edition Visuals: The brilliant visual program of the previous edition is enhanced even more by the addition many new micrographs and innovative page layouts. Cellular Biology: Cell signaling receives expanded coverage as a mechanism of cellular metabolism and cell division control. Genetics: Reorganization of the genetics chapters results in increased genome coverage including the role of small RNA molecules in regulation Systematics: Cladistics is better explained and new evolutionary trees are presented for protists, plants, and animals. Evolution: A new chapter “Speciation and Microevolution” points to the possible role of Hox genes in punctuated evolution. Plant Evolution: A reorganization of chapter 23 better describes the evolution of plants from an aquatic green algal ancestor. 63 BIOLOGY CHEMISTRY, CELL BIOLOGY AND GENETICS Volume 1 Animal Evolution: Reorganization of part VI results in two new animal diversity chapters: the invertebrates and the vertebrates. Approximately 70 animations of key biological processes accompany Biology 10e. Approximately 50 of these animations are available in a Spanish version. By Robert J Brooker, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis 2008 / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-335332-6 McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips DVD. Licensed from some of the highest-quality science video producers in the world, these brief segments range from 15 seconds to two minutes in length and cover all areas of general biology from cells to ecosystems. http://www.brookerbiology.com All text, artwork, and photos necessary to understand a particular concept (e.g., prokaryotic vs. eukaryotic replication) appear either on the same page or facing pages. This Volume of BIOLOGY covers Chemistry, Cell Biology, and Genetics. The Brooker et. al text features an evolutionary focus with an emphasis on scientific inquiry. CONTENTS 1 Introduction Unit 1 Chemistry 2 The Chemical Basis of Life: Atoms, Molecules, and Solutions 3 The Chemical Basis of Life: Macromolecules Unit 2 Cell 4 General Features of Cells 5 Membrane Structure and Transport 6 System Biology of Cell Organization 7 Enzymes, Metabolism and Cellular Respiration 8 Photosynthesis 9 Cell Communication and Regulation of the Cell Cycle 10 Multicellularity Unit 3 Genetics 11 Nucleic Acid Structure and DNA Replication 12 Gene Expression at the Molecular Level 13 Gene Regulation 14 Mutation, DNA Repair, and Cancer 15 Eukaryotic Chromosomes, Mitosis, and Meiosis 16 Simle Patterns of Inheritance 17 Complex Patterns of Inheritance 18 Genetics of Bacteria and Viruses 19 Developmental Genetics 20 Genetic Technology 21 Genomes, Proteomes, and Bioinformatics CONTENTS 1 A View of Life Part I THE CELL 2 Basic Chemistry 3 The Chemistry of Organic Molecules 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Membrane Structure and Function 6 Metabolism: Energy and Enzymes 7 Photosynthesis 8 Cellular Respiration Part II GENETIC BASIS OF LIFE 9 The Cell Cycle and Cellular Reproduction 10 Meiosis and Sexual Reproduction 11 Mendelian Patterns of Inheritance 12 Molecular Biology of the Gene 13 Regulation of Gene Activity 14 Biotechnology and Genomics Part III EVOLUTION 15 Darwin and Evolution 16 How Populations Evolve 17 Speciation and Macroevolution 18 Origin and History of Life 19 Systematics and Phylogeny Part IV MICROBIOLOGY and EVOLUTION 20 Viruses, Bacteria, and Archaea 21 Protist Evolution and Diversity 22 Fungi Evolution and Diversity Part V PLANT EVOLUTION and BIOLOGY 23 Plant Evolution and Diversity 24 Flowering Plants: Structure and Organization 25 Flowering Plants: Nutrition and Organization 26 Flowering Plants: Control of Growth Responses 27 Flowering Plants: Reproduction Part VI ANIMAL EVOLUTION and DIVERSITY 28 Invertebrates 29 Vertebrates 30 Human Evolution Part VII COMPARATIVE ANIMAL BIOLOGY 31 Animal Organization and Homeostasis 32 Circulation and Cardiovascular Systems 33 Lymph Transport and Immunity 34 Digestive Systems and Nutrition 35 Respiratory Systems 36 Body Fluid Regulation and Excretory Systems 37 Neurons and Nervous Systems 38 Sense Organs 39 Locomotion and Support Systems 40 Hormones and Endocrine Systems 41 Reproductive Systems 42 Animal Development Part VIII BEHAVIOR and ECOLOGY 43 Behavioral Ecology 44 Population Ecology 45 Community and Ecosystem Ecology 46 Major Ecosystems of the Biosphere 47 Conservation of Biodiversi International Edition LIFE 6th Edition By Ricki Lewis, SUNY-at Albany, Bruce Parker, Utah Valley State College-Orem, Douglas Gaffin and Marielle Hoefnagels of University of Oklahoma-Norman 2007 (Jan 2006) / 1024 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-110690-0 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/life6 Classroom concepts “come to life” with this exciting new edition of Life by Lewis, Parker, Gaffin and Hoefnagels. For over 15 years, Life has been known for its ability to weave together solid biology content with interesting stories, real-life case studies and applications to student life. The sixth edition offers the depth of content, pedagogical organization, accuracy and visual appeal to serve both majors and non-majors biology students. CONTENTS Unit 1 From Atoms to Cells 1 What is Life? 2 Of Atoms and Molecules: Chemistry Basics 3 Life’s Chemistry 4 Cells 5 The Cell Surface and Cytoskeleton 6 The Energy of Life 7 Photosynthesis 8 How Cells Release Energy Unit 2 Genetics & Biotechnology 64 BIOLOGY Laboratory 9 The Cell Cycle 10 Meiosis 11 How Inherited Traits are Transmitted 12 Chromosomes 13 DNA Structure and Function 14 Genetic Technology Unit 3 Evolution 15 The Evolution of Evolutionary Thought 16 The Forces of Evolutionary Change--Microevolution 17 Speciation and Extinction 18 Evidence for Evolution 19 The Origin and History of Life Unit 4 The Diversity of Life 20 Viruses 21 Bacteria and Archaea 22 Protista 23 Plantae 24 Fungi 25 Animalia I: Sponges Through Echinoderms 26 Animalia II: Chordates Unit 5 Plant Life 27 Plant Form and Function 28 Plant Nutrition and Transport 29 Reproduction of Flowering Plants 30 Plant Responses to Stimuli Unit 6 Animal Life 31 Animal Tissues and Organ Systems 32 The Nervous System 33 The Senses 34 The Endocrine System 35 The Musculoskeletal System 36 The Circulatory System 37 The Respiratory System 38 Digestion and Nutrition 39 Regulation of Temperature and Body Fluids 40 The Immune System 41 Human Reproduction and Development Unit 7 Behavior and Ecology 42 Animal Behavior 43 Populations 44 Communities and Ecosystems 45 Biomes and Aquatic Ecosystems 46 Environmental Challenges NEW LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY BIOLOGY 10th Edition By Sylvia S Mader 2010 (January 2009) / 544 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-722617-6 The Laboratory Manual to accompany Biology reflects all of the exceptional features of the Biology text. Instructors appreciate the refined exercises that are so numerous you won’t need to look anywhere else for student activities. Author Sylvia Mader’s writing in the laboratory manual, just as in the text, emphasizes clarity, with carefully worded study questions that are direct in their intent and purpose. The lab manual’s accessible writing accompanies unparalleled illustrations to provide students with clear exercises and questions. The visuals have been updated to be even easier for students--both majors and non-majors--to comprehend. The dramatic illustrations and photographs not only help students understand concepts and process, but also give them an appreciation for the beauty of organisms and biological structure. McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips on the accompanying DVD will capture students’ interest while illustrating key biological concepts and processes. CONTENTS Laboratory 1: Scientific Method Laboratory 2: Metric Measurement and Microscopy Laboratory 3: Chemical Composition of Cells Laboratory 4: Cell Structure and Function Laboratory 5: How Enzymes Function Laboratory 6: Photosynthesis Laboratory 7: Cellular Respiration Laboratory 8: Mitosis and Meiosis Laboratory 9: Mendelian Genetics Laboratory 10: Human Genetics Laboratory 11: DNA Biology and Technology Laboratory 12: Evidences of Evolution Laboratory 13: Mechanisms in Evolution: Genetic Drift and Natural Selection Laboratory 14: Bacteria and Protists Laboratory 15: Fungi Laboratory 16: Nonvascular Plants and Seedless Vascular Plants Laboratory 17: Seed Plants Laboratory 18: Organization of Flowering Plants Laboratory 19: Water Absorption and Transport in Plants Laboratory 20: Control of Plant Growth and Responses Laboratory 21: Reproduction in Flowering Plants Laboratory 22: Introduction to Invertebrates Laboratory 23: Invertebrate Coelomates Laboratory 24: The Vertebrates Laboratory 25: Animal Organization Laboratory 26: Basic Mammalian Anatomy I Laboratory 27: Basic Mammalian Anatomy II Laboratory 28: Chemical Aspects of Digestion Laboratory 29: Homeostasis Laboratory 30: Nervous System and Senses Laboratory 31: Musculoskeletal System Laboratory 32: Animal Development Laboratory 33: Symbiotic Relationships Laboratory 34: Sampling Ecosystems Laboratory 35: Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 65 BIOLOGY International Edition SCHAUM’S 3000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN BIOLOGY By Stephen Bernstein and Ruth Bernstein of University of Colorado at Boulder 1989 / 406 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-005022-8 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-099157-6 [IE] A Schaum’s Publication (International Edition is not for sale in Japan) CONTENTS Chemistry of Life. Molecular Genetics. Inheritance. Evolution. Diversity of Life. History of Life: Major Patterns. Plants: Form and Function. Animals: Form and Function. Ecology. General Biology Majors Textbook International Edition BIOLOGY By Robert Brooker, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis, Eric Widmaier, Boston University, Linda Graham, University of Wisconsin-Madison and Peter Stiling, University of South Florida-Tampa 2008 (March 2007) / 1488 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-326807-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-110200-1 [IE] http://aris.mhhe.com www.brookerbiology.com Coming in January 2007, McGraw-Hill will publish the most carefully developed NEW biology textbook in the history of our company. Brooker et al Biology combines the talent of four active researchers and experienced textbook authors to create a comprehensive modern text featuring an evolutionary focus with an emphasis on scientific inquiry.--Four active researchers--Four experienced text authors--Comprehensive and modern approach--Evolutionary focus--Emphasizes scientific inquiry--Realistic, integrated (3-D) visual program CONTENTS 1 An Introduction to Biology Unit 1 Chemistry 2 The Chemical Basis of Life I: Atoms, Molecules, and Water 3 The Chemical Basis of Life II: Organic Molecules Unit 2 Cell 4 General Features of Cells 5 Membrane Structure and Transport 6 Systems Biology of Cell Organization 7 Enzymes, Metabolism and Cellular Respiration 8 Photosynthesis 9 Cell Communication and Regulation of the Cell Cycle 66 10 Multicellularity Unit 3 Genetics 11 Nucleic Acid Structure and DNA Replication 12 Gene Expression at the Molecular Level 13 Gene Regulation 14 Mutation, DNA Repair, and Cancer 15 Eukaryotic Chromosomes, Mitosis, and Meiosis 16 Simle Patterns of Inheritance 17 Complex Patterns of Inheritance 18 Genetics of Bacteria and Viruses 19 Developmental Genetics 20 Genetic Technology 21 Genomes, Proteomes, and Bioinformatics Unit 4 Evolution 22 Origin and History of Life 23 An Introduction to Evolution 24 Population Genetics 25 Origin of Species 26 Taxonomy and Systematics Unit 5 Diversity 27 The Bacteria and Archaea 28 Protists 29 The Kingdom Fungi 30 Plants and the Conquest of Land 31 The Diversity of Modern Gymnosperms and Angiosperms 32 An Introduction to Animal Diversity 33 The Invertebrates 34 Vertebrates Unit 6 Plants 35 An Introduction to Flowering Plants 36 Flowering Plants: Behavior 37 Flowering Plants: Nutrition 38 Flowering Plants: Transport 39 Flowering Plants: Reproduction and Development Unit 7 Animals 40 Introduction to Animal Form and Function 41 Nutrition, Digestion, and Absorption 42 Control of Energy Balance, Metabolic Rate, and Body Temperature 43 Neuroscience I: Cells of the Nervous System 44 Neuroscience II: Evolution and Function of the Brain and Nervous Systems 45 Neuroscience III: Sensory Systems 46 The Muscular-Skeletal System and Locomotion 47 Circulatory Systems 48 Gas Exchange 49 Excretory Systems and Salt and Water Balance 50 Endocrine Systems 51 Animal Reproduction 52 Animal Development 53 Defense Mechanisms of the Body Unit 8 Ecology 54 An Introduction to Ecology and Biomes 55 Behavioral Ecology 56 Population Ecology 57 Species Interactions 58 Community Ecology 59 Ecosystem Ecology 60 Conservation Biology and Biodiversity BIOLOGY International Edition BIOLOGY 8th Edition By Peter Raven, Missouri Botanical Gardens, George Johnson, Washington University-St Louis, Kenneth Mason, Purdue University-West Lafayette, Jonathan Losos, Washington University-St Louis and Susan Singer, Carleton College 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-322739-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-127600-9 [IE] http://aris.mhhe.com BIOLOGY is an authoritative majors textbook with evolution as a unifying theme. In revising the text, McGraw-Hill has consulted extensively with previous users, noted experts and professors in the field. It is distinguished from other texts by its strong emphasis on natural selection and the evolutionary process that explains biodiversity. The new 8th edition will feature the latest in cutting edge content reflective of the rapid advances in Biology and will also offer a Dynamic, Realistic, Accurate New Visual Program. 42 Plant Reproduction Part VII Animal Form and Function 43 The Animal Body and Principles of Regulation 44 The Nervous System 45 Sensory Systems 46 The Endocrine System 47 The Musculoskeletal System 48 The Digestive System 49 The Circulatory and Respiratory Systems 50 Temperature, Osmotic Regulation and the Urinary System 51 The Integumentary & Immune Systems 52 The Reproductive Systems 53 Animal Development Part VIII Ecology and Behavior 54 Behavioral Biology 55 Population Ecology 56 Community Ecology 57 Dynamics of Ecosystems 58 The Biosphere 59 Conservation Biology CONTENTS Part I The Molecular Basis of Life 1 The Science of Biology 2 The Nature of Molecules 3 The Chemical Building Blocks of Life Part II Biology of the Cell 4 Cell Structure 5 Membranes 6 Energy and Metabolism 7 How Cells Harvest Energy 8 Photosynthesis 9 Cell-Cell Interactions 10 How Cells Divide Part III Genetic and Molecular Biology 11 Sexual Reproduction and Meiosis 12 Patterns of Inheritance 13 Chromosomes, Mapping and the Meiosis—Inheritance Connection 14 DNA: The Genetic Material 15 Genes and How They Work 16 Control of Gene Expression 17 Biotechnology 18 Genomics 19 Cellular Mechanisms of Development Part IV Evolution 20 Genes Within Populations 21 The Evidence for Evolution 22 The Origin of Species 23 Systematics and the Phylogenetic Revolution 24 Genome Evolution 25 Evolution of Development Part V Diversity of Life on Earth 26 Tree of Life 27 Viruses 28 Prokaryotes 29 Protists 30 Overview of Plant Diversity 31 Fungi 32 Overview of Animal Diversity 33 Noncoelomate Invertebrates 34 Coelomate Invertebrates 35 Vertebrates Part VI Plant Form and Function 36 Plant Form 37 Vegetative Plant Development 38 Transport in Plants 39 Plant Nutrition 40 Plant Defense Responses 41 Sensory Systems in Plants Laboratory International Edition BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS LAB MANUAL 8th Edition By Warren Dolphin, Iowa State University 2008 (January 2007) / 512 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-299287-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-110201-8 [IE] This independent lab manual can be used for a one or two-semester majors level general biology lab and can be used with any majors-level general biology textbook. The labs are investigative and ask students to use more critical thinking and hands-on learning. The author emphasizes investigative, quantitative, and comparative approaches to studying the life sciences. CONTENTS 1 Science: A Way of Gathering Knowledge 2 Techniques in Microscopy 3 Cellular Structure Reflects Function 4 Determining How Materials Enter Cells 5 Using Quantitative Techniques and Statistics 6 Modeling Biological Molecules 7 Determining the Properties of an Enzyme 8 Measuring Cellular Respiration 9 Determining Chromosome Number in Mitotic Cells 10 Observing Meiosis and Determining Cross-Over Frequency 11 Determining Genotypes of Fruit Flies 12 Isolating DNA and Working with Plasmids 13 Testing Assumptions in Microevolution and Inducing Mutations 14 Working with Diverse Bacteria 15 Diversity Among Protists 16 Investigating Plant Phylogeny: Seedless Plants 17 Investigating Plant Phylogeny: Seed Plants 18 Observing Fungal Diversity and Symbiotic Relationships 19 Investigating Early Events in Animal Development 20 Animal Phylogeny: Investigating Animal Body Plans 21 Protostomes I: Lophotrochozoans and Development of Complexity 67 BIOLOGY 22 Protostomes II: Ecdysozoa and Great Diversity 23 Deuterostomes and the Origins of Vertebrates 24 Investigating Plant Tissues and Primary Root Structure 25 Investigating Primary Roots, Stems and Secondary Growth 26 Investigating Leaf Structure and Photosynthesis 27 Angiosperm Reproduction, Germination, and Development Interchapter Investigating Animal Form and Function 28 Investigating Digestive and Gas Exchange Systems 29 Investigating Circulatory Systems 30 Investigating the Mammalian Urogenital System 31 Investigating the Properties of Muscle and Skeletal Systems 32 Investigating Nervous and Sensory Systems 33 Statistically Analyzing Simple Behaviors 34 Estimating Population Size and Growth Appendix A Significant Figures and Rounding Appendix B Making Graphs Appendix C Simple Statistics Appendix D Writing Lab Reports and Scientific Papers BIOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL 8th Edition By Darrell S Vodopich, Baylor University and Randy Moore, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis 2008 (February 2007) / 576 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-299522-0 This laboratory manual is designed for an introductory majors biology course with a broad survey of basic laboratory techniques. The experiments and procedures are simple, safe, easy to perform, and especially appropriate for large classes. Few experiments require a second class-meeting to complete the procedure. Each exercise includes many photographs, traditional topics, and experiments that help students learn about life. Procedures within each exercise are numerous and discrete so that an exercise can be tailored to the needs of the students, the style of the instructor, and the facilities available. 24 Survey of Bacteria: Kingdoms Archaebacteria and Bacteria 25 Survey of the Kingdom Protista: The Algae 26 Survey of the Kingdom Protista: Protozoa and Slime Molds 27 Survey of the Kingdom Fungi: Molds, Sac Fungi, Mushrooms, and Lichens 28 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Liverworts, Mosses, and Hornworts of Phyla Hepaticophyta, Bryophyta, and Anthocerophyta 29 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Seedles Vascular Plants of Phyla Pterophyta and Lycophyta 30 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Gymnosperms of Phyla Cycadophyta, Ginkgophyta, Coniferophyta, and Gnetophyta 31 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Angiosperms 32 Plant Anatomy: Vegetative Structure of Vascular Plants 33 Plant Physiology: Transpiration 34 Plant Physiology: Tropisms, Nutrition, and Growth Regulators 35 Bioassay: Measuring Physiologically Active Substances 36 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phyla Porifera and Cnidaria 37 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phyla Platyhelminthes and Nematoda 38 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phyla Mollusca and Annelida 39 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phylum Arthropoda 40 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phyla Echinodermata, Hemichordata, and Chordata 41 Vertebrate Animal Tissues: Epithelial, Connective, Muscular, and Nervous Tissues 42 Human Biology: The Human Skeletal System 43 Human Biology: Muscles and Muscle Contraction 44 Human Biology: Breathing 45 Human Biology: Circulation and Blood Pressure 46 Human Biology: Sensory Perception 47 Vertebrate Anatomy: External Features and Skeletal System of the Rat 48 Vertebrate Anatomy: Muscles and Internal Organs of the Rat 49 Vertebrate Anatomy: Urogenital and Circulatory Systems of the Rat 50 Embryology: Comparative Morphologies and Strategies of Development 51 Animal Behavior: Taxis, Kinesis, and Agonistic Behavior CONTENTS 1 Scientific Methods 2 Measurements in Biology: The Metric System and Data Analysis 3 The Microscope: Basic Skills of Light Microscopy 4 The Cell: Structure and Function 5 Solutions, Acids, and Bases: The pH Scale 6 Biologically Important Molecules: Carbohydrates, Proteins, Lipids, and Nucleic Acids 7 Separating Organic Compounds: Column Chromatography, Paper Chromatography, and Gel Electrophoresis 8 Spectrophotometry: Identifying Solutes and Determining Their Concentration 9 Diffusion and Osmosis: Passive Movements of Molecules in Biologal Systems 10 Cellular Membranes: Effects of Physical and Chemical Stress 11 Enzymes: Factors Affecting the Rate of Activity 12 Respiration: Aerobic and Anaerobic Oxidation of Organic Molecules 13 Photosynthesis: Pigment Separation, Starch Production, and CO2 Uptake 14 Mitosis: Replication of Eukaryotic Cells 15 Meiosis: Reduction Division and Gametogenesis 16 Molecular Biology and Biotechnology: DNA Isolation and Bacterial Transformation 17 Genetics: The Principles of Mendel 18 Evolution: Natural Selection and Morphological Change in Green Algae 19 Human Evolution: Skull Examination 20 Ecology: Diversity and Interaction in Plant Communities 21 Community Succession 22 Population Growth: Limitations of the Environment 23 Pollution: The Effect of Chemical, Thermal, and Acid Pollution 68 INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia BIOLOGY Human Biology chapter concepts by discussing critical-thinking questions related to the chapter opener. CONTENTS Textbook 1 Exploring Life and Science Part I Human Organization 2 Chemistry of Life 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Organization and Regulation of Body Systems Part II Maintenance of the Human Body 5 Cardiovascular System: Heart and Blood Vessels 6 Cardiovascular System: Blood 7 Lymphatic System and Immunity 8 Digestive System and Nutrition 9 Respiratory System 10 Urinary System and Excretion Part III Movement and Support in Humans 11 Skeletal System 12 Muscular System Part IV Integration and Coordination in Humans 13 Nervous System 14 Senses 15 Endocrine System Part V Reproduction in Humans 16 Reproductive System 17 Development and Aging Part VI Human Genetics 18 Patterns of Chromosome Inheritance 19 Cancer 20 Patterns of Genetic Inheritance 21 DNA Biology and Technology Part VII Human Evolution and Ecology 22 Human Evolution 23 Global Ecology 24 Human Population, Planetary Resources, and Conservation NEW International Edition HUMAN BIOLOGY 11th Edition By Sylvia S Mader 2010 (February 2009) / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-728011-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-016778-0 [IE] http://aris.mhhe.com NEW TO THIS EDITION THE MADER AUTHOR STORY-• Sylvia Mader is the subject matter expert and learning system architect in one. Dr. Mader represents the student by paging the book and striking the proper balance of art, photo, text, and application. • Sylvia has taught millions of non-majors students the language of biology. • Her teaching experience at Mass Bay CC is what led Sylvia to making the time to design her text layout specifically to the non-majors market. HALLMARK WRITING STYLE Dr. Sylvia Mader’s succinct, precise writing style. Sylvia’s writing is what has earned her a reputation as one of the most successful introductory biology textbook authors ever, and it is the most compelling feature of this text. Updated Genetics Coverage -- The entire genetics chapter has been updated to include the most recent information possible. This edition now combines genetics and genetic counseling topics in one chapter. Laboratory NEW Human Disease Coverage Expanded -- Human Disease coverage has been enhanced and is covered as each system is discussed. Additionally each of these chapters will have a Disease and Disorder section. LAB MANUAL HUMAN BIOLOGY 11th Edition A.R.I.S. -- McGraw-Hill’s ARIS - Assessment, Review, and Instruction System for Human Biology, 10/e is a complete electronic homework and course management system. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easyto-assign algorithmically generated homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on getting started with ARIS. New Chapter Openers Throughout -- Each chapter begins with an engaging, real-life vignette that captures the student’s attention. The vignette is referenced throughout the chapter with connections/applications woven into the chapter and finally at the end of the chapter students are asked to consider the vignette in light of the 69 By Sylvia Mader 2010 (February 2009) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-723513-0 CONTENTS Laboratory 1: Scientific Method Laboratory 2: Light Microscopy Laboratory 3: Chemical Composition of Cells Laboratory 4: Cell Structure and Function Laboratory 5: Human Body Tissues Laboratory 6: Basic Mammalian Anatomy I Laboratory 7: Cardiovascular System Laboratory 8: Chemical Aspects of Digestion Laboratory 9: Energy Requirements and Ideal Weight Laboratory 10: Urinary and Reproductive Systems Laboratory 11: Homeostasis Laboratory 12: Musculoskeletal System Laboratory 13: Nervous System and Senses Laboratory 14: Development Laboratory 15: Mitosis and Meiosis BIOLOGY SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF BIOLOGY Laboratory 16: Patterns of Genetic Inheritance Laboratory 17: DNA and Biotechnology Laboratory 18: Evolution Laboratory 19: Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems By George H. Fried and George J. Hademenos 2001 / 154 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-136971-8 A Schaum Professional Publication CONTENTS Chapter 1: The Chemistry of Life. Chapter 2: Cell Structure and Function. Chapter 3: The Molecular Basis of Inheritance. Chapter 4: The Cellular Basis of Inheritance. Chapter 5: The Mechanism of Inheritance. Chapter 6: Classification of Prokaryotes. Chapter 7: Classification of Eukaryotes. Chapter 8: Plant STructure and Function. Chapter 9: Intercellular Communication. Chapter 10: Musculoskeletal System. Chapter 11: Respiration and Circulation. Chapter 12: Homeostasis and Excretion. Chapter 13: Nurition and Digestion. Chapter 14: Reproduction and Early Human Development. Chapter 15: Evolution and the Origin of Life. Chapter 16: Ecology. LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HUMAN BIOLOGY 10th Edition By Sylvia Mader 2008 (April 2007) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-298690-7 The Laboratory Manual to accompany Sylvia Mader’s Human Biology reflects all of the exceptional features of the Human Biology text. Instructors appreciate the refined exercises that are so numerous you won’t need to look anywhere else for student activities. Author Sylvia Mader’s writing in the laboratory manual, just as in the text, emphasizes clarity, with carefully worded study questions that are direct in their intent and purpose. The lab manual’s accessible writing accompanies unparalleled illustrations to provide students with clear exercises and questions. The visuals have been updated to be even easier for students--both majors and non-majors--to comprehend. The dramatic illustrations and photographs not only help students understand concepts and process, but also give them an appreciation for the beauty of organisms and biological structure. SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BIOLOGY 2nd Edition By George Fried, Brooklyn College 1999 / 455 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-022405-6 Biology A Schaum Publication CONTENTS Supplements Part I: Fundamentals of Biology. Part II: Biology of the Cell. Part III: Genetics and Inheritance. Part IV: Plant Biology. Part V: Animal Biology. Part VI: Evolution and Ecology. Part VII: Biological Diversity. SCHAUM’S A-Z BIOLOGY By Bill Indge 2003 / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-141934-5 A Schaum Professional Publication Schaum’s A-Z handbooks make excellent complements to course textbooks and test preparation guides. Ideal for ambitious high school seniors--especially AP students--and college freshmen, they feature concise, thoroughly cross-referenced definitions of hundreds of key terms and phrases that help students quickly break through the jargon barrier. Clear explanations of key concepts, supplemented with lucid illustrations, help build mastery of theory and provide a ready reference to supplement class work. Each entry begins with a clear, one-sentence definition and is followed by an explanation and examples. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES A-to-Z format for ready reference Clear definitions and explanations, cross-referenced and enhanced with numerous worked examples and illustrations Extended explanations of more important concepts Review lists of entries that relate to main topics in the Appendix aid review Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 70 71 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS Biotechnology .....................................................................................................90 Developmental Biology / Embryology ................................................................ 86 General Genetics................................................................................................87 Human Genetics .................................................................................................90 Immunology ........................................................................................................87 Introductory Microbiology Laboratory ................................................................ 78 Introductory Microbiology - Majors Text ............................................................ 73 Introductory Microbiology - Non Majors Text - Allied Health Emphasis................................................................................ 75 Microbiology Printed - Supplements ...................................................................85 Molecular Biology .............................................................................................. 86 STDs / AIDS ...................................................................................................... 85 NEW TITLES CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS 2009 Author ISBN-13 Genetics: Analysis and Principles, 3e Brooker 9780077229726 87 Benson’s Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Brown 9780073522555 78 Brown 9780073522548 80 Laboratory Applications in Microbiology: A Case Study Approach Chess 9780073375250 81 Microbiology: A Systems Approach, 2e Cowan 9780077266868 75 Introduction to Genetics Hyde 9780073224817 88 Microbiology Experiments to accompany Microbiology, 6e Kleyn 9780072995497 82 Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 6e Nester 9780077250416 76 Aids Update 2009, 18e Stine 9780073527598 85 Aids Update 2008, 17e Stine 9780073375281 85 Foundations in Microbiology, 7e Talaro 9780077260576 76 Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 7e Talaro 9780077263164 77 Prescott’s Principles of Microbiology Willey 9780077213411 73 Page Complete Version, 11e Benson’s Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 11e 72 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS Introductory Microbiology – Majors Text make the material more comprehendible. The authors also believe that figures should be content-rich, not just pretty to look at. Therefore, the art program also includes pedagogical features such as concept maps and annotation of key pathways and processes. Learning Tools Throughout the Text. -Chapter Glossary Each chapter begins with a glossary—a list of key terms discussed in the chapter. Each is succinctly defined and page numbers referenced. -Cross-Referenced Notes In-text references with icons refer students to other parts of the book to review. NEW International Edition -Review and Reflection Questions within Narrative Review questions throughout each chapter assist students in mastering section concepts before moving on to other topics. PRESCOTT’S PRINCIPLES OF MICROBIOLOGY -Special Interest Essays Interesting essays on relevant topics are included in most chapters. Readings are organized into these topics: Historical Highlights, Techniques & Applications, Microbial Diversity & Ecology, Disease, and Microbial Tidbits. By Joanne Willey Hofstra University, Linda Sherwood, Montana State University-Bozeman and Chris Woolverton, Kent State University-Kent -End-of-Chapter Material End-of-chapter summaries are organized by numbered headings and provide a snapshot of important chapter concepts. Critical Thinking Questions supplement the questions for review and reflection found throughout each chapter; they are designed to stimulate analytical problem solving skills. 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-721341-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-128367-0 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/prescottprinciples Prescott’s Principles of Microbiology continues in the tradition of the market leading Prescott, Harley, and Klein’s Microbiology. In using the 7th edition of PHK’s Microbiology as the foundation for the development of Principles, the authors have presented a streamlined, briefer discussion of the broad discipline of microbiology and have focused on readability and the integration of several key themes with an emphasis on evolution, ecology and diversity throughout the text. To accomplish this, each chapter focuses on key concepts and includes only the most relevant, up-to-date examples. Unique to Principles is the inclusion of microbial pathogens into the diversity chapters (chapters 19-24). Thus when students read about the metabolic and genetic diversity of each bacterial, protist, and viral taxon, they are also presented with the important pathogens. In this way, the physiological adaptations that make a given organism successful can be immediately related to its role as a pathogen and pathogens can be readily compared to phylogenetically similar microbes. FEATURES Unique to Principles is the inclusion of microbial pathogens into the diversity chapters (chapters 19-24). Thus when students read about the metabolic and genetic diversity of each bacterial, protist, and viral taxon, they are also presented with the important pathogens. In this way, the physiological adaptations that make a given organism successful can be immediately related to it role as a pathogen and pathogens can be readily compared to phylogenetically similar microbes. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS. ARIS is a complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. McGraw-Hill Presentation Center. ARIS Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, PowerPoints, animations, and other media types that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. Accessed from the instructor side of the textbook’s ARIS website, Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows instructors to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. All assets are copyright McGraw-Hill Higher Education but can be used by instructors for classroom purposes. CONTENTS Thematic Integration. Because microbial evolution, diversity, and ecology are no longer subdisciplines to be ignored by those interested in microbial genetics, physiology, or pathogenesis, Principles strives to integrate these themes throughout the text. The authors begin in chapter 1 with a discussion of the universal tree of life and whenever possible, discuss diverse microbial species so that students can begin to appreciate the tremendous variation in the microbial world. In addition, Principles uses the topics of intercellular communication (chapters 6 and 13), biofilms (throughout the text, but specifically in chapters 6, 13, and 29), microbial evolution (chapter 17), and polymicrobial diseases (chapter 33) to emphasize that evolution must be linked to genetics, physiology to diversity, and ecology to pathogenesis. Instructional Art. Three-dimensional renderings help the student appreciate the beauty and elegance of the cell, while at the same time 73 Part I: Introduction to Microbiology Chapter 1: The History and Scope of Microbiology Chapter 2: Microscopes and the Study of Microbial Structure Chapter 3: Procaryotic Cell Structure Chapter 4: Eucaryotic Cell Structure and Function Chapter 5: Viruses and Other Cellular Agents Part II: Microbial Nutrition, Growth, and Control Chapter 6: Microbial Nutrition Chapter 7: Microbial Growth Chapter 8: Control of Microorganisms by Physical and Chemical Agents Part III: Microbial Metabolism Chapter 9: Introduction to Metabolism Chapter 10: Catabolism: Energy Release and Conservation Chapter 11: Anabolism: The Use of Energy in Biosynthesis Part IV: Microbial Molecular Biology and Genetics Chapter 12: Gene Structure, Replication, and Expression Chapter 13: Regulation of Gene Expression Chapter 14: Mechanisms of Genetic Variation Chapter 15: Microbial Genomics CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS Chapter 16: Biotechnology and Industrial Microbiology Part V: The Diversity of The Microbial World Chapter 17: Microbial Evolution, Taxonomy, and Diversity Chapter 18: The Archaea Chapter 19: Deinococci and Nonproteobacteria Gram Negative Bacteria Chapter 20: Proteobacteria Chapter 21: Low G + C Gram Positive Bacteria Chapter 22: High G + C Gram Positive Bacteria Chapter 23: Eucaryotic Microbes Chapter 24: Viral Diversity Part VI: Ecology and Symbiosis Chapter 25: Biogeochemical Cycling and Introductory Microbial Ecology Chapter 26: Microorganisms in Natural Environments Chapter 27: Microbial Interactions Part VII: Host Defenses Chapter 28: Nonspecific (Innate) Host Resistance> Chapter 29: Specific (Adaptive) Immunity Part VIII: Microbial Diseases and Their Control Chapter 30: Pathogenicity of Microorganisms Chapter 31: Antimicrobial Chemotherapy Chapter 32: Clinical Microbiology and Immunology Chapter 33: The Epidemiology of Infectious Disease Part IX: Applied Microbiology Chapter 34: Microbiology of Food Chapter 35: Industrial Microbiology 12 Microbial Genetics of Gene Expression 13 Microbial Genetics: Mechanisms of Genetic Variation Part V DNA Technology and Genomics 14 Recombinant DNA Technology 15 Microbial Genomics Part VI The Viruses 16 The Viruses: Introduction and General Characteristics 17 The Viruses: Viruses of Bacteria and Archaea 18 The Viruses: Eucaryotic Viruses and Other Acellular Infectious Agents Part VII The Diversity of the Microbial World 19 Microbial Evolution, Taxonomy, and Diversity 20 The Archaea 21 Bacteria: The Deinococci and Nonproteobacteria Gram Negatives 22 Bacteria: The Proteobacteria 23 Bacteria: The Low G + C Gram Positives 24 Bacteria: The High G + C Gram Positives 25 The Protists 26 The Fungi (Eumycota) Part VIII Ecology and Symbiosis 27 Biogeochemical Cycling and Introductory Microbial Ecology 28 Microorganism in Marine and Freshwater Environments 29 Microorganisms in Terrestrial Environments Part IX Nonspecific (Innate) Resistance and the Immune Response 30 Microbial Interactions 31 Nonspecific (Innate) Host Resistance 32 Specific (Adaptive) Immunity 33 Pathogenecity of Microorganisms Part X Microbial Diseases and Their Control 34 Antimicrobial Chemotherapy 35 Clinical Microbiology 36 The Epidemiology of Infectious Disease 37 Human Diseases Caused by Viruses 38 Human Diseases Caused by Bacteria 39 Human Diseases Caused by Fungi and Protists Part XI Food and Industrial Microbiology 40 Microbiology of Food 41 Applied and Industrial Microbiology Appendix I A Review of the Chemistry of Biological Molecules Appendix II Common Metabolic Pathways International Edition PRESCOTT/HARLEY/KLEIN’S MICROBIOLOGY 7th Edition By Joanne Willey, Hofstra University, Linda Sherwood, Montana State University-Bozeman and Chris Woolverton, Kent State University-Kent 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-330208-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-126727-4 [IE] Website: http://aris.mhhe.com www.mhhe.com/prescott7 The brand new author team of Prescott, Harley and Klein’s Microbiology continues the tradition of past editions by providing a balanced, comprehensive introduction to all major areas of microbiology. Because of this balance, the Seventh Edition of Microbiology is appropriate for microbiology majors and mixed majors courses. The new authors have focused on readability, artwork, and the integration of several key themes (including evolution, ecology and diversity) throughout the text, making an already superior text even better. CONTENTS Part I Introduction to Microbiology 1 The History and Scope of Microbiology 2 The Study of Microbial Structure: Microscopy and Specimen Preparation 3 Procaryotic Cell Structure and Function 4 Eucaryotic Cell Structure and Function Part II Microbial Nutrition, Growth, and Control 5 Microbial Nutrition 6 Microbial Growth 7 Control of Microorganisms by Physical and Chemical Agents Part III Microbial Metabolism 8 Metabolism: Energy, Enzymes, and Regulation 9 Metabolism: Energy Release and Conservation 10 Metabolism: The Use of Energy in Biosynthesis Part IV Microbial Molecular Biology and Genetics 11 Microbial Genetics: Gene Structure, Replication, and Expression 74 COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS Introductory Microbiology - Non Majors Text -Visual Understanding Questions use images from previous chapters to ask integrated learning questions. -Concept Mapping exercises help students learn and retain material. -True-False questions are now included in the end-of-chapter study tools, in addition to multiple choice and “Writing to Learn” questions. Allied Health Emphasis -More Internet Search Topics finish up each chapter to offer students additional reliable, informational sites for research on chapter content. Twenty-five new animations have been developed on key microbiological processes, bringing the total number of animations available to instructors and students to over 100. Students can now quiz themselves over each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, and then submit their answers to their instructors for grading. NEW International Edition McGraw-Hill Presentation Center. ARIS Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, PowerPoints, animations, and other media types that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. Accessed from the instructor side of the textbook’s ARIS website, Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows instructors to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. All assets are copyright McGraw-Hill Higher Education but can be used by instructors for classroom purposes. MICROBIOLOGY A Systems Approach, 2nd Edition By Marjorie Kelly Cowan, Miami University of OH-Oxford and Kathleen Park Talaro, Pasadena Area Community College 2009 (February 2008) / 896 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-726686-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-128777-7 [IE] CONTENTS http://www.mhhe.com/cowan2 Microbiology: A Systems Approach is a non-majors/allied health microbiology textbook that has quickly become known for its unique organization, appealing writing style, and current medical applications. Cowan/Talaro utilizes an organ systems approach, but unlike any other book, this text first describes the clinical presentation (the particular set of symptoms) and then all of the organisms that could cause the symptom as opposed to just providing a long list of organisms to study. This treatment is unique and represents a real difference in the method of teaching microbiology. NEW TO THIS EDITION Major revisions have occurred within several chapters to simplify content and add the latest research: -Chapter 1: Significantly updated and improved; taxonomy has been updated; evolution discussed improved; 3-Domain figure updated with current understanding. -Chapter 8: Major reorganization, simplification and clarification of concepts; better and more complete treatment of photosynthesis. -Chapter 12: Major reorganization to better match the opening summary figure 12.1; antiviral section much improved. -Chapters 24 & 25: New research and developments have necessitated breaking Chapter 24 from the first edition into two chapters in the second edition: Chapter 24 = Environmental Microbiology, and Chapter 25 = Applied (Industrial) Microbiology. Some of the new topics included in these chapters are emphasis on microbes in earth’s crust miles below the surface, the role of microbial consortia in bioremediation, astrobiology, and increased emphasis on greenhouse gases. -New coverage on biofilms and polymicrobial diseases has been integrated throughout the text. New end-of-chapter material has been added to help reinforce key chapter concepts: 75 Chapter 1 The Main Themes of Microbiology Chapter 2 The Chemistry of Biology Chapter 3 Tools of the Laboratory: The Methods for Studying Microorganisms Chapter 4 Procaryotic Profiles: The Bacteria and Archaea Chapter 5 Eucaryotic Cells and Microorganisms Chapter 6 An Introduction to the Viruses Chapter 7 Elements of Microbial Nutrition, Ecology, and Growth Chapter 8 Microbial Metabolism: The Chemical Crossroads of Life Chapter 9 Microbial Genetics Chapter 10 Genetic Engineering: A Revolution in Molecular Biology Chapter 11 Physical and Chemical Control of Microbes Chapter 12 Drugs, Microbes, Host—The Elements of Chemotherapy Chapter 13 Microbe-Human Interactions: Infection and Disease Chapter 14 Nonspecific Host Defenses Cowan’s Microbiology 2/e TOC, contd. Chapter 15 Specific Immunity and Immunization Chapter 16 Disorders in Immunity Chapter 17 Diagnosing Infections Chapter 18 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Skin and Eyes Chapter 19 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Nervous System Chapter 20 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Cardiovascular and Lymphatic Systems Chapter 21 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Respiratory System Chapter 22 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Gastrointestinal Tract Chapter 23 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Genitourinary System Chapter 24 Environmental Microbiology Chapter 25 Applied Microbiology CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS NEW International Edition MICROBIOLOGY A Human Perspective, 6th Edition By Eugene W Nester, Denise G Anderson and C Evans Roberts Jr of University of Washington and Martha T Nester 2009 (September 2008) / 928 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-725041-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-128442-4 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/nester6 Appropriate for the non-major/allied health student, this authoritative text carefully explains the fundamentals of microbiology, providing a general overview of the principles followed by more detailed explanations. With its clear and concise writing style, Microbiology: A Human Perspective offers modern coverage on such topics as genomics, biofilms, and quorum sensing. A body systems approach is used in the coverage of diseases. NEW TO THIS EDITION Chapter 17, “Host-Microbe Interactions”, has been moved so that it now immediately follows the chapters on innate and adaptive immunity. This makes it easier for instructors to present a trilogy of topics – Part I. “The Immune Wars” (innate and adaptive immunity); Part II. “The Microbes Fight Back” (pathogenesis); and Part III “The Return of the Humans” (vaccination, epidemiology, and antimicrobial medications). Chapter 9: Biotechnology and Recombinant DNA Chapter 10: Identification and Classification of Prokaryotes Chapter 11: The Diversity of Prokaryotic Organisms Chapter 12: The Eukaryotic Members of the Microbial World Chapter 13: Viruses of Bacteria Chapter 14: Viruses, Prions, and Viroids: Infectious Agents of Animals and Plants Chapter 15: The Innate Immune Response Chapter 16: The Adaptive Immune Response Chapter 17: Host-Microbe Interactions Chapter 18: Immunologic Disorders Chapter 19: Applications of Immune Responses Chapter 20: Epidemiology Chapter 21: Antimicrobial Medications Chapter 22: Respiratory System Infections Chapter 23: Skin Infections Chapter 24: Wound Infections Chapter 25: Digestive System Infections Chapter 26: Genitourinary Infections Chapter 27: Nervous System Infections Chapter 28: Blood and Lymphatic Infections Chapter 29: HIV Disease and Complications of Immunodeficiency Chapter 30: Microbial Ecology Chapter 31: Environmental Microbiology: Treatment of Water, Wastes, and Polluted Habitats Chapter 32: Food Microbiology Appendix I: Microbial Mathematics Appendix II: Microbial Terminology Appendix III: Pronunciation Key for Bacterial, Fungal, Protozoan, and Viral Names Appendix IV: Metabolic Pathways Appendix V: Answers to Multiple Choice Questions NEW Chapter 22, “Respiratory System Infections”, has been moved to the first of the disease chapters. This puts the major discussion of Streptococcus pyogenes early in the infectious disease section, providing students with a solid framework to help them understand the additional coverage in subsequent chapters. International Edition FOUNDATIONS IN MICROBIOLOGY 7th Edition Chapter 9, “Biotechnology and Recombinant DNA”, has been reorganized so that the techniques now directly follow the applications. A summary table was added for instructors who only want minimal coverage. By Katheleen Park Talaro, Pasadena Area Community College Presentation Center - Build instructional materials wherever, whenever, and however you want! Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, animations, PowerPoints, and other types of media that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. Access to your book, access to all books! This ever-growing resource gives instructors the power to utilize assets specific to their adopted textbook as well as content from other McGraw-Hill books in the library. Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows you to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. All assets are copyrighted by McGraw-Hill Higher Education but can be used by instructors for classroom purposes. 2009 (September 2008) / 928 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-726057-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-128445-5 [IE] www.mhhe.com/talaro7 Written with the non-major/allied health student in mind, Foundations in Microbiology offers an accessible writing style through the use of tools such as case files and analogies to thoroughly explain difficult microbiology concepts. Active learning is promoted via innovative features such as concept mapping and “Visual Understanding” questions (using art to make content connections between chapters). A taxonomic approach is used for the study of pathogens. CONTENTS NEW TO THIS EDITION Chapter 1: Humans and the Microbial World Chapter 2: The Molecules of Life Chapter 3: Microscopy and Cell Structure Chapter 4: Dynamics of Prokaryotic Growth Chapter 5: Control of Microbial Growth Chapter 6: Metabolism: Fueling Cell Growth Chapter 7: The Blueprint of Life, from DNA to Protein Chapter 8: Bacterial Genetics Revisions have occurred within several chapters to simplify content and add the latest research: -The single chapter (26) that has covered both environmental and applied microbiology has been split into two separate chapters (26 and 27). Chapter 26 focuses on ecological principles and the interactions of microbes with the environment. 76 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS -The section on photosynthesis that was originally covered in chapter 26 in the section on environmental microbiology has been moved into chapter 8, along with other metabolic and bioenergy concepts. browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. CONTENTS -Chapter 9 introduces some of the newer concepts in genetics that have emerged from genome analysis studies. The most significant discovery involves the role of special types of RNA in regulating genes and their expression. -The applications of regulatory RNA in biotechnology and the creation of transgenic animals have been added to Chapter 10. -To consolidate and streamline the section on chemical control of microorganisms in chapter 11, we have compiled several new tables that summarize and illustrate common applications. -Chapter 17 includes a more detailed table of specimen collection and increased coverage of PCR technology in diagnosis of infections. -Throughout the book there is much more emphasis on polymicrobial infections and biofilms. -Now that probiotics have become more widely used and understood, their coverage has been updated and enlarged in chapters 12 and 13. -The spelling of prokaryote and eukaryote and related terms has been revised to the form with a “k” instead of a “c” throughout the chapters. New end-of-chapter “Concept Connection” tools: Visual Understanding Questions supplies a photo or a graphic that students have already seen, along with a thought-provoking question. Many of these questions use images from previous chapters and pose queries that require students to combine knowledge from the new chapter with the knowledge they already have from the previous chapter. Concept Mapping Exercises ask students to organize information in more meaningful forms than just simple lists. 1 The Main Themes of Microbiology 2 The Chemistry of Biology 3 Tools of the Laboratory: The Methods for Studying Microorganisms 4 A Survey of Prokaryotic Cells and Microorganisms 5 A Survey of Eukaryotic Cells and Microorganisms 6 An Introduction to the Viruses 7 Elements of Microbial Nutrition, Ecology, and Growth 8 Microbial Metabolism 9 Microbial Genetics 10 Genetic Engineering 11 Physical and Chemical Agents for Microbial Control 12 Drugs, Microbes, Host--The Elements of Chemotherapy 13 Microbe-Human Interactions 14 Nonspecific Host Defenses 15 Adaptive, Specific Immunity and Immunization 16 Disorders in Immunity 17 Diagnosing Infections 18 The Cocci of Medical Importance 19 The Gram-Positive Bacilli of Medical Importance 20 The Gram-Negative Bacilli of Medical Importance 21 Miscellaneous Bacterial Agents of Disease 22 The Fungi of Medical Importance 23 The Parasites of Medical Importance 24 Introduction to Viruses That Infect Humans: The DNA Viruses 25 The RNA Viruses That Infect Humans 26 Environmental Microbiology 27 Applied Microbiology NEW Case Files These chapter-opening, real-world scenarios help students appreciate and understand how microbiology impacts our lives on a daily bases. The solutions, or “wrap-ups” appear later in the chapter, after the necessary elements have been presented. 10 new Case Files can be found in the 7th edition, including ones on the War in Iraq, Darfur, Hurricane Katrina, and the World Trade Center. International Edition FOUNDATIONS IN MICROBIOLOGY Basic Principles, 7th Edition Process Figures: Process Figures are now clearly defined as such and include colored steps that correlate the art to step-by-step explanations. Nearly every Process Figure has a correlating animation to it, which can be found on Talaro’s ARIS site. Twenty-five new animations have been developed on key microbiological processes, bringing the total number of animations available to instructors and students to over 100. Students can now quiz themselves over each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, and then submit their answers to their instructors for grading. Special icons correlate over 100 total animations to figures in the text. By Kathleen Park Talaro, Pasadena Area Community College 2009 (September 2008) / 64 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-726316-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-128447-9 [IE] http://aris.mhhe.com Downloadable content for portable players! Now students can study anywhere, anytime. Audio chapter summaries with quiz questions Animations (correlated to figures in the text) Presentation Center - Build instructional materials wherever, whenever, and however you want! Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, animations, PowerPoints, and other types of media that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. Access to your book, access to all books! This ever-growing resource gives instructors the power to utilize assets specific to their adopted textbook as well as content from other McGraw-Hill books in the library. Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows you to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply 77 Written with the non-major/allied health student in mind, Foundations in Microbiology, Basic Principles offers an accessible writing style through the use of tools such as case files and analogies to thoroughly explain difficult microbiology concepts. Active learning is promoted via innovative features such as concept mapping and “Visual Understanding” questions (using art to make content connections between chapters). A taxonomic approach is used for the study of pathogens. NEW TO THIS EDITION Revisions have occurred within several chapters to simplify content and add the latest research: -The section on photosynthesis that was originally covered in chapter 26 in the section on environmental microbiology has been moved into chapter 8, along with other metabolic and bioenergy concepts. CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS -Chapter 9 introduces some of the newer concepts in genetics that have emerged from genome analysis studies. The most significant discovery involves the role of special types of RNA in regulating genes and their expression. CONTENTS -The applications of regulatory RNA in biotechnology and the creation of transgenic animals have been added to Chapter 10. -To consolidate and streamline the section on chemical control of microorganisms in chapter 11, we have compiled several new tables that summarize and illustrate common applications. -Chapter 17 includes a more detailed table of specimen collection and increased coverage of PCR technology in diagnosis of infections. -Throughout the book there is much more emphasis on polymicrobial infections and biofilms. -Now that probiotics have become more widely used and understood, their coverage has been updated and enlarged in chapters 12 and 13. -The spelling of prokaryote and eukaryote and related terms has been revised to the form with a “k” instead of a “c” throughout the chapters. New end-of-chapter “Concept Connection” tools: Visual Understanding Questions supplies a photo or a graphic that students have already seen, along with a thought-provoking question. Many of these questions use images from previous chapters and pose queries that require students to combine knowledge from the new chapter with the knowledge they already have from the previous chapter. Concept Mapping Exercises ask students to organize information in more meaningful forms than just simple lists. Case Files These chapter-opening, real-world scenarios help students appreciate and understand how microbiology impacts our lives on a daily bases. The solutions, or “wrap-ups” appear later in the chapter, after the necessary elements have been presented. 10 new Case Files can be found in the 7th edition, including ones on the War in Iraq, Darfur, Hurricane Katrina, and the World Trade Center. Process Figures: Process Figures are now clearly defined as such and include colored steps that correlate the art to step-by-step explanations. Nearly every Process Figure has a correlating animation to it, which can be found on Talaro’s ARIS site. Twenty-five new animations have been developed on key microbiological processes, bringing the total number of animations available to instructors and students to over 100. Students can now quiz themselves over each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, and then submit their answers to their instructors for grading. Special icons correlate over 100 total animations to figures in the text. Downloadable content for portable players! Now students can study anywhere, anytime. 1 The Main Themes of Microbiology 2 The Chemistry of Biology 3 Tools of the Laboratory: The Methods for Studying Microorganisms 4 A Survey of Prokaryotic Cells and Microorganisms 5 A Survey of Eukaryotic Cells and Microorganisms 6 An Introduction to Viruses 7 Elements of Microbial Nutrition, Ecology, and Growth 8 An Introduction to Microbial Metabolism: The Chemical Crossroads of Life 9 Microbial Genetics 10 Genetic Engineering: A Revolution in Molecular Biology 11 Physical and Chemical Agents for Microbial Control 12 Drugs, Microbes, Host—The Elements of Chemotherapy 13 Microbe-Human Interactions: Infection and Disease 14 Nonspecific Host Defenses 15 Adaptive, Specific Immunity and Immunization 16 Disorders in Immunity 17 Diagnosing Infections Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Introductory Microbiology Laboratory NEW BENSON’S MICROBIOLOGICAL APPLICATIONS Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Complete Version, 11th Edition By Alfred Brown, Auburn University--Auburn 2009 (January 2008) / 576 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-352255-5 Audio chapter summaries with quiz questions Animations (correlated to figures in the text) The classic resource for undergraduate microbiology laboratory courses just keeps getting better. The 78 self-contained, clearly illustrated exercises and full-color format makes Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, the ideal lab manual. Appropriate for either a majors or non-majors lab course, this manual assumes no prior organic chemistry course has been taken. Presentation Center - Build instructional materials wherever, whenever, and however you want! Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, animations, PowerPoints, and other types of media that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. Access to your book, access to all books! This ever-growing resource gives instructors the power to utilize assets specific to their adopted textbook as well as content from other McGraw-Hill books in the library. Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows you to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. NEW TO THIS EDITION Several exercises have been updated and revised. For example: -The exercises on the protozoa, algae, and cyanobacteria (Exercise 6) and the fungi (Exercise 8) in the Survey of Microorganisms have been completely rewritten. The new exercises have been updated with the current taxonomy of these two groups of microorganisms. -The introductory material in Exercise 60, Bacterial Counts of Food, 78 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS has been expanded. The introductory section now includes a discussion on why and how bacteria become associated with foods. It also addresses how foods are important in food borne diseases and how counts may or not be important in transmission of disease. The inside front cover now features a pronunciation guide for many bacteria, viruses, fungi, and protists. The basic microbiology laboratory safety rules have been rewritten to be more consistent with rules and regulations that apply to student laboratories. A new table of the organisms used in the manual has been introduced in the preface. The table includes the current accepted name of the organism, its ATCC number, gram stain and morphology, its habitat, its biosafety level and the exercise in which the organism is used. A website for the lab manual includes images from the lab and an instructor’s manual. The instructor’s manual provides a materials list and guidelines for conducting all the experiments, as well as answers to the lab exercises. CONTENTS Part 1 Microscopy Exercise 1 Brightfield Microscopy Exercise 2 Darkfield Microscopy Exercise 3 Phase-Contrast Microscopy Exercise 4 Fluorescence Microscopy Exercise 5 Microscopic Measurements Part 2 Survey of Microorganisms Exercise 6 Protozoans, Algae, and Cyanobacteria Exercise 7 Ubiquity of Bacteria Exercise 8 The Fungi: Yeasts and Molds Part 3 Manipulation of Microorganisms Exercise 9 Aseptic Technique Exercise 10 Pure Culture Techniques Part 4 Staining and Observation of Microorganisms Exercise 11 Smear Preparation Exercise 12 Simple Staining Exercise 13 Negative Staining Exercise 14 Capsular Staining Exercise 15 Gram Staining Exercise 16 Spore Staining: Two Methods Exercise 17 Acid-Fast Staining: Ziehl-Neelsen Method Exercise 18 Motility Determination Part 5 Culture Methods Exercise 19 Culture Media Preparation Exercise 20 Preparation of Stock Cultures Exercise 21 Cultivation of Anaerobes Exercise 22 Enumeration of Bacteria: The Standard Plate Count Exercise 23 Slime Mold Culture Exercise 24 Slide Culture: Molds Part 6 Bacterial Viruses Exercise 25 Determination of a Bacteriophage Titer Exercise 26 Burst Size Determination: A One-Step Growth Curve Exercise 27 Isolation of Phage from Flies Exercise 28 Phage Typing Part 7 Enviornmental Influences and Control of Microbial Growth Exercise 29 Temperature: Effects on Growth Exercise 30 Temperature: Lethal Effects Exercise 31 pH and Microbial Growth Exercise 32 Water Activity and Osmotic Pressure Exercise 33 Ultraviolet Light: Lethal Effects Exercise 34 The Effects of Lysozyme on Bacterial Cells Exercise 35 Evaluation of Alcohol: Its Effectiveness as an Antiseptic Exercise 36 Antimicrobic Sensitivity Testing: The Kirby-Bauer Method Exercise 37 Evaluation of Antiseptics: The Filter Paper Disk Method Exercise 38 Effectiveness of Hand Scrubbing Part 8 Identification of Unknown Bacteria Exercise 39 Morphological Study of Unknown Bacterium 79 Exercise 40 Cultural Characteristics Exercise 41 Physiological Characteristics: Oxidation and Fermentation Tests Exercise 42 Physiological Characteristics: Hydrolytic and Degradative Reactions Exercise 43 Physiological Characteristics: Multiple Test Media Exercise 44 Use of Bergey’s Manual Part 9 Miniaturized Multitest Systems Exercise 45 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The API 20E System Exercise 46 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The Enterotube II System Exercise 47 O/F Gram-Negative Rods Identification: The Oxi/Ferm Tube II System Exercise 48 Staphyococcus Identification: The API Staph-Ident System Part 10 Diversity and Environmental Microbiology Exercise 49 Isolation of an Antibiotic Producer: The Actinomyces Exercise 50 Nitrogen Cycle: Ammonification Exercise 51 Symbiotic Nitrogen Fixation: Rhizobium Exercise 52 Free-Living Nitrogen Fixation: Azotobacter Exercise 53 Denitrification: Paracoccus Denitrificans Exercise 54 The Winogradsky Column Exercise 55 Purple Nonsulfer Photosynthetic Bacteria Exercise 56 Sulfate Reducing Bacteria: Desulfovibrio Exercise 57 Bacterial Commensalism Exercise 58 Bacterial Synergism Exercise 59 Microbial Antagonism Part 11 Applied Microbiology Exercise 60 Bacterial Counts of Foods Exercise 61 Bacteriological Examination of Water: Qualitative Tests Exercise 62 The Membrane Filter Method Exercise 63 Reductase Test Exercise 64 Microbial Spoilage of Canned Food Exercise 65 Microbiology of Alcohol Fermentation Part 12 Bacterial Genetics and Biotechnology Exercise 66 Mutant Isolation by Replica Plating Exercise 67 Bacterial Transformation Exercise 68 Polymerase Chain Reaction for Amplifying DNA Exercise 69 Plasmid Isolation Part 13 Medical Microbiology and Immunology Exercise 70 The Staphylococci: Isolation and Identification Exercise 71 The Streptococci: Isolation and Identification Exercise 72 Gram-Negative Intestinal Pathogens Exercise 73 Slide Agglutination Test: Serological Typing Exercise 74 Slide Agglutination (Latex) Test: For S. aureus Identification Exercise 75 Tube Agglutination Test: The Heterophile Antibody Test Exercise 76 White Blood Cell Study: The Differential WBC Count Exercise 77 Blood Grouping Exercise 78 A Synthetic Epidemic Appendix A Tables Appendix B Indicators, Stains, Reagents Appendix C Media Appendix D Identification Charts Appendix E The Streptococci: Classification, Habitat, Pathology, and Biochemical Characteristics CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS NEW BENSON’S MICROBIOLOGICAL APPLICATIONS Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 11th Edition By Alfred Brown, Auburn University--Auburn 2009 (January 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-352254-8 The classic resource for undergraduate microbiology laboratory courses just keeps getting better. The 60 self-contained clearly illustrated exercises, and four-color format makes Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, the ideal lab manual. Appropriate for either a majors or non-majors lab course, this lab manual assumes no prior organic chemistry course has been taken. NEW TO THIS EDITION Several exercises have been updated and revised. For example: -The exercises on the protozoa, algae, and cyanobacteria (Exercise 6) and the fungi (Exercise 8) in the Survey of Microorganisms have been completely rewritten. The new exercises have been updated with the current taxonomy of these two groups of microorganisms. -The introductory material in Exercise 60, Bacterial Counts of Food, has been expanded. The introductory section now includes a discussion on why and how bacteria become associated with foods. It also addresses how foods are important in food borne diseases and how counts may or not be important in transmission of disease. The inside front cover now features a pronunciation guide for many bacteria, viruses, fungi, and protists. The basic microbiology laboratory safety rules have been rewritten to be more consistent with rules and regulations that apply to student laboratories. A new table of the organisms used in the manual has been introduced in the preface. The table includes the current accepted name of the organism, its ATCC number, gram stain and morphology, its habitat, its biosafety level and the exercise in which the organism is used. A Website for the lab manual includes images from the lab and an instructor’s manual. The instructor’s manual provides a materials list and guidelines for conducting all the experiments, as well as answers to the lab exercises. CONTENTS Part 1 Microscopy Exercise 1 Brightfield Microscopy Exercise 2 Darkfield Microscopy Exercise 3 Phase-Contrast Microscopy Exercise 4 Microscopic Measurements Part 2 Survey of Microorganisms Exercise 5 Protozoans, Algae, and Cyanobacteria Exercise 6 Ubiquity of Bacteria Exercise 7 The Fungi: Yeasts and Molds Part 3 Manipulation of Microorganisms Exercise 8 Aseptic Technique Exercise 9 Pure Culture Techniques Part 4 Staining and Observation of Microorganisms Exercise 10 Smear Preparation Exercise 11 Simple Staining Exercise 12 Negative Staining 80 Exercise 13 Capsular Staining Exercise 14 Gram Staining Exercise 15 Spore Staining: Two Methods Exercise 16 Acid-Fast Staining: Ziehl-Neelsen Method Exercise 17 Motility Determination Part 5 Culture Methods Exercise 18 Culture Media Preparation Exercise 19 Cultivation of Anaerobes Exercise 20 Enumeration of Bacteria: The Standard Plate Count Exercise 21 Slime Mold Culture Exercise 22 Slide Culture: Molds Part 6 Bacterial Viruses Exercise 23 Determination of a Bacteriophage Titer Exercise 24 Isolation of Phage from Flies Exercise 25 Phage Typing Part 7 Enviornmental Influences and Control of Microbial Growth Exercise 26 Temperature: Effects on Growth Exercise 27 Temperature: Lethal Effects Exercise 28 pH and Microbial Growth Exercise 29 Water Activity and Osmotic Pressure Exercise 30 Ultraviolet Light: Lethal Effects Exercise 31 Oligodynamic Action Exercise 32 Evaluation of Alcohol: Its Effectiveness As an Antiseptic Exercise 33 Antimicrobic Sensitivity Testing: The Kirby-Bauer Method Exercise 34 Evaluation of Antiseptics: The Filter Paper Disk Method Exercise 35 Effectiveness of Hand Scrubbing Part 8 Identification of Unknown Bacteria Exercise 36 Morphological Study of Unknown Bacterium Exercise 37 Cultural Characteristics Exercise 38 Physiological Characteristics: Oxidation and Fermentation Tests Exercise 39 Physiological Characteristics: Hydrolytic and Degradative Reactions Exercise 40 Physiological Characteristics: Multiple Test Media Exercise 41 Use of Bergey’s Manual Part 9 Miniaturized Multitest Systems Exercise 42 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The API 20E System Exercise 43 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The Enterotube II System Exercise 44 O/F Gram-Negative Rods Identification: The Oxi/Ferm Tube II System Exercise 45 Staphyococcus Identification: The API Staph-Ident System Part 10 Diversity and Environmental Microbiology Exercise 46 Bacterial Counts of Foods Exercise 47 Bacteriological Examination of Water: Qualitative Tests Exercise 48 The Membrane Filter Method Exercise 49 Reductase Test Exercise 50 Microbial Spoilage of Canned Food Exercise 51 Microbiology of Alcohol Fermentation Part 11 Medical Microbiology and Immunology Exercise 52 The Staphylococci: Isolation and Identification Exercise 53 The Streptococci: Isolation and Identification Exercise 54 Gram-Negative Intestinal Pathogens Exercise 55 Slide Agglutination Test: Serological Typing Exercise 56 Slide Agglutination (Latex) Test: For S. aureus Identification Exercise 57 Tube Agglutination Test: The Heterophile Antibody Test Exercise 58 White Blood Cell Study: The Differential WBC Count Exercise 59 Blood Grouping Exercise 60 A Synthetic Epidemic CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS NEW LABORATORY APPLICATIONS IN MICROBIOLOGY A Case Study Approach By Barry Chess, Pasadena Area Community College 2009 (September 2008) / 576 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337525-0 http://www.mhhe.com/chess Laboratory Applications in Microbiology: A Case Study Approach is designed to use real life case studies as the basis for exercises in the laboratory. This is the only microbiology lab manual focusing on this means of instruction, an approach particularly applicable to the microbiology laboratory. The author has carefully organized the exercises so that students develop a solid intellectual base beginning with a particular technique, moving through the case study, and finally applying new knowledge to unique situations beyond the case study. FEATURES UNIQUE! A Case Study Approach with Real Life Examples: The first 34 exercises begin with actual cases found in the news, the CDC, New England Journal of Medicine, and many more sources. As the exercise is completed, new techniques, media, and observational tools are introduced, all with the goal of solving the issues presented in the case. No other micro lab uses this approach! A Thorough Compendium of Common Microbiological Methods: The final 56 exercises consist of common laboratory techniques and assays. Written to clearly guide students while also pointing out the importance of a particular technique, this portion of the manual provides detailed, well-illustrated procedures that stand alone or can be used in conjunction with the case studies in the front of the book. Laboratory Techniques, Reagents, and Assays sections go beyond the standard recipe, giving students thorough instruction and explanation. Extensive Flowcharts for Bacterial Identification: Within Exercise 34, flowcharts are used to help identify bacterial unknowns commonly seen in the microbiology lab. This exercise also serves as an introduction to the techniques section of the manual, allowing students to quickly decide which diagnostic techniques are applicable to their particular unknown culture. More extensive than any of the competitors. An online digital photo atlas, instructor’s manual, pre-and postlab quizzing, and animation quizzing can be found at the manual’s site www.mhhe.com/chess. CONTENTS ESSENTIAL LABORATORY SKILLS Exercise 1 Safety Considerations in the Microbiology Laboratory Exercise 2 Microscopy and Measurement of Microscopic Specimens SURVEY OF MICROORGANISMS Exercise 3 Identification and Classification of Algae Exercise 4 Survey of Medically Important Protozoa Exercise 5 Ubiquity of Bacteria Exercise 6 Identification and Classification of Fungi MANIPULATION, STAINING, AND OBSERVATION OF MICROORGANISMS Exercise 7 Aseptic Techniques Exercise 8 Pure Culture Techniques 81 Exercise 9 Simple Staining, Negative Staining, and Gram Staining Exercise 10 Capsular Staining Exercise 11 Acid-Fast and Endospore Staining ENVIRONMENTAL INFLUENCES ON THE GROWTH OF MICROORGANISMS Exercise 12 Viable Plate Count Exercise 13 Cultivation of Anaerobes Exercise 14 Temperature Effects on Bacterial Growth and Survival Exercise 15 pH and Microbial Growth Exercise 16 Effects of Osmotic Pressure on Bacterial Growth CONTROL OF MICROBIAL GROWTH Exercise 17 Lethal Effects of Ultraviolet Light Exercise 18 Evaluation of Disinfectants: Use-Dilution Method Exercise 19 Effectiveness of Hand Scrubbing Exercise 20 Antimicrobic Sensitivity Testing: Kirby-Bauer, Tube Dilution, and E-Test Methods EPIDEMIOLOGY Exercise 21 Phage Typing of Bacteria Exercise 22 Simulated Epidemic Exercise 23 Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report MICROBIAL GENETICS Exercise 24 Bacterial Transformation Exercise 25 The Ames Test Exercise 26 DNA Extraction from Bacterial Cells Exercise 27 Measures of Water Quality: Most Probable Number Procedure Exercise 28 Measures of Water Quality: Membrane Filtration Method Exercise 29 Measures of Milk Quality: Methylene Blue Reductase Test Exercise 30 Bacterial Counts of Food MEDICAL MICROBIOLOGY Exercise 31 Epidemiology of Gastrointestinal Illness: Differentiation of Enterobacteriaceae Exercise 32 Isolation and Identification of Staphylococci Exercise 33 Isolation and Identification of Streptococci IDENTIFICATION OF UNKNOWN BACTERIA Exercise 34 Identification of Bacterial Unknowns LABORATORY TECHNIQUES, REAGENTS, AND ASSAYS Analysis of Bacterial Cultures Based on Morphological Characteristics Exercise 35 Colony Morphology Exercise 36 Growth in Solid and Liquid Media Exercise 37 Simple Stain Exercise 38 Negative Stain Exercise 39 Capsule Stain Exercise 40 Gram Stain Exercise 41 Endospore Stain Exercise 42 Acid-Fast Stain Exercise 43 Motility Methods: Wet Mount and Hanging Drop Exercise 44 Flagella Stain Techniques for Inoculation of Media Exercise 45 Streak Plate Isolation Exercise 46 Loop Dilution Exercise 47 Spread Plate Commonly Used Differential and Selective Media Exercise 48 Fluid Thioglycollate Media Exercise 49 Mannitol Salt Agar Exercise 50 MacConkey Agar Exercise 51 Desoxycholate Agar Exercise 52 Endo Agar Exercise 53 Eosin Methylene Blue Agar Exercise 54 Hektoen Enteric Agar Exercise 55 Xylose Lysine Desoxycholate Agar Exercise 56 Blood Agar Exercise 57 Motility Media Exercise 58 SIM Medium Exercise 59 Kligler’s Iron Agar Exercise 60 Triple Sugar Iron Agar Exercise 61 Lysine Iron Agar Exercise 62 Litmus Milk CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS Commonly Used Biochemical Tests Exercise 63 Oxidation-Fermentation Test Exercise 64 Phenol Red Broth Exercise 65 Purple Broth Exercise 66 Methyl Red and Voges-Proskauer Tests Exercise 67 Catalase Test Exercise 68 Oxidase Test Exercise 69 Nitrate Reduction Test Exercise 70 Coagulase Test Exercise 71 Citrate Test Exercise 72 Malonate Test Exercise 73 Decarboxylation Test Exercise 74 Phenylalanine Deaminase Test Exercise 75 Bile Esculin Test Exercise 76 Starch Hydrolysis Exercise 77 ONPG Test Exercise 78 Urease Test Exercise 79 Casease Test Exercise 80 Gelatinase Test Exercise 81 DNase Test Exercise 82 Lipase Test Exercise 83 CAMP Test Exercise 84 PYR Test Commercial Identification Systems Exercise 85 API 20E System Exercise 86 Enterotube II System Antimicrobial Susceptibility Tests Exercise 87 Antibiotic Disk Sensitivity Tests for Bacterial Identification Exercise 88 -Lactamase Test Quantitative Techniques Exercise 89 Viable Plate Count Exercise 90 Direct Cell Count Appendix A Spectrophotometric Determination of Bacterial Growth: Use of the Spectrophotometer Appendix B Use of Pipettes in the Laboratory Appendix C Preparation of Culture Media Appendix D Media, Reagents, and Stain Formulas Appendix E Data Sheet for Unknown Identification Glossary Index Exercise 3 Introduction to the Compound Light Microscope Exercise 4 The Use of the Immersion Lens and Determining Motility in a Wet Mount Exercise 5 Simple Stains: Positive and Negative Stains Exercise 6 Differential and Special Stains Exercise 7 Chemically Defined, Complex, Selective, and Differential Media Exercise 8 Quantification of Microorganisms Exercise 9 Aerobic and Anaerobic Growth Exercise 10 The Effect of Incubation Temperature on Generation Time Exercise 11 Moist and Dry Heat Sterilization: Thermal Death Point and Thermal Death Time Exercise 12 Control of Microbial Growth with Ultraviolet Light Exercise 13 Osmotic Pressure and Its Effect on the Rate and Amount of Microbial Growth Exercise 14 Antiseptics and Antibiotics Exercise 15 Selection of Bacterial Mutants Resistant to Antibiotics Exercise 16 Transformation: A Form of Genetic Recombination Exercise 17 Bacterial Conjugation Exercise 18 Gene Regulation: Induction and Catabolite Repression Part 2 The Other Microbial World Exercise 19 Microscopic Identification of Fungi Exercise 20 Paratitology: Protozoa and Helminths Exercise 21 Titering Prokaryotic Viruses Part 3 Microbes and Humans Exercise 22 Normal Skin Flora Exercise 23 Respiratory Microorganisms Exercise 24 Identification of Enteric Gram-Negative Rods Exercise 25 Clinical Unknown Identification Part 4 Immunology Exercise 26 Differential White Blood Cell Stains Exercise 27 Lysosome, an Enzymatic Form of Natural Resistance Exercise 28 Lancefield Grouping of Pathogenic Streptococci Exercise 29 Use of an Enzyme-Linked Immunoabsorbent Assay (ELISA) Test of Coccidiodes immitis Identification Exercise 30 An Ouchterlony Double Immunodiffusion Test for Coccidiodes immitis Identification Part 5 Public Health Exercise 31 What is the Role of Propionibacterium acnes in Acne? Exercise 32 Bacteriological Examination of Water: Multiple-Tube Fermentation and Membrane Filter Techniques Part 6 Applications of Biotechnology Exercise 33 Identifying DNA with Restriction Enzymes Exercise 34 Identification of Bacteria Using the Ribosomal Data Project Part 7 Individual Projects Individual Project 35 Hydrocarbon-Degrading Bacteria, Cleaning Up After Oil Spills Individual Project 36 Luminescent Bacteria: Bateria That Produce Light Appendix 1 Living Microorganisms (Bacteria, Fungi, Protozoa, and Helminths) Chosen for Study in this Manual Appendix 2 Dilution Practice Problems Appendix 3 Use of the Metric System with Conversions to the English System of Measurement Appendix 4 Alternative Procedures Appendix 5 Use of the Ocular Micrometer for Measurement of Relative and Absolute Cell Size Appendix 6 Use of the Hemocytometer for Determining Total Cell Number in a Liquid Suspension Appendix 7 History and Working Principles of Light Microscopy Appendix 8 Additional Reading NEW MICROBIOLOGY EXPERIMENTS TO ACCOMPANY MICROBIOLOGY 6th Edition By John Kleyn and Mary Bicknell of University of Washington 2009 (November 2008) / 352 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-299549-7 All experiments are correlated to Nester’s Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 6/e, but can be used with any non-majors/allied health microbiology textbook. CONTENTS Part 1 Basic Microbiology Exercise 1 Ubiquity of Microorganisms Exercise 2 Pure Culture and Aseptic Technique 82 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS MICROBIOLOGY LAB MANUAL 7th Edition 44 Hand Washing, Environmental Sampling, and Microbiological Monitoring 45 Determination of a Bacterial Growth Curve: Classical and TwoHour Methods 8 Environmental and Food Microbiology 46 Standard Coliform Most Probably Number (MPN)Test and Presence-Absence Coliform Test 47 Membrane Filter Technique for Coliform and Fecal Streptococci; KONFIRM Test for Fecal Coliforms 48 Isolation of Escherichia coli Bacteriophages from Sewage and Determining Bacteriophage Titers 49 Enumeration of Soil Microorganisms 50 Bacterial Count of a Food Product 51 Examination of Milk for Bacteria 9 Medical Microbiology 52 Agglutination Reactions: Blood Groups 53 Isolation of Normal Microbiota from the Human Body 54 Staphylococci 55 Pneumococci 56 Streptococci 57 Neisseriae 58 Aerobic and Anaerobic Endospore-Forming Bacteria 10 Survey of Selected Eucaryotic Microorganisms 59 Fungi I: Yeasts 60 Fungi II: Phycomycetes, Ascomycetes, and Basidiomycetes 11 Microbial Genetics and Genomics 61 Bacterial Mutation 62 Bacterial Transformation 63 Bacterial Conjugation: The Transfer of Antibiotic-Resistant Plasmids 64 Isolation of Genomic DNA from Saccharomyces cerevisiae 65 Isolation and Purification of Genomic DNA from Escherichia coli 66 Identifying Archaea and Bacteria Using the Internet and ComputerAssisted Gene Analysis Appendix A Dilutions with Sample Problems Appendix B Metric and English Measurement Equivalents Appendix C Transmission-Absorbance Table for Spectrophotometry Appendix D Logarithms Appendix E pH and pH Indicators Appendix F Scientific Notation Appendix G Identification Charts Appendix H Reagents, Solutions, Stains, and Tests Appendix I Culture Media Appendix J Sources and Maintenance of Microbiological Stock Cultures By John Harley, Eastern Kentucky University 2008 (February 2007) / 504 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-299293-9 Laboratory Exercises in Microbiology, 7/e has been prepared to accompany Prescott, Harley and Klein’s Microbiology, 7e, written by new authors Joanne Willey, Linda Sherwood, and Christopher Woolverton. Like the text, the laboratory manual provides a balanced introduction to laboratory techniques and principles that are important in each area of microbiology. CONTENTS 1 Microscopic Techniques 1 Bright-Field Light Microscope and Microscopic Measurement of Organisms 2 The Hanging Drop Slide and Bacterial Motility 3 Dark-Field Light Microscope 4 Phase-Contrast Light Microscope 5 Flourescence Microscope 2 Bacterial Morphology and Staining 6 Negative Staining 7 Smear Preparation and Simple Staining 8 Gram Stain 9 Acid-Fast Staining (Ziehl-Neelsen and Kinyoun) Procedures 10 Endospore Staining (Schaeffer-Fulton or Wirtz-Conklin) 11 Capsule Staining 12 Flagella Staining: West and Difco’s SpotTest Methods 3 Basic Laboratory and Culture Techniques 13 Microbiological Culture Media Preparation and Sterilization 14 Culture Transfer Instruments, Techniques, and Isolation and Maintenance of Pure Cultures 15 Spread-Plate Technique 16 The Streak-Plate Technique and Different Media 17 Pour-Plate Technique 18 Cultivation of Anaerobic Bacteria 19 Determination of Bacterial Numbers 4 Biochemical Activities of Bacteria 20 Carbohydrates I: Fermentation and B-Galactosidase Activity 21 Carbohydrates II: Triple Sugar Iron Agar Tests 22 Carbohydrates III: Starch Hydrolysis 23 Lipids: Lipid Hydrolysis 24 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes I: Hydrogen Sulfide Production and Motility 25 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes II: The IMViC Tests 26 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes III: Casein Hydrolysis 27 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes IV: Gelatin Hydrolysis 28 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes V: Catalase Activity 29 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes VI: Coagulase and DNase Activity 30 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes VII: Oxidase Test 31 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes VIII: Urease Activity 32 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes IX: Lysine and Ornithine Decarboxylase Test 33 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes X: Phenylalanine Deamination 34 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes XI: Nitrate Reduction 5 Rapid Multitest Systems 35 The API 20E System 36 The Enterotube II System 6 Unknown Identification 37 Using the First Edition of Bergey’s Manual of Systematic Bacteriology to Identify Bacteria 38 General Unknown 7 Environmental Factors Affecting Growth of Microorganisms 39 Temperature 40 pH 41 Osmotic Pressure 42 The Effects of Chemical Agents on Bacteria I: Disinfectants 43 The Effects of Chemical Agents on Bacteria II: Antimicrobial Agents (Kirby-Bauer Method) INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 83 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS LABORATORY MANUAL AND WORKBOOK IN MICROBIOLOGY Applications to Patient Care, 9th Edition International Edition LABORATORY EXERCISES IN ORGANISMAL AND MOLECULAR MICROBIOLOGY By Josephine A Morello, University of Chicago, Paul A Granato, SUNY Health Science Center and Helen Eckel Mizer, Western CT State University 2008 (September 2007) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-299575-6 By Steve K. Alexander, University of Mary Hardin Baylor, Dennis Strete, McLennan Community College and Mary Jane Niles, University of San Francisco 2004 / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-248744-2 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-115124-5 [IE] This ninth edition maintains its original emphasis on the basic principles of diagnostic microbiology for students preparing to enter the allied health professions. The students are led through a series of exercises that allow them to learn basic microbiology techniques and to practice safety in the laboratory and hospital environment. It remains oriented primarily toward meeting the interests and needs of those who will be directly involved in patient care and who wish to learn how microbiological principles should be applied in the practice of their professions. CONTENTS CONTENTS PART 1 Basic Techniques of Microbiology 1. The Microscope 2. Handling and Examining Cultures 3. Hanging Drop and Wet-Mount Preparations 4. Simple Stains 5. Gram Stain 6. Acid-Fast Stain 7. Special Stains 8. Culture Media 9. Streaking Technique to Obtain Pure Cultures 10. Pour-Plate and Subculture Techniques 11. Culturing Microorganisms from the Environment PART 2 Destruction of Microorganisms 12. Moist and Dry Heat 13. The Autoclave 14. Disinfectants 15. Antimicrobial Agent Susceptibility Testing and Resistance PART 3 Diagnostic Microbiology in Action 16. Primary Media for Isolation of Microorganisms 17. Some Metabolic Activities of Bacteria 18. Activities of Bacterial Enzymes 19. Principles of Antigen Detection and Nucleic Acid Assays for Detection and Identification of Microorganisms. 20. Staphylococci 21. Streptococci, Pneumococci, and Enterococci 22. Haemophilus, Corynebacteria, and Bordetella 23. Clinical Specimens from the Respiratory Tract 24. The Enterobacteriaceae (Enteric Bacilli) 25. Clinical Specimens from the Intestinal Tract 26. Urine Culture Techniques 27. Neisseria and Spirochetes PART 4 Microbial Pathogens Requiring Special Laboratory Techniques; Serological Identification of Patients’ Antibodies 28. Anaerobic Bacteria 29. Mycobacteria 30. Mycoplasmas, Rickettsiae, Chlamydiae, Viruses, and Prions 31. Fungi: Yeast and Molds 32. Protozoa and Animal Parasites 33. Serodiagnosis of Infectious Disease PART 5 Applied (Sanitary) Microbiology 34. Bacteriological Analysis of Water 35. Bacteriological Analysis of Milk Laboratory Safety in the Microbiology Laboratory. Section I Survey of Microscopic Organisms Part A The Microscope: 1 Structure, Function, and Use of the Microscope 2 Microscopic Comparisons of Microorganisms, Parasites, and Small Invertebrates / Part B Microorganisms: 3 Microbial Prokaryotes: Bacteria and Cyanobacteria 4 Microbial Eucaryotes: Fungi 5 Microbial Eucaryotes : Protozoa and Algae / Part C Multicellulart Parasites: 6 Flatworms and Roundworms / Part D Microscopic Invertebrates: 7 Zooplankton 8 Disease Vectors Section II Staining Techniques Part A Morphological Stains: 9 Negative Staining 10 Smear Preparation and the Simple Stain / Part B Differential Stains: 11 Gram Stain 12 Acid-fast Stain / Part C Structural Stains: 13 Spore Stain 14 Capsule and Flagella Stain / Part D Application: 15 The Staining Characterization of a Bacterial Unknown Section III Bacterial Cultivation Part A Aseptic Technique: 16 Bacteria and Fungi in the Laboratory Environment: The Necessity of Aseptic Technique / Part B The Culture of Bacteria: 17 The Preparation and Inoculation of Growth Media 18 Culture Characterization Using Agar and Broth Media Section IV Bacterial Identification 19 Biochemical Tests Used to Identify Bacteria / 20 Application: The Identification of a Non-clinical Bacterial Unknown Section V Medical Microbiology Part A Bacteria of the Human Body: 21 Isolation and Identification of Staphylococci from the Skin 22 Isolation and Identification of Streptococci from the Throat 23A Identification of Enteric Bacteria Including the Intestinal pathogens Salmonella and Shigella 23B Enterotubes, a Rapid Test System to Identify Enteric Bacteria 24 Isolation and Identification of a Bacteria from the Urinary Tract / Part B Treatment of Bacterial Infections: 25 Assessing Antibiotic Effectiveness: The Kirby-Bauer Method / Part C Application: 26 The Identification of a Clinical Bacterial Unknown Section VI Controlling the Risk and Spread of Bacterial Infections Part A Food Handling: 27 Killing Bacteria Using High Temperatures / Part B Disinfecting Skin and Countertops: 28 Skin Disinfection: Evaluating Antiseptics and Hand Sanitizers 29 Cleaning Countertops with Disinfectants / Part C Testing Drinking Water Safety: 30 Bacteriological Examination of Drinking Water Using the MPN Method Section VII Bacterial Genetics Part A Bacterial Genomic DNA: 31 Bacterial DNA Fingerprinting 32 Mutagenesis in Bacteria: The Ames Test / Part B Plasmid DNA: 33 Plasmid Isolation and Restriction Mapping / Part C The Transfer of Drug Resistance: 34 Transformation / 35 Conjugation Section VIII Viruses Part A The Nature and Characterization of Viruses: 36 Structural Analysis of an Insect Virus, NPV / Part B Virus Propagation: 37 Detection and Quantification of Viruses of Bacteria 38 The Virus Infection Cycle 39 Virus Infection in Plants 84 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS Section IX Hematology and Serology Part A Hematology: 40 Identification and Enumeration of White Blood Cells / Part B Serology: 41 Antigen-Antibody Reactions and Determination of Antibody Titer / Part C Serological Techniques: 42 Agglutination Reactions: ABO Blood Typing 43 Immunodiffusion: Antigen-Antibody Reactions in Gels 44 ELISA (Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay) 45 Bacterial Protein Fingerprinting and Western Blotting 46 Neutralization of Viruses by Antibodies STDs / AIDS NEW AIDS UPDATE 2009 18th Edition Microbiology Printed - Supplements By Gerald J Stine, University of North Florida SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MICROBIOLOGY 2nd Edition 2009 (December 2008) / 512 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-352759-8 By Edward Alcamo, Farmingdale State College and Jennifer M Warner 2009 (July 2009) / 464 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-162326-1 AIDS UPDATE 2009 presents a balanced review of current research and information on HIV infection, HIV disease, and AIDS. AIDS UPDATE 2009 places discussion within a biological, medical, and social framework, helping readers more fully understand this devastating pandemic. A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS 1. Introduction to Microbiology 2. The Chemical Basis of Microbiology 3. Microbial Size and Microscopy 4. Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes 5. Microbial Growth and Cultivation 6. Metabolism of Microorganisms 7. DNA and Gene Expression 8. Microbial Genetics 9. Control of Microorganisms 10. The Major Groups of Bacteria 11. The Fungi 12. The Protozoa 13. The Unicellular Algae 14. The Viruses 15. The Host-Parasite Relationship 16. Host Resistance and the Immune System 17. Immune Tests and Disorders 18. Microbial Diseases of the Skin and Eyes 19. Microbial Diseases of the Nervous System 20. Microbial Diseases of the Respiratory System 21. Microbial Diseases of the Digestive System 22. Microbial Diseases of the Blood and Viscera 23. Microbial Diseases of the Urogenital System 24. Food and Industrial Microbiology 25. Environmental Microbiology Answers to Questions NEW AIDS UPDATE 2008 17th Edition By Gerald J Stine, University of North Florida 2009 (January 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337528-1 http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073375284.mhtml AIDS Update 2008 presents a balanced review of current research and information on HIV infection, HIV disease, and AIDS. AIDS Update 2008 places this discussion within a biological, medical, social, economic and legal framework, helping readers to more fully understand this modern-day pandemic. CONTENTS Chapter 1 AIDS, Defining the Disease and Finding Its Cause Chapter 2 What Causes AIDS: Origin of the AIDS Virus Chapter 3 Biological Characteristics of the AIDS Virus Chapter 4 Anti-HIV Therapy Chapter 5 The Immunology of HIV Disease/AIDS Chapter 6 Opportunistic Infections and Cancers Associated with HIV Disease/AIDS Chapter 7 A Profile of Biological Indicators for HIV Disease and Progression to AIDS Chapter 8 Epidemiology and Transmission of the Human Immunodeficiency Virus Chapter 9 Preventing the Transmission of HIV Chapter 10 Prevalence of HIV Infections, AIDS Cases, and Deaths Among Select Groups in the United States and AIDS in Other Countries 85 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY Chapter 11 Prevalence of HIV Infection and AIDS Cases Among Women and Children in the United States Chapter 12 Prevalence of HIV Infection and AIDS Among Young Adults, Ages 13 to 24 Chapter 13 Testing for Human Immunodeficiency Virus Determining the Presence of Antibody Produced When HIV Is Present Chapter 14 AIDS and Society: Knowledge, Attitudes, and Behavior HIV/AIDS Is a Story in Our Lifetime Summary / Review Questions By William Stansfield, California State Polytechnic University 1996 / 384 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-060898-6 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS 1. Cells 2. Biomacromolecules 3. Chromosomes 4. Transcription and Gene Regulation 5. Translation 6. Mutations 7. The Genetics of Bacteria and Their Viruses 8. Genetic Engineering / Recombinant DNA Technology 9. Nucleic Acid Manipulations 10. Eukaryotic Cells and Their Viruses 11. Cellular Communication 12. Development in Multicellular Organisms 13. The Immune System 14. Molecular Evolution. Molecular Biology International Edition MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 4th Edition By Robert Weaver, University of Kansas-Lawrence 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331994-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-127548-4 [IE] Developmental Biology / Embryology http://www.mhhe.com/weaver4 Molecular Biology, 4/e by Robert Weaver, is designed for an introductory course in molecular biology. The text is geared not only toward presenting concepts of molecular biology, but also the experiments that led to those concepts. Guided by this experimental approach, Dr. Weaver has been published by National Institutes as well as National Geographic. International Edition ANALYSIS OF BIOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT 2nd Edition CONTENTS 1 Introduction 1 A Brief History 2 The Molecular Nature of Genes 3 An Introduction to Gene Function 2 Methods of Molecular Biology 4 Molecular Cloning Methods 5 Molecular Tools for Studying Genes and Gene Activity 3 Transcription in Prokaryotes 6 The Mechanism of Transcription in Prokaryotes 7 Operons: Fine Control of Prokaryotic Transcription 8 Major Shifts in Prokaryotic Transcription 9 DNA-Protein Interactions in Prokaryotes 4 Transcription in Eukaryotes 10 Eukaryotic RNA Polymerases and Their Promoters 11 General Transcription Factors in Eukaryotes 12 Transcription Activators in Eukaryotes 13 Chromatin Structure and Its Effects on Transcription 5 Posttranscriptional Events 14 Messenger RNA Processing I: Splicing 15 Messenger RNA Processing II: Capping and Polyadenylation 16 Other RNA Processing Events 6 Translation 17 The Mechanism of Translation I: Initiation 18 The Mechanism of Translation II: Elongation and Termination 19 Ribosomes and Transfer RNA 7 DNA Replication, Recombination, and Transposition 20 DNA Replication I: Basic Mechanism and Enzymology 21 DNA Replication II: Detailed Mechanism 22 Homologous Recombination 23 Transposition 8 Genomes 24 Genomics and Proteomics By Klaud Kalthoff, University of Texas at Austin 2001 /816 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-125356-7 [IE] www.mhhe.com/kalthoff CONTENTS Part I From Gametogenesis to Histogenesis 1 Analysis of Development 2 The Role of Cells in Development 3 Gametogenesis 4 Fertilization 5 Cleavage 6 Cell Fate, Potency and Determination 7 Genomic Equivalence and the Cytoplasmic Environment 8 Localized Cytoplasmic Determinants 9 Axis Formation and Mesoderm Induction 10 Gastrulation 11 Cell Adhesion and Morphogenesis 12 Organogenesis 13 Ectodermal Organs 14 Endodermal and Mesodermal Organs Part II Control of Gene Expression in Development 15 The Use of Mutants and Transgenic Organisms in the Analysis of Development 16 Transcriptional Control 17 RNA Processing 18 Translational Control and Post-translational Modifications 19 Genetic and Paragenetic Information Part III Current Topics in Developmental Biology 20 Cell Differentiation 21 Pattern Formation and Embryonic Fields 86 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS General Genetics 22 Genetic and Molecular Analysis of Pattern Formation in the Drosophila Embryo 23 Genetic and Molecular Analysis of Vertebrate Development 24 Genetic and Molecular Analysis of Pattern Formation in Plants 25 Experimental and Genetic Analysis of Caenorhabditis elegans Development 26 Sex Determination 27 Hormonal Control of Development 28 Organismic Growth and Oncogenes NEW International Edition GENETICS Analysis and Principles, 3rd Edition Immunology By Robert J Brooker, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722972-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-128764-7 [IE] SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF IMMUNOLOGY By George Pinchuk 2002 / 304 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-137366-1 http://www.mhhe.com/brookergenetics3e Genetics: Analysis and Principles is a one-semester, introductory genetics textbook that takes an experimental approach to understanding genetics. By weaving one or two experiments into the narrative of each chapter, students can simultaneously explore the scientific method and understand the genetic principles that have been learned from these experiments. A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS 1. Overview of Immunity and the Immune System 2. Cells, Tissues, and Organs of the Immune System 3. Antibodies and Antigens 4. Maturation of B Lympocytes and Expression of Immunoglobullin Genes 5. The Major Histocompatibility Complex 6. Antigen Processing and Presentation 7. T-Lymphocyte Antigen Recognition and Activation 8. B-Lymphocyte Activation and Antibody Production 9. Immunologic Tolerance 10. Cytokines 11. Innate Immunity 12. Effector Mechanisms of Cell-Mediated Immunity 13. Effector Mechanisms of Humoral Immunity 14. Immunity to Microbes 15. Transplantation Immunology 16. Immunity to Tumors 17. Autoimmunity and Autoimmune Diseases 18. Immunodeficiencies. FEATURES Art Program! Every illustration has been rendered with four goals in mind: 1. Completeness - For most figures, it should be possible to understand an experiment or genetic concept by looking at the illustration alone. 2. Clarity - The figures have been extensively reviewed by students and instructors. This has helped avoid drawing things that may be confusing or unclear. 3. Consistency - Recurring elements and colors have all been coordinated to provide a consistent art program. 4. Realism - An important goal of the second edition has been to make each figure as realistic as possible. For example, when drawing macroscopic elements (e.g. fruit flies, pea plants, etc.), the illustrations have been based on real images, not on cartoon-like simplifications. Dynamic Media Package! Online Learning Center will contain extensive quizzing for the student, video lectures, and computer programs for genetic problem solving. Student CD-ROM will include extensive problem solving applications and interactive exercises to aid in the study of learning genetics. Digital Content Manager! The digital assets on this cross-platform CD-ROM are organized by chapter in an easy-to-use folder system. Art Library: Full-color digital files of all illustrations in the book (659 images. These images are also pre-inserted into blank PowerPoint slides for ease of use). Photo Library: Digital files of 206 instructionally significant photographs. Table Library: Every table that appears in the text is provided in electronic form. PowerPoint Lecture Outlines: Ready-made presentations that combine art and lecture notes are provided for each of the chapters of the text. Active Art Library: Each piece of art can be broken down to its core elements, grouped or ungrouped, and edited to create customized illustrations. 100 illustrations are available in this format. Animations Library: 43 full-color animations of key genetic principles. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 87 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS Solutions to even-numbered problems appear at the back of the book. Solutions to odd-numbered problems will be available on the free, password protected OLC. NEW International Edition Chapter Concept statements keep the focus of the text on concepts, so students don’t get lost in details. Each A head starts with a conceptual statement in the form of a complete sentence that emphasizes the key point of the material. INTRODUCTION TO GENETICS A unique chapter, Computer Analysis of Genetic Sequences, gives students a glance at the most modern techniques used by geneticists today. By David Hyde, University of Notre Dame Unifying theme - the relationship between genes and traits appears throughout the text and reinforces the relationship between abstract concepts and concrete physical expressions. This theme is called out with blue type in several figure legends in each chapter 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-322481-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-110675-7 [IE] Classic experiments in transmission and molecular genetics are highlighted in each chapter, with a strong emphasis on the scientific method. In each chapter 1-2 experiments are broken into five steps: Background observations, the Hypothesis, Testing the Hypothesis, the Data, and Interpreting the Data (denoted with gold bars). http://www.mhhe.com/hyde 1. Conceptual questions test students’ understanding of basic genetic principles. 2. Experimental questions test their ability to analyze data, design experiments, and appreciate the relevance of experimental techniques. 3. Student discussion/collaboration questions Hyde’s Introduction to Genetics teaches the principles of genetics with an innovative approach that emphasizes the basic concepts involved in solving problems as well as teaching students how to manipulate genetic data. While most genetics textbooks provide some examples and several problems for the student to work, the texts primarily stress facts and historical information. It is often left to the student to make the connection from what is in the text to elucidating the approaches to solve problems. Dr. David Hyde presents these skills to the students throughout the narrative in a stepped-out fashion, making an explicit tie between the facts and their application. This text maintains the rigor that faculty require in a genetics book, while incorporating a student-friendly presentation style that helps the reader comprehend the material. CONTENTS FEATURES Ch. 1: Overview of Genetics Ch. 2: Mendelian Inheritance Ch. 3: Reproduction and Chromosome Transmission Ch. 4: Extensions of Mendelian Inheritance Ch. 5: Linkage and Genetic Mapping in Eukaryotes Ch. 6: Genetic Transfer and Mapping in Bacteria and Bacteriophages Ch. 7: Non-Mendelian Inheritance Ch. 8: Variation in Chromosome Structure and Number Ch. 9: Molecular Structure of DNA and RNA Ch. 10: Chromosome Organization and Molecular Structure Ch. 11: DNA Replication Ch. 12: Gene Transcription Ch. 13: Translation of mRNA Ch. 14: Gene Regulation in Bacteria and Bacteriophages Ch. 15: Gene Regulation in Eukaryotes Ch. 16: Gene Mutation and DNA Repair Ch. 17: Recombination and Transposition at the Molecular Level Ch. 18: Recombinant DNA Technology Ch. 19: Biotechnology Ch. 20: Structural Genomics Ch. 21: Functional Genomics, Proteomics, and Bioinformatics Ch. 22: Medical Genetics and Cancer Ch. 23: Developmental Genetics Ch. 24: Quantitative Genetics Ch. 25: Population Genetics Ch. 26: Evolutionary Genetics Innovative, Problem-Solving-Based Approach -- The author maintains the connection between basic genetic principles and their application to problems using a stepped-out system. The text also links specific portions of the text with selected end-of-chapter problems to direct the student to problems that will test their comprehension of the material they just studied. Conceptual and experimental themes are used in text discussions (see Testing the Hypothesis sections in each chapter) and endof-chapter material (both in chapter summaries and problem sets) Problem sets are broken into three parts. 88 Strong and Accessible Molecular Genetics Coverage -- Dr. Hyde discusses in a clear and basic manor, the latest information on molecular processes and new techniques. Dynamic Illustration and Photo Program -- The art program incorporates vibrant colors and three-dimensional effects with pedagogically sound layouts that greatly assist students in visualizing and understanding difficult genetic processes. Strong Pedagogical Framework -- A strong framework makes key concepts easier to identify. For example, all section heads will be written as concept statements. Superior Media Package -- Introduction to Genetics offers instructors full access to textbook art, photos and tables, as well as high-quality animations and customizable PowerPoint lecture presentations. The Online Learning Center provides students with additional study tools and problem-solving exercises. CONTENTS 1 Genetics and the Scientific Method Patterns and Mechanisms of Classical Inheritance 2 Mendelian Genetics 3 Mitosis and Meiosis 4 Sex Determination and Sex Linkage 5 Modifications to Mendelian Ratios 6 Linkage and Mapping in Eukaryotes Molecular Basis of Inheritance and Gene Expression 7 DNA Structure and Chromosome Organization 8 Changes in Chromosome Structure and Number 9 DNA Replication CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS 10 Gene Expression: Transcription 11 Gene Expression: Translation DNA Technologies 12 Recombinant DNA Technology 13 Applications of Recombinant DNA Technology 14 Genomics and Bioinformatics Control of Gene Expression 15 Prokaryotic Genetics 16 Gene Expression: Control in Prokaryotes and Phages 17 Gene Expression: Control in Eukaryotes 18 DNA Mutation and Repair 19 Extranuclear Inheritance Genetics and Biological Processes 20 Mutational Analysis 21 Developmental Genetics 22 Cancer Genetics Population Genetics and Evolution 23 Population Genetics 24 Quantitative Genetics 25 Evolutionary Genetics 20 Using Genetics to Study Development 21 The Genetic Analysis of Populations and How They Evolve 22 Evolution at the Molecular Level SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF GENETICS 4th Edition By Susan Elrod, California Polytechnic State University - San Luis Obispo 2002 / 500 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-136206-1 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS 1. The Physical Basis of Heredity 2. Patterns of Inheritance 3. The Biochemical Basis of Heredity 4. Genetic Interactions 5. The Genetics of Sex 6. Linkage and Chromosome Mapping 7. Cytogenetics 8. Quantitative Genetics 9. Population Genetics and Evolution 10. Genetics of Bacteria 11. Viruses, Transposable Elements, and Cancer 12. Molecular Genetics and Biotechnology 13. The Molecular Biology of Eukaryotes. International Edition GENETICS From Genes to Genomes, 3rd Edition By Leland Hartwell, University of Washington 2008 (October 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-322738-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-110215-5 [IE] International Edition www.mhhe.com/hartwell3 Genetics: From Genes to Genomes is a cutting-edge, introductory genetics text authored by an unparalleled author team, including Nobel Prize winner, Leland Hartwell. The Third Edition continues to build upon the integration of Mendelian and molecular principles, providing students with the links between early genetics understanding and the new molecular discoveries that have changed the way the field of genetics is viewed. PRINCIPLES OF GENETICS 7th Edition By Robert Tamarin, University of Massachusetts 2002 ISBN: 978-0-07-124320-9 [IE with OLC&CD] www.mhhe.com/tamarin7 CONTENTS CONTENTS 1 Genetics: The Study of Biological Information 2 Mendel’s Breakthrough: Patterns, Particles, and Principles of Heredity 3 Extensions to Mendel: Complexities in Relating Genotype to Phenotype 4 The Chromosome Theory of Inheritance 5 Linkage, Recombination, and the Mapping of Genes on Chromosomes 6 DNA: How the Molecule of Heredity Carries, Replicates, and Recombines Information 7 Anatomy and Function of a Gene: Dissection Through Mutation 8 Gene Expression: The Flow of Genetic Information from DNA to RNA to Protein 9 Deconstructing the Genome: DNA at High Resolution 10 Reconstructing the Genome Through Genetic and Molecular Analysis 11 The Direct Detection of Genotype Distinguishes Individual Genomes 12 Systems Biology and Proteomics 13 The Eukaryotic Chromosome: An Organelle for Packaging and Managing DNA 14 Chromosomal Rearrangements and Changes in Chromosome Number Reshape Eukaryotic Genomes 15 The Prokaryotic Chromosome: Genetic Analysis in Bacteria 16 The Chromosomes of Organelles Outside the Nucleus Exhibit Non-Mendelian Patterns of Inheritance 17 Gene Regulation in Prokaryotes 18 Gene Regulation in Eukaryotes 19 Cell-Cycle Regulation and the Genetics of Cancer I Genetics and the Scientific Method 1 Introduction II Mendelism and the Chromosomal Theory 2 Mendel’s Principles 3 Mitosis and Meiosis 4 Probability and Statistics 5 Sex Determination, Sex Linkage, and Pedigree Analysis 6 Linkage and Mapping in Eukaryotes 7 Linkage and Mapping in Prokaryotes and Bacterial Viruses 8 Cytogenetics III Molecular Genetics 9 Chemistry of the Gene 10 Gene Expression: Transcription 11 Gene Expression: Translation 12 DNA: Its Mutation, Repair, and Recombination 13 Genomics, Biotechnology, and Recombinant DNA 14 Gene Expression: Control in Prokaryotes and Phages 15 The Eukaryotic Chromosome 16 Gene Expression: Control in Eukaryotes 17 Non-Mendelian Inheritance IV Quantitative and Evolutionary Genetics 18 Quantitative Inheritance 19 Population Genetics: The Hardy-Weinberg Equilibrium and Mating Systems 20 Population Genetics: Processes That Change Allelic Frequencies Appendix A Brief Answers to Selected Exercises, Problems, and Critical Thinking Questions Appendix B Suggestions for Further Reading 89 CELLULAR MOLECULAR, MICROBIOLOGY & GENETICS Human Genetics Biotechnology International Edition BIOTECHNOLOGY DEMYSTIFIED HUMAN GENETICS 8th Edition By Sharon Walker 2007 (Sept 2006) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-144812-3 By Ricki Lewis, SUNY at Albany 2008 (September 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-722127-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-128310-6 [IE] A Professional Publication http://www.mhhe.com/lewisgenetics8 Human Genetics, Eighth Edition, is a non-science majors human genetics text that clearly explains what genes are, how they function, how they interact with the environment, and how our understanding of genetics has changed since completion of the human genome project. It is a clear, modern, and exciting book for citizens who will be responsible for evaluating new medical options, new foods, and new technologies in the age of genomics. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Overview of Genetics Chapter 2 Cells Chapter 3 Meiosis and Development Chapter 4 Single Gene Inheritance Chapter 5 Beyond Mendel’s Laws Chapter 6 Matters of Sex Chapter 7 Multifactorial Traits Chapter 8 The Genetics of Behavior Chapter 9 DNA Structure and Replication Chapter 10 Gene Action: From DNA to Protein Chapter 11 Control of Gene Expression and Genome Architecture Chapter 12 Gene Mutation Chapter 13 Chromosomes Chapter 14 When Allele Frequencies Stay Constant Chapter 15 Changing Allele Frequencies Chapter 16 Human Ancestry and Eugenics Chapter 17 Genetics of Immunity Chapter 18 The Genetics of Cancer Chapter 19 Genetic Technologies: Amplifying, Modifying, and Monitoring DNA Chapter 20 Genetic Testing and Treatment Chapter 21 Reproductive Technologies Chapter 22 Genomics INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 90 This self-teaching guide explains the basic concepts and fundamentals in all the major subtopics of biotechnology. The content advances logically from the basics of molecular and cellular biology to more complex topics such as DNA, reproductive cloning, experimental procedures, infectious diseases, immunology, the Human Genome Project, new drug discoveries, and genetic disorders. CONTENTS Part 1: Fundamental Topics in Molecular and Cellular Biology Chapter 1: The Molecules of Life: The stuff you are made of Chapter 2: The Cellular Basis of Life: What cells look like and what they do Chapter 3: Information Flow within the Cell: Going from gene to protein Chapter 4: DNA Replication and Cell Division: How life continues Chapter 5: Regulation of gene expression: cells don’t express every gene they have Chapter 6: Signal Transduction: How cells interact with what is outside Part 2: Essential Experimental Techniques in Biotechnology Chapter 7: Genetic Engineering: How you do something with DNA Chapter 8: Assays for Gene Function: I made this DNA, now what? Part 3: Advanced Topics in Biotechnology Chapter 9: Cancer and the Cell Cycle: When good cells go bad Chapter 10: Infectious Disease: Bacteria and viruses and prions, oh my! Chapter 11: Immunology: How the body protects itself from invasion Chapter 12: Genetic Disease: When good genes go bad Part 4: Applications of Biotechnology Chapter 13: The Human Genome Project: What it is and what it’s used for Chapter 14: Reproductive Cloning: Understanding the controversy Chapter 15: Genetically Modified (GM) Crops: The new way to make a better tomato Chapter 16: Drug Discovery: The accelerated pace of finding new drugs Chapter 17: Future Prospects for Biotechnology: Is it bright or a lack of foresight? 91 NUTRITION Introduction to Nutrition - Multimedia ....................................................................................................97 - Supplements ............................................................................................... 97 - Textbook ...................................................................................................... 93 Nutrition and Sport........................................................................................... 100 Nutrition Assessment ........................................................................................101 Nutrition Through The Life Cycle - Nutrition & Human Development ................................................................100 NEW TITLES NUTRITION 2010 Author ISBN-13 Nutrition for Health, Fitness and Sport, 9e Williams 9780073375557 2009 Author ISBN-13 Wardlaw’s Perspectives in Nutrition, 8e Byrd-Bredbenner 9780077263201 93 NutritionCalc Plus 3.2 CD-ROM ESHA Research 9780077312435 97 NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 CD-ROM ESHA Research 9780073328652 98 NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 Online ESHA Research 9780073328645 99 Food Nutrition Guide/Food Composition Table MH Higher Education 9780073402567 99 Nutrition for Healthy Living Schiff 9780077224851 94 Contemporary Nutrition, 7e Wardlaw 9780077211660 95 Contemporary Nutrition: A Functional Approach Wardlaw 9780077227784 96 Page 100 NUTRITION 92 Page NUTRITION Introduction to Nutrition scientific understanding of metabolic pathways. New illustrations also help guide students to develop a better understanding of this challenging topic. The chapters on energy balance, weight control, and eating disorders (Ch. 10) and sports nutrition (Ch. 11) have been moved up to precede the micronutrient chapters. Textbook Enhanced art program. More than one thousand drawings, photographs, and tables in the text were critically analyzed to identify how each could be enhanced and refined to help students more easily master complex scientific concepts. NEW -- Photographs were added to many tables to promote interest and retention of information. Many photographs were updated or replaced to inspire student inquiry and comprehension. International Edition -- Dozens of existing illustrations were redesigned to use brighter colors and a more attractive, contemporary style. Others were finetuned to make them clearer and easier to follow. WARDLAW’S PERSPECTIVES IN NUTRITION 8th Edition -- Process descriptions within many figures were moved from the legend into the body of the figure. Pairing the action and explanation together walks students step-by-step through the process and increases the teaching effectiveness of these figures. By Carol Byrd-Bredbenner, Jacqueline Berning, Univesity of Colorado, Donna Beshgetoor, San Diego State University and Gaile Moe, Seattle Pacific University Applying nutrition on a personal level. New and enhanced pedagogical aids have been crafted to capture students’ interest and enhance the flow of the reading: 2009 (September 2008) / 960 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-726320-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-128446-2 [IE] • Updated case studies showcase realistic scenarios and thoughtprovoking questions. http://www.mhhe.com/wardlawpers8 Perspectives in Nutrition, 8th edition, is an introductory nutrition text appropriate for nutrition and science majors, as well as mixed majors/non-majors nutrition courses. This text has the richly deserved reputation of providing an accurate, current, in-depth and thoughtful introduction to the dynamic field of nutrition. The 8th edition introduces a new author team whose primary goal has been to maintain the strengths and philosophy that have been the hallmark of this book yet enhance the accessibility and personal application of materials for today’s students. NEW TO THIS EDITION Accurate, current science presented in an engaging manner. This edition continues the tradition of presenting in-depth scientific content that is reliable, accurate, and up-to-date. To enhance these strengths and promote greater student comprehension, new research findings and peer-reviewed references were incorporated and artwork was enhanced to further complement discussions. The presentation of complex concepts was scrutinized in an effort to increase clarity through the use of clear, streamlined, precise, and student-friendly language. Timely and intriguing examples, illustrative analogies, clinical insights, and historical notes were added to make the text enjoyable and interesting to students and instructors alike. Reorganization of table of contents. -- Part 1, Nutrition Basics, has a new addition: Chapter 3, The Food Supply. Consumer-related issues, such as food safety, food additives, organic foods, biotechnology, and hunger draw many students to nutrition. However, numerous instructors told us they can seldom fit these chapters into their crowded course content and wanted innovative strategies for incorporating these vital concepts. In response, we thoughtfully trimmed and sharply focused the content of the food safety and world nutrition chapters of the previous edition, and moved the content forward in the textbook where it logically sets the stage for further study of nutrition. • Two “Take Action” features (many are new) allow students to examine their own diet and health issues. • Medical Perspectives boxes delve into clinical and medical aspects of nutrition. These features help students apply the science of nutrition to their own lives, and particularly appeal to those students interested in health professions. Some topics include: Ch. 5, Diabetes; Ch. 6, Cardiovascular Disease; Ch. 10, Professional Help for Weight Control; Ch. 13, Neural Tube Defects; Ch. 14, Hypertension; Ch. 15, Cancer. • Expert Perspectives from the Field boxes feature high-interest topics written from the perspective of nutrition professional. Examples include: Ch. 3, Organic Foods and Local Food Systems; Ch. 4, Gluten Intolerance; Ch. 7, Nutrition and Immunity; Ch. 10, High Fructose Corn Syrup and Your Waistline. • Global Nutrition Perspective boxes integrate key aspects of world nutrition into appropriate chapters. Examples include: Ch. 4, Diarrhea in Infants and Children; Ch. 12, Vitamin A Deficiency; Ch. 14, Water for Everyone. Assessment and evaluation of learning. The authors have integrated a number of tools that will allow students and instructors alike to measure their success: -- Student Learning Outcomes at the beginning of each chapter have been crafted to clearly delineate for students the competencies they are expected to master in that chapter. • The online testbank questions that accompany the chapters of this text have been correlated to individual student learning outcomes. This will help instructors identify which concepts students have mastered and which they may require additional assistance with. -- New “Knowledge Check” questions appear after each major section to encourage students to self-assess their understanding of key concepts before proceeding to the next section. -- Chapters now conclude with re-formatted Study Questions (multiple choice and true/false with answer key) to provide students with a practice test to assess their mastery and build self-confidence. -- New Part 3, Metabolism and Energy Balance now follows the macronutrient chapters. The Energy Metabolism chapter (Ch. 9) has been rewritten to include the latest research and to make it more understandable for students. The content begins with a simple conceptual explanation of metabolic processes and logically builds into an in-depth -- Critical Thinking questions in the margins challenge students to link key nutrition concepts with real-life situations. These questions also provide a springboard for provocative classroom discussions 93 NUTRITION CONTENTS FEATURES Part 1 Nutrition Basics 1 The Science of Nutrition 2 Tools of a Healthy Diet 3 The Food Supply 4 Human Digestion and Absorption Part 2 Energy-Yielding Nutrients and Alcohol 5 Carbohydrates 6 Lipids 7 Protein 8 Alcohol Part 3 Metabolism and Energy Balance 9 Energy Metabolism 10 Energy Balance, Weight Control, & Eating Disorders 11 Nutrition, Exercise, and Sports Part 4 Vitamins and Minerals 12 Fat-Soluble Vitamins 13 Water-Soluble Vitamins 14 Water and Major Minerals 15 Trace Minerals Part 5 Nutrition Applications in the Life Cycle 16 Nutritional Aspects of Pregnancy and Breastfeeding 17 Nutrition during the Growing Years 18 Nutrition throughout Adulthood Appendixes A Human Physiology B Chemistry C Glycolysis, Citric Acid Cycle, , Electron Transport Chain, Eicosanoids, and Homocysteine Metabolism D Dietary Advice for Canadians E Exchange Systems F Fatty Acids in Foods G Height-Weight Tables H Nutrition Calculations I English-Metric Conversions J Estimated Average Requirements (EARs) for Nutrients K CDC Growth Charts L Sources of Nutrition Information M Dietary Intake and Energy Expenditure Assessment Uniquely Concise Organization. Structured into 13 chapters, this entire text can easily be covered within one semester. Instead of separate chapters on different lifecycles, there is one chapter devoted to all key life stages. Unlike other textbooks, global nutrition does not constitute its own chapter at the end of the text (where it is often overlooked due to lack of time); instead, key aspects of world nutrition are introduced in Chapter 1 and then incorporated throughout the text where relevant. Unique Chapter 2 – Evaluating Nutrition Information! This chapter discusses how to evaluate the sources and messages of nutrition- and health-related information for reliability, a very important topic that other textbooks generally devote only a small section of a chapter. Distinct Focus on Consumerism. Topics that relate to consumerism are woven throughout the narrative and in pedagogical tools placed throughout the text so as not to distract the reader : -Real People, Real Stories -- Healthy young people often take their health for granted. Instead of using contrived case studies or fictional characters to provide examples of people with nutrition-related disorders, the author conducted interviews with individuals who actually have recovered from or currently experience conditions such as type 1 diabetes, eating disorders, and hypertension. This feature is designed to help students recognize the daily challenges people with such conditions face and the role diet and physical activity play in managing health. -Food and Nutrition Tips – The practical tips that apply material presented in a section provide information to students that they can use everyday and for the rest of their lives. -Recipes for Healthy Living -- This feature includes one or more easyto-make, kitchen-tested recipes that relate to the chapter’s content. Information about the energy and key nutrients in a serving of the food is also presented as well as a pie-chart displaying the percentages of energy from carbohydrate, protein, and fat. This feature demonstrates that preparing nutritious foods can be fun and economical. By trying the recipes, students can develop basic food preparation skills and may be inspired to cook more foods “from scratch”. As a result, they may rely less on vending machines and fast food outlets. -Did You Know? Tidbits -- This marginal feature notes interesting nutrition-related tidbits that apply to information presented in that section of the chapter. Some of these features set the record straight concerning commonly held beliefs about food and nutrition. Furthermore, “Did You Know?” is designed to stimulate students’ interest in nutrition and foods. NEW Manageable Science. The author believes it is important to provide students with basic scientific principles that are technically accurate and simple to understand. Unlike other textbooks, Chapter 4 (Body Basics) introduces very basic chemistry and defines terms needed to understand the scientific foundation of nutrition. The chapter is divided into two main sections, chemistry and human physiology, so professors can easily skip the section that focuses on chemistry if they so choose. International Edition NUTRITION FOR HEALTHY LIVING By Wendy J Schiff, Saint Louis CC-Meramec-Kirkwood Assessment and Evaluation: Nutrition for Healthy Living provides a variety of learning assessment activities so students can assess and evaluate their understanding of content. Besides the end-of-chapter critical thinking and multiple choice questions, two other quizzing tools appear within each chapter: 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722485-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-128347-2 [IE] www.mhhe.com/schiff Today’s “superfood” textbook! A text with a potent kick of nutritional benefits... Nutrition for Healthy Living takes an innovative approach to basic nutrition for the intro Nutrition course. With its uniquely concise organization that serves up concepts in manageable portions and a distinct focus on consumerism, this engaging, fun-to-read text will provide students with the scientific foundation needed to make informed nutritional lifestyle decisions well beyond the classroom. 94 -Quiz Yourself: This pretest is comprised of five true or false questions placed at the end of chapter openers; answers are provided at the end of the chapter. The purpose of “Quiz Yourself” is to stimulate interest in reading the chapter. By taking the quiz, students may be surprised to learn how little or much they know about the chapter’s contents. -Concept Checkpoints: “Concept Checkpoints” are review questions, many of which involve critical thinking skills, posed at the end of major headings. Such questions enable students to test their acquisition of information in the section. NUTRITION Student Learning Outcomes. Each chapter revolves around 5-10 student learning outcomes. The concepts are served in small portions that students can easily process. In addition, author Wendy Schiff has written the entire book’s testbank to ensure consistency between book and test bank, especially with regard to student learning outcomes. Certain questions have been written and noted as questions specifically related to the SLOs. Personal Dietary Analysis: Many chapters include an end-ofchapter activity for analyzing personal eating habits. Most of these activities require the use of a dietary analysis software program, such as McGraw-Hill’s new NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 software. Students can gain insight into their eating behaviors by completing this activity. NEW International Edition CONTEMPORARY NUTRITION 7th Edition By Gordon M Wardlaw and Anne M Smith of Ohio State University-Columbus The latest release of NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 diet analysis software is now available. Both the CD and Online versions share a new userfriendly interface and a handy video tutorial. Other enhancements include the ability to track up to three profiles, 365-day calendar function, a 27,000+ food database, and a new recipe function. 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-721166-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-128365-6 [IE] McGraw-Hill Presentation Center. ARIS Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, PowerPoints, animations, and other media types that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. Accessed from the instructor side of the textbook’s ARIS website, Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows instructors to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. All assets are copyright McGraw-Hill Higher Education but can be used by instructors for classroom purposes. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS. ARIS is a complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. CONTENTS PART ONE: Laying the Foundation for Better Health 1. The Basics of Nutrition 2. Evaluating Nutrition and Health Information 3. Planning Nutritious Menus 4. Body Basics PART TWO: Nutrients and Your Health 5. Carbohydrates 6. Fats and Other Lipids 7. Proteins 8. Vitamins 9. Minerals and Water PART THREE: Applying Your Nutrition Knowledge 10. Energy Balance and Weight Management 11. Exercise and Sports 12. Food Safety Concerns 13. Nutrition for a Lifetime Appendix A English-metric Conversions Appendix B Canadian Food Guide Appendix C Daily Values Table Appendix D Energy Metabolism Appendix E Amino Acids Appendix F Vitamins Involved in Energy Metabolism Appendix G Growth Charts Appendix H End of Chapter Multiple Choice Answer Keys Glossary www.mhhe.com/wardlawcont7 Contemporary Nutrition Seventh Edition is designed for students with little or no background in college-level biology, chemistry or physiology. It will provide students who lack a strong science background the ideal balance of reliable nutrition information and practical consumer-oriented knowledge. With their friendly writing style, the authors act as the student’s personal guide to dispelling common misconceptions and to gaining a solid foundation for making informed nutrition choices. NEW TO THIS EDITION Alcohol is no longer the focus of an entire chapter but is now included in the expanded new section, “Nutritional Implications of Alcohol Consumption” in Chapter 16. This makes it easier to integrate coverage of this important topic within the typical term of an introductory course. Energy Balance and Weight Maintenance are now covered earlier in the text as the topic of Chapter 7, which now more logically follows the energy-yielding nutrient chapters in Part Two. Important content updates include: new food source diagrams for nutrients based upon MyPyramid food groups, the American Heart Association 2006 Diet, new information about E. coli O157:H7, Listeria, and Norovirus, 2006 World Health Organization growth charts for children, an expanded discussion of nutrigenomics, new information on omega-3 fatty acids, and more. Check Your Knowledge is a new element featuring multiplechoice study questions at the end of each chapter. These questions complement the open-ended Study Questions and help students prepare for this type of questions on course examinations. Answers to the Check Your Knowledge questions are found in Appendix A. Each chapter now culminates with a Case Study that presents a real life situation followed by a list of directed questions to assist students in applying the nutrition knowledge from the chapter. Responses to the Case Study questions are found in Appendix A. A totally new look and design invites students to read and learn about nutrition with an engaging style and presentation. This fresh new look features brighter colors, more creative layouts, and exceptional new figures and photos. This edition is now available with the latest release of NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 diet analysis software. Both the CD and Online versions share a new user-friendly interface and a handy video tutorial. Other enhancements include the ability to track up to three profiles, 365-day calendar function, a 27,000-food database, and a new recipe function. McGraw-Hill Presentation Center. ARIS Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, PowerPoints, animations, and other media types that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. 95 NUTRITION Accessed from the instructor side of the textbook’s ARIS website, Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows instructors to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. All assets are copyright McGraw-Hill Higher Education but can be used by instructors for classroom purposes. reliable nutrition information and practical consumer-oriented knowledge. With their friendly writing style, the authors act as the student’s personal guide to dispelling common misconceptions and to gaining a solid foundation for making informed nutrition choices. FEATURES Grouping vitamins and minerals by their functions, rather than a sequential discussion of each nutrient, helps students appreciate how vitamins and minerals work together in the body and also provides a logical framework for understanding and retaining important information about vitamins and minerals. CONTENTS NUTRITION: A KEY TO HEALTH Chapter 1: What You Eat and Why Chapter 2: Guidelines for Designing a Healthy Diet Chapter 3: The Human Body: A Nutrition Perspective ENERGY NUTRIENTS AND ENERGY BALANCE Chapter 4: Carbohydrates Chapter 5: Lipids Chapter 6: Proteins Chapter 7: Energy Balance and Weight Maintenance VITAMINS, MINERALS AND WATER Chapter 8: Vitamins Chapter 9: Water and Minerals NUTRITION: BEYOND THE NUTRIENTS Chapter 10: Nutrition: Fitness and Sports Chapter 11: Eating Disorders: Anorexia Nervosa, Bulimia Nervosa, and Other Conditions Chapter 12: Food Safety Chapter 13: Undernutrition throughout the World NUTRITION: A FOCUS ON THE LIFE STAGES Chapter 14: Pregnancy and Breastfeeding Chapter 15: Nutrition from Infancy through Adolescence Chapter 16: Nutrition during Adulthood APPENDIXES: A: Solutions to Case Studies and Check Your Knowledge B: Daily Values Used in Food Labels C: Dietary Advice for Canadians D: The Exchange System E: Dietary Intake and Energy Expenditure Assessment F: Chemical Structures in Nutrition G: Height-Weight Tables H: Sources of Nutrition Information I: English-Metric Conversions The authors purposefully write as though they are acting as personal guides to each student as they explore the world of nutrition. They provide ample opportunities for students to apply concepts and guidelines to their own lives. For example, each chapter concludes with two Rate Your Plate activities that students can work through as a group or individually. All are designed to encourage to students to actively analyze their own eating habits. The authors have included the most up-to-date research and data available, including: new food source diagrams for nutrients based upon MyPyramid food groups, the American Heart Association 2006 Diet, new information about E. coli O157:H7, Listeria, and Norovirus, 2006 World Health Organization growth charts for children, an expanded discussion of nutrigenomics, new information on omega-3 fatty acids, and more. Concept Checks At key points throughout the chapter, Concept Checks allow students to mentally summarize what they have learned before proceeding to the next topic in the chapter. Each chapter culminates with a Case Study that presents a real life situation followed by a list of directed questions to assist students in applying the nutrition knowledge from the chapter. Responses to the Case Study questions are found in Appendix A. Looking for technology to enhance student learning? McGraw-Hill has partnered with NBC to provide 12 short videoclips on current nutrition topics. Nearly 50 animations and simulations are also available, which cover a broad range of nutrition topics, allowing instructors and students to harness the visual impact of nutrition processes in motion. All of these tools are available on ARIS. Available with the text is NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 diet analysis software. Both the CD and Online versions share a new user-friendly interface and a handy video tutorial. Other enhancements include the ability to track up to three profiles, 365-day calendar function, a 27,000-food database, and a new recipe function. NEW McGraw-Hill Presentation Center. ARIS Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, PowerPoints, animations, and other media types that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. Accessed from the instructor side of the textbook’s ARIS website, Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows instructors to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. All assets are copyright McGraw-Hill Higher Education but can be used by instructors for classroom purposes. International Edition CONTEMPORARY NUTRITION A Functional Approach By Gordon M Wardlaw and Anne M Smith of Ohio State University, James E Bailey 2009 (February 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722778-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-128463-9 [IE] www.mhhe.com/wardlawcontfa1 Contemporary Nutrition: A Functional Approach is an alternate version of Wardlaw-Smith’s Contemporary Nutrition, 7e. While Contemporary Nutrition: A Functional Approach shares the recognized strengths of the seventh edition, it offers a unique approach to the coverage of vitamins and minerals. It departs from a traditional presentation by instead organizing vitamins and minerals within the context of physiological functions and the health conditions they influence. The text will provide students who lack a strong science background the ideal balance of 96 McGraw-Hill’s ARIS. ARIS is a complete electronic homework and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. NUTRITION 9: Table of Food Composition Bibliography Index CONTENTS NUTRITION: A KEY TO HEALTH Chapter 1: What You Eat and Why Chapter 2: Guidelines for Designing a Healthy Diet Chapter 3: The Human Body: A Nutrition Perspective ENERGY NUTRIENTS AND ENERGY BALANCE Chapter 4: Carbohydrates Chapter 5: Lipids Chapter 6: Proteins Chapter 7: Energy Balance and Weight Maintenance VITAMINS, MINERALS, AND WATER Chapter 8: Overview of the Micronutrients Chapter 9: Nutrients Involved with Fluid and Electrolyte Balance Chapter 10: Nutrients that Function as Antioxidants Chapter 11: Nutrients Involved in Bone Health Chapter 12: Nutrients Involved with Energy Metabolism and Blood Health NUTRITION: BEYOND THE NUTRIENTS Chapter 13: Nutrition: Fitness and Sports Chapter 14: Eating Disorders: Anorexia Nervosa, Bulimia Nervosa, and Other Conditions Chapter 15: Food Safety Chapter 16: Undernutrition throughout the World NUTRITION: A FOCUS ON THE LIFE STAGES Chapter 17: Pregnancy and Breastfeeding Chapter 18: Nutrition from Infancy through Adolescence Chapter 19: Nutrition during Adulthood APPENDIXES: A: Solutions to Case Studies and Check Your Knowledge B: Daily Values Used in Food Labels C: Dietary Advice for Canadians D: The Exchange System E: Dietary Intake and Energy Expenditure Assessment F: Chemical Structures in Nutrition G: Height-Weight Tables H: Sources of Nutrition Information I: English-Metric Conversions Multimedia NEW NUTRITIONCALC PLUS 3.2 CD-ROM By ESHA Research 2009 (December 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-731243-5 www.mhhe.com/ncp3 NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 is a suite of powerful dietary self-assessment tools. Use NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 to analyze and monitor personal diet and health goals. An easy-to use interface and the reliability of the ESHA database make NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 the best choice for nutrition analysis software. Enhancements to 3.0 include the ability to track up to three profiles, 365-day calendar function, a 27,000-food database, and a new recipe function. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! Both the CD and Online versions now share an identical user-friendly interface. Instructors will be able to write one set of assignment directions, regardless of which version students have purchased. Supplements NEW! NCP 3.0 now offers the ability to enter up to three Profiles. Users can enter their own personal data and intakes, as well as those of two other individuals (e.g., assigned case study, diabetic person, vegetarian friend). NUTRITION ALMANAC 6th Edition By Lavon J Dunne, John D Kirschmann, Nutrition Search, Inc 2007 (December 2006) / 384 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-143658-8 NEW! NCP 3.0 now offers an intuitive 365-day calendar in which users can easily track their daily food intakes and activities. A Professional Publication Your ultimate guide to choosing the right foods and supplements, feeling younger, improving health, and living longe. A trusted source for 30 years, Nutrition Almanac empowers you to take charge of your well-being by pinpointing the relationship between foods and health. Providing comprehensive information on everything food-related, you learn how to use nutrition to fight disease, boost immunity, and slow the effects of aging, as well as increase energy, elevate mood, improve digestion, and control weight. CONTENTS NEW! Users will now be able to create and analyze their own Recipes and add them to their personal database. This feature gives users ultimate flexibility in creating accurate food lists. NEW! To ensure an accurate dietary analysis, caution notes now appear to alarm users of possible entry error. For instance: -If a user enters an amount for a single food that exceeds 1/3 of his/her recommended daily calories, the user will receive a warning message asking to verify whether the amount chosen is correct. -A warning note will appear if the activities chosen exceed 24 hours in a day. 1: Nutrition and Health 2: Exercise 3: Sources of calories 4: Nutrients 5: Ailments and Other Stressful Conditions 6: Normal Life Cycle 7: Herbs 8: Foods, Beverages, and Natural Supplementary Foods -If the activities entered do not match the user’s Profile’s Activity Level, NCP will generate a notice asking if the user wishes to return to his/her Profile and adjust the Activity Level. NEW! NCP 3.0 now gives users access to 27,000 foods, including more ethnic and fast food choices. All nutrient data comes from ESHA 97 NUTRITION Research, the country’s leading nutrient database company. NEW! Each step in the diet analysis process is now fully supported by integrated Help and Info descriptions. Each screen provides instructions, as well as handy tips and explanatory notes. NEW! Users can now easily email reports or download documents into Excel or Word (and similar programs) to make completing assignments even easier. NEW! NCP 3.0 now offers an intuitive 365-day calendar in which users can easily track their daily food intakes and activities. NEW! Users will now be able to create and analyze their own Recipes and add them to their personal database. This feature gives users ultimate flexibility in creating accurate food lists. NEW! To ensure an accurate dietary analysis, caution notes now appear to alarm users of possible entry error. For instance: -If a user enters an amount for a single food that exceeds 1/3 of his/her recommended daily calories, the user will receive a warning message asking to verify whether the amount chosen is correct. FEATURES Four easy steps are all users need to successfully complete for an accurate dietary analysis: -A warning note will appear if the activities chosen exceed 24 hours in a day. -Profile -- Create a profile by entering personal information, such as weight and height, to generate individualized nutrient recommendations. -If the activities entered do not match the user’s Profile’s Activity Level, NCP will generate a notice asking if the user wishes to return to his/her Profile and adjust the Activity Level. -Food Intake – Compile a food intake list by searching for foods eaten and entering amounts and specifying meals. NEW! NCP 3.0 now gives users access to 27,000 foods, including more ethnic and fast food choices. All nutrient data comes from ESHA Research, the country’s leading nutrient database company. -Activities – Estimate activity level and calories burned by tracking specific daily exercise. NEW! Each step in the diet analysis process is now fully supported by integrated Help and Info descriptions. Each screen provides instructions, as well as handy tips and explanatory notes. -Reports – Analyze diet and exercise with 9 different customized reports. The latest DRI values are included for essential nutrients, vitamins, and minerals. NEW! Users can now easily email reports or download documents into Excel or Word (and similar programs) to make completing assignments even easier. Users can analyze and adjust their energy expenditure and weight control goals. FEATURES Intuitive tool bar icons make navigating through the program easy. Four easy steps are all users need to successfully complete for an accurate dietary analysis: -Profile -- Create a profile by entering personal information, such as weight and height, to generate individualized nutrient recommendations. NEW -Food Intake – Compile a food intake list by searching for foods eaten and entering amounts and specifying meals. -Activities – Estimate activity level and calories burned by tracking specific daily exercise. NUTRITIONCAL PLUS 3.0 CD-ROM -Reports – Analyze diet and exercise with 9 different customized reports. By ESHA Research The latest DRI values are included for essential nutrients, vitamins, and minerals. Users can analyze and adjust their energy expenditure and weight control goals. 2009 (April 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-332865-2 Intuitive tool bar icons make navigating through the program easy. www.mhhe.com/ncp3 NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 is a suite of powerful dietary self-assessment tools. Use NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 to analyze and monitor personal diet and health goals. An easy-to use interface and the reliability of the ESHA database make NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 the best choice for nutrition analysis software. Enhancements to 3.0 include the ability to track up to three profiles, 365-day calendar function, a 27,000-food database, and a new recipe function. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! Both the CD and Online versions now share an identical user-friendly interface. Instructors will be able to write one set of assignment directions, regardless of which version students have purchased. NEW! NCP 3.0 now offers the ability to enter up to three Profiles. Users can enter their own personal data and intakes, as well as those of two other individuals (e.g., assigned case study, diabetic person, vegetarian friend). 98 NUTRITION FEATURES NEW Four easy steps are all users need to successfully complete for an accurate dietary analysis: -Profile -- Create a profile by entering personal information, such as weight and height, to generate individualized nutrient recommendations. NUTRITIONCALC PLUS 3.0 ONLINE -Food Intake – Compile a food intake list by searching for foods eaten and entering amounts and specifying meals. By ESHA Research -Activities – Estimate activity level and calories burned by tracking specific daily exercise. -Reports – Analyze diet and exercise with 9 different customized reports. The latest DRI values are included for essential nutrients, vitamins, and minerals. 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-332864-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-337552-6 (Access Card) Users can analyze and adjust their energy expenditure and weight control goals. www.mhhe.com/ncp3 Intuitive tool bar icons make navigating through the program easy. NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 is a suite of powerful dietary self-assessment tools. Use NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 to analyze and monitor personal diet and health goals. An easy-to use interface and the reliability of the ESHA database make NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 the best choice for nutrition analysis software. Enhancements to 3.0 include the ability to track up to three profiles, 365-day calendar function, a 27,000-food database, and a new recipe function. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! Both the CD and Online versions now share an identical user-friendly interface. Instructors will be able to write one set of assignment directions, regardless of which version students have purchased. NEW! NCP 3.0 now offers the ability to enter up to three Profiles. Users can enter their own personal data and intakes, as well as those of two other individuals (e.g., assigned case study, diabetic person, vegetarian friend). NEW FOOD NUTRITION GUIDE/ FOOD COMPOSITION TABLE By McGraw-Hill Higher Education NEW! Users will now be able to create and analyze their own Recipes and add them to their personal database. This feature gives users ultimate flexibility in creating accurate food lists. NEW! NCP 3.0 now offers an intuitive 365-day calendar in which users can easily track their daily food intakes and activities. 2009 (May 2008) / 128 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-340256-7 NEW! To ensure an accurate dietary analysis, caution notes now appear to alarm users of possible entry error. For instance: -If a user enters an amount for a single food that exceeds 1/3 of his/her recommended daily calories, the user will receive a warning message asking to verify whether the amount chosen is correct. -A warning note will appear if the activities chosen exceed 24 hours in a day. -If the activities entered do not match the user’s Profile’s Activity Level, NCP will generate a notice asking if the user wishes to return to his/her Profile and adjust the Activity Level. NEW! NCP 3.0 now gives users access to 27,000 foods, including more ethnic and fast food choices. All nutrient data comes from ESHA Research, the country’s leading nutrient database company. NEW! Each step in the diet analysis process is now fully supported by integrated Help and Info descriptions. Each screen provides instructions, as well as handy tips and explanatory notes. NEW! Users can now easily email reports or download documents into Excel or Word (and similar programs) to make completing assignments even easier. 99 (Details unavailable at press time) NUTRITION Nutrition and Sport Nutrition Through The Life Cycle NEW Nutrition & Human Development International Edition NUTRITION FOR HEALTH, FITNESS AND SPORT 9th Edition By Melvin H Williams, Old Dominion University 2010 (February 2009) / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337555-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-016551-9 [IE] International Edition NUTRITION THROUGHOUT THE LIFE CYCLE 4th Edition http://www.mhhe.com/williams9 This textbook provides the reader with thorough coverage of the role nutrition plays in enhancing one’s health, fitness, and sport performance. Current research and practical activities are incorporated throughout. By Bonnie Worthington-Roberts, University of Washington and Sue Williams, SRW Productions 2000 / 464 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-292732-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-118379-6 [IE] NEW TO THIS EDITION www.mhhe.com/worthington CONTENTS Chapter 1. Introduction to the Lifecycle: The Role of Nutrition (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 2. The Assessment of Nutritional Needs (S. Rodwell Williams) Chapter 3. Maternal Nutrition: The Beginning of Life and the Physiology of Pregnancy (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 4. Maternal Nutrition: Overall Nutrition and the Roles of Specific Nutrients (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 5. Maternal Nutrition: Issues Beyond the Nutrients (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 6. Lactation: The Mother and Her Milk (B. WorthingtonRoberts) Chapter 7. Lactation: Breast-Feeding Is a Desirable Option (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 8. Nutrition in Infancy: Physiology, Development, and Nutritional Recommendations (D. Johnson) Chapter 9. Nutrition in Infancy: Feeding in the First Year of Life (D. Johnson) Chapter 10. Nutrition in Childhood (C. Trahms) Chapter 11. Adolescent Nutrition: General (B. Spear) Chapter 12. Weight-Related Concerns and Disorders Among Adolescents (D. Neumark-Sztainer, J. Moe) Chapter 13. Nutrition During the Middle Adult Years (S. Rodwell Williams) Chapter 14. Nutrition in the Older Adult (E. Schlenker) The reference lists have been completely updated for this ninth edition, with the inclusion of over 900 new references, and provide the scientific basis for the new concepts or additional support for those concepts previously developed. These references provide greater in-depth reading materials for the interested student. The text has been updated throughout, including new questions, figures, and tables. A new feature, Cool Websites, offers readers appropriate Internet sources from which they can obtain additional information on specific exercise and nutrition topics. The appendix has been expanded to include the MyPyramid for Kids. CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Nutrition for Health, Fitness, and Sports Performance 2 Healthful Nutrition for Fitness and Sport: The Consumer Athlete 3 Human Energy 4 Carbohydrates: The Main Energy Food 5 Fat: An Important Energy Source during Exercise 6 Protein: The Tissue Builder 7 Vitamins: The Organic Regulators 8 Minerals: The Inorganic Regulators 9 Water, Electrolytes and Temperature Regulation 10 Body Weight and Composition for Health and Sport 11 Weight Maintenance and Loss through Proper Nutrition and Exercise 12 Weight Gaining through Proper Nutrition and Exercise 13 Food Drugs and Related Supplements Appendix A—Units of Measurement: English System—Metric System Equivalents Appendix B—Approximate Caloric Expenditure per Minute for Various Physical Activities Appendix C—Self-Test on Drinking Habits and Alcoholism Appendix D—Determination of Healthy Body Weight Appendix E—Exchange Lists for Meal Planning Appendix F—Calories, Percent Fat, Cholesterol, Sodium, and Dietary Fiber in Selected Fast-Food Restaurant Products Appendix G—Energy Pathways of Carbohydrate, Fat, and Protein Appendix H—Small Steps: 120 Small Steps to a Healthier Diet and Increased Physical Activity Appendix I—Sample Menu for a 2000-Calorie Food Pattern Appendix J—MyPyramid for Kids 100 NUTRITION Nutritional Assessment International Edition NUTRITIONAL ASSESSMENT 4th Edition By Robert D Lee, Central Michigan University and David C Nieman, Appalachian State University 2007 (March 2006) / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-244106-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-125426-7 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/lee-nieman4 This text describes the four major methods of nutritional assessment (dietary, anthropometric, biometric, and clinical) in an understandable and contemporary way. It thoroughly covers assessment of the hospitalized individual, but also serves as an invaluable resource to the nutrition professional working in such areas as public health and community nutrition, corporate health, and sports medicine. CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Nutritional Assessment 2 Standards for Nutrient Intake 3 Measuring Diet 4 National Dietary and Nutrition Surveys 5 Computerized Dietary Analysis Systems 6 Anthropometry 7 Assessment of the Hospitalized Patient 8 Nutritional Assessment in Disease Prevention 9 Biochemical Assessment of Nutritional Status 10 Clinical Assessment of Nutritional Status 11 Counseling Theory and Technique COMPLIMENTARY COPIES INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 101 NUTRITION 102 103 PLANTS & ANIMALS Animal Behavior .............................................................................................. 107 Botany (Economic) .......................................................................................... 106 Botany - Non Majors - Lab Manuals .............................................................................................. 106 - Textbook .................................................................................................... 105 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy.................................................................... 111 Invertebrate Biology......................................................................................... 109 Marine Biology ..................................................................................................107 Parasitology ......................................................................................................108 Vertebrate Biology - Laboratory ..................................................................................................110 - Textbook .................................................................................................... 109 Zoology - Laboratory - Majors ................................................................................... 114 - Textbook .................................................................................................... 112 NEW TITLES PLANTS & ANIMALS 2010 Author ISBN-13 Biology of the Invertebrates, 6e Pechenik 9780073028262 2009 Author ISBN-13 Animal Diversity, 5e Hickman 9780072969450 112 Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 5e Hickman 9780073349251 114 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy: A Laboratory Dissection Guide, 5e Kardong 9780072970081 110 Vertebrates Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, 5e Kardong 9780073040585 109,111 General Zoology Laboratory Manual, 15e Lytle 9780073051628 115 Foundations of Parasitology, 8e Roberts 9780073028279 108 Page 109 PLANTS & ANIMALS 104 Page PLANTS & ANIMALS Botany - Non Majors International Edition INTRODUCTORY PLANT BIOLOGY 11th Edition Textbook By Kinsley Stern, California State University-Chico, James Bidlack, University of Central Oklahoma and Shelley Jansky, University of WisconsinMadison 2008 (February 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331421-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-110217-9 [IE] International Edition www.mhhe.com/stern11e PLANTS AND SOCIETY 5th Edition This introductory text assumes little prior scientific knowledge on the part of the student. It includes sufficient information for some shorter introductory botany courses open to both majors and nonmajors, and is arranged so that certain sections can be omitted without disrupting the overall continuity of the course. Stern emphasizes current interests while presenting basic botanical principles. By Estelle Levetin and Karen McMahon of University of Tulsa 2008 (October 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-722125-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-128584-1 [IE] www.mhhe.com/levetin5e This introductory, one quarter/one-semester text takes a multidisciplinary approach to studying the relationship between plants and people. The authors strive to stimulate interest in plant science and encourage students to further their studies in botany. Also, by exposing students to society’s historical connection to plants, Levetin and McMahon hope to instill a greater appreciation for the botanical world. Plants and Society covers basic principles of botany with strong emphasis on the economic aspects and social implications of plants and fungi. CONTENTS I Plants and Society: The Botanical Connections to Our Lives 1 Plants in Our Lives II Introduction to Plant Life: Botanical Principles 2 The Plant Cell 3 The Plant Body 4 Plant Physiology 5 Plant Life Cycle: Flowers 6 Plant Life Cycle: Fruits and Seeds 7 Genetics 8 Plant Systematics and Evolution 9 Diversity of Plant Life III Plants as a Source of Food 10 Human Nutrition 11 Origins of Agriculture 12 The Grasses 13 Legumes 14 Starchy Staples 15 Feeding a Hungry World IV Commercial Products Derived from Plants 16 Stimulating Beverages 17 Herbs and Spices 18 Materials: Cloth, Wood, and Paper V Plants and Human Health 19 Medicinal Plants 20 Psychoactive Plants 21 Poisonous and Allergy Plants VI Algae and Fungi: The Impact of Algae and Fungi on Human Affairs 22 The Algae 23 Fungi in the Natural Environment 24 Beverages and Foods from Fungi 25 Fungi that Affect Human Health VII Plants and the Environment 26 Plant Ecology Appendix A Metric System Appendix B Classification of Plants CONTENTS Chapter 1: What Is Plant Biology? Chapter 2: The Nature of Life? Chapter 3: Cells Chapter 4: Tissues Chapter 5: Roots and Soils Chapter 6: Stems Chapter 7: Leaves Chapter 8: Flowers, Fruits, and Seeds Chapter 9: Water in Plants Chapter 10: Plant Metabolism Chapter 11: Growth Chapter 12: Meiosis and Alternation of Generation Chapter 13: Genetics Chapter 14: Plant Breeding and Propagation Chapter 15: Evolution Chapter 16: Plant Names and Classification Chapter 17: Domain (Kingdom) Bacteria, Domain (Kingdom) Archaea, and Viruses Chapter 18: Kingdom Protista Chapter 19: Kingdom Fungi Chapter 20: Introduction to the Plant Kingdom: Bryophytes Chapter 21: The Seedless Vascular Plants: Ferns and Their Relatives Chapter 22: Introduction to Seed Plants: Gymnosperms Chapter 23: Seed Plants: Angiosperms Chapter 24: Flowering Plants and Civilization Chapter 25: Ecology Chapter 26: Biomes COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 105 PLANTS & ANIMALS International Edition PRINCIPLES OF BOTANY 17 Ornamental Plants 18 Algae 19 Uses of Plants in the Future By Gordon Uno, National Science Foundation, Richard Storey, Colorado College and Randy Moore, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis 2001 ISBN: 978-0-07-118087-0 [IE] Lab Manuals www.mhhe.com/botany CONTENTS 1 An Introduction to Plants and Their Study 2 The Ecology and Natural Selection of Plants 3 Energy and Cell Chemistry 4 Plant Cells and Tissue Systems 5 DNA, Genes, and Cell Division 6 Plant Growth and Development 7 Root Systems and Plant Mineral Nutrition 8 Stems and Secondary Growth 9 Leaves and the Movement of Water 10 Photosynthesis 11 Respiration 12 Flowers, Fruits and Seeds 13 Genetics 14 Evolution 15 The Diversity and Classification of Plants 16 Bacteria, Fungi and Algae 17 Bryophytes and Ferns: The Seedless Plants 18 Gymnosperms and Angiosperms: The Seed Plants 19 Ecology Appendix A: What is Genetic Engineering? Appendix B: Fundamentals of Chemistry for Botany Students Botany (Economic) LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY INTRODUCTORY PLANT BIOLOGY 11th Edition By Kingsley Stern, California State University-Chico and James Bidlack, University of Central Oklahoma 2008 (February 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-283068-2 This laboratory manual assumes no previous knowledge of the biological sciences on the part of the student. It is designed for use in a one-semester or one-quarter introductory course in plant biology and shorter introductory botany courses open to both nonmajors and majors. Both the principles of biology and the scientific method are introduced, using plants as illustrations. The exercises demonstrate the underlying unity of all living organisms at the cellular level. The manual is designed so that students can work more or less independently. Instructors are free to require different drawings or other assignments and may also omit some of those suggested within each exercise. Students are encouraged to read the laboratory exercise before coming to class. Laboratory preparation quizzes are provided at the end of each exercise. Answers to the laboratory preparation quizzes are discernible within the particular exercises and should not require checking other sources. Each exercise includes suggested learning goals and exercise review questions. Answers to the lab manual exercise review questions can be found on the Online Learning Center that accompanies the Eleventh Edition textbook. CONTENTS International Edition ECONOMIC BOTANY 3rd Edition By Beryl Simpson and Molly Ogorzaly of University of Texas at Austin 2001/ 210 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-290938-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-118188-4 [IE] www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/botany/simpson-links/weblinks.mhtml CONTENTS 1 Plants and Their Manipulation by People 2 Origins of Agriculture 3 Fruits and Nuts of Temperate Regions 4 Fruits and Nuts of Warm Regions 5 Cereal Grains and Forage Grasses 6 Legumes 7 Foods from Leaves, Stems, and Roots 8 Spices, Herbs, and Perfumes 9 Vegetable Oils and Waxes 10 Hydrogels, Elastic Latexes, and Resins 11 Medicinal Plants 12 Psychoactive Drugs and Poisons from Plants 13 Stimulating Beverages 14 Alcoholic Beverages 15 Fibers, Dyes, and Tannins 16 Wood, Cork, and Bamboo 1: The Microscope 2: The Cell 3: Mitosis 4: Roots 5: Stems 6: Leaves 7: Plant Propagation 8: Cell Components and Products 9: Diffusion, Growth, and Hormones 10: Photosynthesis 11: Water in Plants; Respiration; Digestion 12: Meiosis and Alternation of Generations 13: Domain and Kingdom Survey 14: Domains Archaea and Bacteria; Kingdom Protista 15: Kingdom Fungi (Mycota) 16: Bryophytes and Ferns 17: Kingdom Plantae: Gymnosperms 18: Kingdom Plantae: Angiosperms (Flowering Plants--Phylum Magnoliophyta) 19: Fruits, Spices, Survival Plants, and Poisonous Plants 20: Ecology 21: Genetics 106 PLANTS & ANIMALS Marine Biology Animal Behavior International Edition International Edition ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 5th Edition MARINE BIOLOGY 7th Edition By Lee C Drickamer, Southern Illinois University, Carbondale, Stephen H Vessey, Bowling Green State University and Elizabeth Jakob, University of Massachusetts - Amherst 2002 ISBN: 978-0-07-012199-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-113020-2 [IE] By Peter Castro, California State Poly University--Pomona and Michael E Huber, Global Coastal Strategies, Brisbane-Australia 2008 (October 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-722124-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-128771-5 [IE] CONTENTS Part One The Study of Animal Behavior 1 Introduction 2 History of the Study of Animal Behavior 3 Approaches and Methods Part Two Behavior Genetics and Evolution 4 Genes and Evolution 5 Behavioral Genetics 6 Evolution of Behavior Patterns Part Three Mechanisms of Behavior 7 The Nervous System and Behavior 8 Hormones and Behavior, and Immunology and Behavior 9 Biological Timekeeping 10 Development of Behavior 11 Learning Behavior 12 Communication Part Four Finding Food and Shelter 13 Migration, Orientation, and Navigation 14 Habitat Selection 15 Foraging Behavior Part Five Social Organization and Mating Systems 16 Aggression 17 Sexual Reproduction and Parental Care 18 Parental Investment and Mating Systems 19 Evolution of Social Systems References Glossary www.mhhe.com/castrohuber7e Marine Biology covers the basics of marine biology with a global approach, using examples from numerous regions and ecosystems worldwide. This introductory, one-semester text is designed for non-majors. Authors Castro and Huber have made a special effort to include solid basic science content needed in a general education course, including the fundamental principles of biology, the physical sciences, and the scientific method. This science coverage is integrated with a stimulating, up-to-date overview of marine biology. CONTENTS Principles of Marine Science 1 The Science of Marine Biology 2 The Sea Floor 3 Chemical and Physical Features of Seawater and the World Ocean 4 Fundamentals of Biology The Organisms of the Sea 5 The Microbial World 6 Multicellular Primary Producers: Seaweeds and Plants 7 Marine Animals without a Backbone 8 Marine Fishes 9 Marine Reptiles, Birds, and Mammals Structure and Function of Marine Ecosystems 10 An Introduction to Marine Ecology 11 Between the Tides 12 Estuaries: Where Rivers Meet the Sea 13 Life on the Continental Shelf 14 Coral Reefs 15 Life Near the Surface 16 The Ocean Depths Humans and the Sea 17 Resources from the Sea 18 The Impact of Humans on the Marine Environment 19 The Oceans and Human Affairs Appendix A Units of Measurement Appendix B Selected Field Guides and Other Useful References for the Identification of Marine Organisms INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 107 PLANTS & ANIMALS Parasitology 14 Trematoda: Aspidobothrea 15 Trematoda: Form, Function, and Classification of Digeneans 16 Digeneans: Strigeiformes 17 Digeneans: Echinostomatiformes 18 Digeneans: Plagiorchiformes and Opisthorchiformes 19 Monogenoidea 20 Cestoidea: Form, Function, and Classification of the Tapeworms 21 Tapeworms 22 Phylum Nematoda: Form, Function, and Classification 23 Nematodes: Trichinellida and Dioctophymatida, Enoplean Parasites 24 Nematodes: Tylenchina, Pioneering Parasites 25 Nematodes: Strongyloidea, Bursate Rhabditidans 26 Nematodes: Ascaridomorpha, Intestinal Large Roundworms 27 Nematodes: Oxyuridomorpha, Pinworms 28 Nematodes: Gnathostomatomorpha and Spiruromorpha, a Potpourri 29 Nematodes: Filaroidea, Filiarial Worms 30 Nematodes: Dracunculoidea, Guinea Worms and Others 31 Phylum Nematomorpha, Hairworms 32 Phylum Acanthocephala: Thorny-Headed Worms 33 Phylum Arthropoda: Form, Function, and Classification 34 Parasitic Crustaceans 35 Pentastomida: Tongue Worms 36 Parasitic Insects: Phthiraptera, Chewing and Sucking Lice 37 Parasitic Insects: Hemiptera, Bugs 38 Parasitic Insects: Fleas, Order Siphonaptera 39 Parasitic Insects: Diptera, Flies 40 Parasitic Insects: Strepsiptera, Hymenoptera, and Others 41 Parasitic Arachnids: Subclass Acari, Ticks and Mites NEW International Edition FOUNDATIONS OF PARASITOLOGY 8th Edition By Larry S Roberts, Florida Int’l University-Miami and John Janovy Jr, University of NebraskaLincoln 2009 (October 2008) / 728 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-302827-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-128458-5 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/robertsjanovy8e A parasitology text for biology and/or zoology students at the undergraduate level. Emphasizes principles with related information on the biology, physiology, morphology, and ecology of the major parasites of humans and domestic animals. This is not a diagnostic manual for medical students. NEW TO THIS EDITION Chapter 1 retains the light-hearted section titled “Parasitology for Fun and Profit” to emphasize how students can earn an income while studying the fascinating world of parasites. Chapter 3 has an added figure illustrating a JAK-STAT cellsignaling pathway. Chapter 5 has a new diagram of life cycles of trypanosomatids infecting humans. In Chapter 7, several new figures were added, including an Acanthamoeba-infected eye. In Chapter 12, we recognize two phyla of mesozoans in accord with recent literature, and the classification has been revised. In Chapter 16, we point out the potential for widespread increase in prevalence of Schistosoma japonicum resulting from the huge Three Gorges Dam on the Yangtze River in China. Chapter 33 has an added discussion of Arthropoda phylogeny, including its position as a member of superphylum Ecdysozoa. CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Parasitology 2 Basic Principles and Concepts I: Parasite Systematics, Ecology and Evolution 3 Basic Principles and Concepts II: Immunology and Pathology 4 Parasitic Prototoa: Form, Function, and Classification 5 Kinetoplasta: Trypanosomes and Their Kin 6 Other Flagellated Protozoa 7 The Amebas 8 Phylum Apicomplexa: Gregarines, Coccidia, and Related Organisms 9 Phylum Apicomplexa: Malaria Organisms and Piroplasms 10 Phylum Ciliophora: Ciliated Protistan Parasites 11 Microsporida and Myxozoa: Parasites with Polar Filaments 12 The Mesozoa: Pioneers or Degenerates? 13 Introduction to Phylum Platyhelminthes COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 108 PLANTS & ANIMALS Invertebrate Biology Vertebrate Biology Textbook NEW International Edition NEW International Edition BIOLOGY OF THE INVERTEBRATES 6th Edition VERTEBRATES COMPARATIVE ANATOMY, FUNCTION, EVOLUTION 5th Edition By Jan A Pechenik, Tufts University By Kenneth Kardong, Washington State University-Pullman 2010 (January 2009) / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-302826-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-128455-4 [IE] 2009 (August 2008) / 800 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-304058-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-128459-2 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/pechenik6e This textbook is the most concise and readable invertebrates book in terms of detail and pedagogy (other texts do not offer boxed readings, a second color, end of chapter questions, or pronunciation guides). All phyla of invertebrates are covered (comprehensive) with an emphasis on unifying characteristics of each group. NEW TO THIS EDITION A new chapter has been added called: The Xenoturbellids. Chapter 13 The Annelids and Chapter 18 Three Phyla of Uncertain Affiliation: Gastrotricha, Chaetognatha, and Cyliophora have been heavily revised and updated. http://www.mhhe.com/kardong5e This one-semester text is designed for an upper-level majors course. Vertebrates features a unique emphasis on function and evolution of vertebrates, complete anatomical detail, and excellent pedagogy. Vertebrate groups are organized phylogenetically, and their systems discussed within such a context. Morphology is foremost, but the author has developed and integrated an understanding of function and evolution into the discussion of anatomy of the various systems. NEW TO THIS EDITION Many new photographs and drawings have been added, to clarify the text and to help generate interest among students. CONTENTS 1 Environmental Considerations 2 Invertebrate Classification and Relationships 3 The Protozoan Protists 4 The Poriferans and Placozoans 5 Introduction to the Hydrostatic Skeleton 6 The Cnidarians 7 The Ctenophores 8 The Platyhelminthes 9 The Gnathifera: Rotifers, Acanthocephalans, and two smaller groups 10 The Rotifers and Acanthocephalans 11 The Nemertines 12 The Molluscs 13 The Annelids 14 The Arthropods 15 Two Phyla of Likely Arthropod Relatives: Tardigrada and Onychophora 16 The Nematodes 17 Four Phyla of Likely Nematode Relatives: Nematomorpha, Priapulida, Kinorhyncha, and Loricifera 18 Three Phyla of Uncertain Affiliation: Gastrotricha, Chaetognatha, and Cyliophora 19 The Lophophorates (Phoronids, Brachiopods, Bryozoans) and Entoprocts 20 The Echinoderms 21 The Hemichordates 22 The Xenoturbellids 23 The Nonvertebrate Chordates 24 Invertebrate Reproduction and Development--An Overview Many changes and revisions have been made throughout this new edition, some major, some small. The chapters on life history (embryology), locomotion (energetics, burrowing, respiration),and circulatory system have been substantially revised. Many revised figures not only incorporate newer information but also present an evolutionary summary within a cladistic context. Several new Box Essays have been added, e.g., snakes and their prey (“Borrowed Toxins,” Chapter 6), and prosthetic “cheetahs” (“On a Fast Track,” Chapter 10). Over Turning Chordates. New developmental genetics now indicate that chordate ancestors flipped over immediately, reversing dorsal and ventral surfaces. That inversion remains the basis of the chordate body plan today. Amphioxus Basal. Recently completed genomic studies reveal that amphioxus is not the sister group to vertebrates; urochordates now occupy that position. Amphioxus is the most basal living group of chordates, but this enlarges its importance as a possible model for the first chordates. Evo-Devo. The genomic section on evolution and development (Chapter 5), introduced in the last edition, isexpanded here by including more examples tghroughout the chap[ters of how master control genes (Hox genes) build vertebrate systems and provide the genetic basis for major evolutionary changes. This helps to inform and enlighten traditional form, function, and evolution of vertebrates with modern genetic mechanisms. Phylogenetic Relationships. Thanks again to evermore comprehensive molecular comparisons of vertebrate groups, phylogenetic relationships are becoming better resolved, and natural groups are emerging from this analysis with better clarity. This is the basis for revisions in the third chapter, but these are carried forward throughout the book. 109 PLANTS & ANIMALS Laboratory CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Origin of Chordates 3 The Vertebrate Story 4 Biological Design 5 Life History 6 Integument 7 Skeletal System: The Skull 8 Skeletal System: The Axial Skeleton 9 Skeletal System: The Appendicular Skeleton 10 The Muscular System 11 The Respiratory System 12 The Circulatory System 13 The Digestive System 14 The Urogenital System 15 The Endocrine System 16 The Nervous System 17 Sensory Organs 18 Conclusions International Edition NEW COMPARATIVE VERTEBRATE ANATOMY A Laboratory Dissection Guide, 5th Edition By Kenneth Kardong, Washington State University-Pullman and Edward J Zalisko, Blackburn College 2009 (October 2008) / 400 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-297008-1 This high-quality laboratory manual may accompany any comparative anatomy text, but correlates directly to Kardong’s Vertebrates: Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution text. This lab manual carefully guides students through dissections and is richly illustrated. First and foremost, the basic animal architecture is presented in a clear and concise manner. Throughout the dissections, the authors pause strategically to bring the students’ attention to the significance of the material they have just covered. VERTEBRATE BIOLOGY NEW TO THIS EDITION By Donald Linzey, Wytheville Community College 2001 / 552 pages ISBN: 978-0-697-36387-9 (GOP) ISBN: 978-0-07-118866-1 [IE] This latest edition of our laboratory manual incorporates valuable suggestions, not only of expert reviewers, but also of our students who use the manual in our laboratories. www.digitalzoology.com CONTENTS Part 1 The Vertebrate Story: An Overview Part 2 Systematics and Vertebrate Evolution Part 3 Vertebrate Zoogeography Part 4 Early Chordates and Jawless Fishes Part 5 Gnathostome Fishes Part 6 Amphibians Part 7 Evolution of Reptiles Part 8 Reptiles (Including Birds): Morphology, Reproduction and Development Part 9 Mammals Part 10 Population Dynamics Part 11 Movements Part 12 Intraspecific Behavior and Ecology Part 13 Interspecific Interactions Part 14 Techniques for Ecological and Behavioral Studies Part 15 Extinction and Extirpation Part 16 Conservation and Management Appendices Glossary Bibliography Index For greatest clarity and accuracy, we have reformatted some of the illustrations, edited labeling, and rewritten anatomical descriptions. More than 30 new figures were added to clarify anatomical descriptions. The popular and unique Student Art Notebook has been improved for student review. Placed at the end of the manual, the Student Art Notebook is a collection of the most important and commonly used figures. In this fifth edition of the Student Art Notebook, the labels of these figures have been replaced with numbers, referenced to a key. Suggested by our students, this revised labeling will help students review the names of structures outside of lab. New boxed essays noting additional Patterns and Connections, as well as Form and Function relationships, have been added. These essays invite students to pause and consider the significance of the structures as they are examined. The laboratory manual has been updated to direct students to related sections of the new fifth edition of the companion textbook, Vertebrates: Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, by Kenneth Kardong. CONTENTS 1 Introduction Classification and Comparison Defining the Chordates Studying Advice Designing for Students 2 Protochordates H4>Protochordates 3 Agnathans--Examination of a Primitive Vertebrate: The Lamprey Agnathans Adult Lamprey Anatomy Anatomy of the Lamprey (Ammocoete) Larva 4 Vertebrate Integuments Introduction Examination of Vertebrate Integuments Specializations of the Integument 5 Skeletal System 110 PLANTS & ANIMALS Tissues of the Skeletal System Divisions of the Skeletal System Postcranial Skeleton Skull Cranial Skeleton Teeth 6 Muscular System and External Anatomy Introduction Shark Dissection Necturus Cat 7 Digestive Systems Introduction Shark Necturus Cat 8 Circulatory and Respiratory Systems Introduction Shark Necturus Cat 9 Urogential System Shark Necturus Cat 10 Nervous System Introduction Shark Sheep Brain NEW TO THIS EDITION Many changes and revisions have been made throughout this new edition, some major, some small. The chapters on life history (embryology), locomotion (energetics, burrowing, respiration),and circulatory system have been substantially revised. Many revised figures not only incorporate newer information but also present an evolutionary summary within a cladistic context. Several new Box Essays have been added, e.g., snakes and their prey (“Borrowed Toxins,” Chapter 6), and prosthetic “cheetahs” (“On a Fast Track,” Chapter 10). Over Turning Chordates. New developmental genetics now indicate that chordate ancestors flipped over immediately, reversing dorsal and ventral surfaces. That inversion remains the basis of the chordate body plan today. Amphioxus Basal. Recently completed genomic studies reveal that amphioxus is not the sister group to vertebrates; urochordates now occupy that position. Amphioxus is the most basal living group of chordates, but this enlarges its importance as a possible model for the first chordates. Evo-Devo. The genomic section on evolution and development (Chapter 5), introduced in the last edition, isexpanded here by including more examples tghroughout the chap[ters of how master control genes (Hox genes) build vertebrate systems and provide the genetic basis for major evolutionary changes. This helps to inform and enlighten traditional form, function, and evolution of vertebrates with modern genetic mechanisms. Phylogenetic Relationships. Thanks again to evermore comprehensive molecular comparisons of vertebrate groups, phylogenetic relationships are becoming better resolved, and natural groups are emerging from this analysis with better clarity. This is the basis for revisions in the third chapter, but these are carried forward throughout the book. Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Origin of Chordates 3 The Vertebrate Story 4 Biological Design 5 Life History 6 Integument 7 Skeletal System: The Skull 8 Skeletal System: The Axial Skeleton 9 Skeletal System: The Appendicular Skeleton 10 The Muscular System 11 The Respiratory System 12 The Circulatory System 13 The Digestive System 14 The Urogenital System 15 The Endocrine System 16 The Nervous System 17 Sensory Organs 18 Conclusions NEW International Edition VERTEBRATES COMPARATIVE ANATOMY, FUNCTION, EVOLUTION 5th Edition By Kenneth Kardong, Washington State University-Pullman 2009 (August 2008) / 800 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-304058-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-128459-2 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/kardong5e This one-semester text is designed for an upper-level majors course. Vertebrates features a unique emphasis on function and evolution of vertebrates, complete anatomical detail, and excellent pedagogy. Vertebrate groups are organized phylogenetically, and their systems discussed within such a context. Morphology is foremost, but the author has developed and integrated an understanding of function and evolution into the discussion of anatomy of the various systems. 111 PLANTS & ANIMALS Zoology International Edition COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF THE VERTEBRATES 9th Edition Textbook By George Kent, Louisiana State University-Baton Rouge and Robert Carr, Ohio University-Athens 2001 / 544 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-303869-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-118168-6 [IE] ISBN: 978-0-07-128241-3 [IE with Updated Corrections] NEW www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/zoology/kentcarr/links.mhtml International Edition CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Concepts, Premises, and Pioneers 3 Protochordates and the Origin of Vertebrates 4 The Parade of the Craniates in Time and Taxa 5 Early Craniate Morphogenesis 6 Integument 7 Mineralized Tissues: An Introduction to the Skeleton 8 Vertebrae, Ribs, and Sterna 9 Skull and Visceral Skeleton 10 Girdles, Fins, Limbs, and Locomotion 11 Muscles 12 Digestive System 13 Respiratory System 14 Circulatory System 15 Urogential System 16 Nervous System 17 Sense Organs 18 Endocrine Organs Appendix Glossary Credits Index ANIMAL DIVERSITY 5th Edition By Cleveland P Hickman Jr, Washington & Lee University, Larry S Roberts, Florida Int’l University-Miami, Susan L Keen, University of California Davis, Allan Larson, Washington University-St Louis and Eisenhour J David, Morehead State University 2009 (October 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-296945-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-128449-3 [IE] www.mhhe.com/hickmanad5e A top choice among students and instructors alike, Animal Diversity continues to earn the appreciation of both science majors and non-majors alike. The book uses the theme of evolution to develop a broad-scale view of animal diversity—students focus not only the organisms themselves, but also the processes that produce evolutionary diversity. The book is unique in its comprehensive survey of zoological diversity and its emphasis on evolutionary, systematic and ecological principles, all in one package. NEW TO THIS EDITION Inclusion inside the front cover of a cladogram depicting our current understanding of evolutionary relationships among all animal taxa. We reordered our coverage of animal phyla to match the arrangement of phyla on this cladogram. All taxa on the cladogram are mentioned in the text, with emphasis placed on the major phyla. Each taxonomic chapter opens with a small image of the cladogram highlighting the phylum or phyla covered, followed early in the chapter by more detailed cladograms for the contents of those taxa. We made many noteworthy changes in taxonomic coverage. We reorganized the presentation of protostome phyla to emphasize the primary phylogenetic split of Protostomia in clades Lophotrochozoa and Ecdysozoa. INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia Material formerly presented as “Biological Contributions” and “Characteristics” of phyla is consolidated in an expanded boxed list of phylum characteristics. We added new figures, including explanatory illustrations of characters used in arthropod taxonomy. New photographs expand our illustration of animal diversity in many phyla, and new art often pairs a photograph with a labeled diagram. The methodology and concepts of systematics are clarified by making a contrast between classification and systematization in taxonomy, illustrating detection of homoplasy in molecular characters, and introducing “DNA barcoding” as a molecular systematic tool (Chapter 4). 112 PLANTS & ANIMALS Our refinement of ecological concepts and coverage includes greater discussion of evolution of virulence by parasites, cinluding introducing the concept of parasitoids; intruducing the concept of a food chain and its distinction from a food web; greater discussion of the genetic and ecological consequences of metapopulation dynamics; new material describing endothermic fishes; and revised coverage of avian physiological ecology. CONTENTS 1 Science of Zoology and Evolution of Animal Diversity 2 Animal Ecology 3 Animal Architecture 4 Taxonomy and Phylogeny of Animals 5 Protozoan Groups 6 Sponges: Phylum Porifera 7 Radiate Animals: Cnidarians and Ctenophores 8 Acoelomate Bilateral Animals: Flatworms, Ribbon Worms, and Mesozoans 9 Gnathiferans and Smaller Lophotrochozoans 10 Molluscs 11 Annelids and Allied Taxa 12 Smaller Ecdysozoans 13 Arthropods 14 Chaetognaths, Echinoderms and Hemichordates 15 Vertebrate Beginnings: The Chordates 16 Fishes 17 The Early Tetrapods and Modern Amphibians 18 Amniote Origins and Nonavian Reptiles 19 Birds 20 Mammals 10 Classification and Phylogeny of Animals 11 Protozoan Groups 12 Sponges and Placozoans 13 Radiate Animals 14 Flatworms, Mesozoans, and Ribbonworms 15 Gnathiferans and Smaller Lophotrochozoans 16 Molluscs 17 Annelids and Allied Taxa 18 Smaller Ecdysozoans 19 Trilobites, Chelicerates, and Myriapods 20 Crustaceans 21 Hexapods 22 Chaetognaths, Echinoderms, and Hemichordates 23 Chordates 24 Fishes 25 Early Tetrapods and Modern Amphibians 26 Amniote Origins and Nonavian Reptiles 28 Mammals Part 4 Activity of Life 29 Support, Protection, and Movement 30 Homeostasis 31 Internal Fluids and Respiration 32 Digestion and Nutrition 33 Nervous Coordination 34 Chemical Coordination 35 Immunity 36 Animal Behavior Part 5 Animals and Their Environments 37 The Biosphere and Animal Distribution 38 Animal Ecology Glossary Credits Index International Edition INTEGRATED PRINCIPLES OF ZOOLOGY 14th Edition International Edition By Cleveland P Hickman, Washington & Lee University, Larry S Roberts, Florida International University-Miami, Susan L Keen, University of California Davis, Allan Larson, Washington University-St Louis, Helen I’Anson, Washington & Lee University and David J Eisenhour, Morehead State University 2008 (October 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-722126-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-128797-5 [IE] ZOOLOGY 7th Edition By Stephen A Miller, College of the Ozarks and John P Harley, Eastern Kentucky University 2007 (May 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-322807-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-110299-5 [IE] ISBN: 978-0-07-110049-6 [IE with OLC] www.mhhe.com/hickmanipz14e Emphasizing the central role of evolution in generating diversity, this best-selling text describes animal life and the fascinating adaptations that enable animals to inhabit so many ecological niches. Featuring high quality illustrations and photographs set within an engaging narrative, Integrated Principles of Zoology is considered the standard by which other texts are measured. With its comprehensive coverage of biological and zoological principles, mechanisms of evolution, diversity, physiology, and ecology, organized into five parts for easy access, this text is suitable for one- or two-semester introductory courses. CONTENTS Part 1 Introduction to Living Animals 1 Life: Biological Principles and the Science of Zoology 2 The Origin and Chemistry of Life 3 Cells as Units of Life 4 Cellular Metabolism Part 2 Continuity and Evolution of Animal Life 5 Genetics: A Review 6 Organic Evolution 7 The Reproductive Process 8 Principles of Development Part 3 Diversity of Animal Life 9 Architectural Pattern of an Animal http://www.mhhe.com/millerharley7e The new 7th edition of Zoology continues to offer students an introductory general zoology text that is manageable in size and adaptable to a variety of course formats. It is a principles-oriented text written for the non-majors or the combined course, presented at the freshman and sophomore level. Zoology is organized into three parts. Part One covers the common life processes, including cell and tissue structure and function, the genetic basis of evolution, and the evolutionary and ecological principles that unify all life. Part Two is the survey of protists and animals, emphasizing evolutionary and ecological relationships, aspects of animal organization that unite major animal phyla, and animal adaptations. Part Three covers animal form and function using a comparative approach. This approach includes descriptions and full-color artwork that depict evolutionary changes in the structure and function of selected organ systems. CONTENTS Part One Biological Principles 1 Zoology: An Ecological and Evolutionary Perspective 2 Cells, Tissues, Organs, and Organ Systems of Animals 3 Cell Division and Inheritance 4 Evolution: History and Evidence 5 Evolution and Gene Frequencies 6 Ecology: Preserving the Animal Kingdom 113 PLANTS & ANIMALS Part Two Animal-Like Protists and Animalia 7 Animal Classification, Phylogeny, and Organization 8 Animal-like Protists: The Protozoa 9 Multicellular and Tissue Levels of Organization 10 The Triploblastic, Acoelomate Body Plan 11 The Pseudocoelomate Body Plan: Aschelminths 12 Molluscan Success 13 Annelida: The Metameric Body Form 14 The Arthropods: Blueprint for Success 15 The Hexapods and Myriapods: Terrestrial Triumphs 16 The Echinoderms 17 Hemichordata and Invertebrate Chordates 18 The Fishes: Vertebrate Success in Water 19 Amphibians: The First Terrestrial Vertebrates 20 Reptiles: The First Amniotes 21 Birds: Feathers, Flight, and Endothermy 22 Mammals: Specialized Teeth, Hair Endothermy, and Viviparity Part Three Form and Function: A Comparative Perspective 23 Protection, Support, and Movement 24 Communication I: Nervous and Sensory Systems 25 Communication II: The Endocrine System and Chemical Messengers 26 Circulation and Gas Exchange 27 Nutrition and Digestion 28 Temperature and Body Fluid Regulation 29 Reproduction and Development 30 The Chemical Basis of Animal Life 31 Energy and Enzymes: Life’s Driving and Controlling Forces 32 How Animals Harvest Energy Stored in Nutrients 33 Embryology 34 Animal Behavior Laboratory - Majors NEW LABORATORY STUDIES IN ANIMAL DIVERSITY 5th Edition By Cleveland Hickman, Washington & Lee University NEW TO THIS EDITION We have added a new interactive exercise on how to make a cladogram in Exercise 2, Introduction to Animal Classification. The exercise explains how to map characters onto trees and how to choose between different possible evolutionary pathways using the principle of parsimony. We have made several taxonomic updates that parallel the accompanying textbook, Animal Diversity, Fifth Edition. Birds are now recognized as a subclass within the class Reptilia. Birds and reptiles share several derived characters, including distinct skull and ankle characteristics and the presence of beta-keratin in the skin. This unites birds and nonavian reptiles as a monophyletic group. All modern nonavian reptiles are now placed in the diapsid group. Turtles, formerly considered anapsids, are treated (controversially) as derived diapsids. Another change is inclusion of homopteran insects in the order Hemiptera; the order Homoptera is now obsolete. Classifications, where appropriate, are included with the text, together with a new cladogram showing the position of the group in the Eucarya, and a “pie” diagram showing the relative sizes of the classes in a phylum. The new Appendix A includes directions for preparing the exercises in this manual. For each exercise we have listed the materials required, directions for preparing solutions, suggestions for maintaining and working with the living materials, suggestions for demonstrations, and a listing of appropriate references, most of which are annotated. This information is convenient to the instructor as well as to students who may later wish to consult or implement an exercise. CONTENTS Part 1: Activity of Life 1 Ecological Relationships of Animals 2 Introduction to Animal Classification Part 2: The Diversity of Animal Life 3 The Microscope 4 Protozoan Groups 5 The Sponges 6 The Radiate Animals 7 The Flatworms 8 Five Small Protostome Phyla 9 The Molluscs 10 The Annelids 11 The Chelicerate Arthropods 12 The Crustacean Arthropods 13 The Arthropods: Myriapods and Insects 14 The Echinoderms 15 Phylum Chordata: A Deuterostome Group 16 The Fishes—Lampreys, Sharks, and Bony Fishes 17 Class Amphibia 18 The Nonavian Reptiles 19 The Birds 20 The Mammals 2009 (December 2008) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-334925-1 Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity offers students hands-on experience in learning about the diversity of life. It provides students the opportunity to become acquainted with the principal groups of animals and to recognize the unique anatomical features that characterize each group as well as the patterns that link animal groups to each other. 114 PLANTS & ANIMALS 5. Morphology, Classification, and Systematics 6. Protozoa 7. Porifera 8. Cnidaria and the Radiate Phyla 9. Platyhelminthes 10. Other Protostome Phyla 11. Mollusca 12. Annelida 13. Arthropoda 14. Echinodermata 15. Chordata 16. Shark Anatomy 17. Perch Anatomy 18. Frog Anatomy 19. Fetal Pig Anatomy 20. Rat Anatomy NEW GENERAL ZOOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL 15th Edition By Charles Lytle, North Carolina State University—Raleigh and John Meyer, North Carolina State University 2009 (November 2008) / 400 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-305162-8 http://www.mhhe.com/zoology General Zoology Laboratory Guide is ideal for the laboratory that emphasizes the dissection and microscopic study of live and preserved specimens. Recognized for its accuracy and readability, this manual is comprehensive in its representation of the major groups of animal phyla. This new edition is suitable for a wide range of course needs and structures. NEW TO THIS EDITION Major revisions made in the chapters on Protozoa and Arthropoda, reflecting current recent research findings, changes in classification and interpretations of animal relationships. All chapters updated to reflect results of recent studies on cellular function, molecular biology, ecology, physiology, and systematics. A new chapter on Classification and Systematics based on recent research using new biochemical and genetic techniques to leading to new interpretations of the evolutionary relationships of animal phyla and classes. The chapter also gives an overview of animal morphology to provide a holistic perspective for the evolution of structure and function in the animal kingdom. New illustrations added in nearly every chapter including more than two dozen photographs and drawings. Other changes include several new color photographs of animals in natural habitats, diagrams illustrating the life cycles of several invertebrates, and improved critical thinking questions to stimulate student interest and analysis. FEATURES All questions within in the text appear in a different font, to serve as a pedagogical aid to enhance the learning process. End-of-chapter section entitled “Suggested Readings,” provides a brief listing of related articles for further reading or research. End-of-chapter section titled “Internet Resources,” provides a selection of related websites which are hot links on the custom web site. End-of-chapter feature titled “Critical Thinking Questions,” provides a list of challenging questions that encourage application and reflection of the chapter material. A Biohazard logo appears next to all lab exercises that deal with potentially hazardous materials. CONTENTS Laboratory Safety Comparative Safety of Preservatives Handling and Care of Animals in the Laboratory 1. Microscopy 2. Animal Cells and Tissues 3. Mitosis and Meiosis 4. Development LABORATORY STUDIES IN INTEGRATED PRINCIPLES OF ZOOLOGY 14th Edition By Cleveland P Hickman, Washington & Lee University, Lee Kats, Pepperdine University and Susan L Keen, University of California Davis 2008 (September 2007) / 448 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-297005-0 Laboratory Studies in Integrated Principles of Zoology uses a comprehensive, phylogenetic approach in emphasizing basic biological principles, animal form and function, and evolutionary concepts. This introductory lab manual is ideal for a one- or two-semester course. The new edition expertly combines up-to-date coverage with the clear writing style and dissection guides that have distinguished this manual from edition to edition. CONTENTS 1 Introduction to the Living Animal 1 The Microscope 2 Cell Structure and Division 3 Gametogenesis and Embryology 4 Tissue Structure and Function 5 Introduction to Animal Classification 2 The Diversity of Animal Life 6 Protozoan Groups 7 The Sponges 8 The Radiate Animals 9 The Flatworms 10 Five Small Protosome Phyla 11 The Molluscs 12 The Annelids 13 The Chelicerate Arthropods 14 The Crustacean Arthropods 15 The Arthropods: Myriapods & Hexapods 16 The Echinoderms 17 Phylum Chordata: A Deuterostome Group 18 The Fishes--Lampreys, Sharks, and Bony Fishes 19 The Amphibians 20 The Nonavian Reptiles 21 The Birds 22 The Mammals 3 Activity of Life 23 Ecological Relationships of Animals Appendix A Instructor’s Resources for Implementing Exercises Appendix B Sources of Living Material and Prepared Microslides 115 PLANTS & ANIMALS 116 117 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY College Physics ................................................................................................124 Conceptual Physics ......................................................................................... 123 Electricity & Magnetism ................................................................................... 131 Integrated Sciences ......................................................................................... 122 Introduction to Astronomy ................................................................................ 134 Intro to Physical Science ..................................................................................119 Mathematical Physics ...................................................................................... 131 Medical Physics ............................................................................................... 130 Modern Physics .............................................................................................. 130 Optics ............................................................................................................. 133 Quantum Mechanics.........................................................................................132 Technical Physics ............................................................................................ 128 University Physics ........................................................................................... 129 NEW TITLES PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY 2010 Author ISBN-13 College Physics, 3e Giambattista 9780077263218 124 Physics, 2e Giambattista 9780077270674 125 The Physical Universe, 13e Krauskopf 9780077270704 119 2009 Author ISBN-13 Optics, 4e [India] Ghatak 9780070262157 133 Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 6e Griffith 9780073512112 123 Engineering Physics [India] Rajendran 9780070261037 128 Pathways to Astronomy, with Starry Nights Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 2e Schneider 9780077263119 134 Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 8e Tillery 9780073349190 121 Physical Science, 8e Tillery 9780077263133 120 Page PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY 118 Page PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Intro to Physical Science NEW THE PHYSICAL UNIVERSE 13th Edition By Konrad B Krauskopf (deceased) and Arthur Beiser, Formerly New York University 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727070-4 http://www.mhhe.com/krauskopf This is an outstanding text with a long history that has been updated and given a fresh look. The 2010 copyright year represents the 50th anniversary of the publishing of this classic text. The text is also accompanied by strong media component with the ARIS online homework system, “CPS” eInstruction student response system questions, more extensive online quizzing, and PowerPoint lectures. Aimed at presenting the essentials of physics, chemistry, earth science, and astronomy in a clear, easy-to-understand way, The Physical Universe shows students how science works, how scientists approach problems, and why science constantly evolves in its search for understanding. The text can also be packaged with its long time companion student study guide, which includes a review of chapter terms and concepts; self quizzing for extra practice; and solved problems from the text. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW Chapter 4 entitled “Energy and the Future” has much newly added text coverage, 17 sidebars, and 35 illustrations, 22 of them new. To purcahse an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www. CourseSmart.com or www.VitalSource.com. FEATURES Chapter Goals are now integrated into the outline as part of the chapter opener content. Superb pedagogy: updated “A Scientist at Work” essays, biographies of important scientists, worked examples and exercises, chapter summaries, conceptual questions and problems, high-interest sidebars applying science to everyday life, and answers to all oddnumbered questions and problems. The Krauskopf/Beiser text is more conceptual than most physical science texts in particular emphasizing the scientific method of inquiry - how scientists think. CONTENTS 1 The Scientific Method How Scientists Study Nature The Solar System Universal Gravitation How Many of What 2 Motion Describing Motion Acceleration of Gravity Gravitation 3 Energy Work Energy Momentum Relativity Energy and Civilization 4 Energy and the Future The Energy Problem Fossil Fuels Alternative Sources Strategies for the Future 5 Matter and Heat Temperature and Heat Fluids Kinetic Theory of Matter Changes of State Energy Transformations 6 Electricity and Magnetism Electric Charge Electricity and Matter Electric Current Magnetism Using Magnetism 7 Waves Wave Motion Sound Waves Electromagnetic Waves Wave Behavior 8 The Nucleus Atom and Nucleus Radioactivity Nuclear Energy Fission and Fusion Elementary Particles 9 The Atom Quantum Theory of Light Matter Waves The Hydrogen Atom Quantum Theory of the Atom 10 The Periodic Law Elements and Compounds The Periodic Law Atomic Structure Chemical Bonds 11 Crystals, Ions, and Solutions Solids Solutions Acids and Bases 12 Chemical Reactions Quantitative Chemistry Chemical Energy Fuels Reaction Rates Oxidation and Reduction 13 Organic Chemistry Carbon Compounds Structures of Organic Molecules Organic Compounds Chemistry of Life 14 Atmosphere and Hydrosphere The Atmosphere Weather Climate The Hydrosphere 15 The Rock Cycle Rocks Within the Earth Erosion Vulcanism 16 The Evolving Earth Tectonic Movement Plate Tectonics 119 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Content on global warming and energy conservation has been added and updated. Chapter 3: There is a new section on Conserving Energy. Chapter 16: The material on Global Warming has been updated and revised. Chapter 23: Sections on Climate Change, Causes of Global Climate Change, and Global Warming along with a discussion of Hurricane Katrina have been added. Methods of Historical Geology Earth History 17 The Solar System The Family of the Sun The Inner Planets The Outer Planets The Moon 18 The Stars Tools of Astronomy The Sun The Stars Life Histories of the Stars 19 The Universe Galaxies The Expanding Universe Evolution of the Universe Extraterrestrial Life Math Refresher The Elements Answers to Odd-Numbered Exercises Glossary Chapter 7: A new section on special relativity and general relativity (with cross references to astronomy) has been added. Chapter 15: The information on Pluto and the definition of planets has been updated, along with the most recent data on space exploration, space probes, and new probes. Applying the Concepts multiple-choice questions were revised. CONTENTS NEW International Edition PHYSICAL SCIENCE 8th Edition By Bill Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe 2009 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-726313-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-128088-4 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/tillery Physical Science, Eighth Edition, is a straightforward, easy-to-read, but substantial introduction to the fundamental behavior of matter and energy. It is intended to serve the needs of non-science majors who are required to complete one or more physical science courses. It offers exceptional, straight-forward writing, complimented with useful pedagogical tools. Physical Science introduces basic concepts and key ideas while providing opportunities for students to learn reasoning skills and a new way of thinking about their environment. No prior work in science is assumed. The text offers students complete coverage of the physical sciences with a level of explanation and detail appropriate for all students. The sequence of chapters in Physical Science is flexible, and the instructor can determine topic sequence and depth of coverage as needed. The materials are also designed to support a conceptual approach, or a combined conceptual and problem-solving approach. With laboratory studies, the text contains enough material for the instructor to select a sequence for a two-semester course. It can also serve as a text in a one-semester physics and chemistry course. 1 What Is Science? Physics 2 Motion 3 Energy 4 Heat and Temperature 5 Wave Motions and Sound 6 Electricity 7 Light Chemistry 8 Atoms and Periodic Properties 9 Chemical Bonds 10 Chemical Reactions 11 Water and Solutions 12 Organic Chemistry 13 Nuclear Reactions Astronomy 14 The Universe 15 The Solar System 16 Earth in Space Earth Science 17 Rocks and Minerals 18 Plate Tectonics 19 Building Earth’s Surface 20 Shaping Earth’s Surface 21 Geologic Time 22 Atmosphere of Earth 23 Weather and Climate 24 Earth’s Waters Appendix A Mathematical Review Appendix B Solubilities Chart Appendix C Relative Humidity Table Appendix D Solutions to Follow-UP Examples Appendix E Solutions for Group A Parallel Exercises NEW TO THIS EDITION Core and Supporting Concepts have been added to the chapter openers to help integrate the chapter concepts and the chapter outline. A new Appendix D: Solutions to Follow-Up Examples has been added to the end matter. 120 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY NEW LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY PHYSICAL SCIENCE 8th Edition By Bill Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe 2009 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-334919-0 The laboratory manual, written and classroom tested by the author, presents a selection of laboratory exercises specifically written for the interests and abilities of nonscience majors. There are laboratory exercises that require measurement, data analysis, and thinking in a more structured learning environment. Alternative exercises that are open-ended “Invitations to Inquiry” are provided for instructors who would like a less structured approach. When the laboratory manual is used with Physical Science, students will have an opportunity to master basic scientific principles and concepts, learn new problemsolving and thinking skills, and understand the nature of scientific inquiry from the perspective of hands-on experiences. The instructor’s edition of the laboratory manual can be found on the ARIS Site for Physical Science. CONTENTS Introduction Materials Required for Each Experiment Experiments 1. Graphing 2. Ratios 3. Motion 4. Free Fall 5. The Pendulum 6. Projectile Motion 7. Newton’s Second Law 8. Conservation of Momentum 9. Rotational Equilibrium 10. Centripetal Force 11. Archimedes’ Principle 12. Boyle’s Law 13. Work and Power 14. Friction 15. Hooke’s Law 16. Thermometer Fixed Points 17. Absolute Zero 18. Specific Heat 19. Static Electricity 20. Electric Circuits 21. Series and Parallel Circuits 22. Ohm’s Law 23. Magnetic Fields 24. Electromagnets 25. Standing Waves 26. Speed of Sound in Air 27. Reflection and Refraction 28. Physical and Chemical Change 29. Hydrogen 30. Oxygen 31. Conductivity of Solutions 32. Percentage Composition 33. Metal Replacement Reactions 34. Producing Salts by Neutralization 35. Identifying Salts 36. Solubility Curves 37. Natural Water 38. Measurement of pH 39. Amount of Water Vapor in the Air 40. Nuclear Radiation 41. Growing Crystals 42. Properties of Common Minerals 43. Density of Igneous Rocks 44. Latitude and Longitude 45. Topographic Maps 46. Telescopes 47. Celestial Coordinates 48. Motions of the Sun 49. Phases of Moon 50. Power Output of Sun 51. Special Project Appendix I. The Simple Line Graph II. The Slope of a Straight Line II. Experimental Error IV. Significant Figures V. Conversion of Units VI. Scientific Notation SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE 2nd Edition By Arthur Beiser, formerly of New York University 1988 / 368 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-004419-7 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS Physical Quantities. Motion in a Straight Line. The Laws of Motion. Circular Motion and Gravitation. Energy. Momentum. Relativity. Fluids. Heat. Kinetic Theory of Matter. Thermodynamics. Electricity. Electric Current. Magnetism. Electromagnetic Induction. Waves. Lenses. Quantum Physics. The Nucleus. Radioactivity and Elementary Particles. Theory of the Atom. The Periodic Law. Molecules and Solids. Formulas and Equations. Stoichiometry. Gas Stoichiometry. Solutions. Acids and Bases. Oxidation and Reduction. Electrochemistry. Chemical Energy. Reaction Rates and Equilibrium. Organic Chemistry. The Atmosphere. Weather. The Oceans. Earth Materials. Erosion and Sedimentation. Vulcanism and Diastrophism. The Earth’s Interior. Continental Drift. 121 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Integrated Sciences Earth History. Earth and Sky. The Solar System. The Sun. The Stars. The Universe. International Edition INTEGRATED SCIENCE 4th Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF LAGRANGIAN DYNAMICS By Bill W Tillery, Arizona State University--Tempe, Eldon Enger and Frederick C Ross of Delta College 2008 (September 2007) / 768 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-335317-3 (with Mandatory Package) ISBN: 978-0-07-128454-7 [IE] By Dave Wells, University of Texas 1967 / 368 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-069258-9 A Schaum’s Publication www.mhhe.com/tillery CONTENTS Background Material. Lagrange’s Equations of Motion of a Single Particle. Lagrange’s Equations of Motion for a System of Particles. Conservative Systems. Dissipative Forces. General Treatment of Moments and Products of Inertia. Lagrangian Treatment of Rigid Body Dynamics. The Euler Method of Rigid Body Dynamics. Small Oscillations about Positions of Equilibrium. Small Oscillations about Steady Motion. Forces of Constraint. Driving Forces Required to Establish Known Motions. Effects of Earth’s Figure and Daily Rotation on Dynamical Problems. Application of Lagrange’s Equations to Electrical and Electromechanical Systems. Hamilton’s Equations of Motion. Hamilton’s Principle. Basic Equations of Dynamics in Vector and Tensor Notation. Appendix: Relations between Direction Cosines. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia Integrated Science, Fourth Edition is a straightforward, easy-to-read, yet substantial introduction to the fundamental behavior of matter and energy in living and nonliving systems. The authors provide even, well-integrated coverage of physics, chemistry, earth science, astronomy, and biology. The text’s pedagogy (chapter outlines, core concept maps, and overviews) reveals how the science disciplines are interrelated and integrated throughout the text. This edition continues to introduce basic concepts and key ideas while providing opportunities for students to learn reasoning skills and a new way of thinking about their environment. The book is intended to serve the needs of non-science majors who are required to complete one or more science courses as part of a general or basic studies requirement. No prior work in science is assumed. The language, as well as the mathematics, is as simple as can be practical for a college-level science course. CONTENTS Ch 1 What Is Science? Ch 2 Motion Ch 3 Energy Ch 4 Heat and Temperature Ch 5 Wave Motions and Sound Ch 6 Electricity Ch 7 Light Ch 8 Atoms and Periodic Properties Ch 9 Chemical Reactions Ch 10 Water and Solutions Ch 11 Nuclear Reactions Ch 12 The Universe Ch 13 The Solar System Ch 14 Earth in Space Ch 15 The Earth Ch 16 The Earth’s Surface Ch 17 Earth’s Weather Ch 18 Earth’s Waters Ch 19 Organic and Biochemistry Ch 20 The Nature of Living Things Ch 21 The Origin and Evolution of Life Ch 22 The History of Life on Earth Ch 23 Ecology and Environment Ch 24 Human Biology: Materials Exchange and Control Mechanisms Ch 25 Human Biology: Reproduction Ch 26 Mendelian and Molecular Genetics Appendix A: Mathematical Review Working with Equations Significant Figures Conversion of Units Scientific Notation Appendix B: Solubilities Chart Appendix C: Relative Humidity Table Appendix D: Solutions for Group A Parallel Exercises Appendix E: Problem Solving Glossary 122 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY INTEGRATED SCIENCE 4th Edition III. Experimental Error IV. Significant Figures V. Conversion of Units VI. Scientific Notation Inside Front Cover: Relative Humidity Chart Inside Back Cover: Metric Relationships By Bill W Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe, Eldon Enger, Delta College and Robert S Ross, California State University-Chico 2008 (September 2007) / 416 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-335738-6 The lab manual was written and classroom-tested by the authors of the text. It has been revised in recent editions to emphasize a more inquiry-oriented approach and to increase the number of biology labs. Each lab begins with an open-ended “Invitations to Inquiry,” designed to peak student interest in the lab concept. This is followed by laboratory exercises that require measurement and data analysis for work in a more structured learning environment. When the laboratory manual is used with Integrated Science text, students will have an opportunity to understand the nature of scientific inquiry from the perspective of hands-on experiences in order to master basic scientific principles and concepts and learn new problem-solving and thinking skills. Conceptual Physics NEW CONTENTS Introduction Acknowledgments Materials Required for Each Experiment Experiment 1. Graphing 2. Ratios 3. Motion 4. Free Fall 5. Centripetal Force 6. Work and Power 7. Thermometer Fixed Points 8. Specific Heat 9. Speed of Sound in Air 10. Static Electricity 11. Ohm’s Law 12. Magnetic Fields 13. Reflection and Refraction 14. Physical and Chemical Change 15. Conductivity of Solutions 16. Metal Replacement Reactions 17. Identifying Salts 18. Natural Water 19. Measurement of pH 20. Amount of Water Vapor in the Air 21. Growing Crystals 22. Properties of Common Minerals 23. Density of Igneous Rocks 24. Latitude and Longitude 25. Telescopes 26. Celestial Coordinates 27. Motions of the Sun 28. Diffusion and Osmosis 29. The Microscope 30. Survey of Cell Types: Structure and Function 31. Enzymes 32. Photosynthesis and Respiration 33. The Chemistry and Ecology of Yogurt Production 34. DNA and RNA 35. Mitosis—Cell Division 36. Meiosis 37. Genetics Problems 38. Human Variation 39. Sensory Abilities 40. Daily Energy Balance 41. The Effect of Abiotic Factors on Habitat Preference 42. Natural Selection 43. Roll Call of the Animals 44. Special Project Appendix I. The Simple Line Graph II. The Slope of a Straight Line International Edition PHYSICS OF EVERYDAY PHENOMENA 6th Edition By Thomas Griffith, Pacific University 2009 (September 2008) / 528 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351211-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-128452-3 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/griffith The Physics of Everyday Phenomena, Sixth Edition, introduces students to the basic concepts of physics using examples of common occurrences. Intended for use in a one-semester or two-semester course in conceptual physics, this book is written in a narrative style, frequently using questions designed to draw the reader into a dialogue about the ideas of physics. This inclusive style allows the book to be used by anyone interested in exploring the nature of physics and explanations of everyday physical phenomena. Beginning students will benefit from the large number of student aids and the reduced math content. Professors will appreciate the organization of the material and the wealth of pedagogical tools. NEW TO THIS EDITION Five NEW and UPDATED Everyday Phenomenon boxes have been added to those already present in the text. These boxes ask students to analyze common phenomena in more detail to promote a better understanding of everyday events in students’ lives. Section 5.3 has been extensively rewritten to simplify and clarify the discussions of Kepler’s laws and planetary motion, including addition of a new example – example box 5.2 --using Newton’s third law. Also replaced two figures in this section with more updated figures. Twelve new Example boxes have been added to the text. End-of-Chapter Questions, Exercises, and Synthesis Problems over content related to energy issues were added where appropriate. In addition, energy-themed sample course syllabi will be placed on the text’s website. Figure numbers have been added to the illustrations in the end of chapter Questions, Exercises, Synthesis Problems. 123 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY College Physics CONTENTS Chapter One--Physics, the Fundamental Science Chapter Two--Describing Motion Chapter Three--Falling Objects and Projectile Motion Chapter Four--Newton’s Laws: Explaining Motion Chapter Five--Circular Motion, the Planets, and Gravity Chapter Six--Energy and Oscillations Chapter Seven--Momentum and Impulse Chapter Eight--Rotational Motion of Solid Objects Chapter Nine--The Behavior of Fluids Chapter Ten--Temperature and Heat Chapter Eleven--Heat Engines and the Second Law of Thermodynamics Chapter Twelve--Electrostatic Phenomena Chapter Thirteen--Electric Circuits Chapter Fourteen--Magnets and Electromagnetism Chapter Fifteen--Making Waves Chapter Sixteen – Light Waves and Color Chapter Seventeen--Light and Image Formation Chapter Eighteen--The Structure of the Atom Chapter Nineteen--The Nucleus and Nuclear Energy Chapter Twenty--Relativity Chapter Twenty-one--Beyond Everyday Phenomena Appendix A--Using Simple Algebra Appendix B--Decimal Fractions, Percentages, and Scientific Notation Appendix C--Vectors and Vector Addition Appendix D--Answers to Odd-Numbered Exercises and Challenge Problems Photo Credits Glossary Index NEW International Edition COLLEGE PHYSICS 3rd Edition By Alan Giambattista, Cornell University-Ithaca 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-726321-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-128443-1 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/grr College Physics, Third Edition is the best solution for today’s college physics market. With a unique, new, approach to physics that builds a conceptual framework as motivation for the physical principles, consistent problem solving coverage strategies, stunning art, extensive end-of-chapter material, and superior media support, Giambattista, Richardson, and Richardson delivers a product that addresses today’s market needs with the best tools available. NEW TO THIS EDITION International Edition PHYSICS FOR POETS 5th Edition By Robert March, University of Wisconsin – Madison 2003 / 304 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-247217-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-119853-0 [IE] www.mhhe.com/physsci CONTENTS 1 A Vast and Most Excellent Science 2 Toward a Science of Mechanics 3 The Denouement: Newton’s Laws 4 The Moon and the Apple 5 The Romance of Energy 6 One Last Part for the Machine 7 Waves 8 Does the Earth Really Move? 9 The Birth of Relativity 10 The Wedding of Space and Time 11 E=mc2 and All That 12 Did God Have Any Choice? 13 The Atom Returns 14 Rutherford Probes the Atom 15 The Atom and the Quantum 16 Particles and Waves 17 Does God Play Dice? 18 Schrodinger’s Cat 19 The Dreams Stuff Is Made Of 20 The Whole Shebang New “Connections” feature identifies areas in each chapter where important concepts are revisited. A marginal “Connections” heading and summary adjacent to the coverage in the main text help students easily recognize that a previously introduced concept is being applied to the current discussion. New Checkpoint questions have been added to applicable sections of the text. The answers to the Checkpoints are found at the end of the chapter. Non-essential coverage and derivations have been moved from the text to the text’s online site. Identifiers in the text direct students to additional information online. The topical question from the chapter opening vignette now appears in the margin (along with a reduced version of the chapter opening image). Many helpful subheadings have been added to the text to help students quickly identify new subtopics. End of chapter problem sets have been revised and include many new problems: 107 new problems in total. The number of problems in the Review & Synthesis sections has been increased in the new edition(s); over 30 new problems in total. The MCAT® Review questions have been retained. To purchase as electonic eBook version of this title, visit www. CourseSmart.com or www.VitalSource.com. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction PART ONE: MECHANICS Chapter 2: Force Chapter 3: Acceleration and Newton’s Second Law of Motion Chapter 4: Motion with a Changing Velocity Chapter 5: Circular Motion Chapter 6: Conservation of Energy 124 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Chapter 7: Linear Momentum Chapter 8: Torque and Angular Momentum Chapter 9: Fluids Chapter 10: Elasticity and Oscillations Chapter 11: Waves Chapter 12: Sound PART TWO: THERMAL PHYSICS Chapter 13: Temperature and the Ideal Gas Chapter 14: Heat Chapter 15: Thermodynamics PART THREE: ELECTROMAGNETISM Chapter 16: Electric Forces and Fields Chapter 17: Electric Potential Chapter 18: Electric Current and Circuits Chapter 19: Magnetic Forces and Fields Chapter 20: Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 21: Alternating Current PART FOUR: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND OPTICS Chapter 22: Electromagnetic Waves Chapter 23: Reflection and Refraction of Light Chapter 24: Optical Instruments Chapter 25: Interference and Diffraction PART FIVE: QUANTUM AND PARTICLE PHYSICS Chapter 26: Relativity Chapter 27: Early Quantum Physics and the Photon Chapter 28: Quantum Physics Chapter 29: Nuclear Physics Chapter 30: Particle Physics APPENDICES Appendix A: Mathematics Review A.1 Algebra A.2 Solving equations A.3 Exponents and logarithms A.4 Proportions and ratios A.5 Geometry A.6 Trigonometry A.7 Approximations A.8 Vectors Appendix B: Table of Selected Isotopes Answers to Selected Questions and Problems NEW TO THIS EDITION New “Connections” feature identifies areas in each chapter where important concepts are revisited. A marginal “Connections” heading and summary adjacent to the coverage in the main text help students easily recognize that a previously introduced concept is being applied to the current discussion. New Checkpoint questions have been added to applicable sections of the text. The answers to the Checkpoints are found at the end of the chapter. Non-essential coverage and derivations have been moved from the text to the text’s online site. Identifiers in the text direct students to additional information online. Electronic Media Integration has been incorporated throughout the text. Icons indicate topics in the text where accompanying interactives, animations, and tutorials can be found online to aid in student understanding of physics concepts. The topical question from the chapter opening vignette now appears in the margin (along with a reduced version of the chapter opening image). Applications have been clearly identified as such in the text with a complete listing in the front matter. Many helpful subheadings have been added to the text to help students quickly identify new subtopics. End-of-chapter problem sets have been revised and include many new problems: over 100 new problems in total. The number of problems in the Review & Synthesis sections has been increased in the new edition(s); over 30 new problems in total. The MCAT® Review questions have been retained. To purchase an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www. CourseSmart.com or www.VitalSource.com. CONTENTS NEW International Edition PHYSICS 2nd Edition By Alan Giambattista, Betty Richardson and Robert Richardson of Cornell University-Ithaca 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727067-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-017244-9 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/grr Physics 2nd edition is an alternate version of the College Physics 3rd edition text by Giambattista/Richardson/Richardson. The key difference is that Physics covers kinematics and forces in the more traditional organization of beginning with Kinematics and proceeding to forces. (College Physics takes an integrated approach to forces and kinematics, introducing forces and interweaving kinematics.) Chapter 1: Introduction PART ONE: MECHANICS Chapter 2: Motion Along a Line Chapter 3: Motion in a Plane Chapter 4: Force and Newton’s Laws of Motion Chapter 5: Circular Motion Chapter 6: Conservation of Energy Chapter 7: Linear Momentum Chapter 8: Torque and Angular Momentum Chapter 9: Fluids Chapter 10: Elasticity and Oscillations Chapter 11: Waves Chapter 12: Sound PART TWO: THERMAL PHYSICS Chapter 13: Temperature and the Ideal Gas Chapter 14: Heat Chapter 15: Thermodynamics PART THREE: ELECTROMAGNETISM Chapter 16: Electric Forces and Fields Chapter 17: Electric Potential Chapter 18: Electric Current and Circuits Chapter 19: Magnetic Forces and Fields Chapter 20: Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 21: Alternating Current PART FOUR: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND OPTICS Chapter 22: Electromagnetic Waves Chapter 23: Reflection and Refraction of Light Chapter 24: Optical Instruments Chapter 25: Interference and Diffraction PART FIVE: QUANTUM AND PARTICLE PHYSICS Chapter 26: Relativity Chapter 27: Early Quantum Physics and the Photon Chapter 28: Quantum Physics Chapter 29: Nuclear Physics 125 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Chapter 30: Particle Physics APPENDICES Appendix A: Mathematics Review A.1 Algebra A.2 Solving equations A.3 Exponents and logarithms A.4 Proportions and ratios A.5 Geometry A.6 Trigonometry A.7 Approximations A.8 Vectors Appendix B: Table of Selected Isotopes Answers to Selected Questions and Problems 34 Reflection and Mirrors 35 Refraction 36 Lenses and Optical Instruments 37 Interference, Diffraction, and Polarization MODERN PHYSICS 38 Modern Physics and the Atom 39 Nuclear Physics and the Nucleus INDEX SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF APPLIED PHYSICS 4th Edition Revised By Arthur Beiser 2009 (May 2009) / 465 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-161157-2 International Edition A Schaum’s Publication PHYSICS 7th Edition Applied Physics is the study of algebra-based physics, a course taken by non-physics majors, mainly in technical schools, 2- and 4- year community colleges and universities, who need to apply physics to their every-day job, as opposed to focusing on further study or theoretical physics. Applied Physics is a required course for many engineers, mechanics, optical engineers, and other technical professions. For example, any kind of higher level mechanic or engineer, such as those found in aviation, throughout the military, or in optical engineering programs, study Applied Physics. By Paul E Tippens 2007 (Dec 2005) ISBN: 978-0-07-322270-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-110759-4 [IE] ISBN: 978-0-07-110796-9 [IE with OLC] http://www.mhhe.com/tippens7e CONTENTS Physics, Seventh Edition is designed for the non-calculus physics course taken by students who are pursuing careers in science or engineering technology. Content is built through extensive use of examples with detailed solutions designed to develop students’ problem-solving skills. CONTENTS MECHANICS 1 Introduction 2 Technical Mathematics 3 Technical Measurements and Vectors. 4 Translational Equilibrium and Friction 5 Torque and Rotational Equilibrium 6 Uniform Acceleration 7 Newton’s Second Law 8 Work, Energy, and Power 9 Impulse and Momentum 10 Uniform Circular Motion. 11 Rotation of Rigid Bodies 12 Simple Machines 13 Elasticity 14 Simple Harmonic Motion 15 Fluids THERMODYNAMICS, MECHANICAL WAVES, AND SOUND 16 Temperature and Expansion 17 Quantity of Heat 18 Transfer of Heat 19 Thermal Properties of Matter 20 Thermodynamics 21 Mechanical Waves 22 Sound ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM, AND OPTICS 23 The Electric Force 24 The Electric Field 25 Electric Potential 26 Capacitance 27 Current and Resistance 28 Direct-Current Circuits 29 Magnetism and the Magnetic Field 30 Forces and Torques in a Magnetic Field 31 Electromagnetic Induction 32 Alternating-Current Circuits 33 Light and Illumination Chapter 1. Useful Math Chapter 2. Vectors Chapter 3. Motion in a Straight Line Chapter 4. Motion in a Vertical Plane Chapter 5. Laws of Motion Chapter 6. Friction Chapter 7. Energy Chapter 8. Momentum Chapter 9. Circular Motion and Gravitation Chapter 10. Rotational Motion Chapter 11. Equilibrium Chapter 12. Simple Machines Chapter 13. Elasticity Chapter 14. Simple Harmonic Motion Chapter 15. Waves and Sound Chapter 16. Fluids at Rest Chapter 17. Fluids in Motion Chapter 18. Heat Chapter 19. Expansion of Solids, Liquids, and Gases Chapter 20. Kinetic Theory of Matter Chapter 21. Thermodynamics Chapter 22. Heat Transfer Chapter 23. Electricity Chapter 24. Electric Current Chapter 25. Direct-Current Circuits Chapter 26. Capacitance Chapter 27. Magnetism Chapter 28. Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 29. Alternating-Current Circuits Chapter 30. Light Chapter 31. Spherical Mirrors Chapter 32. Lenses Chapter 33. Physical and Quantum Optics Chapter 34. Atomic Physics Chapter 35. The Solid State Chapter 36. Nuclear Physics Appendix A. Physical Constants and Quantities Appendix B. Conversion Factors Appendix C. Natural Trigonometric Functions Index 126 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COLLEGE PHYSICS 10th Edition 18 Electric Current and Resistance 19 Magnetism 20 Electromagnetic Induction 21 Alternating-Current Circuits 22 Geometrical Optics 23 Optical Instruments 24 Wave Optics 25 Relativity 26 Discovery of Atomic Structure 27 Origins of the Quantum Theory 28 Quantum Mechanics 29 The Nucleus 30 Lasers and Holography 31 Condensed Matter 32 Elementary Particle Physics Appendices: A Formulas from Algebra, Geometry, and Trigonometry B The International System of Units C Alphabetical List of Elements D Answers to Odd Numbered Problems By Frederick J Bueche, University of Dayton-Emeritus and Eugene Hecht, Adelphi University 2006 (Nov 2005) / 448 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-144814-7 A Schaum’s Publication An introduction to physics that you don’t need to be a math whiz to understand. Schaum’s Outline of College Physics, Tenth Edition, is a clear, easily understood review of introductory noncalculus-based physics. It is especially helpful if you do not have a strong background in mathematics. SCHAUM’S A-Z PHYSICS By Michael Chapple 2003 / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-141937-6 A Schaum’s Publication Schaum’s A-Z handbooks make excellent complements to course textbooks and test preparation guides. Ideal for ambitious high school seniors--especially AP students--and college freshmen, they feature concise, thoroughly cross-referenced definitions of hundreds of key terms and phrases that help students quickly break through the jargon barrier. Clear explanations of key concepts, supplemented with lucid illustrations, help build mastery of theory and provide a ready reference to supplement class work. Each entry begins with a clear, one-sentence definition and is followed by an explanation and examples. A-to-Z format for ready reference Clear definitions and explanations, cross-referenced and enhanced with numerous worked examples and illustrations Extended explanations of more important concepts Review lists of entries that relate to main topics in the Appendix aid review International Edition CONTEMPORARY COLLEGE PHYSICS 2001 Update, 3rd Edition By Edwin R Jones and Richard L Childers of University of South Carolina 2001 / 1088 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-241512-4 (with CD-ROM, Mandatory Package) ISBN: 978-0-07-120491-0 [IE, Updated] www.mhhe.com/jones CONTENTS 1 Measurements and Models 2 Motion in One Dimension 3 Motion in Two Dimensions 4 Force and Motion 5 Uniform Circular Motion 6 Work and Energy 7 Momentum 8 Applying the Conservation Laws 9 Rigid Bodies and Rotational Motion 10 Fluids 11 Thermal Physics 12 Gas Laws and Kinetic Theory 13 Thermodynamics 14 Periodic Motion 15 Waves and Sound 16 Electric Charge and Electric Field 17 Electric Potential and Capacitance SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF COLLEGE PHYSICS By J. Bueche, Emeritus University of Dayton, Eugene Hecht, Adelphi University and George J. Hademenos 2000 / 138 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-052711-9 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS Newtonian Mechanics. Density, Elasticity, and Fluids. Heat, Temperature, and Thermodynamics. Waves. Electricity and Magnetism. Light and Geometrical Optics. SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING PHYSICS II By Alvin Halpern 1998 / 592 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-025707-8 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS Wave Motion. Sound. Coulomb’s Law and Electric Fields. Electric Potential and Capacitance. Simple Electric Circuits. Magnetism--Effect of the Field. Magnetism--Source of the Field. Magnetic Properties of Matter. Induced EMF. Inductance. Time Varying Electric Circuits. Electromagnetic Waves. Light and Optical Phenomena. Mirrors, Lenses and Optical Instruments. Interference, Diffraction and Polarization. Special Relativity. Particles of Light and Waves of Matter:Introduction to Quantum Physics. Modern Physics: Atomic, Nuclear and Solid-State Physics. 127 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Technical Physics SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING PHYSICS I By Alvin Halpern, City University of New York 1995 / 471 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-025653-8 A Schaum’s Publication NEW CONTENTS Introduction and Mathematical Background. Motion in a Straight Line. Motion in a Plane. Forces and Equilibrium. Newton’s Second Law. Work and Mechanical Energy. Energy, Power and Simple Machines. Impulse and Momentum. Equilibrium for Rigid Bodies. Rotational Motion. Elasticity and Objects under Stress. Simple Harmonic Motion. Fluids at Rest. Fluids in Motion. Temperature and Heat. Thermal Energy Transfer. Gas Laws and Kinetic Theory. Thermodynamics: The First and Second Laws. ENGINEERING PHYSICS By V Rajendran 2008 (July 2008) / 625 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-026103-7 McGraw-Hill India Title CONTENTS 3,000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN PHYSICS By Alvin Halpern 1988 ISBN: 978-0-07-025734-4 A Schaum’s Publication http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=0070257345&ad key=W02003 Solved Problem Series -- These books help readers review and master what they’ve learned by showing them how to solve thousands of relevant problems. Perfect for preparing for graduate or professional exams, these detailed reminders of problem-solving techniques show readers the best strategies for answering even the toughest questions, including the types that appear on typical tests. 1. Elasticity 2. Viscosity 3. Vacuum Technique 4. Acoustics 5. Ultrasonics 6. Non-Destructive Testing 7. Interference 8. Polarisation 9. Photoelasticity 10. Optical and Other Instruments 11. Laser 12. Fibre Optics 13. Crystal Structure 14. Waves and Particles 15. Classification of Solids 16. Electron Theory of Solids 17. Statistics and Band Theory of Solids 18. Transport Properties of Semiconductors 19. Superconducting Materials 20. Magnetic Materials 21. Dielectric Materials 22. Shape Memory Alloys 23. Nonlinear Materials 24. Metallic Glasses 25. Biomaterials 26. Nanomaterials Synthesis 27. Nanodevices Appendices INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 128 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY University Physics International Edition PHYSICS 7th Edition By Paul E Tippens 2007 (Dec 2005) ISBN: 978-0-07-322270-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-110759-4 [IE] ISBN: 978-0-07-110796-9 [IE with OLC] International Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICS FOR ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE http://www.mhhe.com/tippens7e Physics, Seventh Edition is designed for the non-calculus physics course taken by students who are pursuing careers in science or engineering technology. Content is built through extensive use of examples with detailed solutions designed to develop students’ problem-solving skills. CONTENTS MECHANICS 1 Introduction 2 Technical Mathematics 3 Technical Measurements and Vectors. 4 Translational Equilibrium and Friction 5 Torque and Rotational Equilibrium 6 Uniform Acceleration 7 Newton’s Second Law 8 Work, Energy, and Power 9 Impulse and Momentum 10 Uniform Circular Motion. 11 Rotation of Rigid Bodies 12 Simple Machines 13 Elasticity 14 Simple Harmonic Motion 15 Fluids THERMODYNAMICS, MECHANICAL WAVES, AND SOUND 16 Temperature and Expansion 17 Quantity of Heat 18 Transfer of Heat 19 Thermal Properties of Matter 20 Thermodynamics 21 Mechanical Waves 22 Sound ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM, AND OPTICS 23 The Electric Force 24 The Electric Field 25 Electric Potential 26 Capacitance 27 Current and Resistance 28 Direct-Current Circuits 29 Magnetism and the Magnetic Field 30 Forces and Torques in a Magnetic Field 31 Electromagnetic Induction 32 Alternating-Current Circuits 33 Light and Illumination 34 Reflection and Mirrors 35 Refraction 36 Lenses and Optical Instruments 37 Interference, Diffraction, and Polarization MODERN PHYSICS 38 Modern Physics and the Atom 39 Nuclear Physics and the Nucleus INDEX By Michael Browne, University of Idaho 1999 / 452 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-008498-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-124112-0 [IE] A Schaum Professional Publication CONTENTS Measurements and Vectors. Motion in One Dimension. Motion in Two Dimensions. The Laws of Motion. Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newton’s Laws. Work and Energy. Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy. Linear Momentum and Collisions. Rotation of a Rigid Body About a Fixed Axis. Angular Momentum and Torque As a Vector Quantities. Static Equilibrium of a Rigid Body. Oscillatory Motion. The Law of Universal Gravitation. Mechanics of Solids and Fluids. Wave Motion. Sound Waves. Superposition and Standing Waves. Temperature, Thermal Expansion, and Ideal Gases. Heat and the First Law of Thermodynamics. The Kinetic Theory of Gases. Heat Engines, Entropy, and the Second Law of Thermodynmics. Electric Fields. Gauss’ Law. Electric Potential. Capacitance and Dielectrics. Current and Resistance. Direct Current Circuits. Magnetic Fields. Sources of the Magnetic Field. Faraday’s Law. Inductance. Alternating Current Circuits. Electromagnetic Waves. The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics. Geometric Optics. Interference of Light Waves. Diffraction and Polarization. Special Theory of Relativity. Introduction to Quantum Physics. Quantum Mechanics. Atomic Physics. Molecules and Solids. Nuclear Structure. Nuclear Physics Applications and Elementary Particles. 129 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Medical Physics International Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MODERN PHYSICS 2nd Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICS FOR PRE-MED, BIOLOGY AND ALLIED HEALTH STUDENTS By Gautreau 1999 / 338 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-024830-4 By George Hademenos, University of California at Los Angeles 1998 / 256 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-025474-9 CONTENTS A Schaum’s Publication Students of medicine and the life sciences will appreciate the special perspective of this invaluable study guide. It explains how physics principles and concepts apply in these particular fields, including more than 70 drawings and graphs to help students visualize, understand and remember the relationships. The hundreds of problems solved step-by-step also help boost learning and grades by reinforcing the ideas and aiding recall. Modern Physics International Edition CONCEPTS OF MODERN PHYSICS 6th Edition By Arthur Beiser 2003 / 560 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-244848-1 (GOP) ISBN: 978-0-07-123460-3 [IE] CONTENTS 1 Relativity 2 Particle Properties of Waves 3 Waves Properties of Particles 4 Atomic Structure 5 Quantum Mechanics 6 Quantum Theory of the Hydrogen Atom 7 Many-Electron Atoms 8 Molecules 9 Statistical Mechanics 10 The Solid State 11 Nuclear Structure 12 Nuclear Transformations 13 Elementary Particles Appendix Atomic Masses A Schaum’s Publication Part I:The Special Theory Of Relativity. 1 The Gaililean Transformations. 2 The Postulates of Einstien. 3 The Lorentz Coordinates Transformations. 4 Relativistic Length Contraction. 5 Realistic Time Dilation. 6 Relativistic Space-Time Measurements. 7 Relativistic Velosity Transformations. 8 Mass, Energy, and Momentum in Relativity. Part II: The Quantum Theory of Electromagnetic Radiation. 9 Electromagnetic Radioation - Photons. 10 Matter Waves. Part III: Hydrogenlike Atoms. 11 The Bohr Atom. 12 Electron Orbital Motion. 13 Electron Spin. Part IV: Many-Electron Atoms. 14 The Pauli Exclusion Principle. 15 Many-Electron Atoms and the Periodic Table. 16 X-Rays. Part V: Nuclear Physics. 17 Properties of Nuclei. 18 Nuclear Models. 19 The Decay of Unstable Nuclei. 20 Nuclear Reactions. 21 Particle Physics. Part VI: Atomic Systems. 22 Molecules. 23 Kinetic Theory. 24 Distribution Functions. 25 Classical Statistics: The Macwell-Boltzmann Distribution. 27 Quantum-Statistics: Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein Distributions. Solids. Appendix. Index. 130 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Mathematical Physics Electricity & Magnetism International Edition BASIC ELECTRONICS FOR SCIENTISTS 5th Edition By Manes J Brophy, formerly of University of Utah 1990 / 462 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-008147-5 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-100675-0 [IE] SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MATHEMATICS FOR PHYSICS STUDENTS By Robert Steiner, Teachers College at Columbia University and Philip Schmidt, State University of New York-New Paltz 2007(January 2007) / 409 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-146158-0 A Schaum’s Publication Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Physics Students helps you to apply mathematical concepts to your studies and shows you how these concepts operate in physics problems. The book includes both fully solved problems and supplementary practice problems. International Edition ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM Berkeley Physics Course, Volume II, 2nd Edition By Berkeley Physics, University of California -- Berkeley 1985 / 512 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-004908-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-066495-1 [IE] CONTENTS Chapter 1: Electrostatics: Charges and Fields Chapter 2: The Electric Potential Chapter 3: Electric Fields around Conductors Chapter 4: Electric Currents Chapter 5: The Fields of Moving Charges Chapter 6: The Magnetic Field Chapter 7: Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 8: Alternating-Current Circuits Chapter 9: Maxwell’s Equations and Electromagnetic Waves Chapter 10: Electric Fields in Matter Chapter 11: Magnetic Fields in Matter Appendix A: A Short Review of Special Relativity Appendix B: Radiation by an Accelerated Charge Appendix C: Superconductivity Appendix D: Magnetic Resonance Appendix E: Exact Relations among SI and CGS Units Index CONTENTS Part I: Algebra and Geometry Chapter 1: Introduction to Algebra Chapter 2: Functions Chapter 3: Graphs of Functions Chapter 4: Linear Equations Chapter 5: Simultaneous Linear Equations Chapter 6: Quadratic Functions and Equations Chapter 7: Inequalities Chapter 8: The Locus of an Equation Chapter 9: The Straight Line Chapter 10: Families of Straight Lines Chapter 11: The Circle Part II: Pre-Calculus and Elementary Calculus Chapter 12: Rational and Polynomial Functions Chapter 13: Trigonometric Functions Chapter 14: Exponential and Logarithmic Functions Chapter 15: Complex Numbers Chapter 16: The Calculus of Single-Variable Functions: A Mathematical Approach Chapter 17: The Calculus of Single-Variable Functions: A Physics Approach Chapter 18: Vectors Part III: Advanced Topics in Mathematics Chapter 19: Polar, Spherical, and Cylindrical Coordinate Systems Chapter 20: Multivariate Calculus Chapter 21: Elementary Linear Algebra Chapter 22: Vector Calculus: Grad, Div, and Curl Chapter 23: Vector Calculus: Flux and Gauss’ Law Chapter 24: Differential Equations Chapter 25: Elementary Probability Chapter 26: Infinite Series Appendix A: Rectangular Coordinates in Space Appendix B: Units and Dimensions Appendix C: Solving Physics Problems Appendix D: Selected Physics Formulas Appendix E: Selected Physical Constraints Appendix F: Integration by Parts Appendix G: The Greek Alphabet and Prefixes Index 131 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY International Edition DATA REDUCTION AND ERROR ANALYSIS FOR THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES 3rd Edition By Philip Bevington (Deceased) and D. Keith Robinson, Case Western Reserve University 2003 / 336 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-247227-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-119926-1 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/bevington CONTENTS 1 Uncertainties in Measurements 2 Probability Distributions 3 Error Analysis 4 Estimates of Mean and Errors 5 Monte Carlo Techniques 6 Least-Squares Fit to a Straight Line 7 Least-Squares Fit to a Polynomial 8 Least-Squares Fit to an Arbitrary Function 9 Fitting Composite Curves 10 Direct Application of the Maximum-Likelihood Method 11 Testing the Fit Appendix A Numerical Methods Appendix B Matrices Appendix C Graphs and Tables Appendix D Histograms and Graphs Appendix E Computer Routines in Fortran 8 Equilibrium Between Phases or Chemical Species General Equilibrium Conditions Equilibrium Between Phases Systems With Several Components; Chemical Equilibrium 9 Quantum Statistics of Ideal Gases Maxwell-Boltzmann, Bose-Einstein, and Fermi-Dirac Statistics Ideal Gas in The Classical Limit Black-Body Radiation Conduction Electrons in Metals 10 Systems of Interacting Particles Solids Nonideal Classicals Gas Ferromagnetism 11 Magnetism and Low Temperatures 12 Elementary Kinetic Theory of Transport Processes 13 Transport Theory Using The Relaxation Time Approximation 14 Near-Exact Formulation of Transport Theory 15 Irreversible Processes and Fluctuations Transition Probabilities and Master Equation Simple Discussion of Brownian Motion Detailed Analysis of Brownian Motion Calculation of Probability Distributions Fourier Analysis of Random Functions General Discussion of Irreversible Processes Appendices Numerical Constants Bibliography Answers to Selected Problems Index International Edition Quantum Mechanics FUNDAMENTALS OF STATISTICAL AND THERMAL PHYSICS By Frederick Reif, University of California-Berkeley 1965 / 651 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-051800-1 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-085615-8 [IE] CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Statistical Methods Random Walk and Binomial Distribution General Discussion of The Random Walk 2 Statistical Description of Systems of Particles Statistical Formulation of The Mechanical Problem Interaction Between Macroscopic Systems 3 Statistical Thermodynamics Irreversibility and The Attainment of Equilibrium Thermal Interaction Between Macroscopic Systems General Interaction Between Macroscopic Systems Summary of Fundamental Results 4 Macroscopic Parameters and Their Measurement 5 Simple Applications of Macroscopic Thermodynamics Properties of Ideal Gases General Relations for A Homogeneous Substance Free Expansion and Throttling Processes Heat Engines and Refrigerators 6 Basic Methods and Results of Statistical Mechanics Ensembles Representative of Situations of Physical Interest Approximation Methods Generalizations and Alternative Approaches 7 Simple Applications of Statistical Mechanics General Method of Approach Ideal Monatomic Gas The Equipartition Theorem Paramagnetism Kinetic Theory of Dilute Gases in Equilibrium SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF QUANTUM MECHANICS By Elyahu Zaarur, Reuven Pnini and Yoav Peleg of formerly of the Technion Institute of Technology, Haifa, Israel 1998 / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-054018-7 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS Introduction. Mathematical Background. Schrodinger Equation and Applications. Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. Harmonic Oscillator. Angular Momentum. Spin. Hydrogen-Like Atoms. Particle Motion in an Electromagnetic Field. Solution Methods in Quantum Mechanics. Part A: Solutions Methods in Quantum Mechanics. Part B: Numerical Methods in Quantum Mechanics. Dentical Particles. Addition of Angular Momenta. Scattering Theory. Semiclassical Treatment of Radiation. 132 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY International Edition QUANTUM MECHANICS 3rd Edition By Leonard I Schiff 1968 / 432 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-055287-6 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-085643-1 [IE] Optics NEW OPTICS 4th Edition Part 3 Interference 13. Superposition of Waves 14. Two Beam Interference by Division of Wavefront 15. Interference by Division of Amplitude 16. Multiple Beam Interferometry 17. Coherence Part 4 Diffraction 18. Fraunhofer Diffraction: I 19. Fraunhofer Diffraction: II and Fourier Optics 20. Fresnel Diffraction 21. Holography Part 5 Electromagnetic Character of Light 22. Polarization and Double Refraction 23. Electromagnetic Waves 24. Reflection and Refraction of Electromagnetic Waves Part 6 Photons 25. The Particle Nature of Radiation Part 7 Lasers & Fiber Optics 26. Lasers: An Introduction 27. Fiber Optics I: Basic Concepts and Ray Optics Considerations 28. Fiber Optics II: Basic Waveguide Theory and Concept of Modes 29. Fiber Optics III: Single Mode Fibers Appendix A: Gamma Functions and Integrals Involving Gaussian Functions Appendix B: Evaluation of the Integral Appendix C: Diffraction of a Gaussian Beam Appendix D: TE and TM Modes in Planar Waveguides By Ajoy Ghatak, Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi, India International Edition 2008 (July 2008) / 532 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-026215-7 McGraw-Hill India Title www.mhhe.com/ghatak/optics4e NEW TO THIS EDITION New chapter on History of Optics. New chapters on Dirac Delta Function and Fourier Transform, Fourier Optics. Enhanced coverage on Fiber Optics, Fraunhofer Diffraction and light. Improved visuals—Colored images pertaining to OPTICS have been included. Pedagogy: Problems: 280 Solved Examples: 118 Illustrations: 605 (with 42 colored images) CONTENTS 1. History of Optics 2. What is Light? Part 1 Geometrical Optics 3. Fermat’s Principle and Its Applications 4. Refraction and Reflection by Spherical Surfaces 5. The Matrix Method in Paraxial Optics 6. Aberrations Part 2 Vibrations and Waves 7. Simple Harmonic Motion, Forced Vibrations and Origin of Refractive Index 8. Fourier Series and Applications 9. The Dirac Delta Function and Fourier Transforms 10. Group Velocity and Pulse Dispersion 11. Wave Propagation and the Wave Equation 12. Huygens’ Principle and Its Applications FUNDAMENTALS OF OPTICS 4th Edition By Francis A Jenkins, deceased and Harvey E White, University of California, Berkeley 1976 / 746 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-032330-8 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-085346-1 [IE] CONTENTS Preface Part 1 Geometrical Optics 1 Properties of Light 2 Plane Surfaces and Prisms 3 Spherical Surfaces 4 Thin Lenses 5 Thick Lenses 6 Spherical Mirrors 7 The Effects of Stops 8 Ray Tracing 9 Lens Aberrations 10 Optical Instruments Part 2 Wave Optics 11 Vibrations and Waves 12 The Superposition of Waves 13 Interference of Two Beams of Light 14 Interference Involving Multiple Reflections 15 Fraunhofer Diffraction by a Single Opening 16 The Double Slit 17 The Diffraction Grating 18 Fresnel Diffraction 19 The Speed of Light 20 The Electromagnetic Character of Light 21 Sources of Light and Their Spectra 22 Absorption and Scattering 23 Dispersion 24 The Polarization of Light 25 Reflection 26 Double Refraction 133 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY Introduction to Astronomy 27 Interference of Polarized Light 28 Optical Activity and Modern Wave Optics Part 3 Quantum Optics 29 Light Quanta and Their Origin 30 Lasers 31 Holography 32 Magneto-Optics and Electro-Optics 33 The Dual Nature of Light Appendixes I The Physical Constants II Electron Subshells III Refractive Indices and Dispersions for Optical Glasses IV Refractive Indices and Dispersions for Optical Crystals V The Most Intense Fraunhofer Lines VI Abbreviated Number System VII Significant Figures NEW PATHWAYS TO ASTRONOMY with Starry Nights Pro DVD, Version 5.0 2nd Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF OPTICS By Eugene Hecht, Adelphi University 1974 / 256 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-027730-4 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS Wave Motion. Electromagnetic Waves and Photons. Reflection and Transmission. Geometrical Optics. Polarization. Interference and Coherence. Diffraction. Fourier Optics By Stephen E Schneider and Thomas T Arny of University of Mass-Amherst 2009 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-726311-9 http://www.mhhe.com/schneider Pathways to Astronomy breaks down introductory astronomy into its component parts. The huge and fascinating field of astronomy is divided into 84 units. These units are woven together to flow naturally for the person who wants to read the text like a book, but it is also possible to assign them in different orders, or skip certain units altogether. Professors can customize the units to fit their course needs. They can select individual units for exploration in lecture while assigning easier units for self-study, or they can cover all the units in full depth in a content-rich course. With the short length of units, students can easily digest the material covered in an individual unit before moving onto the next unit. Pathways to Astronomy offers the most complete technology media support package available. That technology media package includes: Starry Night Planetarium Software; ARIS (text web site providing a complete online electronic homework and course management system); 23 Interactives (on ARIS); Animations (on ARIS). Electronic Media Integration has been incorporated throughout the text by the use of icons to indicate where additional understanding can be gained through an animation or interactive. NEW TO THIS EDITION Latest Scientific Information and photos! Added and revised content and figures: information was updated throughout the book for clarity and to include some of the most interesting new images of astronomical events available. The information on Pluto and the definition of planets has been updated, along with the most recent data on space exploration, space probes, and new probes. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia Added and revised “Review Questions” and “Problems” section of every unit. There are now about twice as many Review Questions, designed for a thorough review of each Unit, and they are organized in an order that reflects the Unit content. With input from five different researchers and educators, we more than doubled the number of quantitative Problems, providing a wider range of topics and levels addressed in every Unit. End-of-Unit Material includes over 250 Review Questions, over 530 Problems, and over 250 Test Yourself Questions. A new looking up piece for the south polar region has been added for a total of 9 boxes. “Looking Up” boxes are designed to show students how some of the astronomical objects discussed in the text connect with the real sky that they can see overhead at night. These full-page art pieces show where a variety of frequently mentioned and important astronomical objects can be seen. Each feature presents a photograph of one or more constellations in which nebulas, star clusters, and so forth are identified and illustrated. 134 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY New seasonal star charts (spring, summer, fall, winter) have been added to the text. Throughout the text unique symbols for each physical quantity and used consistently. Where tradition dictates that the same letter be used for different quantities (such as acceleration and semi-major axis), we have used distinctive fonts. A new symbol glossary added in the appendix will help students review the meaning of symbols in formulas. CONTENTS Preface Looking Up Illustrations PART I THE COSMIC LANDSCAPE Unit 1 Our Planetary Neighborhood Unit 2 Beyond the Solar System Unit 3 Astronomical Numbers Unit 4 Foundations of Astronomy Unit 5 The Night Sky Unit 6 The Year Unit 7 The Time of Day Unit 8 Lunar Cycles Unit 9 Calendars Unit 10 Geometry of the Earth, Moon, and Sun Unit 11 Planets: The Wandering Stars Unit 12 The Beginnings of Modern Astronomy Unit 13 Observing the Sky PART II PROBING MATTER, LIGHT, AND THEIR INTERACTION Unit 14 Astronomical Motion: Inertia, Mass, and Force Unit 15 Force, Acceleration, and Interaction Unit 16 The Universal Law of Gravity Unit 17 Measuring a Body’s Mass Using Orbital Motion Unit 18 Orbital and Escape Velocities Unit 19 Tides Unit 20 Conservation Laws Unit 21 Light, Matter, and Energy Unit 22 The Electromagnetic Spectrum Unit 23 Thermal Radiation Unit 24 Atomic Spectra: Identifying Atoms by Their Light Unit 25 The Doppler Shift Unit 26 Detecting Light Unit 27 Collecting Light Unit 28 Focusing Light Unit 29 Telescope Resolution Unit 30 The Earth’s Atmosphere and Space Observatories Unit 31 Amateur Astronomy PART III THE SOLAR SYSTEM Unit 32 The Structure of the Solar System Unit 33 The Origin of the Solar System Unit 34 Other Planetary Systems Unit 35 The Earth as a Terrestrial Planet Unit 36 Earth’s Atmosphere and Hydrosphere Unit 37 Our Moon Unit 38 Mercury Unit 39 Venus Unit 40 Mars Unit 41 Asteroids Unit 42 Comparative Planetology Unit 43 Jupiter and Saturn Unit 44 Uranus and Neptune Unit 45 Satellite Systems and Rings Unit 46 Ice Worlds, Pluto, and Beyond Unit 47 Comets Unit 48 Impacts on Earth PART IV STARS AND STELLAR EVOLUTION Unit 49 The Sun, Our Star Unit 50 The Sun’s Source of Power Unit 51 Solar Activity Unit 52 Surveying the Stars Unit 53 Special Relativity Unit 54 Light and Distance Unit 55 The Temperatures and Compositions of Stars Unit 56 The Masses of Orbiting Stars Unit 57 The Sizes of Stars Unit 58 The H-R Diagram Unit 59 Overview of Stellar Evolution Unit 60 Star Formation Unit 61 Main-Sequence Stars Unit 62 Giant Stars Unit 63 Variable Stars Unit 64 Mass Loss and Death of Low-Mass Stars Unit 65 Exploding White Dwarfs Unit 66 Old Age and Death of Massive Stars Unit 67 Neutron Stars Unit 68 Black Holes Unit 69 Star Clusters PART V GALAXIES AND THE UNIVERSE Unit 70 Discovering the Milky Way Unit 71 Stars of the Milky Way Unit 72 Gas and Dust in the Milky Way Unit 73 Mass and Motions in the Milky Way Unit 74 A Universe of Galaxies Unit 75 Types of Galaxies Unit 76 Galaxy Clustering Unit 77 Active Galactic Nuclei Unit 78 Dark Matter Unit 79 Cosmology Unit 80 The Edges of the Universe Unit 81 The Beginnings of the Universe Unit 82 The Fate of the Universe Unit 83 Astrobiology Unit 84 The Search for Life Elsewhere Glossary Answers to Test Yourself Questions Credits Index International Edition EXPLORATIONS: AN INTRODUCTION TO ASTRONOMY with Starry Night Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 5th Edition By Thomas T Arny, University of Mass-Amherst 2008 (September 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-334722-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-334723-3 (Case Bound) ISBN: 978-0-07-128438-7 [IE] www.mhhe.com/arny Arny: Explorations-An Introduction to Astronomy, 5th edition, is built on the foundation of its well known writing style, accuracy, and emphasis on current information. This new edition continues to offer the most complete technology/new media support package available. That technology/new media package includes: 23 Interactives (located on the text ARIS Presentation center); ARIS website (that allows instructors to take their course to the web if they choose); and Starry Night Planetarium Software (packaged free with each new text). CONTENTS Preface Preview: The Cosmic Landscape Part 1 The Night Sky 1 History of Astronomy Essay 1 Backyard Astronomy Part 2 Atoms, Forces, Light, and How We Learn About the Universe 2 Gravity and Motion 3 Light and Atoms 4 Telescopes Part 3 The Earth and Moon 135 PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY 20 White Dwarfs, Neutron Stars, and Black Holes 21 Binary Star Systems Part 4 Journey to the Cosmic Frontier 22 The Milky Way 23 Galaxies 24 Quasars and Other Active Galaxies 25 Galaxy Clusters and the Structure of the Universe 26 Cosmology Part 5 Journey in Search of Life 27 Life in the Universe Appendixes Glossary References Credits Index 5 The Earth Essay 2 Keeping Time 6 The Moon Part 4 The Solar System 7 Survey of the Solar System 8 The Terrestrial Planets 9 The Outer Planets 10 Meteors, Asteroids, and Comets Part 5 Stars 11 The Sun, Our Star 12 Measuring the Properties of Stars 13 Stellar Evolution 14 Stellar Remnants: White Dwarfs, Neutron Stars, and Black Holes Part 6 The Milky Way and Other Galaxies 15 The Milky Way Galaxy 16 Galaxies 17 Cosmology Essay 3 Life in the Universe Essay 4 Space Travel and Special Relativity Answers to “Test Yourself” Appendix Glossary Index SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ASTRONOMY By Starcey Palen, University of Washington 2002 / 304 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-136436-2 A Schaum’s Publication Providing a basic introduction to a beginning astronomy course, with an emphasis on problem-solving methods ordinarily taught “on the fly” or in ad-hoc tutorials, this essential guide provides a focused, comprehensive presentation of basic astronomical problem-solving techniques. Readers learn by example with the help of more than 200 detailed problems supplemented with over 100 detailed charts and graphs. ASTRONOMY: JOURNEY TO THE COSMIC FRONTIER with Starry Night Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 5th Edition By John D Fix, University of Alabama--Huntsville 2008 (September 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-334721-9 www.mhhe.com/fix Astronomy: Journey to the Cosmic Frontier, 5th edition, provides enough content and background in astronomy so the student will be able to follow current developments in astronomy years after they complete the course. The historical development of astronomy is emphasized to show that astronomy, like other sciences, advances through the efforts of many scientists, and to show how present ideas have been developed. CONTENTS Foreword Preface Guided Tour Part 1 The Journey Begins 1 Journey’s Start 2 Patterns in the Sky 3 Ancient Astronomy 4 Renaissance Astronomy 5 Gravity and Motion 6 Light and Telescopes Part 2 Journey Through the Solar System 7 Overview of the Solar System 8 The Earth 9 The Moon 10 Mercury and Venus 11 Mars 12 Jupiter and Saturn 13 The Outer Planets 14 Satellites 15 Solar System Debris Part 3 Journey to the Stars 16 Basic Properties of Stars 17 The Sun 18 The Formation of Stars and Planets 19 The Evolution of Stars INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 136 137 CHEMISTRY Allied Health/Nursing Chemistry (General, Organic and Biochemistry) - Lab Manuals .............................................................................................. 144 - Supplements ..............................................................................................144 - Textbooks ................................................................................................. 142 Analytical Chemistry ........................................................................................ 157 Biochemistry -1 Semester - Textbooks .............................................................151 General Chemistry - Lab .............................................................................................................150 - Multimedia ..................................................................................................151 - Supplements ..............................................................................................149 - Textbooks ...................................................................................................145 Liberal Arts Chemistry (Non Science Majors) - Textbooks .............................. 139 Organic Chemistry - 1 Semester - Textbooks ...................................................152 Organic Chemistry - 2 Semester - Multimedia ..................................................................................................155 - Supplements ..............................................................................................154 - Textbooks .................................................................................................. 153 Physical Chemistry - Lab .............................................................................................................156 - Supplements ..............................................................................................157 - Textbooks ................................................................................................. 156 Prep/Basic Chemistry - Textbooks ................................................................................................. 140 NEW TITLES CHEMISTRY 2010 Author ISBN-13 A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry, 2e Bauer 9780077274306 140 Chemistry, 10e Chang 9780077274313 145 Principles of General Chemistry, 2e Silberberg 9780077274320 146 General, Organic & Biological Chemistry Smith 9780077274290 142 2009 Author ISBN-13 Chemistry in Context, 6e American Chemical 9780077221348 139 9780073048772 139 Page CHEMISTRY Page Society Laboratory Manual to accompany Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemistry to Society, 6e American Chemical Society Chemistry Burdge 9780077221324 146 Cooperative Chemistry Lab Manual, 4e Cooper 9780073050232 150 Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 8e Garland 9780072828429 156 University Chemistry Laird 9780077221331 147 Physical Chemistry, 6e Levine 9780072538625 156 Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 5e Silberberg 9780077216504 148 138 CHEMISTRY Liberal Arts Chemistry (Non Science Majors) NEW Textbooks LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY CHEMISTRY IN CONTEXT Applying Chemistry to Society, 6th Edition By American Chemical Society NEW International Edition 2009 (January 2008) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-304877-2 CHEMISTRY IN CONTEXT 6th Edition For those whose course including a laboratory component, a Laboratory Manual, compiled and edited by Gail A. Steehler (Roanoke College), is available for the 6th edition. The experiments use microscale equipment (wellplates and Beral-type pipets) and common materials. Project-type and cooperative/collaborative laboratory experiments are included. New experiments are on the ozone and biodiesel. Additional experiments are available on the Online Learning Center, as is the instructor’s guide. By American Chemical Society CONTENTS 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722134-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-128755-5 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/cic Following in the tradition of the first five editions, the goal of this market leading textbook, Chemistry in Context, fifth edition, is to establish chemical principles on a need-to-know basis within a contextual framework of significant social, political, economic and ethical issues. The non traditional approach of Chemistry in Context reflect today’s technological issues and the chemistry principles imbedded within them. Global warming, alternate fuels, nutrition, and genetic engineering are examples of issues that are covered in CIC. NEW TO THIS EDITION Material reflects that most up-to-date information available. Every chapter has a figure that “comes alive” through interactivity guiding the student through a learning process. This feature is on the Online Learning Center in the Student Center. CONTENTS 1 The Air We Breathe 2 Protecting the Ozone Layer 3 The Chemistry of Global Warming 4 Energy, Chemistry, and Society 5 The Water We Drink 6 Neutralizing the Threat of Acid Rain 7 The Fires of Nuclear Fission 8 Energy from Electron Transfer 9 The World of Polymers and Plastics 10 Manipulating Molecules and Designing Drugs 11 Nutrition: Food for Thought 12 Genetic Engineering and the Molecules of Life Appendixes Appendix 1: Measure for Measure--Conversion Factors and Constants Appendix 2: The Power of Exponents Appendix 3: Clearing the Logjam Appendix 4: Answers to Your Turn Questions Not Answered in the Text Appendix 5: Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Questions 1 What Am I Breathing? Preparation and Properties of O2 and CO2 1 2 Is it Pure or a Mixture? Chromatographic Study of Felt-Tip Pen Inks 9 3 Can I Spot a Trend? A Graphic Experience 13 4 What Protects Us from Ultraviolet Light? 23 5 Visibly Delighted: How Do Colored Solutions Interact with Light? 27 6 What Does a Molecule Look Like? Bonds, Molecular Models, and Molecular Shapes 37 7 How Can We Measure the Mass of a Molecule? Weighing Gases To Find Molar Masses 43 8 Chemical Moles: Soda to Table Salt. How Do Chemical Equations Connect Compounds? 51 9 Hot Stuff: An Energy Conservation Problem. Can I Measure What I Can’t See? 57 10 Which Fuels Provide the Most Heat? Comparison of the Energy Content of Fuels 59 11 Can Waste Oil be Turned into a Fuel? Biodiesel: Preparation and Properties 67 12 A Conductivity Detector for Ions. Can We Build Our Own Instruments? 77 13 How Much Acid is in Food? Analysis of Vinegar 85 14 What Makes Water Hard? Measurement of Water Hardness 93 15 How Does Human Activity Affect Water Purity? Measurement of Chloride in River Water 101 16 What’s in My Bottled Water? 109 17 Does Acid Reign? Reactions of Acids with Common Substances 117 18 Which Common Materials are Acids or Bases? 125 19 Does Acid Rain Fall in my Neighborhood? 133 20 Solubilities: An Investigation. How Do I Design My Own Lab Procedure? 139 21 Measurement of Radon in Air. Am I Breathing Radioactive Particles? 141 22 Can We Get Electricity from Chemical Reactions? 149 23 How Do Polymer Properties Connect to Structure? 157 24 Why Do Plastics Get Sorted for Recycling? Properties of Common Plastics 165 25 What Drugs are in an Analgesic Tablet? Identification by Thin-Layer Chromatography 171 26 How is Aspirin Made? 179 27 How Much Fat Is in Potato Chips and Hot Dogs? 189 139 CHEMISTRY 28 How Much Sugar Is in Soft Drinks and Fruit Juices? 197 29 How Much Vitamin C is in Juice and Vitamin Tablets? 205 30 How Can We Isolate DNA? 213 Performance-Based Assessment Activities 217 SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING CHEMISTRY 3rd Edition By David Goldberg, University of Illinois – Urbana – Champaign 2005 (Dec 2004) / 384 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-144780-5 A Schaum’s Publication This clear and complete guide to the fundamentals of chemistry features course material in a succinct outline form, together with hundreds of detailed, fully solved problems. A perfect companion to most standard texts, this third edition has been updated to include the latest pedagogic approaches; more than 670 fully worked problems of varying difficulty, designed to lead you safely through the pitfalls of the course; and hundreds more practice problems. Electronic Structure of the Atom. Bonding. Bonding Theory. Organic Molecules. Chemical Equations. Stoichiometry. Gases. Advanced Gas Concepts. Solids and Liquids. Oxidation and Reduction. Other Concentration Units. Properties of Solutions. Thermodynamics. Chemical Kinetics. Equilibrium. Acids and Bases. Heterogeneous and Other Equilibria. Electochemistry. Nuclear and Radiochemistry. Nonmetals. Metals and Metallurgy. Coordination compounds. Prep/Basic Chemistry HOW TO SOLVE WORD PROBLEMS IN CHEMISTRY By David E. Goldberg, Brooklyn College 2001 / 231 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-136302-0 Textbooks A Schaum’s Publication http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=0071363025&ad key=W02003 CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction. Chapter 2: Measurement. Chapter 3: Classical Laws of Chemical Combination. Chapter 4: Formula Calculations. Chapter 5: Stoichiometry. Chapter 6: Concentration Calculations. Chapter 7: Gas Laws. Chapter 8: Thermochemistry. Chapter 9: Electrochemistry. Chapter 10: Equilibrium. Chapter 11: Colligative Properties. Chapter 12: Thermodynamics. Chapter 13: Miscellaneous Problems. List of Important Equations. 3,000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN CHEMISTRY By David E. Goldberg, Brooklyn College 1988 / 624 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-023684-4 A Schaum’s Publication http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=0070236844&ad key=W02003 CONTENTS Measurement. Structure of Matter. Periodic Table. Chemical Formulas. Modern Structure of the Atom. NEW International Edition A CONCEPTUAL INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY 2nd Edition By Rich Bauer, James Birk and Pamela S Marks of Arizona State University-Tempe 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727430-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-017262-3 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/bauer2e A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry, 2e by Bauer/Birk/Marks offers today’s student a fresh perspective to the introduction of chemistry. This new textbook offers a conceptual approach to chemistry by starting first with macroscopic phenomena, and then presenting the underlying microscopic detail. Each chapter opens with a real-life scenario that helps students connect abstract chemical concepts to their own lives. The math found in A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry, 2e is introduced on a need-to-know basis, with “Math Toolboxes” in select chapters to help support the math skills required in that chapter. NEW TO THIS EDITION All new Chapter 17, Biochemistry – In response to many faculty who like the approach of this textbook, but also teach Biochemistry, we added a completely new chapter on Biochemistry. The chapter 140 CHEMISTRY discusses the four classes of biomolecules; proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, and lipids. International Edition Math Toolboxes have been reworked, expanded, and now include accompanying end-of-chapter problems. To help students easily reference Math toolboxes, toolbox icons have been added to the text margin which will point students to the appropriate review material. The authors believe that the best approach to incorporating math involves development of associated math on an as-needed basis with emphasis on concepts that problems are trying to illustrate. This text integrates need-to-know mathematical ideas that are important to chemists into conceptual discussions. Thorough math reviews are provided in math toolboxes that are referenced within appropriate sections of the text and placed at the end of the relevant chapter. New and Expanded Applications – Because we know how important it is for students to apply chemistry to their world, we have added or expanded, especially medical and environmentally related applications throughout the text, marginal notes, worked examples and end-of-chapter problems. New and Revised End-of-Chapter Problems. We think it is important to keep problems fresh and up-to-date, so we have added more than 200 new problems and more than 100 revised problems to this edition. CONTENTS 1 Matter and Energy 2 Atoms, Ions, and the Periodic Table 3 Chemical Compounds 4 Chemical Composition 5 Chemical Reactions and Equations 6 Quantities in Chemical Reactions 7 Electron Structure of the Atom 8 Chemical Bonding 9 The Gaseous State 10 The Liquid and Solid States 11 Solutions 12 Reaction Rates and Chemical Equilibrium 13 Acids and Bases 14 Oxidation-Reduction Reactions 15 Nuclear Chemistry 16 Organic Chemistry 17 Biochemistry Appendix A Useful Reference Information Appendix B Toolboxes Appendix C Answers to Practice Problems Appendix D Answers to Selected Questions and Problems FUNDAMENTALS OF CHEMISTRY 5th Edition By David Goldberg, Brooklyn College 2007 (May 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-322104-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-110662-7 [IE - text only] ISBN: 978-0-07-110842-3 [IE with ARIS Card] http://www.mhhe.com/goldberg Designed for the one-semester preparatory chemistry course, the new, fifth edition of Fundamentals of Chemistry provides students with a solid foundation in problem solving for all the topic areas covered in a standard general chemistry course. The author not only provides a clear consistent methodology to help students develop conceptual and quantitative problem-solving skills, but also engages students by using analogies that relate chemistry to everyday life. Students who need help with mathematical manipulations, as well as reading and writing scientific material, will find Goldberg’s text an excellent learning tool. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Basic Concepts Chapter 2: Measurement Chapter 3: Atoms and Atomic Masses Chapter 4: Electronic Configuration of the Atom Chapter 5: Chemical Bonding Chapter 6: Nomenclature Chapter 7: Formula Calculations Chapter 8: Chemical Reactions Chapter 9: Net Ionic Equations Chapter 10: Stoichiometry Chapter 11: Molarity Chapter 12: Gases Chapter 13: Atomic and Molecular Properties Chapter 14: Solids and Liquids, Energies of Physical and Chemical Changes Chapter 15: Solutions Chapter 16: Oxidation Numbers Chapter 17: Chemical Equilibrium Chapter 18: Acid-Base Theory Chapter 19: Organic Chemistry Chapter 20: Nuclear Reactions INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 141 CHEMISTRY Supplements Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject Deliver expert help from teachers who are authorities in their fields Perfect for last-minute test preparation So small and light that they fit in a backpack! SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COLLEGE CHEMISTRY 9th Edition By Jerome Rosenberg and Lawrence M Epstein of University of Pittsburgh and Peter Krieger, Palm Beach CC Eissey Campus 2008 (June 2007) / 392 pages ISBN: 978- 0-07-147670-6 Allied Health/Nursing Chemistry (General,Organic and Biochemistry) A Schaum’s Publication This new edition is geared for the latest developments in your subject, and covers the hottest specialties in chemistry such as forensics and materials science. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Quantities and Units Chapter 2: Atomic and Molecular Mass; Molar Mass Chapter 3: Formulas and Composition Calculations Chapter 4: Calculations from Chemical Equations Chapter 5: Measurement of Gas Chapter 6: The Ideal Gas Law and Kinetic Theory Chapter 7: Thermochemistry Chapter 8: Atomic Structure and the Periodic Law Chapter 9: Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure Chapter 10: Solids and Liquids Chapter 11: Oxidation-Reduction Chapter 12: Concentration of Solutions Chapter 13: Reactions Involving Standard Solutions Chapter 14: Properties of Solutions Chapter 15: Organic Chemistry and Biochemistry Chapter 16: Thermodynamics and Chemical Equilibrium Chapter 17: Acids and Bases Chapter 18: Complex Ions; Precipitates Chapter 19: Electrochemistry Chapter 20: Rates of Reactions Chapter 21: Nuclear Processes Appendix A: Exponents Appendix B: Significant Figures Index Table of Atomic Masses Nuclidic Masses of Selected Radionuclides Periodic Table of the Elements Textbooks NEW International Edition GENERAL, ORGANIC & BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY By Janice Gorzynski Smith, University of HawaiiManoa 2010 (February 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727429-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-016482-6 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/smithGOB This new GOB textbook is written with the same student-focused, direct writing style that has been so successful in the Smith: Organic Chemistry text. Smith writes with a bulleted approach that delivers need-to-know information in a succinct style for today’s students. Armed with an excellent illustration program full of macro-to-micro art, as well as many applications to biological, medical, consumer, and environmental topics, this book is a powerhouse of learning for students. SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE BEGINNING CHEMISTRY By David E. Goldberg, Brooklyn College 2004 (Oct 2003) / 144 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-142239-0 FEATURES Text written in a succinct writing style, utilizing bulleted points for emphasis of important information. A Schaum’s Publication What could be better than the bestselling Schaum’s Outline series? For students looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, it would have to be Schaum’s Easy Outline series. Every book in this series is a pared-down, simplified, and tightly focused version of its predecessor. With an emphasis on clarity and brevity, each new title features a streamlined and updated format and the absolute essence of the subject, presented in a concise and readily understandable form. Art program provides macro-to-micro illustrations throughout. Common applications of chemistry to everyday life are found in margin-placed Health Notes, Consumer Notes, and Environmental Notes, as well as “Focus on Health and Medicine,” “Focus on the Environment,” and “Focus on the Human Body” sections of the text. Graphic elements such as sidebars, reader-alert icons, and boxed highlights stress selected points from the text, illuminate keys to learning, and give students quick pointers to the essentials. Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers turned off by dense text Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the material across fast “How To” boxes provide students with detailed instructions on how to work through key processes. End-of-chapter sections include study aids including key reactions, key terms, and key concepts, which are tied to the chapter goals at the start of the chapter. 142 Bulleted lists of important concepts. Instead of long paragraphs CHEMISTRY of content, the author breaks down the key concepts into bulleted lists. 9. The Nucleus and Radioactivity 10. An Introduction to Organic Chemistry: The Saturated Hydrocarbons 11. The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons: Alkenes, Alkynes, and Aromatics 12. Oxygen- and Sulfur Containing Organic Compounds 13. Carboxylic Acids, Esters, Amines, and Amides 14. Carbohydrates 15. Lipids and their Functions in Biochemical Systems 16. Protein Structure and Enzymes 17. Introduction to Molecular Genetics 18. Carbohydrate Metabolism 19. Fatty Acid and Amino Acid Metabolism Stepped out problem solving (including ‘Analysis and Solution’), followed by related problems that contain answers in the textbook’s Appendix. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Matter and Measurement Chapter 2: Atoms and the Periodic Table Chapter 3: Ionic Compounds Chapter 4: Covalent Compounds Chapter 5: Chemical Reactions Chapter 6: Energy Changes, Reaction Rates, and Equilibrium Chapter 7: Gases, Liquids, and Solids Chapter 8: Solutions Chapter 9: Acids and Bases Chapter 10: Nuclear Chemistry Chapter 11: Introduction to Organic Molecules and Functional Groups Chapter 12: Alkanes Chapter 13: Unsaturated Hydrocarbons Chapter 14: Organic Compounds that Contain Oxygen, Halogen, or Sulfur Chapter 15: The Three-Dimensional Shape of Molecules Chapter 16: Aldehydes and Ketones Chapter 17: Carboxylic Acids, Esters, and Amides Chapter 18: Amines and Neurotransmitters Chapter 19: Lipids Chapter 20: Carbohydrates Chapter 21: Amino Acids, Proteins, and Enzymes Chapter 22: Nucleic Acids and Protein Synthesis Chapter 23: Digestion and the Conversion of Food into Energy Chapter 24: Carbohydrate, Lipid, and Protein Metabolism International Edition GENERAL, ORGANIC & BIOCHEMISTRY 6th Edition By Katherine Denniston and Joseph Topping, Robert Caret, San Jose State University 2008 (November 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-722141-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-128782-1 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/denniston The fifth edition of General, Organic, and Biochemistry is designed to help undergraduate health-related majors, and students of all other majors, understand key concepts and appreciate the significant connections between chemistry, health, disease, and the treatment of disease. This text continues to strike a balance between theoretical and practical chemistry, while emphasizing material that is unique to health-related studies. The text has been written at a level intended for students whose professional goals do not include a mastery of chemistry, but for whom an understanding of the principles and practice of chemistry is a necessity. Designed for the one- or two-semester course, this text has an easy-to-follow problem-solving pedagogy, vivid illustrations, and engaging applications. International Edition FOUNDATIONS OF GENERAL, ORGANIC AND BIOCHEMISTRY CONTENTS By Katherine Denniston and Joseph Topping of Towson University 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331183-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-110227-8 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/denniston This new Foundations of General, Organic, and Biochemistry is designed to help undergraduate health-related majors, and students of all other majors, understand key concepts and appreciate the significant connections between chemistry, health, disease, and the treatment of disease. Foundations, just like its parent text, strikes a balance between theoretical and practical chemistry, while emphasizing material that is unique to health-related studies. Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry is designed for the one semester allied health chemistry course. This text has an easy-to-follow problem-solving approach, vivid illustrations, and engaging applications including timely “Chemistry at the Crime Scene” applications with “For Further Understanding” questions that follow to help the students think through what they just read. The art program, engaging and thought provoking questions, problems, and discussion topics, is what will make this book appealing to students and instructors alike. CONTENTS 1. Chemistry: Methods and Measurement 2. The Structure of the Atom and the Periodic Table 3. Structure and Properties of Ionic and Covalent Compounds 4. Calculations and the Chemical Equation 5. Energy, Rate, and Equilibrium 6. States of Matter: Gases, Liquids, and Solids 7. Solutions 8. Acids and Bases Part 1 General Chemistry 1 Chemistry: Methods and Measurement 2 The Structure of the Atom and the Periodic Table 3 Structure and Properties of Ionic and Covalent Compounds 4 Calculations and the Chemical Equation 5 States of Matter: Gases, Liquids, and Solids 6 Solutions 7 Energy, Rate, and Equilibrium 8 Acids and Bases and Oxidation-Reduction 9 The Nucleus, Radioactivity, and Nuclear Medicine Part 2 Organic Chemistry 10 An Introduction to Organic Chemistry: The Saturated Hydrocarbons 11 The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons: Alkenes, Alkynes, and Aromatics 12 Alcohols, Phenols, Thiols, and Ethers 13 Aldehydes and Ketones 14 Carboxylic Acids and Carboxylic Acid Derivatives 15 Amines and Amides Part 3 Biochemistry 16 Carbohydrates 17 Lipids and Their Functions in Biochemical Systems 18 Protein Structure and Function 19 Enzymes 20 Introduction to Molecular Genetics 21 Carbohydrate Metabolism 22 Aerobic Respiration and Energy Production 23 Fatty Acid Metabolism 143 CHEMISTRY Lab Manuals A LABORATORY FOR GENERAL, ORGANIC & BIOCHEMISTRY 6th Edition By Charles H Henrickson, Larry C Byrd and Norman W Hunter of Western Kentucky University 2008 (November 2007) / 448 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-322683-5 A Laboratory Manual for General, Organic and Biochemistry 6e, by Charles H. Henrickson, Larry C. Byrd, and Norman W. Hunter of Western Kentucky University, offers clear and concise laboratory experiments that reinforce students’ understanding of concepts. Prelaboratory exercises, questions, and report sheets are coordinated with each experiment to ensure active student involvement and comprehension. Laboratory Resource Guide: Written by Charles H. Henrickson, Larry C. Byrd, and Norman W. Hunter of Western Kentucky University, this helpful prep guide contains the hints that the authors have learned over the years to ensure students’ success in the laboratory. This Resource Guide is available through the ARIS course website for this text. c. Experiment 20 Carboxylic Acids and Esters – 275 d. Experiment 21 Alcohols – 285 e. Experiment 22 Aldehydes and Ketones – 299 f. Experiment 23 The Synthesis of Aspirin – 315 i. Calculating Percent Yield – 319 g. Experiment 24 The Properties and Preparation of Soap – 329 IX. Biochemistry – 339 a. Experiment 25 The Detection of Fats, Proteins, and Carbohydrates in Foods – 339 b. Experiment 26 The Characterization of Carbohydrates – 355 c. Experiment 27 Enzyme Action – 371 d. Experiment 28 Analysis of Proteins and Amino Acids by Chromatography – 387 e. Experiment 29 Digestion – 397 f. Experiment 30 Extraction of DNA – 407 Appendices – 417 Appendix A Vapor Pressure of Water and Various Temperatures Appendix B Concentration of Common Acids and Bases – 419 Appendix C Values of Physical Constants – 420 Appendix D Metric Prefixes – 420 Appendix E Conversion Factors – 420 Appendix F Introduction to Chemical Nomenclature – 421 Nomenclature Exercises – 427 – 428 Appendix G Significant Figures and Rounding Numbers – 429 Appendix H Using Excel to Prepare Straight-line Graphs – 433 Periodic Table--Inside Front Cover. CONTENTS To the Instructors – v I. General Laboratory Procedures and Laboratory Safety – 1 II. Basic Concepts, Measurement and Properties – 11 a. Experiment 1 Measurement and Density – 11 b. Experiment 2 Preparing Graphs – 25 c. Experiment 3 The Identification of an Unknown Liquid – 37 III. Chemical Separations – 47 a. Experiment 4 Elements, Compounds, and Mixtures – 47 b. Experiment 5 Separation Using Chromatographic Techniques – 59 IV. Reactions, Formulas, Equations, Mass Relationships, and Structure – 71 a. Experiment 6 Simple Chemical Reactions – 71 i. Writing Formulas of Ionic Compounds – 73 REVIEW A: Chemical Arithmetic – Formulas – 83 b. Experiment 7 Hydrates and the Determination of the Formula of a Hydrate--95 c. Experiment 8 The reduction of an Oxide of Copper and the Determination of its Simple Formula – 105 REVIEW B: Chemical Arithmetic – Equations – 115 d. Experiment 9 Analysis of a KCIO3-KCI Mixture – 127 e. Experiment 10 Calorimetry – Measuring Heat – 135 f. Experiment 11 The Structure of Covalent Molecules and Polyatomic Ions – 149 ii. Writing Lewis Structures for Molecules and Polyatomic Ions – 150 V. The Chemical Behavior of Elements – 163 a. Experiment 12 An Activity Series of Several Metals – 163 The Six Great Scientists – 167 b. Experiment 13 The Preparation and Properties of Oxygen and the Properties of Oxides – 173 VI. The Gas Laws – 183 a. Experiment 14 Boyle’s Law and Charles’ Law – 197 b. Experiment 15 The Combined Gas Law and Dalton’s Law – 197 i. The Men Behind the Gas Laws – 202 VII. Acid-Base Chemistry – 207 REVIEW C: Chemical Arithmetic – Molarity – 207 a. Experiment 16 Acid-Base Titrations – 217 b. Experiment 17 Acids, Bases, pH, Hydrolysis, and Buffers – 229 i. The Language of Acids and Bases – 234 VIII. Organic Chemistry – 245 a. Experiment 18 The Structure of Hydrocarbons – 245 b. Experiment 19 Properties of Hydrocarbons – 259 Supplements International Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF GENERAL, ORGANIC AND BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY By George Odian, and Ira Blei of College of Staten Island, CUNY 1994 / 512 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-047609-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-113529-0 [IE] A Schaum’s Publication (International Edition is not available for sale in Japan) CONTENTS 1 Chemistry and Measurement 2 Atomic Structure and the Periodic Table 3 Compounds and Chemical Bonding 4 Chemical Calculations 5 Physical Properties of Matter 6 Concentration and its Units 7 Solutions 8 Chemical Reactions 9 Aqueous Solutions of Acids, Bases and Salts 10 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 11 Organic Compounds: Saturated Hydrocarbons 12 Unsaturated Hydrocarbons: Alkenes, Alkynes, Aromatics 13 Alcohols, Phenols, Ethers, and Thioalcohols, Aldehydes and Ketones 14 Carboxylic Acids, Esters, and Related Compounds 15 Amines and Amides 16 Optical Isomerism 17 Carbohydrates 18 Lipids 19 Proteins 20 Nucleic Acids and Heredity 144 CHEMISTRY Revised Section 3.3 on Amounts of Reactants and Products in Chapter 3. Revised the explanation of thermochemical equations in Chapter 6. Expanded coverage on effective nuclear charge in Chapter 8. Expanded explanation of molar heat of vaporization in Chapter 10. Revised the section on frequency factor in the Arrhenius Equation in Chapter 13. Further clarified the explanation of pH and also of percent ionization in Chapter 14. 21 Metabolic Systems 22 Digestion, Nutrition, and Gas Transport Appendixes General Chemistry Textbooks CONTENTS 1 Chemistry: The Study of Change 2 Atoms, Molecules, and Ions 3 Mass Relationships in Chemical Reactions 4 Reactions in Aqueous Solutions 5 Gases 6 Thermochemistry 7 Quantum Theory and the Electronic Structure of Atoms 8 Periodic Relationships Among the Elements 9 Chemical Bonding I: Basic Concepts 10 Chemical Bonding II: Molecular Geometry and Hybridization of Atomic Orbitals 11 Intermolecular Forces and Liquids and Solids 12 Physical Properties of Solutions 13 Chemical Kinetics 14 Chemical Equilibrium 15 Acids and Bases 16 Acid-Base Equilibria and Solubility Equilibria 17 Chemistry in the Atmosphere 18 Entropy, Free Energy, and Equilibrium 19 Electrochemistry 20 Metallurgy and the Chemistry of Metals 21 Nonmetallic Elements and Their Compounds 22 Transition Metal Chemistry and Coordination Compounds 23 Nuclear Chemistry 24 Organic Chemistry 25 Synthetic and Natural Organic Polymers Appendixes 1 Derivation of the Names of Elements 2 Units for the Gas Constant 3 Thermodynamic Data at 1 atm and 25 degrees C 4 Mathematical Operations NEW International Edition CHEMISTRY 10th Edition By Raymond Chang, Williams College 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727431-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-017264-7 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/chang10e Designed for the two-semester general chemistry course, Chang’s best-selling textbook continues to take a traditional approach and is often considered a student and teacher favorite. The book features a straightforward, clear writing style and proven problem-solving strategies. It continues the tradition of providing a firm foundation in chemical concepts and principles while presenting a broad range of topics in a clear, concise manner. The new edition of Chemistry continues to strike a balance between theory and application by incorporating real examples and helping students visualize the three-dimensional atomic and molecular structures that are the basis of chemical activity. An integral part of the text is to develop students’ problem-solving and critical thinking skills. A hallmark of the 10th anniversary edition is the integration of many tools designed to inspire both students and instructors. The textbook is a foundation for the unparalleled, effective technology that is integrated throughout. The multimedia package for the new edition stretches students beyond the confines of the traditional textbook. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW Review of Concepts--a quick review question or set of questions (sometimes with a visual) to test student understanding of the concept just presented. Key Equations are again added to the end-of-chapter material for the student and professor. NEW Chemistry in Action boxed essay on Boron Neutron Capture Theory in Chapter 23. Conceptual end-of-chapter problems have been added to reinforce the Review of Concepts. The new end-of-chapter problems include visuals for the student to interpret for the correct answer. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia Specific Chapter Changes: Expanded coverage of the common oxides in naming oxoacids in Chapter 2. 145 CHEMISTRY NEW NEW International Edition International Edition PRINCIPLES OF GENERAL CHEMISTRY 2nd Edition CHEMISTRY By Martin Silberberg 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-727432-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-017263-0 [IE] By Julia Burdge http://aris.mhhe.com Silberberg’s Principles of General Chemistry offers students the same authoritative topic coverage as its parent text, Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change. The Principles text allows for succinct coverage of content with minimal emphasis on pedagogic learning aids. This more straightforward approach to learning appeals to today’s efficiency-minded, value-conscious instructors and students without sacrificing depth, clarity, or rigor. NEW TO THIS EDITION “Think of It This Way” is a new feature for the 2nd edition. Each of these small snippets of text consists of a few sentences that provide an analogy for a term they need to know. Some of these contain a small illustration to support the text. Sample Problems and end-of-chapter problems contain more representations of molecular art. CONTENTS 1 Keys To The Study Of Chemistry 2 The Components Of Matter 3 Stoichiometry Of Formulas And Equations 4 Three Major Classes Of Chemical Reactions 5 Gases And The Kinetic-molecular Theory 6 Thermochemistry: Energy Flow And Chemical Change 7 Quantum Theory And Atomic Structure 8 Electron Configuration And Chemical Periodicity 9 Models Of Chemical Bonding 10 The Shapes Of Molecules 11 Theories Of Covalent Bonding 12 Intermolecular Forces: Liquids, Solids, And Phase Changes 13 The Properties Of Mixtures: Solutions And Colloids 14 The Main-group Elements: Applying Principles Of Bonding And Structure 15 Organic Compounds And The Atomic Properties Of Carbon 16 Kinetics: Rates And Mechanisms Of Chemical Reactions 17 Equilibrium: The Extent Of Chemical Reactions 18 Acid-base Equilibria 19 Ionic Equilibria In Aqueous Systems 20 Thermodynamics: Entropy, Free Energy, And The Direction Of Chemical Reactions 21 Electrochemistry: Chemical Change And Electrical Work 22 The Transition Elements And Their Coordination Compounds 23 Nuclear Reactions And Their Applications Appendix A Common Mathematical Operations In Chemistry Appendix B Standard Thermodynamic Values For Selected Substances At 298 K Appendix C Equilibrium Constants At 298 K Appendix D Standard Electrode (Half-cell) Potentials At 298 K Appendix E Answers To Selected Problems 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-722132-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-110224-7 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/burdge Chemistry, First Edition, by Julia Burdge has been created to bridge the gap in the McGraw-Hill general chemistry offerings. This textbook offers a clear writing style written with the students in mind. Julia uses her background of teaching hundreds of general chemistry students per year and creates content to offer more detailed explanation on areas where she knows they have problems. Sitting down with the art house, Julia Burdge worked with the artist to create the style and major art pieces in her text. Out of these discussions, came the creation of the Visualizing Art two-page spreads which detail a process for the students and provide them with the answer to “What is the Point?”. With outstanding art, a consistent problem-solving approach, interesting applications woven throughout the chapters, and a wide range of end-of-chapter problems, this is a solid first edition text. FEATURES Exciting visual program of both unique and conventional figures. Enhance student understanding of chemical concepts by Visualizing Chemistry process pieces, macro-micro art, and three-dimensional art. The art breaks down the chemical processes from complex into simpler, more user-friendly concepts Consistent problem-solving skill development. Fostering a consistent approach to problem-solving provides the skill set for a student to master the basic of critical thinking. Each Sample Problem is followed by one and often two practice problems. The practice problem allows the student to solve a problem using the steps in the Sample Problem. A second practice problem provides the student to solve the same basic problems from a different point of view. Engaging real-life examples and application. Each chapter is introduced and closed (bookends) by an interesting story of something familiar such as lasers and chemotherapy. Bringing Chemistry to Life is an integrated segment in the text which brings out such topics as Heat Capacity and Hypothermia or Catalysis and Hangovers. Inquiry Boxes are answers to interesting “how to” questions to help the students succeed in studying and learning. How do I Assign Oxidation Numbers? Outstanding pedagogy for student learning. The CheckPoints, Rewind and Fast Forward Buttons are meant to enhance student understanding and comprehension by reinforcing current concepts and interconnecting new concepts to others throughout the text. Pre-Professional Exam Question at the end of every chapters’ problems provides a question with 2-4 multiple choice answers at a higher level thinking skill base for student practice. The main question is based upon content presented in the chapter. Integrated media applications—animations, Media Player files, and ARIS. Animations have been built from the Visualizing Chemistry two-page art spreads stepping out a process for the student to visualize and learn. The animations are narrated by the author, Julia Burdge and designated in the text by a Media Player icon. Other areas in the chapter where content is available for the student to download on their 146 CHEMISTRY Media Player is also marked with an icon. More animations are also included and designated by an icon next to the appropriate content. Finally, end-of-chapter problems are within our ARIS electronic course management and electronic homework system. NEW International Edition Content--Chapter 25 is on Modern Materials including polymer, ceramics and composite, liquid crystals, biomedical materials, nanotechnology, semiconductors, and superconductors. UNIVERSITY CHEMISTRY McGraw-Hill’s ARIS – Assessment, Review, and Instruction System for Chemistry by Julia Burdge is a complete electronic homework and course management system. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. All PowerPoint lectures, assignments, quizzes, and animations are directly tied to text-specific materials. Instructors can also edit questions and algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated homework, quizzing, and testing. All student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. Go to www.aris.mhhe.com to learn more. Presentation Center - Build instructional materials wherever, whenever, and however you want! Presentation Center is an online digital library containing assets such as photos, artwork, animations, PowerPoints, and other types of media that can be used to create customized lectures, visually enhanced tests and quizzes, compelling course websites, or attractive printed support materials. Access to your book, access to all books! This ever-growing resource gives instructors the power to utilize assets specific to their adopted textbook as well as content from other McGraw-Hill books in the library. Presentation Center’s dynamic search engine allows you to explore by discipline, course, textbook chapter, asset type, or keyword. Simply browse, select, and download the files you need to build engaging course materials. All assets are copyrighted by McGraw-Hill Higher Education but can be used by instructors for classroom purposes. eInstruction questions are available with this project and can be found within the ARIS site for this text. eInstruction is a wireless student response system that allows for the ultimate in classroom participation, giving you immediate feedback from every student. By Brian Laird 2009 (March 2008) / 864 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-722133-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-128774-6 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/laird This dynamic new Honors General Chemistry text brings together a practical “Molecular to Macroscopic” approach, a proven problem solving approach that challenges students to think logically, along with a clear and concise writing style. Combined with the author’s teaching experience at the University of Kansas, extensive reviewing and accuracy checks, Brian Laird’s University Chemistry is certain to meet the needs of both instructor and student. FEATURES Clear, concise approach to the advanced level General Chemistry course. Challenging in-chapter and end-of-chapter problems. Logical Chapter Organization- We will take the “Atoms First” approach, covering Atomic Structure in chapter one. The first four introductory chapters found in Chang 7e will be condensed and put into an appendix or offered as a short intro chapter. We will also cover thermochemistry and entropy, free energy and equilibrium state in successive chapters- 6 & 7. CONTENTS CONTENTS Chapter 1 Chemistry: The Central Science Chapter 2 Atoms, Molecules, and Ions Chapter 3 Stoichiometry: Ratios of Combination Chapter 4 Reactions in Aqueous Solutions Chapter 5 Thermochemistry Chapter 6 Quantum Theory and the Electronic Structure of Atoms Chapter 7 Electronic Configuration and the Periodic Table Chapter 8 Chemical Bonding I—Basic Concepts Chapter 9 Chemical Bonding II: Molecular Geometry and Bonding Theories Chapter 10 Organic Chemistry Chapter 11 Gases Chapter 12 Intermolecular Forces and the Physical Properties of Liquids and Solids Chapter 13 Physical Properties of Solutions Chapter 14 Chemical Kinetics Chapter 15 Chemical Equilibrium Chapter 16 Acids and Bases Chapter 17 Acid-Base Equilibria and Solubility Equilibria Chapter 18 Entropy, Free Energy, and Equilibrium Chapter 19 Electrochemistry Chapter 20 Nuclear Chemistry Chapter 21 Environmental Chemistry Chapter 22 Coordination Chemistry Chapter 23 Metallurgy and the Chemistry of Metals Chapter 24 Nonmetallic Elements and Their Compounds Chapter 25 Modern Materials Chapter 0 The Basic Language of Chemistry Chapter 1 Quantum Theory and the Electronic Structure of Atoms Chapter 2 Many-Electron Atoms and the Periodic Table Chapter 3 The Chemical Bond Chapter 4 Molecular Structure and Interaction Chapter 5 States of Matter I: Phase Diagrams and Gases Chapter 6 States of Matter I: Liquids and Solids Chapter 7 Thermochemistry Chapter 8 Entropy, Free Energy and the Equilibrium State Chapter 9 Physical Equilibria Chapter 10 Chemical Equilibria Chapter 11 Acids and Bases Chapter 12 Solution Equilibria Chapter 13 Electrochemistry Chapter 14 Chemical Reaction Kinetics Chapter 15 Chemistry of Transition Metals Chapter 16 Organic and Polymer Chemistry Chapter 17 Nuclear Chemistry APPENDIX 1: Units and Mathematical Background APPENDIX 2: Thermodynamic Data at 1 bar and 25oC (Source: Appendix 3 9e – modified) APPENDIX 3: Derivation of the Names of the Elements (Source: Appendix 1 9e) APPENDIX 4: Stable and Unstable Isotopes of the First Ten Elements 147 CHEMISTRY 5 Gases and the Kinetic-Molecular Theory 6 Thermochemistry: Energy Flow and Chemical Change 7 Quantum Theory and Atomic Structure 8 Electron Configuration and Chemical Periodicity 9 Models of Chemical Bonding 10 The Shapes of Molecules 11 Theories of Covalent Bonding 12 Intermolecular Forces: Liquids, Solids, and Phase Changes 13 The Properties of Mixtures: Solutions and Colloids Interchapter: A Perspective on the Properties of the Elements 14 Periodic Patterns in the Main-Group Elements: Bonding, Structure, and Reactivity 15 Organic Compounds and the Atomic Properties of Carbon 16 Kinetics: Rates and Mechanisms of Chemical Reactions 17 Equilibrium: The Extent of Chemical Reactions 18 Acid-Base Equilibria 19 Ionic Equilibria in Aqueous Systems 20 Thermodynamics: Entropy, Free Energy, and the Direction of Chemical Reactions 21 Electrochemistry: Chemical Change and Electrical Work 22 The Elements in Nature and Industry 23 The Transition Elements and Their Coordination Compounds 24 Nuclear Reactions and Their Applications Appendix A Common Mathematical Operations in Chemistry Appendix B Standard Thermodynamic Values for Selected Substances at 298 K Appendix C Equilibrium Constants at 298 K Appendix D Standard Electrode (Half-Cell) Potentials at 298 K NEW International Edition CHEMISTRY The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 5th Edition By Martin Silberberg 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-721650-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-127825-6 [IE] www.mhhe.com/silberberg With each edition, Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change by Martin Silberberg is becoming a favorite among faculty and students. Silberberg’s 5th edition contains features that make it the most comprehensive and relevant text for any student enrolled in a general chemistry course. The text contains unprecedented macroscopic to microscopic molecular illustrations, consistent stepby-step worked exercises in every chapter, and an extensive range of end-of-chapter problems which provide engaging applications covering a wide variety of freshman interests, including engineering, medicine, materials, and environmental studies. All of these qualities make Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change the centerpiece for any General Chemistry course. NEW TO THIS EDITION International Edition ARIS for General Chemistry McGraw-Hill’s ARIS – Assessment, Review, and Instruction System for Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change is a complete electronic homework and course management system. Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. All PowerPoint lectures, assignments, quizzes, and animations are directly tied to text-specific materials. Instructors can also edit questions and algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-toassign algorithmically generated homework, quizzing, and testing. All student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. New molecular end-of-chapter problems, including molecular art! Many completely new comprehensive problems have been added to this 5th edition, which follow the main end-of-chapter problems. Silberberg offers three types of problems: Concept Review Questions test students’ general understanding of key ideas in the chapter. Skill-Building Exercises are written in pairs, with one of each pair answered in the back of the book. These exercises begin simply and increase gradually in difficulty. Problems in Context apply the skills learned to interesting scenarios and examples. These three types of problems, which are keyed by chapter section, are followed by a group of Comprehensive Problems that are presented in any order, include problems from every section, and often call on concepts and skills learned in earlier chapters. New Design! The 5th edition’s design utilizes more subtle colors and design changes allow for more white space. CONTENTS 1 Keys to the Study of Chemistry 2 The Components of Matter 3 Stoichiometry of Formulas and Equations 4 The Major Classes of Chemical Reactions GENERAL CHEMISTRY The Essential Concepts, 5th Edition By Raymond Chang, Williams College 2008 (February 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331185-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-126701-4 [IE] http:.//www.mhhe.com/chang The fifth edition of General Chemistry continues the tradition of presenting only the material that is essential for a one-year general chemistry course. It strikes a balance between theory and application by incorporating real-world examples; helping students visualize the three-dimensional atomic and molecular structures that are the basis of chemical activity; and developing problem-solving and critical thinking skills. Although the fifth edition incorporates many new features, such as macro to micro artwork, six new animations correlated to the text, and the addition of new hand-sketched worked examples, General Chemistry is still 200 to 300 pages shorter and much less expensive than other two-semester textbooks. Dr. Chang’s concisebut-thorough approach will appeal to efficiency-minded instructors and value-conscious students. CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Atoms, Molecules, and Ions 3 Stoichiometry 4 Reactions in Aqueous Solutions 5 Gases 6 Energy Relationships in Chemical Reactions 7 The Electronic Structure of Atoms 8 The Periodic Table 9 Chemical Bonding I: The Covalent Bond 10 Chemical Bonding II: Molecular Geometry and Hybridization of Atomic Orbitals 11 Introduction to Organic Chemistry 12 Intermolecular Forces and Liquids and Solids 13 Physical Properties of Solutions 148 CHEMISTRY 14 Chemical Kinetics 15 Chemical Equilibrium 16 Acids and Bases 17 Acid-Base Equilibria and Solubility Equilibria 18 Thermodynamics 19 Redox Reactions and Electrochemistry 20 The Chemistry of Coordination Compounds 21 Nuclear Chemistry 22 Organic Polymers--Synthetic and Natural Appendix 1 Units for the Gas Constant Appendix 2 Selected Thermodynamic Data at 1 atm and 25 degrees Centigrade Appendix 3 Mathematical Operations Appendix 4 The Elements and the Derivation of Their Names and Symbols Supplements International Edition UNDERSTANDING CHEMISTRY Student Study Guide By Charles Lovett and Raymond Chang of Williams College 2005 (Jan 2004) / 208 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-255553-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-121595-4 [IE] http://www.understandingchemistry.com CONTENTS SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COLLEGE CHEMISTRY 9th Edition By Jerome Rosenberg and Lawrence Epstein of University of Pittsburg and Peter Krieger, Palm Beach CC Eissey Campus 2008 (June 2007) / 400 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-147670-6 A Schaum’s Publication The best and most up-to-date study guide of its kind, this book summarizes the chemical principles of a first course in college chemistry through problems with clearly explained solutions. This new edition reflects changes in the major current textbooks, and it contains upto-date information about newer techniques used in environmental chemistry, biochemistry and medicinal chemistry. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Quantities and Units Chapter 2: Atomic and Molecular Mass; Molar Mass Chapter 3: Formulas and Composition Calculations Chapter 4: Calculations from Chemical Equations Chapter 5: Measurement of Gas Chapter 6: The Ideal Gas Law and Kinetic Theory Chapter 7: Thermochemistry Chapter 8: Atomic Structure and the Periodic Law Chapter 9: Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure Chapter 10: Solids and Liquids Chapter 11: Oxidation-Reduction Chapter 12: Concentration of Solutions Chapter 13: Reactions Involving Standard Solutions Chapter 14: Properties of Solutions Chapter 15: Organic Chemistry and Biochemistry Chapter 16: Thermodynamics and Chemical Equilibrium Chapter 17: Acids and Bases Chapter 18: Complex Ions; Precipitates Chapter 19: Electrochemistry Chapter 20: Rates of Reactions Chapter 21: Nuclear Processes Appendix A: Exponents Appendix B: Significant Figures Index Table of Atomic Masses Nuclidic Masses of Selected Radionuclides Periodic Table of the Elements A User Friendly Guide to General Chemistry In the Beginning Building a Foundation Chemical Reactions Reactants to Products Energy Changes in Chemical Reactions Atomic Structure and the Periodic Table Chemical Bonding Chemical Equilibrium Glossary SCHAUM’S A-Z CHEMISTRY By Andrew Hunt 2004 / 400 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-141935-2 A Schaum’s Publication Schaum’s A-Z handbooks make excellent complements to course textbooks and test preparation guides. Ideal for ambitious high school seniors--especially AP students--and college freshmen, they feature concise, thoroughly cross-referenced definitions of hundreds of key terms and phrases that help students quickly break through the jargon barrier. Clear explanations of key concepts, supplemented with lucid illustrations, help build mastery of theory and provide a ready reference to supplement class work. Each entry begins with a clear, one-sentence definition and is followed by an explanation and examples. A-to-Z format for ready reference Clear definitions and explanations, cross-referenced and enhanced with numerous worked examples and illustrations Extended explanations of more important concepts Review lists of entries that relate to main topics in the Appendix aid review 149 CHEMISTRY SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINES: COLLEGE CHEMISTRY to logically think through the steps of the experiment. CONTENTS By Jerome Rosenberg and Lawrence M. Epstein of University of Pittsburgh 2000 / 156 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-052714-8 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS Quantities and Units. Moles and Empirical Formulas. Calculations Based on Chemical Equations. Concentration and Solution Stoichiometry. The Ideal Gas Law and Kinetic Theory. Thermochemistry. Atomic Structure. Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure. Solids and Liquids. Oxidation-Reduction. Properties of Solutions. Thermodynamics and Chemical Equilibrium. Acids and Bases. Precipitates and Complex Ions. Electrochemistry. Rates of Reactions. Appendix: Table of Atomic Masses. Lab NEW International Edition COOPERATIVE CHEMISTRY LAB MANUAL 4th Edition By Melanie M. Cooper, Clemson University 2009 (January 2008) / 176 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-305023-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-126334-4 [IE] The laboratory course described in the lab manual emphasizes experimental design, data analysis, and problem solving. Inherent in the design is the emphasis on communication skills, both written and oral. Students work in groups on open-ended projects in which they are given an initial scenario and then asked to investigate a problem. There are no formalized instructions and students must plan and carry out their own investigations. FEATURES This lab manual has a unique approach. It takes a cooperative learning, peer evaluation approach. This lab manual contains authentic real world experiments. Example is the lab on designing a calcium supplement. There is a description of Lab techniques and their uses included in this manual. The basic steps are given, however the students need Section 1: Cooperative Chemistry: How and Why To the Instructor To the Student Cooperative Learning Conflict Management Nature of the Course Brief Outline of the Course Resources Safety Rules Basic Laboratory Etiquette NFPA Hazard Codes Recording and Reporting Results The Laboratory Notebook Writing Lab Reports Preliminary Report Guidelines The Science Writing Heuristic Sample Laboratory Report Reporting Numerical Results Graphing Data Oral Report Guidelines Section 2: Laboratory Equipment Containers Measuring Devices--Liquids Measuring Devices--Solids Transfer Devices Support Devices Heating Devices Section 3: Laboratory Techniques Preparing an Experiment Dealing With Unknown Compounds Solubility Tests Analysis of Anions Analysis of Cations Microscale Techniques Solution Techniques Filtration Chromatography Gravimetric Analysis Boiling Points/Melting Points Separation of Liquids and Solids Recrystallization Organic Chemistry Section 4: Laboratory Instruments and Spectroscopy Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) Infra Red (IR) Spectronic 20 Spectrophotometer Color and Spectroscopy pH Meters Voltmeter Conductivity Meter Section 5: Projects Project 1: Density Project 2: Investigation of Chemiluminescence Project 3: Concrete Project 4: Finding the Relationship Between the Volume of a Gas and the Temperature Project 5: Designing a Calcium Supplement Project 6: Properties of Matter and Separations Project 7: Acids and Bases Project 8: Buffers Project 9: White Powders Project 10: Electrochemistry Project 11: Identification, Properties and Synthesis of an Unknown Ionic Compound Project 12: Hot and Cold Project 13: Analysis of Colas Project 14: Identification, Properties and Synthesis of an Unknown Organic Compound 150 CHEMISTRY Project 15: What Affects the Rate of a Reaction? Glossary Index Biochemistry-1 Semester Textbooks Multimedia International Edition International Edition CHEMSKILL BUILDER ONLINE Version 2, 2nd Edition By James D Spain, Electronic Homework Systems, Inc and Hal Peters 2004 ISBN: 978-0-07-288264-3 (Student’s Edition-Password Booklet) ISBN: 978-0-07-125103-7 [IE] ISBN: 978-0-07-298449-1 (Instructor’s Edition- Password Booklet) CONTENTS Unit 1. Introduction to Chemistry Unit 2. Units and Measurements Unit 3. Chemical Nomenclature Unit 4. Stoichiometry Unit 5. Chemical Reaction Unit 6. Molarity of Solution Unit 7. Properties of Gases Unit 8. Thermochemistry Unit 9. Atomic Structure Unit 10. Oxidation Reduction Unit 11. Periodic Properties Unit 12. Polyatomic Structures Unit 13. Covalent Bonding Section Unit 14. Liquids and Solids Unit 15. Properties of Solutions Unit 16. Chemical Kinetics Unit 17. Chemical Equilibria Unit 18. Acid-Base Equilibria Unit 19. Buffers and Hydrolysis S Unit 20. Solubility Equilibria Unit 21. Thermodynamics Unit 22. Electrochemistry Unit 23. Nuclear Chemistry Unit 24. Organic Chemistry Unit 25. Polymer Chemistry BIOCHEMISTRY An Introduction, 3rd Edition By Gertrude McKee, Thomas Jefferson University and James R McKee, Philadelphia College Pharmacy 2003 / 800 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-231592-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-112248-1 [IE] www.mhhe.com/mckee CONTENTS Part I: Fundamental Concepts 1 Biochemistry: An Introduction 2 Living Cells 3 Water: The Medium of Life 4 Energy art II: Structures and Metabolism of Proteins, Carbohydrates, and Lipids 5 Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins 6 Enzymes 7 Carbohydrates 8 Carbohydrate Metabolism 9 Aerobic Metabolism I: Citric Acid Cycle and Electron Transport 10 Aerobic Metabolism II: Oxidative Phosphorylation and Oxidative Stress 11 Lipids and Membranes 12 Lipid Metabolism 13 Photosynthesis 14 Nitrogen Metabolism I: Synthesis 15 Nitrogen Metabolism II: Degradation 16 Integration of Metabolism Part III: Genetic Information Flow 17 Nucleic Acids 18 Genetic Information and Gene Expression 19 Protein Synthesis 151 CHEMISTRY Organic Chemistry - 1 Semester International Edition BASIC CONCEPTS IN BIOCHEMISTRY A Student’s Survival Guide, 2nd Edition By Hiram F. Gilbert, Baylor University College of Medicine 2000 / 331 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-135657-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-120182-7 [IE] Textbooks A Professional Publication CONTENTS Preface. Prologue. Chapter 1: Where to Start. Chapter 2: Protein Structure. Chapter 3: Membranes and Membrane Proteins. Chapter 4: DNA-RNA Structure. Chapter 5: Expression of Genetic Information. Chapter 6: Recombinant-DNA Methodology. Chapter 7: Enzyme Mechanism. Chapter 8: EnzymeKinetics. Chapter 9: Signal Transduction Pathways. Chapter 10: Glycolysis and Gluconeogenesis. Chapter 11: Glycogen Synthesis and Degradation. Chapter 12: TCA Cycle. Chapter 13: Fat Synthesis and Degradation. Chapter 14: Electron Transport and Oxidative Phosphorylation. Chapter 15: Pentose Phosphate Pathway. Chapter 16: Amino Acid Metabolism. Chapter 17: Integration of Energy Metabolism. Chapter 18: UREA Cycle. Chapter 19: Purine Metabolism. Chapter 20: Pyrimidine Metabolism. Chapter 21: One-Carbon Metabolism. Chapter 22: Tracking Carbons. Chapter 23: ph, pKa, Problems. Chapter 24: Thermodynamics and Kinetics. Appendix. Glossary. Index. SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BIOCHEMISTRY 2nd Edition By Philip Kuchel, University of Sydney 1997 / 576 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-036149-2 A Schaum’s Publication This step-by-step outline steers you logically, expertly, and clearly through biochemistry. It can save you study time and helps you get better grades because it focuses on the core information you really need to know and avoids confusing, extraneous material that you don’t need! A question-and-answer format highlights the meaning of the material and helps you remember. Easy-to-read line drawings and diagrams make important structures and processes memorable. This new second edition features added sections on whole-body metabolism, enzyme kinetics, and new technologies for monitoring metabolic processes. Use this excellent study guide to help you ace your biochemistry course, study it alone as a complete biochemistry course, or use it for review before a standardized test it can cut your study hours as it moves you quickly from cell structure through protein synthesis. This is the study guide that makes biochemistry comprehensible the one whose first edition was chosen by 32,000 grateful students! International Edition ORGANIC CHEMISTRY A Brief Course, 3rd Edition By Robert C Atkins, James Madison University 2002 / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-231944-6 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-112162-0 [IE] ISBN: 978-0-07-126620-8 [IE - 4 Color Text] www.mhhe.com/atkins CONTENTS 1 Chemical Bonding 2 Alkanes and Cycloalkanes 3 Alcohols and Alkyl Halides 4 Alkenes and Alkynes I: Structure and Preparation 5 Alkenes and Alkynes II: Reactions 6 Aromatic Compounds 7 Stereochemistry 8 Nucleophilic Substitution 9 Free Radicals 10 Alcohols, Ethers, and Phenols 11 Aldehydes and Ketones 12 Carboxylic Acids 13 Carboxylic Acid Derivatives 14 Amines 15 Carbohydrates 16 Lipids 17 Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins 18 Nucleic Acids 19 Spectroscopy SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE: ORGANIC CHEMISTRY By Herbert Meislich, City College 2000 / 138 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-052718-8 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS Chapter 1: Structure and Properties. Chapter 2: Reactivity and Reactions. Chapter 3: Alkanes and Cycloalkanes. Chapter 4: Stereochemistry. Chapter 5: Alkenes, Alkynes, and Dienes. Chapter 6: Alkyl Halides. Chapter 7: Aromatic Compounds. Chapter 8: Spectroscopy and Structure. Chapter 9: Alcohols, Ethers, and Epoxides. Chapter 10: Aldehydes and Ketones. Chapter 11: Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives. Chapter 12: Enolates and enols. Chapter 13: Amines. Chapter 14: Amino Acids, Peptides, Proteins. Chapter 15: Carbohydrates and Nucleic Acids. Index. 152 CHEMISTRY International Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 3rd Edition Quiz and exam questions Final exam Bibliography About the author Index By George Hademenos, University of Dallas 1999 / 464 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-134165-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-116598-3 [IE] Organic Chemistry - 2 Semester (International Edition is not for sale in Japan) A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS Structure and Properties of Organic Compounds:1 Bonding and Molecular Structure. 2 Chemical Reactivity and Organic Reactions. 3 Alkanes. 4 Stereochemistry. 5 Alkenes. 6 Alkyl Halides. 7 Alkynes and Dienes. 8 Cyclic Hydrocarbons. 9 Benzene and Polynuclear Aromatic Compounds. 10 Aromatic Substitution, Arenes. 11 Spectroscopy and Structure. 12 Alcohols and Thiols. 13 Ethers, Epoxides, Glycols, and Thioethers. 14 Carbonyl Compounds: Aldehydes and Ketones. 15 Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives. 16 Carbanion-Enolates and Enols. 17 Amines. 18 Phenolic Compounds. 19 Aromatic Heterocyclic Compounds. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY DEMYSTIFIED By Daniel Bloch 2006 (March 2006) / 551pages ISBN: 978-0-07-145920-4 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS PREFACE ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Chapter 1: Structure and Bonding Chapter 2: Families and Functional Groups Chapter 3: Acids and Bases Chapter 4: Alkanes and Cycloalkanes Chapter 5: Stereochemistry Chapter 6: Structure and Properties of Alkenes Chapter 7: Reaction Mechanisms Chapter 8: Reactions of Alkenes Chapter 9: Alkynes Chapter 10: Characterization Chapter 11: Organohalides Chapter 12: Nucleophilic Substitution and Elimination Reactions Chapter 13: Alcohols Chapter 14: Ethers Chapter 15: Sulfur Compounds Chapter 16: Conjugated Systems Chapter 17: Aromatic Compounds Chapter 18: Reactions of Benzene and other Aromatic Compounds Chapter 19: Aldehydes and Ketones Chapter 20: Carboxylic Acids Chapter 21: Derivatives and Carboxylic Acids Chapter 22: Alpha-Substitution Reactions in Carbonyl Compounds Chapter 23: Carbonyl Condensation Reactions Textbooks International Edition ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 7th Edition By Francis Carey, University of VA-Charlottesville 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331184-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-110225-4 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/carey7e Throughout all seven editions, Organic Chemistry has been designed to meet the needs of the “mainstream,” two-semester, undergraduate organic chemistry course. This best-selling text gives students a solid understanding of organic chemistry by stressing how fundamental reaction mechanisms function and reactions occur. With the addition of handwritten solutions, new cutting-edge molecular illustrations, updated spectroscopy coverage, seamless integration of molecular modeling exercises, and state-of-the-art multimedia tools, the 7th edition of Organic Chemistry clearly offers the most up-to-date approach to the study of organic chemistry. CONTENTS Chapter 1--Structure Determines Properties Chapter 2--Hydrocarbon Frameworks. Alkanes Chapter 3--Conformations of Alkanes and Cycloalkanes Chapter 4--Alcohols and Alkyl Halides Chapter 5--Structure and Preparation of Alkenes: Elimination Reactions Chapter 6--Reactions of Alkenes: Addition Reactions Chapter 7--Stereochemistry Chapter 8--Nucleophilic Substitution Chapter 9--Alkynes Chapter 10--Conjugation in alkadienes and Allylic Systems Chapter 11 -Arenes and Aromaticity Chapter 12 – Reactions of Arenes: Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution Chapter 13 -- Spectroscopy Chapter 14 -- Organometallic Compounds Chapter 15 – Alcohols, Diols and Thiols Chapter 16 – Ethers, Epoxides and Sulfides Chapter 17 – Aldehydes and Ketones: Nucleophilic Addition to the Carbonyl Group Chapter 18 – Enols and Enolates Chapter 19 – Carboxylic Acids Chapter 20 – Carboxylic Acid Derivates: Nucleophilic Acyl Substitution Chapter 21 – Ester Enolates Chapter 22 -- Amines Chapter 23 – Aryl Halides Chapter 24 -- Phenols 153 CHEMISTRY Supplements Chapter 25 – Carbohydrates Chapter 26 -- Lipids Chapter 27 – Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins Chapter 28 – Nucleosides, Nucleotides and Nucleic Acids Chapter 29 – Synthetic Polymers Glossary Credits Index International Edition 3000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY By Herbert Meislich, City College of CUNY, Estelle Meislich, Bergen Community College and Jacob Sharefkin, Formerly Brooklyn College 1994 / 704 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-056424-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-113969-4 [IE] International Edition ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 2nd Edition A Schaum’s Publication By Janice Gorzynski Smith, University of Hawaii-Manoa 2008 (March 2007) / 1312 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-332749-5 (Mandatory Package) ISBN: 978-0-07-128665-7 [IE] CONTENTS Smith’s Organic Chemistry continues to breathe new life into the organic chemistry world. This student and instructor reviewed, new 2nd edition presents information in the form of bulleted lists and tables; with minimal use of text paragraphs. Janice Smith saw a great need for stepped out worked examples; incorporated biological, medicinal, and environmental applications, and an art program that has yet to be seen in organic chemistry! A highlight of the art program includes the micro-to-macro art pieces that visually guide students to conceptually understand organic chemistry. Smith: Organic Chemistry is the text you need to see before making your organic chemistry decision. CONTENTS Preface Chapter 1 Structures and Bonding Chapter 2 Acids and Bases Chapter 3 Introduction to Organic Molecules and Functional Groups Chapter 4 Alkanes Chapter 5 Stereochemistry Chapter 6 Understanding Organic Reactions Chapter 7 Alkyl Halides and Nucleophilic Substitution Chapter 8 Alkyl Halides and Elimination Reactions Chapter 9 Alcohols, Ethers, and Epoxides Chapter 10 Alkenes Chapter 11 Alkynes Chapter 12 Oxidation and Reduction Chapter 13 Radical Reactions Chapter 14 Mass Spectrometry and Infrared Spectroscopy Chapter 15 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy Chapter 16 Conjugation, Resonance, and Dienes Chapter 17 Benzene and Aromatic Compounds Chapter 18 Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution Chapter 19 Carboxylic Acids and Acidity of the O¿H Bond Chapter 20 Introduction to Carbonyl Chemistry: Organometallic Reagents; Oxidation and Reduction Chapter 21 Aldehydes and Ketones—Nucleophilic Addition Chapter 22 Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives—Nucleophilic Acyl Substitution Chapter 23 Substitution Reactions of Carbonyl Compounds at the-Carbon Chapter 24 Carbonyl Condensation Reactions Chapter 25 Amines Chapter 26 Carbon-Carbon Bond-Forming Reactions in Organic Synthesis Chapter 27 Carbohydrates Chapter 28 Amino Acids and Proteins Chapter 29 Lipids Chapter 30 Synthetic Polymers Appendices Glossary Credits Index Structure and Properties Bonding and Molecular Structure Chemical Reactivity and Organic Reactions Alkanes Cycloalkanes Stereo-chemistry Alkenes Alkyl Halides Alkynes, Dienes, and Orbital Symmetry Aromaticity and Benzene Aromatic Substitution Arenes Spectroscopy and Structure Proof Alcohols and Thiols Ethers, Epoxides, Glycols, and Thioethers Aldehydes and Ketones Carboxylic Acids Acid Derivatives Carbanion-Enolates and Enols Amines Phenols and Their Derivatives Aromatic Heterocyclic Compounds Amino Acids, Petidides, and Proteins Carbohydrates. COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 154 CHEMISTRY Multimedia MCGRAW-HILL’S THE NEW MCAT WITH CD-ROM By George J Hademenos, Candice McCloskey, Georgia Perimeteer CDunwoody, Shaun Murphree, Jennifer M Warner and Kathy Zahler 2007 (December 2006) / 1120 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-147076-6 http://www.petersons.com/mcgrawhill/mcat.asp?sponsor=9398 A Professional Reference Title America’s premier medical publisher introduces the newest, most up-to-date test prep package for today’s pre-med student. Specially designed for your tech-savvy world, McGraw-Hill’s MCAT includes a comprehensive workbook with easy-to-use study plans, detailed diagrams, and essential test-taking strategies, as well as a bonus CD-ROM with two complete real-time sample tests. Uniquely attuned to the latest changes in the MCAT, it covers the full range of MCAT topics-biological sciences, physical sciences, verbal reasoning, and essay writing-with specific practice questions, explained answers, and proven study techniques. Best of all, you’ll receive free website support for additional guidance and need-to-know updates. The most user-friendly MCAT guide on the market includes: THE COMPLETE WORKBOOK-More than 1,100 pages of topic reviews, study plans, summary points, essential test-taking strategies, and one complete practice test THE COMPANION CD-ROM-Packed with more tips, tools, techniques, and two full-length, timed sample tests THE FREE COMPANION WEBSITE-MCATeasy.com provides full customer support, access to Web-based study resources, and hundreds of additional practice questions, deadline dates, important links, and late-breaking updates from MCAT Exam Central CONTENTS HOW TO USE THIS BOOK Part I: All About the MCAT Chapter 1: Introducing the MCAT Chapter 2: Test Format and Structure Chapter 3: General Test-Taking Strategies Part II: Reviewing MCAT Physics Chapter 1: Mathematics Fundamentals Chapter 2: Physics Fundamentals Chapter 3: Kinematics Chapter 4: Forces and Newton’s Laws Chapter 5: Particle Dynamics: Work, Energy, and Power Chapter 6: Momentum and Impulse Chapter 7: Solids and Fluids Chapter 8: Temperature and Heat Chapter 9: Vibrations and Waves Chapter 10: Sound Chapter 11: Light and Geometric Optics Chapter 12: Electrostatics Chapter 13: Electric Circuits Chapter 14: Magnetism Chapter 15: Atomic and Nuclear Physics GLOSSARY OF PHYSICS TERMS ON YOUR OWN: MCAT PHYSICS PRACTICE Part III: Reviewing MCAT General Chemistry Chapter 1: Atoms and Molecules Chapter 2: Electronic Structure and the Periodic Table Chapter 3: Trends in the Periodic Table Chapter 4: Lewis Dot Structure, Hybridization, and VSEPR Theory Chapter 5: Gases Chapter 6: Intermolecular Forces and Phase Equilibria Chapter 7: Chemical Equations and Stoichiometry Chapter 8: Reactions in Solution Chapter 9: Thermochemistry Chapter 10: Kinetics Chapter 11: Equilibrium Chapter 12: Solubility Equilibria Chapter 13: Acid-Base Chemistry Chapter 14: Thermodynamics Chapter 15: Electrochemistry GLOSSARY OF GENERAL CHEMISTRY TERMS ON YOUR OWN: MCAT GENERAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICE Part IV: MCAT Verbal Reasoning and Writing Chapter 1: Verbal Reasoning Chapter 2: The Writing Sample Part V: Reviewing MCAT Biology Chapter 1: The Cell Chapter 2: Enzymes, Energy, and Cellular Metabolism Chapter 3: DNA Structure, Replication, and Technology Chapter 4: Protein Synthesis Chapter 5: Genetics Chapter 6: Cell Division Chapter 7: Evolution Chapter 8: Bacteria and Fungi Chapter 9: Viruses Chapter 10: Tissues and Skin Chapter 11: The Nervous System and Senses Chapter 12: Muscular and Skeletal Systems Chapter 13: The Endocrine System Chapter 14: The Cardiovascular System Chapter 15: The Respiratory System Chapter 16: The Digestive System Chapter 17: The Urinary System Chapter 18: The Lymphatic and Immune System Chapter 19: Reproduction and Development ON YOUR OWN: MCAT BIOLOGY PRACTICE Part VI: Reviewing MCAT Organic Chemistry SECTION I: STRUCTURE Chapter 1: Bonding Chapter 2: Molecular Shape Chapter 3: Electronic Structure Chapter 4: Nomenclature Chapter 5: Reconciling Visual Meaning SECTION II: REACTIVITY Chapter 6: Energy Changes in Molecules Chapter 7: Radical Chemistry Chapter 8: Polar Chemistry Chapter 9: Pericyclic Chemistry SECTION III: METHODOLOGY Chapter 10: Alcohols and Ethers Chapter 11: Ketones and Aldehydes Chapter 12: Alkenes and Alkynes Chapter 13: Carboxylic Acid Derivatives Chapter 14: Epoxide Chemistry Chapter 15: Amines Chapter 16: Aromatic Chemistry Chapter 17: Cycloadditions Chapter 18: Carbohydrates and Peptides SECTION IV: SEPARATION AND PURIFICATION Chapter 19: Extraction Chapter 20: Chromatography Chapter 21: Distillation and Sublimation Chapter 22: Recrystallization SECTION V: CHARACTERIZATION Chapter 23: Combustion Analysis Chapter 24: UV-Vis Spectroscopy Chapter 25: Mass Spectrometry Chapter 26: Infrared Spectroscopy Chapter 27: Proton Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Chapter 28: Carbon Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Appendix On Your Own: Mcat Organic Chemistry Practice Two Sample Mcats On Cd 155 CHEMISTRY Physical Chemistry 20 Spectroscopy and Photochemistry 21 Statistical Mechanics 22 Theories of Reaction Rates 23 Solids and Liquids Textbooks Lab NEW International Edition NEW PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 6th Edition International Edition By Ira N Levine, Brooklyn College EXPERIMENTS IN PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 8th Edition 2009 (April 2008) / 1024 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-253862-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-127636-8 [IE] By Carl W Garland, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Joseph Nibler, and David P Shoemaker of Oregon State University Ira N. Levine’s sixth edition of Physical Chemistry provides students with an in-depth fundamental treatment of physical chemistry. At the same time, the treatment is made easy to follow by giving full stepby-step derivations, clear explanations and by avoiding advanced mathematics unfamiliar to students. Necessary math and physics have thorough review sections. Worked examples are followed by a practice exercise. 2009 (February 2008) / 752 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-282842-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-126351-1 [IE] NEW TO THIS EDITION Additional homework problems testing the qualitative understanding of physical chemistry content has been integrated into this edition. The in-chapter examples are written to lead the student to a clearly worked-out answer. The examples are followed by a corresponding exercise requiring the student to practice the same thought process. The answer for each exercise is also given. This best-selling comprehensive laboratory textbook includes experiments with background theoretical information, safety recommendations, and computer applications. Updated chapters are provided regarding the use of spreadsheets and other scientific software as well as regarding electronics and computer interfacing of experiments using Visual Basic and LabVIEW. Supplementary instructor information regarding necessary supplies, equipment, and procedures is provided in an integrated manner in the text. NEW TO THIS EDITION Completeness: The book gives the student careful definitions and explanations of concepts, full details of most derivations, and reviews of relevant topics in mathematics and physics. A mix of theoretical and practical applications is presented. Wide selection of traditional and modern experiments, the latter strengthened by the addition of three new experiments and revision of several others. New experiments on the Ordering in Nematic Liquid Crystals, Dynamic Light Scattering and Spectroscopic Properties of CdSe Nanocrystals. CONTENTS CONTENTS 1 Thermodynamics 2 The First Law of Thermodynamics 3 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 4 Material Equilibrium 5 Standard Thermodynamic Functions of Reaction 6 Reaction Equilibrium in Ideal Gas Mixtures 7 One-Component Phase Equilibrium 8 Real Gases 9 Solutions 10 Nonideal Solutions 11 Reaction Equilibrium in Nonideal Systems 12 Multicomponent Phase Equilibrium 13 Electrochemical Systems 14 Kinetic Theory of Gases 15 Transport Processes 16 Reaction Kinetics 17 Quantum Mechanics 18 Atomic Structure 19 Molecular Electronic Structure I Introduction II Treatment of Experimental Data A. Calculations and Presentation of Data B. Uncertainties in Data and Results III Use of Computers IV Gases 1. Gas Thermometry 2. Joule-Thomson Effect 3. Heat-Capacity Ratios for Gases V Transport Properties of Gases Kinetic Theory of Transport Phenomena 4. Viscosity of Gases 5. Diffusion of Gases VI Thermochemistry Principles of Calorimetry 6. Heats of Combustion 7. Strain Energy of the Cyclopropane Ring 8. Heats of Ionic Reaction VII Solutions 156 CHEMISTRY 9. Partial Molar Volume 10. Cryoscopic Determination of Molar Mass 11. Freezing-Point Depression of Strong and Weak Electrolytes 12. Chemical Equilibrium in Solution VIII Phase Behavior 13. Vapor Pressure of a Pure Liquid 14. Binary Liquid-Vapor Phase Diagram 15. Ordering in Nematic Liquid Crystals 16. Liquid-Vapor Coexistence Curve and the Critical Point IX Electrochemistry 17. Conductance of Solutions 18. Temperature Dependence of emf 19. Activity Coefficients from Cell Measurements X Chemical Kinetics 20. Method of Initial Rates: Iodine Clock 21. NMR Study of a Reversible Hydrolysis Reaction 22. Enzyme Kinetics: Inversion of Sucrose 23. Kinetics of the Decomposition of Benzenediazonium Ion 24. Gas-Phase Kinetics XI Surface Pheomena 25. Surface Tension of Solutions 26. Physical Adsorption of Gases XII Macromolecules 27. Intrinsic Viscosity: Chain Linkage in Polyvinyl Alcohol 27. Helix-Coil Transition in Polypeptides XIII Electric, Magnetic, and Optical Properties 29. Dipole Moment of Polar Molecules in Solution 30. Dipole Moment of HCl Molecules in the Gas Phase 31. Magnetic Susceptibility 32. NMR Determination of Paramagnetic Susceptibility XIV Spectroscopy 33. Dynamic Light Scattering H3> XIV. Spectroscopy 34. Absorption Spectrum of a Conjugated Dye 35. Raman Spectroscopy: Vibrational Spectrum of CCl4 36. Stimulated Raman Spectrum of Benzene 37. Vibrational-Rotational Spectra of HCl and DCl 38. Vibrational-Rotational Spectra of Acetylenes 39. Absorption and Emission Spectra of I2 40. Fluorescence Lifetime and Quenching in I2 Vapor 41. Electron Spin Resonance Spectroscopy 42. NMR Determination of Keto-Enol Equilibrium Constants 43. NMR Study of Gas-Phase DCl-HBr Isotopic Exchange Reaction 44. Solid-State Lasers: Radiative Properties of Ruby Crystals 45. Spectroscopic properties of CdSe Nanocrysals XV Solids 46. Determination of Crystal Structure by X-Ray Diffraction 47. Lattice Energy of Solid Argon 48. Statistical Thermodynamics of Iodine Sublimation XVI Computer Interfacing XVII Electronic Devices and Measurements XVIII Temperature XIX Vacuum Techniques XX Instruments XXI Miscellaneous Procedures XXII Least-Squares Fitting Procedures Appendix A Glossary of Symbols Appendix B International System of Units and Concentration Units Appendix C Safety Appendix D Literature Work Appendix E Research Journals Appendix F Numerical Methods of Analysis Appendix G Barometer Corrections Appendix H. Ethical Conduct in Physical Chemistry Supplements SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 2nd Edition By Clyde R. Metz, Indiana University 1987 / 512 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-041715-1 A Schaum’s Publication http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl?isbn=0070417156&ad key=W02003 If you want top grades and excellent understanding of physical chemistry, this powerful study tool is the best tutor you can have! It takes you step-by-step through the subject and gives you accompanying related problems with fully worked solutions. You also get hundreds of additional problems to solve on your own, working at your own speed. This superb Outline clearly presents every aspect of physical chemistry. Famous for their clarity, wealth of illustrations and examples, and lack of dreary minutie, Schaum’s Outlines have sold more than 30 million copies worldwide. Compatible with any textbook, this Outline is also perfect for self-study. For better grades in courses covering physical chemistry you can do better than this Schaum’s Outline! Analytical Chemistry International Edition MODERN ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY By David Harvey, De Pauw University 2000 / 816 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-237547-3 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-118374-1 [IE] www.mhhe.com/physsci/chemistry/harvey CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Basic Tools of Analytical Chemistry Chapter 3 The Language of Analytical Chemistry Chapter 4 Evaluating Analytical Data Chapter 5 Calibrations, Standardizations, and Blank Corrections Chapter 6 Equilibrium Chemistry Chapter 7 Obtaining and Preparing Samples for Analysis Chapter 8 Gravimetric Methods of Analysis Chapter 9 Titrimetric Methods of Analysis Chapter 10 Spectroscopic Methods of Analysis Chapter 11 Electrochemical Methods of Analysis Chapter 12 Chromatographic and Electrophoretic Methods Chapter 13 Kinetic Methods of Analysis Chapter 14 Developing a Standard Method Chapter 15 Quality Assurance 157 CHEMISTRY International Edition PRINCIPLES OF QUANTITATIVE CHEMICAL ANALYSIS By Robert de Levie, Georgetown University 1997 / 704 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-016362-1 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-114288-5 [IE] CONTENTS 1 Measures and Measurements 2 Measurement Statistics 3 Monoprotic Acids 4 Monoprotic Bases and Salts 5 Titrations of Monoprotic Acids and Bases 6 Buffers and Indicators 7 Diprotic Acids, Bases and Their Salts 8 Polyprotica Acids, Bases and Their Salts 9 Complexation 10 Extraction and Chromatography 11 Solubility 12 Precipitation 13 Electrochemical Equilibria 14 Redox Titrations 15 Activity Effects 16 Voltammentry 17 Light and Optics 18 Visible and Near-Ultraviolet Molecular Spectrometry 19 Rotational and Vibrational Spectrometries 20 Magnetic and Mass Spectrometries 21 Visible and Near-Ultra Violet Atomic Spectrometries 22 X-Ray Spectrometry and Radiochemistry Appendixes SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY By Adon Gordus, University of Michigan 1985 / 256 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-023795-7 A Schaum’s Publication CONTENTS 1 Analytical and Mathematical Review 2 Statistics and Probabilities 3 Free Energy and Chemical Equilibrium 4 Strong Acids-Strong Bases 5 Simple Weak Acids and Weak Bases 6 Titrations 7 Polyprotic Weak Acids 8 Precipitates and Solubilities 9 Complex Ion Equilibria 10 Electrochemical Cells 11 Potentiometric Titrations 12 Phase Separations and Chromatography 13 Special Measurements 14 Radioactivity Appendix INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 158 159 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY Ecology ............................................................................................................ 164 - Laboratory ................................................................................................. 165 Environmental Science - Introductory Texts .......................................................................................161 Evolution .......................................................................................................... 165 NEW TITLES ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY 2010 Author ISBN-13 Environmental Science, 12e Enger 9780073383200 161 Ecology: Concepts and Applications, 5e Molles 9780073383224 164 Ecology Lab Manual Vodopich 9780073383187 165 2009 Author ISBN-13 Principles of Environmental Science, 5e Cunningham 9780077270643 Page ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY 160 Page 162 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY Environmental Science Chapter 5 Interactions: Environments and Organisms The section on limiting factors and range of tolerance was rewritten and supported with a new illustration. A new food web illustration was substituted. There is a new case study on the changes in food chains in the Great Lakes. Chapter 6 Kinds of Ecosystems and Communities A new section on the temperate rainforest was added and supported with photographs and a graph. Many new photographs were added or substituted to help better describe the nature of specific biomes. Chapter 9 Energy Sources The chapter was updated with the most recent energy data on energy supply and consumption. The section on renewable energy was reorganized and greatly revised. A new Issues and Analysis feature discusses the pros and cons of corn ethanol production. There are many new and substituted photos. Chapter 11 Biodiversity Issues The sections on Biological and Ecosystem Services Values and Threats to Biodiversity were rewritten. A new section on the importance of climate change to biodiversity was added. New figures illustrate the concepts of genetic diversity, species diversity and ecosystem diversity. Many new figures have been added and tables and graphs have been updated. Greatly modified table of Estimated Values of Ecosystem Services Chapter 15 Water Management This chapter features a new figure on the global distribution of the world’s water and a new map showing areas of the world experiencing water stress. New content has been added on the role of the oceans as the primary regulator of global climate and an important sink for greenhouse gases. There is also new content on pricing of water in countries and expanded coverage on the restoration of the Everglades. Also featured is expanded coverage on groundwater usage. Chapter 19 Environmental Policy and Decision Making This chapter has gone through a major reorganization, including new material on the challenge for United States environmental policy. You’ll also find new material on the complexity of ecological problem solving and China’s rising energy consumption. Introductory Texts NEW International Edition ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 12th Edition By Eldon Enger, Delta College and Bradley F Smith, Western Washington University 2010 (February 2009) / 512 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-338320-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-017166- 4 [IE] This full-color, introductory environmental science text is known for being concise, conceptual, and value-priced. The approach and reading level cover the basic concepts without overloading students with too much detail. The authors reinforce the text’s central theme of “interrelationships” by providing a historical perspective, information on economic and political realities, discuss the role of different social experiences, and integrate this with the crucial science to describe the natural world and how we affect it. NEW TO THIS EDITION Environmental science often seems to focus on the negative, since one of the outcomes of any analysis of an environmental situation is to highlight problems and point out where change is needed. However, we often overlook the many positive actions of individuals and organizations. Therefore, in this edition there are three new features that call attention to the positive. Going Green case studies describe actions that are having a positive environmental impact. Some of these actions are by governments, some are by corporations, and some are individual efforts. These case studies are identified by the “Going Green” icon. Campus Sustainability Initiatives highlight some of the many actions of students and the colleges and Universities they attend that are making a positive environmental impact. Thinking Green is an end-of-chapter feature that asks students to consider making changes that will have a positive environmental impact. The concept of interrelatedness is a core concept in environmental science. Although this concept can be illustrated in many ways, in this edition we have chosen to use water as a theme. In every chapter appears a water-themed case study, identified by the “water theme” icon. Sometimes the topic of water is also addressed as a heading in the text. Every chapter has new Going Green and water-themed case studies and a Campus Sustainability Initiative box. In addition many chapters have other significant changes. These are highlighted below. Chapter 1 Environmental Interrelationships has a new section entitled Interrelatedness is a Core Concept which uses as a theme John Muir’s statement “Tug on anything at all and you’ll find it connected to everything else in the universe.” It then highlights the changes brought about by the reintroduction of wolves into Yellowstone National Park to show how one simple change has far ranging impacts. A new illustration accompanies this addition. About 100 new photos have been added or substituted throughout the eleventh edition to present real-life situations. Over 50 illustrations, graphs, and charts are new or revised to present detailed information in a form that is easier to comprehend than if that same information were presented in text form. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Environmental Interrelationships Chapter 2 Environmental Ethics Chapter 3 Environmental Risk: Economics, Assessment, and Management Chapter 4 Interrelated Scientific Principles: Matter, Energy, and Environment Chapter 5 Interactions: Environments and Organisms Chapter 6 Kinds of Ecosystems and Communities Chapter 7 Populations: Characteristics and Issues Chapter 8 Energy and Civilization Chapter 9 Energy Sources Chapter 10 Nuclear Energy Chapter 11 Biodiversity Issues Chapter 12 Land-Use Planning Chapter 13 Soil and Its Uses Chapter 14 Agricultural Methods and Pest Management Chapter 15 Water Management Chapter 16 Air Quality Issues Chapter 17 Solid Waste Management and Disposal Chapter 18 Environmental Regulations: Hazardous Substances and Wastes Chapter 19 Environmental Policy and Decision Making Appendix 1 Periodic Table of the Elements Appendix 2 Metric Unit Conversion Tables Glossary Credits Index 161 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY Each chapter opens with “Learning Outcomes” that will help students organize study priorities. Rather than being imperative requirements, these objectives have been changed to more active questions that lead rather than command. Because few of us learn effectively without an opportunity to actively apply new ideas, new “Active Learning” boxes have been included throughout the text. These boxes provide a break in reading and invite students to practice or apply skills they have just learned. Each chapter opens with “Learning Outcomes” that will help students organize study priorities. Rather than being imperative requirements, these objectives have been changed to more active questions that lead rather than command. NEW International Edition PRINCIPLES OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 5th Edition By William P Cunningham, University of Minnesota--Minneapolis and Mary Ann Cunningham, Vassar College Numerous new photos have been added throughout the text to depict real-life situations. Several illustrations, graphs, and charts are new or revised to present realistic and current information in a form that is easier to comprehend than if that same material were presented in text. 2009 (September 2008) / 448 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-727064-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-128448-6 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/cunningham5e Rather than the 25 to 30 chapters found in most environmental science textbooks, the authors have limited Principles of Environmental Science: Inquiry and Applications to 15 chapters--perfect for the onesemester, non-majors environmental science course. True to its title, the goal of this concise text is to provide an up-to-date, introductory view of essential themes in environmental science along with offering students numerous opportunities to practice scientific thinking and active learning. NEW TO THIS EDITION The 5th edition has a number of updates that reflect recent events in energy, food, farming, population trends and other issues. Key revisions include: Chapter 2 features new discussions on ecological systems, nutrients, and isotopes in environmental science. Chapter 6 includes a new case study on the British Columbia’s Great Bear Rainforest and a new Exploring Science box on rangeland conservation in New Mexico. Also added is a major new section on world parks and preserves. Chapter 7 features a new section that emphasizes the dramatic changes in food production and hunger in the past 40 years, as well as the individual’s relationship to food production. This chapter also features new sections on the locavore movement, eating low on the food chain, and other sustainable activities. Chapter 9 has been heavily revised to include a new case study on ocean stabilization (geoengineering) to combat climate change, a new discussion of data from ice cores and correlation with historic climate shifts, an entire section on current climate rewritten based on the 2007 IPCC report, the economic projections by Sir Nicholas Stern, and examples of current progress in emissions reductions. In Chapter 12 a new emphasis on personal energy use and costs, new Table of energy use by common appliances (table 12.2), Expanded discussion of Hubbert’s peak and peak oil, expanded section on energy-efficient building and design, and new section on biomass fuels to reflect changes in policy and technology. New and revised pedagogical tools: Updated Case Studies. Every chapter opens with a Case Study that shows how the science presented in that chapter is of current interest. In this edition, the authors have chosen positive examples in which people are taking action to repair and improve some aspect of their environment. In addition, each case study has a new Locator Map that highlights the area of interest being discussed. New Google Earth placemarks are located in every chapter. Google Earth is an online program that provides interactive satellite imagery of the earth and will help students understand the geographic context of places and topics in the text. Data Analysis Exercises, found at the end of chapters, allow students to practice analyzing data, graphing data, and thinking analytically. In each exercise, students are asked to create or analyze graphs, to map or inspect a data set, or take other steps to analyze data. CONTENTS 1 Understanding Our Environment 2 Environmental Systems: Connections, Cycles, Flows, and Feedback Loops 3 Evolution, Species Interactions, and Biological Communities 4 Human Populations 5 Biomes and Biodiversity 6 Environmental Conservation: Forests, Grasslands, Parks, and Nature Preserves 7 Food and Agriculture 8 Environmental Health and Toxicology 9 Air: Climate and Pollution 10 Water: Resources and Pollution 11 Environmental Geology and Earth Resources 12 Energy 13 Solid and Hazardous Waste 14 Economics and Urbanization 15 Environmental Policy and Sustainability International Edition ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE A Global Concern, 10th Edition By William P Cunningham, University of Minnesota--Minneapolis, Mary Ann Cunningham, Vassar College and Barbara Woodworth Saigo, St Cloud State University 2008 (October 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-722122-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-128778-4 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/cunningham10e Environmental Science: A Global Concern, Tenth Edition, is a comprehensive presentation of environmental science for non-science majors which emphasizes critical thinking, environmental responsibility, and global awareness. This book is intended for use in a one- or twosemester course in environmental science, human ecology, or environmental studies at the college or advanced placement high school level. The goal of this book is to provide an up-to-date, introductory global view of essential themes in environmental science along with emphasis on details and case studies that will help students process and retain the general principles. Because most students who will use this book are freshman or sophomore non-science majors, the authors make the text readable and accessible without technical jargon or a presumption of prior science background. 162 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY 14 A Reduction in Atmospheric Ozone: Let the Sunshine In Living Off the Land: Soils, Food Production, and Forests 15 Soil: A Potentially Sustainable Resource 16 Agriculture: The Ecology of Growing Food 17 Forests: So Much More Than Wood Air and Water Resources 18 Water Resources 19 Air Pollution: Costs and Benefits of Clean Air Energy and Materials 20 Fossil Fuels: The Lifeblood of the Global Economy 21 Nuclear Power 22 Renewable Energy and Energy Efficiency 23 Materials, Society, and the Environment 24 A Sustainable Future: Will Business as Usual Get Us There? CONTENTS Learning to Learn Part One Principles for Understanding Our Environment 1 Understanding Our Environment 2 Frameworks for Understanding: Science, Systems, and Ethics 3 Matter, Energy, and Life 4 Evolution, Biological Communities, and Species Interactions 5 Biomes: Global Patterns of Life 6 Population Biology Part Two People in the Environment 7 Human Populations 8 Environmental Health and Toxicology 9 Food and Agriculture 10 Pest Control Part Three Understanding and Managing Living Systems 11 Biodiversity 12 Land Use: Forests and Grasslands 13 Preserving and Restoring Nature Part Four Physical Resources and Environmental Systems 14 Geology and Earth Resources 15 Air, Weather, and Climate 16 Air Pollution 17 Water Use and Management 18 Water Pollution Part Five Issues and Policy 19 Conventional Energy 20 Sustainable Energy 21 Solid, Toxic, and Hazardous Waste 22 Urbanization and Sustainable Cities 23 Ecological Economics 24 Environmental Policy, Law, and Planning 25 What Then Shall We Do? GLOBAL WARMING AND CLIMATE CHANGE DEMYSTIFIED By Jerry Silver 2008 / 289 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-150240-5 A Professional Reference Title Global Warming & Climate Change Demystified starts by looking at scientific data gathered from weather instruments, satellite telemetry, ice cores, and coral sections that reveal how the Earth’s temperature is changing. The book goes on to examine the causes of climate change, including both natural processes and human-generated greenhouse gases. Finally, the consequences of global warming are discussed and a wide variety of viable solutions that can be implemented by individuals as well as society as a whole are presented. Complete with end-of-chapter quizzes and a final review to test your knowledge, this book will teach you the fundamentals of global warming and climate change in an unbiased and thorough manner. International Edition CONTENTS ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE By Robert Kaufmann and Cutler Cleveland of Boston University 2008 (February 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331186-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-110196-7 [IE] www.mhhe.com/kaufmann1e Unlike any other introductory environmental science text, Robert Kaufmann and Cutler Cleveland’s Environmental Science takes a fresh approach to the subject by weaving themes of energy and materials, economic systems, and policy throughout the entire text. A story of real science is simply told through examples of cuttingedge content, real-world applications, and a distinctive conceptual illustration program. CONTENTS Introduction to Environmental Science 1 Environment and Society: A Sustainable Partnership? Building a Framework to Study Environmental Problems 2 The Laws of Energy and Matter 3 Systems: Why Are Environmental Problems So Difficult to Solve? How the Natural Environment Works 4 THe Physical Systems of Planet Earth: The Engine of Life 5 The Flow of Energy in Biological Systems: Why Does It Matter? 6 The Flow of Matter in the Environment: Why Does It Matter? 7 Biomes: Where Do Plants and Animals Live? 8 Succession: How Do Ecosystems Respond to Disturbance? How Human Systems Work 9 Carrying Capacity: How Large a Population? 10 An Ecological View of the Economy 11 The Driving Forces of Environmental Change Global Environmental Challenges 12 Biodiversity: Species and So Much More 13 Global Climate Change: A Warming Planet Acknowledgments Chapter 1. Global Perspective--Thinking About the Earth PART ONE: WHAT WE KNOW AND HOW WE KNOW IT Chapter 2. Taking the Earth’s Temperature Chapter 3. Signs of Global Warming PART TWO: WHY CLIMATE CHANGES Chapter 4. The Earth’s Thermostat--Keeping the Earth Warm Chapter 5. Greenhouse Chemistry Chapter 6. Origin and Impact of Greenhouse Gases PART THREE: WHAT WE CAN EXPECT AND WHAT WE CAN DO Chapter 7. Consequences of Global Warming Chapter 8. Resetting the Earth’s Thermostat--Solutions Appendix A. Glossary Appendix B. Milestones in the History of Climate Change Appendix C. Satellites That Monitor Weather and Climate Appendix D. Units of Measurement Applied to Climate Change Appendix E. Selected Resources Appendix F. Summary of Key Climate Variables Appendix G. Lingering Doubts and Concerns Appendix H. Answers to Chapter Review Questions Appendix I. Answers to Final Exam Index 163 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY Ecology NEW International Edition ECOLOGY Concepts and Applications, 5th Edition By Manuel Molles, University of New MexicoAlbuquerque 2010 (February 2009) / 640 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-338322-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-017168-8 [IE] http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0073383228 This introductory general ecology text features a strong emphasis on helping students grasp the main concepts of ecology while keeping the presentation more applied than theoretical. An evolutionary perspective forms the foundation of the entire discussion. The book begins with the natural history of the planet, considers portions of the whole in the middle chapters, and ends with another perspective of the entire planet in the concluding chapter. Its unique organization of focusing only on several key concepts in each chapter sets it apart from the competition. NEW TO THIS EDITION The introduction now links the historical foundations of ecology with developing frontiers. Emphasis is placed on how new tools, such as stable isotope analysis and canopy access cranes, provide more powerful ways of investigating ecological systems, as we explore and attempt to sustain biodiversity in the face of global climate change and other environmental pressures. The evolutionary foundation for the book has been strengthened. The chapter on population genetics and natural selection has been moved from 8th position, in section III, to 4th, in section I. Section I is now titled Natural History and Evolution. Moving evolution to this point in the text sets all the material to follow in a stronger evolutionary framework. This is particularly significant to section II, which retitled as Adaptations to the Environment. CONTENTS The overall conceptual foundation of the text has been enriched. New concepts presented include the principle of allocation, apparent competition, indirect mutualism and the ecology of fear. The treatment of nutrient cycling has been improved. The nutrient cycling presentation now appears under its own umbrella concept and is buttressed by the addition of central concepts, including nutrient sinks, sources, fluxes, and pools, which are critical for understanding contemporary issues related to the buildup of atmospheric carbon dioxide. Lessons learned through the Investigating the Evidence boxes enrich the graphical presentation. Confidence intervals and standard error bars are added to selected graphs once the statistical concepts are introduced in section IV. New supplementary materials placed online. Suggested readings, answers to concept review questions and answers to critiquing the evidence questions are now online. In addition, examples cut from the fourth edition are also available online. New chapter opener photos, related to chapter content, have been added to enrich the visual presentation of ecology. Significant Changes In chapter 2, the maps of individual biomes are now supplemented by a global map of all the terrestrial biomes that appears on the inside back cover of the test. In chapter 4, the treatment of evolution by natural selection is extended by presenting Darwin’s conceptual connection of artificial selection to natural selection and discussing the significance of evolution to agriculture, including genetic engineering and genetically modified organisms. In chapter 5, the principle of allocation and the concept of tradeoffs is elaborated, improves the foundation for all subsequent discussions of environmental adaptations. In chapter 7, the trophic diversity of life is underscored by presenting the ecology of photosynthetic autotrophs, chemosynthetic autotrophs, and heterotrophs under separate concepts. Photorespiration is also presented and tied to the evolution of alternative photosynthetic pathways. In chapter 9, the niche concept is moved up earlier in the text and tied to patterns of distribution. In chapter 13, the niche concept is revisited and connected to the concept of competitive exclusion. In chapter 14, the ecology of fear is discussed within the context of refuges and its significance presented within the context of wolf restoration in Yellowstone National Park. The discussion foreshadows trophic cascades which appear in chapter 18. In chapter 15, the material on mycorrhizae and is updated and improved by presenting the functional equilibrium model for allocation of energy by plants. In chapter 16, the discussion of disturbance is extended to include the extreme levels of disturbance wrought by humans and to point out how these levels of extension tie into the predictions of the intermediate disturbance hypothesis. The sampling discussion in Investigating the Evidence is tied to the canopy crane research introduced in chapter one. In chapter 17, indirect interactions, including indirect commensalism and apparent competition are introduced under a new concept and developed both with text and new artwork. In chapter 18, trophic cascades are presented under the conceptual umbrella of indirect interactions, which were introduced in the previous chapter. In chapter 19, nutrient cycles are more carefully presented within an enriched conceptual context and tied to current environmental concerns about the buildup of atmospheric carbon dioxide. In chapter 21, edge effects and ecotones are included to better define landscape structure for students and to prepare for material on habitat fragmentation in chapter 23. 1 Introduction to Ecology: Historical Foundations and Developing Frontiers Section I Natural History and Evolution 2 Life on Land 3 Life and Water 4 Population Genetics and Natural Selection Section II Adaptations to the Environment 5 Temperature Relations 6 Water Relations 7 Energy and Nutrient Relations 8 Social Relations Section III Population Ecology 9 Population Distribution and Abundance 10 Population Dynamics 11 Population Growth 12 Life Histories Section IV Interactions 13 Competition 14 Exploitative Interactions: Predation, Herbivory, Parasitism, and Disease 15 Mutualism Section V Communities and Ecosystems 16 Species Abundance and Diversity 164 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY 17 Species Interactions and Community Structure 18 Primary Production and Energy Flow 19 Nutrient Cycling and Retention 20 Succession and Stability Section VI Large-Scale Ecology 21 Landscape Ecology 22 Geographic Ecology 23 Global Ecology 15 Natural Selection 16 Adaptations of Vertebrates to Their Environment 17 Adaptations of Plants to Their Environment Evolution Laboratory International Edition INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGICAL EVOLUTION 2nd Edition By Kenneth Kardong, Washington State University-Pullman 2008 (January 2007) / 416 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-305077-5 ISBN:978-0-07-128582-7 [IE] NEW ECOLOGY LAB MANUAL http://www.mhhe.com/kardongevolution2e By Darrell S Vodopich, Baylor University 2010 (February 2009) / 256 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-338318-7 Darrell Vodopich, co-author of Biology Laboratory Manual, has written a new lab manual for ecology. This lab manual offers straightforward procedures that are do-able in a board range of classroom, lab and field situations. FEATURES Straightforward, do-able procedures. Procedures are do-able in a broad range of classroom, lab, and field situations. Procedures have specific instructions that can be taught by a teaching assistant with minimal experience as well as by a professor. Emphasis on lab and field activity rather than detailed theoretical presentations. Manual is about doing ecology, not just reading theoretical information. Key Terms – boldfaced at first occurrence. Numbered lists Tables Questions following A heads. Questions for Further Thought and Study are found at the end of each chapter. CONTENTS 1 The Nature of Data 2 The Process of Science 3 Soil Analysis 4 Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide Cycling 5 Population Growth 6 Age Distribution and Survivorship 7 Terrestrial Plant Community Assessment 8 Stream Ecosystem Assessment 9 Micro Community Assessment 10 Sampling a Plant Community 11 Sampling Animal Communities 12 Species Diversity 13 Primary Production in an Aquatic Community 14 Competition Written for a general college audience, this book offers an introduction to the principles and significance of Darwinian evolution. It differs from most other textbooks on evolution in three fundamental ways: First, it is intended for students taking evolution early in their studies. Second, it examines the intellectual significance of Darwinian evolution. Third, the text departs from the standard treatment of evolution in other textbooks, wherein the arguments are reductionist, molecular, and overwhelmingly genetic in emphasis. Ken Kardong, also author of Vertebrates; Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, is known for his accessible writing style. His almost conversational approach to this topic puts the reader at ease while learning evolutionary concepts. The result is an inviting book--that will be read. CONTENTS 1 Evolution of Evolution 2 Time 3 Heredity 4 Emergence of Life 5 Diversity of Life 6 Evidence of Evolution 7 Selection 8 Variation: Spice of Life 9 Speciation 10 Co-Evolution 11 Life History Strategies 12 Life in Groups 13 Extinctions 14 Human Evolution: The Early Years 15 Human Evolution: Building Modern Humans 16 Evolutionary Biology: Today and Beyond 17 Afterword Appendix 1 Cell Division--A Review Appendix 2 Taxonomy Appendix 3 Molecular Clocks 165 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE & ECOLOGY 166 167 GEOGRAPHY GIS ................................................................................................................. 169 Human/Cultural Geography ..............................................................................170 Intro to Geography........................................................................................... 170 Map Use/Cartography ..................................................................................... 172 Physical Geography Lab ..................................................................................171 World Regional Geography ..............................................................................173 NEW TITLES GEOGRAPHY 2010 Author ISBN-13 Introduction to Geographic Information Systems with Data Files CD-ROM, 5e Chang 9780077294366 169 Mastering ArcGIS with CD Videoclips, 4e Price 9780077293321 169 2009 Author ISBN-13 Contemporary World Regional Geography, 3e Bradshaw 9780073051505 173 Cartography: Thematic Map Design, 6e Dent 9780072943825 172 Introduction to Geography, 12e Getis 9780073522821 170 Physical Geography Laboratory Manual Lemke 9780077276034 171 Page GEOGRAPHY 168 Page GEOGRAPHY GIS NEW NEW International Edition MASTERING ARCGIS WITH CD VIDEOCLIPS 4th Edition INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS WITH DATA FILES CD-ROM 5th Edition By Maribeth H Price, South Dakota School Mines & Technology 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-729332-1 By Kang-Tsung (Karl) Chang 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-729436-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-126758-8 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/changgis5e Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, 5e is designed to provide students in a first or second GIS course with a solid foundation in both GIS concepts and the use of GIS. Introduction to GIS strikes a careful balance between GIS concepts and hands-on applications. The main portion of the chapter presents GIS terms and concepts and helps students learn how each one fits into a complete GIS system. At the end of each chapter, an application section with 2-7 tasks presents students with actual GIS exercises and the necessary data to solve the problem. NEW TO THIS EDITION This edition has combined georelational and object-based vector data models into one chapter. A couple of years ago the majority of GIS users were still using georelational vector data such as shapefiles. But now many have turned to object-based vector data such as the geodatabase. Therefore it makes sense to combine these two data models into a chapter and simply call the chapter vector data model. New and updated information on: Joins, relates, and relationship classes (Chapter 8) Cartographic representation (Chapter 9) Point pattern analysis (Chapter 11) Viewshed analysis (Chapter 14) Geocoding (Chapter 15). CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Coordinate Systems 3 Vector Data Model 4 Raster Data Model 5 GIS Data Acquisition 6 Geometric Transformation 7 Spatial Data Editing 8 Attribute Data Management 9 Data Display and Cartography 10 Data Exploration 11 Vector Data Analysis 12 Raster Data Analysis 13 Terrain Mapping and Analysis 14 Viewsheds and Watershed 15 Spatial Interpolation 16 Geocoding and Dynamic Segmentation 17 Path Analysis and Network Applications 18 GIS Models and Modeling Price: Mastering ArcGIS is an introductory GIS text that is designed to offer everything you need to master the basic elements of GIS. The author’s step-by-step approach helps students negotiate the challenging tasks involved in learning sophisticated GIS software. This text employs a carefully developed learning system to help students use ArcView 9.3 or ArcGIS Desktop or higher, to set up and solve GIS problems. An innovative and unique feature of Mastering ArcGIS is its accompanying CD-ROM with narrated video clips that show students exactly how to perform chapter tutorials before attempting an exercise on their own. NEW TO THIS EDITION This new edition of the text has been updated to reflect ArcView 9.3 software. New reorganization, to include the following three main sections: I-Files and basic skills (current chapters 1,2,4,5,9) II- Spatial Analysis (current chapters 6,7,8,14, 15) III- Data Management (current chapters 3,10,11,12,13) CONTENTS Introduction 1 Introducing ArcGIS 2 Working with ArcMap 3 Coordinate Systems and Map Projections 4 Drawing and Symbolizing Features 5 Working with Tables 6 Queries 7 Spatial Joins 8 Geoprocessing 9 Presenting Data 10 Geocoding 11 Basic Editing in ArcMap 12 More Editing Techniques 13 Working with Geodatabases 14 Analyzing Networks 15 Raster Analysis Glossary Selected Answers Index Conversion Table 169 GEOGRAPHY Human / Cultural Geography Intro to Geography NEW International Edition International Edition HUMAN GEOGRAPHY 10th Edition INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHY 12th Edition By Jerome D Fellmann, University of Illinois-- Champaign, Arthur Getis and Judith Getis of San Diego State University-San Diego 2008 (September 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-721604-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-128790-6 [IE] By Arthur Getis, San Diego State University, Judith Getis and Jerome D Fellmann www.mhhe.com/fellmann10e Fellmann’s Human Geography introduces students to the scope and excitement of human geography and its relevance to their daily lives. This edition continues to convey the breadth of human geography and to provide insight into the nature and intellectual challenges of the field of geography itself. The authors pay special attention to gender issues and assume no previous experience in geography on the part of the students. CONTENTS 1 Introduction: Some Background Basics Part 1 Themes and Fundamentals of Human Geography 2 Roots and Meaning of Culture 3 Spatial Interaction and Spatial Behavior 4 Population: World Patterns, Regional Trends Part 2 Patterns of Diversity and Unity 5 Language and Religion: Mosaics of Culture 6 Ethnic Geography: Threads of Diversity 7 Folk and Popular Culture: Diversity and Uniformity Part 3 Dynamic Patterns of the Space Economy 8 Livelihood and Economy: Primary Activities 9 Livelihood and Economy: From Blue Collar to Gold Collar 10 Patterns of Development and Change Part 4 Landscapes of Functional Organization 11 Urban Systems and Urban Structures 12 The Political Ordering of Space Part 5 Human Actions and Environmental Impacts 13 Human Impacts on Natural Systems Appendix A Map Projections Appendix B 2006 World Population Data Appendix C Anglo America Reference Map INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] 2009 (September 2008) / 576 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-352282-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-128453-0 [IE] www.mhhe.com/getis12e This market-leading book introduces college students to the breadth and spatial insights of the field of geography. The authors’ approach allows the major research traditions of geography to dictate the principal themes. Chapter 1 introduces students to the four organizing traditions that have emerged through the long history of geographical thought and writing: earth science, culture-environment, location, and area analysis. Each of the four parts of this book centers on one of these geographic perspectives. NEW TO THIS EDITION Updating of facts and analyses have been made in such things as production and consumption of natural resources,in spatially variable patterns of population growth and decline, and in the population of major urban areas. New or revised treatment on virtual and interative maps in chapter 2. New or revised content on the reports of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate, ethanol production in the US, migration patterns and urban sprawl. CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Maps Part 1 The Earth Science Tradition 3 Physical Geography: Landforms 4 Physical Geography: Weather and Climate 5 The Geography of Natural Resources Part 2 The Culture-Environment Tradition 6 Population Geography 7 Cultural Geography 8 Spatial Interaction 9 Political Geography Part 3 The Location Tradition 10 Economic Geography 11 An Urban World 12 Human Impact on the Environment Part 4 The Area Analysis Tradition 13 The Regional Concept Appendices Glossary Index Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 170 GEOGRAPHY Physical Geography Lab CHANGING LANDSCAPES OF SINGAPORE By Peggy Teo, Brenda S A Yeoh, Ooi Giok Ling and Karen P Y Lai 2004 / 240 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-123479-5 An Asian Publication The transformations that have occurred in Singapore’s landscape have been rapid since independence. Changing Landscapes of Singapore discusses these changes from the perspective of lived landscapes which have day-to-day meanings for Singaporeans. It begins with an exploration of the major physical changes resulting from rapid urbanisation and industrialisation and Singapore’s attempt to balance the stresses of physical development with the needs of a green agenda. Several other themes relating to landscape change follow. A section on landscapes of community and nationhood investigates how issues concerning shelter (public housing), heritage conservation, street-names and national symbols affect Singaporeans’ notions of belonging. This is followed by a discussion on globalisation and the way it affects the nationstate’s development. This section examines not only Singapore’s efforts at regionalisation and its attempt to gain a better foothold in the workings of the global capitalistic system but also evaluates the impacts of globalisation on the society. The last section on forgotten landscapes is a reminder of who and what may be left behind in striving for excellence. Landscapes reveal and refl ect forgotten needs as much as they record what have been remembered and valued. The various strands are brought together in the fi nal chapter where the landscape is used as a lens to raise questions on future challenges. While intended as a general text for university students, this book will also provide source materials for school teachers (junior college and upper secondary levels), the general student population as well as the general reader interested in understanding the country’s rapid landscape changes. CONTENTS 1 Introduction: Changing Landscapes of Singapore Part I NATURAL ENVIRONMENTS AND ENGINEERED LANDSCAPES 2 Environmental Planning and Management 3 Engineered Biophysical Landscapes: Parks and Open Spaces for Recreation Part II LANDSCAPES OF COMMUNITY AND NATIONHOOD 4 Urbanisation and Landscape Changes 5 The Nation, Its Signs and Symbols: Street-names and Monuments 6 Public Housing: The Housing of a Nation 7 Landscapes of Heritage: Historic and Cultural Districts Part III LANDSCAPES OF GLOBALISATION 8 Achieving Global City Status: Industrial Restructuring and Regionalisation 9 Tourism Capital: Reinterpreting Tourism Space 10 Transnational Connectivities and Local Tensions Part IV FORGOTTEN LANDSCAPES 11 Neglected Landscapes: Old and Forgotten Singaporeans 12 Landscapes of Death: Cemeteries, Crematoria and Columbaria 13 Changing Landscapes and Future Challenges: A Review NEW PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY LABORATORY MANUAL By Karen Lemke, Michael Ritter and Neil Heywood of University of Wisc Stevens Point 2009 (March 2008) / 352 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-727603-4 http://www.mhhe.com/lemke1e Lemke et al: Physical Geography Laboratory Manual is a comprehensive introductory manual for students without a previous science background. An abundant set of 21 exercises assures that every professor will find a complete set of preferred labs for a semesterlong course. Lemke/Ritter/Heywood wrote this lab manual in order to provide equal coverage of the four spheres of the environment—the atmosphere, biosphere, hydrosphere, and lithosphere. The lab manual was written independent of any specific textbook and will work with available physical geography texts. FEATURES A total of 21 exercises are included in the Lemke et al: Physical Geography Laboratory Manual, providing comprehensive coverage of the four spheres of the environment—the atmosphere, biosphere, hydrosphere, and lithosphere. Each exercise includes clearly stated Purpose, Learning Objectives, Introduction, and list of Important Terms in addition to the narrative and exercise worksheets. Fully worked examples (e.g., determining noon sun angle) immediately follow the description of an exercise and its instructions. Full-color artwork, photographs, and especially topographical maps appear within Appendices E and F. Exercise worksheets include a combination of short answer, essay, and numerical solution (math problems) type of questions. CONTENTS EXERCISES 1. Earth-Sun Geometry and Insolation 2. Radiation and Energy Balance at the Earth’s Surface 3. Atmospheric Temperature 4. Atmospheric Pressure, Circulation and Wind 5. Water in the Atmosphere 6. Lapse Rates, Adiabatic Processes and Cloud Development 7. Midlatitude Weather and Weather Map Interpretation 8. Climate Classification and Regional Climates 9. Soil Moisture Budgets 10. Analysis of Soil Moisture Properties 11. Climate, Net Primary Production and Decomposition 12. Vegetation Form and Range 13. Bioclimatic Transects 14. Coincident Climates, Vegetation and Soils 15. Rainforest Regeneration Analysis Using Aerial Imagery 16. Introduction to Topographic Maps 17. Igneous Landforms 18. Drainage Basin Analysis 171 GEOGRAPHY 19. Fluvial Landforms 20. Glacial Landforms 21. Coastal Landforms Appendix A. Units of Measures and Conversions Appendix B. Drawing Isolines Appendix C. Constructing Profiles Appendix D. Using Pocket Stereoscopes Appendix E. Exercise Topographic Maps and Photos Appendix F. Thematic World Maps 11 Dynamic Representation: The Design of Flow Maps PART III DESIGNING THEMATIC MAPS 12 The Map Design Process and the Elements of Map Composition 13 Making the Map Readable: The Intelligent Use of Type 14 Principles for Color Thematic Maps PART IV MAP PRODUCTION 15 Printing Fundamentals and Prepress Operation for the Cartographer 16 Introduction to Virtual and Web Mapping PART V EFFECTIVE GRAPHING FOR CARTOGRAPHERS 17 Effective Graphing for Cartographers APPENDIXES Map Use / Cartography International Edition MAP USE AND ANALYSIS 4th Edition NEW By John Campbell, University of Wisconsin – Parkside 2001 / 384 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-303748-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-125264-5 [IE] CARTOGRAPHY Thematic Map Design, 6th Edition By Borden D Dent (Deceased), Jeff Torguson, Saint Cloud State University and Thomas W Hodler, University of Georgia 2009 (August 2008) / 368 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-294382-5 http://www.mhhe.com/dent6e This introductory textbook introduces students to the different types of map projections, map design, and map production. Cartography is generally for a sophomore or junior level course for geography majors and many professors are beginning to introduce computer cartography throughout the course. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW authors: Jeffrey S. Torguson and Thomas W. Hodler. Improved internal organization within chapters. A new chapter on virtual and web mapping (Chapter 17). Increased coverage of cartographical GIS. An EXPANDED 16-page Color Plate section. NEW updated maps and graphics. CONTENTS PART I THEMATIC MAPPING ESSENTIALS 1 Introduction to Thematic Mapping 2 Basic Geodesy, Coordinate Systems, and Scale 3 Map Projections 4 The Nature of Geographic Data and the Selection of Thematic Map Symbols 5 Descriptive Statistics and Data Classification PART II TECHNIQUES OF QUANTITATIVE THEMATIC MAPPING 6 Mapping Enumeration and Other Areally Aggregated Data: The Choropleth Map 7 The Dot Density Map 8 From Point to Point: The Proportional Symbol Map 9 Mapping Geographic Surfaces: Isarithmic and Three-Dimensional Maps 10 The Cartogram: Value-by-Area Mapping www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geography/campbell4e CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Basic Mapping Processes Chapter 3 Map Projections Chapter 4 Locational and Land-Partitioning Systems Chapter 5 Scale and Generalization Concepts Chapter 6 Measurement from Maps Chapter 7 Route Selection and Navigation Chapter 8 Terrain Representation Chapter 9 Contour Interpretation Chapter 10 Topographic Features Chapter 11 Qualitative and Quantitative Information Chapter 12 Characteristics of Map Features: Shape and Point Patterns Chapter 13 Characteristics of Map Features: Networks and Trees Chapter 14 Cartograms and Special Purpose Maps Chapter 15 Maps and Graphs Chapter 16 Map Misuse Chapter 17 Remote Sensing from Airborne Platforms Chapter 18 Remote Sensing from Space Chapter 19 Computer-Assisted Cartography Chapter 20 Digital Map Applications Chapter 21 Geographic Information Systems Appendixes: A U.S. and Canadian Map Producers and Information Sources B Foreign Maps C Copyright D Magnetic Compass Use E Map Storage and Cataloging Systems F British National Grid 172 GEOGRAPHY World Regional Geography ESSENTIALS OF WORLD REGIONAL GEOGRAPHY By Michael Bradshaw, College of St. Mark & John, George White, Frostburg State University, Joseph Dymond, George Washington University and Elizabeth Chacko 2008 (September 2007) / 384 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-335938-0 www.mhhe.com/bradshawessentials1e NEW International Edition CONTEMPORARY WORLD REGIONAL GEOGRAPHY 3rd Edition By Michael Bradshaw, College of St Mark & John, Joseph Dymond, George Washington University, George White, Frostburg State University and Elizabeth Chacko, George Washington University 2009 (September 2009) / 624 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-305150-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-128451-6 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/bradshaw3e Contemporary World Regional Geography provides a current, balanced geographical study of world issues through analysis of ten world regions and the countries in each. It integrates the themes of “global connections” and “local voices” and utilizes a consistent structure within each chapter. NEW to the 3rd edition, each chapter is now organized to begin with environmental issues of the region followed by historical geography, global and local issues and economic, political, cultural, and social issues. The greatest advantage of the new organization is that students will be able to easily compare one region with another to understand similarities and differences. NEW TO THIS EDITION Previous edition’s Chapter 6 on Southeast Asia and South Pacific has been split into 2 separate chapters. The new Chapter 6 retains coverage on Southeast Asia. Information on the South Pacific is now covered in a new Chapter 10 called Australia, Oceania, and Antarctica. Improved internal chapter organization. This shorter version of the highly successful Contemporary World Regional Geography, 2e gives readers a fresh new approach that combines fundamental geographical elements, internal regional diversity, and contemporary issues. This approach allows serious discussion of cultural and environmental issues, as well as political and economic issues. The main innovation in this completely rewritten text is in the ordering of the material covered. While other texts cut photos, illustrations, and boxed material from their WRG books, this essentials version is a completely rewritten text by the authors of Contemporary World Regional Geography, 2e. Each of the nine regional chapters opens with a one- or two-page map of the region, short accounts of people or events to provide a personal flavor of the region, an outline of the chapter contents, and a short section placing the region in its wider global context. Each regional chapter is consistently organized by three sections. The first section summarizes the distinctive physical and human geographies of the region; the second section explores the internal diversity of the region at subregional, selected country, and local levels. The third section focuses on a selection of contemporary issues that are important to the people of each region and frequently have implications for the rest of the world. Each regional chapter follows the same framework, allowing students to easily make comparisons from one world region to the next. Students are encouraged to consider what it means to be part of a global community and to develop their geographical understandings of world events. The authors have created a text that is readable, with a consistent structure within chapters, containing superior maps and illustrations, and finally – to offer a concise and more affordable text. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Essentials of World Regional Geography Chapter 2 Europe Chapter 3 Russia and Neighboring Countries Chapter 4 East Asia Chapter 5 Southeast Asia and South Pacific Chapter 6 South Asia Chapter 7 Northern Africa and Southwestern Asia Chapter 8 Africa South of the Sahara Chapter 9 Latin America Chapter 10 North America Many NEW photos have been added to the text to give students an even more complete visual presentation of each region. All climate and population distribution maps have been redrawn. All physical features maps have been enlarged and redrawn showing major physical features, country boundaries, and capital cities. Every map has been evaluated for size, labeling, and color consistency. Foldout map at the back of the book features world climates and urbanization and migration maps. CONTENTS 1 Globalization and World Regions 2 Concepts in World Regional Geography 3 Europe 4 Russia and Neighboring Countries 5 East Asia 6 Southeast Asia 7 South Asia 8 Northern Africa and Southwestern Asia 9 Africa South of the Sahara 10 Australia, Oceania, and Antarctica 11 Latin America 12 North America 13 A World of Geography Glossary of Key Terms Index COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 173 GEOGRAPHY 174 175 GEOLOGY Earth Science .................................................................................................. 177 Environmental Geology ....................................................................................178 Hazards/Natural Disasters............................................................................... 178 Historical Geology ........................................................................................... 179 Oceanography ................................................................................................. 180 Paleontology .....................................................................................................181 Physical Geology - Laboratory ..................................................................................................183 - Textbook .....................................................................................................181 NEW TITLES GEOLOGY 2010 Author ISBN-13 Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 7e Jones 9780073369396 2009 Author ISBN-13 Natural Disasters, 7e Abbott 9780073376691 178 Physical Geology: Earth Revealed, 8e Carlson 9780073376677 181 Introduction to the Worlds Ocean, 10e Sverdrup 9780073376707 180 Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 14e Zumberge 9780073051499 183 Page 183 GEOLOGY 176 Page GEOLOGY Earth Science International Edition EARTH SCIENCE Understanding Environmental Systems By Edgar W. Spencer, Washington & Lee University 2003 / 544 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-234146-1 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-121876-4 [IE] International Edition THE GOOD EARTH Introduction to Earth Sciences http://www.mhhe.com/spencer CONTENTS By David McConnell, David Steer, Katherine Owens, Catherine Knight and Lisa Park of University of Akron 2008 (March 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-325650-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-110220-9 [IE] www.mhhe.com/thegoodearth The Good Earth (TGE) is the product of collaboration between the content rigor provided by Earth Science specialists (McConnell, Park, Steer) and the results of research on learning as contributed by pedagogical experts (Knight, Owens). TGE has been explicitly designed to be compatible with inquiry-based, active learning in the college classroom. The structural elements of this text will allow the instructor to incorporate these student-centered teaching methods into their Earth Science course. The authors have tested the book’s content and pedagogy in large Earth Science classes for non-majors that are populated with mostly freshmen. Their experiences show that the materials and methods in TGE can improve students’ learning, increase daily attendance, reduce attrition, and increase students’ enthusiasm in comparison with classes taught following a traditional lecture format. The authors have chosen to emphasize three scientific themes throughout the text: i) scientific literacy; ii) Earth Science and the human experience; and, iii) the science of global change. The discussion of scientific methods is woven into the text throughout. They have included numerous examples of human interaction with the Earth that can serve as entry points for students to appreciate the nature of science. Global change is a theme that is evident in much current Earth Science research so our authors have used global change as a content theme throughout the book. CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Earth Science 2 Earth in Space 3 Near-Earth Objects 4 Plate Tectonics 5 Earthquakes 6 Volcanoes and Mountains 7 Rocks and Minerals 8 Geologic Time 9 Weathering and Soils 10 Slope Failure 11 Streams and Floods 12 Groundwater and Wetlands 13 Oceans and Coastlines 14 The Atmosphere 15 Weather Systems 16 Earth’s Climate System 17 Global Change I Introduction to Earth System Science Unit I Major Elements of the Earth System 1 The Building Blocks of Earth Materials 2 Minerals and the Rock Cycle 3 Earth Model—Core-Mantle System 4 Time and Change in Earth Systems Unit II The Plate Tectonic System 5 Plate Tectonics and Mountain Building 6 Earthquakes 7 Volcanic Activity Unit III Earth’s Physical Climate System Part 1 Oceans and Coasts 8 The Sea Floor and Marine Environments 9 Ocean Dynamics 10 Coasts and Coastal Environments Part 2 The Atmosphere 11 Earth’s Atmosphere 12 The Atmosphere in Motion 13 Climate—Past, Present, and Future Part 3 The Land Surface 14 Introduction to Earth’s Land Environments 15 Weathering and Soil Development 16 Mass Wasting—The Work of Gravity 17 The Role of the Wind 18 Streams 19 GroundWater 20 The Role of Ice in Earth Systems Unit IV The Solar System and Its Place in the Universe 21 Earth’s Neighbors in Space—The Solar System 22 Beyond the Solar System Appendix A Units and Conversions Appendix B Minerals Appendix C Rock Identification Appendix D Topographic and Geologic Maps Appendix E Star Charts Appendix F The Periodic Table of Elements Appendix G Glossary INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 177 GEOLOGY Environmental Geology Hazards / Natural Disasters International Edition ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY 8th Edition NEW By Carla W Montgomery, Northern Illinois University 2008 (October 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-721605-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-128362-5 [IE] NATURAL DISASTERS 7th Edition www.mhhe.com/montgomery8 Environmental Geology, 8e presents the student with a broad overview of environmental geology. The text looks both at how the earth developed into its present condition and where matters seem to be moving for the future. It is hoped that this knowledge will provide the student with a useful foundation for discussing and evaluating specific environmental issues, as well as for developing ideas about how the problems should be solved. CONTENTS Section One Foundations 1 An Overview of Our Planetary Environment 2 Rocks and Minerals—A First Look Section Two Internal Processes 3 Plate Tectonics 4 Earthquakes 5 Volcanoes Section Three Surface Processes 6 Streams and Flooding 7 Coastal Zones and Processes 8 Mass Movements 9 Ice and Glaciers, Wind and Deserts 10 Climate—Past, Present, and Future Section Four Resources 11 Water as a Resource 12 Soil as a Resource 13 Mineral and Rock Resources 14 Energy Resources—Fossil Fuels 15 Energy Resources—Alternative Sources Section Five Waste Disposal, Pollution, and Health 16 Waste Disposal 17 Water Pollution 18 Air Pollution Section Six Other Related Topics 19 Environmental Law 20 Land-Use Planning and Engineering Geology Appendix A Geologic Time, Geologic Process Rates Appendix B Introduction to Topographic and Geologic Maps and Remotely Sensed Imagery Appendix C Mineral and Rock Identification By Patrick Leon Abbott, San Diego State University 2009 (December 2008) / 512 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337669-1 http://www.mhhe.com/abbott7e Natural Disasters, 7th edition, focuses on how the normal processes of the Earth concentrate their energies and deal heavy blows to humans and their structures. It is concerned with how the natural world operates and, in so doing, kills and maims humans and destroys their works. Throughout the book, certain themes are maintained: energy sources underlying disasters plate tectonics and climate change; earth processes operating in rock, water, and atmosphere; significance of geologic time; complexities of multiple variables operating simultaneously; detailed and readable case studies. NEW TO THIS EDITION New and Expanded Content: Weather principles are expanded and integrated into one chapter with severe weather. Climate is integrated into one chapter with expanded coverage of the 20th & 21st centuries including the IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change) reports. Statistics and Tables are updated. Many changes in chapter on continental earthquakes: A) new section on Pacific Northwest U.S.; B) new section on 2006 Hawaii EQs; C) rewritten section on intraplate EQs; D) deletion of fracturezone hypothesis. On volcanoes there is more emphasis on magmas, and less on rocks. New material on St. Helens, Toba, and lahar monitoring at Rainier. Numerous new photos and line drawings. CONTENTS 1 Natural Disasters and the Human Population 2 Energy Flows in Earth History and Natural Disasters 3 Plate Tectonics and Earthquakes 4 Earthquake Geology and Seismology 5 Tsunami 6 Some Earthquakes in Western North America 7 Earthquakes in Continental US and Canada plus Hawaii 8 Volcanic Eruptions: Plate Tectonics and Magmas 9 Volcano Case Histories: Killer Events 10 Mass Movements 11 Weather and Tornadoes 178 GEOLOGY 12 Climate Change 13 Hurricanes and the Coastline 14 Floods 15 Fire 16 The Great Dyings 17 Impacts with Space Objects Glossary Credits Index International Edition EVOLUTION OF THE EARTH 7th Edition By Donald A. Prothero, Occidental College and Robert Dott, University of Wisconsin—Madison 2004 (July 2003) / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-252808-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-121628-9 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/prothero7 CONTENTS Historical Geology LABORATORY STUDIES IN EARTH HISTORY 9th Edition By Harold L Levin, Washington University--St Louis and Michael S Smith 2008 (September 2007) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-305072-0 www.mhhe.com/levin9e Utilizing actual case studies and field photographs, this successful lab manual covers the full spectrum of historical geology sediments, plate tectonics, paleontology, and petrology in flexible, self-contained units. This manual has been developed for use in both non-majors and combined courses in historical geology. The exercises emphasize the principles and methods by which geologists discover the origins and changing nature of our planet. These exercises or “studies” will help students understand how ancient conditions can be read from rocks and fossils, how geologic forces at the surface and within the planet can alter the environment, and how events of the past can be placed within an integrated chronological sequence. The exercises are designed for students who may not intend to specialize in geology. This does not mean, however, that the treatment is superficial, nor that it cannot give adequate preparation for students pursuing an academic major in the earth sciences. 1 Time and Terrestrial Change 2 Floods, Fossils, and Heresies: “No vestige of a beginning, no prospect of an end?” 3 Evolution 4 The Relative Geologic Time Scale and Modern Concepts of Stratigraphy 5 The Numerical Dating of the Earth 6 Origin and Early Evolution of the Earth 7 Mountain Building and Drifting Continents 8 Cryptozoic History: An Introduction to the Origin of Continental Crust 9 Early Life and its Patterns 10 Earliest Paleozoic History: The Sauk Sequence—An Introduction to Cratons and Epeiric Seas 11 The Later Ordovician: Further Studies of Plate Tectonics and the Paleogeography of Orogenic Belts 12 The Middle Paleozoic: Time of Reefs, Salt, and Forests 13 Late Paleozoic History: A Tectonic Climax and Retreat of the Sea 14 The Mesozoic Era: Age of Reptiles and Continental Breakup 15 Cenozoic History: Threshold of the Present 16 Pleistocene Glaciation and the Advent of Humans 17 The Best of all Possible Worlds? Appendix I The Classification and Relationships of Life Appendix II English Equivalents of Metric Measures CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Sedimentary Rocks 2 Textural Clues to the History of Sediment 3 Sedimentary Rocks under the Microscope 4 Ancient Sedimentary Environments 5 Tectonic Settings 6 Sea-Floor Spreading and Plate Tectonics 7 Age Relations and Unconformity 8 Rock Units and Time-Rock Units 9 The Advance and Retreat of Ancient Shorelines 10 Fossils and Their Living Relatives: Protists, Sponges, Corals, Bryozoans, and Brachiopods 11 Fossils and Their Living Relatives: Mollusks, Arthropods, Echinoderms, Graptolites, and Plants 12 Fossil Indicators of Age, Environment, and Correlation 13 A Brief Survey of the Vertebrates 14 Geologic Maps and Geologic Structures 15 Canadian Shield and Basement Rocks of North America 16 Mountain Belts of North America 17 The Interior Plains and Plateaus 18 Identification of Minerals 19 Igneous Rocks 20 Metamorphic Rocks List of Tables List of Colorplates List of Plates Preface 179 COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia GEOLOGY Oceanography 7 The Structure and Motion of the Atmosphere 8 Circulation and Ocean Structure 9 The Surface Currents 10 The Waves 11 The Tides 12 Coasts, Beaches, and Estuaries 13 Environmental Issues and Concerns 14 The Living Ocean 15 Production and Life 16 The Plankton: Drifters of the Open Ocean 17 The Nekton: Free Swimmers of the Sea 18 The Benthos: Dwellers of the Sea Floor Appendixes Glossary Credits Index NEW International Edition INTRODUCTION TO THE WORLDS OCEAN 10th Edition By Keith Sverdrup and Alyn Duxbury of University of Washington and Alison Duxbury, North Seattle Comm College EXPLORING THE WORLD OCEAN 2009 (November 2008) / 528 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337670-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-128457-8 [IE] By Sean Chamberlin, Fullerton College and Tommy Dickey 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331276-7 www.mhhe.com/sverdrup www.mhhe.com/chamberlin1e An Introduction to the World’s Oceans, Tenth Edition, is an introductory oceanography text intended for students without a background in mathematics, chemistry, physics, geology, or biology. It emphasizes the role of basic scientific principles in helping understand the processes that govern the ocean and the earth. To keep the text as current as possible, the authors conduct their own research and examine other findings such as analyzing satellite data and largescale oceanographic programs. From this vast amount of data, they select interesting, relevant, and understandable examples that illustrate contemporary principles of oceanography. An Introduction to the World’s Oceans places greater emphasis on the physical and geological aspects of the oceans than on the chemical and geochemical properties, because the latter disciplines require more specific background knowledge. An ecological approach helps integrate the biological chapters with other subjects. Students are encouraged to look at oceanography as a cohesive and united discipline rather than a collection of subjects gathered under a marine umbrella. As with all previous editions, the authors continue to make each chapter stand as independently as possible, so that professors can assign chapters in the order that best suits their classrooms. Exploring the World Ocean presents oceanography as a systems science, aimed at understanding the world ocean as a single, interdependent system of interacting geological, physical, chemical and biological processes. Also emphasized is the idea that ocean science is an ongoing process, dependent upon cutting-edge technology and research. Students are encouraged to take an active role in learning by exploring scientific ideas, data, and alternative ways of thinking as they view oceanography through the eyes of an oceanographer. NEW TO THIS EDITION Each chapter in the new edition contains learning outcomes at the onset of the chapter. Dr. John Delaney, a professor of Oceanography at the University of Washington, has rewritten his Field Notes essay for the new edition discussing new approaches to exploring the ocean to include the five-year Keck study that developed 40 new instruments. CONTENTS Preface Chapter One: Introducing the World Ocean Chapter Two: World Ocean Origins Chapter Three: Plate Tectonics Theory and Evidence Chapter Four: Sea Floor Features Chapter Five: Ocean Sediments Chapter Six: Ocean Chemistry Chapter Seven: Ocean Physics Chapter Eight: The Ocean and the Atmosphere Chapter Nine: Surface and Deep Circulation Chapter Ten: Ocean Waves Chapter Eleven: Ocean Tides and Sea Level Chapter Twelve: Ocean Life and Its Evolution Chapter Thirteen: Phytoplankton Productivity Chapter Fourteen: Ocean Food Webs Chapter Fifteen: Humans and the Coastal Ocean Chapter Sixteen: Future Explorations Appendices LuAnne Thompson, professor of Atmospheric Sciences and Interim Director of the Program on Climate Change at the University of Washington, has contributed a Field Notes essay on The Oceans and Climate Change. New illustrations have been added including images and drawings of internal wave propagation, NOAA’s Project DART, Great Lakes shoreline erosion, temperature variations in global mean sea level, and depth penetration of different wavelengths of light. CONTENTS 1 The History of Oceanography 2 The Water Planet 3 Plate Tectonics 4 The Sea Floor and Its Sediments 5 The Physical Properties of Water 6 The Chemistry of Seawater 180 GEOLOGY Physical Geology International Edition FUNDAMENTALS OF OCEANOGRAPHY 5th Edition Textbook By Keith A. Sverdrup, University of Wisconsin – Milwaukee, Alyn C. Duxbury, University of Washington, Alison B. Duxbury, North Seattle Community College 2006 (Jan 2005) ISBN: 978-0-07-304081-3 (Essential Version) ISBN: 978-0-07-111712-8 [IE with OLC] NEW International Edition http://www.mhhe.com/sverdrup5 CONTENTS 1 History of Oceanography 2 Introduction to Earth 3 Plate Tectonics 4 The Sea Floor 5 Water 6 The Atmosphere and the Oceans 7 Circulation Patterns and Ocean Currents 8 Waves and Tides 9 Coasts, Estuaries, and Environmental Issues 10 Oceanic Environment and Production 11 Life in the Water 12 Life on the Sea Floor Appendix A Latitude and Longitude Appendix B Classification Summaries Appendix C Units and Notation Paleontology PHYSICAL GEOLOGY Earth Revealed, 8th Edition By Diane Carlson and Charles Plummer of California State University-Sacramento and David McGeary 2009 (September 2008) / 672 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337667-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-128473-8 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/carlson8e Physical Geology: Earth Revealed is appropriate for introductory physical geology classes. This text, which includes the same information as the market-leading Physical Geology - 12th edition, by Plummer/Carlson, is for the instructor who prefers to cover plate tectonics early in the course. The eighth edition has been updated to include the most current information from the various sub-disciplines that comprise physical geology. The book’s purpose is to clearly present geologic processes so that students can understand the logic of scientific methods. This text features an outstanding art program and a proven, accessible writing style. This text continues to be used as the official textbook to accompany the Annenberg CPB distributed telecourse for physical geology. NEW TO THIS EDITION International Edition BRINGING FOSSILS TO LIFE An Introduction to Paleobiology, 2nd Edition By Donald A. Prothero, Occidental College 2004 / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-366170-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-121546-6 [IE] http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geology CONTENTS 1 The Fossil Record: A Window on the Past 2 Variation in Fossils 3 Species and Speciation 4 Systematics 5 Evolution 6 Extinction 7 Functional Morphology 8 Paleoecology 9 Biogeography 10 Biostratigraphy 11 Micropaleontology 12 Colonial Life: Archaeocyathans, Sponges, and Enidarians 13 Lophophorates: Brachiopods and Bryozoans 14 Arthropods 15 Mollusks 16 Echinoderms 17 Chordates 18 Trace Fossils Content has been updated throughout to keep the text both current and fresh. Some examples include: Chapter 6 includes new spectacular photos of joints and plunging anticlines by Michael Collier. The soil section in Chapter 12 has been completely rewritten and now includes a new section on soil erosion and new photos and sketches. Chapter 19 now includes a discussion of ice streams with Antarctic ice sheets. Chapter 22 was updated to include new discoveries about planets and other bodies in our solar system, including the downgrading of Pluto from a planet. In this edition, we have increased the number of “A Geologist’s View” pieces. These are photos in the text that are accompanied by an illustration depicting how a geologist would view the scene. Students gain experience understanding how the trained eye of a geologist views a scene in order to understand the historical processes that have occurred that result in what they are seeing today. CONTENTS 1 Introducing Geology, the Essentials of Plate Tectonics, and Other Important Concepts 2 Earth’s Interior and Geophysical Properties 3 The Sea Floor 4 Plate Tectonics 5 Mountain Belts and the Continental Crust 6 Geologic Structures 7 Earthquakes 181 GEOLOGY 8 Time and Geology 9 Atoms, Elements, and Minerals 10 Volcanism and Extrusive Rocks 11 Igneous Rocks, Intrusive Activity, and the Origin of Igneous Rocks 12 Weathering and Soil 13 Mass Wasting 14 Sediment and Sedimentary Rocks 15 Metamorphism, Metamorphic Rocks, and Hydrothermal Rocks 16 Streams and Floods 17 Ground Water 18 Deserts and Wind Action 19 Glaciers and Glaciation 20 Waves, Beaches, and Coasts 21 Geologic Resources 22 The Earth’s Companions Appendices A-G Glossary Index Appendix C The Elements Most Significant to Geology Appendix D Periodic Table of Elements Appendix E Selected Conversion Factors Appendix F Rock Symbols Appendix G Commonly Used Prefixes, Suffixes, and Roots EXPLORING GEOLOGY By Stephen Reynolds and Julia Johnson of Arizona State UniversityTempe, Michael Kelly, Paul, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis and Chuck Carter 2008 (June 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-325651-1 http://www.mhhe.com/reynolds International Edition PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 12th Edition By Charles (Carlos) C Plummer and Diane Carlson of California State University--Sacramento and David McGeary (deceased) 2008 (October 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-721606-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-128337-3 [IE] www.mhhe.com/plummer12e Physical Geology, 12e, is the latest refinement of a classic introductory text that has helped countless students learn basic physical geology concepts for over 25 years. Students taking introductory physical geology to fulfill a science elective, as well as those contemplating a career in geology, will appreciate the accessible writing style and depth of coverage in Physical Geology. Hundreds of carefully rendered illustrations and accompanying photographs correlate perfectly with the chapter descriptions to help readers quickly grasp new geologic concepts. Numerous chapter learning tools and a rich ARIS website further assist students in their study of physical geology. Exploring Geology by Reynolds/Johnson/Kelly/Morin/Carter is a new, innovative textbook intended for an introductory college geology course, such as Physical Geology. This ground-breaking, visually spectacular book was designed from cognitive and educational research on how students think, learn, and study. Nearly all information in the book is built around nearly 2,700 photographs and stunning illustrations, rather than being in long blocks of text that are not articulated with figures. These annotated illustrations help students visualize geologic processes and concepts, and are suited to the way most instructors already teach. To alleviate cognitive load and help students focus on one important geologic process or concept at a time, the book consists entirely of two-page spreads organized into 19 chapters. Each two-page spread is a self-contained block of information about a specific topic, emphasizing geologic concepts, processes, features, and approaches. These spreads help students learn and organize geologic knowledge in a new and exciting way. Inquiry is embedded throughout the book, as is the way geologists investigate problems. The title of each two-page spread and topic heading is a question intended to get readers to think about the topic and become interested and motivated to explore the two-page spread for answers. Each chapter is a learning cycle, which begins with a visually engaging two-page spread about a compelling geologic issue. Each chapter ends with an Investigation that challenges students with a problem associated with a virtual place. The world-class media, spectacular presentations, and assessments are all tightly articulated with the textbook. This book is designed to encourage students to observe, interpret, think critically, and engage in authentic inquiry, and is highly acclaimed by reviewers, instructors, and students. CONTENTS CONTENTS 1 Introducing Geology, the Essentials of Plate Tectonics, and other Important Concepts 2 Atoms, Elements, and Minerals 3 Igneous Rocks, Intrusive Activity, and the Origin of Igneous Rocks 4 Volcanism and Extrusive Rocks 5 Weathering and Soil 6 Sediment and Sedimentary Rocks 7 Metamorphism, Metamorphic Rocks, and Hydrothermal Rocks 8 Time and Geology 9 Mass Wasting 10 Streams and Floods 11 Ground Water 12 Glaciers and Glaciation 13 Deserts and Wind Action 14 Waves, Beaches and Coasts 15 Geologic Structures 16 Earthquakes 17 Earth’s Interior and Geophysical Properties 18 The Sea Floor 19 Plate Tectonics 20 Mountain Belts and the Continental Crust 21 Geologic Resources 22 The Earth’s Companions Appendix A Identification of Minerals Appendix B Identification of Rocks Preface 1 The Nature of Geology 2 Investigating Geologic Questions 3 Plate Tectonics 4 Earth Materials 5 Igneous Environments 6 Volcanoes and Volcanic Hazards 7 Sedimentary Environments 8 Deformation and Metamorphism 9 Geologic Time 10 The Seafloor and Continental Margins 11 Mountains, Basins, and Continents 12 Earthquakes and the Earth’s Interior 13 Climate, Weather, and Their Influences on Geology 14 Shorelines, Glaciers, and Changing Sea Levels 15 Weathering, Soils, and Unstable Slopes 16 Rivers and Streams 17 Water Resources 18 Energy and Mineral Resources 19 Geology of the Solar System Appendices 182 GEOLOGY Laboratory 14 Structural Geology 15 Geologic Maps 16 Earthquakes 17 Plate Tectonics Credits Index NEW LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 7th Edition NEW By Norris Jones, University of Wisconsin-Oshkosh and Charles Jones, University of Pittsburgh 2010 (March 2009) / 384 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-336939-6 LABORATORY MANUAL FOR PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 14th Edition If it’s important for you to incorporate the scientific method into your teaching, this lab manual is the perfect fit. In every exercise there are scientific method boxes that provide students with insight into the relevance of the scientific method to the topic at hand. The manual also includes “In Greater Depth” problems, a more challenging probe into certain issues. They are more quantitative in nature and require more in-depth, critical thinking, which is unique to this type of manual. By James H Zumberge (Deceased), Robert H Rutford and James L Carter, University of Texas at Dallas 2009 (November 2008) / 304 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-305149-9 FEATURES Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 14e is written for the freshman-level laboratory course in physical geology. In this lab, students study Earth materials, geologic interpretation of topographic maps, aerial photographs and Earth satellite imagery, structural geology and plate tectonics and related phenomena. With nearly 30 exercises, professors have great flexibility when developing the syllabus for their physical geology lab course. The ease of use, tremendous selection, and tried and true nature of the labs selected have made this lab manual one of the leading selling physical geology lab manuals. The Jones manual contains a chapter dedicated to volcanoes, something seldom seen in lab manuals. This chapter has been revised and refined in this edition. Chapters in this lab manual are self-contained, which allows instructors considerable flexibility in the order in which the chapters are taught. In Greater Depth problems are a more challenging probe into certain issues. They are more quantitative in nature and require more in-depth critical thinking, which is unique to this type of manual. FEATURES This lab manual incorporates well-produced, easy-to-read, and varied topographic and geologic maps. The authors have selected maps from across North America, helping professors tailor the presentation to their region of the country. Geologic maps from around the country introduce students to basic regional geography. Each lab features questions that require numerical calculations that help improve students’ quantitative reasoning skills and introduce the concept that numbers are essential to the earth sciences. The authors provide excellent coverage of Earth materials (rocks and minerals), while doing an outstanding job of teaching the scientific method, through well-written and well-illustrated exercises. The discussion of hardness and the comparison between Moh’s Scale and Vicker’s Scale have been revised for increased clarity. The exercises are designed to make students approach and solve problems using scientific methodology as much as possible, rather than following a cookbook method. The cover of this edition is a spectacular new map combination of the geology and shaded relief of the North American continent. Found at the end of each chapter, the “Applications” section includes the following: An introductory paragraph relates the chapter material to the real world and to the scientific method as illustrated by the problems that follow. A list of “Objectives” precedes a number of problems and indicates what the student should know after completing the problems. A list of “Problems” allows students to answer questions related to the lab experiment they are performing. CONTENTS 1 Properties of Minerals 2 Mineral Identification 3 Igneous Rocks 4 Sedimentary Rocks 5 Metamorphic Rocks 6 Topographic Maps and Digital Elevation Models 7 Remote Sensing of Volcanoes and Volcanic Hazards 8 Streams and Humid-Climate Landscapes 9 Groundwater and Groundwater-Influenced Landscapes 10 Glaciation 11 Sea Coasts 12 Arid-Climate Landscapes 13 Geologic Age Throughout the text, website listings called Web Connections, related to the topic at hand, provide students with access to current information and additional resources. A glossary, located in the back of the manual, allows students to review the important concepts and geologic terms they will encounter in the laboratory. The glossary is particularly useful when students do not routinely bring their textbooks to the lab, or when students are not concurrently enrolled in the lecture course. Consistent use of color and symbols for various rock types are used, and the sharpness and detail of the photos have been increased, and efforts have been made to make this edition more user friendly. The website that accompanies Zumberge provides students with animations, additional photos, and all of the web links listed in the lab manual. Instructor’s can customize this lab manual using our do-it-yourself website. The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings These materials, along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis 183 GEOLOGY eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. CONTENTS Part I: Earth Materials Part II: The Geologic Column and Geologic Time Part III: Topographic Maps, Aerial Photographs, and Other Imagery from Remote Sensing Part IV: Geologic Interpretation of Topographic Maps, Aerial Photographs, and Earth Satellite Images Part V: Structural Geology Part VI: Plate Tectonics and Related Geologic Phenomena COMPLIMENTARY COPIES INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 184 185 ALLIED HEALTH Blood and Airborne Pathogens ........................................................................ 189 BLS/CPR for the Professional Rescuer ............................................................189 Certification Exam Review for Medical Assisting ............................................. 190 Computers in the Medical Office .................................................................... 190 CPR and AED ...................................................................................................191 Critical Care Nursing ........................................................................................192 EKG/ECG/Electrocardiology............................................................................ 193 Electronic Medical Records ..............................................................................194 Externship for Medical Assisting .......................................................................232 First Aid............................................................................................................ 195 Fundamentals of Nursing .................................................................................229 HIPAA ...............................................................................................................228 Massage/Business ...........................................................................................199 Massage/Clinical ..............................................................................................200 Massage/Reflexology .......................................................................................234 Massage Therapy .............................................................................................196 Math for Health Professions .............................................................................201 Medical Assisting - Administrative and Clinical .................................................201 Medical Billing and Coding ............................................................................. 210 Medical Insurance ............................................................................................214 Medical Law & Ethics ...................................................................................... 215 Medical Office Procedures .............................................................................. 215 Medical-Surgical Nursing..................................................................................216 Medical Terminology ........................................................................................ 218 Medical Terminology 1-Term.............................................................................221 Medical Terminology 2-Term.............................................................................223 Medical Terminology - Programmed Approach.................................................225 NCLEX..............................................................................................................227 Nursing .............................................................................................................232 Nursing Informatics...........................................................................................231 Nursing Issues and Trends .............................................................................. 230 Nursing Leadership ..........................................................................................229 Pediatric First Aid, CPR, AED ...........................................................................233 Pharmacology for Health Professions ..............................................................235 Pharmacy Technician .......................................................................................236 Phlebotomy...................................................................................................... 237 Respiratory Care ..............................................................................................238 Surgical Technology .........................................................................................239 NEW TITLES ALLIED HEALTH 2010 Author ISBN-13 Math & Dosage Calculations for Health Careers, 3e Booth 9780077290498 201 Math for the Pharmacy Technician Egler 9780077290504 236 Coding Review for National Certification: Passing the CPC and CCS-P Exams Harmon 9780073373980 210 Medical Office Handbook Harrison 9780073374130 201,215 Law & Ethics for Medical Careers, 5e Judson 9780073402062 215 McGraw-Hill Learnsmart: Medical Terminology MH Allied Health 9780073374765 218,221,223 Page 225 Pharmacy Technician: Practice and Procedures with Student CD Orum-Alexander 9780077302368 237 Case Studies for the Medical Office: Capstone Billing Simulation, 5e Sanderson 9780073402000 190,211 Building Healthy Business: For Massage and Alternative Healthcare Practices Saeger 9780073401911 199 Medical Terminology Audio CD-ROM, 3e Thierer 9780077330675 218 Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care with Student CD-Roms and Audio Thierer 9780077302344 218,223 2009 Author ISBN-13 Administrative Procedures for Medical Assisting for Student CD, 3e Booth 9780073261270 202 Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology for Allied Health, 2e Booth 9780073373959 196,203,211 CDs, 3e ALLIED HEALTH Page 219 Clinical Procedures for Medical Assisting with Student CD, 3e Booth 9780073259871 204 Medical Assisting: Administrative and Clinical Competencies with Student CD-ROMs, 3e Booth 9780073259888 205 Medical Assisting: Administrative and Clinical Procedures (without A&P Chapters), 3e Booth 9780077243265 206 Phlebotomy for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e Booth 9780073309774 207,237 BLS Review+ DVD Delve Productions Inc 9780073522043 189 Electronic Health Records Hamilton 9780077280208 194 Clinical Massage Therapy: Assessment and Treatment of Orthopedic Conditions Jurch 9780073510934 196,200 Hospital Billing, 2e Magovern 9780073520896 212 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed (Allied Health Version) Medical Col. of Ohio 9780073378312 197,229,232 ACTIVSim: Medical Assisting Clinical Simulator MH Allied Health 9780073374192 208,232 Medical Assisting Review: Passing the CMA, RMA & CCMA Exams with Student CD, 3e Moini 9780073309798 190,208,233 HIPAA For Allied Health Careers Newby 9780073374123 209,214,228 Bloodborne and Airborne Pathogens, 2e NSC 9780073382883 189 Child and Infant CPR Skills Card NSC 9780073382937 233 CPR & AED, 3e NSC 9780077290511 191 186 NEW TITLES ALLIED HEALTH 2009 Author ISBN-13 CPR & AED Skills Card NSC Certification Edition, 2e NSC 9780073519876 192 First Aid Skills Card NSC 9780073382920 195 First Aid with Pocket Guide, Updated Edition, 3e NSC 9780077294410 195 Standard First Aid, CPR & AED with Quick Guide, Updated 2e NSC 9780077292744 192 The Complete Diagnosis Coding Book Safian 9780073373942 212 You Code It! A Case Studies Workbook Safian 9780073374024 213 Computers in the Medical Office, 6e Sanderson 9780073401997 191 Practical Reflexology: Interpretation and Techniques Watson 9780073510958 198,234 187 Page NEW TITLES 188 ALLIED HEALTH Allied Health BLS/CPR for the Professional Rescuer Blood and Airborne Pathogens NEW NEW BLS REVIEW+ DVD BLOODBORNE AND AIRBORNE PATHOGENS 2nd Edition By Delve Productions Inc By National Safety Council NSC 2009 (May 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-352204-3 2009 (April 2008) / 64 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-338288-3 The National Safety Council has been the leader in protecting life and promoting health in the workplace for nearly 100 years. Its mission is to educate and influence people to prevent accidental injury and death. The National Safety Council’s courses have grown to meet the changing needs of emergency responders at all levels of expertise. More than 8 million first aid/CPR/AED responders have trained by over 10,000 instructors through a network of approximately 2,500 training centers nationwide. Fulfill OSHA training requirements and reduce employees’ risk of injury and illness with the National Safety Council’s Bloodborne and Airborne Pathogens course—the choice for infection control compliance information. An EMT student needs a review product that contains both testable certification skills and the ability to test and assess the didactic course material. BLS Review combines both skills and a didactic review of essential EMT material in a DVD and CD-ROM format. It can be used by a student studying for their written and practical exam or by an instructor for classroom teaching of the skills. FEATURES The DVD includes videos which provide review of steps and procedures of testable skill plus a didactic review. Passing the EMT course and National Registry written and practical skills examinations will be stressed. DVD skills performed according to national standards. NEW TO THIS EDITION Well-known and proven development team. Includes reproducible forms on CD-ROM to help employers comply with the OSHA Standard. CONTENTS Is the only Airborne Pathogens program that includes content based on OSHA’s Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for an Influenza Pandemic. CONTENTS Chapter 1--Introduction to the Bloodborne Pathogens Chapter 2--Bloodborne Pathogens Chapter 3--Preventing Infection from Bloodborne Pathogens Chapter 4--Airborne Pathogens Appendix A--The OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Appendix B--Select Other Diseases Caused by Bloodborne Pathogens Appendix C--Sample Hepatitis B Vaccine Declination Form Appendix D--Sample Exposure Incident Report Form Appendix E--Sample Sharps Injury Logs Appendix F--Sample Exposure Control Plan Appendix G--Sample Bloodborne Pathogens Training Log 1. Introduction to Emergency Medical Care 2. The Well Being of the EMT 3. Legal and Ethical Issues 4. The Human Body 5. Baseline Vital Signs and SAMPLE History 6. Lifting and Moving Patients 7. Airway and Breathing 8. Scene Size-Up 9. Patient Assessment 10. Communications 11. Documentation 12.Pharmacology 13. Respiratory Emergencies 14. Cardiovascular Emergencies 15. Diabetes and Altered Mental Status 16. Allergic Reactions 17. Poisoning and Overdose 18. Environmental Emergencies 19. Behavioral Emergencies 20. Obstetrics 21. Bleeding and Shock 22. Soft-Tissue Injuries 23. Musculoskeletal Care 24. Injuries to the Head and Spine 25. Injuries to the Chest and Abdomen 26. Infant and Child Emergency Care 27. Emergency Vehicle Operations 28. Gaining Access 29. Special Response Situations 30. Advanced Airway Techniques 189 ALLIED HEALTH Certification Exam Review for Medical Assisting Chapter 22 Physical Therapy Chapter 23 Medical Emergencies and First Aid Chapter 24 Laboratory Procedures PART II SELF-EVALUATION Section 1 Test for General Medical Assisting Knowledge Section 2 Test for Administrative Medical Assisting Knowledge Section 3 Test for Clinical Medical Assisting Knowledge Part III SELF-EVALUATION ANWERS AND RATIONALES Section 1 General Medical Assisting Knowledge Answers and Rationales Section 2 Administrative Medical Assisting Knowledge Answers and Rationales Section 3 Clinical Medical Assisting Knowledge Answers and Rationales NEW MEDICAL ASSISTING REVIEW: Passing the CMA, RMA, & CCMA Exams with Student CD, 3rd Edition Computers in the Medical Office By Jahangir Moini, Florida Metro University-Melbourne 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-330979-8 NEW www.mhhe.com/moini3 Medical Assisting Review: Passing the CMA, RMA, and CCMA Exams, Third Edition provides example questions for students to prepare for certification exams. This reference prepares students to take the exam with easy-to-read essential material summaries that highlight key areas of the major clinical and administrative parts of a Medical Assistant’s program. Each of the chapters includes a series of 20 to 30 multiple choice quiz questions and a concise outline of key information. The CD-ROM included free in each book provides more than 1500 sample review questions as well as a PowerPoint presentation for additional student review. The review questions include rationales for answers and correlations to certification competencies. There is also a correlation to the textbook location where the information is covered. CASE STUDIES FOR THE MEDICAL OFFICE Capstone Billing Simulation, 5th Edition By Susan Sanderson NEW TO THIS EDITION 2010 (January 2009) / 224 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-340200-0 New chapter on General Psychology http://www.mhhe.com/capstone5e Improved Student CD-ROM is easier to use. This capstone simulation using Medisoft Patient Billing Software, Version 14, gives students enhanced training that fosters superior qualifications for a variety of medical office jobs. Extensive hands-on practice with realistic source documents teaches students to input information, schedule appointments, and handle billing, reports, and other essential tasks. The simulation is recommended for students who have completed the study of Medisoft Advanced Version 14 using Computers in the Medical Office or Patient Billing. CONTENTS PART I THEORY REVIEW Section 1 General Medical Assisting Knowledge Chapter 1 The Profession of Medical Assisting Chapter 2 Medical Terminology Chapter 3 Anatomy and Physiology Chapter 4 Pathophysiology Chapter 5 Microbiology Chapter 6 General Psychology Chapter 7 Nutrition Chapter 8 Medical Law and Ethics Section 2 Administrative Medical Assisting Knowledge Chapter 9 General Office Duties Chapter 10 Communication in the Medical Office Chapter 11 Keyboarding and Computer Applications Chapter 12 Financial Management Chapter 13 Medical Insurance Chapter 14 Basic Coding Section 3 Clinical Medical Assisting Knowledge Chapter 15 Blood-Borne Pathogens and Principles of Asepsis Chapter 16 Preparing the Patient Chapter 17 Vital Signs Chapter 18 Pharmacology Chapter 19 Administration of Medication Chapter 20 Electrocardiography Chapter 21 Radiography NEW TO THIS EDITION Medisoft Advanced Student-at-home software (Optional Package Item), a full-featured software option for distance education or students who want to practice with the software at home. The only limitation is the number of patients a student can enter into the software. Otherwise, this is a full working version. The Instructor’s Manual (available on the OLC) provides all of the resources necessary to successfully use Case Studies for the Medical Office in your classroom. It includes instructions for installation and troubleshooting the software, teaching suggestions, and answers to the quizzes, daily worksheets, and jobs, including hundreds of Medisoft V14 screenshots for solutions. CONTENTS Part 1 Introduction to Polaris Medical Group Part 2 Polaris Medical Group Policy and Procedure Manual Part 3 On the Job Part 4 Source Documents Glossary / Index 190 ALLIED HEALTH Chapter 14 Printing Lists and Reports Chapter 15 Putting it all Together PART 4 SOURCE DOCUMENTS Glossary Index NEW COMPUTERS IN THE MEDICAL OFFICE 6th Edition CPR and AED By Susan Sanderson, Chestnut Hill Enterprises 2009 (July 2008) / 416 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-340199-7 NEW Computers in the Medical Office 6e is the best-selling text for training students using full-featured and current Medisoft Version 14 Patient Billing software. McGraw-Hill publishes the most titles to train students on Medisoft software. Our publishing relationship with Medisoft has been ongoing for 15 years. Computers in the Medical Office 6e offers medical office training using current, realistic medical office cases while building transferable computerized medical billing and scheduling skills. Students who complete this course will learn the appropriate terminology and skills to use any patient billing software program with minimal additional training. As students progress through Medisoft, they learn to gather patient information, schedule appointments and enter transactions. The practical, systematic approach is based on real-world medical office activities. Go with the best. Go with the tried and true. Go with the Medisoft titles that will give you and your students the training and support you need to be successful. Go with McGraw-Hill’s Computers in the Medical Office 6e. NEW TO THIS EDITION Coverage of processing refunds for patients provides information for creating an adjustment that refunds money to a patient. Electronic Health Records Exchange feature explores how billing programs and electronic health records share data and improve productivity. Worksheets feature was created in response to instructors’ requests for an easier way to measure students’ performance on Medisoft exercises. The Worksheets contain objective questions that require students to accurately complete the computer exercises in each chapter. CIMO 6e is written for Medisoft V14 which includes the updated version of CMS 1500 that prints NPI information in fields 17B and 24J. In addition, Medisoft V14 provides an option to export reports to a PDF file that students can e-mail to their instructors. CONTENTS PART 1 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS IN THE MEDICAL OFFICE Chapter 1 The Medical Office Billing Process Chapter 2 Information Technology and HIPAA PART 2 MEDISOFT ADVANCED PATIENT ACCOUNTING TRAINING Chapter 3 Introduction to Medisoft CHAPTER 4 Entering Patient Information Chapter 5 Entering Insurance, Account, and Condition Information Chapter 6 Entering Charge Transactions and Patient Payments Chapter 7 Creating Claims Chapter 8 Posting Insurance Payments and Creating Patient Statements Chapter 9 Printing Reports Chapter 10: Collections in the Medical Office Chapter 11 Scheduling PART 3 APPLYING YOUR KNOWLEDGE Chapter 12 Handling Patient Records and Transactions Chapter 13 Setting Up Appointments CPR & AED Third Edition By National Safety Council NSC 2009 (August 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-729051-1 Updated Second Edition Now Includes “Hands-only CPR”. Nearly every two minutes, someone dies of sudden cardiac arrest. Automated external defibrillation (AED) could save a quarter of these lives. AED devices are showing up everywhere from industrial settings to shopping malls, and the demand for training is rising. And fortunately, the number of people trained in CPR grows every year too. National Safety Council programs offer the very latest techniques and AHA guidelines for CPR and meet OSHA standards for emergency care training in the workplace. And now we use Video Self Instruction to increase retention of the techniques. Our CPR and AED program teaches the average person the basics of emergency life support, and takes the fear out of AED use. We give you all the background information and skill testing you need to feel confident in the event of an emergency-and help save a life. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! Video Skill Instruction: With VSI, students practice CPR at the same time it’s demonstrated on the video, taking their cues from the rescuer on the screen. VSI is shown to result in better CPR skills acquisition and retention than traditional teaching methods. And, it helps you provide consistent instruction to all students and stick to a tight teaching schedule. CONTENTS Course Lessons Basic Life Support Acting in an Emergency Check the Victim Recovery Position Choking (Responsive Victim) Heart Attack and Chest Pain Preventing Disease Transmission Quick Guide CPR Using an AED Choking-Responsive Adult or Child Choking-Responsive Infant Recovery Position-Adult or Child Recovery Position-Infant 191 ALLIED HEALTH NEW CPR & AED SKILLS CARD NSC CERTIFICATION EDITION 2nd Edition By National Safety Council NSC 2009 (July 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-351987-6 This handy card will help you refresh your CPR & AED skills before you recertify. Remember--your CPR and AED completion cards are good up to 2 years. Lesson 3-check The Victim Lesson 4-recovery Position Lesson 5-choking (Responsive Victim) Lesson 6-heart Attack And Chest Pain Lesson 7-preventing Disease Transmission Lesson 8-bleeding And Wound Care Lesson 9-shock Lesson 10-burns Lesson 11-serious Injuries Lesson 12-bone, Joint, And Muscle Injuries Lesson 13-sudden Illness Lesson 14-poisoning Lesson 15-cold And Heat Emergencies Lesson 16-rescuing And Moving Victims CONTENTS CPR & AED SKILLS REFRESHER CARD CPR--Adult & Infant Preventing Disease Transmission Using an AED Choking Acting in Emergency Situations Check the Victim Recovery Position By National Safety Council NSC 2008 (June 2007) / 8 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351364-5 Need to refresh your CPR & AED skills? This handy card will help you refresh your CPR & AED skills before you recertify. Remember--your CPR and AED completion cards are good up to 2 years. CONTENTS CPR--Adult & Infant Preventing Disease Transmission Using an AED Choking Acting in Emergency Situations Check the Victim Recovery Position NEW STANDARD FIRST AID, CPR, & AED with Quick Guide Updated 2nd Edition Critical Care Nursing By National Safety Council NSC 2009 (August 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-729274-4 Updated to include “Hands-only CPR”. The National Safety Council has long been recognized as a leader in emergency care training. The program offers the very latest techniques ad follow the latest guidelines for CPR and meet OSHA’s standards for emergency care training. The National Safety Council makes it easy for anyone to learn or teach Standard First Aid, CPR & AED. You will be given all the background information and skill testing you need to fell confident in the event of an emergency--and help save a life. NEW TO THIS EDITION Now includes “Hands-only CPR” Standard First Aid, CPR, and AED has updated the training to incorporate Video Self Instruction(VSI)for CPR skills. With VSI, students practice CPR along with the video, taking their cues from the rescuer on the screen. As an added bonus, all NSC instructors get exclusive access to our web-based Emergency Care Instructor Portal, which contains downloadable promotions, administrative documents, course outlines, state-by-state approvals, product previews, trade show listings, and more. Plus, you get free student recordkeeping!Visit www. emergencycare.nsc.org. CONTENTS Lesson 1-basic Life Support Lesson 2-acting In An Emergency IV THERAPY DEMYSTIFIED By Kerry Cheever, Moravian College 2008 / 304 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-149678-0 A Professional Reference Title Looking for a quick way to learn the ins-and-outs of I.V. therapy but find other books dripping with complexity? Here’s your lifeline! I.V. Therapy Demystified infuses essential information with clear explanations to make learning easy. Written by a nursing professor, this detailed guide covers fluids and electrolytes, I.V. therapy delivery systems, and peripheral and central I.V. therapy. You will learn about crystalloid and colloid solutions and blood component, parenteral nutrition, and pharmacological therapies. I.V. therapy in infants, children, and older adults is also covered. Filled with key terms to help you to remember important concepts, and complete with end-of-chapter quizzes to test your knowledge, this book will teach you the fundamentals of I.V. therapy in no time at all. I.V. Therapy Demystified is your shortcut to mastering this essential nursing topic. This fast and easy guide offers: Learning objectives at the beginning of each chapter An NCLEX-style quiz at the end of each chapter to reinforce learning and pinpoint weaknesses Measurements labeled in SI units Indications for I.V. therapy and options for delivery 192 ALLIED HEALTH EKG/ECG/Electrocardiology A time-saving approach to performing better on an exam or at work CONTENTS 1. Basic Principles of IV Therapy 2. Fluids and Electolytes 3. IV Delivery Systems 4. Peripheral IV Therapy 5. Central IV Therapy 6. IV Therapy and the Nursing Process 7. Crystalloid Solutions 8. Colloid Solutions 9. Blood Component Therapy 10. Parenteral Therapy 11. Iv Pharmacological Therapy 12. IV Therapy and Infants and Children 13. IV Therapy and the Elderly 14. IV Therapy within Community-Based Settings ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY FOR HEALTH CARE PERSONNEL WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 2nd Edition By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming, Patricia DeiTos, N. Virginia CC-Springfield and Thomas Edward O’Brien, Central Florida Institute 2008 (June 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-330209-6 http://www.mhhe.com/healthcareskills Electrocardiography for Health Care Personnel provides ECG skills training for health care students as well as health care personnel who are interested in mastering additional skills. The text includes the essential skills needed to perform an ECG, including anatomy of the heart, basic characteristics, equipment, appropriate intervention, and other technical applications, such as Holter monitoring and stress testing. Emphasis throughout the text is placed on troubleshooting. AACN ESSENTIALS OF PROGRESSIVE CARE NURSING By Marianne Chulay, Clinical Research and Critical care Nursing and Suzanne M Burns, University of Virginia-Charlottesville 2007 / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-148012-3 CONTENTS A Professional Reference Title Written by nationally known clinical experts in acute care nursing, this textbook provides foundational information, whether you’re a nurse who is to progressive care, or are a student preparing for the certification exam in progressive care nursing. You’ll find a concise presentation of essential information for the safe and competent care of adult progressive care patients and their families. CONTENTS Chapter 1. Assessment Of Critically Ill Patients And Families by Mary Fran Tracy Chapter 2. Planning Care For Critically Ill Patients And Families Chapter 3. Interpretation And Management Of Basic Cardiac Rhythms Chapter 4. Hemodynamic Monitoring by Chapter 5. Airway And Ventilatory Chapter 6. Pain, Sedation, And Neuromuscular Blockade Management Chapter 7. Pharmacology Chapter 8. Ethical And Legal Considerations Chapter 9. Cardiovascular System Chapter 10. Respiratory System by Chapter 11. Multisystem Problems Chapter 12. Neurologic System Chapter 13. Hematology And Immunology Systems Chapter 14. Gastrointestinal System Chapter 15. Renal System by Carol Hinkle Chapter 16. Endocrine System Chapter 17. Trauma by Carol A. Rauen and Jamie B. Sinks Chapter 18. Advanced ECG Chapter 19. Advanced Cardiovascular Concepts Chapter 20. Advanced Neurologic Concepts Chapter 21. Normal Value Tables Chapter 22. Pharmacology Tables by Ernest Alexander Chapter 23. Advanced Cardiac Life Support Algorithms Chapter 24. Guidelines for the Transfer of Critically Ill Patients Chapter 26. Hemodynamic Monitoring Troubleshooting Guide Chapter 27. Ventilatory Troubleshooting Guide Note: This chapter was authored by Irene Grossbach Chapter 28. Cardiac Rhythms, ECG Characteristics and Treatment Guide Chapter 1-Role of the Electrocardiographer Chapter 2-The Cardiovascular System Chapter 3-The Electrocardiograph Chapter 4-Performing a 12-Lead ECG Chapter 5-ECG Interpretation and Clinical Significance Chapter 6-Exercise Electrocardiography Chapter 7-Ambulatory Monitoring Appendix A-Competency Checklist Appendix B-Common Cardiac Medications Appendix C-Abbreviations/Symbols Glossary POCKET ECGS A Quick Information Guide By Bruce Shade, Cuyahoga CC-Metro Campus 2008 (September 2006) / 160 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351976-0 This book is a portable, easy to view, quick reference pocket guide. It puts the key points about how to recognize the various dysrhythmias and cardiac conditions at the fingertips of the practitioner allowing them to quickly identify what they see in the field and/or clinical setting. It is also a useful tool in the classroom for the student to quickly look up key information. There is a short introduction that talks about the location of the heart, lead placement and the nine step process for interpreting the various wave forms and characteristics. It briefly describes the normal and abnormal features found on ECG tracings. It visually demonstrates how to calculate the heart rate, identify irregularities and identify and measure the various waveforms, intervals and segments. The introductory information is followed by Chapters, broken out by where the dysrhythmias originate (i.e., sinus, atrial, junctional, ventricular, AV heart block), on the key characteristics of various dysrhythmias and conditions that can be detected through the use of the electrocardiogram. CONTENTS Ch 1. The Electrocardiogram Ch 2. Analyzing the ECG Ch 3. Sinus Dysrhythmias Ch 4. Atrial Dysrhythmias Ch 5. Junctional Dysrhythmias Ch 6. Ventricular Dysrhythmias Ch 7. AV Heart Blocks 193 ALLIED HEALTH Electronic Medical Records Ch 8. Electrical Axis Ch 9. Hypertrophy, Bundle Branch Block, and Preexcitation Ch 10. Myocardial Ischemia and Infarction Ch 11. Other Cardiac Conditions NEW PRACTICING ECGS WITH CD By Bruce Shade, Cuyahoga CC-Metro Campus 2008 (July 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331418-1 ELECTRONIC HEALTH RECORDS Practicing ECG’s, by Bruce Shade, is a practice workbook to help refine a student’s skill in reading ECG tracings. There will be approximately 500 rhythm strips which will include both 3 and 12 lead. The strips will be a compilation of both simple and complex in order to test the student’s knowledge and to give them a variety of different scenarios. By Byron Hamilton and Leesa Hamilton of MedSoft National Training Institute CONTENTS Chapter 1: Ecg Assessment And Interpretation Review Chapter 2: Sinus Node Dysrhythmias Chapter 3: Atrial Dysrhythmias Chapter 4: Junctional Dysrhythmias Chapter 5: Ventricular Dysrhythmias Chapter 6: Av Heart Blocks Chapter 7: Other Conditions Chapter 8: Assess Your Knowledge-pretest Chapter 9: 12 Lead Ecgs Chapter 10: Assess Your Knowledge-final Exam 2009 (May 2008) / 192 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-728020-8 The availability of complete medical information when needed brought the innovation of storing the patient’s information electronically. Improvement of patient medical care was and is the catalyst for the electronic health record. Electronic Health Records provides the conceptual theory and hands-on application students need to work in today’s medical office. Hands-on practice uses fully-functional demo version of SpringCharts EHR software is included with each text. FEATURES Screen captures and menu icons from SpringCharts EHR software International Edition Spring Charts – Premium EHR program included with each text ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY IN TEN DAYS 2nd Edition By David R Ferry, Loma Linda University 2007 / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-146562-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-126094-7 [IE] Correlation of instruction to CCHIT competencies: http://www. cchit.org/ CONTENTS Learn to effectively interpret virtually every ECG you’re likely to encounter in clinical practice - in ten brief lessons. The only review book to offer full-sized ECGs throughout (simulating how they appear on tests and in actual practice), this sourcebook is the most soughtafter ECG review anywhere, trusted by cardiology fellows, internal medicine residents, and medical students alike. ECG in Ten Days is based on the author’s popular ten-day review course, and features a unique step-by-step approach, crystal-clear vector images, plus practice EDB strips to build confidence and fine-tune clinical skills. In these pages, you’ll find essential information on everything from SA & AV nodal conduction abnormalities, to mechanisms of arrhythmias and electronic pacemakers. Also included is an answer sheet similar to the one encountered on board exams. CONTENTS 1. The Basics 2. Chamber Abnormalities and Intraventricular Conduction Defects 3. SA and AV Nodal Block 4. Ischemia and Infarction 5. Reentrant Supraventricular Tachycardias 6. Ectopic Supraventricular Tachycardias 7. Extrasystoles and Pre-excitation Syndromes 8. Differential Diagnosis of Wide QRS Tachycardias 9. Medication and Electrolyte Effects; Miscellaneous Consitions 10. Electronic Pacemakers Certificate of Completion is available on OLC. PART 1 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONIC HEALTH RECORDS Chapter 1. An Introduction to EHR Chapter 2. EHR Basics PART 2 SPRINGCHARTS ADVANCED TRAINING Chapter 3. Introduction and Overview Chapter 4. The Clinic Administration Chapter 5. The Patient Chart Chapter 6. Medical Exam Note Chapter 7. Nurse Note Chapter 8. Electronic Clinical Tools Chapter 9. Customizing Templates Chapter 10. Creating & Modifying Tests, CPT & ICD Codes Chapter 11. Utilities PART 3 APPLYING YOUR KNOWLEDGE Chapter 12. Practicing Your Skill PART 4 APPENDIXES A. Sample Documents B. Glossary C. Index 194 ALLIED HEALTH First Aid NEW FIRST AID WITH POCKET GUIDE Update Edition, 3rd Edition NEW By National Safety Council NSC FIRST AID SKILLS CARD By National Safety Council NSC 2009 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-729441-0 Need to refresh your First Aid skills? This handy card will help you refresh your First Aid skills before you recertify. Remember--your First Aid completion cards are good up to 3 years. First Aid is a 64-page full-color manual that covers the material necessary for a 3.5 to 4 hour Basic First Aid course. The layperson (not a health care provider) is the audience for the manual and course. The focus is teaching a layperson to recognize an emergency and take action in an emergency until professional help arrives. Guidelines of care are derived from the national guidelines such as Emergency Cardiovascular Care and the American Burn Association. The manual focuses on need-to-know information and has a clear and easy to understand presentation. CONTENTS CONTENTS Check the Victim Initial Assessment SAMPLE History Format Physical Exam Controlling External Bleeding Shock Severe Allergic Reaction (Anaphylactic Shock) Burn Care Asthma Attack Seizure Swallowed Poisons Cold Related Illness Frostbite Hypothermia Heat Related Illness Heat Exhaustion Heatstroke Head and Spinal Injuries Splinting General Care for Bone, Joint, and Muscle Injuries Acting in an Emergency Check the Victim Recovery Position Choking (Responsive Victim) Heart Attack and Chest Pain Preventing Disease Transmission Bleeding and Wound Care Shock Burns Serious Injuries Bone, Joint, and Muscle Injuries Sudden Illness Poisoning Cold and Heat Emergencies Rescuing and Moving Victims 2009 (January 2008) / 8 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-338292-0 International Edition POISONING & DRUG OVERDOSE 5th Edition By Kent R Olson, University of California--San Francisco 2007 / 736 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-144333-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-110469-2 [IE] INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia (Medical Publication) The manual on the diagnosis and treatment of poisoning and drug overdose, written by the staff and faculty of the California Poison Control System, one of the country’s most respected poison control systems. CONTENTS I. Emergency Treatment II. Common Poisons & Drugs III. Antidotes & Drug Therapy IV. Industrial Chemicals 195 ALLIED HEALTH Massage Therapy NEW NEW CLINICAL MASSAGE THERAPY Assessment and Treatment of Orthopedic Conditions ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY FOR ALLIED HEALTH 2nd Edition By Steven E Jurch, Trident Technical College 2009 (February 2008) / 560 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351093-4 By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming and Terri Wyman, Sanford Brown Institute http://www.mhhe.com/jurchclinical 2009 (February 2008) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337395-9 Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathophysiology for Allied Health, Second Edition, is an introductory book to the body systems for allied health students. It acquaints students with basic information of all the body systems. The book speaks directly to the student, with chapter introductions, case studies, and chapter summaries written to engage the student’s attention. Jurch’s Clinical Massage is designed to outline the principles and foundational understanding of assessing and treating orthopedic injury or dysfunction through massage therapy. The text follows an anatomic region approach, covering surface anatomy and muscle groups before presenting a comprehensive review of the most often presenting orthopedic dysfunctions or conditions. Each dysfunction or condition is reviewed with a consistent diagnostic checklist, a stepped treatment program, and relevant “clinical pearls”. The learning aids throughout the text, along with the reader-friendly writing style, create a highly-effective learning system for understanding the concepts of clinical massage. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Organization of the Body Chapter 2 The Integumentary System Chapter 3 The Skeletal System Chapter 4 The Muscular System Chapter 5 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 6 The Respiratory System Chapter 7 The Nervous System Chapter 8 The Urinary System Chapter 9 The Reproductive Systems Chapter 10 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 11 The Digestive System Chapter 12 The Endocrine System Chapter 13 Special Senses Appendix I Medical Assistant Role Delineation Chart (AAMA) Appendix II RMA Certification Chart Appendix III NHA Certification Chart Appendix IV Prefixes and Suffixes Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix V Latin and Greek Equivalents Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix VI Abbreviations Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VII Symbols Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VIII Professional Organizations and Agencies FEATURES Jurch provides a consistent format for each anatomic area presented Jurch provides a consistent, systematic, “stepped program” for each condition discussed: Students will learn the condition name, how to assess, Anatomy & Physiology review, how to find the structures and most importantly how to treat the condition. For example, the students will learn about treating the condition: Myofascia, Soft tissue restoration of function, Range of Motion and Strength. Photos correspond to anatomical art: Visual learners will appreciate the photographs and illustrations in the Jurch text. Jurch’s art is focused on the main concepts by using concise labeling methodology that keeps students from getting bogged down with excessive detail. Difficult concepts are broken down into easy-to-understand illustrations. Clinical Pearls: This feature will draw students into the materials and help them learn the value of clinical massage and the effective treatment of orthopedic conditions that students will face in their future careers. Reference to clinical applications will be highlighted: Students will understand the clinical relevance and important application of massage therapy. Jurch: Clincal Massage Student Resources Jurch Online Learning Center Chapter Quizzes Glossary Games Jurch: Clinical Massage Instructor Resources Instructor Manual Jurch Online Learning Center Overview Introduction to the material Extended chapter outlines 196 ALLIED HEALTH Sample course outlines Curriculum suggestions Sample lesson plans Teaching strategies/instructor tips Learning activities Answers to the questions allowing for substantially expanded information to be provided in each. The Skeletal System will now include full coverage of joint dissections. 75 NEW photos of disarticulated bones have been added. NEW Histology Section! -- Version 2.0 of Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes a new button for histology views to support every body system. Students can access this information by clicking on the microscope icon located on the navigation bar. PowerPoint presentations Image bank of the text’s illustrations EZ Test questions for each chapter NEW! Expanded Quizzing Types and Options -- Physiology animation quizzes have been added to Skeletal, Muscular and Nervous Systems. In addition, the user can now select the number of questions he/she wants included in each quiz (10, 25 or ALL). CONTENTS Part I – General Principles Chapter 1: Introduction to Clinical Massage Chapter 2: Review of the basics Chapter 3: Advanced Concepts Part II: Regional Approach to Treatment Chapter 4: Formulating a Treatment Plan Chapter 5: Conditions of the Head and Neck Chapter 6: Conditions of the Lumbar Spine and Sacrum Chapter 7: Conditions of the Shoulder Chapter 8: Conditions of the Elbow, Forearm, Wrist and Hand Chapter 9: Conditions of the Hip, Pelvis, and Knee Chapter 10: Conditions of the Ankle and Foot Chapter 11: General Conditions Appendix A: State by State Requirement References and Resources Glossary Index NEW! Navigation and Interface changes! System selection menu makes it easy to hop between systems. A new “Smart” (Google-like) search button has been added and integrated across all systems. Tags are now color coded. All tags pertaining to the given system are one color and reference structures that are not part of that system are another color. A recent research study proved that students using APR in the lab performed nearly 2x better than students using traditional methods (lab manual + animal specimen). 63% of students in a recent study stated that APR encouraged an active-learning process compared to 31% who said the same about traditional lab. 75% of students in a recent study indicated they routinely used APR to study on their own, vs. 29% who used traditional lab materials to study on their own. I can see how you might think you have to use cadavers to use this product. It is a common misconception. I can understand your concern. Our research has shown that students do use APR when it is incorporated into the lecture and/or lab. I am pretty happy with the textbook and media I am using now. Everything is working fine. NEW CONTENTS ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED (ALLIED HEALTH VERSION) Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System Nervous System Cardiovascular System By Medical College Ohio 2009 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-337831-2 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art program uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed also offers animations, histologic and radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. It can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate anatomy & physiology or human anatomy course; Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is available stand-alone, or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s anatomy & physiology textbooks. FEATURES New Organ System Added -- The Integumentary System has been added to the list of organ systems included in this program. All layers of the skin will be included and this new section will also feature histology images and full coverage of the dermis, epidermis, hair shaft, specific glands, etc. Expanded Skeletal and Joint Coverage -- The Skeletal System and Muscular System have been separated into each their own system 197 COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia ALLIED HEALTH Chapter 21: Emotional Health, Substance Abuse, and Weight Management Chapter 22: Pain Management, Cancer, and Hospice Section 4: Ethics and Business of Reflexology Chapter 23: Ethics and Business Appendices A: Reflexology Associations, Websites, and Schools B: Sample Reflexology Session C: Stretching Workout for the Practitioner D: Marketing Reflexology E: Client History Forms F: Documenting Charts for the Client G: Specific Techniques for Pathologies Bibliography 1: Resources 2: References Glossary Index NEW PRACTICAL REFLEXOLOGY Interpretation and Techniques By Susan Watson and Valerie Voner 2009 (February 2008) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351095-8 www.mhhe.com/careercentral The study and practice of reflexology today requires a text that provides both training and resource material. This book offers practical application and in-depth knowledge that is germane to acquiring proficiency in reflexology. Illustrations were chosen to support the discussion of technique while providing an overall review of how reflexology affects each system including key pathologies within the body systems. The goal was to provide a vehicle that smoothly transports the reader to fulfillment be it as instructor or student. FEATURES A clinically relevant text covering important modalities used by reflexologists and massage therapists. Dynamic illustrations and photographs present a realistic view of reflexology to enhance learning. Text is a “bench manual” on how to equate specific manipulations to support healing in specific systems or body regions. Every chapter opens with Learning Outcomes and Key terms Review and Critical Thinking questions. Watson provides clear, concise, compact, and appropriate content for coursework or practice. Scientific Support boxes are definitive facts collected from professional reflexology case studies or research reports. CONTENTS Introduction Section 1: Basic Principles of Reflexology Chapter 1: History and Theory of Reflexology Chapter 2: Introduction to Basic Anatomy Chapter 3: Anatomy and Pathologies of the Foot Chapter 4: Anatomy and Pathologies of the Hand Chapter 5: Mapping of the Feet and Hands Connecting Reflexes with Anatomy Chapter 6: Positioning and Thumb-walking Techniques Chapter 7: Relaxing Techniques Section 2: Body Systems Chapter 8: Skeletal and Muscular Systems Chapter 9: Nervous System Chapter 10: Sense Organs Chapter 11: Endocrine System Chapter 12: Circulatory System Chapter 13: Lymphatic System Chapter 14: Respiratory System Chapter 15: Digestive System Chapter 16: Urinary System Chapter 17: Reproductive System Chapter 18: Integumentary System Section 3: Applications of Reflexology Chapter 19: Children and Geriatric Chapter 20: Women and Men’s Health MASSAGE THERAPY REVIEW Passing the NCETMB and NCETM with Student CD-ROM By Laura Abbott, Georgia State University 2008 (November 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-722777-7 (with Student CD-ROM) ISBN: 978-0-07-725113-0 (with Updated Student CD-ROM) Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and NCETM Exams is designed to help massage therapists prepare for the National Certification Exam for Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork (NCETMB) AND the National Certification Exam for Therapeutic Massage (NCETM). The certifying exam, National Certification Board for Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork (NCBTMB), broke into two separate sections last year, with the former being more robust, including additional oriental modalities. The exam reviews are a thorough study of a broad range of material; new graduates find it stressful, as they must pass in order to practice as a licensed professional in most states. This is the only review text that offers questions, answers, and explanations in the same form and organization as the exam itself. A high first time fail rate combined with the fact that graduates must pass this exam in order work as a professional, makes Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and NCETM Exams an excellent choice. A richly illustrated text, a Prep Course Outline, a 200-page Anatomy and Physiology Outline, and a CD containing 980 test questions provides a comprehensive review presented in a clearly written style. CONTENTS Chapter 1 General Knowledge of Body Systems Chapter 2 Detailed Knowledge of Anatomy, Physiology, and Kinesiology Chapter 3 Pathology Chapter 4 Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork Assessment Chapter 5 Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork Application Chapter 6 Professional Standards, Ethics, Business and Legal Practices Chapter 7 Eastern Modalities (NCETMB Only) Appendix A: Prep Course Outline 198 ALLIED HEALTH NEW FOUNDATIONS IN THERAPEUTIC MASSAGE AND BODYWORK WITH STUDENT CD-ROM Quick Guide D: Diseases Common to Body Systems Quick Guide E: Skin Pathologies Quick Guide F: Common Medications Quick Guide G: State-by-State Requirements Quick Guide H: State-by-State Guide to Massage Practice Laws By Jan Saeger, Keiser College and Donna Kyle-Brown, Blue Cliff College 2008 (January 2007) / 736 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-302582-7 Website: http://www.mhhe.com/saegermassage New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork offers a core curriculum of fundamental principles and practical applications for beginning students as well as practitioners in the field who seek a desk reference and review for continuing education. This text also goes beyond the core curriculum by addressing such topics as massage for hospice patients and survivors of abuse as well as massage routines for common pathologies (including carpal tunnel syndrome, thoracic outlet syndrome, and fibromyalgia). With Exam Points highlighted throughout the text as well as a student CD offering additional test questions and study materials, New Foundations is designed to help students reach two important goals: to succeed in passing their National Certification Exam and to ultimately succeed in their careers. Practice expectations and realities are emphasized through case studies and author/contributor anecdotes. Full-color photographs and line art give the student a detailed view of the application or points being studied. Workbook pages, titled Applying Your Knowledge, are incorporated within the Chapters for easy access and review. Massage/Business NEW BUILDING A HEALTHY BUSINESS For Massage and Alternative Healthcare Practices CONTENTS PART ONE: BASIC CONCEPTS OF THERAPEUTIC MASSAGE AND BODYWORK Chapter 1 History of Therapeutic Massage Chapter 2 Equipment, Environment, and Safety Practices Chapter 3 The Massage Therapy Session: Preparations for Before, During, and After Chapter 4 Therapeutic Massage Techniques Chapter 5 Physiological Effects of Therapeutic Massage PART TWO: KINESIOLOGY, ANATOMY, AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY Chapter 6 Biomechanics of Movement Chapter 7 Skeletal System Chapter 8 Muscular System Chapter 9 Other Body Systems PART THREE: BEYOND THE BASIC CURRICULUM Chapter 10 Maternity, Infant, and Pediatric Massage Chapter 11 Massage for Special Populations (Children with Special Needs, Geriatric, Hospice, & Palliative Care Chapter 12 Massage for Survivors of Abuse Chapter 13 Sports Massage: For Amateur and Professional Athletes Chapter 14 Spa Therapy: Peace, Beauty, and Massage PART FOUR: COMPLEMENTARY MASSAGE & BODYWORK MODALITIES Chapter 15 Oriental Practices and Energy Work Chapter 16 Introduction to Other Modalities PART FIVE: WELLNESS FOR BODY AND MIND Chapter 17 Body-Mind Connection Chapter 18 Diet and Wellness Chapter 19 Eastern and Western Principles of Movement PART SIX: ETHICS AND PROFESSIONAL BUSINESS PRACTICES Chapter 20 Law, Ethics, and Professionalism Chapter 21 Business Development, Marketing Success, and Community Education PART SEVEN: PHARMACOLOGY AND SPECIFIC PATHOLOGY ROUTINES Chapter 22 Common Medications and Effects in Clients Chapter 23 Special Massage Routines for Common Pathologies (Carpal Tunnel, Thoracic Outlet, Torticollis, Temporomandibular Joint Dysfunction, and Fibromyalgia) Quick Guide A: Resource List Quick Guide B: Aromatherapy, Herbal Preparations, and Supplements Quick Guide C: Medical Terminology By Jan Saeger, Keiser University and Lewis Rudolph 2010 (January 2009) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-340191-1 www.mhhe.com/saegerbusiness Many students in health care and healing arts curriculums, including massage therapy, physical therapy, chiropractic, homeopathy, athletic or personal training, naturopathy, acupuncture, Reiki, and many more, possess a strong desire to help others but do not know how to create and maintain a thriving practice. Building a Healthy Business: For Massage and Alternative Practices by authors Jan Saeger and Lewis Rudolph gives students of any age the tools needed to start and grow a successful business. FEATURES Online Learning Center contains: Instructor View Instructor Manual PowerPoint Presentations EZ Test Student View Quizzes Flashcards Chapter Objectives Forms: Numerous examples of forms needed to start and run your business. All the forms can be personalized and printed for use. Short and concise chapters with clarity and organization Ample personal examples from the field Written by practicing therapists with teaching experience Numerous variety of forms in different formats Practical tips/Checklist Can be used to a broad user base-more than just for massage therapist 199 ALLIED HEALTH Engaging, graphical presentation Appendices with valuable information include: A state-by-state resource list is included in the appendices to give each state’s website information allowing the reader to log on directly to the site for specifics in licensure/certification of various health care fields. Budgeting and accounting forms are provided for those individuals who would rather use the familiar pencil & paper worksheet. CONTENTS groups before presenting a comprehensive review of the most often presenting orthopedic dysfunctions or conditions. Each dysfunction or condition is reviewed with a consistent diagnostic checklist, a stepped treatment program, and relevant “clinical pearls”. The learning aids throughout the text, along with the reader-friendly writing style, create a highly-effective learning system for understanding the concepts of clinical massage. FEATURES Jurch provides a consistent format for each anatomic area presented Jurch provides a consistent, systematic, “stepped program” for each condition discussed: Students will learn the condition name, how to assess, Anatomy & Physiology review, how to find the structures and most importantly how to treat the condition. For example, the students will learn about treating the condition: Myofascia, Soft tissue restoration of function, Range of Motion and Strength. Part One: Starting in the Business World Chapter 1-Building a Strong Foundation Chapter 2-Creating a Mission Statement Chapter 3-Setting Goals Chapter 4-Evaluation and Application of Your Goals Chapter 5-Putting Together a Team Part Two: Living in the Business World Chapter 6-Budgeting Chapter 7-Customer, Locations and Service Provided Chapter 8-Buisness Layout and Look Chapter 9-The Legal Aspects Chapter 10-Getting Help Chapter 11-Success Through Ethics Chapter 12-Ethical Business Practices Chapter 13-Marketing Your Business Chapter 14-Financial Policies Chapter 15-Additional Business Policies Chapter 16-Medical Documentation Chapter 17-Accounting Part Three: Enjoying the Fruits of Your Labor Chapter 18-Enjoying the Fruits of Your Labor Appendix A-State-by-State Resource Guide Appendix B-Web Resource Guide Appendix C-Business Plan Appendix D-References and Resources Appendix E- Sample Forms Glossary Index Photos correspond to anatomical art: Visual learners will appreciate the photographs and illustrations in the Jurch text. Jurch’s art is focused on the main concepts by using concise labeling methodology that keeps students from getting bogged down with excessive detail. Difficult concepts are broken down into easy-to-understand illustrations. Clinical Pearls: This feature will draw students into the materials and help them learn the value of clinical massage and the effective treatment of orthopedic conditions that students will face in their future careers. Reference to clinical applications will be highlighted: Students will understand the clinical relevance and important application of massage therapy. Jurch: Clincal Massage Student Resources Jurch Online Learning Center Chapter Quizzes Glossary Games Jurch: Clinical Massage Instructor Resources Instructor Manual Jurch Online Learning Center Overview Introduction to the material Extended chapter outlines Sample course outlines Curriculum suggestions Sample lesson plans Teaching strategies/instructor tips CLINICAL MASSAGE THERAPY Assessment and Treatment of Orthopedic Conditions Learning activities Answers to the questions By Steven E Jurch, Trident Technical College CONTENTS Massage/Clinical NEW PowerPoint presentations Image bank of the text’s illustrations EZ Test questions for each chapter 2009 (February 2008) / 560 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351093-4 http://www.mhhe.com/jurchclinical Jurch’s Clinical Massage is designed to outline the principles and foundational understanding of assessing and treating orthopedic injury or dysfunction through massage therapy. The text follows an anatomic region approach, covering surface anatomy and muscle Part I – General Principles Chapter 1: Introduction to Clinical Massage Chapter 2: Review of the basics Chapter 3: Advanced Concepts Part II: Regional Approach to Treatment Chapter 4: Formulating a Treatment Plan Chapter 5: Conditions of the Head and Neck Chapter 6: Conditions of the Lumbar Spine and Sacrum Chapter 7: Conditions of the Shoulder Chapter 8: Conditions of the Elbow, Forearm, Wrist and Hand 200 ALLIED HEALTH Chapter 9: Conditions of the Hip, Pelvis, and Knee Chapter 10: Conditions of the Ankle and Foot Chapter 11: General Conditions Appendix A: State by State Requirement References and Resources Glossary Index 4 Equipment for Dosage Measurement 5 Drug Orders 6 Drug Labels and Package Inserts 7 Methods of Dosage Calculations 8 Oral Dosages 9 Parenteral Dosages 10 Intravenous Dosages 11 Calculations for Special Populations 12 Specialized Calculations Appendices A. Comprehensive Evaluation B. Answer Key Glossary Credits Index Reference Cards Math for Health Professions NEW SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MATHEMATICS FOR NURSES MATH & DOSAGE CALCULATIONS FOR HEALTH CAREERS 3rd Edition By Kathryn A Booth, Total Care Programming and James Whaley, Baker College 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-729049-8 (with Student CD) By Larry Stephens, University of Nebraska 2003 ISBN: 978-0-07-140022-0 A Professional Reference Title A review of basic arithmetic precedes clear explanations of how nurses need to apply mathematics in modern clinical practice. This study guide teaches an especially easy approach to solving the proportion problems key to converting medication orders and passing nursing licensing exams. The profusion of problems with detailed solutions, and hundreds more with answers, gives students ample opportunities to test their skills as they learn them--leading to quicker mastery. www.mhhe.com/mathdosage3e Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical Careers teaches the skills and techniques medical assistants, nurses, pharmacy technicians, and paramedics need to calculate the amount of medication they should administer to patients. Students learn to calculate dosages based on ratio proportions, fraction proportions, the formula method, and dimensional analysis. Medical Assisting - Administrative and Clinical NEW TO THIS EDITION New homework sheets at the end of each chapter contain 20 to 30 questions to check for students’ understanding of the chapter content. NEW Questions have been added to Critical Thinking boxes to apply what has been taught in the previous section of the chapter. CD-ROM references throughout that direct the student to exercises and provide for independent review, reinforcement, and evaluation. MEDICAL OFFICE HANDBOOK Student CD includes games for reinforcement--Spin the Wheel, Concentration, and NEW Math Challenge. Instructor Manual, located on the password-protected Online Learning Center, provides detailed answer key, additional exercises for each chapter, and an image bank for classroom use. Instructor’s CD-ROM contains the EZTest testing software and Instructor PowerPoint Presentations. Includes over 250 full-color, up-to-date illustrations of drugs labels currently used by the health care profession to provide realistic learning. Online Learning Center content has been updated. CONTENTS 1 Fractions and Decimals 2 Percents, Ratios, and Proportions 3 Systems of Weights and Measures By Carlene Harrison, Hodges University 2010 (January 2009) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337413-0 The Complete Medical Office Handbook provides readers with a handy resource for both the student on their externship or going to their first job, as well as the seasoned professional who has been in the medical office for years. The medical office is a busy place with many day-to-day challenges. Each chapter of the Handbook was written to provide the reader with a practical summary of the critical information they need to know. Sample forms, checklists and letters, as well as resources for more information are included. 201 ALLIED HEALTH FEATURES NEW The Handbook is organized into four sections. Section One covers a variety of communication topics. Chapter 1 is about the first impressions your practice makes when the patient first arrives. Chapter 2 covers general communication skills and Chapter 3 provides a review of basic writing principles. ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES FOR MEDICAL ASSISTING FOR STUDENT CD 3rd Edition Section Two provides the reader with a primer in computer applications (Chapter 4) as well as a chapter on the various ways to schedule appointments (Chapter 5). Section Three is all about the paperwork. We all know there is too much paperwork, but having a fundamental understanding of medical terminology (Chapter 6), medical records and privacy (Chapter 7), health insurance (Chapter 8), basing medical coding (Chapter 9) and the daily management of accounts (Chapter 10) is important in the day to day management of the medical practice. The last section covers safety and wellness. Safety (Chapter 11) is no longer just infection control and OSHA standards, but is also preparing for that catastrophic event—whether caused by weather or by man, all medical practices need to prepare for the unthinkable. To end the Handbook, a chapter on stress management will help you to better deal with the challenges in the busy office environment. The Complete Medical Office Handbook is designed to be a well-used reference for the medical office staff. It is also a reference tool for the allied health student first starting out in the fastest growing industry in the country. Working in the medical office provides us with great opportunities and challenges. This book will help you meet some of those challenges. This reference is a supplemental handbook for the students in medical assisting programs and perhaps a primary text in medical office administration programs offered at the vocational level. Additionally, the physician offices, group practices and clinics throughout the country may be interested in having a copy at the front desk for easy reference for those staff who have no formal training. Successful handbooks provide good examples. The Complete Medical Office Handbook provides not only the applicable rule but also an illustrative example where appropriate. This handbook is 7 ¼” X 9”, soft-cover, and spiral bound for easy use. CONTENTS Section I—Communications Chapter 1 First Impressions Chapter 2 Effective Communication Chapter 3 Writing Basics Section II—Computer Basics and Scheduling Chapter 4 Computers in the Medical Office Chapter 5 Appointment Scheduling Section III—The Paperwork Chapter 6 Medical Terminology Chapter 7 Medical Records and Privacy Chapter 8 Health Insurance Chapter 9 Essentials of Coding Chapter 10 The Daily Business in the Medical Office—Accounting and Bookkeeping Section IV—Office Safety and Wellness Chapter 11 Safety in the Medical Office Chapter 12 Managing Stress By Kathryn A Booth, Total Care Programming, Leesa Whicker, Central Piedmont Community College, Donna Jeanne Pugh, Florida Metro University, Sharion K Thompson, Bryant & Stratton Bookstore and Terri D Wyman, Sanford Brown Institute 2009 (February 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-326127-0 www.mhhe.com/medicakassisting3e Administrative Procedures for Medical Assisting, Third Edition addresses the most current competencies for medical assisting certification, coding and insurance billing requirements, HIPAA regulations, and OSHA guidelines. It retains its thorough coverage of procedures. It trains students on medical office administrative procedures and equipment and much more. NEW TO THIS EDITION Pocket Guide is a quick and handy reference to use while working as a medical assistant. It includes Critical Procedure Steps, bulleted lists and brief information all medical assistants should know, and Patient Education Tips. Information is sorted by Administrative, Clinical, and General content. Procedures revised to include Procedure Goals and Rationales. Each text chapter opener includes a chart indicating Medical Assisting Competencies (CMA and RMA) which are taught in the chapter. New “Reflecting On...” feature boxes for Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication Issues, Cultural Issues, Professionalism, and HIPAA. Virtual Field Trips provide simulated activities for each chapter. Strong pedagogy, including boxed readings and end-of-chapter material add educational value: *Glossary includes pronunciation guide so students learn proper pronunciation of medical terms. *Points on Practice (formerly Tips for the Office) provide helpful suggestions for running an efficient office. *Career Opportunities provide information about additional careers available for medical assistants. *Caution: Handle with Care emphasizes infection control techniques. *Educating the Patient shows how to provide the detailed instructions patients need to carry out their physician’s orders. *End-of-chapter questions and activities help students assess their progress. Updated and expanded information includes: *Current coding and billing practices, including HIPAA. *Use of technology in the medical office - especially more and varied uses of the Internet, including web site development, patient education, billing and coding. Expanded Student CD-ROM with applications included in the text. Includes “A Day in the Life of the Medical Assistant” case studies, video clip library, audio glossary and much more! Comprehensive and thoroughly updated Student Workbook. The workbook has been updated to reflect the extensive textbook revisions. There are more questions. The Procedure Competency Checklists have been improved to include more procedure observer comments. Online Learning Center with chapter-specific applications, games, quizzes, and links. Also available as a cartridge for Distance Education Platforms: WebCT, Blackboard and eCollege. 202 ALLIED HEALTH Instructor’s Resources include lesson plans, teaching strategies, tests and answers, SCANS competency correlation, full-color image bank, and CMA, RMA, and CCMA correlation charts. It also includes a CD-ROM with PowerPoint presentations, class syllabi, clip art from the text and EZ Test test generator with answer rationales and correlation to texts and MEDICAL ASSISTING REVIEW. NEW ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY FOR ALLIED HEALTH 2nd Edition CONTENTS PART ONE INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL ASSISTING Section 1 Foundations and Principles Chapter 1 The Profession of Medical Assisting Chapter 2 Types of Medical Practice Chapter 3 Legal and Ethical Issues in Medical Practice, Including HIPAA Chapter 4 Communication with Patients, Families, and Coworkers PART TWO ADMINISTRATIVE MEDICAL ASSISTING Section 1 Office Work Chapter 5 Using and Maintaining Office Equipment Chapter 6 Using Computers in the Office Chapter 7 Managing Correspondence and Mail Chapter 8 Managing Office Supplies Chapter 9 Maintaining Patient Records Chapter 10 Managing the Office Medical Records Section 2 Interacting with Patients Chapter 11 Telephone Techniques Chapter 12 Scheduling Appointments and Maintaining the Physician’s Schedule Chapter 13 Patient Reception Chapter 14 Patient Education Section 3 Financial Responsibilities Chapter 15 Health Insurance Billing Procedures Chapter 16 Medical Coding Chapter 17 Patient Billing and Collections Chapter 18 Accounting for the Medical Office Appendix I Medical Assistant Role Delineation Chart (AAMA) Appendix II RMA Certification Chart Appendix III NHA Certification Chart Appendix IV Prefixes and Suffixes Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix V Latin and Greek Equivalents Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix VI Abbreviations Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VII Symbols Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VIII Professional Organizations and Agencies By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming and Terri Wyman, Sanford Brown Institute 2009 (February 2008) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337395-9 Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathophysiology for Allied Health, Second Edition, is an introductory book to the body systems for allied health students. It acquaints students with basic information of all the body systems. The book speaks directly to the student, with chapter introductions, case studies, and chapter summaries written to engage the student’s attention. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Organization of the Body Chapter 2 The Integumentary System Chapter 3 The Skeletal System Chapter 4 The Muscular System Chapter 5 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 6 The Respiratory System Chapter 7 The Nervous System Chapter 8 The Urinary System Chapter 9 The Reproductive Systems Chapter 10 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 11 The Digestive System Chapter 12 The Endocrine System Chapter 13 Special Senses Appendix I Medical Assistant Role Delineation Chart (AAMA) Appendix II RMA Certification Chart Appendix III NHA Certification Chart Appendix IV Prefixes and Suffixes Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix V Latin and Greek Equivalents Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix VI Abbreviations Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VII Symbols Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VIII Professional Organizations and Agencies INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 203 ALLIED HEALTH Online Learning Center with chapter-specific applications, games, quizzes, and links. Also available as a cartridge for Distance Education Platforms: WebCT, Blackboard and eCollege. NEW Instructor’s Resources include lesson plans, teaching strategies, tests and answers, SCANS competency correlation, full-color image bank, and CMA, RMA, and CCMA correlation charts. It also includes a CD-ROM with PowerPoint presentations, class syllabi, clip art from the text and EZ Test test generator with answer rationales and correlation to texts and MEDICAL ASSISTING REVIEW. CLINICAL PROCEDURES FOR MEDICAL ASSISTING WITH STUDENT CD 3rd Edition By Kathryn A Booth, Total Care Programming, Leesa Whicker, Central Piedmont Community College, Donna Jeanne Pugh, Florida Metro University, Sharion K Thompson, Bryant & Stratton Bookstore and Terri D Wyman, Sanford Brown Institute 2009 (February 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-325987-1 CONTENTS www.mhhe.com/medicalassisting3 Clinical Procedures for Medical Assisting, Third Edition addresses the most current competencies for medical assisting certification, CPR procedures, HIPAA regulations, OSHA guidelines, and clinical diagnostic testing such as hemoglobin A1c (diabetes) testing. It also includes coverage of procedures and the coverage of Anatomy and Physiology is increased significantly. It trains students on clinical procedures, infection control, anatomy and physiology, assisting with patients, medical emergencies and first aid, laboratory procedures, nutrition, pharmacology, diagnostic equipment, and much more. NEW TO THIS EDITION Pocket Guide is a quick and handy reference to use while working as a medical assistant. It includes Critical Procedure Steps, bulleted lists and brief information all medical assistants should know, and Patient Education Tips. Information is sorted by Administrative, Clinical, and General content. Procedures revised to include Procedure Goals and Rationales. Each text chapter opener includes a chart indicating Medical Assisting Competencies (CMA and RMA) which are taught in the chapter. New “Reflecting On...” feature boxes for Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication Issues, Cultural Issues, Professionalism, and HIPAA. Virtual Field Trips provide simulated activities for each chapter. New chapter--Complementary and Alternative Medicine Strong pedagogy, including boxed readings and end-of-chapter material add educational value: *Glossary includes pronunciation guide so students learn proper pronunciation of medical terms. *Points on Practice (formerly Tips for the Office) provide helpful suggestions for running an efficient office. *Career Opportunities provide information about additional careers available for medical assistants. *Caution: Handle with Care emphasizes infection control techniques. *Educating the Patient shows how to provide the detailed instructions patients need to carry out their physician’s orders. *End-of-chapter questions and activities help students assess their progress. *Clinical diagnostic testing such as in-office Hemoglobin A1c testing. *CPR guidelines to comply with the latest American Heart Association guidelines. *OSHA issues *Infection control and antibiotic resistance. Expanded Student CD-ROM with applications included in the text. Includes “A Day in the Life of the Medical Assistant” case studies, video clip library, audio glossary and much more! Comprehensive and thoroughly updated Student Workbook. The workbook has been updated to reflect the extensive textbook revisions. There are more questions. The Procedure Competency Checklists have been improved to include more procedure observer comments. PART ONE CLINICAL MEDICAL ASSISTING Section 1 The Medical Office Environment Chapter 1 Principles of Asepsis Chapter 2 Infection Control Techniques Chapter 3 HIV, Hepatitis, and Other Blood-Borne Pathogens Chapter 4 Preparing the Examination and Treatment Areas Section 2 Anatomy and Physiology Chapter 5 Organization of the Body Chapter 6 The Integumentary System Chapter 7 The Skeletal System Chapter 8 The Muscular System Chapter 9 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 10 The Respiratory System Chapter 11 The Nervous System Chapter 12 The Urinary System Chapter 13 The Reproductive Systems Chapter 14 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 15 The Digestive System Chapter 16 The Endocrine System Chapter 17 Special Senses Section 3 Assisting with Patients Chapter 18 Interviewing the Patient, Taking a History, and Documentation Chapter 19 Obtaining Vital Signs and Measurements Chapter 20 Assisting with a General Physical Examination Section 4 Specialty Practices and Medical Emergencies Chapter 21 Assisting with Examinations in the Basic Specialties Chapter 22 Assisting with Highly Specialized Examinations Chapter 23 Assisting with Minor Surgery Chapter 24 Assisting with Cold and Heat Therapy and Ambulation Chapter 25 Medical Emergencies and First Aid Chapter 26 Complementary and Alternative Medicine Section 5 Physician’s Office Laboratory Procedures Chapter 27 Laboratory Equipment and Safety Chapter 28 Introduction to Microbiolog y Chapter 29 Collecting, ProcessingMicrobiologyng Urine Specimens Chapter 30 Collecting, Processing, and Testing Blood Specimens Section 6 Nutrition, Pharmacology, and Diagnostic Equipment Chapter 31 Nutrition and Special Diets Chapter 32 Principles of Pharmacology Chapter 33 Drug Administration Chapter 34 Electrocardiography and Pulmonary Function Testing Chapter 35 X-Rays and Diagnostic Radiology Section 7 Externship Chapter 36 Medical Assisting Externships and Preparing to Find a Position Appendix I Medical Assistant Role Delineation Chart (AAMA) Appendix II RMA Certification Chart Appendix III NHA Certification Chart Appendix IV Prefixes and Suffixes Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix V Latin and Greek Equivalents Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix VI Abbreviations Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VII Symbols Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VIII Professional Organizations and Agencies 204 ALLIED HEALTH The workbook has been updated to reflect the extensive textbook revisions. There are more questions. The Procedure Competency Checklists have been improved to include more procedure observer comments. NEW CONTENTS MEDICAL ASSISTINGADMINISTRATIVE AND CLINICAL COMPETENCIES WITH STUDENT CD-ROMS 3rd Edition By Kathryn A Booth, Total Care Programming, Leesa Whicker, Central Piedmont Community College, Donna Jeanne Pugh, Florida Metro University, Sharion K Thompson, Bryant & Stratton Bookstore and Terri D Wyman, Sanford Brown Institute 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-325988-8 www.mhhe.com/medicalassisting3 Medical Assisting, Third Edition addresses the most current competencies for medical assisting certification, CPR procedures, coding and insurance billing requirements, HIPAA regulation, OSHA guidelines, and clinical diagnostic testing such as hemoglobin A1c (diabetes) testing. Thorough coverage of procedures remains an asset and Anatomy & Physiology coverage is included in separate chapters. It trains students on medical office administrative procedures and equipment, clinical procedures, infection control, anatomy and physiology, assisting with patients, medical emergencies and first aid, laboratory procedures, nutrition, pharmacology, diagnostic equipment, and much more. NEW TO THIS EDITION Pocket Guide is a quick and handy reference to use while working as a medical assistant. It includes Critical Procedure Steps, bulleted lists and brief information all medical assistants should know, and Patient Education Tips. Information is sorted by Administrative, Clinical, and General content. Procedures revised to include Procedure Goals and Rationales. Each text chapter opener includes a chart indicating Medical Assisting Competencies (CMA and RMA) which are taught in the chapter. New “Reflecting On...” feature boxes for Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication Issues, Cultural Issues, Professionalism, and HIPAA. Virtual Field Trips provide simulated activities for each chapter. New chapter--Complementary and Alternative Medicine Updated and expanded information includes: *Current coding and billing practices, including HIPAA. *Use of technology in the medical office - especially more and varied uses of the Internet, including web site development, patient education, billing and coding. *Clinical diagnostic testing such as in-office Hemoglobin A1c testing. *CPR guidelines to comply with the latest American Heart Association guidelines. *OSHA issues *Infection control and antibiotic resistance. Expanded Student CD-ROM with applications included in the text. Includes “A Day in the Life of the Medical Assistant” case studies, video clip library, audio glossary and much more! Comprehensive and thoroughly updated Student Workbook. PART ONE INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL ASSISTING Section 1 Foundations and Principles Chapter 1 The Profession of Medical Assisting Chapter 2 Types of Medical Practice Chapter 3 Legal and Ethical Issues in Medical Practice, Including HIPAA Chapter 4 Communication with Patients, Families, and Coworkers PART TWO ADMINISTRATIVE MEDICAL ASSISTING Section 1 Office Work Chapter 5 Using and Maintaining Office Equipment Chapter 6 Using Computers in the Office Chapter 7 Managing Correspondence and Mail Chapter 8 Managing Office Supplies Chapter 9 Maintaining Patient Records Chapter 10 Managing the Office Medical Records Section 2 Interacting with Patients Chapter 11 Telephone Techniques Chapter 12 Scheduling Appointments and Maintaining the Physician’s Schedule Chapter 13 Patient Reception Chapter 14 Patient Education Section 3 Financial Responsibilities Chapter 15 Health Insurance Billing Procedures Chapter 16 Medical Coding Chapter 17 Patient Billing and Collections Chapter 18 Accounting for the Medical Office PART THREE CLINICAL MEDICAL ASSISTING Section 1 The Medical Office Environment Chapter 19 Principles of Asepsis Chapter 20 Infection Control Techniques Chapter 21 HIV, Hepatitis, and Other Blood-Borne Pathogens Chapter 22 Preparing the Examination and Treatment Areas Section 2 Anatomy and Physiology Chapter 23 Organization of the Body Chapter 24 The Integumentary System Chapter 25 The Skeletal System Chapter 26 The Muscular System Chapter 27 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 28 The Respiratory System Chapter 29 The Nervous System Chapter 30 The Urinary System Chapter 31 The Reproductive Systems Chapter 32 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 33 The Digestive System Chapter 34 The Endocrine System Chapter 35 Special Senses Section 3 Assisting with Patients Chapter 36 Interviewing the Patient, Taking a History, and Documentation Chapter 37 Obtaining Vital Signs and Measurements Chapter 38 Assisting with a General Physical Examination Section 4 Specialty Practices and Medical Emergencies Chapter 39 Assisting with Examinations in the Basic Specialties Chapter 40 Assisting with Highly Specialized Examinations Chapter 41 Assisting with Minor Surgery Chapter 42 Assisting with Cold and Heat Therapy and Ambulation Chapter 43 Medical Emergencies and First Aid Chapter 44 Complementary and Alternative Medicine Section 5 Physician’s Office Laboratory Procedures Chapter 45 Laboratory Equipment and Safety Chapter 46 Introduction to Microbiology Chapter 47 Collecting, ProcessingMicrobiologyng Urine Specimens Chapter 48 Collecting, Processing, and Testing Blood Specimens 205 ALLIED HEALTH Section 6 Nutrition, Pharmacology, and Diagnostic Equipment Chapter 49 Nutrition and Special Diets Chapter 50 Principles of Pharmacology Chapter 51 Drug Administration Chapter 52 Electrocardiography and Pulmonary Function Testing Chapter 53 X-Rays and Diagnostic Radiology Section 7 Externship Chapter 54 Medical Assisting Externships and Preparing to Find a Position Appendices Appendix I Medical Assistant Role Delineation Chart (AAMA) Appendix II RMA Certification Chart Appendix III NHA Certification Chart Appendix IV Prefixes and Suffixes Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix V Latin and Greek Equivalents Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix VI Abbreviations Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VII Symbols Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VIII Professional Organizations and Agencies New chapter--Complementary and Alternative Medicine Strong pedagogy, including boxed readings and end-of-chapter material add educational value: *Glossary includes pronunciation guide so students learn proper pronunciation of medical terms. *Points on Practice (formerly Tips for the Office) provide helpful suggestions for running an efficient office. *Career Opportunities provide information about additional careers available for medical assistants. *Caution: Handle with Care emphasizes infection control techniques. *Educating the Patient shows how to provide the detailed instructions patients need to carry out their physician’s orders. *End-of-chapter questions and activities help students assess their progress. Updated and expanded information includes: *Current coding and billing practices, including HIPAA. *Use of technology in the medical office - especially more and varied uses of the Internet, including web site development, patient education, billing and coding. *Clinical diagnostic testing such as in-office Hemoglobin A1c testing. *CPR guidelines to comply with the latest American Heart Association guidelines. *OSHA issues *Infection control and antibiotic resistance. Expanded Student CD-ROM with applications included in the text. Includes “A Day in the Life of the Medical Assistant” case studies, video clip library, audio glossary and much more! Comprehensive and thoroughly updated Student Workbook. The workbook has been updated to reflect the extensive textbook revisions. There are more questions. The Procedure Competency Checklists have been improved to include more procedure observer comments. NEW MEDICAL ASSISTING Administrative and Clinical Procedures (without A&P Chapters), 3rd Edition Online Learning Center with chapter-specific applications, games, quizzes, and links. Also available as a cartridge for Distance Education Platforms: WebCT, Blackboard and eCollege. Instructor’s Resources include lesson plans, teaching strategies, tests and answers, SCANS competency correlation, full-color image bank, and CMA, RMA, and CCMA correlation charts. It also includes a CD-ROM with PowerPoint presentations, class syllabi, clip art from the text and EZ Test test generator with answer rationales and correlation to texts and MEDICAL ASSISTING REVIEW. By Kathryn A Booth, Total Care Programming, Leesa Whicker, Central Piedmont Community College, Donna Jeanne Pugh, Florida Metro University, Sharion K Thompson, Bryant & Stratton Bookstore and Terri D Wyman, Sanford Brown Institute 2009 (February 2008) / 992 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-724326-5 (with Student CD, without A&P Chapters) CONTENTS www.mhhe.com/medicalassisting3 Medical Assisting, Third Edition addresses the most current competencies for medical assisting certification, CPR procedures, coding and insurance billing requirements, HIPAA regulation, OSHA guidelines, and clinical diagnostic testing such as hemoglobin A1c (diabetes) testing. Thorough coverage of procedures remains an asset. It trains students on medical office administrative procedures and equipment, clinical procedures, infection control, anatomy and physiology, assisting with patients, medical emergencies and first aid, laboratory procedures, nutrition, pharmacology, diagnostic equipment, and much more. FEATURES Pocket Guide is a quick and handy reference to use while working as a medical assistant. It includes Critical Procedure Steps, bulleted lists and brief information all medical assistants should know, and Patient Education Tips. Information is sorted by Administrative, Clinical, and General content. Procedures revised to include Procedure Goals and Rationales. Each text chapter opener includes a chart indicating Medical Assisting Competencies (CMA and RMA) which are taught in the chapter. New “Reflecting On...” feature boxes for Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication Issues, Cultural Issues, Professionalism, and HIPAA. Virtual Field Trips provide simulated activities for each chapter. PART ONE INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL ASSISTING Section 1 Foundations and Principles Chapter 1 The Profession of Medical Assisting Chapter 2 Types of Medical Practice Chapter 3 Legal and Ethical Issues in Medical Practice, Including HIPAA Chapter 4 Communication with Patients, Families, and Coworkers PART TWO ADMINISTRATIVE MEDICAL ASSISTING Section 1 Office Work Chapter 5 Using and Maintaining Office Equipment Chapter 6 Using Computers in the Office Chapter 7 Managing Correspondence and Mail Chapter 8 Managing Office Supplies Chapter 9 Maintaining Patient Records Chapter 10 Managing the Office Medical Records Section 2 Interacting with Patients Chapter 11 Telephone Techniques Chapter 12 Scheduling Appointments and Maintaining the Physician’s Schedule Chapter 13 Patient Reception Chapter 14 Patient Education Section 3 Financial Responsibilities Chapter 15 Health Insurance Billing Procedures Chapter 16 Medical Coding Chapter 17 Patient Billing and Collections Chapter 18 Accounting for the Medical Office PART THREE CLINICAL MEDICAL ASSISTING Section 1 The Medical Office Environment Chapter 19 Principles of Asepsis 206 ALLIED HEALTH Chapter 20 Infection Control Techniques Chapter 21 HIV, Hepatitis, and Other Blood-Borne Pathogens Chapter 22 Preparing the Examination and Treatment Areas Section 2 Assisting with Patients Chapter 23 Interviewing the Patient, Taking a History, and Documentation Chapter 24 Obtaining Vital Signs and Measurements Chapter 25 Assisting with a General Physical Examination Section 3 Specialty Practices and Medical Emergencies Chapter 26 Assisting with Examinations in the Basic Specialties Chapter 27 Assisting with Highly Specialized Examinations Chapter 28 Assisting with Minor Surgery Chapter 29 Assisting with Cold and Heat Therapy and Ambulation Chapter 30 Medical Emergencies and First Aid Chapter 31 Complementary and Alternative Medicine Section 4 Physician’s Office Laboratory Procedures Chapter 32 Laboratory Equipment and Safety Chapter 33 Introduction to Microbiolog y Chapter 34 Collecting, ProcessingMicrobiologyng Urine Specimens Chapter 35 Collecting, Processing, and Testing Blood Specimens Section 5 Nutrition, Pharmacology, and Diagnostic Equipment Chapter 36 Nutrition and Special Diets Chapter 37 Principles of Pharmacology Chapter 38 Drug Administration Chapter 39 Electrocardiography and Pulmonary Function Testing Chapter 40 X-Rays and Diagnostic Radiology Section 6 Externship Chapter 41 Medical Assisting Externships and Preparing to Find a Position Appendix I Medical Assistant Role Delineation Chart (AAMA) Appendix II RMA Certification Chart Appendix III NHA Certification Chart Appendix IV Prefixes and Suffixes Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix V Latin and Greek Equivalents Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix VI Abbreviations Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VII Symbols Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VIII Professional Organizations and Agencies NEW PHLEBOTOMY FOR HEALTH CARE PERSONNEL WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 2nd Edition NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! Text is now 4-color. Updated information added about waived office procedures. Added information on safety needles. The updated Student CD-ROM provides video, audio, and illustrations with interactive exercises to bring the competencies presented in the text to life. Key terms are defined and pronounced correctly. Practicing Law & Ethics, Providing Safety and Infection Control, Patient Education and Communication, and Troubleshooting Activities include critical-thinking questions. There are also drag-and-drop exercises in each chapter to reinforce the student’s knowledge of anatomy, supplies, and equipment discussed in the text. Interactive Questions provide additional review and suggest areas for improvement. The CD-ROM can be used for traditional, hybrid, and distance learning classes. CD has plenty of practice activities with various strips. Troubleshooting features identify problems which may arise for the phlebotomist and provide suggested solutions. These help promote critical thinking and prepare students for real life situations. Safety and Infection Control features provide tips and techniques to provide safe care to patients and prevent the spread of infection. Patient Education and Communication provides suggestions for communicating effectively, both orally and in writing, and provides for patient education related to Phlebotomy. Law and Ethics features provide information about HIPAA, legal responsibilities, limitations, and implications, as well as performing duties within established ethical practices. Critical Thinking and Interactive Questions provide review and suggest areas for improvement. CONTENTS Chapter I Introduction to Phlebotomy Chapter II Blood, Function, and Circulation Composition Chapter III Equipment for Specimen Collection Chapter IV Performing Venipuncture and Dermal Puncture Chapter V Specimen Handling and Processing Chapter VI Special Phlebotomy Procedures Chapter VII Risk Management Appendices Appendix A Competency Checklists Appendix B Standard Precautions Appendix C Review Body Systems Appendix D Answer Key Glossary Index By Kathryn A Booth, Total Care Programming and Antonio C Wallace, Advanced Career Training 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-330977-4 COMPLIMENTARY COPIES www.mhhe.com/healthcareskills Phlebotomy for Health Care Personnel, Second has been updated to include the CLSI standards and OSHA regulations. The text is now four-color and includes all new photographs and illustrations. It includes information about customer service and phlebotomy procedures in multiple health care environments or situations in addition to the traditional clinic setting. Emphasis is made on regulatory agencies, standards, and certification. Quality control and reporting/treatment procedures for accidental injuries are addressed in the text. Patient education and troubleshooting techniques are prominent features of the text. The instruction in the text is directly linked to the CD-ROM included in the text to reinforce skills and techniques. The can be used in the classroom as well as independent and distance learning. 207 Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia ALLIED HEALTH NEW NEW MEDICAL ASSISTING REVIEW: Passing the CMA, RMA, & CCMA Exams with Student CD, 3rd Edition ACTIVSIM: MEDICAL ASSISTING CLINICAL SIMULATOR By McGraw-Hill Education Allied Health By Jahangir Moini, Florida Metro University-Melbourne 2009 (April 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-337419-2 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-330979-8 www.activsim.com/ma www.mhhe.com/moini3 McGraw-Hill ACTIVSim: Medical Assisting Clinical Simulator is made up of two parts: six Patient Case Clinical Simulators and 15 Clinical Skills Simulators. The Patient Case Clinical Simulators introduce students to non-acute medical assisting patient case scenarios, procedure simulators and quick e-learning exercises. Six Patient Case Scenarios A large portion of core clinical competencies can be simulated on virtual patients, where the learner can interact with a patient and try out the different tasks that a medical assistant performs in physicians’ offices. The focus of McGraw-Hill ACTIVSim: Medical Assisting Clinical Simulator is on vital signs and obtaining patient data, including a chart feature, so that the learner can collect vital signs and make notes about observations that the medical assistant can brief the doctor about. ACTIVSim provides an excellent opportunity for students to practice their communication and patient interviewing skills prior to their externships and working in a doctor’s office. After each simulation, the learner receives elaborate feedback (debriefing) on their performance. The debriefing includes basic patient assessment issues and recommendations for handling patients who have a particular condition. 15 Clinical Skills Simulators A number of procedures are necessary clinical competencies that a medical assistant needs to master. Some of these are simple step-by-step procedures, while others are more complex procedures requiring different instruments and devices. ACTIVSim Clinical Skills simulators emulate these procedures. The difference between full patient simulators (case scenarios) and skills simulators is that in the latter, you focus on the procedures of the skill, e.g., how to check the blood pressure by following a step by step procedure or how to run an autoclave. The patient case simulators take you through entire patient encounters. Medical Assisting Review: Passing the CMA, RMA, and CCMA Exams, Third Edition provides example questions for students to prepare for certification exams. This reference prepares students to take the exam with easy-to-read essential material summaries that highlight key areas of the major clinical and administrative parts of a Medical Assistant’s program. Each of the chapters includes a series of 20 to 30 multiple choice quiz questions and a concise outline of key information. The CD-ROM included free in each book provides more than 1500 sample review questions as well as a PowerPoint presentation for additional student review. The review questions include rationales for answers and correlations to certification competencies. There is also a correlation to the textbook location where the information is covered. CONTENTS Patient Case Simulators Chest Pain Type 2 Diabetes Skin Condition Gynecological Patient: PAP Smear Child Patient: Diarrhea Hypertension Clinical Skills Simulators Blood Pressure Handwashing Infection Control Biohazardous Materials Measure Temperature Pulse Respiration Spirometry Electrocardiography (ECG) Capillary Puncture Venipuncture Urine Analysis Immunology Obtain Throat Culture Chemistry Sterilize/Autoclave NEW TO THIS EDITION New chapter on General Psychology Improved Student CD-ROM is easier to use. CONTENTS PART I THEORY REVIEW Section 1 General Medical Assisting Knowledge Chapter 1 The Profession of Medical Assisting Chapter 2 Medical Terminology Chapter 3 Anatomy and Physiology Chapter 4 Pathophysiology Chapter 5 Microbiology Chapter 6 General Psychology Chapter 7 Nutrition Chapter 8 Medical Law and Ethics Section 2 Administrative Medical Assisting Knowledge Chapter 9 General Office Duties Chapter 10 Communication in the Medical Office Chapter 11 Keyboarding and Computer Applications Chapter 12 Financial Management Chapter 13 Medical Insurance Chapter 14 Basic Coding Section 3 Clinical Medical Assisting Knowledge Chapter 15 Blood-Borne Pathogens and Principles of Asepsis Chapter 16 Preparing the Patient Chapter 17 Vital Signs Chapter 18 Pharmacology Chapter 19 Administration of Medication Chapter 20 Electrocardiography Chapter 21 Radiography Chapter 22 Physical Therapy Chapter 23 Medical Emergencies and First Aid Chapter 24 Laboratory Procedures PART II SELF-EVALUATION Section 1 Test for General Medical Assisting Knowledge Section 2 Test for Administrative Medical Assisting Knowledge Section 3 Test for Clinical Medical Assisting Knowledge 208 ALLIED HEALTH ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY FOR HEALTH CARE PERSONNEL WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 2nd Edition Part III SELF-EVALUATION ANWERS AND RATIONALES Section 1 General Medical Assisting Knowledge Answers and Rationales Section 2 Administrative Medical Assisting Knowledge Answers and Rationales Section 3 Clinical Medical Assisting Knowledge Answers and Rationales By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming, Patricia DeiTos, N. Virginia CC-Springfield and Thomas Edward O’Brien, Central Florida Institute 2008 (June 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-330209-6 http://www.mhhe.com/healthcareskills Electrocardiography for Health Care Personnel provides ECG skills training for health care students as well as health care personnel who are interested in mastering additional skills. The text includes the essential skills needed to perform an ECG, including anatomy of the heart, basic characteristics, equipment, appropriate intervention, and other technical applications, such as Holter monitoring and stress testing. Emphasis throughout the text is placed on troubleshooting. NEW HIPAA FOR ALLIED HEALTH CAREERS CONTENTS By Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises, Inc 2009 (February 2008) / 192 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337412-3 www.mhhe.com/NewbyHIPAA HIPAA for Allied Health Careers covers the concepts and knowledge allied health workers need to correctly handle patients’ protected health information (PHI) and to comply with all HIPAA regulations, including: • Administrative Simplification • Privacy Rule • Security Rule • Transactions and Code Sets • Compliance to Avoid Fraud and Abuse Major emphasis is placed on communication skills--written and oral—-because they underpin HIPAA compliance in most careers. Such skills include handling requests for release of information (ROI) from patients, payers, and other clinicians; effective interviewing of patients to gather information, complete authorization forms, and explain procedures; and documenting data using tools such as electronic medical records. HIPAA for Allied Health Careers provides students with the must-know information on HIPAA compliance. Titles I (COBRA) and II (HIPAA) are covered. The HIPAA privacy, security, and e-transactions are taught in depth. The concluding chapter presents the recently-published final HIPAA enforcement rule, and also provides an overview of compliance guidelines for the various allied health career settings, such as hospital-, physician practice, and billing-service based careers. Throughout the chapters, students think through case scenarios that cover the types of situations in which allied health personnel will need to make the correct choices for protecting patient privacy under HIPAA. FEATURES Chapter 1-Role of the Electrocardiographer Chapter 2-The Cardiovascular System Chapter 3-The Electrocardiograph Chapter 4-Performing a 12-Lead ECG Chapter 5-ECG Interpretation and Clinical Significance Chapter 6-Exercise Electrocardiography Chapter 7-Ambulatory Monitoring Appendix A-Competency Checklist Appendix B-Common Cardiac Medications Appendix C-Abbreviations/Symbols Glossary INTRAVENOUS THERAPY FOR HEALTH CARE PERSONNEL WITH STUDENT CD-ROM By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming 2008 (April 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-328112-4 www.mhhe.com/healthcareskills Intravenous Therapy for Health Care Personnel is a one of a kind book for entry-level health care practitioners to learn the basics of IV therapy. This eight-Chapter text/workbook covers the essential topics for IV therapy for entry-level practitioners, including coverage within the scope of practice for Medical Assistants. The book and accompanying CD is highly visual and focus on application and understanding, as well as presenting real-life situations that can occur during IV therapy and their necessary solutions. Compliance Tips CONTENTS FYI boxes Internet-based activities What Is Your Opinion? Internet Resources HIPAA Communications Chapter 1: Introduction to Intravenous Therapy Chapter 2: Safety and Infection Control Chapter 3: Intravenous Therapy Supplies and Equipment Chapter 4: Intravenous Fluids, Components, and Compatibility Chapter 5: Preparation and Patient Communication Chapter 6: Monitoring and Maintaining IV Therapy Chapter 7: Documenting and Discontinuation Chapter 8: Intravenous Therapy Calculations Appendix A: IV Solutions and Concentrations Chart Appendix B: IV Compatibility Chart Appendix C: Common IV Medications Appendix D: IV Formulas and Conversions Appendix E: Answer Key Glossary Index CONTENTS Chapter 1 The Goal of HIPAA: Administrative Simplification Chapter 2 The Privacy Rule Chapter 3 The Security Rule Chapter 4 Transactions and Code Sets Regulations Chapter 5 Compliance 209 ALLIED HEALTH ADMINISTERING MEDICATIONS 6th Edition By Donna Gauwitz 2008 (September 2007) / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-352085-8 www.mhhe.com/gauwitzadminmed Administering Medications: for Pharmacology for Health Careers is designed to teach the safe administration of medications to health care students entering medical assisting and other allied health care professions. This textbook speaks directly to students and encourages students to identify and apply the concepts learned. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Orientation to Medications Chapter 2: Principles of Drug Action Chapter 3: Measurement and Dosage Calculation Chapter 4: Administering Parenteral Medications Chapter 5: Medication Therapy Chapter 6: Vitamins, Minerals, and Herbs Chapter 7: Antibiotics and Antifungals Chapter 8: Drugs for the Eye and Ear Chapter 9: Drugs for the Skin Chapter 10: Drugs for the Cardiovascular System Chapter 11: Drugs for the Respiratory System Chapter 12: Drugs for the Gastrointestinal System Chapter 13: Drugs for the Urinary System and Fluid Balance Chapter 14: Drugs for the Reproductive System Chapter 15: Drugs for the Endocrine System Chapter 16: Drugs for the Musculoskeletal System Chapter 17: Drugs for the Nervous and Sensory System Chapter 18: Psychotropic Drugs Chapter 19: Antineoplastic Drugs Chapter 20: Drugs for the Pediatric Patient Chapter 21: Drugs for the Geriatric Patient Appendix A-Abbreviations Glossary Index of the CPT and ICD-9 manuals, their guidelines, modifiers, coding conventions and specific notations to coding descriptors. Secondly it provides many practice problems throughout the text, coding problems at the end of each chapter, and a mock examination at the end of the text. Thirdly it helps students to “think like a coder.” Learning to think through every coding problem or question in an analytical, organized, sequential approach teaches students to attack the “problem” in a consistent manner, which in turn, provides consistent accuracy in coding. FEATURES Reinforcement is used consistently throughout the textbook in the form of questions, coding problems/scenarios, examples, tables and illustrations for the student. The textbook follows all of the ICD-9, CPT, HCPCS guidelines and coding conventions that are up-to-date and applied in the textbook in a logical and sequential manner. “From the Author” provides insight as to how each chapter is relevant to students’ success in passing a national coding certification. It also explains and reviews the “set-up” of each chapter to aid students in the logical thinking process of a medical coder. “Indexing Tips” are used to provide students with the expertise of finding medical codes quickly and accurately. Indexing Tips also provide the students with the process of logical thinking that begins with taxonomy (classification) of the diagnosis or procedure. When repeated in a consistent manner, students will begin to consistently think in an organized and logical manner. “Coding Alert!” draws attention to either a principle or coding note that can be easily overlooked or might be unclear to students. Coding Alert! provides critical insight to the concept presented and aids students’ success in understanding more complex ideas. “Think Like a Coder” is the theme of this review textbook. It provides consistent reinforcements on how to think in an organized and logical manner with the review theory presented. An organized and logical thinking process is the critical tool necessary to be successful in passing a national certification as students will be consistent in the way they answer each question/problem. Full color is used to teach and reinforce visually the concept(s) presented in the review. Figures, Tables, and Examples are presented throughout the review textbook. Each is titled and presents clear identification and location. Tables and Examples assemble coding information in a logical, organized manner showing relevance to the concept. Medical Billing and Coding “Applying Coding to Theory Practice” is specifically designed to enhance the application of reviewed theory in the chapters and to reinforce “Coding Alerts!,” “Indexing Tips” and scenarios encountered by “Think Like a Coder.” “Applying Coding to Theory Practice” is a “warm-up” for the mock examination. NEW Appendix A, Answers and Rationale provides a learning tool used to reinforce greater comprehension, in-depth understanding of more complex coding situations and provide insight to students’ strengths and weaknesses of medical coding. CODING REVIEW FOR NATIONAL CERTIFICATION Passing the CPC and CCS-P Exams Appendix B presents common abbreviations used in the medical field and provides quick access for clarity of a diagnosis or procedure. Appendix C presents tables with correlations to the CPC and CCS-P examinations and their relevant chapters. By Mary A Harmon, Medtech College Additional practice tests are available on the password-protected Online Learning Center. 2010 (January 2009) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337398-0 CONTENTS “Coding Review for National Certification: Passing the CPC and CCSP Exams” is for the student who has completed a formal education in medical coding or an individual with at least three years full-time medical coding experience who is seeking certification. The goal of the textbook is three-fold. First, it guides through an overall review Preface Unit 1: Foundation for Taking the Coding Examination Chapter 1: Test Taking Skills Chapter 2: Anatomy and Physiology Review Chapter 3: Medical Terminology and Pathophysiology Review 210 ALLIED HEALTH Unit 2: Procedures Review Chapter 4: CPT Guidelines Review Chapter 5: Evaluation and Management Review Chapter 6: Anesthesia Review Chapter 7: Surgery Review Chapter 8: Radiology Review Chapter 9: Pathology and Laboratory Review Chapter 10: Medicine Section Review Chapter 11: HCPCS Level II Codes Review Unit 3: Diagnoses Review Chapter 12: ICD-9 CM Guidelines and Coding Conventions Review—Parts I and II Unit 4: Practice Coding Examination Chapter 13: Practice Examination Appendix A: Answers and Rationale Appendix B: Abbreviations Appendix C: Correlations to Certification Examinations Glossary Index NEW NEW ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY FOR ALLIED HEALTH 2nd Edition By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming and Terri Wyman, Sanford Brown Institute 2009 (February 2008) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337395-9 Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathophysiology for Allied Health, Second Edition, is an introductory book to the body systems for allied health students. It acquaints students with basic information of all the body systems. The book speaks directly to the student, with chapter introductions, case studies, and chapter summaries written to engage the student’s attention. CONTENTS CASE STUDIES FOR THE MEDICAL OFFICE Capstone Billing Simulation, 5th Edition By Susan Sanderson 2010 (January 2009) / 224 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-340200-0 http://www.mhhe.com/capstone5e This capstone simulation using Medisoft Patient Billing Software, Version 14, gives students enhanced training that fosters superior qualifications for a variety of medical office jobs. Extensive hands-on practice with realistic source documents teaches students to input information, schedule appointments, and handle billing, reports, and other essential tasks. The simulation is recommended for students who have completed the study of Medisoft Advanced Version 14 using Computers in the Medical Office or Patient Billing. Chapter 1 Organization of the Body Chapter 2 The Integumentary System Chapter 3 The Skeletal System Chapter 4 The Muscular System Chapter 5 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 6 The Respiratory System Chapter 7 The Nervous System Chapter 8 The Urinary System Chapter 9 The Reproductive Systems Chapter 10 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 11 The Digestive System Chapter 12 The Endocrine System Chapter 13 Special Senses Appendix I Medical Assistant Role Delineation Chart (AAMA) Appendix II RMA Certification Chart Appendix III NHA Certification Chart Appendix IV Prefixes and Suffixes Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix V Latin and Greek Equivalents Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix VI Abbreviations Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VII Symbols Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VIII Professional Organizations and Agencies NEW TO THIS EDITION Medisoft Advanced Student-at-home software (Optional Package Item), a full-featured software option for distance education or students who want to practice with the software at home. The only limitation is the number of patients a student can enter into the software. Otherwise, this is a full working version. The Instructor’s Manual (available on the OLC) provides all of the resources necessary to successfully use Case Studies for the Medical Office in your classroom. It includes instructions for installation and troubleshooting the software, teaching suggestions, and answers to the quizzes, daily worksheets, and jobs, including hundreds of Medisoft V14 screenshots for solutions. CONTENTS Part 1 Introduction to Polaris Medical Group Part 2 Polaris Medical Group Policy and Procedure Manual Part 3 On the Job Part 4 Source Documents Glossary Index INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 211 ALLIED HEALTH A-5: Revenue Codes: Numerical Order A-6: Revenue Codes: Alphabetic Order Appendix B: Comparing the Old and New Claim Forms B-1: A Comparison of the UB-92 and the UB-04 Abbreviations Glossary Index Appendix C: Blank UB-04 Forms NEW HOSPITAL BILLING 2nd Edition By Susan Magovern, Chestnut Hill Enterprises and Jean Jurek, Erie CC City Campus - Buffalo NEW 2009 (February 2008) / 416 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-352089-6 THE COMPLETE DIAGNOSIS CODING BOOK www.mhhe.com/MagovernHospitalBilling2 Hospital Billing, Second Edition provides current content with a practical approach. The content addresses the real world of the hospital billing department, integrating the computer skills and procedures needed for daily work. The material also addresses the types of critical thinking, analysis, and synthesis skills demanded by today’s employers. The text includes instruction that entry-level hospital billers must understand, including the following: the hospital billing flow; basic coding and payment systems; the data elements required to complete the recently mandated new UB-04 form; the way in which form-completion requirements vary depending on the type of facility; the medical insurance plan, and inpatient/outpatient status; job performance in compliance with HIPAA privacy and best practices regulations; and how computerized systems are used for form completion NEW TO THIS EDITION Covers essential background information before introducing the UB-04 form. The exercises in the text can be completed using an interactive simulated UB-04 form. Emphasizes compliance with HIPAA. Includes Internet projects. Expands coverage of hospital inpatient and outpatient coding and payment systems. CONTENTS PART 1: THE HOSPITAL BILLING ENVIRONMENT Chapter 1: Introduction to Hospital Billing Chapter 2: The Hospital Billing Process Chapter 3: Hospital Insurance Chapter 4: Medical Coding Basics Chapter 5: Payment Methods and Billing Compliance PART 2: THE UB-04 CLAIM FORM Chapter 6: Overview of the UB-04 Claim Form Chapter 7: Provider Information Chapter 8: Patient Information Chapter 9: Condition Codes Chapter 10: Occurrence Codes/Dates Chapter 11: Value Codes and Amounts Chapter 12: Revenue Codes, Descriptions, and Amounts Chapter 13: Payer, Insured, and Employer Information Chapter 14: Diagnosis and Procedure Codes Chapter 15: Physician Information, Remarks, and Code-Code Field PART 3: SIMULATION Chapter 16: The UB-04 Form Filler Chapter 17: Case Studies Appendix A: UB-04 Form Completion Tables A-1: UB-04 Form Locators A-2: Type of Bill Codes A-3: Occurrence Codes and Dates A-4: Value Codes By Shelley Safian, Herzing College 2009 (February 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337394-2 www.mhhe.com/safianDiagnosis The Complete Diagnosis Book introduces students to the coding process and uses case studies, examples, and a lighter writing style to sit side-by-side with the student and bring them through learning to code. This book speak directly to students, with respect, and helps them to overcome the intimidation of learning such an important new skill. Case studies, examples, and exercises are salted generously throughout the book to connect the reader with real life scenarios and to help them relate to the issues at hand. FEATURES Learning Outcomes Coding Tips Examples Let’s Code It! Case Scenario You Code It! Case Study Chapter Review You Code It! Practice You Code It! Simulation CONTENTS Chapter 1. Introduction to Diagnostic Coding Chapter 2. Introduction to the ICD-9-CM Book and Its Codes Chapter 3. General Guidelines and Notations Chapter 4. Coding Hypertension and Other Circulatory Conditions Chapter 5. Coding Neoplasms Chapter 6. Coding Poisonings/Adverse Reactions Chapter 7. Coding Burns Chapter 8. Coding Orthopedics Chapter 9. Coding Obstetrics and Gynecology Chapter 10. Coding Congenital and Pediatric Conditions Chapter 11. Coding Infectious Diseases Chapter 12. Coding Diabetes Mellitus Chapter 13. Coding Respiratory Conditions Chapter 14. Complete Diagnostic Coding Review Chapter 15. ICD-10-CM – An Introduction 212 ALLIED HEALTH MEDICAL BILLING & CODING DEMYSTIFIED By Marilyn Burgos, Donya Johnson and James Keogh 2007 / 239 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-147220-3 NEW A Professional Reference Title YOU CODE IT! A CASE STUDIES WORKBOOK This handy resource clearly explains the principles and practices used by medical offices, hospitals, and health facilities to encode medical services in order to receive payment from government agencies and insurance companies. By Shelley Safian, Herzing College CONTENTS 2009 (February 20080 / 528 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337402-4 http://www.mhhe.com/safianyoucodeit You Code It! A Case Studies Workbook provides extensive coding practice for students to expand their training and experience. The case studies and patient records provide exercises and sample patient records for more than 25 specialties for focused coding practice. In addition, students can use this book for preparation to sit for a national certification exam or going to a job interview. This workbook provides extensive, hands-on practice for learning to code. The cases in this book are real patient charts (redacted) from physicians’ offices and hospitals in different parts of the country. It is a student-friendly workbook presenting case studies for the practice of abstracting health care professionals’ documentation and accurately translating the facts into the best, most accurate codes. Chapter 1: Introduction to Medical Billing and Coding Chapter 2: Ethical and Legal Aspects of Medical Billing Chapter 3: Medical Terminology and Procedures Chapter 4: Medical Office Procedures Chapter 5: Introduction to Diagnostic Procedures Chapter 6: Introduction to Procedural Coding Chapter 7: Introduction to Insurance Plans Chapter 8: The Insurance Claim Cycle Chapter 9: Billing and Coding Errors--How to Avoid Them Chapter 10: Strategies for Handling Claim Disputes Chapter 11: Medical Billing Software Programs and Systems Chapter 12: Finding Employment in the Healthcare Industry Final Exam Answers to Quiz and Exam Questions Index FEATURES Realistic patient records provide ample practice for coding students to learn to review and properly code for reimbursement. CONTENTS Preface Chapter 1: How to Abstract Notes Chapter 2: Allergy and Immunology Cases and Patient Records Chapter 3: Cardiology and Cardiovascular Cases and Patient Records Chapter 4: Dentistry Cases and Patient Records Chapter 5: Dermatology and Burns Cases and Patient Records Chapter 6: Emergency Services Cases and Patient Records Chapter 7: Endocrinology Cases and Patient Records Chapter 8: Family Practice Cases and Patient Records Chapter 9: Gastroenterology Cases and Patient Records Chapter 10: Gerontology Cases and Patient Records Chapter 11: Neonatal and Pediatrics Cases and Patient Records Chapter 12: Neurology Cases and Patient Records Chapter 13: Obstetrics and Gynecology Cases and Patient Records Chapter 14: Oncology Cases and Patient Records Chapter 15: Ophthalmology Cases and Patient Records Chapter 16: Orthopedics Cases and Patient Records Chapter 17: Otolaryngology Cases and Patient Records Chapter 18: Pathology and Laboratory Cases and Patient Records Chapter 19: Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery Cases and Patient Records Chapter 20: Podiatry Cases and Patient Records Chapter 21: Psychiatric Cases and Patient Records Chapter 22: Pulmonary and Respiratory Cases and Patient Records Chapter 23: Radiology and Nuclear Medicine Cases and Patient Records Chapter 24: Urology, Nephrology, and Men’s Health Cases and Patient Records Chapter 25: Alternative Medicine: Acupuncture, Chiropractics, and Physical Therapy Cases and Patient Records 213 COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia ALLIED HEALTH FROM PATIENT TO PAYMENT Insurance Procedures for the Medical Office with Student Data CD, 5th Edition Medical Insurance By Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises, Inc 2008 (September 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-325479-1 NEW http://www.mhhe.com/fp2p5e From Patient to Payment: Insurance Procedures for the Medical Office, provides a practical, focused overview of medical insurance and billing. Each chapter is structured to give students a hands-on, practical approach to understanding and working with claims, both paper and electronic, and the medical billing process. This text is precisely tailored for a brief introduction, as the fundamental understanding of coding and claim filing principles is the goal. Incorporated are the latest HIPAA forms and regulations, medical coding, and electronic claims in a clear and focused program. It equips students with the basics of preparing correct health care claims, and provides a brief introduction to Medisoft Advanced v.11 software, which can be used to complete claims. HIPAA FOR ALLIED HEALTH CAREERS By Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises, Inc CONTENTS 2009 (February 2008) / 192 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337412-3 www.mhhe.com/NewbyHIPAA HIPAA for Allied Health Careers covers the concepts and knowledge allied health workers need to correctly handle patients’ protected health information (PHI) and to comply with all HIPAA regulations, including: • Administrative Simplification • Privacy Rule • Security Rule • Transactions and Code Sets • Compliance to Avoid Fraud and Abuse Major emphasis is placed on communication skills--written and oral—-because they underpin HIPAA compliance in most careers. Such skills include handling requests for release of information (ROI) from patients, payers, and other clinicians; effective interviewing of patients to gather information, complete authorization forms, and explain procedures; and documenting data using tools such as electronic medical records. HIPAA for Allied Health Careers provides students with the must-know information on HIPAA compliance. Titles I (COBRA) and II (HIPAA) are covered. The HIPAA privacy, security, and e-transactions are taught in depth. The concluding chapter presents the recently-published final HIPAA enforcement rule, and also provides an overview of compliance guidelines for the various allied health career settings, such as hospital-, physician practice, and billing-service based careers. Throughout the chapters, students think through case scenarios that cover the types of situations in which allied health personnel will need to make the correct choices for protecting patient privacy under HIPAA. FEATURES Compliance Tips FYI boxes Internet-based activities What Is Your Opinion? Internet Resources HIPAA Communications CONTENTS Chapter 1 The Goal of HIPAA: Administrative Simplification Chapter 2 The Privacy Rule Chapter 3 The Security Rule Chapter 4 Transactions and Code Sets Regulations Chapter 5 Compliance Chapter 1 From Patient to Payment: Becoming a Medical Specialist Chapter 2 HIPAA and the Legal Medical Record Chapter 3 Diagnostic Coding Chapter 4 Procedural Coding Chapter 5 Payment Methods: Managed Care and Indemnity Plans Chapter 6 Health Care Claim Preparation Chapter 7 Claim Transmission, RA/EOB Follow-up, and Collections Chapter 8 Blue Cross and Blue Shield Chapter 9 Medicare Chapter 10 Medicaid Chapter 11 TRICARE and CHAMPVA Chapter 12 Worker’s Compensation Chapter 13 Disability Chapter 14 Dental Insurance Chapter 15 Hospital Insurance Appendix Health Care Claim Simulations Using Medisoft Glossary Index Glossary Index MEDICAL INSURANCE CODING WORKBOOK 2007-2008 4th Edition By Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises 2008 (January 2007) / 160 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-352205-0 www.mhhe.com/careercentral The Medical Insurance Coding Workbook for Physician Practices builds coding expertise by providing thorough practice, tips, and reinforcement in code selection and linkage. This supplementary workbook offers extensive opportunities for students to practice ICD-9-CM (diagnoses) and CPT/HCPCS (procedures) coding using the standard code reference manuals. Unique coding linkage coverage reviews and practices reporting diagnosis and procedures codes correctly together for compliant coding. The exercises build from one-line diagnostic/procedural statements to case studies. The Workbook also contains three comprehensive examinations covering ICD-9-CM, CPT/HCPCS, and Code Linkage topics. The Medical Insurance Coding Workbook for Physician Practices is designed to help users master the information needed to pass the coding certification exams and become employable. The precise and tightly focused nature of the workbook helps instructors to readily gauge students’ levels of coding proficiency. 214 ALLIED HEALTH CONTENTS Part 1 ICD-9-CM Part 2 CPT and HCPCS Part 3 Coding Linkage and Compliance Appendix A ICD-9-CM Guidelines for Coding and Reporting Outpatient Services Appendix B CPT Modifiers: Description and Common use in Main Text Sections Medical Law & Ethics NEW LAW & ETHICS FOR MEDICAL CAREERS 5th Edition New and updated case studies have been added. They include additional allied health professions and other examples throughout the text. CONTENTS Part 1 The Foundations of Law and Ethics 1 Introduction to Law and Ethics 2 Working in Health Care 3 Law, the Courts, and Contracts Part 2 Legal Issues for Working Health Care Practitioners 4 Professional Liability and Medical Malpractice 5 Defenses to Liability Suits 6 Medical Records and Informed Consent 7 Privacy Law and HIPAA Part 3 Professional, Social, and Interpersonal Health Care Issues 8 Physicians’ Public Duties and Responsibilities 9 Workplace Legalities 10 The Beginning of Life and Childhood 11 Death and Dying 12 Health Care Trends and Forecasts Appendix 1 State Medical Boards Appendix 2 Health Care Professional Organizations Appendix 3 Associations for Major Diseases Glossary Court Cases Index Alphabetically By Subject Index By Karen Judson, Carlene Harrison, International College and Sharon Blesie Hicks Medical Office Procedures 2010 (January 2009) / 448 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-340206-2 http://www.mhhe.com/judson5 Law and Ethics for Medical Careers, Fifth Edition, provides an overview of the laws and ethics you should know to help you give competent, compassionate care to patients that is within acceptable legal and ethical boundaries. The text can also serve as a guide to help you resolve the many legal and ethical questions you may reasonably expect to face as a student and, later, as a health care practitioner. The text features pertinent legal cases, anecdotes, and sidebars related to health-related careers. Content has been updated and special attention has been paid to legislation affecting health care. NEW MEDICAL OFFICE HANDBOOK NEW TO THIS EDITION By Carlene Harrison, Hodges University NEW 4-color design makes the text more attractive and appealing to students. Interesting photos have been added to enhance the learning experience. Video Vignettes, located on the Online Learning Center, provide short video clips that showcase a problem or situation common to health care. After viewing the clip, students are asked to respond to multiple choice questions based on the instruction in the text. There is one vignette per chapter. New Chapter--Health Care Trends and Forecasts discusses issues that are critical to the health care environment and to health care workers, such as health care costs, access, and quality, and what lies ahead in medical technology and in health information technology. Court Cases summarize lawsuits that illustrate points made in the text. In each case, students should consider the relevance of the case to their health care specialty area and note the outcome. Determine why the court made its particular ruling. The legal citations at the end of each court case indicate where to locate the complete text of a case. “Classic” cases are those that established ongoing precedent. New for the fifth edition is a Case Index for searching by subject or case title. 2010 (January 2009) / 320 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337413-0 The Complete Medical Office Handbook provides readers with a handy resource for both the student on their externship or going to their first job, as well as the seasoned professional who has been in the medical office for years. The medical office is a busy place with many day-to-day challenges. Each chapter of the Handbook was written to provide the reader with a practical summary of the critical information they need to know. Sample forms, checklists and letters, as well as resources for more information are included. FEATURES The Handbook is organized into four sections. Section One covers a variety of communication topics. Chapter 1 is about the first impressions your practice makes when the patient first arrives. Chapter 2 covers general communication skills and Chapter 3 provides a review of basic writing principles. 215 ALLIED HEALTH Medical-Surgical Nursing Section Two provides the reader with a primer in computer applications (Chapter 4) as well as a chapter on the various ways to schedule appointments (Chapter 5). Section Three is all about the paperwork. We all know there is too much paperwork, but having a fundamental understanding of medical terminology (Chapter 6), medical records and privacy (Chapter 7), health insurance (Chapter 8), basing medical coding (Chapter 9) and the daily management of accounts (Chapter 10) is important in the day to day management of the medical practice. The last section covers safety and wellness. Safety (Chapter 11) is no longer just infection control and OSHA standards, but is also preparing for that catastrophic event—whether caused by weather or by man, all medical practices need to prepare for the unthinkable. To end the Handbook, a chapter on stress management will help you to better deal with the challenges in the busy office environment. The Complete Medical Office Handbook is designed to be a well-used reference for the medical office staff. It is also a reference tool for the allied health student first starting out in the fastest growing industry in the country. Working in the medical office provides us with great opportunities and challenges. This book will help you meet some of those challenges. This reference is a supplemental handbook for the students in medical assisting programs and perhaps a primary text in medical office administration programs offered at the vocational level. Additionally, the physician offices, group practices and clinics throughout the country may be interested in having a copy at the front desk for easy reference for those staff who have no formal training. Successful handbooks provide good examples. The Complete Medical Office Handbook provides not only the applicable rule but also an illustrative example where appropriate. This handbook is 7 ¼” X 9”, soft-cover, and spiral bound for easy use. CONTENTS Section I—Communications Chapter 1 First Impressions Chapter 2 Effective Communication Chapter 3 Writing Basics Section II—Computer Basics and Scheduling Chapter 4 Computers in the Medical Office Chapter 5 Appointment Scheduling Section III—The Paperwork Chapter 6 Medical Terminology Chapter 7 Medical Records and Privacy Chapter 8 Health Insurance Chapter 9 Essentials of Coding Chapter 10 The Daily Business in the Medical Office—Accounting and Bookkeeping Section IV—Office Safety and Wellness Chapter 11 Safety in the Medical Office Chapter 12 Managing Stress MEDICAL-SURGICAL NURSING DEMYSTIFIED By Mary Digiulio and James Keogh 2008 / 604 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-149450-2 A Professional Reference Title Medical-Surgical Nursing Demystified features a full chapter for each system--cardiovascular, respiratory, immune, hematologic, nervous, musculoskeletal, gastrointestinal, endocrine, genitourinary, and integumentary. You’ll find a description of how the system functions, signs and symptoms of diseases and conditions, diagnostic tests, and treatment options. Perioperative preparation and pain management are also covered. Filled with key terms to help you to remember important concepts, and complete with end-of-chapter NCLEX-style quizzes to test your knowledge, this book will teach you the fundamentals of medical-surgical nursing in no time at all. CONTENTS Chapter 1. Cardiovascular System Chapter 2. Respiratory System Chapter 3. Immune Systems Chapter 4. Hematologic System Chapter 5. Nervous System Chapter 6. Musculoskeletal System Chapter 7. Gastrointestinal System Chapter 8. Endocrine System Chapter 9. Genitourinary System Chapter 10. Integumentary System Chapter 11. Fluids and Electrolytes Chapter 12. Mental Health Chapter 13. Perioperative Care Chapter 14. Women’s Health Chapter 15. Pain Management Final Exam Answers to Quiz and Exam Questions Glossary Index 216 ALLIED HEALTH FLUIDS AND ELECTROLYTES DEMYSTIFIED By Joyce Y Johnson, Albany State University 2008 / 304 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-149624-7 A Professional Reference Title Written by a nursing professor, this accessible guide explains, clearly and concisely, the key elements underlying fluid, electrolyte, and acid-base balance and imbalances. You will learn about the various health conditions related to imbalances and get details on diagnostic testing, regulators, and treatment options. Useful charts and key terms throughout help you to remember important concepts. Complete with end-of-chapter quizzes to test your knowledge, this book will teach you the fundamentals of fluids and electrolytes in no time at all. 9 Promoting Responsible Decisions about Herbs, Medications, and Other Bioactive Substances 10 Protecting Health PART III: PROMOTING SPECIFIC ASPECTS OF PATIENTS’ WELLNESS 11 Gastrointestinal Wellness 12 Moving Well 13 Sensory Wellness 14 Breathing Well 15 Cardiovascular Wellness 16 Urinary Wellness 17 Sleeping Well 18 Sexual Wellness CONTENTS 1. Key elements underlying fluid, electrolytes and acid-base balance 2. General nursing assessments and diagnostic tests related to fluid, electrolyte and acid-base balance 3. Fluid Volume Imbalances 4. Sodium Imbalances 5. Potassium Imbalances 6. Calcium Imbalances 7. Magnesium Imbalances 8. Phosphorus Imbalances 9. Acid-Base Imbalances 10. General Conditions related to Fluid and Electrolyte Imbalances 11. Renal Conditions 12. Gastrointestinal Conditions 13. Heart Failure 14. Cirrhosis 15. Pancreatitis 16. Diabetic Hyperosmolar Syndrome 17. Burn Injury 18. Oncologic Conditions 19. Endocrine Conditions 20. Other conditions effecting/effected by fluid-electrolyte and acidbase imbalances: Surgery, Head Injury MCGRAW-HILL MANUAL OF LABORATORY AND DIAGNOSTIC TESTS By Denise D Wilson 2008 / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-148152-6 A Professional Reference Title McGraw-Hill’s Manual of Laboratory & Diagnostic Tests focuses specifically on what you need to know to understand the test, educate the patient, and provide safe, effective care before, during, and after the test. In addition, this easy-to-use clinical companion is the only text to actively incorporate evidence-based practice features throughout, both in test monographs and appendices-a major advantage that enhances your ability to apply the book’s content to your daily practice. CONTENTS Preface Acknowledgements Introduction Alphabetical Listing of 359 Laboratory and Diagnostic Tests Appendix A: Typical Groupings of Blood/Urine Tests Appendix B: The Endocrine System: Signals and Feedback Appendix C: Safety of the Patient Appendix D: Safety of the Health Care Provider Appendix E: Evidence-Based Practice NURSE’S TOOLBOX FOR PROMOTING WELLNESS By Carol Miller 2008 / 600 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-147761-1 A Professional Reference Title While many books have covered the theoretical aspects of wellness, only one resource gives you a real sense of what wellness looks like at the bedside: the Nurse’s Toolbook for Promoting Wellness. Compact and easy to use, this unique how-to guide is filled with wellness-oriented clinical tools and practical suggestions, from teaching nutritional wellness to promoting specific aspects of patients’ wellness such as moving and breathing well. CONTENTS PART I OVERVIEW OF WELLNESS NURSING 1 Exploring the Wellness Territory 2 Fitting Wellness into Practice 3 Fine Tuning Our Wellness Skills PART II:PROMOTING PATIENTS’ WELLNESS IN THEIR DAILY LIVES 4 Promoting Wellness-Enhancing Decisions 5 Incorporating Body-Mind-Spirit Interventions into Nursing Care 6 Teaching about Self-Wellness Actions 7 Teaching about Nutritional Wellness 8 Promoting Responsible Decisions about Complementary and Alternative Practices 217 INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia ALLIED HEALTH Medical Terminology NEW MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY Language for Health Care with Student CD-Roms and Audio CDs, 3rd Edition NEW MCGRAW-HILL LEARNSMART: MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana, Deb Nelson, Judy Ward, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana and La Tonya Young, Georgia State University By McGraw-Hill Higher Education Allied Health 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-337476-5 This online Medical Terminology training program provides a brandnew approach to facts-based curricula based on the well-known concept of flash-cards, only much better. It intelligently generates a “deck” of cards for medical terms with definitions on the reverse. Students take an online pretest to qualify medical terms they already know, think they know, or don’t know at all. This pretest provides a study schedule to allow students to learn the terms smarter and faster. Based on a new approach to learning, students are forced to think about whether or not they really know the terms which will generate stronger metacognitive skills. The aspect of luck is eliminated as students are more likely better at assessing whether they really know the information or were guessing during the pretest. FEATURES Training can be set in two different modes--competency-based or time-based. 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-730234-4 www.mhhe.com/medterm3 Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care provides the comprehensive coverage needed for a 2-term or intensive 1-term Medical Terminology course. It provides clear instruction on the basics of anatomy and physiology, using a body systems approach, and making use of extensive new line art figures and photos. The text includes both clinical and administrative office examples and cases that provide a realistic context for introducing terms and definitions. The student textbook comes with a free Student CD-ROM with interactive exercises and activities, and a two-CD audio program for building pronunciation skills. NEW TO THIS EDITION Personal learning planner, based on the pretest, provides individually tailored curricula. This individualized instruction helps students avoid unnecessary practice for terms they already know and better utilizes time for learning. An Annotated Instructor’s Edition is available as a pdf on the password-protected Instructor’s Side of the Online Learning Center. The printable file provides an smaller version of the student pages surrounded by answers to exercises, teaching suggestions, and other important information especially for the novice instructor. Pronunciation of medical terms provides correct pronunciations for students. This two-semester text provides instruction for learning medical terminology in a student-friendly format and length. Comprehensive reports provide students and instructors with detailed information about students’ progress. Quantity of exercises has been nearly doubled from quantity in second edition. The major emphasis on the new exercises is on word building and repetitive reinforcement. Web-based instruction allows students to access training from any location with computers with Internet access. This new approach to learning medical terminology offers enhanced learning and retention of key terms. This product can be integrated into any Learning Management System that is SCORM compliant. This product is book agnostic so it can easily be integrated into any medical terminology course. NEW MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY AUDIO CD-ROM 3rd Edition By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana, Deb Nelson, Judy Ward, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana and La Tonya Young, Georgia State University 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-733067-5 (Details unavailable at press time) CONTENTS How to Use This Program 1 Learning Terminology 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms 3 Body Structure 4 The Integumentary System 5 The Musculoskeletal System 6 The Cardiovascular system 7 The Respiratory System 8 The Nervous System 9 The Urinary System 10 The Female Reproductive System 11 The Male Reproductive System 12 The Blood System 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems 14 The Digestive System 15 The Endocrine System 16 The Sensory System 17 Human Development 18 Terms in Oncology—Cancer and Its Causes 19 Diagnostic Imaging, Radiation Oncology, and Surgery 20 Terms in Psychiatry 21 Terms in Dental Practice 22 Terms in Pharmacology 23 Terms in Complementary and Alternative Medicine Appendix A—Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B—Abbreviations—Ones to Use and Ones to Avoid Appendix C—English Glossary 218 ALLIED HEALTH MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH WITH STUDENT CD-ROM Appendix D—Spanish Glossary Appendix E—Normal Laboratory Values Appendix F-Medical Terminology Style Index By David Allan, Michelle Buchman, Everest College and Karen Lockyer 2008 (May 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-327294-8 http://www.mhhe.com/allanmedlanguage NEW ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY FOR ALLIED HEALTH 2nd Edition By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming and Terri Wyman, Sanford Brown Institute 2009 (February 2008) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337395-9 Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathophysiology for Allied Health, Second Edition, is an introductory book to the body systems for allied health students. It acquaints students with basic information of all the body systems. The book speaks directly to the student, with chapter introductions, case studies, and chapter summaries written to engage the student’s attention. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Organization of the Body Chapter 2 The Integumentary System Chapter 3 The Skeletal System Chapter 4 The Muscular System Chapter 5 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 6 The Respiratory System Chapter 7 The Nervous System Chapter 8 The Urinary System Chapter 9 The Reproductive Systems Chapter 10 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 11 The Digestive System Chapter 12 The Endocrine System Chapter 13 Special Senses Appendix I Medical Assistant Role Delineation Chart (AAMA) Appendix II RMA Certification Chart Appendix III NHA Certification Chart Appendix IV Prefixes and Suffixes Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix V Latin and Greek Equivalents Commonly Used in Medical Terms Appendix VI Abbreviations Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VII Symbols Commonly Used in Medical Notations Appendix VIII Professional Organizations and Agencies MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH CARE Combining the Time-Tested A & P Approach with a New Contextual Approach Promotes Active Learning Chapters in the textbook are organized by body system in accordance with an overall anatomy and physiology (A & P) approach. Lessons introduce and define terminology through the context of A & P, pathology, and clinical and diagnostic procedures/ tests. The organization of the body systems into Chapters is based on an “outside to inside” sequence that reflects a physician’s differential diagnosis method used during an examination. To provide students with an authentic context, the medical specialty associated with each body area or system is introduced along with the anatomy and physiology. Students actually step into the role of an allied health professional associated with each specialty. Patient cases and documentation are used to illustrate the real-life application of medical terminology in modern health care: to care for and communicating with patients, and to interact with other members of the health care team. The A & P organizational approach, used in conjunction an authentic medical setting and patient cases, encourages student motivation and facilitates active, engaged learning. Each Chapter is structured around a consistent and unique framework of pedagogic devices. No matter what the subject matter of a Chapter, the structure enables students to develop a consistent learning strategy, making Medical Language for Modern Health Care a superior learning tool. CONTENTS Chapter 1: welcome Chapter 2: anatomy of word building Chapter 3: the body as a whole:the language of primary care Chapter 4: integumentary system:the language of dermatology Chapter 5: special senses: seeing and hearing-the language of opthalmology an otology Chapter 6: musculoskeletal system: the language of orthopedics Chapter 7: digestive system: the language of gastroenterology Chapter 8: cardiovascular system: the language of cardiology and hematology Chapter 9: respiratory system: the language of pulmonology Chapter 10: nervous system: the language of neurology Chapter 11: urinary system: the language of urology Chapter 12: male reproductive system: more language of urology Chapter 13: female reproductive system and breast: the language of gynecology and obstetrics Chapter 14: endocrine system: the language of endocrinology Chapter 15: lymphatic and immune systems: the language of immunology Chapter 16: growth and development: the language of pediatrics Chapter 17: aging: the language of gerontology Chapter 18: rehabilitation medicine: the language of rehabilitation Chapter 19: mental health: the language of psychology and psychiatry Chapter 20: infection: the language of infectious diseases Chapter 21: genetics: the language of dna Chapter 22: nutrition: the language of nutrition Chapter 23: complementary and alternative medicine: the language of cam 219 ALLIED HEALTH MCGRAW-HILL MEDICAL DICTIONARY FOR ALLIED HEALTH By Myrna Breskin, Chestnut Hill Enterprises, Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute, Enid Pearsons and Robert Seeman 2008 (May 2007) / 656 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351096-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-334727-1 (with Student CD) Kevin Dumith has teamed up with Myrna Breskin to compile the McGraw Hill Allied Health Dictionary. With Kevin’s long experience working as a medical terminology instructor in a career college and with Myrna’s background as a lexicographer, the dictionary has the combined experience of these two people directing a staff that has written a truly useful reference book. This dictionary will be the only one on the market specifically aimed at the allied health level. This important distinction makes it a very salable product for a student population that has traditionally found the learning of medical terminology one of the most challenging in the allied health curriculum. It is written for the student who finds the higher level dictionaries written for the health care practitioner too difficult to understand and to navigate. the definitions are clear and concise. The only etymologies given are useful word-building breakdowns that reinforce this skill necessary to understanding medical terms. The appendices make this reference a tool that will follow the allied health student into the workplace as a “keeper” for a long time to come. There is a 32-page insert of anatomy plates that cover the body systems with beautiful illustrations as well as instructive and helpful text. CONTENTS Introduction How to use this dictionary Letters a-z Anatomical plates 1-32 Appendices Combining forms, prefixes, and suffixes Abbreviations and medical errors Normal laboratory values Spanish terms Weights and measures Dietary guidelines term to definition matching, audio feedback, and “That’s Epidemic”, an activity focusing on pathology terms. Exercises are gradable online, or can be used for self-paced review. The Online Learning Center website (“OLC”) will provide a set of additional self-test questions; Chapter study outlines; web links of interest; and additional wordbuilding activities. An optional Spanish/English audio CD ROM is available, which includes pronunciations of key medical terms in both languages. English-language audio CD ROMs (2) are also available as an optional package item; these include pronunciation of all terms included in the text. Instructors will also finds a wealth of teaching & learning resources for their classes: The Instructor’s Manual (“IM”) will contain answers to all exercises, teaching strategy suggestions, and discussion of word-building techniques. The Instructor Productivity Center CD ROM (“IPC”) will contain the IM in electronic form; PowerPoint presentations for each Chapter; and electronic test generator and test banks (with 300 questions). CONTENTS Chapter 1 Learning Terminology Chapter 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms Chapter 3 Body Structure Chapter 4 The Integumentary System Chapter 5 The Musculoskeletal System Chapter 6 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 7 The Respiratory System Chapter 8 The Nervous System Chapter 9 The Urinary System Chapter 10 The Female Reproductive System Chapter 11 The Male Reproductive System Chapter 12 The Blood System Chapter 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 14 The Digestive System Chapter 15 The Endocrine System Chapter 16 The Sensory System MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY WORD BUILDER AND COMMUNICATIONS WORKBOOK WITH FLASHCARDS By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne and Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331544-7 MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY A Programmed Approach with Student CD/ Flashcards/Online Learning Center By Paula Bostwick 2008 (March 2007) / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-333505-6 http://www.mhhe.com/medtermprogrammed Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach is the ideal resource for instructors and students wanting a concise and systematic approach to learning the language of health care. Recognizing that students learn medical terminology by constructing and deconstructing words into their parts, the authors have built this process into the text and the numerous exercises. The approach builds and constantly reinforces skills needed to deal with increasingly complicated terms. A body systems organization is used, providing a clear content framework for the text. Each body system Chapter separates words into easily learnable groups: major parts of each system; word parts related to each system; and diagnostic, pathological, surgical and pharmacological terms. Carefully chosen Chapter features help bring the subject to life, and add an on-the-job perspective. Case-study information is built into examples, and real medical documents are used whenever appropriate. Internet references are included throughout, to emphasize the importance of online resources and tools. While most activities are straight-forward practice exercises, word-building and critical thinking skills are also built in. Wherever possible, material on Complementary and Alternative Medicine (“CAM”) is included to highlight this growing area of medicine. In addition to the text, students will be able to access a wealth of electronic resources to aid their studies: The Student CD-ROM will include a suite of activity-based learning tools: crossword puzzles, “Hangman” game, “Concentration”, Nina Thierer has teamed with Kevin Dumith to bring to market a workbook that will complement a number of allied health products, especially the Allied Health Dictionary and the medical terminology textbooks published by McGraw-Hill. The Medical Terminology WordBuilder and Communications Workbook emphasizes the dual tasks of word building and communication--the prime learning difficulties for most students in medical terminology and related courses. Particularly in the private career colleges, these two areas are where schools are putting the bulk of their emphasis in an attempt to make their students valuable employees in their allied health careers. The workbook is chock-full of exercises, case studies, and verbal and written communication work that will guide the student through realistic simulations of job activities and job search tasks. CONTENTS Unit 1 Communication Using Medical Terms, How Medical Terms Are Formed, Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication in Healthcare Unit 2 Prefixes Unit 3 Suffixes Unit 4 Terms in the Integumentary System Unit 5 Terms in the Musculoskeletal System Unit 6 Terms in the Cardiovascular System Unit 7 Terms in the Respiratory System Unit 8 Terms in the Nervous System Unit 9 Terms in the Urinary System Unit 10 Terms in the Female Reproductive System Unit 11 Terms in the Male Reproductive System Unit 12 Terms in the Blood System 220 ALLIED HEALTH MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH WITH STUDENT CD-ROM Unit 13 Terms in the Lymphatic and Immune Systems Unit 14 Terms in the Digestive System Unit 15 Terms in the Endocrine System Unit 16 Terms in the Sensory System Appendix A Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B Normal Laboratory Values Appendix C Sample Medical Documents By David Allan, Michelle Buchman, Everest College and Karen Lockyer 2008 (May 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-327294-8 http://www.mhhe.com/allanmedlanguage MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH CARE Combining the Time-Tested A & P Approach with a New Contextual Approach Promotes Active Learning Chapters in the textbook are organized by body system in accordance with an overall anatomy and physiology (A & P) approach. Lessons introduce and define terminology through the context of A & P, pathology, and clinical and diagnostic procedures/ tests. The organization of the body systems into Chapters is based on an “outside to inside” sequence that reflects a physician’s differential diagnosis method used during an examination. To provide students with an authentic context, the medical specialty associated with each body area or system is introduced along with the anatomy and physiology. Students actually step into the role of an allied health professional associated with each specialty. Patient cases and documentation are used to illustrate the real-life application of medical terminology in modern health care: to care for and communicating with patients, and to interact with other members of the health care team. The A & P organizational approach, used in conjunction an authentic medical setting and patient cases, encourages student motivation and facilitates active, engaged learning. Each Chapter is structured around a consistent and unique framework of pedagogic devices. No matter what the subject matter of a Chapter, the structure enables students to develop a consistent learning strategy, making Medical Language for Modern Health Care a superior learning tool. Medical Terminology 1-Term NEW MCGRAW-HILL LEARNSMART: MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY By McGraw-Hill Higher Education Allied Health 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-337476-5 This online Medical Terminology training program provides a brandnew approach to facts-based curricula based on the well-known concept of flash-cards, only much better. It intelligently generates a “deck” of cards for medical terms with definitions on the reverse. Students take an online pretest to qualify medical terms they already know, think they know, or don’t know at all. This pretest provides a study schedule to allow students to learn the terms smarter and faster. Based on a new approach to learning, students are forced to think about whether or not they really know the terms which will generate stronger metacognitive skills. The aspect of luck is eliminated as students are more likely better at assessing whether they really know the information or were guessing during the pretest. FEATURES Training can be set in two different modes--competency-based or time-based. Personal learning planner, based on the pretest, provides individually tailored curricula. This individualized instruction helps students avoid unnecessary practice for terms they already know and better utilizes time for learning. Pronunciation of medical terms provides correct pronunciations for students. Comprehensive reports provide students and instructors with detailed information about students’ progress. Web-based instruction allows students to access training from any location with computers with Internet access. This new approach to learning medical terminology offers enhanced learning and retention of key terms. This product can be integrated into any Learning Management System that is SCORM compliant. CONTENTS Chapter 1: welcome Chapter 2: anatomy of word building Chapter 3: the body as a whole:the language of primary care Chapter 4: integumentary system:the language of dermatology Chapter 5: special senses: seeing and hearing-the language of opthalmology an otology Chapter 6: musculoskeletal system: the language of orthopedics Chapter 7: digestive system: the language of gastroenterology Chapter 8: cardiovascular system: the language of cardiology and hematology Chapter 9: respiratory system: the language of pulmonology Chapter 10: nervous system: the language of neurology Chapter 11: urinary system: the language of urology Chapter 12: male reproductive system: more language of urology Chapter 13: female reproductive system and breast: the language of gynecology and obstetrics Chapter 14: endocrine system: the language of endocrinology Chapter 15: lymphatic and immune systems: the language of immunology Chapter 16: growth and development: the language of pediatrics Chapter 17: aging: the language of gerontology Chapter 18: rehabilitation medicine: the language of rehabilitation Chapter 19: mental health: the language of psychology and psychiatry Chapter 20: infection: the language of infectious diseases Chapter 21: genetics: the language of dna Chapter 22: nutrition: the language of nutrition Chapter 23: complementary and alternative medicine: the language of cam This product is book agnostic so it can easily be integrated into any medical terminology course. 221 ALLIED HEALTH MCGRAW-HILL MEDICAL DICTIONARY FOR ALLIED HEALTH By Myrna Breskin, Chestnut Hill Enterprises, Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute, Enid Pearsons and Robert Seeman 2008 (May 2007) / 656 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351096-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-334727-1 (with Student CD) Kevin Dumith has teamed up with Myrna Breskin to compile the McGraw Hill Allied Health Dictionary. With Kevin’s long experience working as a medical terminology instructor in a career college and with Myrna’s background as a lexicographer, the dictionary has the combined experience of these two people directing a staff that has written a truly useful reference book. This dictionary will be the only one on the market specifically aimed at the allied health level. This important distinction makes it a very salable product for a student population that has traditionally found the learning of medical terminology one of the most challenging in the allied health curriculum. It is written for the student who finds the higher level dictionaries written for the health care practitioner too difficult to understand and to navigate. the definitions are clear and concise. The only etymologies given are useful word-building breakdowns that reinforce this skill necessary to understanding medical terms. The appendices make this reference a tool that will follow the allied health student into the workplace as a “keeper” for a long time to come. There is a 32-page insert of anatomy plates that cover the body systems with beautiful illustrations as well as instructive and helpful text. CONTENTS Introduction How to use this dictionary Letters a-z Anatomical plates 1-32 Appendices Combining forms, prefixes, and suffixes Abbreviations and medical errors Normal laboratory values Spanish terms Weights and measures Dietary guidelines term to definition matching, audio feedback, and “That’s Epidemic”, an activity focusing on pathology terms. Exercises are gradable online, or can be used for self-paced review. The Online Learning Center website (“OLC”) will provide a set of additional self-test questions; Chapter study outlines; web links of interest; and additional wordbuilding activities. An optional Spanish/English audio CD ROM is available, which includes pronunciations of key medical terms in both languages. English-language audio CD ROMs (2) are also available as an optional package item; these include pronunciation of all terms included in the text. Instructors will also finds a wealth of teaching & learning resources for their classes: The Instructor’s Manual (“IM”) will contain answers to all exercises, teaching strategy suggestions, and discussion of word-building techniques. The Instructor Productivity Center CD ROM (“IPC”) will contain the IM in electronic form; PowerPoint presentations for each Chapter; and electronic test generator and test banks (with 300 questions). CONTENTS Chapter 1 Learning Terminology Chapter 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms Chapter 3 Body Structure Chapter 4 The Integumentary System Chapter 5 The Musculoskeletal System Chapter 6 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 7 The Respiratory System Chapter 8 The Nervous System Chapter 9 The Urinary System Chapter 10 The Female Reproductive System Chapter 11 The Male Reproductive System Chapter 12 The Blood System Chapter 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 14 The Digestive System Chapter 15 The Endocrine System Chapter 16 The Sensory System MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY WORD BUILDER AND COMMUNICATIONS WORKBOOK WITH FLASHCARDS By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne and Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331544-7 MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY A Programmed Approach with Student CD/ Flashcards/Online Learning Center By Paula Bostwick 2008 (March 2007) / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-333505-6 http://www.mhhe.com/medtermprogrammed Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach is the ideal resource for instructors and students wanting a concise and systematic approach to learning the language of health care. Recognizing that students learn medical terminology by constructing and deconstructing words into their parts, the authors have built this process into the text and the numerous exercises. The approach builds and constantly reinforces skills needed to deal with increasingly complicated terms. A body systems organization is used, providing a clear content framework for the text. Each body system Chapter separates words into easily learnable groups: major parts of each system; word parts related to each system; and diagnostic, pathological, surgical and pharmacological terms. Carefully chosen Chapter features help bring the subject to life, and add an on-the-job perspective. Case-study information is built into examples, and real medical documents are used whenever appropriate. Internet references are included throughout, to emphasize the importance of online resources and tools. While most activities are straight-forward practice exercises, word-building and critical thinking skills are also built in. Wherever possible, material on Complementary and Alternative Medicine (“CAM”) is included to highlight this growing area of medicine. In addition to the text, students will be able to access a wealth of electronic resources to aid their studies: The Student CD-ROM will include a suite of activity-based learning tools: crossword puzzles, “Hangman” game, “Concentration”, Nina Thierer has teamed with Kevin Dumith to bring to market a workbook that will complement a number of allied health products, especially the Allied Health Dictionary and the medical terminology textbooks published by McGraw-Hill. The Medical Terminology WordBuilder and Communications Workbook emphasizes the dual tasks of word building and communication--the prime learning difficulties for most students in medical terminology and related courses. Particularly in the private career colleges, these two areas are where schools are putting the bulk of their emphasis in an attempt to make their students valuable employees in their allied health careers. The workbook is chock-full of exercises, case studies, and verbal and written communication work that will guide the student through realistic simulations of job activities and job search tasks. CONTENTS Unit 1 Communication Using Medical Terms, How Medical Terms Are Formed, Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication in Healthcare Unit 2 Prefixes Unit 3 Suffixes Unit 4 Terms in the Integumentary System Unit 5 Terms in the Musculoskeletal System Unit 6 Terms in the Cardiovascular System Unit 7 Terms in the Respiratory System Unit 8 Terms in the Nervous System Unit 9 Terms in the Urinary System Unit 10 Terms in the Female Reproductive System Unit 11 Terms in the Male Reproductive System Unit 12 Terms in the Blood System 222 ALLIED HEALTH Unit 13 Terms in the Lymphatic and Immune Systems Unit 14 Terms in the Digestive System Unit 15 Terms in the Endocrine System Unit 16 Terms in the Sensory System Appendix A Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B Normal Laboratory Values Appendix C Sample Medical Documents NEW MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY Language for Health Care with Student CD-Roms and Audio CDs, 3rd Edition Medical Terminology 2-Term By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana, Deb Nelson, Judy Ward, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana and La Tonya Young, Georgia State University 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-730234-4 www.mhhe.com/medterm3 NEW MCGRAW-HILL LEARNSMART: MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY By McGraw-Hill Higher Education Allied Health 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-337476-5 This online Medical Terminology training program provides a brandnew approach to facts-based curricula based on the well-known concept of flash-cards, only much better. It intelligently generates a “deck” of cards for medical terms with definitions on the reverse. Students take an online pretest to qualify medical terms they already know, think they know, or don’t know at all. This pretest provides a study schedule to allow students to learn the terms smarter and faster. Based on a new approach to learning, students are forced to think about whether or not they really know the terms which will generate stronger metacognitive skills. The aspect of luck is eliminated as students are more likely better at assessing whether they really know the information or were guessing during the pretest. FEATURES Training can be set in two different modes--competency-based or time-based. Personal learning planner, based on the pretest, provides individually tailored curricula. This individualized instruction helps students avoid unnecessary practice for terms they already know and better utilizes time for learning. Pronunciation of medical terms provides correct pronunciations for students. Comprehensive reports provide students and instructors with detailed information about students’ progress. Web-based instruction allows students to access training from any location with computers with Internet access. This new approach to learning medical terminology offers enhanced learning and retention of key terms. This product can be integrated into any Learning Management System that is SCORM compliant. This product is book agnostic so it can easily be integrated into any medical terminology course. Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care provides the comprehensive coverage needed for a 2-term or intensive 1-term Medical Terminology course. It provides clear instruction on the basics of anatomy and physiology, using a body systems approach, and making use of extensive new line art figures and photos. The text includes both clinical and administrative office examples and cases that provide a realistic context for introducing terms and definitions. The student textbook comes with a free Student CD-ROM with interactive exercises and activities, and a two-CD audio program for building pronunciation skills. NEW TO THIS EDITION An Annotated Instructor’s Edition is available as a pdf on the password-protected Instructor’s Side of the Online Learning Center. The printable file provides an smaller version of the student pages surrounded by answers to exercises, teaching suggestions, and other important information especially for the novice instructor. This two-semester text provides instruction for learning medical terminology in a student-friendly format and length. Quantity of exercises has been nearly doubled from quantity in second edition. The major emphasis on the new exercises is on word building and repetitive reinforcement. CONTENTS How to Use This Program 1 Learning Terminology 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms 3 Body Structure 4 The Integumentary System 5 The Musculoskeletal System 6 The Cardiovascular system 7 The Respiratory System 8 The Nervous System 9 The Urinary System 10 The Female Reproductive System 11 The Male Reproductive System 12 The Blood System 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems 14 The Digestive System 15 The Endocrine System 16 The Sensory System 17 Human Development 18 Terms in Oncology—Cancer and Its Causes 19 Diagnostic Imaging, Radiation Oncology, and Surgery 20 Terms in Psychiatry 21 Terms in Dental Practice 22 Terms in Pharmacology 23 Terms in Complementary and Alternative Medicine Appendix A—Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B—Abbreviations—Ones to Use and Ones to Avoid 223 ALLIED HEALTH MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY A Programmed Approach with Student CD/ Flashcards/Online Learning Center Appendix C—English Glossary Appendix D—Spanish Glossary Appendix E—Normal Laboratory Values Appendix F-Medical Terminology Style Index By Paula Bostwick 2008 (March 2007) / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-333505-6 http://www.mhhe.com/medtermprogrammed MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH WITH STUDENT CD-ROM By David Allan, Michelle Buchman, Everest College and Karen Lockyer 2008 (May 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-327294-8 http://www.mhhe.com/allanmedlanguage MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH CARE Combining the Time-Tested A & P Approach with a New Contextual Approach Promotes Active Learning Chapters in the textbook are organized by body system in accordance with an overall anatomy and physiology (A & P) approach. Lessons introduce and define terminology through the context of A & P, pathology, and clinical and diagnostic procedures/tests. The organization of the body systems into Chapters is based on an “outside to inside” sequence that reflects a physician’s differential diagnosis method used during an examination. To provide students with an authentic context, the medical specialty associated with each body area or system is introduced along with the anatomy and physiology. Students actually step into the role of an allied health professional associated with each specialty. Patient cases and documentation are used to illustrate the real-life application of medical terminology in modern health care: to care for and communicating with patients, and to interact with other members of the health care team. The A & P organizational approach, used in conjunction an authentic medical setting and patient cases, encourages student motivation and facilitates active, engaged learning. Each Chapter is structured around a consistent and unique framework of pedagogic devices. No matter what the subject matter of a Chapter, the structure enables students to develop a consistent learning strategy, making Medical Language for Modern Health Care a superior learning tool. CONTENTS Chapter 1: welcome Chapter 2: anatomy of word building Chapter 3: the body as a whole:the language of primary care Chapter 4: integumentary system:the language of dermatology Chapter 5: special senses: seeing and hearing-the language of opthalmology an otology Chapter 6: musculoskeletal system: the language of orthopedics Chapter 7: digestive system: the language of gastroenterology Chapter 8: cardiovascular system: the language of cardiology and hematology Chapter 9: respiratory system: the language of pulmonology Chapter 10: nervous system: the language of neurology Chapter 11: urinary system: the language of urology Chapter 12: male reproductive system: more language of urology Chapter 13: female reproductive system and breast: the language of gynecology and obstetrics Chapter 14: endocrine system: the language of endocrinology Chapter 15: lymphatic and immune systems: the language of immunology Chapter 16: growth and development: the language of pediatrics Chapter 17: aging: the language of gerontology Chapter 18: rehabilitation medicine: the language of rehabilitation Chapter 19: mental health: the language of psychology and psychiatry Chapter 20: infection: the language of infectious diseases Chapter 21: genetics: the language of dna Chapter 22: nutrition: the language of nutrition Chapter 23: complementary and alternative medicine: the language of cam Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach is the ideal resource for instructors and students wanting a concise and systematic approach to learning the language of health care. Recognizing that students learn medical terminology by constructing and deconstructing words into their parts, the authors have built this process into the text and the numerous exercises. The approach builds and constantly reinforces skills needed to deal with increasingly complicated terms. A body systems organization is used, providing a clear content framework for the text. Each body system Chapter separates words into easily learnable groups: major parts of each system; word parts related to each system; and diagnostic, pathological, surgical and pharmacological terms. Carefully chosen Chapter features help bring the subject to life, and add an on-the-job perspective. Case-study information is built into examples, and real medical documents are used whenever appropriate. Internet references are included throughout, to emphasize the importance of online resources and tools. While most activities are straight-forward practice exercises, word-building and critical thinking skills are also built in. Wherever possible, material on Complementary and Alternative Medicine (“CAM”) is included to highlight this growing area of medicine. In addition to the text, students will be able to access a wealth of electronic resources to aid their studies: The Student CD-ROM will include a suite of activity-based learning tools: crossword puzzles, “Hangman” game, “Concentration”, term to definition matching, audio feedback, and “That’s Epidemic”, an activity focusing on pathology terms. Exercises are gradable online, or can be used for self-paced review. The Online Learning Center website (“OLC”) will provide a set of additional self-test questions; Chapter study outlines; web links of interest; and additional wordbuilding activities. An optional Spanish/English audio CD ROM is available, which includes pronunciations of key medical terms in both languages. English-language audio CD ROMs (2) are also available as an optional package item; these include pronunciation of all terms included in the text. Instructors will also finds a wealth of teaching & learning resources for their classes: The Instructor’s Manual (“IM”) will contain answers to all exercises, teaching strategy suggestions, and discussion of word-building techniques. The Instructor Productivity Center CD ROM (“IPC”) will contain the IM in electronic form; PowerPoint presentations for each Chapter; and electronic test generator and test banks (with 300 questions). CONTENTS Chapter 1 Learning Terminology Chapter 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms Chapter 3 Body Structure Chapter 4 The Integumentary System Chapter 5 The Musculoskeletal System Chapter 6 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 7 The Respiratory System Chapter 8 The Nervous System Chapter 9 The Urinary System Chapter 10 The Female Reproductive System Chapter 11 The Male Reproductive System Chapter 12 The Blood System Chapter 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 14 The Digestive System Chapter 15 The Endocrine System Chapter 16 The Sensory System 224 ALLIED HEALTH MCGRAW-HILL MEDICAL DICTIONARY FOR ALLIED HEALTH By Myrna Breskin, Chestnut Hill Enterprises, Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute, Enid Pearsons and Robert Seeman 2008 (May 2007) / 656 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351096-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-334727-1 (with Student CD) Kevin Dumith has teamed up with Myrna Breskin to compile the McGraw Hill Allied Health Dictionary. With Kevin’s long experience working as a medical terminology instructor in a career college and with Myrna’s background as a lexicographer, the dictionary has the combined experience of these two people directing a staff that has written a truly useful reference book. This dictionary will be the only one on the market specifically aimed at the allied health level. This important distinction makes it a very salable product for a student population that has traditionally found the learning of medical terminology one of the most challenging in the allied health curriculum. It is written for the student who finds the higher level dictionaries written for the health care practitioner too difficult to understand and to navigate. the definitions are clear and concise. The only etymologies given are useful word-building breakdowns that reinforce this skill necessary to understanding medical terms. The appendices make this reference a tool that will follow the allied health student into the workplace as a “keeper” for a long time to come. There is a 32-page insert of anatomy plates that cover the body systems with beautiful illustrations as well as instructive and helpful text. Unit 7 Terms in the Respiratory System Unit 8 Terms in the Nervous System Unit 9 Terms in the Urinary System Unit 10 Terms in the Female Reproductive System Unit 11 Terms in the Male Reproductive System Unit 12 Terms in the Blood System Unit 13 Terms in the Lymphatic and Immune Systems Unit 14 Terms in the Digestive System Unit 15 Terms in the Endocrine System Unit 16 Terms in the Sensory System Appendix A Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B Normal Laboratory Values Appendix C Sample Medical Documents Medical Terminology - Programmed Approach CONTENTS NEW Introduction How to use this dictionary Letters a-z Anatomical plates 1-32 Appendices Combining forms, prefixes, and suffixes Abbreviations and medical errors Normal laboratory values Spanish terms Weights and measures Dietary guidelines MCGRAW-HILL LEARNSMART: MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY By McGraw-Hill Higher Education Allied Health 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-337476-5 This online Medical Terminology training program provides a brandnew approach to facts-based curricula based on the well-known concept of flash-cards, only much better. It intelligently generates a “deck” of cards for medical terms with definitions on the reverse. Students take an online pretest to qualify medical terms they already know, think they know, or don’t know at all. This pretest provides a study schedule to allow students to learn the terms smarter and faster. Based on a new approach to learning, students are forced to think about whether or not they really know the terms which will generate stronger metacognitive skills. The aspect of luck is eliminated as students are more likely better at assessing whether they really know the information or were guessing during the pretest. MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY WORD BUILDER AND COMMUNICATIONS WORKBOOK WITH FLASHCARDS By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne and Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331544-7 FEATURES Nina Thierer has teamed with Kevin Dumith to bring to market a workbook that will complement a number of allied health products, especially the Allied Health Dictionary and the medical terminology textbooks published by McGraw-Hill. The Medical Terminology WordBuilder and Communications Workbook emphasizes the dual tasks of word building and communication--the prime learning difficulties for most students in medical terminology and related courses. Particularly in the private career colleges, these two areas are where schools are putting the bulk of their emphasis in an attempt to make their students valuable employees in their allied health careers. The workbook is chock-full of exercises, case studies, and verbal and written communication work that will guide the student through realistic simulations of job activities and job search tasks. CONTENTS Unit 1 Communication Using Medical Terms, How Medical Terms Are Formed, Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication in Healthcare Unit 2 Prefixes Unit 3 Suffixes Unit 4 Terms in the Integumentary System Unit 5 Terms in the Musculoskeletal System Unit 6 Terms in the Cardiovascular System Training can be set in two different modes--competency-based or time-based. Personal learning planner, based on the pretest, provides individually tailored curricula. This individualized instruction helps students avoid unnecessary practice for terms they already know and better utilizes time for learning. Pronunciation of medical terms provides correct pronunciations for students. Comprehensive reports provide students and instructors with detailed information about students’ progress. Web-based instruction allows students to access training from any location with computers with Internet access. This new approach to learning medical terminology offers enhanced learning and retention of key terms. This product can be integrated into any Learning Management System that is SCORM compliant. This product is book agnostic so it can easily be integrated into any medical terminology course. 225 ALLIED HEALTH MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY A Programmed Approach with Student CD/ Flashcards/Online Learning Center MCGRAW-HILL MEDICAL DICTIONARY FOR ALLIED HEALTH By Myrna Breskin, Chestnut Hill Enterprises, Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute, Enid Pearsons and Robert Seeman 2008 (May 2007) / 656 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351096-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-334727-1 (with Student CD) By Paula Bostwick 2008 (March 2007) / 608 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-333505-6 http://www.mhhe.com/medtermprogrammed Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach is the ideal resource for instructors and students wanting a concise and systematic approach to learning the language of health care. Recognizing that students learn medical terminology by constructing and deconstructing words into their parts, the authors have built this process into the text and the numerous exercises. The approach builds and constantly reinforces skills needed to deal with increasingly complicated terms. A body systems organization is used, providing a clear content framework for the text. Each body system Chapter separates words into easily learnable groups: major parts of each system; word parts related to each system; and diagnostic, pathological, surgical and pharmacological terms. Carefully chosen Chapter features help bring the subject to life, and add an on-the-job perspective. Case-study information is built into examples, and real medical documents are used whenever appropriate. Internet references are included throughout, to emphasize the importance of online resources and tools. While most activities are straight-forward practice exercises, word-building and critical thinking skills are also built in. Wherever possible, material on Complementary and Alternative Medicine (“CAM”) is included to highlight this growing area of medicine. In addition to the text, students will be able to access a wealth of electronic resources to aid their studies: The Student CD-ROM will include a suite of activity-based learning tools: crossword puzzles, “Hangman” game, “Concentration”, term to definition matching, audio feedback, and “That’s Epidemic”, an activity focusing on pathology terms. Exercises are gradable online, or can be used for self-paced review. The Online Learning Center website (“OLC”) will provide a set of additional self-test questions; Chapter study outlines; web links of interest; and additional wordbuilding activities. An optional Spanish/English audio CD ROM is available, which includes pronunciations of key medical terms in both languages. English-language audio CD ROMs (2) are also available as an optional package item; these include pronunciation of all terms included in the text. Instructors will also finds a wealth of teaching & learning resources for their classes: The Instructor’s Manual (“IM”) will contain answers to all exercises, teaching strategy suggestions, and discussion of word-building techniques. The Instructor Productivity Center CD ROM (“IPC”) will contain the IM in electronic form; PowerPoint presentations for each Chapter; and electronic test generator and test banks (with 300 questions). CONTENTS Chapter 1 Learning Terminology Chapter 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms Chapter 3 Body Structure Chapter 4 The Integumentary System Chapter 5 The Musculoskeletal System Chapter 6 The Cardiovascular System Chapter 7 The Respiratory System Chapter 8 The Nervous System Chapter 9 The Urinary System Chapter 10 The Female Reproductive System Chapter 11 The Male Reproductive System Chapter 12 The Blood System Chapter 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 14 The Digestive System Chapter 15 The Endocrine System Chapter 16 The Sensory System Kevin Dumith has teamed up with Myrna Breskin to compile the McGraw Hill Allied Health Dictionary. With Kevin’s long experience working as a medical terminology instructor in a career college and with Myrna’s background as a lexicographer, the dictionary has the combined experience of these two people directing a staff that has written a truly useful reference book. This dictionary will be the only one on the market specifically aimed at the allied health level. This important distinction makes it a very salable product for a student population that has traditionally found the learning of medical terminology one of the most challenging in the allied health curriculum. It is written for the student who finds the higher level dictionaries written for the health care practitioner too difficult to understand and to navigate. the definitions are clear and concise. The only etymologies given are useful word-building breakdowns that reinforce this skill necessary to understanding medical terms. The appendices make this reference a tool that will follow the allied health student into the workplace as a “keeper” for a long time to come. There is a 32-page insert of anatomy plates that cover the body systems with beautiful illustrations as well as instructive and helpful text. CONTENTS Introduction How to use this dictionary Letters a-z Anatomical plates 1-32 Appendices Combining forms, prefixes, and suffixes Abbreviations and medical errors Normal laboratory values Spanish terms Weights and measures Dietary guidelines MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY WORD BUILDER AND COMMUNICATIONS WORKBOOK WITH FLASHCARDS By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne and Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331544-7 Nina Thierer has teamed with Kevin Dumith to bring to market a workbook that will complement a number of allied health products, especially the Allied Health Dictionary and the medical terminology textbooks published by McGraw-Hill. The Medical Terminology WordBuilder and Communications Workbook emphasizes the dual tasks of word building and communication--the prime learning difficulties for most students in medical terminology and related courses. Particularly in the private career colleges, these two areas are where schools are putting the bulk of their emphasis in an attempt to make their students valuable employees in their allied health careers. The workbook is chock-full of exercises, case studies, and verbal and written communication work that will guide the student through realistic simulations of job activities and job search tasks. CONTENTS Unit 1 Communication Using Medical Terms, How Medical Terms Are Formed, Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication in Healthcare Unit 2 Prefixes Unit 3 Suffixes Unit 4 Terms in the Integumentary System Unit 5 Terms in the Musculoskeletal System Unit 6 Terms in the Cardiovascular System 226 ALLIED HEALTH Unit 7 Terms in the Respiratory System Unit 8 Terms in the Nervous System Unit 9 Terms in the Urinary System Unit 10 Terms in the Female Reproductive System Unit 11 Terms in the Male Reproductive System Unit 12 Terms in the Blood System Unit 13 Terms in the Lymphatic and Immune Systems Unit 14 Terms in the Digestive System Unit 15 Terms in the Endocrine System Unit 16 Terms in the Sensory System Appendix A Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B Normal Laboratory Values Appendix C Sample Medical Documents • Everything you ever wanted to know about therapeutic communication. • Pharmacology in a nut-shell. • Do I really understand “The Nursing Process”? • I’ve already failed once--what do I do now? HURST REVIEWS: NCLEX-RN REVIEW By Marlene Hurst 2008 / 620 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-148431-2 A Professional Reference Title Based on Marlene Hurst’s phenomenally popular nursing seminars that train over 30,000 students annually, this innovative review is loaded with the author’s time-tested strategies--all designed to help you pass the NCLEX certification and course exams the first time around! NCLEX-RN Review breaks the mold of other review books by explaining how to apply critical thinking and test-taking skills, rather than how to re-learn course content. Marlene shows you how to effectively work with the “think-on-your-feet” philosophy of the NCLEX-RN, not against it. NCLEX CONTENTS HURST REVIEWS: NCLEX-PN REVIEW By Marlene Hurst 2008 / 736 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-148430-5 A Professional Reference Title Based on Marlene Hurst’s phenomenally popular nursing seminars that train over 30,000 students annually, this innovative review is loaded with the author’s time-tested strategies-all designed to help you pass the NCLEX certification and course exams the first time around! NCLEX-PN Review breaks the mold of other review books by explaining how to apply critical thinking and test-taking skills, rather than how to re-learn course content. Marlene shows you how to effectively work with the “think-on-your-feet” philosophy of the NCLEX-PN, not against it. CONTENTS Everything you ever needed to know about NCLEX-PN. • Why do we have to take another test? I’ve already finished nursing school. • How do they decide what to test on? • What is a “test plan”? • What do I have to make on the NCLEX-PN to pass? • How is computer adaptive testing different than my tests in nursing school? • What do I have to do to be eligible to take NCLEX-PN? • Let’s make sense of the test plan. • Activity Statement review. • Cool Charts. • Cool things you just have to know: Lab values / Growth and Development / First Aid • How will I deal with my anxiety? • Directory of State Boards of Nursing. • How to think the NCLEX way. • Things that just aren’t true about NCLEX. • Don’t select answers based on what you’ve seen in the hospitals! • Tips for International students. • A day in the life of someone taking the NCLEX-PN. • Multiple choice questions verses alternate format questions. • Test-taking strategies. • How to pass the NCLEX-PN the first time. • What’s all the fuss about “Prioritizing” and “Priority” test questions? • How do I handle: management and delegation questions; patientcare assignment questions; leadership questions; and staff assignment questions? Preface 1. Let’s Get It Started in Here! 2. The Process You Must Go Through 3. How is This Test Different? 4. NCLEX-RN--Fact or Fiction? 5. Let’s Make Sense of the Test Plan! 6. Basic Test-Taking Strategies 7. How to Tackle a Priority Question? 8. Management and Delegation 9. Why Do I Really Have to Understand “the Nursing Process”? 10. Everything You Ever Wanted to Know about Therapeutic Communication 11. Pharmacology in a Nutshell 12. Potential Test Question Topics According to the RN Test Plan 13. Cool Charts You Just Have to Know 14. A Day in the Life 15. I’ve Already Failed Once...What Do I Do Now? 16. Tips for International Students 17. Sample Test Questions: Safe and Effective Care Environment --Management of Care --Safety and Infection Control Health Promotion and Maintenance Psychosocial Integrity Physiological Integrity --Basic Care and Comfort --Pharmacological and Parenteral Therapies --Reduction of Risk Potential --Physiological Adaptation 18. Directory of State Boards of Nursing Index 227 ALLIED HEALTH MCGRAW-HILL REVIEW FOR THE NCLEXRN EXAMINATION HIPAA By Frances D Monahan 2008 / 992 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-146077-4 A Professional Reference Title NEW Written by a distinguished educator and nursing text author, this rigorous review for the NCLEX-RN exam reflects the latest changes in the focus of the exam and mimics the exam structure. The author incorporates the new emphasis on client needs throughout the traditional course framework, giving students a unique, step-by-step path toward understanding and applying this key concept. HIPAA FOR ALLIED HEALTH CAREERS CONTENTS Part I: Pre-Test Information Preparing for NCLEX-RN Test and Language Basics Part II: Content Review Safe & Effective Care Environment Management of Care & Legal Issues Safety and Infection Control Health Promotion and Maintenance Ante/Intra/Postpartum & Newborn Care Growth, Development & Family Planning Health and Wellness Techniques of Physical Assessment Psychosocial Integrity Mental Health Concepts Therapy & Intervention Psychopathology Physiological Integrity Alternative & Complementary Therapies Pharmacological & Parenteral Therapies Reduction of Risk Potential Physiological Adaptation Problems & Complications Part III: Taking the Test Sharpening Your Test Taking Skills Practice Test for NCLEX-RN By Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises, Inc 2009 (February 2008) / 192 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-337412-3 www.mhhe.com/NewbyHIPAA HIPAA for Allied Health Careers covers the concepts and knowledge allied health workers need to correctly handle patients’ protected health information (PHI) and to comply with all HIPAA regulations, including: • Administrative Simplification • Privacy Rule • Security Rule • Transactions and Code Sets • Compliance to Avoid Fraud and Abuse Major emphasis is placed on communication skills--written and oral—-because they underpin HIPAA compliance in most careers. Such skills include handling requests for release of information (ROI) from patients, payers, and other clinicians; effective interviewing of patients to gather information, complete authorization forms, and explain procedures; and documenting data using tools such as electronic medical records. HIPAA for Allied Health Careers provides students with the must-know information on HIPAA compliance. Titles I (COBRA) and II (HIPAA) are covered. The HIPAA privacy, security, and e-transactions are taught in depth. The concluding chapter presents the recently-published final HIPAA enforcement rule, and also provides an overview of compliance guidelines for the various allied health career settings, such as hospital-, physician practice, and billing-service based careers. Throughout the chapters, students think through case scenarios that cover the types of situations in which allied health personnel will need to make the correct choices for protecting patient privacy under HIPAA. FEATURES COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Compliance Tips FYI boxes Internet-based activities What Is Your Opinion? Internet Resources HIPAA Communications CONTENTS Chapter 1 The Goal of HIPAA: Administrative Simplification Chapter 2 The Privacy Rule Chapter 3 The Security Rule Chapter 4 Transactions and Code Sets Regulations Chapter 5 Compliance Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 228 ALLIED HEALTH Fundamentals of Nursing 75% of students in a recent study indicated they routinely used APR to study on their own, vs. 29% who used traditional lab materials to study on their own. I can see how you might think you have to use cadavers to use this product. It is a common misconception. I can understand your concern. Our research has shown that students do use APR when it is incorporated into the lecture and/or lab. I am pretty happy with the textbook and media I am using now. Everything is working fine. NEW CONTENTS ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED (ALLIED HEALTH VERSION) Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System Nervous System Cardiovascular System By Medical College Ohio SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MATHEMATICS FOR NURSES 2009 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-337831-2 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art program uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed also offers animations, histologic and radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. It can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate anatomy & physiology or human anatomy course; Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is available stand-alone, or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s anatomy & physiology textbooks. By Larry Stephens, University of Nebraska 2003 ISBN: 978-0-07-140022-0 A Professional Reference Title A review of basic arithmetic precedes clear explanations of how nurses need to apply mathematics in modern clinical practice. This study guide teaches an especially easy approach to solving the proportion problems key to converting medication orders and passing nursing licensing exams. The profusion of problems with detailed solutions, and hundreds more with answers, gives students ample opportunities to test their skills as they learn them--leading to quicker mastery. FEATURES New Organ System Added -- The Integumentary System has been added to the list of organ systems included in this program. All layers of the skin will be included and this new section will also feature histology images and full coverage of the dermis, epidermis, hair shaft, specific glands, etc. Expanded Skeletal and Joint Coverage -- The Skeletal System and Muscular System have been separated into each their own system allowing for substantially expanded information to be provided in each. The Skeletal System will now include full coverage of joint dissections. 75 NEW photos of disarticulated bones have been added. NEW Histology Section! -- Version 2.0 of Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes a new button for histology views to support every body system. Students can access this information by clicking on the microscope icon located on the navigation bar. NEW! Expanded Quizzing Types and Options -- Physiology animation quizzes have been added to Skeletal, Muscular and Nervous Systems. In addition, the user can now select the number of questions he/she wants included in each quiz (10, 25 or ALL). Nursing Leadership NURSE MANAGEMENT DEMYSTIFIED By Irene McEachen and James Keogh 2007 / 252 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-147241-8 A Professional Reference Title This new addition to the Demystified series offers practical, easy-tounderstand management advice, whether you’re a nursing student, nurse, or another type of medical facility administrator faced with the challenge of managing and motivating a staff. NEW! Navigation and Interface changes! CONTENTS System selection menu makes it easy to hop between systems. A new “Smart” (Google-like) search button has been added and integrated across all systems. Tags are now color coded. All tags pertaining to the given system are one color and reference structures that are not part of that system are another color. A recent research study proved that students using APR in the lab performed nearly 2x better than students using traditional methods (lab manual + animal specimen). 63% of students in a recent study stated that APR encouraged an active-learning process compared to 31% who said the same about traditional lab. Introduction Chapter 1: The Evolving Healthcare Delivery System Chapter 2: Nursing Leadership and Management Chapter 3: Nursing Care Delivery Models and Staffing Chapter 4: Delegation and Supervision Chapter 5: Effective Communication and Conflict Resolution Chapter 6: Policy Chapter 7: Legal Issues Chapter 8: Healthcare Economics Chapter 9: Budget Planning and Financial Management Chapter 10: Unions, Management, and Employee Relations Chapter 11: Time Management Chapter 12: Nursing Informatics and Measurement 229 ALLIED HEALTH Chapter 13: Risk Management Chapter 14: Managing Scarce Resources Answers Index International Edition TRANSCULTURAL NURSING 3rd Edition By Madeleine Leininger, Wayne State University and Marilyn R McFarland, Saginaw Valley State University 2002 / 621 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-135397-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-121270-0 [IE] Nursing Issues and Trends A Professional Reference Title CONTENTS International Edition THE NURSING EXPERIENCE Trends, Challenges and Transitions, 5th Edition By Lucille A Joel, Rutgers University College of Nursing 2006 / 784 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-145826-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-110555-2 [IE] A Professional Reference Title This outstanding introduction to the nursing experience covers trends, issues, and nursing history all in one book and is enriched by the experience and expertise of the authors. Readers will find essential coverage of the changing roles of nurses in managed care and institutional settings, the options within nursing, special help with finding the right fit, and growth opportunities within the profession. CONTENTS Part 1 The Evolution Of Nursing Chapter 1, Care Of The Sick: How Nursing Began Chapter 2, Nursing In The United States: American Revolution To Nursing Revolution Part 2 Nursing In The Health Care Scene Chapter 3, The Health Care Delivery System Chapter 4, The Discipline Of Nursing Part 3 Nursing Practice Chapter 5, Education And Research For Practice Chapter 6, Career Opportunities Chapter 7, Leadership For An Era Of Change Part 4 Nursing Ethics And The Law Chapter 8, Ethical Issues In Nursing And Health Care Chapter 9, Patients’ Rights, Students’ Rights Chapter 10, Politics And Public Policy Chapter 11, Health Care Credentialing And Nursinglicensure Chapter 12, Legal Aspects Of Nursing Practice Part 5 Transition Into Practice Chapter 13, Nursing Organizations And Publications Chapter 14 Job Selection Chapter 15, Career Management Appendices Section I: Transcultural Nursing: Essential Knowledge Dimensions 1 Transcultural Nursing and the Globalization of Health Care: Importance, Focus, and Historical Aspects 2 Essential Transcultural Nursing Care Concepts, Principles, Examples, and Policy Statements 3 Part I: The Theory of Culture Care and Ethnonursing Research Method Part II: Selected Research Findings from the Culture Care Theory 4 Culture Care Assessments for Congruent Competency Practices 5 Part I. Toward Integrative Generic and Professional Health Care Part II. Ethics of Alternative Medicine: Primum Non Nocere 6 The Biocultural Basis of Transcultural Nursing 7 Western Ethical, Moral, and Legal Dimensions within the Culture care Theory Section II: Special Topics in Transcultural Nursing 8 Cultures and Tribes of Nursing, Hospitals, and the Medicine Culture 9 Transcultural Food Functions, Beliefs, and Practices 10 Lifecycle Culturally Based Care and Health Patterns of the Gadsup of New Guinea: A Non-Western Culture 11 Transcultural Mental Health Nursing 12 Transcultural Nursing Care and Health Perspectives of HIV/ AIDS 13 Urban USA Transcultural Care Challenges with Multiple Cultures and Culturally Diverse Providers 14 Ethical, Moral, and Legal Aspects of Transcultural Nursing Section III: Culture Care Theory, Research, and Practice in Diverse Cultures 15 Anglo-American (United States) Culture Care Values, Beliefs, and Lifeways 16 Arab Muslims and Culture Care 17 African American and Culture Care 18 South African Culturally Based Health--Illness Patterns and Humanistic Care Practices 19 Family Violence and Culture Care with African and Euro-American Cultures in the United States 20 Elder Care in Urban Namibian Families: An Ethnonursing Study 21 Culture Care of the Mexican American Family 22 Philippine American Culture Care 23 Culture Care Theory and Elderly Polish American 24 Finnish Women in Birth: Culture Care Meanings and Practices 25 Taiwanese Americans Culture Care Meanings and Expressions 26 Transcultural Nursing and Health Care among Native American Peoples 27 Lithuanian Americans and Culture Care 28 Japanese Americans and Culture Care 29 Jewish Americans and Russian Jews Culture Care 30 India: Transcultural Nursing and Health Care 31 Canadian Transcultural Nursing: Trends and Issues 32 Culture Care of the Homeless in Western United States 33 Reflections on Australia and Transcultural Nursing in the New Millennium Section IV: Transcultural Nursing Teaching, Administration, and Consultation 34 Transcultural Nursing: Curricular Concepts, Principles, and Teach- 230 ALLIED HEALTH ing and Learning Activities for the 21st Century 35 Transcultural Nursing Administration and Consultation Section V. The Future of Transcultural Nursing 36 The Future of Transcultural Nursing: A Global Perspective Nursing Informatics International Edition ESSENTIALS OF NURSING INFORMATICS 4th Edition By Virginia K Saba, Georgetown University School of Nursing and Kathleen Ann McCormick 2006 / 528 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-144197-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-124842-6 [IE] A Professional Reference Title Learn how computers and technology affect the nurse’s role in caring for the patient. Now fully updated and enhanced, the fourth edition includes new coverage of PDAs, the impact of HIPAA guidelines, patient safety issues, privacy issues, optimal use of decision support tools, and much more CONTENTS I. COMPUTERS AND NURSING 1. Overview of Computers and Nursing by Virginia Saba & Kathleen McCormick 2. Historical Perspective of Computers and Nursing by Virginia Saba & William Scott Erdely 3. Electronic Health Record from the Davis Award Perspective by Pat Wise II. COMPUTER SYSTEMS 4. Computer Hardware by Mary McHugh 5. Computer Software & Systems by Mary McHugh 6. Open Source Software by Peter Murray & Alric M O’Connor 7. Data Processing by Ramona Nelson 8. The Internet: A Nursing Resource by Vida B. Svarkas 9. PDA and Wireless Devices by Kathleen Charters & Thomasine D. Guberski 10. Incorporating Evidence: Use of Computer-based Clinical Decision Support Systems (CDSS) for Health Professionals by Ida Androwich III. ISSUES IN INFORMATICS 11. Nursing Informatics and Health Care Policy by Carol Gassert 12. The Role of Technology in the Medication Use Process by Matthew Grissinger & Hedy Cohen 13. Health Care Data Standards by Joyce Sensmeier 14. Electronic Health Record Systems: US Federal Initiatives and Public/Private Partnerships by Linda Fischetti & Mary Jo Deering 15. Dependable Systems for Quality Care by Dixie B. Baker 16. NMDS Systems by Connie Delaney IV. INFORMATICS THEORY 17. Theories, Models, and Frameworks by Carol Bickford & K.M. Hunter 18. Advanced Terminology Systems by Nicholas R. Hardiker & Suzanne Bakken & Amy Coenen 19. Implementing and Upgrading Clinical Information Systems by Marina Douglas & Marian Celli V. PRACTICE APPLICATIONS 20. Practice Applications by Joyce Johnson & Molly Billingsley 21. Critical Care Applications by Rosemary Kennedy & Ann Daddona 22. Community Health Systems by Cindy Struk, Donna Peters, Virginia Saba 23. Ambulatory Care Systems by Susan K. Newbold 24. Internet Applications for Advanced Nursing Practice by Mary Lavin & Michael Morgan 25. Informatics Solutions for Emergency Preparedness and Response by Elizabeth Weiner & Sally Phillips 26. Vendor Applications by Sheryl Taylor & Ann Farrell VI. ADMINISTRATIVE APPLICATIONS 27. Administrative Applications of Information Technology for Nursing Managers by Roy Simpson & Charlotte Weaver 28. Evidence-based Nursing and Informatics by Kathleen McCormick 29. Data Mining and Knowledge Discovery by Patti Abbott & Sun-Mi Lee VII. CONSUMER’S USE OF INFORMATICS 30. Consumer and Patient Use of Computers for Health by Rita Zielstorff 31. Health-related Decision Making By Patients by Patricia Brennan VIII. EDUCATIONAL APPLICATIONS 32. Nursing Curriculum in the Information Age by Barbara Carty & Iris Ong 33. Accessible, Effective Distance Education Anytime, Anyplace by Patricia E. Allen, Jean Arnold, Myrna L. Armstrong 34. Innovations in Telehealth by Diane Skiba, Amy Barton & Marilyn Nielsen IX. RESEARCH APPLICATIONS 35. Computer Use in Nursing Research by Veronica D. Feeg, Sarah E. Sheehan, Asher E. Beckwitt & Betty L. Chang 36. Computerized Information Resources by Diana S. Pravikoff & June Levy X. INTERNATIONAL PERSPECTIVES 37. Nursing Informatics in Canada by Kathryn J. Hannah, Nora Hammell & Lynn M. Nagle 38. Nursing Informatics in Europe by Margareta Ehnfors 39. Nursing Informatics on the Pacific Rim by Evelyn Hovenga, Robyn Carr, Michelle Honey, & Lucy Westbrooke 40. Nursing Informatics in Asia by Hyeoun-Ae Park 41. Nursing Informatics in South America by Heimar F. Marin XI. THE FUTURE OF INFORMATICS 42. Future Directions by Kathleen McCormick Appendix: Clinical Care Classification System Version 2.0 by Virginia Saba 231 INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia ALLIED HEALTH Nursing 75% of students in a recent study indicated they routinely used APR to study on their own, vs. 29% who used traditional lab materials to study on their own. I can see how you might think you have to use cadavers to use this product. It is a common misconception. I can understand your concern. Our research has shown that students do use APR when it is incorporated into the lecture and/or lab. I am pretty happy with the textbook and media I am using now. Everything is working fine. NEW CONTENTS ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED (ALLIED HEALTH VERSION) Integumentary System Skeletal System Muscular System Nervous System Cardiovascular System By Medical College Ohio 2009 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-337831-2 Externship for Medical Assisting Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art program uses cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed also offers animations, histologic and radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, and a comprehensive quizzing tool. It can be used as part of any one or two semester undergraduate anatomy & physiology or human anatomy course; Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is available stand-alone, or can be combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s anatomy & physiology textbooks. NEW ACTIVSIM: MEDICAL ASSISTING CLINICAL SIMULATOR FEATURES New Organ System Added -- The Integumentary System has been added to the list of organ systems included in this program. All layers of the skin will be included and this new section will also feature histology images and full coverage of the dermis, epidermis, hair shaft, specific glands, etc. Expanded Skeletal and Joint Coverage -- The Skeletal System and Muscular System have been separated into each their own system allowing for substantially expanded information to be provided in each. The Skeletal System will now include full coverage of joint dissections. 75 NEW photos of disarticulated bones have been added. NEW Histology Section! -- Version 2.0 of Anatomy & Physiology Revealed includes a new button for histology views to support every body system. Students can access this information by clicking on the microscope icon located on the navigation bar. NEW! Expanded Quizzing Types and Options -- Physiology animation quizzes have been added to Skeletal, Muscular and Nervous Systems. In addition, the user can now select the number of questions he/she wants included in each quiz (10, 25 or ALL). NEW! Navigation and Interface changes! System selection menu makes it easy to hop between systems. A new “Smart” (Google-like) search button has been added and integrated across all systems. Tags are now color coded. All tags pertaining to the given system are one color and reference structures that are not part of that system are another color. A recent research study proved that students using APR in the lab performed nearly 2x better than students using traditional methods (lab manual + animal specimen). 63% of students in a recent study stated that APR encouraged an active-learning process compared to 31% who said the same about traditional lab. By McGraw-Hill Education Allied Health 2009 (April 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-337419-2 www.activsim.com/ma McGraw-Hill ACTIVSim: Medical Assisting Clinical Simulator is made up of two parts: six Patient Case Clinical Simulators and 15 Clinical Skills Simulators. The Patient Case Clinical Simulators introduce students to non-acute medical assisting patient case scenarios, procedure simulators and quick e-learning exercises. Six Patient Case Scenarios A large portion of core clinical competencies can be simulated on virtual patients, where the learner can interact with a patient and try out the different tasks that a medical assistant performs in physicians’ offices. The focus of McGraw-Hill ACTIVSim: Medical Assisting Clinical Simulator is on vital signs and obtaining patient data, including a chart feature, so that the learner can collect vital signs and make notes about observations that the medical assistant can brief the doctor about. ACTIVSim provides an excellent opportunity for students to practice their communication and patient interviewing skills prior to their externships and working in a doctor’s office. After each simulation, the learner receives elaborate feedback (debriefing) on their performance. The debriefing includes basic patient assessment issues and recommendations for handling patients who have a particular condition. 15 Clinical Skills Simulators A number of procedures are necessary clinical competencies that a medical assistant needs to master. Some of these are simple step-by-step procedures, while others are more complex procedures requiring different instruments and devices. ACTIVSim Clinical Skills simulators emulate these procedures. The difference between full patient simulators (case scenarios) and skills simulators is that in the latter, you focus on the procedures of the skill, e.g., how to check the blood pressure by following a step by step procedure or how to run 232 ALLIED HEALTH an autoclave. The patient case simulators take you through entire patient encounters. CONTENTS Patient Case Simulators Chest Pain Type 2 Diabetes Skin Condition Gynecological Patient: PAP Smear Child Patient: Diarrhea Hypertension Clinical Skills Simulators Blood Pressure Handwashing Infection Control Biohazardous Materials Measure Temperature Pulse Respiration Spirometry Electrocardiography (ECG) Capillary Puncture Venipuncture Urine Analysis Immunology Obtain Throat Culture Chemistry Sterilize/Autoclave NEW Chapter 2 Medical Terminology Chapter 3 Anatomy and Physiology Chapter 4 Pathophysiology Chapter 5 Microbiology Chapter 6 General Psychology Chapter 7 Nutrition Chapter 8 Medical Law and Ethics Section 2 Administrative Medical Assisting Knowledge Chapter 9 General Office Duties Chapter 10 Communication in the Medical Office Chapter 11 Keyboarding and Computer Applications Chapter 12 Financial Management Chapter 13 Medical Insurance Chapter 14 Basic Coding Section 3 Clinical Medical Assisting Knowledge Chapter 15 Blood-Borne Pathogens and Principles of Asepsis Chapter 16 Preparing the Patient Chapter 17 Vital Signs Chapter 18 Pharmacology Chapter 19 Administration of Medication Chapter 20 Electrocardiography Chapter 21 Radiography Chapter 22 Physical Therapy Chapter 23 Medical Emergencies and First Aid Chapter 24 Laboratory Procedures PART II SELF-EVALUATION Section 1 Test for General Medical Assisting Knowledge Section 2 Test for Administrative Medical Assisting Knowledge Section 3 Test for Clinical Medical Assisting Knowledge Part III SELF-EVALUATION ANWERS AND RATIONALES Section 1 General Medical Assisting Knowledge Answers and Rationales Section 2 Administrative Medical Assisting Knowledge Answers and Rationales Section 3 Clinical Medical Assisting Knowledge Answers and Rationales MEDICAL ASSISTING REVIEW: Passing the CMA, RMA, & CCMA Exams with Student CD, 3rd Edition Paediatric First Aid, CPR, AED By Jahangir Moini, Florida Metro University-Melbourne 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-330979-8 NEW www.mhhe.com/moini3 Medical Assisting Review: Passing the CMA, RMA, and CCMA Exams, Third Edition provides example questions for students to prepare for certification exams. This reference prepares students to take the exam with easy-to-read essential material summaries that highlight key areas of the major clinical and administrative parts of a Medical Assistant’s program. Each of the chapters includes a series of 20 to 30 multiple choice quiz questions and a concise outline of key information. The CD-ROM included free in each book provides more than 1500 sample review questions as well as a PowerPoint presentation for additional student review. The review questions include rationales for answers and correlations to certification competencies. There is also a correlation to the textbook location where the information is covered. NEW TO THIS EDITION New chapter on General Psychology Improved Student CD-ROM is easier to use. CHILD AND INFANT CPR SKILLS CARD By National Safety Council NSC 2009 (March 2008) / 8 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-338293-7 CONTENTS CONTENTS PART I THEORY REVIEW Section 1 General Medical Assisting Knowledge Chapter 1 The Profession of Medical Assisting Check the Victim Initial Assessment SAMPLE History Format Physical Exam Recovery Position Child 233 ALLIED HEALTH Massage / Reflexology Infant CPR--Child (ages 1--8) AED--Child (ages 1--8 or under 55 pounds) Choking Responsive Child Responsive Infant CPR--Infant (under age 1) Preventing Injuries Preventing Choking Preventing Poisoning Preventing SIDS NEW PRACTICAL REFLEXOLOGY Interpretation and Techniques PEDIATRIC FIRST AID, CPR AND AED 2nd Edition By Susan Watson and Valerie Voner By National Safety Council NSC 2008 (September 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-329701-9 No matter how careful you are, kids get hurt. The National Safety Council can help you handle, the usual bumps and bruises, as well as more serious injuries and sudden illnesses. And because no one wants to see children get hurt in the first place, you will get tips on preventing injuries. The NSC’s pediatric emergency care programs were the first to focus specifically on how injuries affect babies and young children. The updated curriculum assures that you are learning the latest emergency care techniques. The program meets first aid and CPR certification requirements for all 50 states and conforms to the latest guidelines for CPR. CONTENTS Introduction: Why Learn Injury Prevention and First Aid? PART ONE: FIRST AID Chapter 1- Take Action in an Emergency Chapter 2- Basic Life Support Chapter 3--Bleeding and Wound Care Chapter 4--Shock Chapter 5 – Burns Chapter 6--Serious Injuries Chapter 7--Bone, Joint, and Muscle Injuries Chapter 8--Sudden Illness Chapter 9 – Poisoning Chapter 10--Heat and Cold Emergencies Chapter 11 – Common Minor Childhood Problems and Injuries Chapter 12 – Child Abuse and Neglect PART TWO: CHILDHOOD ILLNESSES Chapter 13 – Common Childhood Illnesses PART THREE: PREVENTING ILLNESS AND INJURY Chapter 14 – Preventing Illness and Infection Chapter 15 – Preventing Injuries Chapter 16 – Making Places Safe for Children Index 2009 (February 2008) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-351095-8 www.mhhe.com/careercentral The study and practice of reflexology today requires a text that provides both training and resource material. This book offers practical application and in-depth knowledge that is germane to acquiring proficiency in reflexology. Illustrations were chosen to support the discussion of technique while providing an overall review of how reflexology affects each system including key pathologies within the body systems. The goal was to provide a vehicle that smoothly transports the reader to fulfillment be it as instructor or student. FEATURES A clinically relevant text covering important modalities used by reflexologists and massage therapists. Dynamic illustrations and photographs present a realistic view of reflexology to enhance learning. Text is a “bench manual” on how to equate specific manipulations to support healing in specific systems or body regions. Every chapter opens with Learning Outcomes and Key terms Review and Critical Thinking questions. Watson provides clear, concise, compact, and appropriate content for coursework or practice. Scientific Support boxes are definitive facts collected from professional reflexology case studies or research reports. CONTENTS Introduction Section 1: Basic Principles of Reflexology Chapter 1: History and Theory of Reflexology Chapter 2: Introduction to Basic Anatomy Chapter 3: Anatomy and Pathologies of the Foot Chapter 4: Anatomy and Pathologies of the Hand Chapter 5: Mapping of the Feet and Hands Connecting Reflexes with Anatomy Chapter 6: Positioning and Thumb-walking Techniques Chapter 7: Relaxing Techniques Section 2: Body Systems Chapter 8: Skeletal and Muscular Systems Chapter 9: Nervous System Chapter 10: Sense Organs Chapter 11: Endocrine System Chapter 12: Circulatory System Chapter 13: Lymphatic System Chapter 14: Respiratory System Chapter 15: Digestive System 234 ALLIED HEALTH Chapter 16: Urinary System Chapter 17: Reproductive System Chapter 18: Integumentary System Section 3: Applications of Reflexology Chapter 19: Children and Geriatric Chapter 20: Women and Men’s Health Chapter 21: Emotional Health, Substance Abuse, and Weight Management Chapter 22: Pain Management, Cancer, and Hospice Section 4: Ethics and Business of Reflexology Chapter 23: Ethics and Business Appendices A: Reflexology Associations, Websites, and Schools B: Sample Reflexology Session C: Stretching Workout for the Practitioner D: Marketing Reflexology E: Client History Forms F: Documenting Charts for the Client G: Specific Techniques for Pathologies Bibliography 1: Resources 2: References Glossary Index By Steve Blake 2008 / 342 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-148901-0 A Professional Reference Title Need to understand how vitamins and minerals work but find dense texts difficult to absorb? Here’s your panacea! Vitamins & Minerals Demystified makes it easy to digest information on everything from A to zinc. Written by a holistic health doctor, this essential guide explains the crucial role vitamins and minerals play in nutrition and physiology. You’ll find details on the type and amount required for survival and for increased disease resistance. The book outlines the food sources of different vitamins and minerals and covers the benefits and pitfalls of both natural and synthetic vitamins. Featuring end-of-chapter quizzes and a final exam, this book will fortify your knowledge of vitamins and minerals. This fast and easy guide offers: Simple enough for a beginner, but challenging enough for an advanced student, Vitamins & Minerals Demystified is the perfect supplement for anyone studying or interested in this important health topic. ADMINISTERING MEDICATIONS 6th Edition CONTENTS By Donna Gauwitz 2008 (September 2007) / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-352085-8 www.mhhe.com/gauwitzadminmed Administering Medications: for Pharmacology for Health Careers is designed to teach the safe administration of medications to health care students entering medical assisting and other allied health care professions. This textbook speaks directly to students and encourages students to identify and apply the concepts learned. Chapter 1: Orientation to Medications Chapter 2: Principles of Drug Action Chapter 3: Measurement and Dosage Calculation Chapter 4: Administering Parenteral Medications Chapter 5: Medication Therapy Chapter 6: Vitamins, Minerals, and Herbs Chapter 7: Antibiotics and Antifungals Chapter 8: Drugs for the Eye and Ear Chapter 9: Drugs for the Skin Chapter 10: Drugs for the Cardiovascular System Chapter 11: Drugs for the Respiratory System Chapter 12: Drugs for the Gastrointestinal System Chapter 13: Drugs for the Urinary System and Fluid Balance Chapter 14: Drugs for the Reproductive System Chapter 15: Drugs for the Endocrine System Chapter 16: Drugs for the Musculoskeletal System Chapter 17: Drugs for the Nervous and Sensory System Chapter 18: Psychotropic Drugs Chapter 19: Antineoplastic Drugs Chapter 20: Drugs for the Pediatric Patient Chapter 21: Drugs for the Geriatric Patient VITAMINS AND MINERALS DEMYSTIFIED Numerous figures to illustrate key concepts Graphs indicating the foods rich in various vitamins and minerals Charts featuring U.S. Recommended Daily Allowances (USRDAs) Coverage of deficiency-related diseases Quick summaries of each vitamin and mineral reinforce learning Pharmacology for Health Professions CONTENTS Appendix A-Abbreviations Glossary Index Figures, Graphs, and RDA Tables Preface Acknowledgments PART ONE--THE WATER-SOLUBLE VITAMINS Chapter 1: The B Vitamins--The Energy Vitamins Chapter 2: Vitamin C--The Citrus Antioxidant Test: Part One Chapter 3: Vitamin A--The Night Sight Vitamin Chapter 4: Vitamin D--The Sunshine Vitamin Chapter 5: Vitamin E--The Fat Antioxidant Chapter 6: Vitamin K--The Green Leafy Vitamin Test: Part Two PART THREE--THE MACRO MINERALS Chapter 7: Water and Electrolytes Chapter 8: The Electrolyte Minerals--Sodium, Chloride, and Potassium Chapter 9: Calcium--The Bone Builder Chapter 10: Major Minerals--Phosphorus, Magnesium, and Sulfur Test: Part Three PART FOUR--THE TRACE MINERALS Chapter 11: Iron--The Blood Builder Chapter 12: Zinc--The Growth Material Chapter 13: Minor Trace Minerals--Iodine, Selenium, Copper, Manganese, Fluoride, Chromium, Molybdenum, Lead, and Mercury Test: Part Four Appendix A: Pregnancy and Breastfeeding Appendix B: Weight Loss Appendix C: Antioxidants Appendix D: The Elderly Appendix E: Alcoholism Appendix F: Osteoporosis Appendix G: Quick Summaries Answers to Quizzes Answers to Tests and Final Exam Index 235 ALLIED HEALTH FEATURES International Edition Super Tech... boxes direct students to additional exercises on the Student CD-ROM included with the text. These exercises provide students with independent review, reinforcement, and evaluation. NURSING SPECTRUM DRUG HANDBOOK 2009 4th Edition Critical Thinking in the Pharmacy features open each chapter with a scenario to introduce students to a situation which may occur while working in a pharmacy. They will improve students’ critical-thinking skills and provide discussion opportunities in the classroom. By Patricia Dwyer Schull 2008 (June 2008) / 1376 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-154877-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-164013-8 [IE] A Professional Reference Title Nursing Spectrum Drug Handbook delivers what nurses from around the world said they wanted most in such a publication: easy-of-use and a strong focus on patient safety. As convenient as it is thorough, the handbook enables nurses to carry essential drug information around with them wherever they go. The Drugs A-Z section features alphabeticized coverage of 3,000 brand name and 1,000 generic drugs detailing each drug’s mechanism of action, inidications, dosage, contraindications, and incldes intervention, patient monitoring, and patient teaching. CONTENTS Foreword Preface and User’s Guide Drugs A-Z Safe Drug Administration Photogallery of Common Tablets and Capsules Drug Classes Vitamins and Minerals Herbs and Supplements Appendices Tech Check boxes provide reinforcement of a key point in each section of the chapter as well as an immediate check of students’ understanding of content covered. Included in the box is Think Before You Act which draws attention to actions that may cause medication errors. Reviewing each of the Tech Checks prior to completing the End-of-Chapter exercises and before taking tests improves students’ success. Caution boxes draw attention to mistakes that can occur within pharmacy practice. Memory Tips introduce students to techniques to help them remember key information. Actual Medication Labels provide full-color, current medication labels that will be seen in a job setting. They give a realistic view of on-the-job training. Laminated Pocket Cards, bound in the back of the text, provide a handy reference during clinical training, externship, or work experience. The cards include formulas for metric equivalents, common approximations, determining the total number of tablets or capsules to dispense, determining the total amount of liquid to dispense, and math formulas; alligation; and common abbreviations used in the pharmacy. PTCB Correlations highlight coverage of necessary content. CONTENTS PRETEST –(covers basic math concepts chapters 1 & 2) CHAPTER 1--Numbering Systems and Mathematical Review CHAPTER 2--Working with Percents, Ratios and Proportions CHAPTER 3--Systems of Measurement and Weight CHAPTER 4--Drug Orders CHAPTER 5--Drug Labels, Package Inserts, and References CHAPTER 6--Dosage Calculations CHAPTER 7--Oral Medications and Parenteral Dosages CHAPTER 8--Intravenous Calculations CHAPTER 9--Special Preparations and Calculations CHAPTER 10--Pediatric and Geriatric Considerations CHAPTER 11--Operational Calculations Post Test (covers entire of text) Appendix A-Common Look/Alike and Sound/Alike Medications Appendix B-Answer Key-Review & Practice Problems Glossary Credits Index Conversion Cards Pharmacy Technician NEW MATH FOR THE PHARMACY TECHNICIAN By Lynn Egler, Dorsey Business School and Kathryn A Booth, Total Care Programming 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-729050-4 (with Student CD-ROM) http://www.mhhe.com/EglerMathPharmacyTech Recognizing the enormous need for well-trained Pharmacy Technicians as well as the serious need to decrease medication errors, Math for Pharmacy Technicians: Concepts and Calculations was developed. This textbook is organized from simple to complex and walks the student through the necessary information to pass the math portion of the PTCB exam. The text includes Pharmacy Technician-specific information that is non-threatening and helps the student learn to safely practice as a Pharmacy Technician. This text is organized into 11 chapters, along with a pretest and a comprehensive evaluation or posttest. 236 ALLIED HEALTH the Online Learning Center, and can readily gauge their students’ progress through activities here. NEW CONTENTS PHARMACY TECHNICIAN: PRACTICE AND PROCEDURES WITH STUDENT CD By Gail Orum-Alexander and James Mizner 2010 (February 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-730236-8 (Mandatory Package) Pharmacy Technician: Practice and Procedures provides a comprehensive approach to the training of a Pharmacy Technician. Written for students in career and community colleges, vocational schools, and pharmacy chain training programs, the text focuses on customer service and communication, critical thinking and problem solving, and emphasizes hands-on lab work. Pharmacy Technician: Practice and Procedures enlists technology, comprehensive educational methodologies and a range of resources to help students succeed. FEATURES Customer Service and Communication: The Pharmacy Technician must interact with the public, peers, pharmacists and other professionals. This requires valuable interpersonal and communications skills. In today’s automated and competitive world, the need for genuine customer service is mandatory. At Your Service scenarios in Pharmacy Technician: Practice and Procedures focuses on application of customer service and communication by providing real-life situational information and questions for students to review and practice. Students learn not just how to prepare the medication but to properly communicate with the customers and others. Unit 1: The Pharmacy Technician Chapter 1: Overview, Practice Settings and Organizations Chapter 2: Basic Safety and Standards Chapter 3: Communications and Customer Service Chapter 4: Law and Ethics Unit 2: Pharmacology and Medications Chapter 5: Measurements and Calculations Chapter 6: Introduction to Pharmacology Chapter 7: Classifications of Drugs Chapter 8: Over the Counter Agents Chapter 9: Complementary and Alternative Modalities Unit 3: Medication Management and Preparation Chapter 10: Dosage Forms, Abbreviations, and Routes of Administration Chapter 11: Extemporaneous Compounding and IV Admixtures Chapter 12: Medication Errors Chapter 13: Referencing Unit 4: Practice Settings Chapter 14: Retail Setting Chapter 15: Hospital Setting Chapter 16: Other Environments Chapter 17: Inventory Management Unit 5: Transition From Student to Technician Chapter 18: Preparing for Your Career as a Pharmacy Technician Chapter 19: Career Development Critical Thinking and Problem Solving: Critical thinking and problem solving strategies are included throughout the text. It is not enough to present the information, Pharmacy Technician: Practice and Procedures reinforces the concept of critical thinking through “What should you do?” situational questions. Helping students apply knowledge concepts and determine how to handle situations relative to content is an integral part of the textbook. Phlebotomy Case Study features open each chapter with a scenario to introduce students to a situation which may occur while working in a pharmacy. They will improve students’ critical-thinking skills and provide discussion opportunities in the classroom. NEW Tech Check boxes provide reinforcement of key points in each section of the chapter as well as an immediate check of students’ understanding of content covered. PHLEBOTOMY FOR HEALTH CARE PERSONNEL WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 2nd Edition Caution boxes draw attention to mistakes that can occur within pharmacy practice. The text is well-illustrated and contains forms similar to the authentic forms the Pharmacy Tech will use in the field. This strong visual component enhances the text’s instruction and the student’s grasp of the material. The CD-ROM included in each student text provides reinforcement of the text materials, and adds a strong visual element to the package. Laboratory Applications Manual provides not only typical workbook-style study questions but also provides laboratory practice sheets for the required skills of the Pharmacy Technician. The Laboratory Applications Manual promotes hands-on training. It corresponds and expands upon the Pharmacy Technician: Practice and Procedures textbook. An Online Learning Center provides further resources for both instructors and students. A comprehensive Instructor’s Manual provides answers to problems presented in the textbook and Lab Manual. An Instructor CD-ROM includes EZ Test test generator, PowerPoint slides, and interactive classroom games. Instructors will also find resources at By Kathryn A Booth, Total Care Programming and Antonio C Wallace, Advanced Career Training 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-330977-4 www.mhhe.com/healthcareskills Phlebotomy for Health Care Personnel, Second has been updated to include the CLSI standards and OSHA regulations. The text is now four-color and includes all new photographs and illustrations. It includes information about customer service and phlebotomy procedures in multiple health care environments or situations in addition to the traditional clinic setting. Emphasis is made on regulatory agencies, standards, and certification. Quality control and reporting/treatment procedures for accidental injuries are addressed in the text. Patient education and troubleshooting techniques are prominent features of the text. The instruction in the text is directly linked to the CD-ROM included in the text to reinforce skills and techniques. The can be used in the classroom as well as independent and distance learning. 237 ALLIED HEALTH Respiratory Care NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! Text is now 4-color. Updated information added about waived office procedures. Added information on safety needles. The updated Student CD-ROM provides video, audio, and illustrations with interactive exercises to bring the competencies presented in the text to life. Key terms are defined and pronounced correctly. Practicing Law & Ethics, Providing Safety and Infection Control, Patient Education and Communication, and Troubleshooting Activities include critical-thinking questions. There are also drag-and-drop exercises in each chapter to reinforce the student’s knowledge of anatomy, supplies, and equipment discussed in the text. Interactive Questions provide additional review and suggest areas for improvement. The CD-ROM can be used for traditional, hybrid, and distance learning classes. CD has plenty of practice activities with various strips. Troubleshooting features identify problems which may arise for the phlebotomist and provide suggested solutions. These help promote critical thinking and prepare students for real life situations. Safety and Infection Control features provide tips and techniques to provide safe care to patients and prevent the spread of infection. Patient Education and Communication provides suggestions for communicating effectively, both orally and in writing, and provides for patient education related to Phlebotomy. Law and Ethics features provide information about HIPAA, legal responsibilities, limitations, and implications, as well as performing duties within established ethical practices. Critical Thinking and Interactive Questions provide review and suggest areas for improvement. FISHMAN’S PULMONARY DISEASES AND DISORDERS 4th Edition By Alfred P Fishman, University of Pennsylvania, Jack A Elias, Yale School of Medicine, Jay A Fishman, Massachusetts General Hospital, Michael A Grippi, University of Pennsylvania, Robert M Senior, Washington University Medical Center and Allan I Pack, University of Pennsylvania 2008 / 2948 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-145739-2 A Professional Reference Title First published in 1980, Fishman’s Pulmonary Diseases and Disorders is the classic reference through which pulmonary physicians have gained a commanding look at the diagnosis and treatment of pulmonary diseases and disorders. Edited by the world’s foremost authorities, Fishman’s Pulmonary Diseases and Disorders covers exactly what you need to know about lung diseases and their management, including sleep-disordered breathing, COPD, emphysema, and lung cancer, as well as new technological advances and imaging techniques. This unparalleled two-volume resource begins with a compelling overview of up-to-date clinical perspectives, along with the scientific basis of lung function in health and disease. It then provides turnkey information on everything from respiratory disease signs and symptoms, to obstructive lung diseases, occupational and environmental disorders, and specific respiratory conditions such as infectious diseases of the lungs and acute respiratory failure. CONTENTS CONTENTS Chapter I Introduction to Phlebotomy Chapter II Blood, Function, and Circulation Composition Chapter III Equipment for Specimen Collection Chapter IV Performing Venipuncture and Dermal Puncture Chapter V Specimen Handling and Processing Chapter VI Special Phlebotomy Procedures Chapter VII Risk Management Appendices Appendix A Competency Checklists Appendix B Standard Precautions Appendix C Review Body Systems Appendix D Answer Key Glossary Index INVITATION TO PUBLISH McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia PART I. PERSPECTIVES PART II. SCIENTIFIC BASIS OF LUNG FUNCTION IN HEALTH AND DISEASE Section One. Architecture for Normal Lung Function Section Two. Physiological Principles of Normal Lung Function Section Three. The Lungs in Different Physiological States Section Four. Lung Immunology Section Five. Lung Injury and Repair PART III. SYMPTOMS AND SIGNS OF RESPIRATORY DISEASE Section Six. Clinical Approach to the Patient Section Seven. Diagnostic Procedures PART IV. OBSTRUCTIVE LUNG DISEASES Section Eight. Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease Section Nine: Asthma Section Ten:Other Obstructive Disorders PART V. OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL DISORDERS Section Eleven: Occupational and Environmental Disorders Section Twelve. Environmental Disorders PART VI: DRUG-INDUCED LUNG DISEASES PART VII: INTERSTITIAL AND INFLAMMATORY LUNG DISEASES Section Thirteen. Immunologic and Interstitial Diseases Section Fourteen. Depositional and Infiltrative Disorders PART VIII. ALVEOLAR DISEASES Part Nine DISORDERS OF THE PULMONARY CIRCULATION Part Ten DISORDERS OF THE PLEURAL SPACE Part Eleven DISEASES OF THE MEDIASTINUM Part Twelve DISORDERS OF THE CHEST WALL, DIAPHRAGM, AND SPINE Part Thirteen SLEEP AND SLEEP DISORDERS Part Fourteen SURGICAL ASPECTS OF PULMONARY MEDICINE Section 15 Cancer of the Lungs Section 16 Lymphoproliferative Disorders Section 17 General Issues Section 18 Pulmonary Infectious Syndromes Section 19 Special Hosts and Opportunistic Infections Section 20 Specific Microorganisms 238 ALLIED HEALTH Section 21 Mycobacterial Infections Part Sixteen INFECTIOUS DISEASES OF THE LUNGS Part Seventeen ACUTE RESPIRATORY FAILURE Section 22 Lung Failure Section 23 Respiratory Pump Failure Section 24 Management and Therapeutic Interventions 13. Sleep Disorders 14. Lung Under Stress Surgical Technology International Edition PULMONARY PHYSIOLOGY 7th Edition International Edition By Michael G Levitzky, Louisiana State University School of Medicine 2007 / 278 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-143775-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-110468-5 [IE] CLINICIAN’S GUIDE TO SURGICAL CARE A Professional Reference Title Concise, yet complete, Pulmonary Physiology 7e provides students with a solid background in the areas of pulmonary physiology essential for an understanding of clinical medicine. The figures, key concepts, tables, and appendices summarize the material in the book and provide an outstanding review for the USMLE Step 1. CONTENTS Chapter 1. Function and Structure of the Respiratory System Chapter 2. Mechanics of Breathing Chapter 3. Alveolar Ventilation Chapter 4. Blood Flow to the Lung Chapter 5. Ventilation-Perfusion Relationships Chapter 6. Diffusion of Gases Chapter 7. The Transport of Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide in the Blood Chapter 8. The Regulation of Acid-Base Status Chapter 9. The Control of Breathing Chapter 10. Nonrespiratory Functions of the Lung Chapter 11. The Respiratory System Under Stress: Answers to Clinical Problems Appendix International Edition PULMONARY PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 2nd Edition By Juzar Ali, Warren G Summer and Michael G Levitzky of Louisiana State University School of Medicine 2005 / 250 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-142869-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-111685-5 [IE] A Professional Reference Title By John Pryor and Barbaria A Todd of University of Pennsylvania and Michael Dryer, Arcadia University 2008 / 416 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-147897-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-128724-1 [IE] A Professional Reference Title Specifically designed for non-surgeons who are caring for patients with surgical disease, Care of the Surgical Patient utilizes a problembased approach to review the most common complaints that lead to surgical consultations. You will learn what past medical information is important to elicit, what to look for in the physical exam, which diagnostics to order, and how to start immediate treatment while diagnostic procedures continue. CONTENTS I. General Surgical Care 1. A Team Approach to Surgical Disease 2. The Surgical Consult 3. Tubes, Drains and Ostomies 4. General Care of the Surgical Patient 5. Acute Clinical Deterioration II. Surgical problems 6. Acute Abdominal Pain 7. Chronic Abdominal Pain 8. Chest Pain 9. Upper GI Bleeding 10. Lower GI Bleeding 11. Wounds and Wound Care 12. Peripheral Vascular Insufficiency 13. Neurologic Distrubances 14. Masses 15. Anal Pain 16. Vaginal Bleeding & Pelvic Pain 17. Back and Neck Pain 18. Hematuria & Scrotal Pain 19. Obesity 20. Soft Tissue Tumors III. Table of Surgical Procedures CONTENTS Part I. SYMPTOMS/PROBLEM BASED 1. Dyspnea 2. Cough 3. Hemoptysis 4. Noncardiac Chest Pain Part II. DISEASE/DISORDER BASED 5. Obstructive Airway Disease 6. Respiratory Infections 7. Diseases of the Pulmonary Vasculature and Oxygen Transport 8. Parenchymal Lung Disease 9. Occupational/Inhalational/Environmental Disease 10. Respiratory Failure 11. Pleural Disease 12. Pediatric Lung Disorders 239 ALLIED HEALTH 240 FIREFIGHTING ................................................................................................250 Certification Review for Firefighting ..................................................................251 241 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES ACLS/Advanced Cardiac Life Support ............................................................ 250 EMT Basic ........................................................................................................244 EMT Paramedic ............................................................................................... 246 First Responder ............................................................................................... 243 Homeland Security ...........................................................................................243 NEW TITLES FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES 2009 Author ISBN-13 Emergency Medical Technician with Pocket Guide Aehlert 9780073206448 244 The Paramedic Chapleau 9780073520711 246 BLS Review+ DVD Delve Productions Inc 9780073522043 245 The Paramedic Companion: A Case-Based Worktext Hsieh 247 242 9780073202655 Page FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES Emergency Medical Services the different formats. The simulation-based program is sponsored by the Office for Domestic Preparedness and Department of Homeland Security to build a common, minimum level of preparedness among the nation’s first responders and related homeland security professions in fulfilling the National Homeland Security Strategy. Its goal is to support the ability of every jurisdiction in the United States to 1) develop capacity in preventing terrorism, 2) demonstrate coherence with a common standard of practice in prevention of terrorism; and 3) ensure that every jurisdiction has a basic ability to recognize crucial links between prevention, response, and recovery. Homeland Security CONTENTS HOMELAND SECURITY AND EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSE By John Campbell 2008 (March 2007) / 352 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-304437-8 Homeland Security and Emergency Response is a first edition product for McGraw-Hill Higher Education. The book and its ancillaries are being developed and designed to meet the needs of a 16 hour course by the same name. If focuses on providing information on recognizing threats, acting on threats, and providing patient care as well as the communication that must occur when a threat to homeland security occurs. Threats covered include Biological, Nuclear, Chemical, Incendiary and Explosive threats. Additional information on Clandestine Drug Laboratories is also covered. The information is easy-to-read and step-by-step procedures for using related equipment and skills are included. The primary market for this product suite and course include those in emergency medical services (paramedics, EMT-Basics, First Responders), police, and those in fire. Orientation Chapter 1--Introduction Chapter 2 – Recognize Threats Chapter 3 – Share Information Chapter 4--Collaborate Chapter 5 – Manage Risk Chapter 6 – Decide to Intervene Chapter Review Apply What You Have Learned Acknowledgments Works Cited Appendix – San Luis Rey General Index First Responder CONTENTS FIRST RESPONDER WITH SKILLS DVD, BLS DVD & FIRST RESPONDER POCKET GUIDE Introduction Chapter 1. Recognition and Emergency Medical Response Chapter 2. Chemical Agents used in Terrorist Attacks Chapter 3. Biological Weapons I Chapter 4. Biological Weapons II Chapter 5. Radiological or Nuclear Incidents Chapter 6. Incendiaries and Explosives Chapter 7. Clandestine Drug Laboratories Chapter 8. Putting it All Together Practical Skills Skills Chapter 1. Selection and Use of Personal Protective Equipment Skills Chapter 2. Decontamination of Patients Skills Chapter 3. Use of Nerve Agent Antidote Kit (NAAK) Skills Chapter 4. Use of the Anthrax Test Kit Skills Chapter 5. Use of Chemical Agent Detectors Skills Chapter 6. Use of Radiation Detection Equipment Skills Chapter 7. Scenario Review Appendix: Acronyms By National Safety Council NSC 2008 ISBN: 978-0-07-322473-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-352196-1 (Workbook) The new First Responder: Skills in Action program is the most authoritative teaching and learning program available. This new resource gives students the knowledge, skills, and confidence they need to care for victims of sudden illness and accidents. Students will see clearly how to function when no specialized equipment is available and how to perform as key assistants to the emergency medical technician or paramedic who arrives on the scene. CONTENTS CATASTROPHE PREPARATION AND PREVENTION FOR LAW ENFORCEMENT PROFESSIONALS WITH STUDENT CD By Phil Palin, Teleologic Learning Company 2008 (October 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-331774-8 Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law Enforcement is a multi-media product for Homeland Security designed for law enforcement personnel. This spiral-bound worktext contains a link to an online simulation game called “San Luis Rey” and a CD-ROM containing selected government documents and excerpts from McGraw-Hill reference texts. Instructors can use the wealth of material in the CD-ROM to adjust the length of the course. It can be taught in a single day or two-day course or expanded into a full semester. The worktext guides the student through the material and links the learning experience from COURSE CONTENT UNIT ONE: Preparatory 1. Introduction to the EMS Systems 2. The Well-Being of the First Responder 3. Legal and Ethical Issues 4. The Human Body 5. Lifting and Moving Patients UNIT TWO: Patient Assessment 6. Patient Assessment UNIT THREE: Airway 7. Airway and Breathing Emergencies 8. Ventilation Devices and Oxygen UNIT FOUR: Circulation 9. Cardiac Emergencies and CPR 10. Automated External Defibrillation UNIT FIVE: Illness and Injury 11. Medical Emergencies 12. Bleeding and Shock 13. Soft Tissue Injuries 14. Injuries to Muscles and Bones 15. Injuries to the Head and Spine UNIT SIX: Childbirth and Children 16. Childbirth 243 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES 17. Infants and Children UNIT SEVEN: EMS Operations 18. EMS Response and Operations 19. Mass-Casualty Incidents and Triage For the Instructor McGraw-Hill’s Online Learning Center (OLC) – Instructor Site Instructor’s Manual/Lesson Plans – includes end-of-chapter quizzes created exclusively for the instructor and correlation to PowerPoint slides PowerPoint Slides – includes more than 2300 slides Computerized Test Bank – includes more than 1000 Instructor Questions created exclusively for the instructor. EMT Basic CONTENTS NEW EMERGENCY MEDICAL TECHNICIAN WITH POCKET GUIDE By Barbara Aehlert 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-320644-8 http://www.mhhe.com/aehlertemt EMTs are often the first licensed EMS personnel to arrive on the scene of an emergency, size up the situation, and provide emergency care and transportation. They practice in a wide diversity of settings—EMTs are everywhere in our community, many of them performing their EMT duties as well as their regular jobs. These providers demonstrate pride and dedication in their role on the frontline of emergency care in this country. Barbara Aehlert wrote this text with great depth and clarity. Her easy-to-read writing style conveys a wealth of information that is essential for the student to grasp key concepts needed to become a competent EMT. Students who use this book can feel confident that they have learned accurate, up-to-date, and complete information so that they can face emergencies and provide essential emergency care in their practice setting, whatever the emergency is and wherever it occurs. FEATURES EMT Pocket Guide Packaged with every new book, this portable and essential information Emergency Medical Technicians need to provide initial emergency medical care in the field. Divisions Division 1 – Preparatory Chapter 1--Introduction to Emergency Medical Care Chapter 2--The Well-Being of the Emergency Medical Technician Chapter 3--Legal and Ethical Issues Chapter 4--The Human Body Chapter 5--Baseline Vital Signs and SAMPLE History Chapter 6--Lifting and Moving Patients Division 2 – Airway Chapter 7--Airway and Breathing Division 3 – Patient Assessment Chapter 8--Scene Size-Up Chapter 9--Patient Assessment Chapter 10--Communications Chapter 11--Documentation Division 4 – Medical-Behavioral Emergencies and Obstetrics and Gynecology Chapter 12--Pharmacology Chapter 13--Respiratory Emergencies Chapter 14--Cardiovascular Emergencies Chapter 15--Diabetes and Altered Mental Status Chapter 16--Allergic Reactions Chapter 17--Poisoning and Overdose Chapter 18--Environmental Emergencies Chapter 19--Behavioral Emergencies Chapter 20--Obstetrics and Gynecology Division 5 – Trauma Chapter 21--Bleeding and Shock Chapter 22--Soft-Tissue Injuries Chapter 23--Musculoskeletal Care Chapter 24--Injuries to the Head and Spine Chapter 25--Injuries to the Chest, Abdomen, and Genitalia Division 6 – Infants and Children Chapter 26--Infant and Child Emergency Care Division 7 – Operations Chapter 27--Emergency Vehicle Operations Chapter 28--Gaining Access Chapter 29--Special Response Situations Division 8 – Advanced Airway (Elective) Chapter 30--Advanced Airway Techniques Appendices Appendix A-CPR Appendix B--Older Adults Appendix C--IV Monitoring Appendix D--Weapons of Mass Destruction Appendix E--Rural and Frontier EMS Appendix F--National Registry Skills Sheets The text is organized according to the Emergency Medical Technician National Standard Curriculum published by the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) and the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA). Objectives Each chapter includes the knowledge, attitude, and skill objectives established by the DOT curriculum for the subject matter. Think About It Questions related to the case study that readers should think about as they read each chapter or appendix. Key Terms Bolded within the text so that readers can review their meaning within the Glossary. 244 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES International Edition NEW MCGRAW-HILL EMT-BASIC By Peter A DiPrima, Jr and George P Benedetto, Jr 2008 / 400 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-149679-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-127821-8 [IE] BLS REVIEW+ DVD A Professional Reference Title By Delve Productions Inc If you want to succeed on the EMT-Basic exam, there’s no better resource than McGraw-Hill’s EMT-Basic. This indispensable guide helps you think through pre-hospital medicine while covering all the essential information that will give you the edge on exam day. Each chapter begins with a clinical scenario, followed by a bulleted overview of key topics and retention-enhancing Q&As. You’ll even get an online practice exam to simulate the test-taking experience. Look inside, and you’ll see that McGraw-Hill’s EMT-Basic has everything you need to boost your confidence--and your score. 2009 (May 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-352204-3 An EMT student needs a review product that contains both testable certification skills and the ability to test and assess the didactic course material. BLS Review combines both skills and a didactic review of essential EMT material in a DVD and CD-ROM format. It can be used by a student studying for their written and practical exam or by an instructor for classroom teaching of the skills. FEATURES The DVD includes videos which provide review of steps and procedures of testable skill plus a didactic review. Passing the EMT course and National Registry written and practical skills examinations will be stressed. DVD skills performed according to national standards. Well-known and proven development team. CONTENTS Main Headings-Exam Preparation Tips Section 1: Preparatory Section 2: Airway Section 3: Patient Assessment Section 4: Medical Emergencies Section 5: Trauma Section 6: Pediatric Patients Section 7: Operations Section 8: Advanced Airway Answers to Chapter Questions Index CONTENTS 1. Introduction to Emergency Medical Care 2. The Well Being of the EMT 3. Legal and Ethical Issues 4. The Human Body 5. Baseline Vital Signs and SAMPLE History 6. Lifting and Moving Patients 7. Airway and Breathing 8. Scene Size-Up 9. Patient Assessment 10. Communications 11. Documentation 12.Pharmacology 13. Respiratory Emergencies 14. Cardiovascular Emergencies 15. Diabetes and Altered Mental Status 16. Allergic Reactions 17. Poisoning and Overdose 18. Environmental Emergencies 19. Behavioral Emergencies 20. Obstetrics 21. Bleeding and Shock 22. Soft-Tissue Injuries 23. Musculoskeletal Care 24. Injuries to the Head and Spine 25. Injuries to the Chest and Abdomen 26. Infant and Child Emergency Care 27. Emergency Vehicle Operations 28. Gaining Access 29. Special Response Situations 30. Advanced Airway Techniques COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 245 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES EMT Paramedic NEW THE PARAMEDIC By Will Chapleau, Angel Burba, Peter Pons, David Page, Inver Hills Community College 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-352071-1 http://www.mhhe.com/chapleau1e Ever since the first EMT book was written, there have been two philosophies chosen by the authors for the reader: One type is to provide for the minimal required information and to meet only the minimum standards required by the profession. At the other end of the spectrum is the philosophy that is written to be all-inclusive. This will give the student reader (and ultimately patient care provider) the strongest knowledge possible. If you or your family were to become sick or injured in the middle of the night, in the blowing snow or in the cold rain, do you want the EMT taking care of you to be the very best they possibly could be or simply one who has taken the course to “get by”? This book is not a “get by” book. This book is not written by “get by” authors. This book is not edited by “get by” editors. Just open this book and look at the four editors—four better people in the United States to write such a book could not have been chosen. FEATURES In the age of evidence-based medicine, it is important that a text be referenced to the science that supports the knowledge and standards of practice within the field. Throughout the text, when a statement of fact is made, you’ll find the science to support the statement in the notes at the end of each chapter. DOT objectives are listed at points in the text where they are covered. Each chapter begins with Need to Know Objectives. These are things every Paramedic should know that will described in the chapter The experience of this author team bring you “Nice to Know”. These are pieces of information that enhance the material being studied and the patient interactions. 9. Safety and scene size-up Part 2-Foundations of communication and assessment 10. Therapeutic communications and history taking 11. The normal physical examination Part 3-Foundations of critical care: caring for the sick patient 12. Airway management, ventilation, and oxygenation 13. Shock overview 14. Patient assessment 15. Pharmacology 16. Medication administration and iv 17. Documentation & communication Part 4-Trauma 18. Mechanism of injury 19. Hemostasis and hermorrhagic shock 20. Head, face, and neck trauma 21. Thoracic trauma 22. Abdominal trauma 23. Spinal trauma 24. Skeletal trauma 25. Soft tissue and muscle trauma 26. Burn trauma 27. Trauma patients and trauma systems Part 5-Medical Issues 28. Pulmonary 29. Cardiology 30. Neurology 31. Endocrinology, electrolytes, and acid/base 32. Allergies and anaphylaxis 33. Infectious and communicable diseases 34. Gastroenterology 35. Toxicology 36. Urology 37. Hematology 38. Environmental conditions 39. Eyes, ears, nose, and throat 40. Behavioral and psychiatric disorders 41. Obstetrics and gynecology Part 6-Special Populations 42. Neonatology 43. Pediatric patients 44. Geriatric patients 45. The abused and neglected 46. Patients with special challenges 47. Patients with chronic illnesses 48. Patients from diverse cultures Part 7-Operations 49. Ambulance operations 50. Medical incident command 51. Rescue awareness 52. Teamwork and operational interface 53. Hazardous materials incidents 54. Special events and mass gatherings 55. Responding to wmd events Glossary / Index “Connection Boxes” throughout the text direct the reader to related information in other chapters. When applicable, the reader will find do/ask tables at the beginning of a chapter. These will guide readers through actions and questions appropriate to the patients the chapter will describe. CONTENTS Part 1-Foundations 1. The ems profession 2. The well-being of the paramedic 3. Professional ethics 4. Legal issues 5. Clinical decision making 6. Medical terminology 7. Anatomy overview 8. Physiology overview 246 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES NEW THE PARAMEDIC COMPANION: A CASE-BASED WORKTEXT By Arthur Hsieh and Kevin Boone 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-320265-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-320532-8 (With Student CD) Website: http://www.mhhe.com/chapleau1e The Paramedic Manual is not a traditional workbook in that it goes beyond the simple “review and test” approach of most workbooks. Instead, this manual supports the students’ exploration of the art and science of prehospital medicine by providing a rich palette of learning tools, images, and even video to better explain concepts and techniques. The Paramedic Manual speaks clearly and directly to the paramedic student. The material in each chapter revolves around “Need To Know” (NTK) objectives; those that the authors of both the Textbook and Manual felt were absolutely necessary for the paramedic student to master before moving on to the next section or chapter. All features in the Manual were designed to ensure that learners can successfully master these NTK objectives. Multimedia tools on the accompanying DVD create an educational space that is rich with information. FEATURES Skills--This section presents Step-by-Steps, illustrated instructions for performing key skills. Accompany skill sheets for these and additional skills are provided in the back of the book. Ample vignettes and progressive case studies, followed by critical thinking questions (answers at the end of each chapter), effectively review basic concepts, encourage students to build on and apply new information, and require the learner integrate what he or she has been learning into real-world practice. Problem-Based Learning (PBL) cases – These unique cases are designed to be challenging and open-ended--just like many EMS patients. The learner must work his or her way through the case, using not just the manual and textbook, but often other resources that must be found and researched. In the process, the student will learn about the process of learning itself. Activities--Self-directed, student-centered activities provide alternative methods for mastering the chapters’ main concepts. Many are designed for use with partners and small groups. The student CD that accompanies the manual provides skills – Step-by-Steps in a PowerPoint format that show skills being correctly performed using Quicktime video. Text “bubbles” and arrows point to key aspects of skill performance CONTENTS Part 1-Foundations Chapter 1-the ems profession Chapter 2-The well-being of the paramedic Chapter 3-Professional ethics Chapter 4-Legal issues Chapter 5-Clinical decision making Chapter 6-Medical terminology Chapter 7-Anatomy overview Chapter 8-Physiology overview Chapter 9-Safety and scene size-up Part 1 problem-based learning case Part 2-Foundations of communication and assessment Chapter 10-Therapeutic communications and history taking Chapter 11-The normal physical examination Chapter 12-Airway management, ventilation, and oxygenation Part 2 problem-based learning case Part 3-Foundations of critical care: caring for the sick patient Chapter 13-Shock overview Chapter 14-Patient assessment Chapter 15-Pharmacology Chapter 16-Medication administration and iv Chapter 17-Documentation Part 3 Problem-based learning case Part 4-Trauma Chapter 18-Mechanism of injury Chapter 19-hemorrhage and hemorrhagic shock Chapter 20-Head, face, and neck trauma Chapter 21-Thoracic trauma Chapter 22-Abdominal trauma Chapter 23-Spinal trauma Chapter 24-Skeletal trauma Chapter 25-Soft tissue and muscle trauma Chapter 26-Burn trauma Chapter 27-Trauma patients and trauma systems Part 4 Problem-based learning case Part 5-Medical Chapter 28-Pulmonary Chapter 29-Cardiology Chapter 30-Neurology Chapter 31-Endocrinology Chapter 32-Allergies and anaphylaxis Chapter 33-Infectious and communicable diseases Chapter 34-Gastroenterology Chapter 35-Toxicology Chapter 36-Urology Chapter 37-Hematology Chapter 38-Environmental conditions Chapter 39-Eyes, ears, nose, and throat Chapter 40-Behavioral and psychiatric disorders Chapter 41-Obstetrics/gynecology Part 5 Problem-based learning case Part 6-Special populations Chapter 42-Neonatology Chapter 43-Pediatric patients Chapter 44-Geriatric patients Chapter 45-The abused and neglected Chapter 46-Patients with special challenges Chapter 47-Patients with chronic illnesses Chapter 48-Patients from diverse cultures Part 6 Problem-based learning case Part 7-Operations Chapter 49-Ambulance operations Chapter 50-Medical incident command Chapter 51-Rescue awareness Chapter 52-Teamwork and operational interface Chapter 53-Hazardous materials incidents Chapter 54-Special events and mass gatherings Chapter 55-Responding to the wmd events Chapter 56-Military paramedicine Part 7 Problem-based learning case Appendices Skill sheets Answers and rationale Answers to problem-based learning cases Resources 247 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES HOMELAND SECURITY AND EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSE NEW By John Campbell 2008 (March 2007) / 352 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-304437-8 Homeland Security and Emergency Response is a first edition product for McGraw-Hill Higher Education. The book and its ancillaries are being developed and designed to meet the needs of a 16 hour course by the same name. If focuses on providing information on recognizing threats, acting on threats, and providing patient care as well as the communication that must occur when a threat to homeland security occurs. Threats covered include Biological, Nuclear, Chemical, Incendiary and Explosive threats. Additional information on Clandestine Drug Laboratories is also covered. The information is easy-to-read and step-by-step procedures for using related equipment and skills are included. The primary market for this product suite and course include those in emergency medical services (paramedics, EMT-Basics, First Responders), police, and those in fire. CONTENTS 2009 (March 2009) / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-160280-8 A Professional Reference Title CONTENTS PARAMEDIC REVIEW DVD AND CD-ROM By Delve Productions, Inc 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-322069-7 A paramedic student needs a review product that contains both all testable certification skills and the ability to test and assess the didactic course material. Paramedic Plus Review combines both skills (all ALS skills) and a didactic review of all paramedic material in a DVD and CD-ROM format. It can be used by a student studying for their written and practical exam or by an instructor for classroom teaching of the skills. Well-Being Lifting and Moving Patients Airway Patient Assessment Bleeding and Soft Tissue Injuries Injuries to Muscles and Bones Child Birth Neonatology Infants and Children Geriatrics Abuse & Assault Pharmacology Venous Access/Meds Advanced Airway Techniques EMS Operations Assessment Based Management By Leonard G Gomella, Thomas Jefferson University, Steven A Haist, University of Kentucky and Aimee G Adams Proving that sometimes less can deliver more, this super-concise guide covers more than 1000 commonly used medications. Organized alphabetically by generic drug name, this trusted reference distills need-to-know information such as selection and administration, mechanisms of action, dosage, cautions, contraindications, and side effects. Introduction Chapter 1. Recognition and Emergency Medical Response Chapter 2. Chemical Agents used in Terrorist Attacks Chapter 3. Biological Weapons I Chapter 4. Biological Weapons II Chapter 5. Radiological or Nuclear Incidents Chapter 6. Incendiaries and Explosives Chapter 7. Clandestine Drug Laboratories Chapter 8. Putting it All Together Practical Skills Skills Chapter 1. Selection and Use of Personal Protective Equipment Skills Chapter 2. Decontamination of Patients Skills Chapter 3. Use of Nerve Agent Antidote Kit (NAAK) Skills Chapter 4. Use of the Anthrax Test Kit Skills Chapter 5. Use of Chemical Agent Detectors Skills Chapter 6. Use of Radiation Detection Equipment Skills Chapter 7. Scenario Review Appendix: Acronyms CONTENTS CLINICIAN’S POCKET DRUG REFERENCE Editors Consulting Editors Contributors Preface Medication key Appreviations Allergy Antidotes Antifungals Antiretrivirals Antineoplastic Agents Cardiovascular (CV) Agents Alpha-Adrenergic Blockers Central Nervous Systems Agents Vasodilators Dermatologic Agents Dietary Supplements Ear (Otic) Agents Endocrine System Agents Eye (Ophthalmic) Agents Gastrointestinal Agents Hematologic Agents Immune System Agents Musculoskeletal Agents OB/GYN Agents Pain Medications Respiratory Agents Urinary/Genitourinary Agents Wound Care Miscellaneous Therapeutic Agents Natural and Herbal Agents Generic and Selected Brand Name Drug Data Natural and Herbal Agents Index 248 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES MCGRAW-HILL’S EMT-PARAMEDIC CONTENTS By Peter A DiPrima Jr and George P Benedetto Jr 2008 / 848 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-149680-3 A Professional Reference Title If you want to score high on the EMT-Paramedic exam, you’ll want McGraw-Hill’s EMT-Paramedic. This essential guide helps you think through pre-hospital medicine while covering the most commonly tested information. Each chapter begins with a clinical scenario, followed by a bulleted overview of key topics. You’ll also find a 180question practice exam included in the book as well as online to simulate the test-taking experience. More than any other guide, McGraw-Hill’s EMT-Paramedic boosts your confidence--and your chances for success. CONTENTS Main Headings only-Section 1: Preparatory Section 2: Airway Section 3: Patient Assessment Section 4: Trauma Section 5: Medical Emergencies Section 6: Special Considerations Section 7: Operations Answers to Chapter Questions Practice Exam Practice Exam Questions Index International Edition LANGE Q&A EMT-PARAMEDIC 2nd Edition By Richard E J Westfal, NOrwalk Hospital and Gregory Santa Maria 2007 (October 2006) / 336 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-147014-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-126073-2 [IE] A Professional Reference Title The only EMT(P) review with questions + answers citing major textbooks + a new e CD-ROM! The ultimate, all-in-one review for the EMT-Paramedic Exam! Lange Q&A: EMT-Paramdeic (P) Self Assessment and Review offers test-acing preparation for anyone taking the national registry Paramedic Exam and state exams. You’ll be ready for any exam-related topic with this powerful, just-in-time resource, where you’ll find: Preface SECTION I--Preparatory Emergency Medical Services (EMS) Systems Roles and Responsibilities of the Paramedic Medical/Legal Issues Ethics in Advanced Prehospital Care Pharmacology Venous Access and Medication Administration SECTION II--Airway Management and Ventilation Airway and Ventilation SECTION III--Patient Assessment Patient Assessment: History Patient Assessment: Physical Exam Techniques Patient Assessment: Patient Assessment in the Field Patient Assessment: Communications Patient Assessment: Documentation SECTION IV--Patient Presentations: Trauma Trauma and Trauma Systems SECTION V--Patient Presentations: Medical Medical Pulmonary Emergencies Medical Cardiology Medical Neurology Endocrinology Allergies and Anaphylaxis Gastroenterology Renal and Urology Toxicology Hematology Enviromental Emergencies Infectious and Communicable Diseases Behavioral and Psychiatric Disorders Gynecology Obstetrics SECTION VI--Special Considerations Neonatology Pediatrics Geriatrics Abuse and Assault Acute Interventions for Chronic Care Patients SECTION VII--Operations Ambulance Operations Medical Incident Command Rescue Awareness Hazardous Materials Incidents SECTION VIII--CBRNE Chemical Agents and Dissemination Biological Agents Radiological and Nuclear Incidents Explosive and Incendiary Devices Bibliography Exam-type questions and detailed answers with explanations referenced to all major textbooks-plus a new CD-ROM Mastery-building coverage of all the content areas that reflect today’s EMT(P) practice, from pharmacology to patient assessment A 10% increase in the total number of questions-all of which are selected and formatted to approximate the real exam INVITATION TO PUBLISH NEW section on terrorism (CBRNE) that shows how to respond to when people are affected by chemical and, biological agents, radiological and nuclear materials , and explosive devices McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] NEW coverage of 12-Lead EKGs, pulse oximetry, pulmonary inhalers (Atrovent, steroid, Combivent), and pediatric end tidal CO2 detectors NEW coverage of drugs, including Amiodarone Expanded coverage of cardiac emergencies, transcutaneous pacemakers, and trauma Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia 249 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES Firefighting ACLS/Advanced Cardiac Life Support SAFE FIREFIGHTING LEVELS I & II By Steve Kidd and John Czajkowski of Delve Productions Inc, Garry Briese, International Association of Fire Chiefs 2008 (May 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-335316-6 (with Student DVD’s & iPod DVD) ACLS BASICS AND MORE WITH STUDENT CD & DVD By Kim McKenna 2008 (May 2007) / 224 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-301971-0 http://www.mhhe.com/safefirefighter ACLS-Basics and More contains the “Cliff Notes” of the ACLS Provider Course, as well as essential info from the advanced resuscitation course. The textbook provide 60 illustrations, including approximately 20 rhythm strips for essential review. It also features 19 essential treatment algorithms. Appendices include a comprehensive medications table and a listing of common ACLS abbreviations. For each medication within the appendix, the following information is provided: action, uses, adult dose, common side-effects, and notes. In addition, within the medications table, ACLS medications and medication details for the experienced provider are italicized. The textbook is packaged with a DVD that provides the most common scenarios the end-user may encounter in the field. It is also packaged with a CD that contains multiple-choice, self-test questions with answer key and rationales. Authored by a knowledgeable ACLS provider and DVD experts. The writers of Safe Firefighting, Steve Kidd, John Czajkowski,and Garry Briese have decades of dirty, hands-on fire and rescue experience. They understood the need for a “new approach” in training firefighters, one way off the “traditional” scale, and they did something about it. Why this book? Because this book is different. It helps us focus on what really matters—and what is just not that important. Make no mistake about it—this book was written 100% outside the box. This is what matters: Identifying the fire “problem” on the scene, getting water on the fire, venting, staffing, protecting ourselves first, arriving in one piece, having applicable building construction info, understanding and applying “go in/don’t go in,” and having competent command officers. What doesn’t matter: How a smoke detector works and what the inside of a hydrant looks like. This can be important info and may be worthwhile to know, but this info won’t save your life as a firefighter. CONTENTS CONTENTS Section I – Introduction to ACLS hapter 1 – Passing ACLS Chapter 2 – ACLS Fundamentals Chapter 3 – Respiratory Distress and Arrest Chapter 4 – Public Access Defibrillation Chapter 5 – ECG Rhythms and ACLS Algorithms Chapter 6 – Acute Coronary Syndromes Chapter 7 – Acute Ischemic Stroke Section II – ACLS for Experienced Providers Chapter 8 – Advanced Acute Coronary Syndromes Chapter 9 – Toxicology in ACLS Chapter 10 – Special Resuscitation Situations Appendices Appendix A: ACLS Medication Table Appendix B: Common ACLS Abbreviations Safe Firefighting, Part 1 Level 1 First Things First Chapter 1: Welcome to the Fire Service Chapter 2: Basic First Aid and CPR Chapter 3: Protective Equipment Chapter 4: Preconnected Attack Lines Chapter 5: Response Safety and Vehicle Crashes Chapter 6: Extinguishing Small Fires Chapter 7: Ground Cover Fires Chapter 8: Passenger Vehicle Fires Chapter 9: Supply Hose Lines Chapter 10: Large Attack Lines Chapter 11: Single-Family-Dwelling Fires Safe Firefighting, Part Inside Operations Chapter 12: The Level 1 Firefighter Chapter 13: Response Readiness Chapter 14: Ropes and Knots for the Fire Service Chapter 15: Forcible Entry and Exit Chapter 16: Ladders Chapter 17: Building Construction Chapter 18: Ventilation and Fire Behavior Chapter 19: Safety and Survival for Interior Firefighters Chapter 20: Residential Structure Fires Chapter 21: Large Buildings Chapter 22: Preplanning and Fire Prevention Safe Firefighting, Part 3: Level 2 Leading the Team Chapter 23: The Team Leader Chapter 24: Interior Fire Attack Chapter 25: Foam Firefighting Chapter 26: Flammable Gas Firefighting Chapter 27: Rescue Awareness Chapter 28: Post-Fire Activities COMPLIMENTARY COPIES Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia 250 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES CATASTROPHE PREPARATION & PREVENTION FOR FIRE SERVICE PROFESSIONALS WITH STUDENT DVD By Phil Palin, Teleologic Learning Company 2008 (October 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-724055-4 Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Fire Service Professionals is a multi-media product for Homeland Security designed for fire service personnel. It features a full color, 160 page, spiral-bound worktext that contains a link to an online simulation game called “San Luis Rey” and a CD-ROM containing selected government documents and excerpts from McGraw-Hill texts. Instructors can use the wealth of material in the CD-ROM to adjust the length of the course. It can be taught in a single day or two-day course or expanded into a full semester. The worktext guides the student through the material and links the learning experience from the different formats. During the course, learners participate in an online simulation game where they will have to detect and prevent a terrorist attack. Failure has dire consequences for them and the fictional jurisdiction of San Luis Rey. The game challenges learners to move beyond response-oriented training and think about what it takes to prevent a terrorist attack. Primary Mode: Protect, Deter, and Preempt Secondary Mode: Protect, Deter, and Preempt Tertiary Mode: Protect, Deter, and Preempt Making an Effective Decision Planning and Resourcing Preparing for Catastrophe Chapter Review Apply What You Have Learned Acknowledgements Works Cited Appendix San Luis Rey General Index Certification Review for Firefighting CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Catastrophe Risk Management Accidental and Intentional Threats Practicing Prevention Intentional Threats: Challenging our Imagination Chapter 2 Recognize Threats Who and/or What? Your Local History Patterns of Terrorist Behavior Weapons of Catastrophe Vulnerability Consequences Fear as a Threat Amplifier Chapter Review Apply What You Have Learned Chapter 3 Share Information Strategic Intelligence vs. Tactical Intelligence The Intelligence Process Choose Intelligence Targets Collecting Data and Information Organize and Analyze Data and Information Produce Intelligence Products Consume Intelligence Products Chapter Review Apply What You Have Learned Chapter 4 Collaborate Defining Collaboration Collaboration Process Designing a Collaborative Network Collaboration and Sharing Information Collaboration and Identifying Targets Regional Collaboration Collaborative Agreements Chapter Review Chapter 5 Manage Risk Current Priorities Apply a Risk Formula SARA and RISK Management Choosing Among Risks Scenario-Based Risk Management A Collaborative Choice TARA: Four Responses to Risk Continually Assess Your Choice Chapter Review Apply What You Have Learned Chapter 6 Decide to Intervene The Prevention Cube: What and When? MCGRAW-HILL’S FIREFIGHTING EXAMS By Ronald R Spadafora 2008 / 418 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-147769-7 A Professional Reference Title Chief Ronald Spadafora of the New York City Fire Department has created this test prep guide and career handbook to give you the very latest information about firefighter testing and employment. With three decades of experience in the fire service, Chief Spadafora is uniquely qualified to lead you through every step of the recruiting process. This all-in-one resource will give you the edge to do your best on the day of the exam and throughout your firefighting career. CONTENTS Part I: Being and Becoming a Firefighter Chapter 1. Being a Firefighter Chapter 2. Becoming a Firefighter Part II: Preparing for the Oral Interview and Psychological and Physical Ability Tests Chapter 3. Preparing for the Oral Interview Chapter 4. The Psychological Test Chapter 5. Preparing for the Physical Ability Test Part III: Review for the Written Examination Chapter 6. Reading Comprehension Chapter 7. Mathematics Chapter 8. Fire Science Basics Chapter 9. Principles of Mechanics Chapter 10. Tools of the Trade Chapter 11. Memory and Visualization Chapter 12. On-the-Job Scenarios Chapter 13. Fire History Chronology Chapter 14. Emergency Medical Care Part IV: Practice Examinations Practice Exam I Practice Exam II Practice Exam III Practice Exam IV Practice Exam V Appendix A: Informational Resources for Careers in Firefighting Appendix B: Glossary of Firefighting Terms 251 FIRE & EMERGENCY SERVICES 252 Dushkin/McGraw-Hill Titles Geography ISBN AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION YEAR 978-0-07-812781-6 Griffiths Annual Editions: Developing World 10/11, 20e 2010 978-0-07-339782-5 Griffiths Annual Editions: Developing World 09/10, 19e 2009 978-0-07-339756-6 Griffiths Annual Editions: Developing World 08/09, 18e 2008 978-0-07-351551-9 Pitz Annual Editions: Geography, 23e 2010 978-0-07-351546-5 Pitzl Annual Editions: Geography, 22e 2008 978-0-07-812770-0 Jackson Annual Editions: Global Issues 09/10, 25e 2010 978-0-07-339763-4 Jackson Annual Editions: Global Issues 08/09, 24e 2009 978-0-07-812760-1 Purkitt Annual Editions: World Politics 09/10, 30e 2010 978-0-07-339770-2 Purkitt Annual Editions: World Politics 08/09, 29e 2009 978-0-07-337977-7 Edge Global Studies: Africa, 12e 2009 978-0-07-337987-6 Zhu Global Studies: China, 13e 2010 978-0-07-337991-3 Ogden Global Studies: China, 12e 2008 978-0-07-337976-0 Frankland Global Studies: Europe, 10e 2009 978-0-07-337986-9 Norton Global Studies: India and South Asia, 9e 2010 978-0-07-337971-5 Norton Global Studies: India and South Asia, 8e 2008 978-0-07-337985-2 Collinwood Global Studies: Japan and the Pacific Rim, 10e 2010 978-0-07-337990-6 Collinwood Global Studies: Japan and the Pacific Rim, 9e 2008 978-0-07-337982-1 Goodwin Global Studies: Latin America, 13e 2009 978-0-07-340406-6 Goodwin Global Studies: Latin America, 12e 2007 978-0-07-337978-4 Spencer Global Studies: Middle East, 12e 2009 978-0-07-340147-8 Goldman Global Studies: Russia, The Eurasian Republics, and the Central/Eastern Europe, 12e 2010 978-0-07-340408-0 Tessema Global Studies: The World at a Glance 2006 978-0-07-352760-4 Allen Student Atlas: World Geography, 6e 2010 978-0-07-352757-4 Allen Student Atlas: World Geography, 5e 2008 978-0-07-337972-2 Allen Student Atlas: World Politics, 8e 2008 978-0-07-351518-2 Moseley Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial African Issues, 3e 2009 978-0-07-351534-2 Harf Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Global Issues, 5e 2009 978-0-07-812751-9 978-0-07-351525-0 Rourke Rourke Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Issues in World Politics, 14e Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Issues in World Politics, Expanded, 13e 2010 2009 978-0-07-351538-0 DeGrave Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Issues on Latin American Issues, 2e 2010 978-0-07-351504-5 DeGrave Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Issues on Latin American Issues 2007 253 Dushkin/McGraw-Hill Titles Environmental Science & Ecology / Geology ISBN AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION YEAR 978-0-07-351549-6 Sharp Annual Editions: Environment 09/10, 28e 2010 978-0-07-351548-9 Sharp Annual Editions: Environment 08/09, 27e 2009 978-0-07-352758-1 Easton Classic Edition Sources: Environmental Studies, 3e 2009 978-0-697-36520-0 Allen Student Atlas: Environmental Issues 1997 978-0-07-351445-1 Easton Taking Sides: Environmental Issues, Expanded, 13e 2010 978-0-07-351444-4 Easton Taking Sides: Environmental Issues, 13e 2009 Nutrition ISBN AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION YEAR 978-0-07-351550-2 Klimis-Zacas Annual Editions: Nutrition 09/10, 21e 2010 978-0-07-351547-2 Klimis-Zacas Annual Editions: Nutrition 08/09, 20e 2009 978-0-07-292211-0 Nestle-Dixon Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Issues in Food and Nutrition 2004 254 TITLE INDEX 3,000 Solved Problems in Chemistry Goldberg 140 3,000 Solved Problems in Organic Chemistry Meislich 154 3,000 Solved Problems in Physics Halpern 128 AACN Essentials of Progressive Care Nursing Chulay 193 ACLS Basics and More with Student CD & DVD McKenna 250 ACTIVSim: Medical Assisting Clinical Simulator McGraw-Hill 208,232 Administering Medications, 6e Gauwitz 210,235 Administrative Procedures for Medical Assisting for Student CD, 3e Booth 202 Aids Update 2008, 17e Stine 85 Aids Update 2009, 18e Stine 85 Analysis of Biological Development, 2e Kalthoff 86 Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Essentials Version, 5e Gunstream 23 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD-ROM (Allied Health Version) Medical College 37,197,229,232 Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Version 2.0 Online Medical College 37,45,49 Anatomy & Physiology with Integrated Study Guide, 4e Gunstream 21 Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 5e Saladin 26 Anatomy and Physiology Revealed Version 2.0 CD Medical College Anatomy and Physiology, 8e Seeley Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathophysiology for Allied Health, 2e Booth Animal Behavior, 5e Drickamer 107 Animal Diversity, 5e Hickman 112 Animal Sciences: The Biology, Care, and Production of Domestic Animals, 4e Campbell 17 Astronomy: Journey to the Cosmic Frontier, with Starry Night Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 5e Arny 136 Atlas of Skeletal Muscles, 6e Stone 43 Atlas to Human Anatomy (An) Strete 39 Basic Concepts in Biochemistry: A Student’s Survival Guide, 2e Gilbert 152 Basic Electronics for Scientists, 5e Brophy 131 Basic Histology: Text & Atlas, 11e Junqueira A 38,45,49 28 196,203,211,219 B 50 Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Complete Version, 11e Brown 78 Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 11e Brown 80 Biochemistry: An Introduction, 3e McKee 151 Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e Dolphin 67 Biology Brooker 66 Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e Vodopich 68 Biology of the Invertebrates, 6e Pechenik 109 Biology, 10e Mader 255 63 TITLE INDEX Biology, 8e Raven 67 Biology: Concepts and Investigations Hoefnagels 58 Biology: Dimensions of Life Presson 61 Biotechnology Demystified Walker 90 Bloodborne and Airborne Pathogens, 2e NSC BLS Review+ DVD Delve Productions Bringing Fossils to Life: An Introduction to Paleobiology, 2e Prothero 181 Building a Healthy Business: For Massage and Alternative Healthcare Practices Saeger 199 Cartography: Thematic Map Design, 6e Dent 172 Case Studies for the Medical Office: Capstone Billing Simulation, 5e Sanderson Catastrophe Preparation & Prevention for Fire Service Professionals with Student DVD Palin 251 Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law Enforcement Professionals with Student CD Palin 243 Changing Landscapes of Singapore Teo 171 Chemistry Burdge 146 Chemistry in Context, 6e American Chemical Soc. 139 Chemistry, 10e Chang 145 Chemistry, Cell Biology and Genetics, Volume 1 Brooker 64 Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 5e Silberberg 148 Chemskill Builder Online: Version 2, 2e Spain 151 Child and Infant CPR Skills Card NSC 233 Clinical Massage Therapy: Assessment and Treatment of Orthopedic Conditions Jurch 196,200 Clinical Procedures for Medical Assisting with Student CD, 3e Booth 204 Clinician’s Guide to Surgical Guide Pryor 239 Clinician’s Pocket Drug Reference Gomella 248 Coding Review for National Certification: Passing the CPC and CCS-P Exams Harmon 210 College Physics, 3e Giambattista 124 Comparative Anatomy of the Vertebrates, 9e Kent 112 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy: A Laboratory Dissection Guide, 5e Kardong 110 Complete Diagnosis Coding Book (The) Safian 212 Computers in the Medical Office, 6e Sanderson 191 Concepts in Biology, 13e Enger 57 Concepts of Biology Mader 59 Concepts of Modern Physics, 6e Beiser 130 Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry, 2e (A) Bauer 140 Contemporary College Physics: 2001 Update, 3e Jones 127 Contemporary Nutrition, 7e Wardlaw 95 Contemporary Nutrition: A Functional Approach Wardlaw 96 Contemporary World Regional Geography, 3e Bradshaw 173 Cooperative Chemistry Lab Manual, 4e Cooper 150 189 189,245 C 256 190,211 TITLE INDEX CPR & AED Skills Card NSC Certification Edition, 2e NSC 192 CPR & AED Skills Refresher Card NSC 192 CPR & AED, 3e NSC 191 Bevington 132 Earth Science: Understanding Environmental Systems Spencer 177 Ecology Lab Manual Vodopich 165 Ecology: Concepts and Applications, 5e Molles 164 Economic Botany, 3e Simpson 106 Electricity and Magnetism: Berkeley Physics Course, Volume II, 2e Berkeley Physics 131 Electrocardiography for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e Booth 193,209 Electrocardiography in Ten Days, 2e Ferry 194 Electronic Health Records Hamilton 194 Emergency Medical Technician with Pocket Guide Aehlert 244 Engineering Physics Rajendran 128 Environmental Geology, 8e Montgomery 178 Environmental Science Kaufmann 163 Environmental Science, 12e Enger 161 Environmental Science: A Global Concern, 10e Cunningham 162 Essentials of Biology, 2e Mader 56 Essentials of Nursing Informatics, 4e Saba 231 Essentials of the Living World, 2e Johnson Essentials of World Regional Geography Bradshaw 173 Evolution of the Earth, 7e Prothero 179 Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 8e Garland 156 Explorations: An Introduction to Astronomy, with Starry Night Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 5e Arny 135 Exploring Geology Reynolds 182 Exploring the World Ocean Chamberlin 180 D Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical Sciences, 3e E 257 60 TITLE INDEX F Farm Management, 6e Kay 15, 16 First Aid Skills Card NSC 195 First Aid with Pocket Guide, Updated Edition, 3e NSC 195 First Responder with Skills DVD, BLS DVD & First Responder Pocket Guide NSC 243 Fishman’s Pulmonary Diseases and Disorders, 4e Fishman 238 Fluids and Electrolytes Demystified Johnson 217 Food Nutrition Guide/Food Composition Table McGraw-Hill 99 Foundations in Microbiology, 7e Talaro 76 Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 7e Talaro 77 Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry Denniston 143 Foundations of Parasitology, 8e Roberts 108 From Patient to Payment: Insurance Procedures for the Medical Office with Student Data CD, 5e Newby 214 Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e Goldberg 141 Fundamentals of Human Physiology Fox Fundamentals of Oceanography, 5e Sverdrup 181 Fundamentals of Optics, 4e Jenkins 133 Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics Reif 132 General Chemistry: The Essential Concepts, 5e Chang 148 General Zoology Laboratory Manual, 15e Lytle 115 General, Organic & Biochemistry, 6e Denniston 143 General, Organic & Biological Chemistry Smith 142 Genetics: Analysis and Principles, 3e Brooker 87 Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e Hartwell 89 GIS Applications in Forestry and Natural Resources Bettinger 15 Global Warming and Climate Change Demystified Silver 163 Good Earth: Introduction to Earth Sciences (The) McConnell 177 46 G H HIPAA for Allied Health Careers Newby Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 10e Shier 22 Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 12e Shier 27 Homeland Security and Emergency Medical Response Campbell 243,248 Hospital Billing, 2e Magovern 212 How to solve Word Problems in Chemistry Goldberg 140 Human Anatomy Lab Manual to accompany Human Anatomy by McKinley Eckel 43 Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e Wise 44 Human Anatomy, 2e McKinley 40 258 209,214,228 TITLE INDEX Human Anatomy, 2e Saladin 41 Human Anatomy, 6e Van De Graaff 41 Human Biology, 11e Mader 69 Human Genetics, 8e Lewis 90 Human Geography, 10e Fellmann Human Physiology, 11e Fox Hurst Reviews: NCLEX-PN Review Hurst 227 Hurst Reviews: NCLEX-RN Review Hurst 227 Inquiry into Life, 12e Mader 60 Integrated Principles of Zoology, 14e Hickman 113 Integrated Science, 4e Tillery 122 Intravenous Therapy for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM Booth 209 Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e Kardong 165 Introduction to Genetics Hyde Introduction to Geographic Information Systems with Data Files CD-ROM, 5e Chang 169 Introduction to Geography, 12e Getis 170 Introduction to the Worlds Ocean, 10e Sverdrup 180 Introductory Plant Biology, 11e Stern 105 IV Therapy Demystified Cheever 192 170 46 I 88 L Lab Manual Human Biology, 11e Mader 69 Lab Manual to accompany Biology, 10e Mader 65 Lab Manual to accompany Concepts of Biology Mader 62 Lab Manual to accompany Essentials of Biology, 2e Mader 61 Lab Manual to accompany Integrated Science, 4e Tillery 123 Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 7e Jones 183 Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 8e Tillery 121 Lab Manual to accompany Seeley’s Principles of Anatomy & Physiology Wise 35 Laboratory Applications in Microbiology: A Case Study Approach Chess 81 Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e Eder 42 Laboratory Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical and Experimental Approach with Ph.I.L.S 3.0, 2e Lutterschmidt 48 Laboratory Exercises in Organismal and Molecular Microbiology Alexander 84 Laboratory for General, Organic & Biochemistry, 6e (A) Henrickson 144 Laboratory Guide to accompany Human Physiology, 13e Fox 47 Laboratory Manual and Workbook in Microbiology: Applications to Patient Care, 9e Morello 84 Laboratory Manual Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 7e Patton 24 Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Cat Version with PhILS 3.0 CD Martin 28 259 TITLE INDEX Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Main Version with PhILS 3.0 CD Martin 31 Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Pig Version with PhILS 3.0 CD Martin 30 Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 14e Zumberge Laboratory Manual Hole’s Human A&P (Cat), 12e Martin 32 Laboratory Manual Hole’s Human A&P: Fetal Pig, 12e Martin 33 Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 5e Wise 34 Laboratory Manual to accompany Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemical to Society, 6e American Chemical Soc. Laboratory Manual to accompany Concepts in Biology, 13e Enger 62 Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 10e Martin 25 Laboratory Manual to accompany Human Biology, 10e Mader 70 Laboratory Manual to accompany Inquiry into Life, 12e Mader 63 Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory Plant Biology, 11e Stern 106 Laboratory Manual to accompany Seeley’s Anatomy and Physiology, 8e Wise 36 Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 5e Hickman 114 Laboratory Studies in Earth History, 9e Levin 179 Laboratory Studies in Integrated Principles of Zoology, 14e Hickman 115 Lange Q&A EMT-Paramedic, 2e Westfal 249 Law & Ethics for Medical Careers, 5e Judson 215 Life, 6e Lewis 64 Living World, 6e (The) Johnson 55 Mader’s Understanding Human Anatomy & Physiology, 6e Longenbaker 23 Map Use and Analysis, 4e Campbell 172 Marine Biology, 7e Castro 107 Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and NCETM with Student CD-ROM Abbott 198 Mastering ArcGIS with CD Videoclips, 4e Price 169 Math & Dosage Calculations for Health Careers, 3e Booth 201 Math for the Pharmacy Technician Egler 236 McGraw-Hill EMT-Basic DiPrima 245 McGraw-Hill Learnsmart: Medical Terminology McGraw-Hill McGraw-Hill Manual of Laboratory and Diagnostic Tests Wilson McGraw-Hill Medical Dictionary for Allied Health Breskin McGraw-Hill Review for the NCLEX-RN Review Monahan 228 McGraw-Hill’s EMT-Paramedic DiPrima 249 McGraw-Hill’s Firefighting Exams Spadafora 251 McGraw-Hill’s The New MCAT with CD-ROM Hademenos 155 Medical Assisting Review: Passing the CMA, RMA & CCMA Exams with Student CD, 3e Moini 190,208,233 Medical Assisting: Administrative and Clinical Competencies with Student CD-ROMs, 3e Booth 205 Medical Assisting: Administrative and Clinical Procedures (without A&P Chapters), 3e Booth 206 Medical Billing & Coding Demystified Burgos 213 183 139 M 260 218,221,223,225 217 220,222,225,226 TITLE INDEX Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 2007-2008, 4e Newby 214 Medical Language for Modern Health with Student CD-ROM Allan Medical Office Handbook Harrison Medical Terminology Audio CD-ROM, 3e Thierer 218 Medical Terminology Word Builder and Communications Workbook with Flashcards Thierer 220,222,225,226 Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach with Student CD/Flashcards/Online Learning Center Bostwick 220,222,224,226 Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care with Student CD-ROMs and Audio CDs, 3e Thierer 218,223 Medical-Surgical Nursing Demystified Digiulio 216 Microbiology Experiments to accompany Microbiology, 6e Kleyn 82 Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e Harley 83 Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 6e Nester 76 Microbiology: A Systems Approach, 2e Cowan 75 Modern Analytical Chemistry Harvey 157 Molecular Biology, 4e Weaver 86 Natural Disasters, 7e Abbott 178 New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork with Student CD-ROM Saeger 199 Nurse Management Demystified McEachen 229 Nurse’s Toolbox for Promoting Wellness Miller 217 Nursing Experience: Trends, Challenges and Transitions, 5e (The) Joel 230 Nursing Spectrum Drug Handbook 2009, 4e Schull 236 Nutrition Almanac, 6e Dunne 97 Nutrition for Health, Fitness and Sport, 9e Williams Nutrition for Healthy Living Schiff Nutrition Throughout the Life Cycle, 4e Worthington-Roberts 100 Nutritional Assessment, 4e Lee 101 NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 CD-ROM ESHA Research 98 NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 Online ESHA Research 99 NutritionCalc Plus 3.2 CD-ROM ESHA Research 97 219,221,224 201,215 N 100 94 O Optics, 4e Ghatak 133 Organic Chemistry Demystified Bloch 153 Organic Chemistry, 2e Smith 154 Organic Chemistry, 7e Carey 153 Organic Chemistry: A Brief Course, 3e Atkins 152 261 TITLE INDEX P Paramedic (The) Chapleau 246 Paramedic Companion: A Case-Based Worktext (The) Hsieh 247 Paramedic Review DVD and CD-ROM Delve Productions 248 Pathophysiology: Concepts and Applications for Health Care Professionals, 3e Nowak Pathways to Astronomy, with Starry Nights Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 2e Schneider 134 Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, 2e NSC 234 PH.I.L.S Version 3.0 CD-ROM Stephens Pharmacy Technician: Practice and Procedures with Student CD Orum-Alexander Phlebotomy for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e Booth Physical Chemistry, 6e Levine 156 Physical Geography Laboratory Manual Lemke 171 Physical Geology, 12e Plummer 182 Physical Geology: Earth Revealed, 8e Carlson 181 Physical Science, 8e Tillery 120 Physical Universe, 13e (The) Krauskopf 119 Physics for Poets, 5e March 124 Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 6e Griffith 123 Physics, 2e Giambattista 125 Physics, 7e Tippens 126,129 Plants and Society, 5e Levetin 105 Pocket ECGs: A Quick Information Guide Shade 193 Poisoning & Drug Overdose, 5e Olson 195 Practical Reflexology: Interpretation and Techniques Watson Practicing ECGs with CD Shade 194 Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e Willey 74 Prescott’s Principles of Microbiology Willey 73 Principles of Botany Uno 106 Principles of Environmental Science, 5e Cunningham 162 Principles of General Chemistry, 2e Silberberg 146 Principles of Genetics, 7e Tamarin 89 Principles of Quantitative Chemical Analysis De Levie 158 Pulmonary Pathophysiology, 2e Ali 239 Pulmonary Physiology, 7e Levitzky 239 Schiff 133 51 39,50 237 207,237 198,234 Q Quantum Mechanics, 3e 262 TITLE INDEX R Regional Human Anatomy: A Laboratory Workbook for use with Models and Prosections, 3e Grine 44 Safe Firefighting Levels I & II Kidd 250 Schaum’s 3000 Solved Problems in Biology Bernstein 66 Schaum’s A-Z Biology Indge 70 Schaum’s A-Z Chemistry Hunt 149 Schaum’s A-Z Physics Chapple 127 Schaum’s Easy Outline Beginning Chemistry Goldberg 142 Schaum’s Easy Outline of Biology Fried Schaum’s Easy Outline of College Physics Bueche Schaum’s Easy Outline of Human Anatomy and Physiology Van De Graaff Schaum’s Easy Outline: Organic Chemistry Meislich 152 Schaum’s Easy Outlines: College Chemistry Rosenberg 150 Schaum’s Outline of Analytical Chemistry Gordus 158 Schaum’s Outline of Applied Physics, 4e Revised Beiser 126 Schaum’s Outline of Astronomy Palen 136 Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Chemistry, 3e Goldberg 140 Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics I Halpern 128 Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics II Halpern 127 Schaum’s Outline of Biochemistry, 2e Kuchel 152 Schaum’s Outline of Biology, 2e Fried Schaum’s Outline of College Chemistry, 9e Rosenberg Schaum’s Outline of College Physics, 10e Bueche 127 Schaum’s Outline of General, Organic and Biological Chemistry Odian 144 Schaum’s Outline of Genetics, 4e Elrod 89 Schaum’s Outline of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 2e Van De Graaff 40 Schaum’s Outline of Immunology Pinchuk 87 Schaum’s Outline of Lagrangian Dynamics Wells Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Nurses Stephens Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Physics Students Steiner 131 Schaum’s Outline of Microbiology, 2e Alcamo 85 Schaum’s Outline of Modern Physics, 2e Gautreau 130 Schaum’s Outline of Molecular Biology Stansfield 86 Schaum’s Outline of Optics Hecht 134 Schaum’s Outline of Organic Chemistry, 3e Hademenos 153 Schaum’s Outline of Physical Chemistry, 2e Metz 157 Schaum’s Outline of Physical Science, 2e Beiser 121 Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Engineering and Science Browne 129 Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Pre-Med, Biology and Allied Health Students Hademenos 130 S 263 70 127 40 70 142,149 122 201,229 TITLE INDEX Schaum’s Outline of Quantum Mechanics Zaarur 132 Seeley’s Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 7e VanPutte 21 Seeley’s Principles of Anatomy & Physiology Tate 27 Standard First Aid, CPR, & AED with Quick Guide, Updated 2e NSC 192 Student Access Card PH.I.L.S (Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations) Online Stephens 38 Leininger 230 Understanding Chemistry, Student Study Guide Lovett 149 University Chemistry Laird 147 T Transcultural Nursing, 3e U V Vander’s Human Physiology: The Mechanisms of Body Function with ARIS, 11e Widmaier Vertebrate Biology Linzey Vertebrates Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, 5e Kardong Vitamins and Minerals Demystified Blake 47 110 109,111 235 W Wardlaw’s Perspectives in Nutrition, 8e Byrd-Bredbenner Workbook to accompany Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Version 2 CD Broyles 93 25,35,42,48 Y You Code It! A Case Studies Workbook Safian 213 Miller 113 Z Zoology, 7e 264 AUTHOR INDEX A Abbott Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and NCETM with Student CD-ROM 198 Abbott Natural Disasters, 7e 178 Aehlert Emergency Medical Technician with Pocket Guide 244 Alcamo Schaum’s Outline of Microbiology, 2e 85 Alexander Laboratory Exercises in Organismal and Molecular Microbiology 84 Ali Pulmonary Pathophysiology, 2e Allan Medical Language for Modern Health with Student CD-ROM American Chemical Soc. Chemistry in Context, 6e 139 American Chemical Soc. Laboratory Manual to accompany Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemical to Society, 6e 139 Arny Astronomy: Journey to the Cosmic Frontier, with Starry Night Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 5e 136 Arny Explorations: An Introduction to Astronomy, with Starry Night Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 5e 135 Atkins Organic Chemistry: A Brief Course, 3e 152 Bauer Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry, 2e (A) 140 Beiser Concepts of Modern Physics, 6e 130 Beiser Schaum’s Outline of Applied Physics, 4e Revised 126 Beiser Schaum’s Outline of Physical Science, 2e 121 Berkeley Physics Electricity and Magnetism: Berkeley Physics Course, Volume II, 2e 131 Bernstein Schaum’s 3000 Solved Problems in Biology 66 Bettinger GIS Applications in Forestry and Natural Resources 15 Bevington Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical Sciences, 3e 132 Blake Vitamins and Minerals Demystified 235 Bloch Organic Chemistry Demystified 153 Booth Administrative Procedures for Medical Assisting for Student CD, 3e 202 Booth Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathophysiology for Allied Health, 2e Booth Clinical Procedures for Medical Assisting with Student CD, 3e Booth Electrocardiography for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e Booth Intravenous Therapy for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM 209 Booth Math & Dosage Calculations for Health Careers, 3e 201 Booth Medical Assisting: Administrative and Clinical Competencies with Student CD-ROMs, 3e 205 Booth Medical Assisting: Administrative and Clinical Procedures (without A&P Chapters), 3e 206 Booth Phlebotomy for Health Care Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e Bostwick Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach with Student CD/Flashcards/Online Learning Center 239 219,221,224 B 196,203,211,219 204 193,209 207,237 220,222,224, 226 Bradshaw Contemporary World Regional Geography, 3e 173 Bradshaw Essentials of World Regional Geography 173 Breskin McGraw-Hill Medical Dictionary for Allied Health Brooker Biology 66 Brooker Chemistry, Cell Biology and Genetics, Volume 1 64 265 220,222,225,226 AUTHOR INDEX Brooker Genetics: Analysis and Principles, 3e 87 Brophy Basic Electronics for Scientists, 5e Brown Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Complete Version, 11e 78 Brown Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 11e 80 Browne Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Engineering and Science Broyles Workbook to accompany Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Version 2 CD Bueche Schaum’s Easy Outline of College Physics 127 Bueche Schaum’s Outline of College Physics, 10e 127 Burdge Chemistry 146 Burgos Medical Billing & Coding Demystified 213 Byrd-Bredbenner Wardlaw’s Perspectives in Nutrition, 8e 93 Campbell Animal Sciences: The Biology, Care, and Production of Domestic Animals, 4e 17 Campbell Homeland Security and Emergency Medical Response Campbell Map Use and Analysis, 4e 172 Carey Organic Chemistry, 7e 153 Carlson Physical Geology: Earth Revealed, 8e 181 Castro Marine Biology, 7e 107 Chamberlin Exploring the World Ocean 180 Chang Chemistry, 10e 145 Chang General Chemistry: The Essential Concepts, 5e 148 Chang Introduction to Geographic Information Systems with Data Files CD-ROM, 5e 169 Chapleau Paramedic (The) 246 Chapple Schaum’s A-Z Physics 127 Cheever IV Therapy Demystified 192 Chess Laboratory Applications in Microbiology: A Case Study Approach Chulay AACN Essentials of Progressive Care Nursing 193 Cooper Cooperative Chemistry Lab Manual, 4e 150 Cowan Microbiology: A Systems Approach, 2e 75 Cunningham Environmental Science: A Global Concern, 10e 162 Cunningham Principles of Environmental Science, 5e 162 De Levie Principles of Quantitative Chemical Analysis 158 Delve Productions BLS Review+ DVD Delve Productions Paramedic Review DVD and CD-ROM 248 Denniston Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry 143 Denniston General, Organic & Biochemistry, 6e 143 Dent Cartography: Thematic Map Design, 6e 172 131 129 25,35,42,48 C 243,248 81 D 189,245 266 AUTHOR INDEX Digiulio Medical-Surgical Nursing Demystified 216 DiPrima McGraw-Hill EMT-Basic 245 DiPrima McGraw-Hill’s EMT-Paramedic 249 Dolphin Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e Drickamer Animal Behavior, 5e Dunne Nutrition Almanac, 6e 67 107 97 E Eckel Human Anatomy Lab Manual to accompany Human Anatomy by McKinley 43 Eder Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e 42 Egler Math for the Pharmacy Technician 236 Elrod Schaum’s Outline of Genetics, 4e 89 Enger Concepts in Biology, 13e 57 Enger Environmental Science, 12e Enger Laboratory Manual to accompany Concepts in Biology, 13e 62 ESHA Research NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 CD-ROM 98 ESHA Research NutritionCalc Plus 3.0 Online 99 ESHA Research NutritionCalc Plus 3.2 CD-ROM 97 161 F Fellmann Human Geography, 10e 170 Ferry Electrocardiography in Ten Days, 2e 194 Fishman Fishman’s Pulmonary Diseases and Disorders, 4e 238 Fox Fundamentals of Human Physiology 46 Fox Human Physiology, 11e 46 Fox Laboratory Guide to accompany Human Physiology, 13e 47 Fried Schaum’s Easy Outline of Biology 70 Fried Schaum’s Outline of Biology, 2e 70 G Garland Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 8e 156 Gautreau Schaum’s Outline of Modern Physics, 2e 130 Gauwitz Administering Medications, 6e Getis Introduction to Geography, 12e 170 Ghatak Optics, 4e 133 Giambattista College Physics, 3e 124 Giambattista Physics, 2e 125 Gilbert Basic Concepts in Biochemistry: A Student’s Survival Guide, 2e 152 Goldberg 3,000 Solved Problems in Chemistry 140 210,235 267 AUTHOR INDEX Goldberg Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e 141 Goldberg How to solve Word Problems in Chemistry 140 Goldberg Schaum’s Easy Outline Beginning Chemistry 142 Goldberg Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Chemistry, 3e 140 Gomella Clinician’s Pocket Drug Reference 248 Gordus Schaum’s Outline of Analytical Chemistry 158 Griffith Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 6e 123 Grine Regional Human Anatomy: A Laboratory Workbook for use with Models and Prosections, 3e 44 Gunstream Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: Essentials Version, 5e 23 Gunstream Anatomy & Physiology with Integrated Study Guide, 4e 21 H Hademenos McGraw-Hill’s The New MCAT with CD-ROM 155 Hademenos Schaum’s Outline of Organic Chemistry, 3e 153 Hademenos Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Pre-Med, Biology and Allied Health Students 130 Halpern 3,000 Solved Problems in Physics 128 Halpern Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics I 128 Halpern Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics II 127 Hamilton Electronic Health Records 194 Harley Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e Harmon Coding Review for National Certification: Passing the CPC and CCS-P Exams Harrison Medical Office Handbook Hartwell Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e Harvey Modern Analytical Chemistry 157 Hecht Schaum’s Outline of Optics 134 Henrickson Laboratory for General, Organic & Biochemistry, 6e (A) 144 Hickman Animal Diversity, 5e 112 Hickman Integrated Principles of Zoology, 14e 113 Hickman Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 5e 114 Hickman Laboratory Studies in Integrated Principles of Zoology, 14e 115 Hoefnagels Biology: Concepts and Investigations Hsieh Paramedic Companion: A Case-Based Worktext (The) 247 Hunt Schaum’s A-Z Chemistry 149 Hurst Hurst Reviews: NCLEX-PN Review 227 Hurst Hurst Reviews: NCLEX-RN Review 227 Hyde Introduction to Genetics 83 210 201,215 89 58 88 268 AUTHOR INDEX I Indge Schaum’s A-Z Biology 70 J Jenkins Fundamentals of Optics, 4e 133 Joel Nursing Experience: Trends, Challenges and Transitions, 5e (The) 230 Johnson Essentials of the Living World, 2e Johnson Fluids and Electrolytes Demystified Johnson Living World, 6e (The) Jones Contemporary College Physics: 2001 Update, 3e 127 Jones Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 7e 183 Judson Law & Ethics for Medical Careers, 5e 215 Junqueira Basic Histology: Text & Atlas, 11e Jurch Clinical Massage Therapy: Assessment and Treatment of Orthopedic Conditions 60 217 55 50 196,200 K Kalthoff Analysis of Biological Development, 2e 86 Kardong Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy: A Laboratory Dissection Guide, 5e 110 Kardong Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e 165 Kardong Vertebrates Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, 5e Kaufmann Environmental Science 163 Kay Farm Management, 6e 15,16 Kent Comparative Anatomy of the Vertebrates, 9e 112 Kidd Safe Firefighting Levels I & II 250 Kleyn Microbiology Experiments to accompany Microbiology, 6e Krauskopf Physical Universe, 13e (The) 119 Kuchel Schaum’s Outline of Biochemistry, 2e 152 Laird University Chemistry 147 Lee Nutritional Assessment, 4e 101 Leininger Transcultural Nursing, 3e 230 Lemke Physical Geography Laboratory Manual 171 Levetin Plants and Society, 5e 105 Levin Laboratory Studies in Earth History, 9e 179 Levine Physical Chemistry, 6e 156 Levitzky Pulmonary Physiology, 7e 239 Lewis Human Genetics, 8e 90 Lewis Life, 6e 64 109,111 82 L 269 AUTHOR INDEX Linzey Vertebrate Biology 110 Longenbaker Mader’s Understanding Human Anatomy & Physiology, 6e Lovett Understanding Chemistry, Student Study Guide Lutterschmidt Laboratory Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical and Experimental Approach with Ph.I.L.S 3.0, 2e Lytle General Zoology Laboratory Manual, 15e 23 149 48 115 M Mader Biology, 10e 63 Mader Concepts of Biology 59 Mader Essentials of Biology, 2e 56 Mader Human Biology, 11e 69 Mader Inquiry into Life, 12e 60 Mader Lab Manual Human Biology, 11e 69 Mader Lab Manual to accompany Biology, 10e 65 Mader Lab Manual to accompany Concepts of Biology 62 Mader Lab Manual to accompany Essentials of Biology, 2e 61 Mader Laboratory Manual to accompany Human Biology, 10e 70 Mader Laboratory Manual to accompany Inquiry into Life, 12e 63 Magovern Hospital Billing, 2e 212 March Physics for Poets, 5e 124 Martin Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Cat Version with PhILS 3.0 CD 28 Martin Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Main Version with PhILS 3.0 CD 31 Martin Laboratory Manual for Human Anatomy & Physiology: Pig Version with PhILS 3.0 CD 30 Martin Laboratory Manual Hole’s Human A&P (Cat), 12e 32 Martin Laboratory Manual Hole’s Human A&P: Fetal Pig, 12e 33 Martin Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 10e 25 McConnell Good Earth: Introduction to Earth Sciences (The) 177 McEachen Nurse Management Demystified 229 McGraw-Hill ACTIVSim: Medical Assisting Clinical Simulator McGraw-Hill Food Nutrition Guide/Food Composition Table 99 McGraw-Hill McGraw-Hill Learnsmart: Medical Terminology 218,221,223,225 McKee Biochemistry: An Introduction, 3e 151 McKenna ACLS Basics and More with Student CD & DVD 250 McKinley Human Anatomy, 2e Medical College Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD-ROM (Allied Health Version) Medical College Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Version 2.0 Online 37,45,49 Medical College Anatomy and Physiology Revealed Version 2.0 CD 38,45,49 Meislich 3,000 Solved Problems in Organic Chemistry 154 Meislich Schaum’s Easy Outline: Organic Chemistry 152 Metz Schaum’s Outline of Physical Chemistry, 2e 157 Miller Nurse’s Toolbox for Promoting Wellness 217 208,232 40 270 37,197,229,232 AUTHOR INDEX Miller Zoology, 7e 113 Moini Medical Assisting Review: Passing the CMA, RMA & CCMA Exams with Student CD, 3e Molles Ecology: Concepts and Applications, 5e 164 Monahan McGraw-Hill Review for the NCLEX-RN Review 228 Montgomery Environmental Geology, 8e 178 Morello Laboratory Manual and Workbook in Microbiology: Applications to Patient Care, 9e 84 Nester Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 6e 76 Newby From Patient to Payment: Insurance Procedures for the Medical Office with Student Data CD, 5e 214 Newby Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 2007-2008, 4e 214 Newby HIPAA for Allied Health Careers Nowak Pathophysiology: Concepts and Applications for Health Care Professionals, 3e NSC Bloodborne and Airborne Pathogens, 2e 189 NSC Child and Infant CPR Skills Card 233 NSC CPR & AED Skills Card NSC Certification Edition, 2e 192 NSC CPR & AED Skills Refresher Card 192 NSC CPR & AED, 3e 191 NSC First Aid Skills Card 195 NSC First Aid with Pocket Guide, Updated Edition, 3e 195 NSC First Responder with Skills DVD, BLS DVD & First Responder Pocket Guide 243 NSC Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, 2e 234 NSC Standard First Aid, CPR, & AED with Quick Guide, Updated 2e 192 Odian Schaum’s Outline of General, Organic and Biological Chemistry 144 Olson Poisoning & Drug Overdose, 5e 195 Orum-Alexander Pharmacy Technician: Practice and Procedures with Student CD 237 Palen Schaum’s Outline of Astronomy 136 Palin Catastrophe Preparation & Prevention for Fire Service Professionals with Student DVD 251 Palin Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law Enforcement Professionals with Student CD 243 Patton Laboratory Manual Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 7e Pechenik Biology of the Invertebrates, 6e Pinchuk Schaum’s Outline of Immunology Plummer Physical Geology, 12e Presson Biology: Dimensions of Life Price Mastering ArcGIS with CD Videoclips, 4e 190,208,233 N 209,214,228 51 O P 24 109 87 182 61 169 271 AUTHOR INDEX Prothero Bringing Fossils to Life: An Introduction to Paleobiology, 2e 181 Prothero Evolution of the Earth, 7e 179 Pryor Clinician’s Guide to Surgical Guide 239 Rajendran Engineering Physics 128 Raven Biology, 8e Reif Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics 132 Reynolds Exploring Geology 182 Roberts Foundations of Parasitology, 8e 108 Rosenberg Schaum’s Easy Outlines: College Chemistry 150 Rosenberg Schaum’s Outline of College Chemistry, 9e R 67 142,149 S Saba Essentials of Nursing Informatics, 4e 231 Saeger Building a Healthy Business: For Massage and Alternative Healthcare Practices 199 Saeger New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork with Student CD-ROM 199 Safian Complete Diagnosis Coding Book (The) 212 Safian You Code It! A Case Studies Workbook 213 Saladin Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 5e 26 Saladin Human Anatomy, 2e 41 Sanderson Case Studies for the Medical Office: Capstone Billing Simulation, 5e Sanderson Computers in the Medical Office, 6e Schiff Nutrition for Healthy Living Schiff Quantum Mechanics, 3e 133 Schneider Pathways to Astronomy, with Starry Nights Pro DVD, Version 5.0, 2e 134 Schull Nursing Spectrum Drug Handbook 2009, 4e 236 Seeley Anatomy and Physiology, 8e Shade Pocket ECGs: A Quick Information Guide 193 Shade Practicing ECGs with CD 194 Shier Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 10e 22 Shier Hole’s Human Anatomy and Physiology, 12e 27 Silberberg Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 5e 148 Silberberg Principles of General Chemistry, 2e 146 Silver Global Warming and Climate Change Demystified 163 Simpson Economic Botany, 3e 106 Smith General, Organic & Biological Chemistry 142 Smith Organic Chemistry, 2e 154 Spadafora McGraw-Hill’s Firefighting Exams 251 Spain Chemskill Builder Online: Version 2, 2e 151 190,211 191 94 28 272 AUTHOR INDEX Spencer Earth Science: Understanding Environmental Systems 177 Stansfield Schaum’s Outline of Molecular Biology Steiner Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Physics Students Stephens PH.I.L.S Version 3.0 CD-ROM Stephens Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Nurses Stephens Student Access Card PH.I.L.S (Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations) Online Stern Introductory Plant Biology, 11e 105 Stern Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory Plant Biology, 11e 106 Stine Aids Update 2008, 17e 85 Stine Aids Update 2009, 18e 85 Stone Atlas of Skeletal Muscles, 6e 43 Strete Atlas to Human Anatomy (An) 39 Sverdrup Fundamentals of Oceanography, 5e 181 Sverdrup Introduction to the Worlds Ocean, 10e 180 86 131 39,50 201,229 38 T Talaro Foundations in Microbiology, 7e 76 Talaro Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 7e 77 Tamarin Principles of Genetics, 7e 89 Tate Seeley’s Principles of Anatomy & Physiology 27 Teo Changing Landscapes of Singapore 171 Thierer Medical Terminology Audio CD-ROM, 3e 218 Thierer Medical Terminology Word Builder and Communications Workbook with Flashcards Thierer Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care with Student CD-ROMs and Audio CDs, 3e Tillery Integrated Science, 4e 122 Tillery Lab Manual to accompany Integrated Science, 4e 123 Tillery Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 8e 121 Tillery Physical Science, 8e 120 Tippens Physics, 7e 220,222,225,226 218,223 126,129 U Uno Principles of Botany 106 273 AUTHOR INDEX V Van De Graaff Human Anatomy, 6e 41 Van De Graaff Schaum’s Easy Outline of Human Anatomy and Physiology 40 Van De Graaff Schaum’s Outline of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 2e 40 VanPutte Seeley’s Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 7e 21 Vodopich Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e 68 Vodopich Ecology Lab Manual 165 W Walker Biotechnology Demystified 90 Wardlaw Contemporary Nutrition, 7e 95 Wardlaw Contemporary Nutrition: A Functional Approach 96 Watson Practical Reflexology: Interpretation and Techniques Weaver Molecular Biology, 4e Wells Schaum’s Outline of Lagrangian Dynamics 122 Westfal Lange Q&A EMT-Paramedic, 2e 249 Widmaier Vander’s Human Physiology: The Mechanisms of Body Function with ARIS, 11e 47 Willey Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e 74 Willey Prescott’s Principles of Microbiology 73 Williams Nutrition for Health, Fitness and Sport, 9e 100 Wilson McGraw-Hill Manual of Laboratory and Diagnostic Tests 217 Wise Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e 44 Wise Lab Manual to accompany Seeley’s Principles of Anatomy & Physiology 35 Wise Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 5e 34 Wise Laboratory Manual to accompany Seeley’s Anatomy and Physiology, 8e 36 Worthington-Roberts Nutrition Throughout the Life Cycle, 4e 100 Zaarur Schaum’s Outline of Quantum Mechanics 132 Zumberge Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 14e 183 198,234 86 Z 274 EXAMINATION COPY REQUEST FORM McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 60 Tuas Basin Link Singapore 638775 Tel (65) 6863 1580 Fax (65) 6862 3354 www.mheducation.asia u Professors/lecturers who are interested to review titles listed in this catalog for text adoption consideration, please complete this request form and fax to your local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover for fax number) or to McGraw-Hill Singapore. u Requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hill reserve the right to refuse any requests which do not relate to teaching. u Please make copies of this form if necessary. REQUESTED BY Name Room # Department University Address Tel Fax Email address COMP REQUEST Please indicate ISBN No, Author & Title 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Course Name Enrolment Subject Commencement Date Decision Date Current Text Used Individual Decision Group Decision McGRAW-HILL MAILING LIST McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 60 Tuas Basin Link Singapore 638775 Tel (65) 6863 1580 Fax (65) 6862 3354 www.mheducation.asia Please include me in your mailing list for information on McGraw-Hill books. Please email information on McGraw-Hill books to my email address at I am already on your mailing list but my address has changed. Please update my record to the following new address. Name (Mr / Ms / Dr / Prof) (Underline family name) Position Department University Address Postal Code Tel Fax Email address SUBJECT OF INTEREST o Industrial & Plant Engineering o History o Accounting o Mechanical Engineering o Law o Advertising o Medical Science o Library Science o Business Management o Dentistry o Mass Communication o Finance & Investment o Nursing o Music o Marketing o Agriculture o Philosophy & Religion o Economics o Biology o Physical Education o Human Resource Management o Chemistry o Political Science o Insurance & Real Estate o Forestry o Psychology o Training o Geography & Geology o Sociology o Computing o Physics & Astronomy o Aeronautical & Aerospace Engineering o Zoology o Architecture & Urban Planning o Mathematics & Statistics Please return by fax at (65) 6862 3354 to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Singapore office. o Chemical Engineering o Art & Humanities o Civil Engineering o Education o Construction o English o Electronics & Communications o English as a 2nd Language/ELT o Electrical Engineering o Foreign Language o General Engineering o Health & Nutrition McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) respects your privacy. If you do not wish to receive further marketing information from McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), please send an email to [email protected] or write to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), 60 Tuas Basin Link, Singapore 638775. View The McGraw-Hill Companies Customer Privacy Policy at http://www.mcgraw-hill.com/ privacy.html. For questions or to learn more about how McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) applies this policy, please contact us at the above email or postal address. M c G R AW - H I L L E D U C A T I O N ( A S I A ) SINGAPORE (also servicing Mauritius) McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 60 Tuas Basin Link, Singapore 638775 Tel: (65) 6863 1580 • Customer Service Hotline: (65) 6868 8188 Fax (65) 6862 3354 eMail: [email protected] • website: www.mheducation.asia CHINA (Representative Office) McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc Suite 906, 9/F, SP Tower A Tsinghua Science Park No. 1, Zhongguancun East Road Haidian District Beijing 100084, P R China Tel: (86-10) 6279 0299 Fax: (86-10) 6279 0292 eMail: [email protected] HONG KONG McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc Suites 2906-10, Shell Tower Times Square 1, Matheson Street, Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel: (85-2) 2730 6640 Fax: (85-2) 2730 2085 eMail: [email protected] JAPAN McGraw-Hill Education Japan McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc 1-12-3 Kandasuda-cho Chiyoda-ku Tokyo 101-0041 Japan Tel: (81-3) 5298 7221 Fax: (81-3) 5298 7224 eMail: [email protected] 7/F, No: 53 Bo-Ai Road Taipei 100 Taiwan Tel: (886-2) 2311 3000 Fax: (886-2) 2388 8822 eMail: [email protected] KOREA (also servicing Bangladesh, Pakistan, Nepal & Sri Lanka) McGraw-Hill Education (India) Limited B-4, Sector 63 Distt Gautam Budh Nagar Noida, UP-201301, India Tel: (91-12) 438 3545 Fax: (91-12) 438 3401 - 403 eMail: [email protected] (also servicing Cambodia & Laos) 3F, Ji-Woo Bldg 376-12 Seokyo-Dong Mapo-Ku Seoul 121-210, Korea Tel: (82-2) 325 2351 Fax: (82-2) 325 2371 eMail: [email protected] McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc (Appointed Agent) P T Media Global Edukasi Grand Boutique Center, Blok D-65 Jalan Mangga Dua Raya Jakarta 14430 Indonesia Tel: (62-21) 601 1963/601 1973 Fax: (62-21) 625 7245 eMail: [email protected] 40/27 Soi Inthamara 8 Suthisarn Road, Phayathai Bangkok 10400, Thailand Tel: (66-2) 615 6555 Fax: (66-2) 615 6515 eMail: [email protected] MALAYSIA/BRUNEI No. 40, Jalan Pengacara U1/48 Temasya Industrial Park 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: (60-3) 7627 6888 Fax: (60-3) 7627 6838 eMail: [email protected] PHILIPPINES (also servicing Guam) (Representative Office) INDONESIA THAILAND McGraw-Hill Korea Inc McGraw-Hill Malaysia Sdn Bhd INDIA TAIWAN McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc Unit 1503, Jollibee Plaza Condominium Emerald Avenue Corner Ruby Street Ortigas Center, Pasig City 1600 Philippines Tel: (63-2) 638 5177 / 638 5178 Fax: (63-2) 638 5181 eMail: [email protected] VIETNAM (Representative Office) McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc Unit 701-6, Regus Business Center 7th Floor, Me Linh Point Tower 2 Ngo Duc Ke Street District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: (84-8) 3520 2781 Fax: (84-8) 3823 7840 eMail: [email protected] We publish digital solutions McGraw-Hill Higher Education offers a wide variety of online products categorized by content, course management systems, and online assessment. Content products offer online McGraw-Hill coursework that complements the textbook. Course management systems offer different ways to actually deliver that McGraw-Hill digital content. And online assessment products focus on how well students are doing in class. No matter which product our customers choose, they count on unparalleled service that answers every question through the life of the adoption. CONTENT ONLINE ASSESSMENT Online Learning Center These new and improved sites offer instructors an instant online presence with a ready-to-go Website that ties directly to their book. Students can visit the site for key terms, quizzes, exercises, and more. Instructors can have this book-specific content delivered in PageOut of other course management systems like Blackboard or WebCT. EZ Test Easy-to-use desktop test generator used for creating paper tests. Create paper tests from book specific test banks or write your own algorithmic questions using simple question templates. You can also create multiple versions of the same test. Homework Manager Homework Manager is a powerful new online system for homework, testing and quizzing. It may be used in practice, homework or exam mode and other assignment modes. The exercises and problems are textbook-specific and it offers algorithmic generated questions. The assignments are automatically graded for instructors with instant grading and feedback for students. www.mhhe.com/hm COU RSE M A N AG E M E N T S YS T E M S www.mhhe.com/eztest PageOut PageOut offers instructors an easy way to create a course Website. Students can follow their syllabus for coursework, readings, quizzes, or daily assignments. With simple development and powerful features, it’s little wonder why PageOut continues to be the tool instructors count on most for creating course Websites. asia.pageout.net Third Party Delivery Systems McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 60 Tuas Basin Link Singapore 638775 Tel (65) 6863 1580 Fax (65) 6862 3354 email: [email protected] website: www.mheducation.asia Course Management Systems like Blackboard and WebCT offer instructors another way to integrate digital McGraw-Hill content into their class. Should they choose one of these Course Management Systems, they can be confident in knowing that delivering McGraw-Hill digital content will be simple to use. C08-000621-X
